M20M Service Manual

MOONEY
M20M
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
MOONEY AIRPLANE COMPANY, INC.

ISSUED: FEBRUARY 2006 P/N: MAN152
Copyright 2006 - All Rights Reserved

MOONEY AIRPLANE COMPANY, INC. Louis Schreiner Field, Kerrville, Texas 78028 tel: 830-896-6000 www.mooney.com
IN ORDER TO KEEP THIS MANUAL
UPDATED WITH THE LATEST REVISIONS,
FILL IN AND MAIL ATTACHED CARD.
FILL IN FOR YOUR

RECORDS
MANUAL #
DATE
PURCHASED Please enter the following name to the mailing list for
future revisions of this manual.
REVISION CARD MAILED TO

MOONEY
DATE COMPANY DATE
NAME
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP CODE

PLACE
STAMP
HERE
ATTN: Service Parts

Louis Schreiner Field
Kerrville, Texas 78028
M20R SERVICE & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING
Manufactured with 1,1,1 Trichlorethane substances which are determined
to harm public health and environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere.
This warning applies to placards manufactured at Mooney Airplane Company, Inc. facility
and installed on the Mooney Aircraft Model(s) addressed in this publication.
WARNING
Manufactured with 1,1,1 Trichlorethane substances which are determined
to harm public health and environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere.
This warning applies to placards manufactured at Mooney Airplane Company, Inc. facility
and installed on the Mooney Aircraft Model(s) addressed in this publication.
Page 1
Rev Date Date 2005
M20M SERVICE & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This manual (MAN152) is a revision and re-- issue of M20M Service & Maintenance Manual (MAN151),
revised August, 2000.
LOG OF REVISIONS
Always destroy superceded pages when you insert revised pages.
DATE OF REVISION SECTIONS AFFECTED DATE OF REVISION SECTIONS AFFECTED
NOTE:
A list of Effective Pages will appear at the beginning of each chapter.
LOG OF REVISIONS
Page 1
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
LOG OF REVISIONS
Page 2
Date 2006 Rev Date
INTRODUCTION CHAPTER (System)

This manual provides servicing and maintenance infor- The various groups contain major systems information
mation for the Mooney Model M20M, Serial Numbers such as flight controls, landing gear, etc. The systems
27--0001 and ON. Maintenance actions that refer to a are arranged numerically per GAMA recommended
limited number of aircraft will be designated by serial number assignment, It is suggested, for example that
number of applicable airplanes. “Fuel” be identified with the Chapter number “28”. The
The Part Number’s of replacement or repair parts sequence of numbers, 28--00--00, refers to the General
should be identified using the Illustrated Parts Catalog information of the Fuel Systems.
applicable to Model and S/N of aircraft being worked SECTION (Sub--System)
on. The correct P/N can be ordered through any
Mooney Service Center. See Section 91 for exceptions The major systems of an aircraft are broken down into
on Electrical Components. sub--systems. These sub--systems are identified by the
second element of the sequence of numbers, ie.,
The format and contents of this manual are prepared in
28--20--00. The element --20-- indicates the distribution
accordance with GENERAL AVIATION MANUFAC-
portion of the fuel system.
TURER’S ASSOCIATION (GAMA) Specification No. 2.
The manual is supplemented with wiring schematics SUBJECT (Unit)
for the various model year airplanes, as necessary.
These are located in envelopes at the back of the The individual units within a sub--system may be identi-
manual texts pages. fied by a third element of the sequence of numbers, ie.,
28--20--01. This number is assigned by the manufactur-
NOTE er and may or may not be used depending upon the
Revisions or reissues of this manual are not au- complexity of the maintenance action recommended.
tomatically provided to manual holders. Holders
of these and other Mooney Technical Publica-
tions should complete the information on the APPLICATION OF NUMBERING SYSTEM
”YELLOW CARD” located at the front of the Title
Page and send to: Mooney Aircraft Company, Inc. is in the process of re-
Mooney Airplane Company, Inc. vising all applicable maintenance technical publica-
Louis Schreiner Field tions to GAMA format. When this effort is completed
Kerrville, TX., 78029--0072 any publication concerning maintenance of aircraft will
Attn: Service Parts Department. conform to this basic numbering system. Any person
Notification is sent to known manual holders when wishing information concerning the Fuel Distribution
another manual is prepared to replace the subscription System would refer to the pages identified as
and advises that no more revisions will be sent out. The 28--20--00, in any maintenance oriented publication.
new manual will require a new subscription service. If These pages will be numbered sequentially within each
additional Technical Publications are desired, contact system breakdown in the current Mooney series of air-
the above department at Mooney Airplane Company at craft. As Mooney aircraft models become more com-
(830) 896--6000. plex the page numbers may be sequentially numbered
within sub--systems.
Correspondence concerning maintenance or part
numbers on an airplane should contain the aircraft The table of contents in the front of each Chapter will
model number and serial number. The serial number provide a list of systems and/or subjects covered in the
appears on the identification placard located on the aft Chapter. For example:
end, left hand side of the tailcone below the horizontal 28--00 General
stabilizer.
28--10 Storage
ASSIGNMENT OF SUBJECT MATERIAL (Tanks, vents, repair, etc.)
The content of this publication is organized at four lev-
els: 28--20 Distribution
(Boost pumps, fuel lines, etc.)
Group
Chapter (System) 28--40 Indicating
Section (Sub--system) (Sender Units, quantity gauges, etc.)
Subject (Unit)
If there is a reason to distinguish between LEFT
GROUP HAND or RIGHT HAND fuel quantity sending units
These are primary divisions of the manual that enable then the number would be expanded to 28--40--01
broad separation of content, ie., Airframe systems VS (Left Hand) and 28--40--02 (Right Hand). This con-
Powerplant systems. These groups are identified by cept will apply to any expanded information through-
tabs. out the publications.
INTRODUCTION
Page 1
Rev Date Date 2006
SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS
The following list of Manufacturers and/or publications can provide servicing and maintenance information on com-
ponents of the Mooney, Model M20M. Not all avionics equipment Manufacturers or publications are listed due to the
many configurations that can be installed in the aircraft. These can be obtained from the repair stations for a particu-
lar avionics manufacturer
Any publications available from Mooney Airplane Company, Inc. are listed in the Parts Price List and are available
through any Mooney Service Center. Most manufacturer/vendor publications are not available through Mooney Air-
plane Company, Inc. These should be obtained from the applicable Manufacturer/Vendor.
As publications on various components become available, they will be added to the list below.
VENDOR ADDRESSES -- PUBLICATIONS
ENGINE PUBLICATIONS
Lycoming Engines
652 Oliver Street
Williamsport, PA 17701
Telephone: (570) 323--6181
Fax: (570) 327-7101
Overhaul Manual for TEXTRON--Lycoming Aircraft engines Direct Drive Models.
Illustrated Parts Catalog for TEXTRON--Lycoming TIO--540 Series Aircraft Engines.
Operators Manual for TEXTRON--Lycoming.TIO--540 Aircraft Engines
Service Bulletins -- Specify model of engine for which maintenance data is desired when ordering.
ACCESSORY PUBLICATIONS
PROPELLER FUEL PUMP (Engine Driven)
McCauley Propellers -- Lear Siegler
Romec Division
McCauley Accessories Division 241 South Abbe Road
P. O. Box 7704 Elyria, OH 44035
Wichita, KS 67277--7704 Telephone: (440) 323-3211
Telephone: (316) 831--4021 Fax: (440) 322-3378
Fax (316) 831--3858
GARMIN G1000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
Service Manual -- No. MPC400 (Replaces 761001) for Garmin International, Inc.
McCauley C400 series constant speed propellers. 1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062
MAGNETO Telephone (913) 397--8200
Slick Electro Operation, Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manuals
530 Blackhawk Park Avenue SPEED BRAKES
Rockford, IL 61101-5193
Telephone: (815) 965-4700 Precise Flight, Inc.
Fax: (815) 965-2457 63120 Powell Butte Rd.
Bend, OR 97701
TURBOCHARGER Telephone: (503) 382--8684
Rotomaster
c/o Garrett-Aftermarket Division OXYGEN SYSTEM
2511 South Edison Way Scott Aviation
Compton, CA 90220-6035 Factory Service Department
225 Erie Street
ALTERNATOR Lancaster, NY 14086
Prestolite Electric Telephone (716) 683--5100
2100 Commonwealth Blvd. Fax (716) 681--1089
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
S--TEC AUTOPILOT
STARTER
Meggitt Avionics S--TEC
B & C Specialty Products Inc. One S--TEC Way
123 East 4th Street Municipal Airport
P.O. Box B Mineral Wells, TX 76067--9236
Newton, KS 67114-0894 Telephone (940) 325--9406
Telephone: (316) 283--8662 Fax (940) 325--3904
INTRODUCTION
Page 2
Date 2006 Rev Date
DE--ICING/ANTI--ICING (TKS) AVIONICS

Aerospace Systems & Technologies, Inc. Honeywell/Allied Signal
2400 Airport Road, Suite 2 400 N. Rodgers Road
Lawrence, KS 66044 Olathe, KS 66062
Telephone (785) 865--5511 Mid--Continent Instrument Company
Fax (785) 865--5544 9400 East 34th Street North
Wichita, KS 67226
NAVIGATION LIGHTS & STROBES Telephone (316) 630--0101
J P. Instruments
Whelen Engineering Co.
P.O. Box 7033
Route 145, Winthrop Road
Huntington Beach, CA 92615
Chester, CT 06412--0684
Eventide, Inc.
Customer Service Dept.
HEADSETS One Alsan Way
Bose Corporation Little Ferry, NJ 07643
145 Pennsylvania Avenue Telephone (202) 641--1200
Framingham, MA 01701 Northern Airborne Tech., Ltd.
DRE Communications Company #14 – 1925 Kirschner Rd.
1723 Little Orchard Street Kelowna, Canada V1Y 4N7
San Jose, CA 95125 Telephone (250) 763--2232
Telephone (408) 993--8220 Fax (250) 762--3374
Telex Aviation LANDING GEAR COMPONENTS
Sales Department
9600 Aldrich Avenue S. Eaton Corporation
Minneapolis, MN 55420--9976 Aerospace Controls Div.
2338 Alaska Avenue
El Segundo, CA, 90245
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)
Parker--Hannifin Corp.
Ameri--King Corporation Airborne Division
18842 Brookhurst Street P.O. Box 4032
Fountain Valley, CA 92708 Elyria, OH 44036
INTRODUCTION
Page 3
Rev Date Date 2006
CHAPTER -- SECTION -- TITLE

INDEX GUIDE
CHAPTER SECTION TITLE
1 -- 3 RESERVED -- MAY BE USED LATER
4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
00 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
10 TIME LIMIT COMPONENTS
5 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS
00 GENERAL
10 TIME LIMITS
20 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
00 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
7 LIFTING AND SHORING
10 JACKING
20 SLING LIFTING
8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING
00 LEVELING
9 TOWING AND TAXIING
00 GROUND HANDLING
10 TOWING
20 WARM--UP AND TAXIING
30 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
10 PARKING AND MOORING
00 GENERAL
10 PARKING
20 MOORING
11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
00 GENERAL
10 MARKINGS
20/30 PLACARDS -- EXTERIOR/INTERIOR
12 SERVICING
00 SERVICING
10 REPLENISHING
20 SCHEDULED SERVICING
20 STANDARD PRACTICES – AIRFRAME
00 GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
Page 4
Date 2006 Rev Date
21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
00 CABIN VENTILATION SYSTEM
40 HEATING
50 COOLING
24 ELECTRICAL POWER
00 GENERAL
30 DC GENERATION
40 AUXILIARY POWER SYSTEM
50 ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION
25 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS
00 GENERAL
10 FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
50 CARGO COMPARTMENT
60 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
27 FLIGHT CONTROLS
00 GENERAL
10 AILERON SYSTEM
20 RUDDER SYSTEM
30 ELEVATOR SYSTEM
40 TRIM SYSTEM
50 WING FLAP SYSTEM
60 AILERON/RUDDER INTERCONNECT SYSTEM
90 MISCELLANEOUS
28 FUEL
00 GENERAL
10 STORAGE
20 DISTRIBUTION
30 DUMP
40 INDICATING
90 MISCELLANEOUS
30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
00 GENERAL
10 AIRFRAME ICING PROTECTION
30 PITOT
60 PROPELLER
70 SERVICING/CLEANING
INTRODUCTION
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
32 LANDING GEAR
00 GENERAL
10 MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS
20 NOSE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS
30 EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
40 WHEELS AND BRAKES
50 STEERING
60 POSITION AND WARNING
80 MISCELLANEOUS
33 LIGHTS
00 GENERAL
20 INTERIOR LIGHTS – MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
40 EXTERIOR LIGHTS – MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
34 NAVIGATION
00 GENERAL
10 PITOT & STATIC AIR PRESSURE SYSTEM
20 DIRECTIONAL GYRO COMPASS
90 MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS
35 OXYGEN
00 GENERAL
37 VACUUM
00 GENERAL
10 DISTRIBUTION
20 INDICATING
30 REPAIR
40 STAND--BY VACUUM SYSTEM
39 ELECTRICAL PANELS AND COMPONENTS
00 GENERAL
10 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
20 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONICS EQUIPMENT RACKS
51 STRUCTURES
00 GENERAL
10 STRUCTURAL REPAIR – GENERAL
52 DOORS
00 GENERAL
10 CABIN DOOR – MAINTENANCE PRACTICE
30 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICE
INTRODUCTION
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
53 FUSELAGE
00 GENERAL
10 MAIN FRAME
20 FIREWALL
30 PLATES/SKIN
40 ATTACH FITTINGS
55 STABILIZERS
00 GENERAL
10 HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
20 ELEVATOR
30 VERTICAL STABILIZER
40 RUDDER
56 WINDOWS
00 GENERAL
20 WINDSHIELD & CABIN WINDOWS
50 ACRYLIC DRILLING
57 WINGS
00 GENERAL
10 MAIN FRAME
20 AUXILIARY STRUCTURE
30 PLATES--SKINS
40 ATTACH FITTINGS
50 FLIGHT SURFACES
61 PROPELLERS
00 GENERAL
10 PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
20 CONTROLLING
40 DYNAMIC BALANCING PROCEDURES
71 POWERPLANT
00 GENERAL
10 COWLING
20 MOUNTS
30 FIRESEALS
60 AIR INTAKES
72 ENGINE – RECIPROCATING
00 GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
73 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM

00 GENERAL
20 FUEL PRESSURE
30 FUEL FLOW INDICATING
40 FUEL INJECTOR
50 TRANSDUCER TEST BOX
60 FUEL PUMP
74 IGNITION
00 GENERAL
10 ELECTRICAL POWER
20 ENGINE FIRING ORDER
30 SWITCHING
76 ENGINE CONTROLS
00 GENERAL
10 POWER CONTROLS
77 ENGINE INDICATING
00 GENERAL
10 POWER
20 TEMPERATURE
30 PRESSURE
78 EXHAUST
00 GENERAL
10 INSTALLATION
30 SERVICING
40 REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS
79 OIL
00 GENERAL
20 DISTRIBUTION
30 INDICATING
40 TRANSDUCER TEST
50 TROUBLESHOOTING
80 STARTING
00 GENERAL
10 CRANKING
INTRODUCTION
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
81 TURBINES
00 GENERAL
10 CONTROL
20 TROUBLESHOOTING
30 EXHAUST SYSTEM SERVICING
40 PERIODIC REPLACEMENT
91 SCHEMATIC
00 GENERAL
20 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HARDWARE CHARTS
30 SCHEMATICS
95 SPECIAL TOOLS
INTRODUCTION
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
INTRODUCTION
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 4
AIRWORTHINESS
LIMITATIONS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 4
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
4--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
4--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
4--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
4--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
4-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 4
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SECTION SUBJECT PAGE
4--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airworthiness Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Limit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
4--00--00 -- AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS -- MODEL M20M (Normal Category)
The Airworthiness Limitations Section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required under
14 CFR ww 43.16 and 91.403 unless an alternative program has been FAA approved.
NOTE
All time limits and requirements listed in this section are also covered in Chapter 5 -- Time Limits/Main-
tenance Checks.
4--10--00 -- TIME LIMIT COMPONENTS riod of operation for that component or in accordance
It is recommended that replacement of components with manufactures service data or airworthiness direc-
should be accomplished not later than the specified pe- tives.
4--10--01 -- REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE

ITEM REPLACE TIME LIMITS
Landing Gear
Actuator No--Back Spring 1000 Hours
Powerplant
Engine -- Lycoming 2000 Hours (refer to mfg’s. repair data)
Propeller -- McCauley 2000 Hours (refer to mfg’s. repair data)
Magnetos -- Slick 4 Years or engine O/H (refer to mfg’s. repair/inspec-
tion data)
V--Band Clamps After 2 disassemblies
Flight Controls
TKS Airframe/Propeller Pump Motor 2000 Hours
Miscellaneous Systems
Vacuum Pump, Primary On Condition or 500 Hrs. (or manufacturer’s recom-
mendation) or 6 years from date of mfg. and at En-
gine O/H
Stand--by Vacuum Pump/Electric * 100 Hours (Inspect Drive Coupling)
Check Valve Manifolds, Check Valves and Regulator 10 Years from date of manufacture (date of manufac-
Check Valve Manifolds Parker 2H3--39 and 2H3--47 ture encoded in serial number -- refer to Parker ser-
vice literature)
* Replacement vacuum pump no longer available. Aircraft should be retrofitted with Tailcone Mounted Vacuum Sys-
tem, Mooney drawing number 940155.
NOTE
Components should be inspected and serviced at regular intervals per the servicing, lubrication and
inspection chart of this manual located in Chapter 5 -- Time Limits/Maintenance Checks.
4--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
4--10--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 5
TIME LIMITS/
MAINTENANCE CHECKS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 5
TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
5--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--10--0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5--20--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
5-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 5
TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
5--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Flap Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Heating & Ventilating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--00--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Limit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhaul and Replacement Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Maintenance Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Points, Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aircraft File Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5--20--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5--20--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First 25 Hour Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5--20--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hour Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hour Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5--20--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Cover Identification,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubrication and Service Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
5--00--00 -- GENERAL 5--00--04 -- ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM

The Master Switch and power relay control the electri-
AIRCRAFT DESCRIPTION. The M20M series of air-
cal power system, comprised of two belt driven 70 AMP,
craft are four place, high--performance, normally aspi-
28 Volt, alternators and two 10 AMP HR, 24 Volt, batter-
rated, single--engine, low--wing monoplanes. The all--
ies. The alternator systems have overvoltage protec-
metal airframe has a tubular--steel cabin frame covered
tive relays and an overvoltage annunciator lights. Cir-
with nonstructural aluminum skins, a semi--monoco-
cuit breakers or circuit breaker switches protect the
que tailcone, and a full--cantilever, laminar--flow wing.
electrical wiring and equipment from overloads.
Control surfaces have structural spar construction with
stressed skins riveted to the spars and ribs. Dual con- Standard electrical equipment includes: 2--100 watt
trol wheels accompany the conventional flight controls. landing lights, 2--100 watt taxi lights, navigation lights,
The pilot’s rudder pedals have toe brakes linked to indi- interior lights, instrument panel/glareshield lights, gear
vidual hydraulic cylinders that supply pressure to the and stall warning system, an electrical fuel boost pump,
hydraulic disc brakes on each main gear wheel. Re- an electric starter, an electric gear retraction/extension
movable, co--pilot rudder pedals are standard equip- system, with manual extension override, an electric
ment. The tricycle landing gear, having a steerable trim system (optional) and an electrical flap system.
nose wheel controlled by rudder pedal action, is fully re- 5--00--05 -- INSTRUMENTS
tractable. The wide--span trailing--edge wing flaps are
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU
electrically operated. For stabilizer trim, the entire em-
27--0325, 27--0327
pennage pivots vertically about its attaching points.
All flight instruments are in the shock--mounted Flight
5--00--01 -- LANDING GEAR SYSTEM Panel. Engine instruments are in the co--pilot’s panel.
The pitot system provides air pressure to operate the
The electric landing gear system has a steerable nose airspeed indicator. The instrument static pressure sys-
wheel. Single disc self--adjusting hydraulic brakes are tem has two static air pickup ports (one on each side of
featured on the main gear. Gear position lights, a warn- the tailcone) that open to the atmosphere. An alternate
ing horn and a gear position indicator on the floorboard static source is provided on center console. The instru-
are standard equipment. Bungee springs that preload ment panel/glareshield lighting systems have manual
the retraction mechanism in an over--center position dimming mechanisms.
lock the gear down. An air pressure actuated safety
S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
switch in the electrical system prevents electric gear re-
(GARMIN G1000 equipped)
traction on takeoff until a safe flying speed is attained. A
gear throttle warning horn sounds when the manifold The G1000 Integrated Avionics System is a fully inte-
pressure is less than a pre--set value with the landing grated flight, engine, communication, navigation and
gear up. The electric gear retraction system has a surveillance instrumentation system. The system con-
manual extension system connected to the gear actua- sists of a Primary Flight Display (PFD), Multi--Function
tor that permits manual lowering of the gear in the event Display (MFD), audio panel (GMA), Air Data Computer
of an electrical malfunction. Landing gear doors fully (ADC), Attitude and Heading Reference System
enclose the wheel wells to reduce sound levels and in- (AHRS), engine/airframe processing unit (GEA), and
crease performance. integrated avionics (GIA) containing VHF communica-
tions, VHS navigation, and GPS navigation.
5--00--02 -- FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS 5--00--06 -- CABIN HEATING & VENTILATING SYS-
The dual flight control systems can be operated from ei- TEMS
ther the pilot or co--pilot seat. All flight controls are con- The heater muff encasing the exhaust system is the
ventional in operation, using pushpull tubes to link the cabin heat source. Hot air from the heater muff, mixed
control surfaces to the control wheels and rudder ped- with ambient air, controls cabin temperature. Air routed
als. Formica guide blocks maintain control tube align- from the main heater duct system to nozzles at the
ment and dampen vibration. An interconnect spring windshield base defrosts the windshield. An optional
mechanism links the aileron and rudder systems to as- defrost blower motor system is available.
sist in control coordination. The standard co--pilot’s 5--00--07 -- FUEL SYSTEM
rudder pedals are removable. A dual brake installation
is optional for the co--pilot’s position. The manual or The fuel system has sealed, integral wet wing tanks be-
electric trim system sets the horizontal stabilizer angle tween main spar and baffles forward of spar in each
of attack. wing. Vents at the aft, outboard top corner of each tank
vent through a NACA scoop on the lower wing surface.
5--00--03 -- WING FLAP SYSTEM Fuel sump drains are at the lowest point in each tank.
The electric fuel pump is in the bottom left forward sec-
Wing flaps are electrically actuated and are controlled tion of the fuselage, aft of the firewall. The engine--driv-
by a spring loaded “up--off--down” switch on the center en fuel pump mounts on the engine crankcase. Two
console. fuel quantity transmitters in each tank are wired in se-
5--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
ries to fuel quantity gauges in the engine cluster gauge. specified period of operation for that component or in
The Master Switch, left side of the pilot’s panel, acti- accordance with manufactures service data or airwor-
vates the fuel quantity indicating systems. The optional thiness directives.
visual sight gauges are for partial fueling of wing tanks.
The specified overhaul time limits, if applicable to a
A “low fuel” warning annunciator light for each tank is component, do not constitute a guarantee that the com-
activated (RED) when fuel quantity is between 2--1/2 to ponent will reach that time limit without requiring main-
3 gallons of useable fuel remaining in the respective tenance.
tank.
NOTE
5--10--00 -- TIME LIMIT COMPONENTS “ON CONDITION” items are to be repaired, re-
It is recommended that overhaul or replacement of placed or overhauled when inspection or perfor-
components should be accomplished not later than the mance reveals an unserviceable condition.
5--10--01 -- OVERHAUL, MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE
ITEM RECOMMENDED OVERHAUL, MAINTENANCE OR
REPLACE TIME LIMITS
Landing Gear
Actuator No--Back Spring 1000 Hours
Avionics Products (Eaton) See SI M20--52 ( )
Plessey (GEC) See SI M20--92 ( )
All other Components On Condition
Powerplant
Engine 2000 Hours (refer to Lycoming SI 1009AJ)
Propeller 2000 Hours or 6 years (refer to mfg’s. repair data)
Propeller Governor Refer to Mfg’s. Overhaul and Maintenance Data
Magnetos -- Slick 4 years or engine O/H (refer to mfg’s. repair/inspec-
tion data)
Induction Air Filter 500 Hours or Annually
Natural Rubber Engine Isolators (BLack) 10 years
V--Band Couplings & Gaskets After 2 disassemblies, at engine O/H or on condition
(ref. Chapter 81--30--01)
All other Components On Condition
Fuel & Oil System
Fuel Selector Valve (Airight or Christopher Tool) On Condition
Flexible Hoses (All, except Teflon & as below) 7 years or Engine O/H, whichever occurs first.
All other Components (includes Teflon hoses) On Condition
Instruments
Vacuum Regulator Garter Filter 100 Hours
Filters -- Vacuum Pump 500 Hours (CV1J4 Filter -- On Condition)
Filters -- Gyro Instruments 500 Hours or Annually
TIT Probe 200 Hours
Other Components On Condition
Electrical System
All Components On Condition
5--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
Flight Controls
TKS Airframe/Propeller Pump Motor 2000 Hours
SpeedBrakes (if installed) 1000 Hours (ref. Chapter 27--96--00)
All Components On Condition
Miscellaneous Systems
Vacuum Pump, Primary On Condition or 500 Hours (or manufacturer’s recom-
mendation), 6 years from date of mfg. or @ Engine
O/H
Stand--by Vacuum Pump/Clutch ** 100 Hours (Inspect Drive Coupling)
E.L.T. Battery 2 Years or 1 Hour Total Use (ref. mfg’s. repair data)
Oxygen Cylinders
*Lt. Wt. Steel Cylinders 5 Yrs. (O/H) / 24 years or 10,000 recharge cycles --
Replace
*Composite Cylinders 3 Yrs. (O/H) / 15 years or 10,000 recharge cycles --
Replace
Scott Oxygen Regulator 6 years--overhaul; 3 years--test
Air Conditioning Components See Chapter 21--58--00 for specific maintenance and
servicing times.
All Other Components (Excluding Avionics) On Condition (See NOTE above)
Avionics Refer to Manufacturers Publications
*Hydrostatic Test Required @ 3 year intervals.
**Replacement vacuum pump no longer available. Aircraft should be retrofitted with Tailcone Mounted Vacu-
um System, Mooney drawing number 940155.
NOTE
Components should be inspected and serviced at regular intervals per the servicing, lubrication and
inspection chart of this manual.
5--20--00 -- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS sion, and any other apparent damage. The tubular
frame structure should be inspected during each annu-
Inspection Intervals. Perform a 25, 50, or 100--hour in-
al inspection for any signs of corrosion or damage.
spection of the aircraft, components and engine at rec-
3. Fuel, air, oil and hydraulic oil lines and hoses shall
ommended intervals as outlined in the following para-
be inspected as applicable for: cracks, dents, kinks, de-
graphs.
terioration, obstruction, chaffing, improper bend radius,
NOTE and insecure installation. Replace or correct if any of
Aircraft operated in a salt air environment are these conditions exist. Hose clamp installations on fuel
considered high risk for corrosion damage, and and hydraulic systems between systems or between
should be cleaned and inspected at frequent in- systems and the engine shall be torqued to 25 inch
tervals. Refer to AC 43--4. pounds. Hose clamp installations on blast tubes, air
5--20--01 -- INSPECTION CHECK POINTS ducts, vacuum lines, drain and vent lines shall be
torqued to 15 inch pounds.
The general points to be covered during inspection are 4. Pipe Threads -- Tightening and torque procedures.
grouped in accordance with the nature and function of Lubricate pipe threads as follows:
the items discussed. Oxygen Lines -- Use only MIL--T--5542 thread com-
1. Moving Parts shall be inspected and checked as pound or Teflon thread seal tape on threads of valves,
applicable for: proper operation, security of attach- connectors, fittings, parts or assemblies which might
ment, sealing, cleanliness, lubrication, servicing, safe- come in contact with oxygen. The thread compound
tying, adjustment, tension, travel, condition of hinges, must be applied sparingly to the first three threads of
binding, excessive wear, cracking, corrosion, deforma- the male fitting only. No compound is to be used on the
tion, and any other apparent damage. coupling sleeves or on the outside of the tube flares.
2. Metal Parts shall be inspected, as applicable, for: Extreme care should be exercised to prevent the con-
security of attachment, condition of finish and/or seal- tamination of the thread compound or Teflon tape with
ant, distortion, fatigue cracks, welding cracks, corro- oil, grease or other lubricant.
5--20--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
Fuel, Hydraulic, Air, Oil Lines -- Use “Parker Thread (2) If leaks are detected, tighten one full turn more.
Lube” or equivalent on male fittings only. Apply lubri- (3) If leaks persist, the parts should be discon-
cant, omitting the first two threads, sparingly and care- nected and; rejected; replace with new components.
fully.
5. Bolts and nuts in critical areas shall be inspected
Engine Fittings -- Use only aircraft engine oil to lubri- for: fretting, wear, damage, stretch, proper torque, (Fig-
cate fittings threaded directly to engine. ure 5--2) and safetied.
Vacuum Lines -- No lubrication is to be used. Check 6. Electrical wiring shall be inspected as applicable
manufacturers instructions when installing compo- for: loose, corroded, and broken terminals; chaffed,
nents. Refer to Chapter 37 for maintenance proce- broken, and worn insulation; insecure installation; heat
dures on vacuum system. deterioration; and any other apparent damage.
Tapered Threads -- Use Teflon Threadseal Tape. 7. Filters and screens shall be removed, cleaned and
(1) Continue to tighten until fitting is correctly posi- inspected for contamination or damage that would re-
tioned but do not overrun or backoff. quire replacement.
5--20--01
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
TORQUE VALUES
See Following Tables.
FLARE NUT TORQUE VALUES-- Tighten to minimum torque value for appropriate size as shown in table below.
CAUTION -- -- These torque values are derived from oil--free cadmium--plated threads.
FLARE NUT TORQUE

ALUMINUM TUBING STEEL TUBING
FITTING SIZE TORQUE -- INCH POUNDS
MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM
--3 -- 30 70 --
--4 40 65 50 90
--5 60 80 70 120
--6 75 125 90 150
--8 150 350 155 250
--10 200 350 300 400
--12 300 500 430 575
--16 500 700 550 750
--20 -- 600 900 --
--24 -- 600 900 --
METRIC BOLTS, SCREWS & NUTS

Failure of threaded fasteners due to over--tightening is dependent upon:
can occur by bolt shank fracture or by stripping of the 1) Material of the screw.
nut and/or bolts thread. A bolt or screw assembled with 2) Parent material (steel, non--ferrous metal or plas-
a nut of the appropriate class is intended to provide an tic).
assembly capable of being tightened to the bolt proof 3) Whether the screw is untreated or plated.
load without thread stripping occurring. 4) Whether the screw is dry or lubricated.
The torque value to be set for a particular size of screw 5) The depth of the thread.
TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Untreated Hardware (Black Finish) Friction Coefficient 0.14
PROPERTY CLASS
NOMINAL 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
DIAMETER
(Coarse Thread) TORQUE Ma
Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb.
M3 0.60/0.44 1.37/1.01 1.92/1.42 2.30/1.70
M4 1.37/1.01 3.10/2.29 4.40/3.25 5.25/3.87
M5 2.70/1.99 6.15/4.54 8.65/6.38 10.4/7.6
M6 4.6/3.3 10.5/7.7 15/11 18/13
M7 7.6/5.6 17.5/12.9 25/18.4 29/21.3
M8 11/8.1 26/19 36/26 43/31
M10 22/16 51/37 72/53 87/64
M12 39/28 89/65 125/92 150/110
M14 62/45 141/103 198/16 240/177
M16 95/70 215/158 305/224 365/269
M18 130/95 295/217 420/309 500/368
5--20--01
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
M20 184/135 420/309 590/435 710/523

M22 250/184 570/420 800/590 960/708
M24 31/232 725/534 1020/752 1220/899
M27 470/346 1070/789 1510/1113 1810/1334
M30 635/468 1450/1069 2050/1511 2450/1806
M33 865/637 1970/1452 2770/2042 3330/2455
M36 1111/819 2530/1865 3560/2625 4280/3156
M39 1440/1062 3290/2426 4620/3407 5550/4093
TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Untreated Hardware (Black Finish) Friction Coefficient 0.14

PROPERTY CLASS
NOMINAL -- 8.8 10.9 12.9
DIAMETER
(Fine Thread) TORQUE Ma
-- Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb.
M8 X 1 -- 27/19 38/28 45/33
M10 X 1.25 -- 52/38 73/53 88/64
M12 X 1.25 -- 95/70 135/99 160/118
M14 X 1.5 -- 150/110 210/154 250/184
M16 X 1.5 -- 225/165 315/232 380/280
M18 X 1.5 -- 325/239 460/339 550/405
M20 X 1.5 -- 460/339 640/472 770/567
M22 X 1.5 -- 610/449 860/634 1050/774
M24 X 2 -- 780/575 1100/811 1300/958
TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Electrically Zinc Plated Hardware -- Friction Coefficient 0.125

PROPERTY CLASS
NOMINAL 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
DIAMETER
(Coarse Thread) TORQUE Ma
Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb.
M3 0.56/0.41 1.28/0.94 1.80/1.33 2.15/1.59
M4 1.28/0.94 2.90/2.14 4.10/3.02 4.95/3.65
M5 2.50/1.84 5.75/4.24 8.10/5.97 9.70/7.15
M6 4.3/3.1 9.9/7.3 14/10.3 16.5/12.1
M7 7.1/5.2 16.5/12.1 23/16.9 27/19.9
M8 10.5/7.7 24/17.7 34/25 40/29
M10 21/15 48/35 67/49 81/59
M12 36/26 83/61 117/86.2 140/103
M14 58/42 132/97 185/136 220/162
M16 88/64 200/147 285/210 340/250
M18 121/89 25/202 390/287 470/346
M20 171/126 390/287 550/405 660/486
5--20--01
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
M22 230/169 530/390 745/549 890/656

M24 295/217 675/497 960/708 1140/840
M27 435/320 995/733 1400/1032 1680/1239
M30 590/435 1350/995 1900/1401 2280/1681
M33 800/590 1830/1349 2580/1902 3090/2278
M36 1030/759 2360/1740 3310/2441 3980/2935
M39 1340/988 3050/2249 4290/3163 5150/3798
TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Electrically Zinc Plated Hardware -- Friction Coefficient 0.125

PROPERTY CLASS
NOMINAL 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
DIAMETER
(Fine Thread) TORQUE Ma
-- Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb. Nm/Ft. Lb.
M8 X 1 -- 25/18 35/25 42/30
M10 X 1.25 -- 49/36 68/50 82/60
M12 X 1.25 -- 88/64 125/92 150/110
M14 X 1.25 -- 140/103 195/143 235/173
M16 X 1.5 -- 210/154 295/217 350/258
M18 X 1.5 -- 305/224 425/313 510/376
M20 X 1.5 -- 425/313 600/442 720/531
M22 X 1.5 -- 570/420 800/590 960/708
M24 X 2 -- 720/531 1000/737 1200/885
METRIC CONVERSION FACTOR: One Nm (Newton Meter) = .7375 Foot Pound;

One Foot Pound = 1.355818 Nm
AN/MS STANDARD BOLT, NUTS TORQUE TABLES

FINE--THREAD SERIES
TENSION--Type SHEAR--Type TENSION--Type SHEAR--Type
NUT/BOLT AN( ) BOLTS AN( ) BOLTS NAS( ) BOLTS NAS( ) BOLTS
SIZE AN365AN310 AN364/AN320 AN365/AN310 AN364/AN320
NUTS NUTS NUTS NUTS
In. Lbs. In. Lbs. In. Lbs. In. Lbs.
8--36 12--15 7--9 -- --
10--32 20--25 12--15 25--30 15--20
1/4--28 50--70 30--40 80--100 50--60
5/16--24 100--140 60--85 120--145 70--90
3/8--24 160--190 95--110 200--250 120--150
7/16--20 450--500 270--300 520--630 300--400
1/2--20 480--690 290--410 770--950 450--550
9/16--18 800--1000 480--600 1100--1300 650--800
5/8--18 1100--1300 600--780 1250--1550 750--950
3/4--16 2300--2500 1300--1500 2650--3200 1600--1900
5--20--01
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
7/8--14 2500--3000 1500--1800 3550--4350 2100--2600

1--14 3700--5500 2200--3300 4500--5500 2700--3300
1 1/8--12 5000--7000 8000--4200 6000--7300 3600--4400
1 1/4--12 9000--11000 5400--6600 11000--13000 6600--8000
COARSE--THREAD SERIES
8--32 12--15 7--9 -- --
10--24 20--25 12--15 -- --
1/4--20 0--50 25--30 -- --
5/16--18 80--90 48--55 -- --
3/8--16 160--185 95--100 -- --
7/16--14 235--255 140--155 -- --
1/2--13 400--480 240--290 -- --
9/16--12 500--700 300--420 -- --
5/8--11 700--900 420--540 -- --
3/4--10 1150--1600 700--950 -- --
7/8--9 2200--3000 1300--1800 -- --
Reference: Federal Aviation Agency Advisory Circular No. 43.13--1( )

Recommended Torque Values for Nut--Bolt combination
1. Be sure nut and/or bolt threads are clean and dry (unless Mfg. states otherwise).
2. Run bolt down near contact with washer or bearing surface and check “friction drag torque” required to turn
bolt/nut.
3. Add “friction drag torque” to the recommended torque value from Torque Table above. This value is considered
“Final Torque Value”:
(FRICTION DRAG TORQUE + RECOMMENDED TORQUE = FINAL TORQUE).
CAUTION
DO NOT REUSE LOCKNUTS IF THEY CAN BE RUN UP FINGER TIGHT.
5--20--02 -- AIRCRAFT FILE INSPECTION functions and abnormalities, perform a second engine
runup and a flight test after completing the inspection.
Aircraft 100--hour and annual inspections cover, in
addition to examining the aircraft proper, a review of the NOTE
status of compliance with current Federal Aviation Refer to Lycoming Service Bulletin 480( ) for en-
Regulations. This review includes inspection of the Air- gine maintenance actions.
plane Flight Manual, Aircraft Log Book, Engine Log
5--20--04 -- FIRST 25--HOURS INSPECTION (Non--
Book, Registration Certificate, Airworthiness Certifi-
Repetitive)
cate, Weight & Balance Record, Engine Service Infor-
mation, Aircraft Radio Station License (if applicable), The, one time, 25--hour inspection consists of a visual
FAA Airworthiness Directives, and Mooney service inspection of the propeller, engine, and aircraft general
documents. condition, including a preflight inspection as outlined in
the Airplane Flight Manual. The inspection does not re-
5--20--03 -- ENGINE FUNCTIONAL CHECK quire removal of all access panels or disassembly of
components; however, it should include completion of
Prior to a scheduled 100--hour or annual inspection, all lubrication & service requirements. The inspection
and/or 25 hours after installation of new or overhauled should be extensive enough to detect any damage or
engine, wash down the engine and engine compo- maladjustment which might jeopardize flight safety. Af-
nents. Then perform an engine runup in accord with ter the first 25 hours of a new or overhauled engine op-
procedure recommended in the Airplane Flight Manu- eration, refer to paragraph 5--20--05 for the recom-
al. Make a record of all malfunctions and abnormalities. mended engine inspection.
After the engine runup, complete a differential (hot en- 1. Visually inspect propeller, spinner, and engine
gine) compression check. To verify correction of mal- cowling; remove cowling.
5--20--02
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
2. Inspect and clean induction air filter if aircraft has J. Inspect baffles for secure anchorage, close fit
been operating under dusty conditions. Check opera- around cylinders, and freedom from cracks.
tion of alternate air door.
3. Inspect engine compartment for evidence of fuel, J. Inspect engine controls for full travel, freedom of
oil or exhaust leaks. movement, and security.
4. Inspect security and condition of equipment L. Visually inspect fuel and oil lines for security of
installed on engine. connections and evidence of leakage or damage.
5. Inspect fuselage, wing and empennage for exter-
nal evidence of damage. Pay particular attention to M. Visually inspect induction air system; check op-
scratches and dents. eration of alternate--air door (refer to paragraph
6. Inspect windshields and windows for crazing, 71--62--00).
cracks, and scratches.
N. Inspect engine mount bolts at firewall & Lord
7. Inspect control systems for binding, excessive isolator mounts for security and condition.
freeplay, and damage.
8. Inspect pitot and static systems for possible ob- 2. Propeller.
structions.
9. Inspect aircraft exterior for security of bolts, A. Inspect propeller hub and spinner for general
screws, etc. condition, looseness, and/or oil leakage.
10. Inspect and service batteries. B. Inspect blades for nicks and cracks. Repair any
5--20--05 -- 50--HOUR INSPECTION (Repetitive) discrepancy prior to next flight.
The 50--hour inspection includes all requirements of 3. Cabin.

the 25--hour inspection, plus the necessary removal of
inspection doors, panels, or fairings. After the first 25 A. Inspect brake and parking brake control sys-
hours of operating time, a new, re--manufactured, or tems for proper operation and fluid level.
newly overhauled engine should be given a 50--hour in-
spection including replacement of the lubricating oil B. Inspect trim system and indicator for free opera-
and filter. tion and travel.
1. Engine Inspections. (Refer to engine manufactur-
C. Inspect cabin and baggage doors for damage,
er’s service data for oil change frequency)
proper operation, and sealing.
A. Perform pre--inspection operational check per
Lycoming Service Bulletin 408 ( ) for oil change fre- D. Lights -- Inspect cabin interior, instrument panel,
quency. glareshield, position, anti--collision and landing and taxi
B. Drain engine oil sump. lights.
C. Remove and clean suction oil strainer; reinstall
E. Inspect fuel selector valve for proper tank selec-
strainer and plug. Safety wire strainer plug.
tion, positive valve selection through range of rotation.
D. Remove and replace the full--flow oil filter car- Inspect gascolator, and boost pump for proper opera-
tridge. tion.
E. Drain and clean fuel strainer (Gascolator).
F. Remove and clean fuel injector fuel strainer. F. Inspect oxygen system, plumbing and attach-
ments (if installed).
G. Service engine oil sump with proper type, grade
and amount of lubricating oil. 4. Landing Gear.
H. Inspect engine intake and exhaust systems for
evidence of leakage, looseness or damage. Refer to A. Inspect tires for cuts, blisters, wear and proper
Lycoming Service Instruction 1422 ( ) for exhaust and inflation.
TIT inspection procedures.
G. Inspect ignition leads, harness, spark plug el- B. Inspect shock discs for proper extension at air-
bows and shielding nuts for damage and security. craft static weight.
H. Inspect cylinders for evidence of overheating. C. Inspect hydraulic brake system for disc or pad
I. Inspect turbocharger for security of clamps and wear, disc warpage, hydraulic fluid level and proper
attachments. installation.
5--20--05
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
5. Wings. B. Inspect engine for evidence of fuel and oil leak-

age. Inspect oil cooler. Inspect oil and fuel hoses for
A. Inspect surfaces and tips for damage.
condition and security.
B. Inspect ailerons, aileron attachments, and bell- C. Drain engine oil sump; remove, clean, and in-
cranks for damage and proper operation. spect oil suction screens; reinstall and safety. Remove
C. Inspect flaps and attachments for damage and full--flow oil filter cartridge; replace with new cartridge
proper operation. Cycle flaps, observe travel and any and safety. It is recommended that old filter be opened
evidence of binding. up to check for metal particles & foreign matter. Check
crank case breather lines for obstruction. Safety wire oil
D. Lubricate controls per Chapter 5--20--07, if nec- filter installation.
essary.
D. Refill engine oil sump with the proper type,
6. Fuselage and Empennage. grade, and quantity of lubricating oil.
A. Inspect stabilizer, elevators, fin, and rudder for E. Inspect fuel injector, fuel line connections for se-
damage, proper operation and proper attachment. curity and condition and fuel nozzles.
B. Lubricate controls per Chapter 5--20--07, if nec- F. Remove and inspect gascolator strainer, rein-
essary. stall strainer. Inspect fuel lines and connections: pres-
sure check fuel system with mixture control at IDLE
C. Check Trim System for proper operation. CUTOFF and BOOST PUMP ”ON”.
7. See Chapter 5--20--07 for any repetitive 50 hour in- G. Inspect all air ducting and connections in cabin
spections and component service guides. heating air systems for leaks. Leak check all exhaust/
manifold connections and engine exhaust manifolds
5--20--06 -- 100--HOUR INSPECTION (or ANNUAL (SEE Para. 5--20--06, 1, S & T below).
INSPECTIONS) H. Remove and clean induction air filter (replace at
500 Hrs or annually). Inspect alternate air door and
(Refer to Fig. 5--1) magnet for security and operation. Inspect all air duct-
The 100--hour (or annual) inspection is a thorough, ing and connections in the induction air system for
searching inspection of the entire aircraft. Preparation leaks.
for the inspection includes the removal of all fuselage, I. Check magnetos for grounding and synchroniza-
wing, and empennage inspection doors, cover plates, tion (timing to engine); inspect magneto points for con-
and fairings at all systems attach, hinge, and bearing dition, clearance, and internal timing. Inspect distribu-
locations (including wing and empennage to fuselage tor block for erosion and cracks. Inspect cam follower
mating points). Remove pilots & co--pilots seats, lower felt for proper lubrication, and remove excessive oil
LH & RH side interior panels to gain access to fuel tank from breaker compartment. Inspect magneto pressur-
INBD ribs & sensor locations and tubular structure. Op- ization per Slick magneto maintenance manual. Repair
erating limit replacements (See Chapter 5--10--01) and or replace components, if required.
special testing of components is to be included at this J. Inspect baffles for secure anchorage, cracks,
interval, when applicable. Comply with applicable FAA holes, deformation, and for close fit around cylinders.
Directives, Airworthiness Directives Notes (AD’s), and Inspect cylinders for burned paint and cracked and bro-
applicable Mooney or Vendor mandatory Service Bul- ken fins. Inspect baffle sealant.
letins and Instructions. Check for aircraft conformance K. Inspect accessory case, starter, alternator, vac-
to FAA Specification 2A3 for M20M Model aircraft. uum pumps hoses, firewall and fittings for security and
Recommended 100--hour/annual and special inspec- damage.
tion requirements are outlined in the following para- L. Inspect tubular engine mount for cracks, dam-
graphs: age and corrosion; inspect all bolts and rubber isolation
1. ENGINE INSPECTION. Prior to the inspection, re- mounts for security and condition.
move engine cowling and propeller spinner. Wash en- M. Inspect engine and propeller controls for free
gine and engine compartment down. Then perform an operation, full travel, proper connection (security) of
engine runup in accord with 100 hour procedure rec- cable housing swage at the HEAD tube and security of
ommended in Lycoming Engine Maintenance and Op- attachment.
erators Manual. To verify correction of malfunctions NOTE
and abnormalities, perform a second runup and flight Cablecraft control cables are lubricated for the
test after the 100--hour/annual inspection engine set-- life of the control cable. DO NOT REMOVE seals
up. or lubricate control cable.
A. Complete a differential (hot engine) compres- N. Inspect engine fuel pump pressure ( see Lycom-
sion check. Clean and gap or replace spark plugs, if ing Service Information and Chapter 71--00--50 for pro-
necessary. cedure).
5--20--06
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
O. Inspect and reinstall cowling. Check cowl flaps B. Inspect wheels for cracks, distortion, misalign-
for operation, condition, proper opening and position ment, corrosion and bolt failure. Inspect condition of felt
indication. seals and bearings; re--pack bearings at 100 hour inter-
P. Inspect propeller governor for evidence of leak- vals.
age and mounting security. C. Inspect brakes for disc and pad wear, and disc
warpage (Ref. Chapter 32--40--04).
Q. Inspect battery cables, electrical wiring, and
ignition harness for condition, secure anchorage, loose D. Inspect hydraulic reservoir for proper fluid level.
terminals, and burned or chaffed insulation. E. Inspect hydraulic brake lines and hoses for leak-
age, dents, cracks chafing, kinks and security.
R. Inspect batteries, battery mount areas, and vent
system (as applicable) for condition and corrosion. In- F. Inspect parking brake system for proper en-
spect blast tube for obstruction (as applicable). Flush gagement and release.
battery mount areas with soda solution to neutralize G. Check shock disc gap on main and nose gear
corrosive action, if necessary. (Ref. 32--81--00).
S. Inspect exhaust system for cracks, looseness Jack aircraft, as recommended in paragraph 7--10--00,
and for evidence of leakage. Replace or repair dam- for the following inspections:
aged area. Replace or repair muffler if any internal H. Hard landing inspection (ref. 32--82--00).
damage is found. I. Inspect nose gear for cleanliness and damage.
T. Inspect exhaust stacks for burned areas, cracks, Inspect nose gear retraction tube bungees for sheared
distortion and looseness. or broken roll pins.
U. Inspect air conditioning compressor installation, NOTE
belts, connections (if installed). Reference Chapter Maximum allowable towing damage on leg as-
21--58--00. sembly is 1/32 inch dent. No repair is allowed on
heat treated landing gear components.
V. Inspect studs, nuts, bolts, etc. for damage and J. Inspect nose wheel steering mechanism for ad-
proper torque. justment, alignment, corrosion, and lubrication.
W. Inspect exhaust couplings, seals, clamps and K. Inspect main gear for cleanliness and damage.
slip--joints for cracks, deformation, leaks and security.
L. Inspect landing gear retraction linkage, bell-
X. Inspect and re--install cowling. cranks, pivots and bearings for wear, damage, distor-
2. PROPELLER INSPECTION. tion, misalignment, corrosion, cleanliness, and lubrica-
tion.
A. Remove spinner (if not already removed). M. Inspect landing gear actuator for security of
B. Inspect security of propeller installation. mounting, cleanliness, and indication of overheating
C. Inspect hub studs/nuts/bolts for proper torque and damage. Check motor operation and brush wear.
(ref. 61--00--20), security and damage. N. Perform landing gear operational check per
Chapter 32--30--01.
D. Inspect hub components for damage and leaks,
and blades for cracks and nicks. Repair prior to next 4. FUEL SYSTEM INSPECTION.
flight. A. Inspect fuel tank exterior for evidence of fuel
seepage and stain.
E. Inspect Anti--Ice boots for security and opera-
tion. B. Drain tank and inspect tank interior when seep-
age is evident.
F. Inspect spinner and bulkhead for cracks and
C. Inspect fuel tank drains for leakage, sediment,
condition.
and water contamination.
G. Inspect spinner & bulkhead for snug fit between D. Inspect fuel--tank vents for obstruction.
propeller hub cylinder and rear bulkhead. Use shims as
E. Inspect fuel selector valve for proper tank selec-
necessary for snug fit.
tion, positive valve selection through range of rotation,
3. LANDING GEAR and RETRACTION SYSTEM smooth operation and any leakage when in OFF posi-
INSPECTION. tion.
A. Inspect tires for proper inflation, cuts, blisters, F. Inspect gascolator for leakage; inspect sump for
slippage and excessive wear. Replace with new, ap- sediment, water and other contamination.
proved, tire(s), if necessary. G. Inspect electric boost pump for leaks, security of
CAUTION mounting, adequate fuel pressure, switch operation,
Always run at least 5 complete Landing Gear Re- and condition of wiring and electrical connections.
traction Cycle checks after any tire has been re- (1) Check electric boost pump for proper opera-
moved and/or replaced, before flying the aircraft. tion by “T--ing” into line with a calibrated fuel pressure
5--20--06
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
gauge. Boost operation should result in a 45-55 P.S.I. M. Lightening Strike Inspection, exterior/interior;
reading (mixture full RICH, throttle--IDLE). Adjust relief inspect for:
setting on pump if needed. 1. Seized bearings -- engine & airframe
H. Inspect fuel quantity gauges and transmitters 2. Failed electronics -- radios, instruments, etc.
for security of mounting and condition of wiring and
electrical connections. 3. Burned (melted) metal -- trailing edges, anten-
nas, etc.
NOTE
Lower interior side panels will require removal to 4. Burned wiring -- throughout aircraft
inspect the fuel quantity transmitter & tubular 5. Burned marks on propeller -- leading edges,
structure. tips.
I. Inspect fuel tank filler port for cleanliness, cap se- 6. INTERIOR INSPECTION.
curity, and condition of servicing placards. Inspect fuel
A. Inspect seats, seat tracks, and upholstery for
filler cap “O”--rings for condition and replace if needed
cleanliness and mounting security. Inspect seats for
(Reference Chapter 28--00--01).
condition and operation of position locks. Inspect seat
5. EXTERIOR INSPECTION. structure for cracks, deformation, corrosion and mech-
A. Inspect fuselage exterior surfaces for corrosion, anism lubrication.
damage, loose and popped rivets, dents, oilcans NOTE
(stretched skins), scratches, cracks and deteriorated Pilot/Co--pilot seats are removed by removing
paint. seat track pins or bolts, forward & aft; push seat
B. Inspect windshields and windows for cracks, forward to lift up front of seat structure, then aft
crazing, scratches, condition of sealant, and security of to lift up rear rollers of seat structure.
installation. B. Inspect safety belts and attaching brackets for
C. Inspect wings, flaps, and ailerons for corrosion, cleanliness, condition, latch operation and security of
damage, loose or popped rivets, dents, scratches, attachment (Refer to Chapter 25--10--02).
cracks, condition of attaching points, lubrication, free- C. Inspect for loose equipment, etc. that might re-
dom of operation, free--play, travel, and balance weight strict control movements.
attachment. D. Inspect Oxygen system (if installed) per Chap-
D. If installed, inspect Airframe De--Ice (TKS) com- ter 35 of this S & M manual.
ponents for damage, leakage & operation per Chapter E. Inspect external Decals/Placards for security
30--12--00.
7. INTERNAL INSPECTION.
E. Inspect Speed Brake cartridges for damage or
wear. Check for proper operation (ref. 27--96--01). A. Open inspection doors and remove access pan-
els and fairings as required.
F. Inspect empennage for corrosion, damage,
loose or popped rivets, free--play, dents, scratches, B. Inspect wing attaching bolts for proper torque
cracks, condition and lubrication of hinge points, at- and safetying, and evidence of damage and corrosion
tachment of balance weights and freedom of operation, (interior ABS side panels/carpet will require removal to
manually and electrically. adequately accomplish this inspection).
G. Inspect cabin door and door frames for damage, C. Inspect forward side of firewall for damage.
corrosion, nicks, dents, hinge security and lubrication. D. Inspect tubular structure for corrosion and dam-
H. Inspect cabin door lock mechanism for lubrica- age (interior side panels will require removal). (Refer-
tion and proper engagement. See Chapter 52--11--00 ence Mooney Service Bulletin M20--208 ( ) for specific
for rigging procedures. procedures required annually).
I. Inspect baggage door and baggage compart- E. Inspect wing ribs and stringers for cracks and
ment for damage, corrosion, warpage, hinge security, evidence of damage and corrosion.
condition to door frame and door seals, condition and F. Inspect wing spars for damage, distortion,
operation of door locking mechanism and condition of cracks, and corrosion.
cargo restraints/tiedowns.
G. Inspect electrical wiring, fuel, oil and hydraulic
J. Inspect ventilating system drain line for obstruc- lines and air ducts for security, damage, interference,
tion. chaffing and de--bonding.
K. Inspect landing and taxi lights for security, con- H. Inspect wing interior for foreign material, corro-
dition and proper adjustment. See Chapter 33--43--00 sion, and evidence of fuel leakage.
for adjustment procedures. I. Inspect empennage attachment brackets and
L. Inspect external Decals/Placards for security. hardware for corrosion.
5--20--06
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
8. FLIGHT CONTROL INSPECTION. S/N: 27--0001 thru 27--0317, 27--0319 thru 27--0325,
A. Inspect control column and control wheels for 27--00327
full travel, proper rigging, free--play, binding, security of S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
mounting, proper lubrication and proper direction of (GARMIN G1000 equipped)
control surface movement with relation to control wheel A. Inspect all instrument wiring and plumbing for
movement. condition and proper connections.
CAUTION B. Clean and inspect vacuum filter. Replace garter
All flight control components should be in- filter on vacuum regulator (non--Garmin G1000
spected to verify that all moisture drain holes are equipped aircraft).
free of obstructions.
C. Inspect vacuum regulator at vacuum manifold.
B. Inspect elevator system for damage, corrosion, Check operation of high--and low--vacuum warning
lubrication, rigging, travel, stop adjustment, condition lights or vacuum gage. Inspect Stand--by Vacuum Sys-
of bearings, pivots, bellcranks, & hinges; wear on down tem (ref. Chapter 37--40--00) (non--Garmin G1000
spring eyes, cable pulley and fittings; security of mount- equipped aircraft).
ing and proper relation to control movement.
D. Inspect all instruments for proper pointer indica-
C. Inspect aileron system linkage for damage, cor- tion, range and limit markings, condition of indicator
rosion, lubrication, rigging, travel, stop adjustment, markings, cracked or loose glass, slippage marks, and
condition of bellcranks, pivots and rod end bearings, security of installation.
link bolt security and proper relation to control move-
E. Inspect compass for proper lighting, compensa-
ment.
tion, security of mounting, liquid leakage and discolor-
D. Inspect rudder system linkage for damage, cor- ation. Swing compass at annual inspection and after
rosion, lubrication, rigging, condition of hinges, bell- any new equipment has been installed. Degaussing tu-
cranks, pivots and rod--end bearings, link bolt security bular structure may be necessary if compass will not
and proper relation to control movement. Check for free compensate within 10o. See Chapter 33--22--00 for de-
movement of toe--brake pedals and proper rudder and gaussing instructions.
nose wheel travel.
F. Inspect altimeter for scale error, discolored
E. Inspect stabilizer trim control system for security markings, proper pointer readings, setting knob free-
and proper adjustment, shaft and stop nuts for proper dom and synchronization of barometric scale with ref-
rigging, trim control wheel for smooth operation, univer- erence markers.
sal joints for free--play and good working order, attach-
G. Inspect flight panel for security of mounting,
ing hardware orientation to avoid scoring of trim tube,
condition of shock mounts, freedom from interference
actuator threads for lubrication, linkage for corrosion,
with structure and condition of ground straps.
and guide blocks for looseness or excessive wear. See
Chapter 27--42--00 for Electric Trim System bearing H. Inspect Avionics Equipment for proper opera-
maintenance. tion and security.
F. Check flap system for rigging actuator, push/pull I. Inspect Avionics Antennas, wiring, shielding for
tubes for rigging, travel, and stop adjustment. Check obvious damage or defects.
flap position indicator for proper operation. Inspect ac- J. Inspect pitot head for port obstruction; inspect
tuator, push/pull tubes, flap rods, interconnects, hinges lines for cracks, dents, kinks, proper bend radius and
and bellcranks for corrosion, security, and lubrication. security of attachment. Drain system and inspect for
NOTE leaks.
All control rigging inspections should be made K. Inspect static ports for obstruction and aerody-
with the aircraft jacked and leveled (Per Chapter namic smoothness at port installations. Inspect lines
7). for bends, cracks, dents, kinks, and security of attach-
NOTE ment. Drain system and inspect for leaks. Check alter-
Some elevator trim tubes have poly tape wrapped nate static pressure source located on flight panel for
at bulkhead penetrations. If tape shows signs of freedom of valve movement.
wear, re--wrap tube with 2” wide Y9265 polyure- L. Refer to Garmin G1000 for Instructions for Con-
thane tape (1/2 tape overlap). Trim tubes, without tinued Airworthiness.
tape, which show signs of abrading bulkhead 10. ELECTRICAL FUNCTIONAL TEST.
grommet should be wrapped. See SB M20--185( ).
A. Check operation of navigation lights.
MAX. TUBE WEAR--.007 in. wall thickness or .014 in.
diameter reduction. B. Check operation of landing & taxi lights.
9. INSTRUMENT INSPECTION (ref. FAR 91.411 C. Check operation of dome lights and cigar lighter.
and FAR 91.413). D. Check operation of anti--collision lights.
5--20--06
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
E. Check operation of instrument and placard steady GREEN light. Select NORMAL FLOW; verify
lights. Check rheostat travel for dimming without any steady GREEN light OFF. Verify High Pressure Light
dropouts. not illuminated (if illuminated is indication of need for fil-
ter replacement) If light illuminates, push RESET and
F. Check operation of pitot head heater (short dura- verify light extinguishes and remains extinguished).
tion only) by observing ammeter needle fluctuation. Repeat for Pump 2.
G. Check operation of cluster gauge.
On Main Annunciator Panel PUSH PRESS--TO--TEST
H. Check operation of fuel gauges. but ton. Verify AMBER pitot heat light ILLUMINATES.
Pitot/Stall Warning Heat switch ON. Verify AMBER Pi-
I. Check operation of annunciator light press--to-- tot Heat Annunciator light stays extinguished OFF.
test switch. Verify Pitot Heat Annunciator illuminates.
J. Check operation of ignition switch, and starter P. Inspect batteries, connection & battery areas for
solenoid. proper installation, corrosion and cleanliness.
K. Check operation of landing gear position lights 11. MISCELLANEOUS/OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
(See Chapter 24--36--00 & 32--60--00) and warning
horn (See Chapter 32--00--00). A. Inspect any other installed equipment not cov-
ered by previous paragraphs for proper operation, at-
L. During post inspection flight, check proper set- tachment and obvious damage and malfunctions.
ting/operation of stall warning horn.
12. POST INSPECTION FLIGHT TEST.
M. Check operation of “Prop De--Ice” (if installed).
Push switch “ON”, observe prop de--ice annunciator for Flight test the aircraft to verify correction of all malfunc-
illumination (BLUE light). Observe ammeter for fluctua- tions and abnormalities. Make proper entries in aircraft
tion during cycle action of timer (Analog and Moritz log book.
gauge installations).
Wing access covers may vary to some degree between
N. Check operation of TKS--Ice Protection System model year aircraft.
(if installed). Check operation of each pump. Switch to
Main Pump 1 ON; set to MAXIMUM FLOW; verify Component locations remain basically unchanged.
REFERENCE FIGURE 5--1 FOR LOCATION OF THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS

NOTE -- Access covers riveted in place during production need not be removed for routine inspections.
5--20--07 -- ACCESS COVER IDENTIFICATION, LUBRICATION AND SERVICE GUIDE
ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION LUBRICA- INTERVAL
NO. TION (HOURS)
SYMBOL*
1 Flight Instruments -- ****
Vacuum Regulator
Turn Coordinator
Vacuum Filters Replace at 500***
Control System Adjustments:
Control Column Bearing Ball ψ 100
Rod End Bearings ψ 100
Universal Joints Σ 100
Bellcranks Σ 100
2 Engine Cowling û 100
Vacuum Pumps û 500*****
3 Nose Gear Grease Fittings Ω 100
Retraction Tube Rod End Bearings ψ 100
Bellcranks Σ 100
Bungees ψ 100
Gear Door Rod End Bearings ψ 50
5--20--07
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
4 Main Gear Grease Fittings Ω 100

Retraction Tube Rod End Bearings ψ 100
Bellcranks Σ 100
Bungees Σ 100
Gear Door Rod End Bearings ψ 50
Electric Gear Actuator Gear Box** Ω AR
Electric Gear Actuator Ball Screw @ 1000
5 Elevator & Rudder Controls:
Control Tube Rod End Bearings ψ 100
Bellcranks Σ 100
Batteries û 25
Stabilizer Trim Control Shaft:
Universal Joints Σ 100
Guide Blocks # 100
Hydraulic Reservoir β 50
Oxygen, High Pressure Fittings ñ 50
Bellcranks Σ 100
Stabilizer Trim Jack Screw/Actuator Brgs Θ 100
Variable Downspring System ψ 100
Tail Strobe Light Power Supply û 100
7 Empennage Attach Points û 100
Stabilizer Trim Attach Point û 100
10 Aileron Control Tube Guide Blocks # 100
11 Aileron Controls:
Control Tube Rod End Bearing ψ 100
Bellcranks Σ 100
12 Aileron Control Tube Guide Blocks # 100
13 Main Gear Retraction Σ 100
14 Wing Points û 100
Control Tube Guide Blocks # 100
15 Stabilizer Trim Screw & Stops Θ 100
Indicator Adjustment Point
Stabilizer Trim Chain & Gear # 100
5--20--07
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006

Bellcranks Σ 100
Guide Blocks # 100
Flap Indicator Cable Σ 100
Electric Flap Actuator Gear Box Ω 500
Electric Flap Actuator Ball Screw @ 100
17 Electric Boost Pump
Gascolator Σ 50
18 Control Systems:
Control Yoke (Lower Section) Σ 100
NLG Steering Link Rod End Brgs ψ 100
Rudder Pedal Cross Shaft Σ 100
Rudder--Aileron Bungee Σ 100
Hydraulic Brake Cylinder Pedal Linkage Σ 100
19 Aileron control Tube Rod End Bearings ψ 100
Outboard Flap Stops û 100
20 Baggage Compartment Door: Hinges Σ 100
Latches Ç 100
Lock õ 100
Seals è 100
Hold--Open Arm Ψ
21 Cabin Door: Hinges Σ 100
Latches Ç 100
Lock õ
Seals è
Hold--Open Arm Ψ
22 Engine Instruments
Radios
Engine Controls ψ 100
23 Oil Dip Stick, Oil Filler Tube ∇ AR
24 Wheels & Brakes:
Wheel Bearings Ψ 250
Brake Pressure Plates Anchor Bolts & Guide Pins ψ 50
Shock Discs û 50
25 Elevator & Rudder Control Stops û 100
26 Nose Wheel:
Wheel Bearings Ψ 250
Shock Discs û 50
27 Control Surface Hinges Σ 100
28 Exhaust Assy û 100
29 Air Induction Filter û, √ 50******
30 Cowl Flap Indicator Potentiometer û 100
31 Cabin Heat Shroud & Ducts û 100
5--20--07
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
32 Remote Compass Flux Valve û 100

33 Strobelight Power Supply (Wing) û 100
34 ELT: Batteries û 100
Antenna (under dorsal fin) -- AR
35 Seat Belt/Restraints û 100
* See last page of chapter for lubrication symbol legend.
** No periodic lubricant on Avionics Products #102000--2. If relubricated, use Aeroshell 22, Mobil 28 or
MIL--G--81322 ONLY.
*** Change garter filter on vacuum regulator every 100 hours.
**** Change instrument filters at 500 hours, clean every 100 hours.
***** Inspect Stand--by Vacuum Pump drive coupling every 200 hours. (Ref. Airborne Service Letter No. 34)
****** Replace annually
LUBRICATION SYMBOL LEGEND
SYMBOL MIL. SPEC. NO. DESCRIPTION
Σ MIL--L--7870 Low Temperature Oil (General Purpose)
Ω MIL--G--81322 Grease
Ψ MIL--L--3545 Grease (High Temperature)
β MIL--H--5606 Hydraulic Fluid (Red
# -- Graphite & MIL--G--3278 Grease or MIL--G--23827
õ -- Powdered Graphite
ψ -- Teflon Spray (Tri--Flow) or Equivalent
Ç -- Stick Lubricant (Door Ease or Equivalent)

Aeroshell Grease NO. 7
Θ --
(On jackscrew and inside Actuator Bearing Housing)
Lubriplate 630AA (10% by Volume Molybdenum Disulfide
@ --
Mixture Permissible)
è -- Seal Dressing
û -- Inspect
Tape, Tetrafluoroethylene
ñ MIL--T--27730 Permacel Tape Corp.,
New Brunswick, NJ
∇ MIL--L--22851 Lycoming Spec. (ref. Lyc. SL L229 ( )
√ -- Kerosene and Graphite, Lubriplate 777
Viscosity Requirements [reference only -- refer to Lycoming SI 1014 ( )]
All Temperature SAE 15W--50 or SAE 20W--50
0o to 70o F SAE 30, SAE 40 or SAE 20W--40
0o to 90o F SAE 20W--50 or SAE 15W--30
Below 10o F (--12o C) Ambient, S.L. SAE 30 or SAE 20W--30
NOTE
Mooney Aircraft are delivered with the proper break--in oil; MIL--L--22851 or SAE--J1899 Spec. This oil
should be changed, after 25 hours or after oil consumption has stabilized, to oil conforming to Lycom-
ing specification [(ref. Lycoming SI 1014 ( )].
For M20M aircraft S/N 27--0001 & ON -- It is recommended to use multiviscosity oil in these aircraft.
NOTE
Lycoming recommends that all Lycoming turbocharged equipped engines be broken in and operated
with ashless dispersant oil only (ref Lycoming SI 1014 ( ).
5--20--07
Page 21
Rev Date Date 2006
23 34
1
6 9
7 8
2 3 4 5
29 18
13 13
30 28 31
10 10
11 12 12 14 14 12 12 11
32 32
27 27
27 27
19 17 15 & 16 19
27 27
27
20 21
22
7 26
25 33 24 R5--1
ACCESS COVER IDENTIFICATION, LUBRICATION & SERVICE GUIDE

FIGURE 5--1
5--20--07
Page 22
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 6
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
6--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
6-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
6--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
6--00--00 -- DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

6--00--01 -- AIRCRAFT SPECIFICATIONS
SUBJECT STANDARD METRIC/OPT/MISC.

ENGINE
Engine Manufacturer TEXTRON--LYCOMING
Engine Model TIO--540--AF1A or --AF1B (refer to TCDS for engine configuration)
No. Cylinders 6
Rated Horsepower 270 HP
RPM 2575
Min. Fuel Octane 100 or 100 LL.
Fuel Capacity
Total 95 U.S. Gal. 359.6 Liters
Useable 89 U.S. Gal. 336.9 Liters
Oil Grade* -- Normal Service
-- Above 30o F (--1o C) Ambient air
@ SL SAE 40 or 15W--50
-- Below 50o F (10o C) Ambient air
@ SL SAE 30 or 20W--30
Oil Capacity 10 Qts. 9.5 Liters
Minimum for Flight Oil Level 6 Qts. 5.7 Liters
* Oil Specification -- MIL--L--22851
Break in oil for Lycoming turbocharged engines is required to be ashless dispersant oil per Lycoming SI 1014 ( )
corresponding to MIL--L--22851 or SAE J1899
Max Operational Induction Air 280o F 138o C
Temperature
Max Continuous Operation TIT 1300 -- 1750o F 704.4 -- 954.4o C
Oil Temperature Max. Allowable 118o F 244o C
Oil Pressure:
Idle, Minimum -- 25 PSI
Normal Operation -- 55--95 PSI
Max. Allowable (cold oil) -- 115 PSI
Recommended Takeoff--Min 100o F 38o C
Recommended Flight Operation 100 -- 244o F 38 -- 118o C
(Cruise)
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
Max. Allowable 500o F 260o C
Recommended Cruise 250 to 500o F 121 to 260o C
TURBOCHARGER
Turbocharger Mfg. Airesearch
Type Exhaust Driven
Turbocharger Model TA0413
PROPELLER
Propeller Mfg. McCauley
Type Constant Speed
Model B3D32C417/G82NRD--7
6--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
Pitch Angle @ 30 in. Sta. LOW 15.1o (+/--) 0.2o

HIGH 43.0o (+/--) 0.5o
Diameter 75.0” 190.5 cm
Governor McCauley
AIRFRAME
-- WEIGHTS & LOADINGS
Approximate Empty Weight 2355 Lbs. 1068 Kg.
Gross Weight
(27--0001 thru 27--0052)* 3200 Lbs.* 1452 Kg.*
(27--0053 thru 27--TBA 3368 Lbs. 1528 Kg.
Average Useful Load 1013 Lbs. 459.5 Kg.
Wing Loading 19.3 Lbs./Sq.Ft. 94.2 Kg./Sq.m
Power Loading 12.47 Lbs./HP 5.68 Kg/HP
* Retrofit of these A/C to 3368 lb. gross weight is allowed when compliance with SB M20--248 ( ) is accom-
plished.
WINGS
Airfoil At Wing Root 632215
Airfoil At Wing Tip 641412
Mean Aerodynamic Chord At Wing 61” 241 cm
Sta.94.85
Center--of--Gravity Range 41.0 to 51.0
Geometric Twist (DEG) 1.5 Degrees
Incidence Angle (DEG) From Sta 20. 2.5 Degrees
to Wing Tip
Dihedral angle (DEG) 5.5 Degrees
Aspect Ratio 7.448
Taper Ratio (CS/CT) 2.271
FUSELAGE
-- CABIN DIMENSIONS
Height 44.5” 113 cm
Width 43.5” 110.5 cm
Length 126” 315 cm
Cabin Door Width 29” 73.4 cm
Cabin Door Height 35” 88.9 cm
-- BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
MAX. Loading 120 Lbs. 54.4 kg
Baggage Space 22.6 Cu. Ft. 0.678 Cu. M.
Baggage Door Width 17” 43.2 cm
Baggage Door Height 20.5” 52.1 cm
Hat Rack Capacity 10 Lbs. 4.5 Kg
6--00--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
-- LANDING GEAR
Type Tricycle, Retractable
Operation Electrical
Wheel Track 9’ 2” 279.4 cm
Wheel Base 6’ 7-- 9/16” 202.08 cm
Tire Size -- Nose (6--Ply Rating) 5.00x5
Tire Size -- Main (6--Ply Rating) 6.00x6
Tire Pressure -- Nose 49 Lbs./Sq. In.
Tire Pressure -- Main 42 Lbs./Sq. In.
6--00--02 -- AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

SUBJECT STANDARD METRIC/OPT/MISC.
-- DIMENSIONS
Wing Span 36’ 1” 10.998 meters
Fuselage Length 26’ 9” 8.153 meters
Tail Height 8’ 4” 2.54 meters
Stabilizer Span 11’ 9” 3.581 meters
-- AREAS
Wing 174.786 Sq. Ft. 16.24 Sq. meters
Ailerons 11.4 Sq. Ft. 1.06 Sq. meters
Flaps 17.9 Sq. Ft. 1.66 Sq. meters
Vertical Fin 7.8 Sq. Ft. 0.73 Sq. meters
Rudder 6.25 Sq. Ft. 0.52 Sq. meters
Horizontal Stabilizer 21.42 Sq. Ft. 1.90 Sq. meters
Elevators 13.0 Sq. Ft. 1.21 Sq. meters
6--00--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
6--00--03 -- AIRCRAFT STATIONS

NOTE
The datum line station 0.0 is 13 inches aft of the nose gear trunnion pivot point (Reference Figure 8--2.).
26’ --9”
(815.3 cm)
75” 8’--4”
(190.5 cm) (254 cm)
6’--7 9/16”
(202.08 cm)
36’--1”
(1099.8 cm)
11’--9”
(358.1 cm)
9’--2”
(279.4 cm) M6-1
PRINCIPAL AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

FIGURE 6--1
6--00--03
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
STA STA STA STA STA
210.97 147.75 103.50 59.25 24.50
STA
193.50
WING STATION RIBS
STA
--5.375
STA
3.68
STA STA STA STA STA STA STA

211.50 176.00 142.00 100.00 53.00 21.80 --5.00
FUSELAGE STATIONS R6--2
WING STATION RIBS AND FUSELAGE STATIONS

FIGURE 6--2
6--00--03
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
STA STA STA STA STA
70.0 42.25 4.43 42.25 70.0
STA
52.50
STA
25.75
STA
5.25
EMPENNAGE STATIONS R6--3
EMPENNAGE STATIONS
FIGURE 6--3
6--00--03
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 7
LIFTING AND SHORING

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 7
LIFTING AND SHORING
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
7--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
7--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
7--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
7--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
7-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 7
LIFTING AND SHORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
7--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sling Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
7--10--00 -- JACKING 7--20--00 -- SLING LIFTING

When it is necessary to raise the aircraft off the ground: The following procedures are recommended for sling
loading/lifting Mooney aircraft when aircraft is unable to
CAUTION
be flown from its position under its own power.
Do not raise the aircraft on jacks, out of doors,
when wind velocity is over 10 MPH. Jacks should WARNING
be on hard surface. Lifting aircraft with sling should be done only
with a “no wind” condition. Aircraft may have a
1. Install wing jack points (2) (Mooney P/N tendency to be unstable if windy conditions ex-
010000--000) in tiedown mounting holes outboard of ist.
each main landing gear. Install Nose Landing Gear jack
1. Drain all fuel from aircraft (refer to Chapter
point (1) (threaded, longshaft jackpoint, Mooney P/N
28--30--00).
010038--001) into threaded receptacle (located under
the cowling at Fuselage Station --5.51). 2. All flight control surfaces must be secured if aircraft
is to be sling loaded by helicopter.
2. Use standard aircraft jacks at both wing hoist
3. Obtain two (2) 10 to 12 inch width, web slings of
points (wing tiedown eyebolt receptacles) outboard of
sufficient strength to lift aircraft weight (approximately
the main landing gears and at the nose landing gear
2500 to 3000 lbs. without fuel) and of sufficient length to
(extended shaft) jack point. While holding wing jack
provide a non--squeezing force on fuselage surface as
points in place, raise jack to firmly contact jack point.
aircraft is being lifted. (i.e., Logging slings have been
3. Raise aircraft, keeping wings as nearly level as successfully used in the past).
possible. 4. Position one sling in front of wing leading edge and
4. Secure safety locks on each jack. one sling aft of wing trailing edge. It is recommended
WARNING that a rubberized non--slip cushion material be placed
Do not use propeller jacks to lift aircraft. under the fuselage bottom and up the sides of each
sling. Slings should be centered over fuselage bulk-
CAUTION heads or as close to bulkheads as possible.
When lowering aircraft on jacks, bleed off pres-
sure on all jacks simultaneously and evenly to 5. Position a spacer bar (beam) of sufficient length
keep aircraft level as it is being lowered. and compression strength between both slings to keep
slings from from being pulled toward center of lift point
CAUTION and damaging wing, particularly the trailing edge and
Individual wheels may be raised without raising flap areas. This spacer bar should be several feet
entire aircraft. Wheels not being raised should be above top of the aircraft fuselage to prevent webbing
chocked fore and aft. from also damaging aluminum fuselage skins during lift
NOTE phase.
It is not recommended to use tail--tie down fitting 6. Aircraft should normally not have any tendency to
during jacking process to lift nose wheel off rotate laterally if all fuel has been drained and normal
ground. equipment is on board.
CAUTION 7. When slings are in place and spreader bar is in
Do not leave aircraft on jacks for extended peri- position, slowly begin lifting to see if slings will remain in
ods while a tailstand is in place. The wing jack(s) position and not slip to a position between bulkheads
may bleed down and put excessive loads on the and damage aluminum fuselage skins.
front jack point and tailcone. 8. If both slings and spreader bar look secure and in
position, continue lifting no higher than necessary and
move aircraft to desired location. If distance of travel to
desired location is very far away, slow, smooth move-
ment is essential.
9. When in position to lower, proceed slowly and
smoothly until aircraft is on its landing gear firmly and
solidly.
10. Slings should be removed carefully.
11. Inspect aircraft for any damage which may have
occurred during the lifting process. A licensed A & P
technician should do this inspection.
7--10--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
7--20--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 8
LEVELING AND WEIGHING

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
8--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
8--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
8--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
8--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
8--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
8--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
8-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
8--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
8--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
8-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
8--00--00 -- LEVELING 3. Ground aircraft and drain fuel tanks per Section
12--10--02.
Place a spirit level on the leveling screws above the tail-
cone access door (see Figure 8--1) when leveling the 4. Add unusable fuel to each tank, (see Pilot’s Oper-
aircraft longitudinally. Level the aircraft by increasing or ating Handbook for proper quantity of unusable fuel).
decreasing air pressure in the nose wheel tire. Level 5. Fill oil to capacity (10 quarts).
aircraft laterally by placing level across center seat
tracks forward of wing spar. Front seats must be in the 6. Position a 2000--pound capacity scale under each
full forward position when weighing. of the three wheels.
7. Level aircraft as described in Section 8--00--00 and
8--00--01 -- WEIGHT AND BALANCE center nose wheel.
To weigh aircraft, select a level and draft free work area, 8. Weigh the aircraft.
then: 9. Find reference point by dropping a plumb--bob
1. Check for installation of all equipment as listed in from center of nose gear trunnion (retracting pivot axis)
the Weight and Balance Record, Section VI of POH/ to floor. Mark point of intersection on floor. Reference
AFM. Figure 8--1.
10. Locate longitudinal centerline of nose wheel axle
2. Charlie Weight Installation. The aircraft, as delivered and main wheel axles in the same manner. Mark these
from the factory, has correct ballast added (if any) to points on floor.
compensate for installed equipment. If addition or dele-
tion of equipment, at a future time, affect the weight and 11. Measure horizontal distance from the reference
balance of the aircraft sufficiently to require a ballast point to main wheel axle center line (Lm/r).
change, the proper Charlie Weight Installation shown 12. Measure horizontal distance from center line of
on Figure 8--2 is to be used. nose wheel axle to center line of main wheel axles (Lm/
NOTE n).
See Section VI of Pilot’s Operating Handbook for 13. Record weights and measurements and com-
Weight and Balance reference data. pute the basic weight and CG as follows:
a. CG Forward of Main Wheels
LBS. IN. LBS. IN.

Distance Between Total Weight of CG Forward of
Weight @ Nose × Main & Nose Wheel ÷ Aircraft = Main Wheels
Axle Centers
(WN) (LM/N) (WT) (LM)
b. CG Aft of Datum (Station 0)
IN. 13 IN. IN. IN.
Distance from Cen-

ter Distance from Nose Result of Computa- CG (FUS STA)
Nose Gear Trunnion Gear Trunnion to tion Distance Aft of Da-
− − =
to Datum Above (a.) tum (Empty Weight
Center of Main CG)
Wheel
Axles (Horizontal)
(LM/R) (CONSTANT) (LM) (LC/G)
NOTE:
Empty weight includes unusable fuel and full oil (10 Qts.) and is computed with gear down and flaps up.
8--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
REF. POINT REFERENCE LEVEL REF.

(NOSE GEAR DATUM (STA. 0) (LEVELING SCREWS)
TRUNNION
STA. --13)
Lc/g Lm MEASUREMENTS
Lm/r L
M/R
Lm/n INCHES/CM
Wn Wr
Wl
L
Nose Jack Point @ Sta. --5.866 M/N
Main Jack Point @ Sta. 56.658 INCHES/CM
M8--2
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DIAGRAM

FIGURE 8--1
8--00--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CENTER of GRAVITY -- F.S. --mm

1050 1070 1090 1110 1130 1150
1150
2500
(Kg) LBs.
“ON” or “ABOVE”
LINE
1100
2400
1050
2300
A/C EMPTY WEIGHT
1000
2200
950 2100
NO BALLAST WEIGHT
REQUIRED
2000
900
1900
41 42 43 44 45
CENTER OF GRAVITY -- F.S.--Inches
EXAMPLE: Airplane empty weighs 2344# with C.G. at 42.15” from chart, this airplane requires
--505 Charlie Weight Installation. For licence calculate new weight, C.G. & Moment.
Airplane as Weighed 2344 x 42.15 = 98810
+--505 Charlie Weight +19 x 209.5 = 3981
Licenced Empty Weight 2363# 102791
Licenced Empty Weight C.G. Location = 43.5”

--505
--503
--501
R8--1
CHARLIE WEIGHT INSTALLATION

FIGURE 8--2
8--00--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
8--00--01
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 9
TOWING AND TAXIING

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 9
TOWING AND TAXIING
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
9--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
9--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
9--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
9--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
9-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 9
TOWING AND TAXIING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
9--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warm--up & Taxiing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
9-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
9--00--00 -- GROUND HANDLING 5. Check engine instruments for any sluggish re-
9--10--00 -- TOWING sponse to engine control movements. Repair any dis-
crepancies found.
Use a towbar (Mooney P/N 010034--509) for moving
aircraft. The towbar attaches to nose gear crossbar. 9--30--00 -- EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
One man can move the aircraft provided ground sur- 1. Engine Fire During Starting.
face is relatively smooth and tires are properly inflated.
When no towbar is available, or when assistance in A. Continue cranking engine with starter (30 sec-
moving aircraft is required, push by hand: (1) on wing onds maximum).
leading edges, (2) on wing tips, and (3) on inboard por- B. Set mixture control at IDLE CUTOFF.
tion of propeller blades adjacent to propeller hub. Tow-
ing aircraft by tractor or other powered equipment is C. Turn fuel selector handle to OFF position.
NOT RECOMMENDED. D. Open throttle to FULL.
CAUTION E. Turn Master Switch -- OFF
Exercise care not to turn nose wheel past its nor-
mal swivel angle of 11o left or 13o right of center. F. Push cabin heat control -- OFF.
Exceeding the turn limits shown on turn indica- G. If fire is not extinguished, proceed as follows:
tor may cause structural damage.
(1) Turn electrical switches OFF.
CAUTION
Maximum allowable damage to nose gear leg as- (2) Discharge fire extinguisher into engine
sembly is 1/32 inch dent. compartment through nose cowl openings and through
9--20--00 -- WARM--UP AND TAXIING lower engine cowl openings.
Before attempting to warm--up or taxi aircraft, ground 2. Fuselage or Wheel Well Fire. In case of fire in
personnel should be checked out by qualified pilots or wheel well (or in cabin or fuselage area), turn all fuel,
other responsible personnel. electrical, and ignition controls to OFF position before
evacuating aircraft to extinguish flames.
1. Start and warm--up engine. (Refer to POH/AFM.)
2. Taxi forward a few feet and check brake effective- 3. Electrical Fire. Circuit breakers (or circuit--breaker
ness. switches), that automatically interrupt flow of power
when an overload or short circuit occurs, protect all
3. While taxiing, make shallow turns to test nose gear electrical circuits (except the ignition--starter circuits).
steering. In the event of an electrical fire, immediately turn Mas-
4. Check operation of gyro instruments and turn ter and Alternator Field switches -- OFF. Make sure only
coordinator during turns. a fire extinguisher approved for electrical fires is used.
9--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
9--30--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 10
PARKING AND MOORING

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 10
PARKING AND MOORING
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
10--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
10--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
10--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
10--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
10-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 10
PARKING AND MOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
10--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
10--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
10--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage (Flyable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
10--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage (Prolonged) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
10--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
10--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mooring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
10-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
10--00--00 -- GENERAL 4. Raise aircraft to remove weight from tires, and

The parking brake is set by applying brakes and pulling block up wheels.
out on parking brake control knob. Release parking CAUTION
brake by pushing IN on parking brake control knob. If weight is not removed from tires, rotate wheels/
NOTE tires to a new position at least once each 30 days
There is no need to depress brake pedals to re- to prevent flat--spotting tires.
lieve pressure in brake lines during release of 5. See appropriate Lycoming Service Information for
parking brake control. engine preservation.
There are three tiedown points on aircraft, one on each CAUTION
wing, outboard of main gear (tiedown rings are to be Attach warning placards if preservation proce-
threaded into built in receptacles) and tail skid/tiedown dures make engine inoperable.
fitting at aft end of tailcone. 10--10--03 -- RETURNING TO SERVICE
10--10--00 -- PARKING If aircraft has been stored for an extended period of
When parking aircraft, place wheel chocks fore and aft time, it is advisable to perform a 50--hour periodic in-
of main wheels. The parking brake should be used for spection after completion of the following preliminary
short--duration parking only. steps:
CAUTION 1. Remove blocks from wheels. Check tire inflation.
Do not set parking brake when brakes are over- 2. Check and install batteries.
heated or when cold weather could freeze mois-
3. Remove tape and covers from openings.
ture and slush accumulation within the brake
mechanism. Do not set parking brake when air- 4. Remove warning placards (if any).
craft is tied down. For maximum protection, han- 5. Replace engine oil filter.
gar aircraft during severe weather and high
6. Clean engine oil suction and pressure screens.
winds.
7. Clean and check oil pressure relief valve.
10--10--01 -- STORAGE (FLYABLE)
8. Clean and check oil temperature bypass valve.
Outdoor storage requires adequate mooring and tie-
down facilities. The following precautionary measures 9. Fill engine sump with proper grade of lubricating
are recommended for keeping aircraft serviceable and oil.
ready--to--fly. 10. Clean and reinstall engine air--inlet filter.
1. Refer to paragraph 10--20--00 for mooring instruc- 11. Check ignition harness.
tions. 12. Clean and re--gap spark plugs.
2. Magneto switches . . . . . . . . . OFF 13. Check and clean fuel injector nozzles and
3. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED screens. Drain oil from fuel injector.
4. Mixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE CUTOFF 14. Check fuel tank vents for obstruction, and drain
sumps to remove moisture and sediment.
5. Rotate propeller 6 revolutions every seven days;
STOP propeller 45 to 90 degrees from original position. 15. Complete 50--hour and preflight inspections.
6. Keep fuel tanks filled at least one--half full to mini- 16. See appropriate Lycoming Service Information
mize moisture condensation. Keep batteries fully for servicing of the engine.
charged. 10--20--00 -- MOORING
7. Install protective covers over pitot head, engine When mooring aircraft out of doors:
cowl openings, static ports, etc.
1. Head aircraft into the wind.
8. Maintain a good wax finish on all exterior surfaces
2. Place chocks fore and aft of each main wheel.
(after 90 days from new paint job).
3. Fasten strong, ground-anchored chain or rope
10--10--02 -- STORAGE (PROLONGED) (600-pound tensile strength) to the installed wing tie
If the aircraft is to be stored for an extended period of down eyebolts. Allow a little slack in each tiedown rope/
time, the following steps are recommended for protec- chain.
tion: 4. Fasten strong ground-anchored chain or rope
1. Refer to paragraph 10--20--00 for mooring instruc- (600-pound tensile strength) through the tail skid.
tions. 5. For additional security, attach a rope to nose gear
2. Tape or cover all openings. and secure to a ground anchor.
3. Remove batteries, charge fully, and store in a cool 6. Lock controls by looping right front seat safety belt
place. through control wheel and drawing belt snug.
10--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
10--20--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 11
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 11
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
11--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
11--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
11--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
11--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
11-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
11--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
11--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Markings -- Exterior Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
11--20/30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placards, Exterior/Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
11-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
11--00--00 -- GENERAL 11--10--00 -- MARKINGS -- EXTERIOR PAINT

FAA required placards and markings. Exterior paint schemes for various model year aircraft
are depicted in M20M Illustrated Parts Catalog.
NOTE
All placards should be inspected for proper loca- 11--20/30--00 -- PLACARDS, EXTERIOR/INTERIOR
tion, readability and security during maintenance All required placards and their locations, both interior
actions. When an airplane has been painted, in- and exterior, are listed in Section II of the FAA Ap-
spect all placards to assure that they are not ob- proved Flight Manual and Pilot’s Operating Handbook
scured by paint. (AFM/POH).
11--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
11--30--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 12
SERVICING
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 12
SERVICING
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
12--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
12-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 12
SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
12--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
12--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oxygen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
12--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduled Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
12--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Induction Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
12--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
12--20--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires & Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
12--20--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
12--20--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
12--20--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
12-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
12--00--00 -- SERVICING erated by a control on the floor in the cabin. To drain the
12--00--01 -- SERVICING INTERVALS fuel gascolator:
A. Switch fuel selector valve handle to L and pull
The specified intervals (refer to Chapter 5) are consid-
ered adequate to meet average requirements under fuel drain valve control ring for 10 seconds.
normal operating conditions. It is advisable, however, B. Switch fuel selector valve handle to R and pull
to shorten service and maintenance intervals when op- fuel drain valve control ring for 10 seconds.
erating under abnormal environmental conditions, C. After draining, be sure fuel drain valve control is
such as extreme temperature ranges, dusty atmo- returned to the closed position and the valve is not leak-
spheric conditions, high humidity and moisture, unim- ing outside aircraft.
proved airport facilities, or unusual operating require-
ments. WARNING
During cold weather operation, frequently check
12--10--00 -- REPLENISHING fuel gascolator drain for ice formation by repeat-
12--10--01 -- FUEL TANKS ing procedures 1., A, B and C above.
Keep fuel tanks at least half filled to minimize con- NOTE
densation and moisture accumulation in tanks (Fuel If conditions conducive to fuel system icing ex-
capacity is given in Chapter 6). ist, Alcohol may be added to fuel tanks. It is ex-
tremely important to thoroughly BLEND the iso-
WARNING
propyl alcohol in with the fuel supply in
Ground aircraft and fuel service vehicle during
quantities not to exceed 3% of the total, by vol-
refueling. Permit no smoking or open flame with-
ume.
in 50 feet of aircraft or vehicle.
2. Defueling. Fuel tanks may be drained by one of
WARNING
several methods: pumping fuel out with electric boost
Each fuel tank is vented to the atmosphere at its
pump, siphoning fuel through the filler ports, or remov-
outboard aft corner; vent openings are on the
ing tank quick drain valves.
lower wing surface. Check vents for obstructions
before each flight. WARNING
Allow no smoking or open flame within 50 feet of
Exercise following precautions when handling fuel
the defueling area. Ground aircraft and fuel con-
around aircraft.
tainer during all defueling operations.
Isolate aircraft to outdoor, secure area:
A. To defuel aircraft using electric boost pump (Use
-- Keep aircraft away from ignition source. auxiliary power supply):
-- Ground aircraft (and any external fuel pump sys- (1) Disconnect fuel line from electric boost pump
tem, if used) properly. outlet at the fitting forward of the firewall.
-- Use suitable container(s) for fuel storage. (2) Connect a flexible line to output fitting that will
-- Have operating fire extinguisher and authorized reach fuel receptacle.
personnel available. (3) Turn fuel selector valve to tank to be drained,
-- Use trained personnel for all fueling and/or de- and remove filler cap from fuel filler port.
fueling procedures. (4) Turn boost pump ON until tank is empty. Re-
12--10--02 -- FUEL DRAINS peat steps (3) and (4) to drain other tank.
A fuel--drain valve is located in the aft inboard corner of (5) To completely drain fuel system also drain
each tank to provide for drainage of moisture and sedi- wing tank sumps and fuel gascolator valve sump until
ment. Use the small plastic cup furnished with the fly- fuel stops running.
away kit to drain fuel sumps. Drain wing tank sumps NOTE
and gascolator before first flight of the day and after When defueling using removable tank quick
each fuel service to inspect for water and/or contamina- drains, it is only necessary to remove the drains
tion. Continue draining until free of water or contamina- and to operate the gascolator drain.
tion. 12--10--03 -- ENGINE OIL
WARNING Check engine oil level after engine has been stopped
After servicing aircraft with fuel, wait at least five long enough for oil to drain back into sump. The oil filler
minutes for moisture and sediment to settle be- cap access door is located in the top cowling. Any lubri-
fore draining and checking both, the fuel tank cating oils conforming to MIL--L--22851 or SAE J1899,
sumps and the fuel selector valve drain. or as approved by Lycoming, are acceptable for use af-
1. Fuel Gascolator Drain. The fuel gascolator is at the ter break--in period. Approved products and engine oil
lowest point in the fuel system and has a drain valve op- viscosity requirements are shown in Chapter 5--20--07.
12--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
CAUTION The oil and filter should be changed at 25 hour flight op-
The terms “detergent”, “additive”, and “com- eration intervals or every four months (ref. Lycoming SI
pounded” used in this manual are intended to 480A). Use Lycoming filter or approved equivalent.
refer to a class of aviation engine lubricating oils 12--10--04 -- OXYGEN SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
to which certain substances have been added to
improve them for aircraft use. These terms do The oxygen cylinders, when fully charged, contain
not refer to such materials commonly known as approximately 77 cubic feet or 115.7 cubic feet of avia-
“top cylinder lubricant”, “dopes” and “carbon tors breathing oxygen (Specifications No.
remover” which are sometimes added to fuel or MIL--O--27210). Recharging of this oxygen cylinder
oil. These products may damage the engine and should be accomplished by using the appropriate Scott
therefore, should not be used. Under no circum- recharging fittings to the pressure shown on (Figure
stances should automotive oil be used, since 12--1), Pressure vs. Temperature Table.
such oils could cause engine damage. WARNING
Oil Recommendations for New--Engine or Newly Over- Oil, grease or other lubricants in contact with
hauled Engine Break--IN. oxygen create a serious fire hazard; such contact
New or newly overhauled engines should be operated must be avoided when handling oxygen equip-
on aviation grade ashless dispersant oil [ref. Lycoming ment.
SI 1014 ( )] Break--in oil and filter should be changed af-
ter the first 25 hours of operation.The aircraft is deliv-
ered from Mooney with proper break--in oil
(MIL--L--22851 or SAE J1899.
AMBIENT TEMPERA- FILLING PRESSURE AMBIENT TEMPERA- FILLING PRESSURE

TURE DEGREES F PSIG TURE DEGREES F PSIG
0 1650 50 1875
10 1700 60 1925
20 1725 70 1975
30 1775 80 2000
40 1825 90 2050
OXYGEN PRESSURE VS TEMPERATURE TABLE

FIGURE 12--1
NOTE To clean the dry--type induction air filter:
The oxygen cylinder should not be run down to 1. Direct a jet of air from inside of filter out. Cover en-
less than 100 P.S.I. Below this pressure, atmo- tire filter area with air jet.
spheric contamination of the cylinder may occur, CAUTION
requiring valve removal, cylinder cleaning and Do not use a compressor unit with a nozzle pres-
inspection at an FAA approved repair station. sure greater than 100 P.S.I. to clean filter.
NOTE 2. Inspect for damage or ruptures by holding filter be-
Refer to Section 35--00--00 for periodic bottle fore a light or by holding light bulb inside filter. If damage
pressure check. is evident, replace damaged filter with new filter.
NOTE
Any time fittings are disconnected on the oxygen sys-
If filter shows an accumulation of carbon, soot,
tem, the threads should be treated with Tetrafluoroe-
or oil, continue with cleaning steps 3 through 5.
thylene tape (MIL--T--17720). Prior to reconnection, the
system should be checked for leaks with leak testing 3. Soak filter in nonsudsing detergent for 15 minutes;
compound (MIL--L--25567). If no leaks are found, wipe then agitate filter back and forth for two to five minutes
system clean and dry. to free filter element of deposits.
4. Rinse filter element with a stream of clean water
12--20--00 -- SCHEDULED SERVICING
until rinse water is clean.
12--20--01 -- INDUCTION AIR FILTER 5. Dry filter thoroughly. Do not use light of air above
180o F. for filter drying.
The importance of keeping the induction air filter clean
cannot be overemphasized. A clean filter promotes fuel 6. Check alternate air door for proper operation and
economy and longer engine life. The dry--type filter can sealing.
usually be blown clean six to eight times within 500 7. Reinstall filter in aircraft. Make sure of proper seal-
hours or one year before replacement is required. ing and security.
12--10--04
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
12--20--02 -- BATTERIES CAUTION

Current production aircraft utilize low resistance, valve Do not fill reservoir while parking brake is set.
regulated, sealed lead acid batteries. These batteries Use only hydraulic fluid (red), per specification
are factory permanently sealed and require no addi- MIL--H--5606. Do not fill reservoir higher than two inch-
tional electrolyte or water. es below filler port.
CAUTION 12--20--05 -- HYDRAULIC BRAKES (Bleeding)
If cleaning with bicarbonate of soda, do not allow CAUTION
bicarbonate of soda to enter battery cells -- per- Fluid in the wheel cylinders may be under high
manent damage will result if soda mixes with pressure due to heat or expansion. Therefore, be
electrolyte. sure parking brake is released prior to beginning
Rinse battery with clean water. Wipe clean with a dry hydraulic system servicing. For best results, use
cloth. To retard corrosion, coat terminals with petro- a hydraulic pressure service unit (pressure pot)
leum jelly after cleaning and tightening them. to back bleed the system through wheel cylinder
bleeder valves.
As determined by battery type and manufacturer’s in-
structions, service batteries with distilled water to main- SINGLE BRAKE SYSTEM (Ref. Figure 12--2)
tain electrolyte above plates. After adding water in 1. Remove hydraulic fluid reservoir filler plug, and
freezing weather, charge battery long enough to mix install a suitable fitting for attaching a flexible drain line.
electrolyte and water. Keep battery electrolyte above a
2. Immerse open end of drain line into a hydraulic
specific gravity of 1.225 to avoid freezing.
fluid container or catch container containing
To service battery(ies): MIL--H--5606 fluid.
CAUTION 3. Attach pressurized hydraulic fluid service unit to
Battery gases may be explosive. wheel cylinder bleeder valve and open valve. Hydraulic
1. Remove battery caps. Check electrolyte and ser- service unit should be free of air prior to servicing air-
vice battery as required. craft system.
2. Check battery mounting area for corrosion and 4. Feed fluid from service unit into brake system.
spilled electrolyte. To clean cables, terminals, mount- Check for air bubbles at end of drain line immersed in
ing area and battery case, use a solution of bicarbonate fluid.
of soda and clean water to neutralize corrosion and 5. When fluid is flowing, slowly depress pilot’s brake
spilled electrolyte. pedal by hand and slowly release. Repeat three (3) to
CAUTION four (4) times.
When cleaning, do not allow bicarbonate of soda 6. Allow fluid to flow until clear of air bubbles.
to enter battery cells -- permanent damage will 7. Close wheel cylinder bleeder valve; remove ser-
result if soda mixes with electrolyte. vice line.
3. Rinse battery with clean water. Wipe clean with a NOTE
dry cloth. Brake pedal may need to be pulled back in order
4. To retard corrosion, coat terminals with petroleum for fluid to bleed back into reservoir.
jelly after cleaning and tightening them. 8. To bleed opposite brake, repeat steps 3 through 7.
5. Check battery vent lines (as applicable) for ob- DUAL BRAKE SYSTEM (Ref. Figure 12--2)
structions, line kinks, etc.
1. Remove hydraulic fluid reservoir filler plug, and
12--20--03 -- TIRES AND WHEELS install a suitable fitting for attaching a flexible drain line.
Keep tires at recommended air pressure. (Refer to 2. Immerse open end of drain line into a hydraulic
Chapter 6--00--01. fluid container or catch container containing
1. Check tires for wear, cuts and bruises. MIL--H--5606 fluid.
2. Check valve stems for evidence of tire slippage or 3. Attach pressurized hydraulic fluid service unit to
pulling. wheel cylinder bleeder valve and open valve. Hydraulic
service unit should be free of air prior to servicing air-
3. Check wheels for damage.
craft system.
4. Check wheel bearings for condition and lubrication 4. Feed fluid from service unit into brake system.
(Ref. Chapter 32) Check for air bubbles at end of drain line immersed in
12--20--04 -- BRAKE RESERVOIR fluid.
Frequently check brake reservoir for proper fluid level. 5. When fluid is flowing, slowly depress co-pilot’s
See Chapter 12--20--05 for location. See Section brake pedal by hand and slowly release. Repeat three
5--20--07 for proper fluid. (3) to four (4) times.
12--20--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
6. Allow fluid to flow until clear of air bubbles. F. Blow moisture away from areas that may trap &
7. Close wheel cylinder bleeder valve; remove ser- accumulate water, IE. engine mount at firewall attach
vice line. points (inside cupped portion of tubing).
NOTE 2. WINDSHIELDS, WINDOWS AND DOORS
Brake pedal may need to be pulled back in order
for fluid to bleed back into reservoir. A. Flush windshield and windows with water prior
8. To bleed opposite brake, repeat steps 3 through 7. to wiping. Never wipe while dry.
12--20--06 -- CLEANING B. Remove grease or oil with a soft cloth saturated
Cleanliness is a major prerequisite to adequate inspec- in kerosene.
tion and maintenance of an aircraft. Cleanliness en-
hances the appearance of an aircraft and reduces the CAUTION
probability of corrosion. Never use gasoline, benzene, carbon tetrachlo-
ride, alcohol, acetone, fire extinguisher fluid, lac-
1. EXTERIOR quer thinner, deicing fluids, or household win-
A. Before washing aircraft exterior, cover brake dow cleaning sprays on windows or windshields.
discs, pitot head, and static ports. Such solvents will soften or craze the Plexiglass
B. Flush away loose dirt and mud. surface.
C. Wash exterior with a mild aircraft detergent in C. Clean windows and windshields with an anti--
cool water and a soft cleaning cloth or chamois. Rinse static Plexiglass cleaner.
away soap film.
CAUTION NOTE
Do not use so called “mild household” deter- Minor scratches or abrasions may be polished
gents to wash aircraft exterior. Such detergents out by using Plexiglass re--surfacing kits, i.e.,
may damage finish and corrode aluminum com- Micro--Mesh, available from aircraft accessory
ponents. suppliers.
CAUTION D. Check door seals for damage that could cause
Do not apply wax or use pre--wax cleaners during leakage.
initial paint curing period. Use only mild aircraft
detergent and cool water when washing exterior E. Check cabin and baggage door mechanism for
during the first 90 days after repainting. proper working order.
D. To remove heavy oxidation film, use a pre--wax 3. ENGINE COMPARTMENT Accumulation of dirt
cleaner. and oil within the engine compartment creates a fire
E. Apply an exterior--finish wax recommended for hazard and hampers inspection procedures.
protection of urethane enamel. Apply a heavy coating
of wax to leading edges of wings, empennage, and A. Wash engine cowling and engine compartment
nose section to reduce drag and abrasion. down using a non--flammable solvent.
CAUTION B. Dry engine cowling and engine compartment af-
When fuel, hydraulic fluid, or other fluid contain- ter washing.
ing dye is spilled on painted surfaces, remove it
at once to prevent staining. Flush away spilled 4. CABIN INTERIOR
battery electrolyte immediately with water. Treat
exposed area with bicarbonate of soda solution Use normal household cleaning practices for routine in-
followed by thorough washing with a mild air- terior care. Refer to Chapter 25 for detailed cabin interi-
craft detergent solution. or care instructions.
12--20--06
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
PILOT
PARKING
BRAKE
RESERVOIR
WHEEL WHEEL
BRAKE INSTALLATION
A C
PILOT CO-PILOT
A C B D
PARKING
BRAKE
RESERVOIR
WHEEL WHEEL
DUAL BRAKE INSTALLATION
R12--1
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM SCHEMATICS

FIGURE 12--2
12--20--06
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
12--20--06
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES --
AIRFRAME
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES -- AIRFRAME
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
20--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20--00--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
20-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 20
STANDARD PRACTICES -- AIRFRAME
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
20--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
20--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skin Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
20--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion Detection & Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
20--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
20--00--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Pressure System Lines/Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
20-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
20--00--00 -- GENERAL nance, Preventive Maintenance, Rebuilding and Alter-

This chapter of the manual discusses treatment of met- ation and Sub Parts A, D and E of FAR 65, Certification.
al surfaces for corrosion control and the identification of Advisory Circular 43.13--1( ) outlines inspection and re-
skin panels for replacement purposes. Those who in- pair practices acceptable to the F.A.A. Administrator.
spect or repair aircraft should consult FAR 43, Mainte-
20--00--01 -- SKIN SPECIFICATIONS
STA STA STA STA STA

210.97 147.75 103.50 59.25 24.50
STA
193.50
5 4 3 2
6
18
7
15
8
13
19
12
17 11 10 16
14 9
R20--1
INDEX SKIN MATERIAL INDEX SKIN MATERIAL

NO. THICKNESS NO. THICKNESS
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.063 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 12. . . . . . . . . . . 0.025(c) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 13. . . . . . . . . . . 0.020(a) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.040 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 14. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.032 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.040 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 15. . . . . . . . . . . 0.040(b) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 16. . . . . . . . . . . 0.040(d) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
6. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 17. . . . . . . . . . . 0.016(a) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
7. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.032 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 18. . . . . . . . . . . 0.050(b) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
8. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.040 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 19. . Polyester Glass--Fiber Reinforced
9. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (a) Same thickness on top and bottom.
10. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (b) Top of wing only.
11. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (c) Top aft flap skin (hat section).
(d) Top inboard flap skin.
WING SKIN PANELS
FIGURE 20--1
20--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
STA
14 6 7 1 2 --5.375
6 8 5 4 3
STA
3.68
12
10 1
STA STA STA STA STA STA STA

211.50 176.00 142.00 100.00 53.00 21.80 --5.00
9 11 1 6 5 13 5 R20--2

1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.032 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
2. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.040(d) . . . . . . . . . . 2024 --0 CLAD 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.032 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
3. . . . . . . . . . . 0.025(c)(b) . . . . . . . . 2024 T--4 CLAD 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.032 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025(a) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
5. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025(b) . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 14. . . . Polyester Glass--Fiber Reinforced
6. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (a) Left side only.
7. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (b) Right side only.
8. . . . . . . . . . . 0.032(d)(e) . . . . . . . . . 2024 --0 CLAD (c) 0.032 can be used.
9. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (d) Heat treated to T--42 condition after forming.
(e) Shell.
FUSELAGE SKIN PANELS
FIGURE 20--2
20--00--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
4
5 4 1
STA STA 7 9
42.25 3 42.25
STA
25.75
11
6 6 12 13
R20--3

1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 8. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 9. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 10. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.032 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 11. . Polyester Glass--Fiber Reinforced.
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 12. . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020 . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
6. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD 13. . . . . . . . . . . 0.025(a) . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD
7. . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 . . . . . . . . . . 2024 T--3 CLAD (a) Heat treated to T--42 condition.
EMPENNAGE SKIN PANELS
FIGURE 20--3
20--00--02 -- CORROSION DETECTION & PREVEN- 1. Types of Corrosion -- Aluminum
TION Corrosion normally appears in one or more of four
Most metallic fabrication materials are susceptible to forms. Each type of corrosion can be precluded or con-
corrosion. Corrosion may occur on aircraft in any cli- trolled by a preventative maintenance program.
mate, but it will be a problem more often in climates A. Chemical Corrosion.
where the aircraft is exposed to salt air or high humidity, Chemical corrosion normally occurs where battery acid
or where there are industrial contaminants in the atmo- or exhaust gases come in contact with metal surfaces.
sphere. The aircraft should be inspected frequently to A few simple precautions will prevent chemical corro-
detect and correct corrosion before serious damage sion.
occurs. (1) Be sure battery vents are free from obstruc-
Any form of corrosion should be removed at once. If it is tions at all times.
necessary to remove paint, only an approved aircraft (2) Repaint all scratches and worn spots found in
paint remover such as Eldorado PR--3400, (Eldorado areas painted with acid--resistant paint.
Chemical Co., Inc., 6700 Lookout Road, P.O. Box (3) If acid is spilled on metal surfaces, flush en-
32101, San Antonio, TX. 78216 or 11611 N. Meridian tire area with sodium bicarbonate and water. The solu-
St. #600, Carmel (Indianapolis), Indiana 46032, tion should be rinsed away at once and the area dried
800--531--1088) should be used. Paint removing sub- by driving all water from crevices with an air hose be-
stances left in metal crevices will cause further corro- fore wiping surface dry with a clean cloth.
sion. Turco 6898 (Turco Products, Inc., 6135 South
(4) Frequently clean exhaust gas deposits from
Central Ave., Los Angeles, California) will remove cor-
metal surfaces.
rosion from aluminum and treat the metal surface in
one application. This Section discusses corrosion B. Local--Cell Corrosion.
types and their prevention along with suggested proce- On bare metal surfaces, in an early stage development,
dures for corrosion protection of internal airframe sur- local--cell corrosion appears as a light, whitish powder
faces. deposit. Surface pits warn of advanced local--cell cor-
rosion. On painted surfaces, the first indication of corro-
sion will be evidenced by paint blistering.
20--00--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
(1) Intergranular Corrosion -- Selective attack NOTE

along grain boundaries of metal alloys is referred to as ACF--50 or equivalent can be fogged into fuse-
intergranular corrosion. Aluminum alloys 2024 and lage, empennage or wing skin areas. It is recom-
7075 are vulnerable to this type of attack. Aluminum ex- mended that electrical connections and electrical
trusions may contain non--uniform areas, which in turn components be protected (sealed off) during fog-
may result in galvanic attack along grain boundaries. ging procedures.
This type of corrosion is difficult to detect in its original
stages. When the attack is well advanced, the metal is NOTE
usually blistered or delaminated. This is referred to as FAA Advisory Circular 43--4 addresses corrosion
“exfoliation”. It is very difficult to completely remove and problems.
stop this type of corrosion, and replacement of the af- 3. Epoxy--polymide Painting.
fected part is recommended wherever possible.
Epoxy--polymide coating of internal airframe surfaces
C. Concentration Cell Corrosion will not eliminate the necessity for periodic inspections.
Corrosion forming under rivet heads, along faying sur- The most likely areas for corrosion to begin are in hid-
faces, at skin to longeron contact surfaces and other den crevices such as skin laps, under rivet heads or any
similar areas is called concentration cell corrosion. opening where moisture can collect. Periodic inspec-
Detection requires close inspection. Rivets must be re- tion of these areas is most important so that any corro-
moved and skin laps must be separated to remove con- sion which may be present can be detected and treated
centration cell corrosion. Use aluminum wool soaked in in its very earliest stages.
solvent such as methyl--ethyl--ketone to scour corro- When corrosion is detected, it should be treated as fol-
sion deposits from the surface before painting both fay- lows:
ing surfaces with epoxy--polymide primer and re--as-
sembling. A. Remove all corrosion product (usually white or
grey--white powder on aluminum) from the corroded
D. Galvanic Corrosion area down to sound metal or up to 10% of original thick-
Dissimilar metals, such as stainless steel and alumi- ness. Consult with Mooney Airplane Company, Inc.
num, in contact with each other sometimes develop Customer Service for recommendations.
galvanic corrosions. To remedy this form of corrosion, (1) If the base metal is aluminum, clean off the
separate the parts, remove corrosion, and paint both corrosion product by scrubbing with aluminum wool or
surfaces with epoxy--polymide primer before reassem- a non--metallic scouring pad such as the nylon pads
bling. made by the Carborundum Company, P.O. Box 277, Ni-
2. Corrosion Prevention agara Falls, N.Y. 14302.
A. Thoroughly examine unpainted metal surfaces (2) If the base metal is steel, remove the corro-
at inspections and check corrosion when found. Care- sion product with emery cloth (320 grit or finer) or steel
fully examine seams, lap joints, and crevices where wool.
moisture or dirt can collect. Areas exposed to exhaust (3) If the corrosion is too advanced to remove by
gases require frequent inspection and cleaning. the light mechanical cleaning methods of (1) and (2),
B. Corrosion may attack metal even though the refer to Advisory Circulars 43.13--1( ) and/or 43--4 for
surface is painted. Inspect painted areas for a blistered alternate methods of cleanup and repair.
or scaly appearance that warns of corrosion below the (4) Chemical cleaning solutions should be used
paint layer. with extreme caution on both aluminum and steel parts.
C. Use only liquid (non--alkaline) soap to wash the Such solutions are not recommended for use in areas
exterior airframe. Cover vent scoops when aircraft is where they cannot be easily and completely neutral-
being washed. Rinse aircraft exterior after exposure to ized.
salt air or industrial fallout. B. Wash all areas to be epoxy coated with a clean-
D. Since moisture promotes corrosion, thoroughly ing solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), Turco
and frequently inspect areas where water is likely to T--657, lacquer thinner, #3094 wash thinner (Pratt &
collect. Use an air hose to drive water from crevices be- Lambert, Inc., 25th and N.Y. Avenue, Wichita, Kansas)
fore wiping exterior surface dry after washing down. or similar solvents.
E. Hangar aircraft when not in use. (1) To get a good clean surface for epoxy priming
use a clean cloth or piece of cheesecloth and apply one
F. If battery acid is spilled on any part of the aircraft, of the solvents noted above. The surface should be
immediately wash the area with a solution of sodium bi- wiped dry with a second piece of clean cloth. Do not al-
carbonate in water. Rinse with clear water and dry with low the solvent to dry on the cleaned area as it will rede-
clean towels. posit dissolved soil and grime upon evaporation.
20--00--02
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CAUTION wiped on and wiped off before it evaporates. If the sol-

Wipe solvents are generally flammable and toxic vent is allowed to evaporate, it will redeposit the soils
and should not be used without adequate ventila- and paint that were being carried. Any scouring re-
tion and fire precautions. quired should be done at this point. Scouring with nylon
C. Apply epoxy primer to cleaned area by spray or pads or aluminum wool may be done dry or wet with
brush. If area needs to have a finish coat applied it one of the wipe solvents listed above. After the old
should be applied within time frame specified by epoxy paint, grime, etc. has been loosened and removed, the
primer manufacturer. scoured area should be wiped with a tack rag, and
again cleaned with fresh wipe solvent. The part should
20--00--03 -- PAINTING now be ready for priming and painting.
The exterior is painted with urethane enamel. When ex- (b) On steel -- Remove all grease, grime, loose
posed to humid salt air or to an atmosphere having cor- paint, etc. by wiping with a wipe solvent and rags. Do
rosive fallout, the aircraft should be hangared when not not allow the wipe solvent to evaporate. Wipe it dry!
in use. Steel parts may be cleaned to bare metal by sanding
1. Paint Repairs. with emery cloth or steel wool. If the parts are remov-
A. Materials. able, they can be cleaned by sandblasting. Regardless
of the scouring method, all parts should be wiped with a
(1) Aluminum wool, nylon scouring pads, 320 grit tack rag and cleaned with fresh wipe solvent. The part
or finer emery cloth or steel wool. should now be ready for priming and painting.
(2) Tack rags.
C. Priming and Painting.
(3) Wipe solvents such as: methyl--ethyl--ke-
tone, T--657 -- (Turco Products, Inc.); #3094 wash thin- (1) On aluminum -- Cleaned and dried surfaces
ner -- (Pratt & Lambert, Inc.); lacquer thinner or equiva- to be painted should be coated with a wash primer con-
lent solvents. forming to MIL--C--8514 or MIL--P--15328. Read and
follow the manufacturer’s instructions carefully. The
(4) Body putty or aerodynamic filler such as: wash primer should be applied to attain a dry film thick-
Flex--Bond -- (Taylor & Art Plastics); Flex -- (3M Co.); or ness of 0.3 to 0.4 mils (a transparent film). A good wash
Cuz polyester body filler #6372 -- (NAPA [Martin Se- primer coating is a must since the top coating can be
nour Paints]). only as good as the primer coat. As a general rule the
(5) Compatible paints for the item (such as steel wash primer should dry from .05 to 1.5 hours but not
tubular structure or exterior skin) and for the year and more than 2 hours before application of the top or inter-
model being repainted. (Refer to Mooney Illustrated mediate primer coat.
Parts Catalog). When an intermediate epoxy primer coat is applied, it
(6) Thinners which are compatible with paints should be mixed very carefully per the manufacturer’s
being used, both for paint thinning and for burn--down instructions. It should be thinned per the manufactur-
thinners. er’s instructions and applied to a dry film thickness of
B. Cleaning Procedures. 0.8 to 1.0 MILS. The intermediate primer should be al-
lowed to dry a minimum of 0.5 to 1.5 hours depending
NOTE upon the application temperature and relative humidity.
Fiberglass components are attacked and deterio- Follow manufacturer’s instructions. The intermediate
rated by products containing the following chem- primer coat can be dry--scuffed lightly with No. 400 to
icals: Ketone, aliphatic esters, chlorinated hydro- No. 600 sandpaper prior to top coat application to pro-
carbons and slightly softened by most aromatic vide a higher gloss finish. As many coats of paint as de-
hydrocarbons. sired may be applied. A higher gloss will be attained if
(1) Fuel Servicing Decal Removal: the surface is scuffed lightly and tack rage cleaned be-
(a) Cover the decal with a hot, wet towel for tween each coat.
approximately 2 minutes. (2) On steel -- The same general procedure used
(b) Lift one corner of the decal and slowly re- on aluminum can be applied to steel. However,
move. MIL--P--8585 primer or epoxy primer is recommended
for the steel coat. If epoxy primer is used, it should have
(2) Remove all old loose paint by one of the fol- a wash primer (MIL--C--8514) pre--treatment.
lowing methods:
D. Painting.
(a) On aluminum -- for uniformity of finish ap-
pearance, the entire skin panel should be prepared for (1) Apply three coats of white base and/or finish
repainting. If the paint is in very bad condition or if a filler color, allowing three to five minutes between coats de-
is to be used, remove all of the paint by use of lacquer pending upon weather conditions. Allow five to ten min-
thinner, MEK or similar solvent. Careful application of utes between coats in cold, dry weather; in humid
paint stripper is acceptable. The solvent should be weather, allow fifteen minutes between coats.
20--00--03
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
(2) Use a small round watercolor brush trimmed NOTE

to a point for application of undiluted touch--up paint to Never use abrasive polish compounds or harsh
small scratches and bare spots. Do not thin acid resist- soaps and detergents on urethane finishes. Once
ant black paint or exterior finish touch--up paint for the surface gloss is damaged it cannot be re-
brush--on application. stored by polishing.
20--00--04 -- LOW PRESSURE SYSTEM HOSES/
NOTE
LINES
M20M aircraft are painted with Pratt--Lambert
“Acry--Glo” urethane enamel. Inquiries concern- Any low pressure line, (Static, Vacuum, Drain, etc.)
ing application of this finish should be directed may be spliced to replace a section of damaged line.
to: Sherwin--Williams (was Pratt & Lambert), P.O. Short sections of hose may be spliced together to pro-
Box 2153, Wichita, KS. 67201. duce planned lengths (max. 2 splices for any given
length). Hose couplers may be purchased or manufac-
CAUTION tured, barbed or beaded, high density polyethylene, ny-
Any flight control surface that is to be repainted lon, plated steel, or aluminum. Locally manufactured
should be stripped of all paint prior to repainting. couplers are to be made from aluminum tubing (any
A minimum thickness, cover coat should be ap- alloy), O.D. of tubing to match I.D. of hose, W.T.
plied to flight control surfaces. It is required that 0.028/0.035, bead both ends. Length to be approxi-
repainted control surfaces be removed and reba- mately 2.5 in. Use any type hose clamp to attach hose
lanced prior to flight per paragraph 27--91--00. to coupler.
20--00--04
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 21
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 21
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
21--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--51--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--51--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--52--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--52--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--53--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--53--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--54--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--55--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--55--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--56--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--57--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--57--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--58--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--59--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21--59--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
21-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
21--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
21--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
21--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling (Optional Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
21--51--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Leak Check (R134a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
21--51--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
21--51--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leak Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
21--52--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System R--134a Evacuation/Charging . . . . . . . . . . . 8
21--52--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
21--52--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Evaporation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
21--52--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
21--53--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
21--53--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
21--53--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Balancing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
21--53--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
21--54--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Drive Belt Inspection/Maint. . . . . . . . . 11
21--54--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belt Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
21--54--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belt Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . 11
21--54--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belt Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
21--54--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Belt Tensioning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
21--55--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Assembly Inspection/Maint. . . . . . . . . 13
21--55--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
21--55--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 13
21--55--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
21--55--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
21--55--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21--56--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator Module Assy. Inspection/Maint. . . . . . . 14
21--56--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator Coil Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21--56--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condensate Drain & Tubing Inspection . . . . . . 14
21--56--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cool Air Ducting Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21--56--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator Module Blower Motor Removal . . . 14
21--56--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Valve Removal & Replacement . . . 15
21--57--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting R--134a Air Conditioning System 16
21--58--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Inspection, Service/Maint. Schedules 18
21--59--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
21-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
21--00--00 -- CABIN VENTILATION SYSTEM recirculation of the warm cabin air, heat is absorbed in
the evaporator module(s). When the system is turned
The cabin environmental system consists of three ON the compressor is connected to the drive belt
standard ventilating systems that supply heated or through an electrically actuated clutch. The compres-
fresh air as the pilot or passengers prefer. FRESH AIR, sor compresses the R--134a refrigerant gas to a high
CABIN VENT and OVERHEAD VENTILATION. The pressure. The hot, high pressure gas then passes
cabin air and heat system controls and vents are lo- through the condenser coil where it is cooled and con-
cated on the console between the pilot and co--pilot densed into a warm liquid at constant pressure. The
seats. Individual fresh air outlets are located on each warm liquid is then routed into a receiver--dryer con-
side of the cabin side panels just forward of the pilots tainer where the liquid and any remaining gas are sepa-
and co--pilots outboard knees. The overhead ventila- rated and any moisture is absorbed. This liquid is then
tion system consists of individual outlets (Wemac directed to the evaporator module expansion valve
valves) located between and above each seat position. where the high pressure liquid is expanded to a low
The aircraft has a flow regulator system with the control pressure. The expansion process creates a super cool
knob located above and between the pilot’s and co--pi- gas which passes through the evaporator coil and ab-
lot’s head. The systems are basically trouble free but sorbs heat from the warm cabin air passing over the
inspection should be made at regular intervals to en- coils. The warm low pressure refrigerant then enters
sure proper operation. the R--134a compressor where the process starts all
21--40--00 -- HEATING over again.
Heat is supplied to the cabin through flexible hoses In addition to cooling cabin air, a refrigerant type sys-
connected to a heat distribution box assembly from a tem also removes a large percentage of moisture from
muff/shroud assembly located on the exhaust manifold the air.
on the engine. It is recommended that the condition of The air conditioning system consists of various compo-
these items be checked each time the cowling is re- nents installed in several areas of the aircraft (Figures
moved. This will provide a continuing check for the pre- 21--2 and 21--3). The Compressor Installation -- located
vention of carbon monoxide (CO) in the cabin. Any de- on the front of the engine or in tailcone (electrically driv-
teriorated flexible ducts should be replaced. Heat en), Switch Installation/on cabin lower console; Evapo-
shrouds should be inspected for cracks or other deteri- rator Installation/hat rack; Outlet Duct Installation/over
orations and repaired or replaced promptly. It is recom- head of the hat rack; Receiver--Dryer in Tailcone AFT of
mended that inspection of the exhaust system for any Hatrack; Air Inlet Installation/tailcone (R/H tailcone
leaks or cracks, at each maintenance action, be made panel); Diffuser Assembly/tailcone (R/H access panel);
and replace components or repair as needed. Condenser Installation/tailcone (R/H access panel),
21--50--00 -- COOLING (OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT) and Exhaust Duct/tailcone (lower tailcone).
GENERAL 21--51--00 -- SYSTEM LEAK CHECK PROCEDURE

(R--134a)
The type of cooling system installed in an aircraft oper-
ates on a closed vapor cycle concept using refrigerant Leak check of a refrigerant plumbing system is very im-
(R--134a) as the heat absorption media. Two versions portant to assure that the system maintains its charge
of freon compressor installation are available; electri- to provide the designed performance and reduce dam-
cally driven and engine driven. The (R--134a) Air condi- age to system components. Plumbing systems on air-
tioning System cools the aircraft in the same manner as craft are subject to excessive vibration and expansions
a cooling system in an automobile or home. However, or contractions due to extreme ambient temperatures
one major difference in the two systems is that the and altitudes. Therefore, a periodic check of the sys-
(R--134a) system contains components which are de- tem charge is required to determine if any loss or refrig-
signed to be light weight, compact, provide high perfor- erant has occurred.
mance and operate at extreme altitudes and ambient
1. The system leak check is required whenever the
temperatures.
following conditions occur:
REFRIGERANT (R--134a) SYSTEM OPERATION
A. New system plumbing installation.
The concept of air conditioning a room, cabin or cockpit
is actually very simple. Figures 21--1 and 21--3 show B. Component replacement in the plumbing sys-
refrigerant schematics for typical systems (refer to tem.
schematics in back of this Service Manual for specific C. Line or hose rupture.
electrical schematics). The refrigerant is the media
which absorbs the room or cabin heat. By continuous D. Loss of refrigerant charge.
NOTE
Refer to electrical schematics provided in this manual for schematics specific to your aircraft.
21--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
DRYER/
CONDENSER PRESSURE HAT RACK
SWITCH BULKHEAD
TUBE TUBE
HOSE HOSE
TUBE
~
HOSE
FAN/MOTOR EXPANSION
VALVE
FIREWALL
HOSE BULKHEAD TUBE
EVAPORATOR
HOSE
HOSE TUBE
FIREWALL HAT RACK

BULKHEAD BULKHEAD EVAPORATOR
COMPRESSOR
M21--1
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (ENGINE DRIVEN)

FIGURE 21--1
DRYER DUCT
CONDENSER ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION COMPRESSOR
EVAPORATOR INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
AIR
INLET EXHAUST SWITCH M21--2
DUCT INSTALLATION
AIR CONDITIONING COMPONENT LOCATIONS (ENGINE DRIVEN)

FIGURE 21--2
21--51--01 -- SPECIAL TOOLS AND/OR EQUIP- 4. R--134a refrigerant, 30 lb. cylinder
MENT REQUIRED
5. R--134a Refrigerant oil, (Ester RL--500S)
The following tools and/or equipment are required to
6. Leak check fluid, (soapy solution)
leak check a refrigerant plumbing system.
7. Assorted hand tools
1. Gaseous dry nitrogen, regulated source (0--500
PSIG) 8. Hand and eye protection
2. R--134a refrigerant charging manifold with gauges 9. Thread sealant, P/N 55431 (Loctite)
and hoses
10. Hose adapter (1/2 in. male acme to 1/4 in. female
3. Electronic leak detector flare)
21--51--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
DRYER/
CONDENSER PRESSURE HAT RACK
SWITCH BULKHEAD
TUBE TUBE
HOSE HOSE
TUBE
~
HOSE
FAN/MOTOR EXPANSION
VALVE
HOSE TUBE
EVAPORATOR
HOSE
HOSE TUBE
HAT RACK
BULKHEAD EVAPORATOR
COMPRESSOR M21--3
PLUMBING SCHEMATIC – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (ELECTRIC DRIVEN)

FIGURE 21--3
DRYER DUCT
CONDENSER ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION EVAPORATOR INSTALLATION
AIR
INLET EXHAUST COMPRESSOR
DUCT SWITCH M21--4
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
AIR CONDITIONING COMPONENT LOCATIONS (ELECTRIC DRIVEN)

FIGURE 21--4
21--51--02 -- LEAK CHECK PROCEDURE 4. Remove service port caps from A/C system.
The system must be evacuated prior to Leak Check CAUTION
Procedure. See Section 21--52--02. Compressor and receiver--dehydrator may be
pressurized by manufacturer with nitrogen gas.
1. Remove, if required, all panels, doors, shrouds, Open factory installed caps & plugs carefully.
etc. to gain access to component being leak checked.
5. Close all manifold gauge valves and verify hose
2. Remove, if required, any enclosures or access connections are tight.
doors to expose all tubing, hoses, fittings, etc. to the
6. Connect R--134a refrigerant charging manifold.
compressor--condenser module/evaporator module.
R--134a service gauges contain quick--connect fittings
3. Verify all aircraft and/or ground power is OFF. to minimize refrigerant loss. To install quick--connect,
21--51--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
push on firmly until locked (a ”clicking” sound is heard). 21--52--00 -- SYSTEM R--134a EVACUATION AND
Hold grip ring and pull to remove quick--connect fit- CHARGING PROCEDURE
tings. Charging the refrigerant (R--134a) system is required
7. Connect charging manifold YELLOW hose to a on new system installations, after an accidental line
regulated dry nitrogen source. break, component failure or when the system has ex-
cessive leaks. Due to the chemical nature of the refrig-
NOTE
erant, every precaution must be taken to protect the
An adapter is required to connect yellow charg-
service person from accidental exposure to the refrig-
ing hose to nitrogen source.
erant. See service precautions in Section 21--59--00.
CAUTION Only R--134a refrigerant must be used or damage to
Do not exceed 200 PSIG nitrogen pressure dur- the system will result. Overcharging the system with re-
ing leak check procedure or damage to expan- frigerant and/or oil will also result in system damage or
sion valve WILL result. reduction in performance and service life. The com-
8. Regulate nitrogen source to a pressure of 200 pressor is pre--charged with 5.0 oz. ESTER RL--500S
PSIG maximum. air conditioner oil. No additional oil is required to be
added to a new system.
9. Remove all shrouds, panels, flooring and any oth-
21--52--01 -- SPECIAL TOOLS AND/OR EQUIP-
er covering which prevents access to refrigerant fittings
MENT REQUIRED
or connections (if required).
The following tools and equipment are required to
10. Verify all plumbing connections are secure.
charge the refrigerant system:
CAUTION 1. Small hand tools and socket set
During this procedure protective eye wear and
gloves should be worn to prevent operator injury. 2. Vacuum pump, air or electric (0--30 in. hg.)
11. Slowly open high pressure (RED) manifold valve 3. Refrigerant, R--134a, 30 lb. cylinder
and allow system pressure to increase gradually until a 4. R--134a charging manifold, with gauges and
pressure of 200 PSIG is achieved. Allow time for sys- hoses
tem pressure to equalize across expansion valves. 5. Thermometer, 0--150o F
Note final system pressure.
6. Inspection mirror, adjustable
12. Apply soapy leak check fluid to each connection
7. Service light or flashlight
to locate leaks.
8. Hand and eye protection
CAUTION
Do not use any leak dye in R--134a system or 9. Shop towels
damage to system may result. 10. Refrigerant oil (Ester RL--500S))
13. Use thread sealant on all male fitting threads 11. Scale, 0--50 lbs.
(sparingly), staying off the first two (2) threads near 12. Reclaim/recycle cart (R--134a)
sealing surface. A light coating of R--134a refrigerant
oil must be applied to flare and/or o--ring to prevent 13. Hose adapter (1/2 in. male Acme to 1/4 female
metal galling/o--ring damage. Flare)
21--52--02 -- SYSTEM (R--134a) EVACUATION
NOTE
PROCEDURE
Do not apply oil to fitting threads.
Prior to charging the system with refrigerant, the sys-
CAUTION
tem must be evacuated for a minimum of 45 minutes to
Do not over tighten plumbing connections.
remove air and moisture which can cause the system
Stripped threads or cracked flares may result.
to perform incorrectly if not completely removed from
14. Tighten joints as necessary to stop leaks. system.
CAUTION 1. Verify power to system is OFF.
Vent system pressure very slowly to assure that 2. If required, perform leak check procedure de-
compressor oil is not vented with the nitrogen. scribed in Section 21--51--02.
Do not PERMIT air to enter the system.
3. Connect charging manifold to service ports (ref.
15. With system leak tight, turn nitrogen source OFF; Section 21--51--02, 4 through 6.
disconnect YELLOW charging hose from nitrogen
4. Connect manifold charging (YELLOW) hose to
source and slowly release nitrogen pressure to zero.
vacuum pump and turn pump ON.
16. Close manifold valve. NOTE
17. Replace all panels, doors and shrouds removed An adapter may be required to allow vacuum
for procedure. pump hookup.
21--52--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
5. Open both valves on charging manifold and ob- refrigerant until system internal pressure has stabi-
serve gauges. lized.
NOTE 6. Close manifold valves and verify system internal
Low pressure gauge ”BLUE”, will indicate vacu- pressure is 50 PSIG or greater.
um on lower range of gauge.
NOTE
6. Evacuate system for 30 full minutes. System vacu- If internal pressure is not above 50 PSIG, the low
um should attain 25/27 in. hg. in 10 to 15 minutes. pressure cutout switch will not close. To assure
7. Continue evacuating for an additional 15 minutes. an internal pressure of 50 PSIG, the R--134a cyl-
System should obtain 29--30 in. Hg. within that time inder must be heated to obtain a charge pressure
frame. of 70 -- 80 PSIG.
8. Close manifold valves and shut vacuum pump CAUTION
OFF. Vacuum in system must not change within 5 min- Do not heat R--134a container with open flame;
utes. container damage may result and possible injury
to operator. Heat with warm water or room tem-
CAUTION
perature. Do not store or heat refrigerant contain-
Any change in vacuum pressure or failure to
er at temperatures above 125o F.
achieve a minimum system pressure of 29 in. hg.
vacuum indicates the presence of a plumbing 7. Move aircraft to run--up area.
leak. Repeat leak check procedure; locate and 8. Start aircraft engine. Select ”MAX” on air condi-
repair all leaks. tioner switch. Idle aircraft engine at 1200--1800 RPM.
9. Disconnect manifold YELLOW service hose. Sys- Verify Alternator is charging.
tem is ready for refrigerant charging.
CAUTION
NOTE Do not operate system with high pressure (RED)
Excessive water and/or air in the system will valve open on the charging manifold gauge set.
cause pressure to rise/expansion valve freeze--
9. With system operating, observe the system dis-
up.
charge and suction pressure values and refrigerant
21--52--03 -- REFRIGERANT CHARGING PROCE- condition in the receiver--dryer sight glass.
DURE
NOTE
Charging the system with refrigerant is required on a A flashlight and inspection mirror are required to
new system installation or when ”topping off” an exist- observe sight glass during the system charging
ing system. There are various methods of charging re- procedure. Excessive bubbles in the sight glass
frigerant into the air conditioning system. These in- indicate a low refrigerant level.
clude using refrigerant recovery/recycle units, using a
charging cylinder, and direct charging using a scale. 10. With the R--134a cylinder connected to the
Refer to manufacturer’s instruction manual for recov- charging hose, charging container shutoff valve open
ery unit handling and operation. and hose purged, slowly open the suction manifold
valve (BLUE). The suction pressure will increase to
NOTE 60--70 PSIG while the R--134a refrigerant enters the
Two people are required for the following proce- compressor.
dure.
NOTE
1. Verify that all electrical power to the system is OFF.
As refrigerant enters the compressor, a slight
2. If required, repeat leak check and evacuation pro- increase in discharge pressure will be noted
cedures. (2--5 PSIG).
CAUTION 11. Continue to add refrigerant per the above proce-
Eye and hand protection must be worn during dure until the sight glass is clear of excessive bubbles
this procedure. when charged on a hot day (95--105o F).
3. Connect manifold charging hose (YELLOW) to NOTE
R--134a cylinder shutoff valve and open valve. A desired sight glass liquid condition is when
4. Crack hose fitting at manifold to purge air from only occasional bubbles are observed when
hose until refrigerant is obviously venting. If system recharging on a hot day (95--105o F).
frigerant charge is to be recorded, place refrigerant 12. Close suction manifold valve (BLUE) and let sys-
container on a 0--50 lb. scale and record initial weight tem operate for 5--10 minutes and then check sight
(Full system charge is approximately 2.2 lbs. of glass. If sight glass is not totally clear, open suction
R--134a). manifold valve and add a small quantity of refrigerant
5. Open both gauge valves on charging manifold and until 98% of bubbles disappear. Close manifold valve
allow refrigerant gas to enter system. Continue adding and let system stabilize.
21--52--03
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE adjusted to assure proper refrigerant flow. Any adjust-

Letting the system stabilize is required since the ment must not affect system suction and compressor
expansion valve is trying to stabilize to the pre- discharge pressures as outlined in Section 21--52--03,
set suction pressure value. 13. Changing expansion valve settings will also
CAUTION change evaporator air output temperatures.
Do not overcharge system or component and 21--53--01 -- SPECIAL TOOLS AND/OR EQUIP-
system damage may occur. Full system charge is MENT
approximately 2.2 lbs. of R--134a. The following tools and/or equipment are required to
13. With the system fully charged and operating, ob- perform expansion valve adjustment:
serve the suction and discharge pressures shown in 1. Assorted small hand tools.
the following chart.
2. Inspection mirror, adjustable
Typical values at various ambient temperatures, with 3. Thermometer, 0--150o F
hot cabins, are shown in the following chart:
4. Flashlight or service light
5. R--134a service manifold and gauge set
SUCTION DISCHARGE
PRESSURE PRESSURE 21--53--02 -- EVAPORATOR BALANCING PROCE-
O.A.T. (oF) DURE
(PSIG) (PSIG)
Evaporator balancing is required on all systems with
60--70 28 125--140 multiple evaporator modules. This process balances
80 30 170 +/-- 10 refrigerant flow between evaporators to achieve equal
evaporator air outlet temperatures. See Section
95 31 210 +/-- 10 21--53--03, 1 through 10 above prior to beginning steps
105 32 237 +/-- 10 below.
1. Access all evaporator modules and measure/re-
NOTE cord outlet air temperatures.
Whenever possible, the system should be
NOTE
charged on a hot day (90--100o F). If not, ”topping
Typical temperature difference of evaporator inlet
off” may be required for ambient conditions.
and outlet air is 25+/-- 5o F.
14. Allow system to operate for 10 minutes and then
2. If suction pressure is above the values outlined in
shutdown.
Section 21--52--03, 13, the adjustment screw of the
CAUTION evaporator expansion valve, which has lowest outlet
Do not allow aircraft engine temperatures to ex- temperature, must be turned OUT, in 1/2 revolution in-
ceed limits. crements.
NOTE 3. Adjust other expansion valve of evaporator that
After shutdown, both suction and discharge has higher temperature by turning adjustment screw
pressures will begin to equalize. Pressures IN, in 1/4 revolution increments.
should be equal in 60 -- 90 seconds. NOTE
15. Close refrigerant container shutoff valve (turn Proper evaporator balancing should not result in
C/W). Record the refrigerant container final weight and a change of the compressor suction pressure.
calculate system refrigerant charge as follows: Verify system pressures are within values shown
CHARGE (lb.) = W initial (lb.) -- W final (lb.) in Section 21--52--03, 13.
4. Allow system to stabilize 2--5 minutes; recheck
16. Turn knob on suction and discharge charging
evaporator outlet temperatures and repeat adjustment
hose quick coupler to closed position and disconnect
procedure if necessary. Evaporator outlet tempera-
hoses from service ports.
tures should be within 1--3o F of each other.
17. Remove YELLOW charging hose from refriger-
5. If evaporator outlet temperatures are equal and
ant container and store manifold gauge set.
suction pressure meets SECTION 21--52--03, 13, ser-
CAUTION vicing is complete. If not, repeat SECTIONS 21--53--02
Hand and eye protection must be worn during and 21--53--03.
this operation to prevent subcooled refrigerant CAUTION
from burning eyes or hands. Eye and hand protection should be worn during
21--53--00 -- EXPANSION VALVE ADJUSTMENT this operation.
PROCEDURE 6. Shut system and aircraft engine OFF. Replace all
Even though the automatic expansion valves are set by shrouds, enclosures, ducting as required; remove
the manufacturer there may be times when it must be charging manifold gauges and hose assemblies.
21--53--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
21--53--03 -- EXPANSION VALVE ADJUSTMENT 18. System contains multiple evaporator modules.
The expansion valve adjustment shall be performed in See Section 21--53--02, to balance evaporator mod-
accordance with, but not limited to the following: ules.
19. Replace all shrouds, covers and enclosures re-
1. Verify that system leak check and refrigerant
moved in step 2.
charging has been performed and system is operating
at typical values as outlined in Section 21--52--03, 13. 21--54--00 -- COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT INSPEC-
TION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
2. Remove all shrouds, covers or enclosures which
prevent access to the evaporator expansion valve ad- ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN COMPRESSOR
justment knob. (SN 27--0001 THRU 27--0325)
3. Verify R--134a manifold gauges and hoses are 1. System charge and belt tension should be
connected to service ports; manifold gauge set valves checked every six (6) months at a minimum.
closed. 2. Belt tension procedure:
4. Open both valves on charging hose quick connect A. With a spring scale, apply a load of 1.50--1.75
fittings. lbs. At belt mid--span between pulleys. Tighten belt un-
til a deflection of 0.10 inches results.
5. Remove expansion valves’ protective caps.
CAUTION
6. Verify that inlet to evaporator coil and blower duct- Do not over tension belt.
ing are free of any contamination or restrictions which
could alter air flow. 3. Compressor factory oil charge:
A. 5.0 oz. Emkarte RL100S Ester Refrigernat Oil
7. Move aircraft to run--up area. Start aircraft engine.
CAUTION
8. Select ”MAX” on air conditioner switch. Run en-
Do not use paraffin base grease or oil on fitting
gine at 1200--1800 RPM. Verify Alternator is charging.
or tubing.
9. Close cabin and baggage doors and allow system ENGINE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR
to operate for 5 minutes. (SN 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA)
10. Record compressor suction and discharge pres- When the compressor drive belt requires removal and
sures and evaporator air inlet and outlet temperatures. replacement, tension or alignment, the following proce-
NOTE dures will apply:
Typical temperature difference of evaporator inlet 21--54--01 -- BELT REMOVAL PROCEDURE
and outlet air is 25+/-- 5o F.
ENGINE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR
11. If suction pressure is above the values outlined in (SN 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA)
Section 21--52--03, 13, the adjustment screw of the 1. Verify all aircraft or ground power is OFF.
evaporator expansion valve, which has lowest outlet
temperature, must be turned OUT, in 1/2 revolution in- 2. Remove cowling to gain access to the compres-
crements. sor.
12. Adjust other expansion valve of evaporator that 3. Loosen jam nut on adjusting bolt of idler pulley.
has higher temperature by turning adjustment screw 4. Rotate idler pulley bracket to release tension on
IN, in 1/4 revolution increments. belt.
13. Wait 2--5 minutes for valves to stabilize until de- NOTE
sired pressure is obtained, or air outlet temperature is Alternator drive belt must be removed before
lowest possible. Re--adjust as necessary. freon compressor belt can be removed. Refer to
Chapter 24--31--01.
14. Monitor Engine temperatures and alternator out-
put. 5. Remove belt.
15. If suction pressure is below the values outlined in CAUTION
Section 21--52--03, 13, the adjustment screw of the Do not bend or twist the drive belt excessively
evaporator expansion valve, which has highest outlet during removal or damage may result.
temperature, must be turned IN, in 1/2 revolution incre- 6. Inspect belt for cracks or damage and clean any oil
ments. or other contamination from all pulleys and belt.
16. Adjust other expansion valve of evaporator that 21--54--02 -- DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT PROCE-
has lower temperature by turning adjustment screw DURE
OUT, in 1/4 revolution increments. ENGINE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR
17. Operate system for 5--10 minutes after expan- (SN 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA)
sion valve adjustment to verify setting. Evaporator out- 1. Verify belt size and part number (see Illustrated
let temperatures should be within 1--3o F of each other. Parts Catalog) before installing or damage may result.
21--53--03
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
2. Place new belt, or inspected and cleaned belt, clockwise (CW) to align belt on pulley. Belt MUST align
over compressor pulley, idler pulley, and drive pulley. directly over the compressor pulley. MAGNETO
SWITCH -- OFF.
CAUTION
During this procedure, do not sharply bend or NOTE
twist belt and do not allow belt to rotate on drive If belt is too far forward or aft on the compressor
pulley flange. Damage to belt may result. pulley, the idler pulley and drive pulley MUST be
adjusted forward or aft to allow belt to align di-
3. After belt is installed, rotate the compressor pulley rectly over compressor pulley.
0.3 -- 0.4 IN.

ALTERNATOR CHECK MIDSPAN
IDLER PULLEY DEFLECTION HERE
V--BELT
FREON
ALTERNATOR COMPRESSOR
FREON COMPRESSOR TENSION
IDLER PULLEY FREON COMPRESSOR ADJUSTING
IDLER PULLEY NUT
M21--5
DRIVE BELT TENSIONING

FIGURE 21--5
21--54--03 -- DRIVE BELT ALIGNMENT PROCE- B. Measure belt deflection under a five (5) lb. load
DURE at the center of the longest belt span. Correct deflection
ENGINE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR is 0.3 -- 0.4 inches (Fig. 21--5).
(SN 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA) NOTE
Align pulley V--grooves by adding/removing washers A spring loaded force gauge is required for this
supplied with Textron--Lycoming freon compressor procedure.
mounting kit . 8. If belt tension is not within the above tolerance,
21--54--04 -- DRIVE BELT TENSIONING PROCE- loosen adjusting nut and re--adjust the tension.
DURE WARNING
ENGINE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN BELT. Improper belt
(SN 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA) tracking or tension may cause belt damage.
1. Verify all freon compressor, starter/accessory 9. After five (5) hours of operation, recheck belt ten-
drive and idler pulley mounting hardware is tight and sion and adjust as required to maintain belt tension.
belt is properly aligned per Section 21--54--03.
2. Loosen nut on freon compressor idler pulley (Fig.
21--5).
3. Install new belt (for new belt installations only).
4. Tighten tension adjusting nut finger tight.
21--54--03
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
21--55--00 -- COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY INSPEC- NOTE

TION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Checking compressor oil quantity is required
only if an excessive amount of oil is observed
ENGINE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR
due to leaks or system has been vented very
(SN 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA)
quickly, thereby causing a loss of oil. An oil
The compressor assembly requires more inspection check can be made only when system is vented.
than maintenance since field repair with first line tech- See Oil Check Procedure, Section 21--55--05.
nicians is limited. Inspection consists of checking for 10. If visual check is good, replace any removed
excessive oil leaks, belt alignment/tension and refriger- components and secure all fasteners.
ant leaks. The compressor should be periodically
checked at 500--800 hours of operation in which the fol- 21--55--03 -- COMPRESSOR REMOVAL
lowing should be performed. 1. Verify aircraft power is OFF.
21--55--01 -- SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 2. Remove cowling to gain access to engine and
REQUIRED compressor.
1. Small hand tools and socket set 3. Connect refrigerant manifold gauge and hose as-
semblies to system service ports.
2. R--134a charging manifold, with gauges and
4. Recover system refrigerant charge per recovery
hoses
equipment manufacturers operating manual.
3. R--134a electronic leak detector 5. Loosen belt tension. See Section 21--54--04, for
4. R--134a refrigerant cylinder reverse procedure.
5. Leak check liquid (soapy solution) 6. Disconnect clutch wiring.

7. Loosen compressor mounting bolts.
6. Hand and eye protection
8. Remove belt from all three pulleys per Section
7. Thread sealant (Loctite # 55431) 21--54--01.
8. Dry nitrogen, regulated 9. Remove system suction and discharge hose con-
9. Isopropyl Alcohol, flush liquid nections and cap them off immediately.
WARNING
21--55--02 -- COMPRESSOR INSPECTION PROCE- All systems connections must be capped to pre-
DURE vent water, dust or other contaminates from en-
1. Verify aircraft power to system is OFF. tering system.
2. Remove cowling to gain access to compressor. 10. Remove compressor mounting hardware and lift
compressor from mounting bracket. Forward engine
3. Inspect belt for alignment per Section 21--54--03. baffle will be loosened during this procedure.
4. Inspect belt for tension per Section 21--54--04. 21--55--04 -- COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
5. Visually inspect compressor pulley for excessive If a new or rebuilt compressor is supplied without suc-
wear, nicks, cracks or looseness. tion and discharge swivel fittings or pulley, these parts
must be removed from the failed compressor and
6. Visually inspect compressor shaft for excessive oil installed on the new compressor. It is recommended
leaks. that a complete, new, compressor assembly be
NOTE installed.
If excessive oil is found, compressor should be NOTE
checked for leaks. Use fluid or leak detector as If failed compressor has contaminated system, a
required. If leak is found, compressor should be complete cleaning of system is required. Also,
replaced. If compressor has not been operated the receiver--dryer assembly must be replaced.
for 30--60 days or more, the dynamic shaft seal Flush system with an approved flush agent and
may have a small leak due to lack of oil on seal purge with dry nitrogen. Also, remove and clean
surface. Operation of system should eliminate expansion valves.
this type of leak. If not, replace compressor.
1. Lift compressor into support bracket and install
7. Check all fasteners for looseness. Re--torque as mounting hardware.
required. 2. Install either new or inspected and cleaned old belt
8. Visually inspect drive belt for cracks, wear and ex- on to all three pulleys per Section 21--54--02.
cessive oil. 3. Tighten mounting hardware.
9. Clean all oil and other contaminates from belt with 4. Verify alignment of belt on all pulleys and align per
clean shop rag. Section 21--54--03, if required.
21--55--00
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
5. Connect clutch wiring. 21--56--02 -- CONDENSATE DRAIN AND TUBING

CAUTION INSPECTION
New compressor may be supplied with nitrogen Verify that the evaporator condensate drain and asso-
pressure. Remove caps and vent slowly. ciated tubing is not blocked or tubing kinked. Clean and
8. Remove compressor suction and discharge fitting re--route tubing as necessary.
caps and connect system hoses. 21--56--03 -- COOL AIR DUCTING INSPECTION
NOTE Cool air ducting from the evaporator blower should be
Lightly apply R--134a refrigerant oil (RL--100S) on checked to assure that no excessive air loss is experi-
fitting o--ring and at contact surface between enced due to loose connections, cracked or kinked
tube bead and jam nut. Apply a small amount of hose. Repair as necessary.
thread sealant to male fitting threads (stay clear
21--56--04 -- EVAPORATOR MODULE BLOWER
of first 2--3 threads).
MOTOR REMOVAL
9. Tighten o--ring fitting nuts.
The evaporator module blower motor is a low cost item
CAUTION that does not contain replaceable brushes. Therefore,
DO NOT OVERTORQUE it is recommended that the motor be replaced rather
10. Connect R--134a service gauges to unit suction than repaired.
and discharge service ports. 1. MOTOR REMOVAL
11. Leak check system per Section 21--51--00 as re- A. Verify all power to unit is OFF and all shrouds,
quired. enclosures, etc. are removed from around the module/
12. Charge system per Section 21--52--00 as re- blower assembly.
quired. B. Disconnect power leads to motor.
13. Operate system to verify compressor operation NOTE
and system performance. Blower motor is a permanent magnet type and
NOTE therefore may be wired to rotate either CW or
If failed compressor contaminated system and CCW. It is necessary that the motor wires and the
system was cleaned and purged, additional re- associated colors be observed before being dis-
frigerant oil may be required. If failed compres- connected.
sor did not contaminate system, no additional oil C. Remove motor wire clamp and disconnect the
is required since a new compressor contains the wire splice from the resistor wire.
required charge. In either case, the receiver--dry-
er must be replaced. NOTE
At this point it is very important to observe the
21--55--05 -- COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL CHECK wire colors and connections from the resistor
When replacing the failed compressor containing un- assembly. The resistor RED wire is the low speed
contaminated oil with a new compressor, use the fol- control and the ORANGE wire is the high speed.
lowing procedure to add the required oil to the system. CAUTION
1. Drain and measure oil from the failed compressor. Do not damage plastic material or blower wheel.
2. Drain oil from the new compressor in a clean con- E. Remove bracket/motor mounting screws and
tainer for reuse. with a putty knife slide between motor and plastic scroll
to cut the RTV foam sealant (if required).
3. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount
drained from the used compressor and pour it into the F. Lift blower motor out of scroll assembly and re-
new compressor. move blower wheel.
21--56--00 -- EVAPORATOR MODULE ASSEMBLY G. Discard blower motor since brush replacement
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE is not possible.
Only field serviceable high inspection or maintenance 2. MOTOR REPLACEMENT
components will be addressed in the evaporator mod- A. Replace the motor wheel on the new motor shaft
ule section. so the back of the wheel is 0.25 inches from motor
21--56--01 -- EVAPORATOR COIL INSPECTION mounting flange. The set screw on the wheel hub must
The evaporator coil must be inspected every 500--800 be located on the motor shaft flat section. Use a thread
operating hours for excessive lint and/or other contami- lock sealant and tighten set screw.
nation in the coil fins. Clean as required by using a vac- CAUTION
uum or low pressure purge source. Bent coil fins must During wheel installation, do not bend or smash
be combed to straighten. wheel.
21--55--05
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
B. Rotate blower wheel on motor shaft to check 1. VALVE REMOVAL

wobble. Lightly apply a force on wheel O.D. to eliminate CAUTION
any wobble as necessary. Eye and hand protection should be worn in the
event system is still under pressure. Cap all open
C. Apply a small bead of RTV sealant (or gasket
ports on system.
seal if equipped) on the scroll and install the blower
wheel and motor with wires in a location near the resis- A. The refrigerant system charge must be re-
tor wires and closest mounting screw. claimed and access to the expansion valves must be
achieved.
CAUTION B. Remove valve inlet tubing and remove valve
Do not over--torque mounting screws or thread from coil header tube.
damage may result.
C. Inspect valve inlet for contamination and clean
D. Install all mounting screws and tighten snugly as required. If no contamination is noted, valve should
as required. be replaced if operation was erratic prior to removal.
CAUTION
E. With access through the blower outlet, rotate Do not adjust internal spring setting or valve will
the blower wheel to assure that no rubbing exists. not operate correctly.
NOTE D. Inspect valve internal works to verify that no
Observe blower wheel blade and verify leading contamination exists in the seat or orifice. Clean and
edge is in the direction of rotation. purge as necessary.
2. VALVE REPLACEMENT
F. Connect motor and resistor wiring as follows:
A. Set new valve adjustment screw to same posi-
(1) CW ROTATION -- Motor RED wire is spliced tion as failed valve.
into resistor ORANGE wire, using wire splice. Orange B. Apply thread sealant to valve inlet and outlet
wire runs straight through clamp. Motor black wire port threads (sparingly) and apply a very small amount
(ground) and resistor red wire also run straight through of refrigerant oil to both valve port flare surfaces.
clamp (no splice).
NOTE
G. Run all wires through wire clamp and secure Do not put oil on fitting threads. Apply thread
with mounting screw and washer. sealant sparingly to male fitting threads staying
clear of first 2--3 threads.
H. Connect power leads to blower assembly and C. Install valve in coil header and position as nec-
test for proper operation. essary. Tighten connection to 190--195 in. lbs.
I. Replace all ducting, shrouds, closures, etc. Unit CAUTION
is ready for operation. Use backup wrench during tightening and do not
over--torque “B” nut.
21--56--05 -- EXPANSION VALVE REMOVAL AND D. Connect valve inlet port tubing and tighten.
REPLACEMENT
E. Leak check, evacuate and charge system per
The automatic expansion valve normally does not re- Sections 21--51--00 & 21--52--00.
quire replacement. However, in the unlikely event it F. Operate system and verify valve is performing
malfunctions or has a clogged inlet, the following pro- correctly. Adjust valve, if necessary per Section
cedures will apply: 21--53--00.
21--56--05
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
21--57--00 -- TROUBLESHOOTING R--134a AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

There may be a time when the system does not operate and/or perform in accordance with information contained
herein.
Therefore, it is necessary for the service personnel to diagnose the discrepancy by troubleshooting the system and
its components. To assist in this diagnosis the following troubleshooting list is provided.
INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION

A. No system power 1. Ground power not connected 1. Plug in ground power cart
2. Aircraft power switch OFF 2. Energize power switch
B. Power ON but system will not op- 1. Aircond. Control CB OFF 1. Energize air conditioning CB
erate
2. Aircond. CB failed 2. Replace
3. Aircond. Mode SW failed 3. Replace
4. Relay(s) failed 4. Replace
5. Failed pressure switch 5. Replace
6. Failed power contactor 6. Replace
7. Failed motor drive 7. Replace
8. Vented system 8. Pressure check, evacuate &
charge
9. Low ambient temperature 9. Normal cutout function
10. Drive motor fuse blown 10. Replace
11. Drive motor temp. SW failed 11. Replace switch
12. Contactor control line fuse 12. Replace fuse
blown
C. System operates but does not 1. Low refrigerant charge 1. Charge as necessary
cool
2. Overcharged system cutout 2. Reclaim refrigerant as necessary
3. Failed compressor 3. Replace
4. Failed drive motor 4. Replace
5. Broken belt 5. Replace
6. Failed expansion valve(s) 6. Replace
7. Evap. Blower switch failed 7. Replace
8. Evap. Blower(s) motor failed 8. Replace
9. Evap. Blower(s) relay failed 9. Replace
10. Evap. Blower(s) C/B – OFF 10. Replace
12. Evap. Module air inlet clogged 12. Remove debris
13. Exh. Valve inlet clogged 13. Remove debris
14. Excessive moisture in system 14. Replace rec--dryer assembly
15. Excessive oil in system 15. Drain excessive oil
21--57--00
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
D. Evaporator noisy 1. Wobbly blower wheel 1. Replace

2. Blower wheel hitting scroll 2. Align
3. Defective blower motor bearing 3. Replace motor
4. Loose mounting bracket 4. Tighten
5. Air inlet clogged 5. Remove
E. Compressor/Condenser Module 1. Loose drive belt 1. Re--tension
noisy
2. Drive belt hitting cover 2. Re--align belt & adjust brkts.
3. Motor hitting shroud 3. Adjust as necessary
4. Defective compressor 4. Replace
5. Defective drive pulley 5. Replace
6. Loose pulley 6. Tighten or replace
7. Loose mounting hardware 7. Tighten as necessary
8. Loose hose assembly 8. Secure as necessary
9. Loose fan blade 9. Tighten or replace
F. No low evaporator fan speed (HI 1. Failed switch 1. Replace
speed OK)
2. Failed resistor 2. Replace
3. Failed relay 3. Replace
G. Compressor/Condenser will not 1. C/B failed or OFF 1. Turn ON or replace
operate
3. Pressure switch failed 3. Replace
4. Power contactor failed 4. Replace
5. Low ambient temperature 5. Normal
6. Low refrigerant charge 6. Re--charge system
7. Motor temperature SW failed 7. Replace switch
H. No evaporator module air flow 1. C/B OFF 1. Turn ON
2. C/B failed 2. Replace
3. Mode SW failed 3. Replace
4. Fan speed SW failed 4. Replace
5. Seized motor(s) 5. Replace
6. Blower wheel failed 6. Replace
7. Blocked air outlet duct 7. Remove debris
8. Blocked air inlet duct 8. Remove debris
9. Aircraft power not ON 9. Turn ON
10. Motor temperature SW failed 10. Turn ON
I. Evaporator module coil freezing 1. No air flow 1. Turn fan ON
2. Expansion valve failed or clogged 2. Remove debris or replace
3. Expansion valve setting low 3. Reset to 26--30 PSIG suction
press.
21--57--00
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
J. Pressure switch cycles (high 1. System over charged 1. Reclaim refrigerant as required
pressure cutout)
2. Condenser coil inlet air extremely 2. Normal condition
hot
3. Condenser inlet clogged 3. Remove debris
4. Discharge line clogged or kinked 4. Replace or unkink hose
5. Excessively high ambient tem- 5. Normal condition
perature
NOTE
The above system and component failure and/or abnormal operation and possible solutions are only a
partial listing of what may occur. The more informed the service personnel are in the operation of the
system and its various components will reduce the time to diagnose failures and may add other prob-
able causes to the above list.
21--58--00 -- COMPONENT INSPECTION, SERVICING AND/OR MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
1. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE
CHAPTER 5 normally lists the maintenance and replacement time frames for components. However, since specific
air conditioning components have sub--component listings, these components are listed as follows:
TYPE MAINTENANCE SERVICE HOURS

COMPRESSOR ASSEMBLY (R--134A)
Leak check, seal shaft 500--800
Bearing inspection 1000--1500
Bearing replacement On condition
Oil level check On Condition
ATTACHMENT BRACKET/HARDWARE
Attachment bracket/hardware On Condition – Inspect @ 100 Hrs.
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
Visual inspection 500--800
Tension & alignment 800--1000
Replacement On Condition
RECEIVER--DRYER ASSEMBLY
Refrigerant charge level 500--800
Replacement 1000--1500
Or after compressor failure/line rupture
EXPANSION VALVE
Adjustment As required
Replacement On condition
EVAPORATOR BLOWER MOTOR
Brush inspection None
Brush replacement Not replaceable
Service life 1500--2000
POWER CONTACTOR
Inspection 1000
21--58--00
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
CONDENSER/EVAPORATOR COIL
Inspection 500--800
PRESSURE SWITCH
Calibration check 1000
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
Performance check 500--800
Visual inspection 500--800
2. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM “OFF SEASON” 2. RECOVERY OF REFRIGERANT

FUNCTIONAL TESTS Do not discharge R--134a refrigerant into the atmo-
During cold winter months, the system should be oper- sphere. Although its ozone depletion potential is zero, it
ated for a minimum of 15 minutes every two weeks to can have an effect on global warming. In the United
maintain a thin film of oil on the compressor drive shaft States, recovery and recycling are mandated by the
dynamic seal to prevent leakage. Clean Air Act.
Refrigerant recovery/recycling service equipment
CAUTION must be approved for use with R--134a refrigerant. Re-
Extended operation of the system at low ambient cycling machines must be approved by Underwriters
temperatures could result in major damage of the Laboratories and meet SAE standard J2210 and SAE
R--134a compressor. standard J2099 for refrigerant purity.
NOTE 3. VENTILATION
If ambient temperature is below 32o F (0o C) the Keep refrigerants and oils away from open flames. Re-
pressure switch may require an electrical jumper frigerants can produce poisonous gasses in the pres-
to allow the compressor drive motor power con- ence of a flame. Work in a well ventilated area and
tactor to energize and enable system to operate. avoid breathing refrigerant/lubricant vapor mist if acci-
21--59--00 -- SERVICE PRECAUTIONS dental discharge occurs.
4. AVOID USE OF COMPRESSED AIR
1. REFRIGERANT HANDLING
Do not introduce compressed air or oxygen into an air
Always wear eye and hand protection when servicing conditioning system or refrigerant container. R--134a in
an air conditioning system. Liquid refrigerant can the presence of air or oxygen above atmospheric pres-
cause frostbite and/or blindness. sure may form a combustible mixture.
21--59--00
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
21--59--00
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 24
ELECTRICAL POWER
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 24
ELECTRICAL POWER
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
24--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--31--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--31--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--31--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--31--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--31--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--32--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--33--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--34--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--36--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24--51--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
24-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 24
ELECTRICAL POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
24--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
24--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.C. Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
24--31--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternator Charging System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 5
24--31--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Regulator Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
24--31--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeftronics 28V Auto--Parallel Alt. Controller . . . . . . . 8
24--32--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
24--33--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
24--34--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Plant Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- Low Battery Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 13
24--35--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
24--36--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
24--37--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
24--38--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
24--39--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trouble Shooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
24--39--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternator Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
24--39--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESERVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
24--39--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
24--39--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
24--39--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annunciator Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
24--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
24--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Load Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
24--51--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
24-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
24--00--00 -- GENERAL C. When either battery is removed from the aircraft

Two 28 volt, 70 AMP alternators utilizing transistorized for charging, be sure that the charger is correctly con-
voltage regulator/over voltage controls supply electri- nected. Use the correct charging rate when charging
cal power. Two 24 volt, 10 AMP HR storage batteries battery, refer to manufacturer’s procedures.
are installed in the tailcone. The alternators, during nor- D. Be sure to check battery polarity by using a volt-
mal operation, supply power in conjunction with the se- meter prior to reinstallation into the aircraft.
lected battery when the Master Switch and Alternator E. Do not leave Master Switch ”ON” when aircraft
Field Switches are ON. The circuit breaker panel is on is parked.
the right subpanel. The electrical system is capable of F. Use an auxiliary ground power unit when trouble
supplying current for simultaneous operation of multi- shooting electrical accessory equipment or when per-
ple radios, anticollision lights and navigation lights. forming electrical landing gear maintenance and re-
S/N: 27--0001 thru 27--0052 traction system testing.
Alternator load is indicated by measuring the voltage CAUTION
drop across a shunt. This is expressed in % of alterna- DO NOT ATTEMPT TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR.
tor capacity. Buss load is indicated in the same manner Alternator is polarized every time Master Switch
but is expressed as 150% of total alternator capacity so is turned ON.
that any load over 100% indicates current is being 2. Alternator System Inspection
drawn from the selected a battery. A voltmeter indi- A. Check alternator circuit breaker on the main cir-
cates buss voltage. cuit breaker panel. Reset breaker, if open.
S/N: 27--0053 thru 27--0317, 27--0319 thru 27--0325, B. Check alternator field circuit breaker on main
27--00327 circuit breaker panel. Reset, if open.
A shunt type ammeter (with PUSH for VOLTS) is lo- C. Inspect batteries for corroded cable connec-
cated on instrument panel. tions; remove and clean cable(s) if corrosion is found.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA D. Check charging system wiring and connectors
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) to be sure they are clean and tight.
Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for elec- E. Inspect alternator, voltage regulator, and wiring
trical system status and displays. for damage.
24--30--00 -- D.C. GENERATION 3. Alternator Removal and Installation
24--31--01 -- ALTERNATOR CHARGING SYSTEM A. Alternator Removal
MAINTENANCE (1) Turn Master Switch OFF. Disconnect alterna-
tor wiring.
1. Alternator Systems Servicing
(2) Remove forward, lower baffle below alterna-
When the ammeter shows a discharge at higher RPM, tor.
a charging system component (alternator, voltage reg-
ulator, circuit breaker or wiring) is malfunctioning. On-- (3) Remove attaching hardware and pull alterna-
the--plane testing should identify which component(s) tor drive gear from engine pad.
may be faulty and needs to be removed from the air- B. Alternator Installation
craft for bench test and subsequent repair or replace- (1) Be sure Master Switch is turned -- OFF. Do
ment. not turn Master Switch ON until all wiring connections
The alternator charging system requires no special have been secured.
attention; however, improper maintenance procedures (2) Install attaching hardware, place drive belt on
can damage the alternator and wiring. There are sever- pulley and adjust belt tension.
al precautions that must be observed when servicing Mid--span deflection:
the alternator system: New Belt 0.128 in. @ 9 lbs.
A. Be sure the Master Switch is OFF when repair- Used Belt 0.128 in. @ 5.125 to 6.4 lbs.
ing the alternator or voltage regulator. (3) Connect alternator wiring and check wiring
connectors throughout system.
CAUTION
First connect the approved Auxiliary Power NOTE
Cable to the booster battery and then insert the If pulley is removed from either alternator, the
plug into the auxiliary power receptacle. proper washers (for alignment) must be re--
installed and the alternator pulley/shaft nut
B. Refer to 24--40--00 for Auxiliary Power System torqued to 75--80 ft. lbs. if installed without a
instructions. Woodruff key. If Woodruff key is installed (S/N:
CAUTION 27--00140 thru 27--TBA) torque to 50 ft. lbs. (+/--5
Both batteries MUST BE in aircraft for flight. lbs.).
24--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
24--31--02 -- VOLTAGE REGULATOR MAINTE- B. Remove Voltage Regulator from aircraft.

NANCE
C. Drill rivets out to open case to gain access to cir-
The battery charging rate depends upon the battery cuit board for following alignment procedures.
condition and the voltage regulator setting. With all
equipment turned off and the engine running at 2000 D. Connect test set to Power Sources (See Fig.
RPM or faster, the normal battery charging rate will be 5 24--1).
to 35 amps. E. Connect regulator connector to test set plug.
1. Battery Charging Rate Connect test set clip 1 to voltage regulator C/B TP1.
Unsolder jumper between TP1 & TP2 (See Fig. 24--1).
A. Excessively High Charging Rate. Check the
following: F. Connect test set clip 2 to regulator TP3.
(1). Fly aircraft for 15 to 20 minutes; charging G. Turn power sources ON. Adjust sense voltage
rate should slowly drop to 10 amps or less. A very low to 28.3 +.2/--0 volts with sense & field switches -- ON.
battery will take longer to show a drop in charging cur- H. Adjust R1 on regulator board, until FLD light on
rent. test set just extinguishes. Reduce sense voltage to
(2). Measure voltage with a voltmeter connected approximately 27 volts, slowly increase voltage, ob-
to the Buss. At 80o F., voltage should be 27.5 to 29.0 serve voltage shown when field light extinguishes. Volt-
volts. An excessively high voltage regulator setting will age should be 28.3 +.2/--0 volts. If not, repeat adjust-
cause excessive battery heating and water loss. ment on R1 until voltage is within above tolerance.
B. Low Charging Rate. Check battery charging I. Adjust sense voltage to 32 +/--.2 volts. Adjust
rate (normal rate is not to exceed four amps). The regu- R19 on voltage regulator board until OV light on test set
lator should not be considered defective because of a just illuminates. Reduce voltage to 31 volts (OV light
low charging rate until: should extinguish). Slowly increase voltage, observe
voltage when OV light on test set illuminates. Voltage
(1). A voltmeter check indicates that voltage at should be 32 +/--.2 volts.
the Buss is below requirements.
J. Adjust sense voltage to 31 volts; while slowly in-
(2). A battery hydrometer check indicates that creasing voltage, verify SCR Trip indicator (light emit-
battery is not fully charged. ting diode), on test set, illuminates when OV light illumi-
EXAMPLE: nates. Reduce sense voltage to 27.5 +/--.5 volts; turn
Hydrometer reading = 1.260 FLD Switch OFF; OV light should illuminate. Turn FLD
Battery electrolyte temperature = 30o F. Switch ON and turn Sense Switch OFF. FLD light
80o -- 30o = 50o should extinguish.
5 x 4 = 20 points K. Turn sense and field switches ON. Adjust sense
Corrected reading 1.260 -- 20 = 1.240 voltage to 27.5 +/--.5 volts. Press Overcurrent Switch
(S3); SCR Trip indicator light should illuminate.
HYDROMETER PERCENT OF
READING CHANGE L. Turn all power OFF. Remove clip 1. Re--connect
jumper between TP1 and TP2.
1.280 100
Solder jumper connections.
1.250 75
M. Turn all power ON. Set sense voltage to 27.7
1.220 50 +/--.f5 volts. FLD light should illuminate. Press Overcur-
rent Switch (S3); OV Trip lights should illuminate and
1.190 25
stay ON after releasing Overcurrent Switch. Turn Field
1.130 or BELOW Very little useful capac- Switch OFF, then ON, OV Trip lights should extinguish.
ity -- Discharged Increase sense voltage to 33 volts. OV Trip lights
C . Hydrometer Reading. If battery electrolyte tem- should illuminate at approximately 32 volts. Reduce
perature is below 80o F., subtract four points from sense voltage to approximately 31 volts and verify OV
hydrometer reading for every 10o F. below 80o F. If bat- Trip lights are still illuminated. Turn Field Switch OFF,
tery acid temperature is above 80o F., add four points to then ON. OV Trip lights should extinguish.
hydrometer reading for every 10o F. above 80o F. N. Adjust sense voltage to 27.7 +/--.5 volts. FLD
light should illuminate. Turn FLD Switch OFF, FLD light
1. Voltage Regulator Adjustment/Alignment (To be should extinguish and OV light illuminate.
performed only by Mooney certified repair station):
O. Turn all switches and power OFF. Alignment is
A. Build test set per Figure 24--1. completed.
24--31--02
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
TP SENSE SW.
1 S1 PL1 MATERIAL LIST FOR
+24--35VDC D1 2 8 BUILDING TEST SET
ADJUSTABLE 3
SENSE
VOLTAGE D1 = DIODE, 1N2483
FLD SW.
I5 LOAD D2 = DIODE, 10H3P
1 S2 CIRCUIT
S1 = SW., MST205N(ALCO)
D2 2 5
OVTRIP S2 = SW., MST205N(ALCO)
+ 24--28VDC 3
S3 = SW., MSPS--103C--2
I1
I1, I2 & I3 = BULB #327
6
OV (SOCKET IN SLOANE 855S--O--U)
LIGHT 7 I4 = SPC TECH LD--R--4--WW
I3 FLD
LIGHT R1 I5 = #1818, PARALLEL IN SPEC
I2
TECH LSL--11--128U SOCKETS (4 EA)
-- 24--29 VDC 9 R1 = 120 OHM, 1 WATT RES.
R2 I4 CLIP 1 R2 = 820 OHM, 1/4 R3 = 1.6K, 1/4
TO TP1
CLIP = 1/2 POMONA, 4233--2
OVERCURRENT SW. S3 R3 CLIP 2
TO TP3
SCR TRIP
SENSE-- --PL1, PIN 8 JUMPER OVERVOLTAGE-- --PL1, PIN 6 SENSE SHIELD
A R20 C2 C3 A
Q8 D
CR1
+ +
D U1 R10
D4 IC2
Q7 R11 R18
R2 R5
R19
R4
R1
D D6
IC1
R12 TP3 JUMPER
R9 R13
C1 R17
D5
R3 U2 Q6 Q3
Q4 Q5 R14
R6 C5
R7 R15 +
+
+ C6
C C4 T T
P P
D1 1 2
B
D
B D D R16
C
C
D D Q2
R8
D
Q1
FIELD-- --PL1, PIN 7 A+-- --PL1, PIN 5 GROUND-- --PL1, PIN 9

VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT BOARD/ADJUSTMENTS
M24--1
TEST FIXTURE FOR VOLTAGE REGULATOR ALIGNMENT FIGURE 24--1
24--31--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
24--31--03 -- ZEFTRONICS (A25EAM) 28V AUTO-- -- The ALT switch is OFF/OPEN while battery
PARALLEL ALTERNATOR CONTROLLER (APAC) switch is ON
-- The field--to--ground short protection (GFP) func-
ZEFTRONICS (A25EAM) Specifications tion or open field
Voltage Regulation, PWM 28.5 ± 0.4V -- OV protection turns off the alternator due to OV
fault or RS loss
Field Current, Max 5A DC -- Loss or opening of the Alternator Off Sense wire
Battery Off--Line Regulation, Yes, VR ± or voltage
BOLR 1.0V
Whenever the TSL on the unit is Red, the AOI is on.
Remote Voltage Sensor/Protec- Yes Field--to--Ground Short Protection (GFP) – If the alter-
tion nator’s field becomes shorted to ground (the reason
RVP & GFP Protection with Bat- Yes most ACU/Voltage Regulators fail), the field--to--
tery Off ground short protector will deactivate the Voltage Reg-
ulator, and switch on the unit’s Red Troubleshooting
Parallel (Load Share) Yes
light, and the OV or Low Voltage indicator on the instru-
Over Voltage Protection/Warning 32.0 ± 0.8V ment panel.
Alternator Off--Line Sense/Indica- Yes
tion TROUBLESHOOTING
LIGHT
Field--to--ground Short Fault Yes (TSL)
Troubleshooting Light Yes
Weight 0.40 Lb.
The Zeftronics (A25EAM) is an electronic Auto--Paral-

lel Alternator Controller designed for use with 24VDC
aircraft alternator system. This system provides the fol-
lowing:
Voltage Regulation -- The voltage regulator keeps the APAC
Buss voltage constant by increasing the current to the UNIT R24--3
alternators field with a system load increase, decreas-
ing it with a load decrease. The Pulse Width Modulation TROUBLESHOOTING LIGHT (TSL) FIGURE 24--2
(PWW) function allows the field current to increase or Troubleshooting Light (TSL) – The TSL on the APAC
decrease with an increase or decrease in the system unit alerts the user to the condition of the Alternator/
load demand at a fixed frequency. APAC system (Refer to Fig. 24--2).
Battery Off--Line Failure Recognition (BOLR) -- Regu- HOW THE SYSTEM WORKS (refer to Fig. 24--3)
lates the Buss voltage with the battery off--line. This al- Closing the Bat switch applies battery power to the air-
lows the system to carry electrical load if the battery craft Buss. Each APAC is powered through the 5 Amp
fails or the battery relay fails to open. The APAC pro- Circuit Breaker. The APAC controls the alternator’s
vides RVP (Remote Voltage Sensor/Protection) and field current to regulate the Buss voltage.
GFP (Field--to--Ground Short protection) functions
The Voltage Regulator (VR) -- To control Buss voltage,
while the system operates in the BOLF mode.
the VR of the APAC monitors the alternator output volt-
Over Voltage (OV) Protection – The OV protector turns age through the remote sense input (pin 8) and
off the Voltage Regulator and the Alternator if the Buss compares it to an internal reference. The VR regulates
voltage exceeds the OV set point, thus protecting sen- the Buss voltage by increasing or decreasing the field
sitive avionics equipment and the battery. The OV trip is current at a fixed frequency with automatically adjusted
time delayed to prevent nuisance tripping. length of it’s on and off time; this is called pulse width
modulated (PWM) voltage regulation. The VR in-
Remote Voltage Sensor & Protection (RVP) – The RVP creases the field current if the Buss voltage drops be-
senses the voltage at the battery terminal of the alter- low a preset level, and decreases the field current if the
nator or the Buss to provide better voltage regulation voltage exceeds the preset level. The power to control
and eliminate flickering charge--meter and panel light the field comes into the APAC from pin 5, while its out-
problems. Losing or opening the RS wire will turn off the put is from pin 7.
APAC, taking the alternator offline.
Battery Off--Line Failure Regulation (BOLR) – The
Alternator Off--Line Sensor (AOS) & Indicator (AOI) – PAC’s design allows it to regulate the Buss voltage with
The AOI will come on under these conditions: the battery off--line. This feature allows the system to
24--31--03
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
carry electrical load if the battery fails or the battery NO Light on the unit, with the master switch ON,
relay fails to open. The APAC provides RVP and GFP means a damaged power input device (switch, circuit
functions while the system operates in the BOLR breaker, or wiring) or APAC.
mode.
Remote Voltage Sensor & Protection (RVP) – The RVP BUS BAR
senses the voltage at the battery terminal of the alter- Alt Fld Alt Out
nator or the Buss to provide better voltage regulation
and eliminate flickering charge--meter and panel lights 5A* 50A -- 125A
problem. Losing or opening the RS wire will turn off the
Alt
APAC, taking the alternator off--line. Sw
Relay
Over Voltage Protection (OVP) – The OVP circuit moni- A
Bat
Bat +
tors the Buss voltage for excessive voltage (OV) that
could damage batteries and other voltage sensitive
equipment. If it senses an OV condition, it opens the A01
Bat
current path to the Voltage Regulator (disabling the al- 1A C/Bkr or Fuse Sw
NOT B
ternator’s field) and turns on the unit’s TSL red and the USED
AOI light in the cockpit. After OV trip, the APAC must be Aux
ALT
reset by turning off and then on the alternator field Fld
switch.
Field--to--Ground Short Protection (GFP) – If the alter- 1 5 6 8 2 7 9
nator’s field shorts to ground, the field--to--ground, the 1 5 6 8 2 7 9
field--to--ground short protector will deactivate the volt-
A25EAM
age regulator, as well as switch on the unit’s red TSL
and the AOI light on the instrument panel. * Depending on the ALT Fld
C/breaker may be 2 to 10A R24--3A
Alternator Out Sensor (AOS) and Indicator (AOI) – The
AOS monitors the alternator’s Aux terminal voltage
(from pin 2) to identify if the alternator is on-- or off--line. TYPICAL SYSTEM WIRING CHART
If the alternator is off--line, the AOI light, on the instru-
ment panel, connected to pin 6 will come on. AOI will Wire Pin Function or Connect to
come on under these conditions: Green 1 Pin 1 (parallel wire) to second ACU
(Not Used)
-- Loss of power to The APAC
-- Over Voltage trip condition White 2 Alt Aux terminal for Alt Out Sense
-- Loss of or open Remote Voltage Sense Red 5 Alt Switch or Alt field circuit break-
-- Loss of or open Aux Voltage Sense er
-- Field to Ground Short Fault
-- Alt Off--Line Yellow 6 Alternator Off--line Indication
Blue 7 Alternator Field
Troubleshooting Light (TSL) – Located on the front
plate of the unit, alerts the user to the condition of the Orange 8 + Remote Sense to Alt BAT termi-
alternator/APAC system. nal
A Red TSL with the Bat & Alt switches on, means Black 9
-- Remote Sense to Alternator
there is an internal or external ground short in the alter- case/Gnd
nator field circuit. Some alternator’s field short to TYPICAL SYSTEM WIRING FIGURE 24--3
ground under a “flying short” condition, which usually MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
occurs when engine is rotating at higher RPM and not
when the engine is off or rotating at a lower RPM. The APAC is not field serviceable or repairable beyond
what is prescribed in this manual. Should the APAC not
A Green TSL, with the engine running, means there function as described in the following, “How the System
is power coming out of the APAC. With the TSL Green, Works,” and the service technician or engineer cannot
a Buss voltage of 28.2V to 28.8V indicates a system solve the system’s problem by following the Trouble-
that is operating correctly, and a sustained Buss volt- shooting notes, return the unit to Zeftronics or its ap-
age of 20V to 25.6V means an open alternator field wire proved repair station.
or internal alternator field open fault (including “flying
open”). In a flying open condition, the alternator may in- During each annual inspection perform the following
dicate a “good” field resistance reading when the en- Installation/Maintenance Instructions.
gine is off or the alternator’s pulley is turning at a lower Installation/Maintenance Instructions (refer to Fig.
RPM, but open at a higher RPM. 24--3)
24--31--03
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
1. If applicable, disconnect and remove (except for TROUBLESHOOTING -- GENERAL

ICA activity described below) the present ACU/VR. Check the 5 Amp breaker, ALT switch and connections
Verify that the system wiring is as shown below (the between the Buss and the input to the APAC (i.e. pin 5)
OEM or installer may change the system wiring to suit for high resistance or intermittent connection.
their application as long as the APAC’s input and output
functions remain as indicated). No Voltage Regulation
With the master switch ON and battery voltage mea-
2. Measure the Alternator’s field Resistance between
sured on the APAC input, the APAC output (blue wire)
pin 7 (of airframe’s VR connector) and Ground. A resist-
voltage should be 0.5 to 2V less the Buss voltage.
ance of 10 to 20Ù is normal. If the resistance is less
than 8Ù or greater than 20Ù, check the Alternator or the If there is no Buss voltage on the APAC input (pin 5),
wire from pin 7 to the field. 0Ù indicates a short to look for a broken wire, bad connection or input device
ground between the field wire or field winding. (5A circuit breaker or Alt switch) between the APAC and
the Buss.
3. Verify that the resistance of the Alt switch is
0--0.1Ù. A voltage drop test during the post installation If the input voltage is more than 0.2V lower than the
test will serve the same purpose. Buss voltage, look for and correct or replace the input
device that is causing the problem. The device has high
4. Spray contact cleaners in the mating connectors resistance.
(the airframe and APAC).
If the output voltage on pin 7 is close to 0 volt and the
5. Check the condition of the wires in the Electrical inputs (pins 5 and 8) have battery voltage, look for a
Charging System (ECS); from the APAC to the Master grounded alternator field or field wire (indicated by a
Switch, Field Breaker, Alternator Main Output Breaker, Red Troubleshooting Light TSL on the APAC). If the
Battery, Shunts, Relays, and other related compo- field resistance is correct as shown in step 5 of the
nents. Replace frayed or cracked wires. Clean/Re- Troubleshooting tests and the TSL is Off, send the
place oxidized contacts and connections. APAC in for test/repair.
6. Mount the APAC in a location where the mechanic If the TSL is Red, repair the field ground fault or open
will have easy access to view the TSL (Troubleshooting Remote Voltage Sense (pin 8) wire or replace the alter-
Light) on the unit. The TSL is located on the front sur- nator.
face of the APAC. If the output voltage is the same as the input voltage,
7. Connect the APAC to the system. look for an open alternator field or field wire. If the field
8. Perform the Post Installation Test Procedure. resistance is higher than what is shown in step 5 of the
installation tests, send the alternator in for test/repair. If
POST INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE the field resistance is correct, send the APAC in for test/
1. Turn On the Alt & Bat switches, observe that the repair.
AOI light is on. Buss voltage remains at battery voltage (about 24V)
2. On the APAC, the TSL should be Green. If the TSL To solve this problem, see No voltage regulation or AOI
is Red, the Field is shorted to ground. stays On.
3. If the TSL is Off, measure the voltage on pins 5 and Alternator carries about half its rated output
7. Read Battery voltage on pin 5 and 1--2 volts less on Some of the reason this problem may happen are:
pin 7.
One or more of the alternator stator leads becomes
4. If the steps 3 & 4 are successful, perform step 5. If open, making the alternator supply current from only
not, repeat Installation/Maintenance Instructions pro- one or two phases of its three. The same will happen if
vided above. one or more of the six rectifying diodes is open.
5. Turn Off all the avionics and voltage sensitive Resistance build--up or poor connection in the current
loads. Start the engine, and at 1500 RPM, measure a path between the output of the alternator and the Buss
Buss voltage of 28.2--28.7V. can cause voltage drops that increase with increasing
A. If the Buss voltage exceeds these limits, check Buss load. Poor connection between the load shunt
for voltage drop across the 5A breaker, the Alt switch, and the ammeter may also give false load indication.
and pre--APAC wires. Buss voltage drops with load increase.
B. If the AOI light is On but the Buss voltage is at See Alternator carries only about half its rated output.
28.2--28.7, check for an open or grounded wire from pin Alternator drops off--line during run--up.
2 to the AUX or STA terminal on the Alternator. If the alternator drops off--line during run--up, check the
C. If the AOI light is On and the TSL is Green (the color of the TSL. Red means that the field is grounded
Buss voltage is below 26V), check for an open wire or the Remote Voltage Sensor wire (pin 8) is open/bro-
from pin 7 to the Field terminal on the alternator or an ken. A Green TSL indicates an open field wire or a “fly-
internally open alternator Field. ing--open” field connection in the alternator’s field.
24--31--03
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
Alternator Out Indicator (AOI) stays on always. 6. Perform and record the following tests with the
If AOI is on when the Buss is at 28V, look for a broken MASTER SWITCH ON:
wire or open circuit between the APAC and AUX termi- -- 24V Val- Typical
nal of the ALT. ues Values
If AOI is on and the Buss is at <26V with a 20A load on
A. Buss Volt Engine _______V 23--26V
the Buss at greater than 1600RPM, see if the TSL is
Off
Red. If it is, the APAC dropped off--line due to field--
ground short, OV trip or loss of RS input (pin 8) due to D. APAC/Reg Input _______V 23--26V
open circuit or high resistance, of there is no current Volt
getting to the APAC.
F. Field Voltage _______V 0.5--
TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS 2V<VBus
1. Read previous APAC overview, maintenance and 7. Post Installation. If all tests are correct to or per
Troubleshooting sections. steps 5 & 6, run the engine & record at 5--10A load:
2. Check for and replace open, frayed or broken -- 24V Val- Typical
wires. Thoroughly clean or replace corroded, dirty or ues Value
oxidized connections, terminals, contact or properly
soldered wire junction. Buss voltage @ ______V 28.2--28.7V
3. Check for open or ground--short alternator field. 1200RPM
Most 24V alternators have 10--20Ù field resistance. Buss voltage @ ______V 28.2--28.7V
Ground shorted alternator field will damage most 1600RPM
ACUs. Repair or replace an alternator that has a field to
Buss voltage @ ______V 28.2--28.7V
ground to short. The APAC will turn itself Off and the
2000RPM
APAC’s TSL will turn Red if there is a field--Gnd short.
8. If step 7 works, turn Off the engine or commence
4. With the engine Off: Check voltage drops across normal operation.
the Field, Alt switch, Alt field circuit breaker and APAC.
24--32--00 -- BATTERY MAINTENANCE
High voltage--drop means excessive junction resist-
ance and will lead to many problems like; fluctuating CAUTION
ammeters, charge--meters and panel lights. Battery gases are explosive.
1. Battery Removal.
5. Perform and record the following tests with the
MASTER SWITCH OFF: A. Turn Master Switch -- OFF.
B. Remove tailcone access cover and battery hold
-- 24V Val- Typical Val- downs.
ues ues C. Disconnect battery cables, negative lead first
A. Field resistance at ______Ω 10--20Ω D. Remove battery hold--down and remove battery
ALT from aircraft.
E. Install battery in reverse sequence of removal.
B. Field resistance at ______Ω 10--20Ω
Safety hold--down hardware. Use a voltmeter to verify
APAC
battery polarity before installation.
C. Field SW resist- ______Ω 0--0.1Ω 2. Battery Cleaning and Corrosion Removal
ance A. Mix one pound of baking soda (bicarbonate of
D. Field C/BKR resist- ______Ω 0--0.05Ω soda) in one gallon of water.
ance B. Wash battery mounting area and flush battery
E. ALT Out C/BKR re- ______Ω 0--0.05Ω with mixture. Do not allow soda water to enter battery
sistance cells; permanent damage will result if soda mixes with
electrolyte.
C. Rinse thoroughly with clear water; dry the area.
D. Test each cell with a temperature corrected
hydrometer (Non factory sealed batteries only). Specif-
ic gravity should be 1.265 to 1.280 for a fully charged
battery.
E. Check electrolyte level and maintain at split ring.
F. Clean battery terminals with emery cloth, rein-
stall and tighten cables. Coat terminals and connectors
with petroleum jelly to retard corrosion.
24--32--00
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
G. While batteries are removed from aircraft; verify S/N: 27--0001 thru 27--0317, 27--0319 thru 27--0325,
condition of the three 10A Slo--Blo fuses in the trickle 27--00327
charge diode circuit located in the tailcone.
A. Calibration Procedures using I.A.I., P/N
24--33--00 -- WARNING CIRCUITS 9500324000.
1. Landing gear position lights and warning horn. (1) Remove glareshield, disconnect plug from
RED and GREEN landing gear position lights are in the rear of annunciator, remove annunciator front panel,
annunciator panel. The gear--down limit switch controls and place “Norm--Cal” switch in “CAL” position.
the GREEN gear--down light. Both limit switches con- (2) Plug, P/N 9500324000, calibration transfer
trol the RED gear unsafe light. standard to rear of old annunciator and reconnect har-
S/N: 27--0001 thru 27--0317, 27--0319 thru 27--0325, ness plug.
27--00327 (3) Turn Master Switch ON and turn right hand
The throttle control operates landing gear warning horn variable resistor on transfer standard slowly counter
(intermittent tone) when the throttle is retarded to within clockwise until right “low fuel” light just turns on. (If nec-
1/4 in. of IDLE position and the landing gear is still in the essary turn variable resistor clockwise to extinguish
UP position. Check gear warning system during flight “low fuel” light). (Do not adjust annunciator calibration
for proper operation. screws). Repeat for left “low fuel”.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA (4) Turn Master Switch OFF and remove old an-
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) nunciator assembly after disconnection of harness and
transfer standard unit.
The throttle control operates the landing gear warning
(5) Install new annunciator and connect calibra-
(CHECK GEAR annunciator and aural) when the
tion transfer standard to annunciator panel and har-
throttle is retarded to within 1/4 inch of the IDLE position
ness plug. Remove front plate and legend on new an-
and the landing gear is still in the UP position. This must
nunciator panel to expose the NORM--CAL switch and
be checked during a flight test by verifying that the
the Left and Right trim potentiometers. (Switch must be
check gear warning occurs when the throttle is retarded
in “CAL” position).
and the landing gear is still in the UP position.
(6) Adjust left and right annunciator fuel calibra-
2. Pre--stall Warning Circuit. The pre--stall warning tion screws clockwise (not the adapter variable resis-
horn (Non Garmin G1000 equipped aircraft) has a high tors) until “low fuel” lights just turn -- ON. (If necessary
frequency continuous tone that sounds when airspeed turn annunciator calibration screw counter clockwise to
drops to within 5 to 10 KIAS above stalling speed. For extinguish “low fuel” light).
Garmin G1000 system equipped aircraft, the Sonalert
tone is heard and approximately one second later (7) Remove calibration transfer standard, recon-
“STALL” is annunciated over the speaker. nect plug to annunciator panel, set switch to “NOR-
MAL” position, install annunciator front panel and
A vane in the left wing leading edge actuates the pre-- install glareshield.
stall warning horn switch. (This vane is made of heat
treated steel and any attempt to adjust switch operation B. Alternate method for calibration without I.A.I.
point by bending the vane will damage the switch). Re- unit.
fer to Section 27--95--00 for adjustment procedures. If calibration transfer standard, P/N 9500324000, is not
3. High and Low Vacuum Warning Circuit (Non Gar- available use the following method to calibrate “low
min G1000 equipped aircraft). A switch in the vacuum fuel” warning:
system controls the vacuum warning light on the an- (1) Remove glareshield and remove annunciator
nunciator panel. Vacuum below 4.25 IN. Hg. causes assembly.
the vacuum warning light to FLASH. Vacuum above 5.5
IN. Hg. trips the high--vacuum switch causing the vacu- (2) Install and connect new annunciator assem-
um warning light to illuminate steadily. bly leaving front panel off. (Set switch to “CAL”).
4. Low Fuel Warning Circuit. The low fuel indicators (3) Drain fuel from tanks and replace with unus-
will illuminate when a minimum of 6--8 gallons usable able fuel, plus 2 1/2 gallons in both tanks.
fuel remains in either left or right hand tank. When it be- (4) Turn Master Switch ON and adjust calibration
comes necessary to replace the annunciator panel for pots to position where “low fuel” lamps just turn on for
any reason other than “low fuel” warning malfunction, left and right tanks.
the following procedure should be used to set the “low
(5) Turn Master Switch -- OFF, set annunciator
fuel” warning circuits. The calibration transfer standard
“CAL” switch to “NORM” position, install annunciator
(I.A.I., P/N 9500324000) is required for this procedure.
front and install glareshield.
Adapters can be ordered through Mooney Service
Parts by any Mooney Service Center. (6) Refuel aircraft.
24--33--00
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
S/N: 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA (GARMIN G1000 gine jump started with another power source for two
equipped) major reasons:
Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for Fuel (1) The discharged aircraft battery is not airwor-
Quantity Calibration instructions. thy because it will not have the necessary reserve ca-
pacity required to operate the aircraft electrical system
5. Alternate Air Light Warning Circuit -- Annunciator and avionics in the event of failure of the charging sys-
Panel. The light illuminates on the annunciator panel tem during flight.
when the alternate air door has opened for any reason.
(2) Active material on the positive plate expands
6. Hi/Low Voltage Warning Circuit -- Annunciator when the battery is discharged and the fast recharge
Panel. Remove annunciator top cover. Connect a volt- from the higher potential source, battery, alternator,
meter to aircraft Buss. Start engine and increase RPM rectifier, etc., will severely damage the battery. A slow
until flashing ”VOLTS” light extinguishes. (This should charge is recommended prior to flight.
be above 26.6 volts). Add load, such as Pitot Heat &
The M20M has a second battery that may be selected
Nav. Lights. Slowly decrease RPM while monitoring
as the primary battery for a particular flight. The battery
voltage until light begins to flash. This should occur be-
not being utilized will be recharged by a trickle charge
tween 26.6 & 26.4 volts. Adjust trim pot as necessary to
from the aircraft alternator’s charging system. There-
obtain desired result.
fore, if only one battery is discharged to the point that it
NOTE will not start the engine the other battery may be se-
It may be necessary to adjust trim pot to turn out lected and the flight continued.
light at 26.5 volts first. Increase RPM. until light 2. Oil and Cylinder Head Temperature Gauge Cir-
goes out and note voltage. Decrease RPM until cuits. Both the oil and cylinder head temperature indi-
light flashes on and note voltage. Light should cators operate electrically. The oil temperature gauge
come on between 26.4 and 26.6 volts. circuit has a resistance bulb in the oil cooler adapter ad-
24--34--00 -- POWER PLANT CIRCUITS jacent to the vern--a--therm valve. Changes in resist-
ance caused by changes in oil temperature alter cur-
1. Starter--Ignition Circuit. The starter--ignition switch
rent flow rate, thereby varying the magnetic field in the
has five positions: OFF, R (right), L (left), BOTH, and
indicator coils. The cylinder head temperature indicator
START. In the OFF position both magnetos are
connects to a tip sensitive resistance bulb in a cylinder
grounded. At the R position the left magneto is
head, normally No. 2 cylinder. Increase or decrease in
grounded. At the L position the right magneto is
temperature causes an increase or decrease in bulb re-
grounded. At the BOTH position both magnetos are
sistance, varying the magnetic field in the indicator
HOT and the ignition system is ON. Turning the ignition
coils.
switch to start and pushing IN, closes the starter sole-
noid, engages the starter and allows the impulse cou- 3. The oil pressure instrument circuit contains an
pling to automatically retard magneto until the engine is electrical instrument and a transducer which varies re-
also at its retard firing position. The spring action of the sistance with pressure.
impulse coupling is then released to spin the rotating 4. Fuel Flow read on the indicator uses an electrical
magnet and produce the spark to fire the engine. After instrument which counts electrical pulses produced by
engine starts, the impulse coupling flyweights do not a turbine type fuel flow transducer.
engage due to centrifugal action. The coupling then 24--35--00 -- LIGHTING CIRCUITS
acts as a straight drive and the magneto fires at the nor-
mal firing position of the engine. The starter--ignition 1. Navigation Lights. A circuit breaker/switch on the
switch is spring loaded to return from START to the forward O/H panel controls navigation lights.
BOTH position, when released. 2. Landing/Taxi Lights. A pair of split switches on the
forward O/H panel control left and right landing and taxi
WARNING
lights located in the wing’s leading edge.
Do not turn the propeller when the magnetos are
not grounded. Ground the magneto points before 3. Cabin Lights. A three--position (Bright, Off, Dim)
removing switch wires or electrical connectors. rocker switch, located in arm rests of side panels, be-
All spark plug leads can be removed as an alter- side each occupant, controls cabin lights.
nate safety measure. Aircraft S/N: 27--0053 thru 27--07 may have a door
CAUTION switch and timer mechanism that energizes the forward
Do not operate starter in excess of 15 seconds or set of interior lights while cabin door is open. After cabin
re--engage starter without allowing it time to cool. door is closed, if rocker switch is left ON, forward interi-
or lights will remain ON for approximately 2 minutes.
A. LOW BATTERY STARTING PROCEDURE.
The rocker switch is connected through the MASTER
A battery that has been discharged to the point where it switch on these aircraft and forward interior lights will
will not turn the engine over but has sufficient power return OFF when MASTER switch is turned OFF if door is
maining for other equipment; should NOT have the enclosed.
24--34--00
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
4. Strobe Lights. A circuit breaker/switch on forward The GEAR DOWN annunciator light is dimmed when-
O/H panel controls the white anti--collision strobe ever navigation lights are ON.
lights. 2. Gear Safety By--Pass Switch. The gear will not re-
5. Rotating/Flashing Beacon Light. A circuit breaker/ tract if airspeed above the set limit has not been at-
switch on forward O/H panel controls optional beacon. tained when the gear handle is placed in the UP posi-
tion. A warning horn will sound and both “GEAR
6. Recognition Lights. A circuit breaker/switch on for- DOWN” and “GEAR UNSFE” lights will illuminate.
ward O/H panel controls optional recognition lights. PUSH and HOLD the RED BUTTON SWITCH beside
7. Instrument and Radio Lights. Switches are located the landing gear handle until the gear is up and both
on the lower co--pilot’s control panel for the glareshield lights go OUT. PULL the “GEAR CONT” or “GEAR
and radio lights. The glareshield rheostat also controls RELAY” circuit breaker to stop warning horn. Reset cir-
the compass light. Lighting is controlled by turning cuit breaker prior to extending gear.
rotary rheostat switch(s) to intensify or dim either light 24--37--00 -- FUEL SYSTEM CIRCUITS
system. The fuel system has an electric fuel boost pump. The
8. Baggage Compartment Light. A 24 volt baggage fuel quantity indicating system is comprised of two
compartment light is located in the baggage compart- transmitters in each fuel tank (inboard and outboard)
ment left hand headliner and is controlled by a rocker and two fuel quantity gauges (L & R) in the instrument
switch mounted in the baggage compartment right panel.
hand headliner assembly. Depressing the rocker 1. Fuel Pump Circuit. -- A single, auxiliary electric boost
switch energizes a capacitor which in turn energizes fuel pump is controlled by one switch.
the fixture lamp. The duration that the switch is de-
2. Fuel Quantity Gauge Circuits. -- Changes in fuel
pressed and held in the ON position will determine the
level vary fuel quantity transmitter resistance (two in
length of time the lamp remains illuminated. This light
each tank work in series with each other) that operates
will automatically turn OFF after approximately 10 min-
the fuel quantity gauges. The Master Switch activates
utes.
the fuel quantity indicating system. Refer to Section
CAUTION 28--43--00 for Adjustment Procedures.
The cabin and baggage interior lights are not
connected to the Master Switch circuitry and can 3. Fuel Flow System -- A turbine type, fuel flow trans-
be operated with Master Switch in the -- Off -- ducer is installed in the fuel line between the engine
position. Care must be exercised to prevent leav- driven fuel pump and the throttle body control of the fuel
ing switch(es) ON and discharging one of the injector system. The fuel flow indicator is sent electrical
batteries. impulses from the transducer to indicate current fuel
flow at a given power setting.
9. Map Light. A switch/rheostat, located on the con-
trol wheel, controls the map light and brightness. The 24--38--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS CIRCUITS.
co--pilots map light is optional. 1. Turn Coordinator Circuit. The turn coordinator is a
flight instrument which operates from an electrical pow-
24--36--00 -- LANDING GEAR CIRCUITS
er source.
1. Limit switches and relays operate the reversible 2. Heated Pitot Tube. A circuit breaker switch con-
landing gear actuator motor. A landing gear, air pres- trols the pitot tube heater.
sure, safety switch, actuated by pitot air pressure, pre-
vents landing gear retraction until a safe flying speed is 3. Hour Meter. The hour meter operates from the
attained. The landing gear control switch operates ac- electric tachometer. An optional Hobbs meter may be
tuator motor through the safety switch and relays. installed.
When the landing gear control switch is UP and a safe 4. Accessory Socket. A 14 volt Accessory Socket is
flying speed has been attained, the safety switch mounted in the right instrument panel.
closes to activate the control relay and the actuator 5. Current Sensor Monitor (ref. Figures 24--4/24--5).
starts. As the gear reaches the up and locked position,
a mechanical up stop opens the limit switch and the ac- A. Remove front cover from Annunciator.
tuator stops. When landing gear control switch is B. Start engine and run at moderate speed until
placed in the DOWN position, the gear motor down-- ammeter charge rate drops to near zero.
relay closes and the actuator starts. When the gear C. Turn OFF all equipment -- avionics, lights, pitot
reaches the down--and--locked position, a mechanical heat, etc., so only the equipment connected to buss is
down stop opens the limit switch and the actuator operating (instruments).
stops. The gear--up limit switch controls the landing
gear un--safe light. The RED light comes on when the D. Turn OFF right alternator field switch.
gear is in transit. The green light comes on when the E. Adjust LH potentiometer clockwise until light illu-
gear reaches the down--and--locked position; the gear-- minates; then counterclockwise until light is extin-
down limit switch controls the green gear--down light. guished.
24--36--00
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
F. Turn left alternator OFF and turn right alternator nates, adjust appropriate potentiometer slightly coun-
ON. terclockwise until light is extinguished.
G. Repeat steps E & F with RH potentiometer. J. Replace cover and secure in original location.
H. Turn both alternators ON; if either light illumi-
INSTRUMENT LIGHT BULBS (TYP.)
NORM CAL.
IAI
1991
LEFT--FUEL CAL--RIGHT (LH) CH10--ALT ADJ--CH11(RH)
LOW FUEL WARNING ADJ. SCREWS ALTERNATOR NULL ADJ. SCREWS M27--4
CURRENT SENSOR MONITOR ADJUSTMENTS

(S/N: 27--0053 THRU 27--0239)
FIGURE 24--4
MINIMUM DIM. LEVEL FUEL LEVEL--LEFT FUEL LEVEL--RIGHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LEFT ALTERNATOR FUEL SETUP

RIGHT ALTERNATOR M27--5
NORM CAL
CURRENT SENSOR MONITOR ADJUSTMENTS

(S/N: 27--00240 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 thru 27--0325, 27--00327)
FIGURE 24--5
24--39--00 -- TROUBLE SHOOTING CHARTS
24--39--01 -- ALTERNATOR TROUBLE SHOOTING
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY
Alternator over--charges battery; Faulty regulator Check Buss voltage with engine
battery uses excessive water. running. Observe aircraft ammeter.
Ammeter should indicate near zero
after ten minutes of engine opera-
tion.
Replace voltage regulator if defec-
tive.
ALT FIELD circuit breaker trips. Circuit shorted in wiring. Disconnect lead from pin 5 of reg-
ulator, and reset circuit breaker. If
circuit breaker trips, check wiring.
Repair as required. If breaker does
not trip, replace regulator. Recon-
nect lead to regulator. Turn Alter-
nator Field & Master Switch ”ON”
and check for 24 volts at pin 5 of
regulator. Repair wiring if no volt-
age is present.
24--39--00
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
ALT circuit breaker trips. Short circuit in wiring. Disconnect lead from ”+” post of
alternator & reset ALT circuit
breaker. If circuit breaker trips,
check wiring between alternator &
circuit breaker.
Short circuit in alternator. Replace lead to ”+” post of alterna-
tor.
WARNING: -- BE SURE MAGNETO SWITCH IS OFF WHEN TURNING PROPELLER
ALT circuit breaker trips (Contd.). Short circuit in alternator (Contd.) Rotate propeller by hand to rotate
alternator through 360o of travel. If
circuit breaker trips, replace alter-
nator.
Alternator will not keep battery Battery malfunction. Start engine, adjust for 1500 RPM.
charged. Ammeter should indicate a heavy
charge rate with all electrical
equipment turned off. Rate should
taper off in 1 -- 3 minutes.
A voltage check at the Buss
should indicate a reading of 28.6
to 28.8 volts. If charge rate tapers
off very quickly and voltage is nor-
mal, check battery for malfunction.
If ammeter shows a low charge
rate or any discharge rate, and
voltage is low, proceed to step 3.
Defective wiring. Check voltage at terminal 5, with
Alt. Fld. & Master switch ”ON”. Me-
ter should indicate Buss voltage. If
voltage is not present, check wir-
ing between regulator and Buss.
Faulty regulator. Remove connector from regulator,
start engine.
Momentarily jump pins 5 & 7 to-
gether on the plug. Aircraft amme-
ter should show heavy rate of
charge. If heavy charge rate is ob-
served, replace regulator.
If heavy rate is not observed, pro-
ceed to step 5.
CAUTION
Pull Alternator Field C/B. Start engine; while at idle RPM, reset C/B. Slowly increase RPM while moni-
toring Buss voltage. DO NOT EXCEED 28 volts.
Alternator will not keep battery Defective wiring, regulator to alter- Check resistance from Fld terminal
charged (Contd.). nator. of alternator to pin 7 of reg. plug.
Normal indication is a very low re-
sistance. If reading indicates no, or
poor continuity (high resistance),
repair or replace wiring from regu-
lator to alternator.
24--39--01
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
Defective alternator. Check resistance from case to

field of alternator. Normal indica-
tion is 3 – 4 ohms. If resistance is
high or low, repair or replace alter-
nator.
Check resistance from F2 terminal
of alternator to alternator case.
Normal resistance is high. If resist-
ance is low, repair or replace alter-
nator.
24--39--02 -- RESERVED
24--39--03 -- BATTERY TROUBLE SHOOTING

Discharged battery. Battery worn out. Replace battery.
Improper charging rate setting. Reset charging rate.
Excessive discharging. Turn off some equipment when al-
ternator is not charging. Decrease
starter usage by using external
power, whenever possible.
Standing too long. Remove and recharge battery.
Equipment accidentally left on. Remove and recharge battery.
Impure electrolyte. Replace battery.
Short circuit (ground) in wiring. Check wiring.
Low charging rate. Adjust voltage regulator.
Cracked cell jars. Loose hold--down bracket. Replace battery and secure firmly.
Frozen battery. Replace battery.
Compound on top of battery melts. Charging rate too high. Reduce charging rate by adjusting
voltage regulator.
Electrolyte runs out of vent plugs. Too much water added to battery Drain battery and keep at proper
and charging rate too high. level; adjust voltage regulator.
Excessive corrosion on mounting Spillage from overfilling. Flush area with baking soda solu-
surface. tion.
Leaking or clogged vent line. Repair or clean vent line.
Charging rate too high. Adjust voltage regulator.
Battery freezes. Discharged battery. Replace battery.
Water added and battery not Always recharge battery for 1/2
charged immediately. hour following addition of water in
freezing weather.
Leaking battery case. Frozen electrolyte. Replace battery.
Reversed battery polarity. Cables connected backwards on Battery should be slowly dis-
battery or charger. charged completely, then charged
correctly & tested.
Excessive water consumption in all Charging rate too high. Correct charging rate.
cells.
Excessive water consumption in Cracked jar. Replace battery.
one cell only.
24--39--02
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
24--39--04 -- STARTER TROUBLE SHOOTING

Motor fails to operate. Low battery. Check & recharge battery if reqd.
Defective, improper, or loose wire Refer to electrical wiring diagram &
connections. check all wiring.
Binding, worn, improperly seated Brushes should fit free in brush
brushes or brushes have exces- boxes without excessive side play.
sive side play. Clean binding brushes & brush
boxes with Varsol moistened cloth.
A new brush should be run--in until
at least 50% seated; if facilities are
not available for running in
brushes, seat brush by inserting a
strip of No. .0000 sand-- paper be-
tween brush & commutator with
sanded side next to brush.
Pull sandpaper in direction of rota-
tion, being careful to keep it in
same contours as commutator.
CAUTION:
Do not use coarse sandpaper or emery cloth.
Motor fails to operate. (Contd.) After seating, thoroughly clean
brushes and commutator to pre-
vent excessive wear. Keep motor
bearing free from sand or metal
particles.
Dirty commutator. If commutator is rough or dirty,
smooth and polish with No. 0000
sandpaper.
If too rough and pitted, remove
commutator and turn down. Blow
out all foreign material.
Shorted, grounded, or open arma- Remove and replace with an ar-
ture. mature known to be in good work-
ing order.
Grounded or open field circuit. Test and repair circuit if possible or
replace with new parts.
Slow cranking speed. Worn, rough, or improperly lubri- Disassemble, clean, inspect, and
cated motor or starter. relubricate components, replacing
ball bearing, if worn.
Same causes as listed with “Motor Same remedies.
fails to operate.”
Excessive motor brush arcing. Binding, worn, improperly seated Repair as outlined above.
brush or brushes have excessive
side play.
Dirty, rough, pitted, or scored com- Clean as outlined.
mutator.
Excessive motor brush wear and Rough or scored commutator. Remove and turn down commuta-
arcing tor on lathe.
Armature assembly not concentric. Reface commutator.
24--39--04
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
24--39--05 -- ANNUNCIATOR TROUBLE SHOOT- the dimmed channels to a bright condition. The chan-
ING nels having the capability of being dimmed by the
The following is a brief operational analysis which per- above circuitry are channels 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 14, and 15.
tains to the I.A.I. annunciator on the Mooney M20M. Channel 1, Landing Gear, dims by means of a separate
circuit and is discussed in Section 4.0 below. With all
1.0 GENERAL both the Dim Switch and Test Switch relaxed, transistor
This document is intended to be a guide to assist the Q3 is in saturation and Q2 is off, giving “DIMBIAS” a val-
service technician in understanding the theory and op- ue of approximately 9 VDC. When the Dim Switch is de-
eration of the International Avionics, Inc. (IAI) Part pressed Q3 comes out of saturation and “DIMBIAS”
Numbers, 9500326000 & 9500326001 annunciators. It rises to 12 VDC, and when the Test Switch is depressed
is not intended to serve as a bench service aid in that Q2 saturates and “DIMBIAS” drops to near 0 VDC. In
the reference designator in the various Figures are not the event that both switches are depressed simulta-
consistent with those found in the actual annunciators. neously, the 0 VDC value of “DIMBIAS” will prevail and
Service literature is available, to identify the location of the dimmed channels, with the exception of Channel 1,
a particular component and the exact manner in which are reset to a bright condition.
the components are interconnected, from: 3.0 FLASHER
International Avionics, Incorporated (IAI) The Flasher, shown in Schematic Figure 24--6, pro-
3782 Arapaho Road vides the circuit to flash the outputs of the left and right
Addison, TX 75001 alternator warnings, the low voltage warning and the
Telephone Number (972) 247--7498 low vacuum warning. The flasher consists of an astable
The following sections address nine (9) basic circuits oscillator driving an NPN common emitter connected
which, used singularly or in multiple combinations, transistor, Q4. This allows the open collector of Q4,
comprise the annunciators. These sections are as fol- identified as FLASH, to sink the drive from the output
lows: amplifiers of the appropriate warning channels.
2.0 Power Supply, with Test & Dim Switches 4.0 LANDING GEAR INDICATORS
3.0 Flasher
The Landing Gear Indicators, shown in Schematic Fig-
4.0 Landing Gear Indicators
ure 24--7, provide the status of the landing gear posi-
5.0 Left and Right Low Fuel
tion, that is, whether the landing gear is Down or not
6.0 Hi/Lo Vac
and whether the landing gear is safe or unsafe, unsafe
7.0 Alternator/Low Volts/Over Volt
being in transit. The circuit shown is the identical circuit
8.0 Not Used
that has been used for many years in the IAI annuncia-
9.0 Typical Positive Apply W/Dim
tors used on Mooney aircraft. The GEAR DOWN chan-
10.0 Typical Positive Apply W/O/Dim.
nel is dimmed for night operation; however, in the inter-
2.0 POWER SUPPLY est of reliability, the dimming circuit is separate from the
The Power Supply, shown in Schematic Figure 24--5, dimming technique used on the other dimmed chan-
provides 12 VDC, reverse voltage protection by means nels.
of CR1, spike and overvoltage filtering by means of the The gear down signal, +28 VDC, is applied through
low pass network of R1, R2, C1 and C2 with spike isolation diode CR7, to the INPOS1 input and CH1RET
clamping provided by CR2. The actual power supply is is returned to the Nav Light Buss. When +28 VDC is ap-
a 12 VDC, integrated circuit regulator. Output filtering is plied to INPOS1 and the Nav Lights are off, the imped-
provided by C2. ance of this point is very low due to the low filament re-
The Test Switch, S1, switches unfiltered aircraft 28VDC sistance of the Nav Light bulbs, and GEAR DOWN
to the internal test line, identified with the mnemonic illuminates at near full brilliance. When the Nav Lights
“TEST+”. This signal, diode isolated by CR5, is also are on, however, CH1RET is also +28 VDC and CR9
supplied as “OUTTEST+”. Additionally ”TEST+” is ap- switches this return path off, the return path for the
plied to the inverter to supply the internal test line, GEAR DOWN lamp being through R15 to Ground and
“TEST--”, and the diode isolated “OUTTEST--”. GEAR DOWN now illuminates at reduced brilliance.
The dimmer circuit, applicable to certain channels, re- The GEAR UNSAFE channel accepts +28 VDC, IN-
quires a bias source, “DIMBIAS”, with a magnitude of POS2, through isolation diode CR10, illuminates at full
12 VDC to dim the applicable ACTIVE channels, brilliance and does not dim. A test signal, “TEST+” is
approximately 3 VDC to maintain the dim level of those applied to both GEAR DOWN and GEAR UNSAFE
channels previously dimmed, and near 0 VDC to reset through CR8 and CR11 respectively.
24--39--05
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006
CR1 R1 U1
1N4005 R2 MC7812
28VDC 33 33 12VDC
1 3
Vin Vout
GND
CR2 + C1 + C2 + C3
2
22MFD
1N5363 6.8MFD 6.8MFD
R3
10K TEST --
CR3 R4 CR4
S1 1N4005 5.6K 1N4005
TEST OUTTEST --
Q1
2N6039
12VDC
TEST +
R6
10K
CR6 DIMBIAS
CR5 R5
1N4005 1N4005
OUTTEST + 5.6K
Q2
2N3019 +
C4
12VDC R7 1.0MFD
3.3K
R8
10K
S2 Q3
DIM 2N3019
R24--5
POWER SUPPLY FIGURE 24--5
12VDC
R11 R13
33K 2.2K
R14
33K FLASH
1/4--MC3302
R12
-- UZ 4.7K Q4
+ 2N3019
+
C5 R10
22MFD 33K R9
33K
R24--6
FLASHER FIGURE 24--6
24--39--05
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
CR7
The Q10 -- Q8 network is required to provide the transi-
IN4005 tion between the internal 12 VDC and aircraft +28 VDC.
INPOS1
The delay provided by the charge of C9 through
LMPPOS1 R48 and R49 provides filtering to preclude false an-
CR8
IN4005 nunciation in rough air. When the fuel level rises, due to
DS1 sloshing in the tank and U5:C switches to a low output
7327
1 state, C9 is discharged rapidly through R49. The delay
CR9 2 time of the charging network provides a delay in low fuel
IN4005 annunciation of approximately 20 seconds.
CH1RET
A test of the functioning of the low fuel channel is ac-
POS1RET complished by applying “TEST+” through R43 -- CR18
R15
47B 28VDC to the input of U5:C to switch U5:C and applying
“TEST+” through R42 -- CR15 to accelerate the charg-
DS2 ing rate of the filter C9, thus reducing the delay to
7327
1 approximately 2 seconds.
CR10 2
1N4005 In order to calibrate the low fuel channel the set point,
INPOS2
R51, is adjusted with the screwdriver adjustment ac-
cessible through the front of the annunciator while
LMPPOS2
CR11 there is a preset number of gallons in the tank. The time
IN4005 delay must be removed from the circuit by moving S3,
TEST +
accessible through the front of the annunciator, from
R24--7
the NORMAL position to the CALIBRATE position. This
opens the return for capacitor C9 and the indication on
LANDING GEAR INDICATOR FIGURE 24--7 the L LOW FUEL channel will not be delayed. After cal-
5.0 LEFT AND RIGHT LOW FUEL ibration is accomplished, restore the time delay by
The Left and Right Low Fuel circuits are shown in Sche- moving S3 from the CALIBRATE position back to the
matic Figure 24--8. The left and the right channels are NORMAL position. The position S3 can be determined
similar, and only the left channel will be discussed here- without removing the front of the annunciator. When the
in. Signals from the junction of the left and right fuel TEST switch is depressed observe the indication of L
transducers and the left and right fuel quantity gauges LOW FUEL and R LOW FUEL. With S3 in the NORMAL
are applied, respectively, to each of the inputs INPOS3 position there is a delay of approximately 2 seconds in
and INPOS4. This signal is an analog signal that indi- illumination, but with S3 in the CALIBRATE position
cates the quantity of fuel measured, the typical low fuel there is no delay in illumination.
point being on the order of 0.1 volt. The low fuel circuits Up to this point the circuits used to annunciate low fuel
can, however, annunciate an input up to approximately are the same circuits that have been used for many
0.7 volt. years in IAI annunciators used on Mooney aircraft. The
The input, INPOS3, is applied through an isolation re- method of dimming, however, has been changed and
sistor R55 to the inverting input of open collector expanded from what has been used in the past. In the
comparator U5:C. The input is compared with the set past only the low fuel channels dimmed, excluding
point affected by the setting of R51, accessible through GEAR DOWN discussed above, while now the dim-
the front of the annunciator, and, when the input is less ming has been expanded to include additional 5 chan-
than the set point, the comparator’s output is allowed to nels. From the perspective of the pilot the operation is
rise by means of the pull--up resistor R54 and the net- the same, depress the DIM switch and active channels
work R48, R49, and C9. Feedback resistor R53 pro- dim, depress the TEST switch and active dimmed
vides a small amount of hysteresis to preclude oscilla- channels return to bright. When a dimmed channel is
tion at the transition point. The exponentially rising extinguished and then reactivates it will reactivate
output of U5:C is applied to the inverting input of open bright. The method to accomplish this, however, is con-
collector comparator U5:B and is compared with a ref- siderably different from the past. Each channel to be
erence voltage of approximately 6 VDC. When U5:B dimmed is driven by a transistor, in this case Q8 which
switches its output to ground Q10 conducts and drives returns the lamp to ground through two parallel paths.
Q8 into saturation to light the LOW FUEL channel lamp, The path to provide a dim indication is through resistor
DS3. R29 which reduces the brilliance of the lamp.
24--39--05
Page 21
Rev Date Date 2006
Date
Page 22
24--39--05
2006
12VDC 28VDC
12VDC 12VDC 12VDC
LMPPOS 3
R54 R47 DS3
R55 U5:C 1.0M 10K 7327
15K MC3302 Q6 R23 R24
Q10 2N6039 1 R25
C11 14 2N4036 47K 470K 6.8K
1NPOS3 R29 2
CR18 0.01 R49 470
CR15 10K R46 R26
R53 1N4005 15K
U5:B CR13 28VDC 47K
8.2M R48 6 MC3302 R31 1N4005 R22
1N4005 R52 1 6.8K 47K U3
1.2K 7 DIMIN 3
22K
R58
C9
R51 10K 22MFD Q8 C6
2N3019 0.01 1/4 -- MC3302
500 12VDC 22K
TEST+ DIMBIAS R27
R42 R44 R45
R43 47K 15K 15K
DIMOUT 3
33K 12VDC 28VDC
12VDC 12VDC 12VDC
CR14 R32 DS4
1N4005 10K LMPPOS 4 7327
R41 Q9 Q5 R20 R19
U5:D R40 2N6039 1 R18
1NPOS4 15K MC3302 1.0M 12VDC 2N4036 47K 470K 6.8K
10 R28 2 R17
13
C10 11 R33 470 47K
CR16 R35 U5:A 15K CR12
1N4005 0.01 R39 MC3302 1N4005 28VDC
10K 5 2 R30 R21
8.2M R34 4 6.8K DIMIN 4 47K U4
R38 1.2K
22K Q7
C8
R37 22MFD
R36 2N3019 C7 1/4 -- MC3302
10K 12VDC 0.01 22K
S3
LEFT & RIGHT LOW FUEL FIGURE 24--8

DIMBIAS R16
500
DIMOUT 4
R24--8
Rev Date
In the bright mode R29 is shorted by Q6 and CR13 LOW VAC INPUT. The channel High/Low Vac does not
which provide a low impedance path to ground. Tran- dim.
sistor Q6 is controlled in conduction by a latch com- 7.0 ALTERNATOR/LOW VOLTS/OVER VOLT
posed of U3 and its associated resistors R22, R23, The Alternator/Low Volts/Over Volts circuits are shown
R24, R25, R26 and R27 as well as the signals “DIM- in Schematic Figure 24--10. This channel is designed to
BIAS” and “DIMIN3”. If the channel is active “DIMIN3” accept two signals, the +28 VDC signal LOVERRIDE
will be near ground and with “DIMBIAS” near 3 VDC, from the overvoltage tripped output on the left alterna-
the output of U3 will be high, thus driving Q6 into con- tor regulator, and one signal derived internally that indi-
duction. When the DIM Switch is depressed momen- cates that the aircraft Buss voltage is less than 26.5
tarily, “DIMBIAS” goes high to 12 VDC and U3 switches VDC. When low voltage is detected internally the an-
its output low and latches through R26. This low output nunciator channel flashes, and when overvoltage
removes the drive from Q6 and DS3 dims. When the tripped is detected the annunciator channel illuminates
TEST Switch is depressed momentarily, “DIMBIAS” steady.
goes low and U3 switches its output high, latches
Comparator U6 monitors the aircraft 28 VDC by
through R26, and drives Q6 into conduction. When the
comparing the voltage at the arm of R68 with the regu-
channel deactivates, Q8 opens the return to ground
lated voltage at the junction of R64 and R65. The output
and “DIMIN3” rises which returns latch U3 to a high out-
of U6, an open collector comparator is normally low.
put state.
When low voltage is detected the output of U6 rises and
6.0 HI/LO VAC drives Q12 into conduction through the bias network
R60, CR24, and CR28, thus illuminating DS10. In a
The High/Low Vacuum circuits are shown in Schematic manner similar to the Hi/Lo Vac channel, the signal
Figure 24--9. This channel is designed to accept two FLASH will remove this drive signal as the flasher
+28 VDC signals, one from a low vacuum sensor and cycles, thus flashing DS10. A +28 VDC signal applied
one from a high vacuum sensor. When low vacuum is to LOVERRIDE will bypass the above network and
detected the annunciator will flash and when high vacu- drive Q12 into conduction regardless of the state of the
um is detected the annunciator will illuminate steady. A comparator U6. Similarly “TEST+” will drive Q12 into
+28 VDC signal applied to LOW VAC INPUT will drive conduction regardless of the state of the comparator
Q11 into conduction through the bias network R56, U6. A +28 VDC signal applied to LOVERRIDE also
R57, CR17, and CR22, thus illuminating DS9. The sig- drives Q12 into conduction regardless of the states of
nal FLASH will, however, remove this drive signal as either comparator U6 or U7. Similarly “TEST+” will
the flasher cycles, thus flashing DS9. A +28 VDC signal drive Q12 into conduction regardless of the states of ei-
applied to HIGH VAC OVERRIDE will bypass the ther comparator U6 or U7.
above network and drive Q11 into conduction regard- The channel Left Alternator/Low Volts/Over Volt does
less of the state of LOW VAC INPUT. Similarly “TEST+” not dim.
will drive Q11 into conduction regardless of the state of 8.0 NOT USED
28VDC
DS9
FLASH 7327
CR19 1
IN4005
2
R57 CR17 CR22
LOW VAC 6.8K IN4005 IN4005
INPUT Q11
2N6039
R1 R58
6.8K 6.8K
CR4
IN4005
HIGH VAC OVERRIDE
TEST +
CRZ1
IN4005 R24--9
HI/LO VAC FIGURE 24--9
24--39--05
Page 23
Rev Date Date 2006
28VDC
28VDC DS10
12VDC 7327
R65 R61 1
R69
4.7K 15K 2.2K 2
R62
CR29 470K TP1: LOW VOLT SET
1N4005
R60 CR24
1N4005 1N4005 Q12
R68 R66 U6 10K
500 2N6039
4.7K 1/4--MC3302 CR23 CR20
R67 R64
1.2K 15K 1N4005 CR25 1
1N4005
FLASH
1N4005
R OVERRIDE R63
CR27 6.8K
TEST+ 1N4005
CR26
12VDC
R74
4.7
ALTBIAS H
12VDC
R59 1.680001XXX 1.680001XXX R78
10K R73 R71 6.8K
C12 U7
ALTBIAS L
R75 0.01
5.6K 1/4--MC3302
LA INPUT R72
1.680001XXX
R24--10
ALTERNATOR, LO VOLTS/OVER VOLT

FIGURE 24--10
9.0 TYPICAL POSITIVE -- APPLY W/DIM The path to provide a dim indication is through resistor
R85 which reduces the brilliance of the lamp. In the
A typical Positive Apply, Dimmable circuit is shown in
bright mode R85 is shorted by Q14 and CR34 which
Schematic Figure 24--11. This channel is designed to
provide a low impedance path to ground. Transistor
accept a +28 VDC signal to illuminate an indicator
Q14 is controlled in conduction by a latch composed of
channel and provide for dimming of that channel, as
U9 and its associated resistors R86, R87, R88, R89,
well. Dimming is accomplished in a manner similar to
R90 and R91 as well as the signals “DIMBIAS” and “DI-
that described for low fuel channel above.
MINPUT”. If the channel is active “DIMINPUT” will be
The input, XINPUT, is applied through CR35 and R84 near ground and with “DIMBIAS” near 3 VDC, the out-
to drive Q15 into saturation and light DS--X. “TEST+” is put of U9 will be high, thus driving Q14 into conduction.
applied through CR36 and R84 to also drive Q15 into When the DIM Switch is depressed momentarily, “DIM-
saturation and light DS--X. These 5 channels may be BIAS” goes high to 12 VDC and U9 switches its output
dimmed by depressing the DIM switch to dim the active low and latches through R87. This low output removes
channels. Depressing the TEST switch returns the ac- the drive from Q14 and DS--X dims. When the TEST
tive dimmed channels to bright. When a dimmed chan- Switch is depressed momentarily, “DIMBIAS” goes low
nel is extinguished and then reactivates it will reactivate and U9 switches its output high, latches through R87,
bright. Each channel to be dimmed is driven by a tran- and drives Q14 into conduction. When the channel de-
sistor, in this case Q15 which returns the lamp to activates, Q15 opens the return to ground and “DIMIN-
ground through two parallel paths. PUT” rises which returns latch U9 to a high output state.
24--39--05
Page 24
Date 2006 Rev Date
12VDC 12VDC
LAMP 12VDC
DS--X
7327 R89
Q14 1 470 R88 R86
DIMOUTPUT 6.8K 22K
R85 R90
2N6B39 R87
470 2 47K
X INPUT
CR34 28VDC 47K
CR35 IN4005 DIMINPUT R91 U9
+
R84 47K C14 --
IN4005 Q15 0.01 1/4--MC3302
CR36
6.8K
2N3019 DIMBIAS
IN4005
TEST + R24--11
TYPICAL POSITIVE APPLY W/DIM FIGURE 24--11

10.0 TYPICAL POSITIVE APPLY W/O/DIM charge the batteries. The No. 2 battery will receive a
A typical Positive Apply, Non--Dimmable circuit is trickle charge while the No. 1 battery is receiving the pri-
shown in Schematic Figure 24--12. This channel is de- mary charging current. During flight, the non--selected
signed to accept a +28 VDC signal to illuminate an indi- battery is receiving a trickle charge from the aircraft al-
cator channel, but does not provide for dimming of that ternator to keep it at peak voltage.
channel. The input, YINPUT, is applied through CR38 CAUTION
to light DS--Y. “TEST+” is applied through CR37 to also First connect the approved Auxiliary Power
light DS--Y. Cable to the booster battery and then insert the
plug into the auxiliary power receptacle.
CR38
Y INPUT A. When auxiliary power or a booster battery is
used, be sure cables are connected correctly -- positive
IN4005 to positive and negative to negative. DO NOT by--pass
batteries when using an auxiliary power source.
CR37 DS--Y B. See paragraph 24--34--00, A for additional infor-
TEST +
7327 mation.
1
IN4005 24--50--00 -- ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION
2 24--51--00 -- POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
The power Buss distributes direct current power to the
electrical system from the alternator and from the se-
lected battery through the battery relay. The batteries
R24--12 negative leads attach to a structural ground on the air-
frame. The Master Switch “ON” closes the relay and
supplies power to the aircraft electrical system.
TYPICAL POSITIVE APPLY NON--DIM
FIGURE 24--12 CAUTION
24--40--00 -- AUXILIARY POWER SYSTEM Do not reset a circuit breaker after it has tripped
a second time. If necessary to do so to locate the
An auxiliary power plug and related circuitry is installed
malfunction, be alert for a possible electrical fire.
to provide an outside source of electrical power to the
Breakers are “Trip Free” type and cannot be held
aircraft (through No. 1 Battery Switch), to charge the
in the closed position.
No. 1 battery, or to start the engine. The Auxiliary Power
Plug guide pin must have A+ voltage connected to it in
order to activate the Auxiliary Power Relay. The No. 1
battery can be charged using the approved Auxiliary
Power Cable connected to a charge cart capable of
regulating the charging current. To prevent battery
damage, the charging current should be low (3 -- 4
amps) to begin and then increased as the battery volt-
age capacity is increased. The MASTER SWITCH is
not required to be ON for the auxiliary power source to
24--40--00
Page 25
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
24--51--00
Page 26
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 25
EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 25
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
25--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
25--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
25--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
25--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
25--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
25--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
25-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 25
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
25--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
25--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
25--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
25--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
25--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belts/Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
25--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat Belts/Restraints Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . 7
25--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
25--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
25--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
25-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
25--00--00 -- GENERAL A: Leather Cleaning Instructions:

25--00--01 -- INTERIOR SURFACES 1) Always pre--test leather cleaner in an incon-
Mooney M20M interior components are finished in a spicuous area for colorfastness.
variety of materials including: 2) Apply leather cleaner to a sponge, squeezing
Leather: to create foam. Apply foam to soiled area in a gentle cir-
Pilot/Co--Pilot Seats cular motion. Don’t Rub -- always use gentle circular
Passenger Seats motion for all applications and apply in light coats.
Seat Headrests & Armrests 3) Wait a few minutes, then blot with a soft, clean
Carpet Binding white lint--free cloth and reapply if area is heavily soiled.
Ultraleather (Izit Leather): 4) In some cases leather can be extremely dry
Cabin Side Panels and the leather cleaner will dissipate quickly. If this is
Window Panels the case, add 25% distilled water to the leather cleaner.
Lower Door Interior This gives a dampening effect to release the soil for
Headliner cleaning.
Glareshield 5) Leather will dry naturally, but to speed up dry-
Wool: ing time, a hair dryer held at a 30o angle can be used.
Headliner Speaker Cover 2. Ultraleather (Izit Leather) material is applied to
Plexiglass: interior items including, glareshield, interior side pan-
Windshield/Cabin Windows els, lower door panel, upper interior panels and
headliner.
Carpet:
Cabin Flooring Interior Ultraleather is applied over fiberglass formed
panels. A brushable, heat--resistant adhesive (3M
Clear Vinyl:
1300, St. Claire 4587 or Scotch Grip 1357) bonds the
Side Panel Pockets
material to the fiberglass sub--surface.
Garmin G1000 Integrated Avionics System:
CAUTION
GDU 1040 Display Screens
Fiberglass components are attacked and deterio-
CAUTION rated by the following products: Ketone, aliphatic
The GDU 1040 display screens use a lens coated esters, chlorinated hydrocarbons, and slightly
with a special anti--reflective coating that is very softened by aromatic hydrocarbons.
sensitive to skin oils, waxes and abrasive clean- A. Ultraleather Cleaning Instructions:
ers. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL
HARM THE ANTIREFLECTIVE COATING. It is very Always pre--test cleaners, detergents and solvents in
important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-- an inconspicuous area for colorfastness.
free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is (1) Spot clean with mild soap and water. For
specified as safe for anti--reflective coatings. stubborn stains, use mild solvent.
NOTE (2) Air dry or dry quickly with warm setting of a
Refer to M20M Illustrated Parts Catalog, Section hair dryer.
11--10--00, for material, leather, and carpet part B. Ultraleather Stain Removal:
number and vendor information.
(1) Use mild detergent for coffee, tea, red wine,
Normal household cleaning practices are recom- liquor, soft drinks, milk, ketchup, steak sauce, soy
mended for routine care. Frequently vacuum clean sauce, mayonnaise, butter, salad oil, chocolate, cos-
seats, carpets, fabric, side panels and headliner to re- metic foundation, lipstick, face cream, suntan oil/lotion,
move as much surface dirt and dust as possible. Wool- shoe polish and urine.
ite, mixed 1 part Woolite to 3 parts water may be used
for cleaning Ultraleather (Izit Leather) surfaces. (2) Use a mild cleaning fluid on stains like ma-
chine oil and on more stubborn stains when mild deter-
Interior surfaces of the aircraft may be cleaned more gent is not enough.
extensively using the following procedures. Avoid the
use of harsh cleaners that contain abrasives. 3. Wool (Stretchwool) is applied over the speaker
panel located in the headliner assembly.
WARNING
Before using a cleaning material, obtain the haz- A. Wool Cleaning Instructions:
ard code and incorporate necessary protection. (1) Clean by vacuuming or light brushing.
1. Leather coverings for seats, seat headrests, seat NOTE
armrests and carpet binding may be cleaned with com- Do not use force when vacuuming or brushing as
mercially available leather cleaning products. Follow damage to audio speakers mounted behind wool
the instructions on the product label, or: covering might result
25--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
4. Plexiglass windshield and cabin windows may pulling up on respective release handle located on left
be cleaned per instructions provided in Chapter 56 of or right of aircraft centerline on forward spar. This al-
this manual. lows adjustment from approximately 10o to 40o recline
CAUTION position.
Never use benzene, carbon tetrachloride, ace- The pilot and co--pilot seats may be removed by remov-
tone, or gasoline for cleaning Plexiglass or interi- ing seat track pins or bolts, forward and aft; push seat
or panels. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s forward to lift up front of seat structure, then aft to lift up
instructions when using commercial cleaning rear rollers of seat structure. Installation is the reverse
and finishing compounds. of removal.
5. Carpet is bonded to the cabin floor with adhesive 25--10--02 -- SEAT BELTS/RESTRAINTS
(3M 1300, St. Claire 4587 or Scotch Grip 1357). 1. General
Foam type shampoos may be used for routine cleaning A. Seat Belt Systems (Standard Equipment)
of carpets. To minimize carpet wetting, keep foam type
Seat belts equipped with inertia--reel shoulder har-
cleaners as dry as possible and gently rub in circles.
nesses for pilot and copilot positions are standard Re-
Use wet/dry vacuum cleaner to remove foam and dry
straint Systems for the Mooney M20M. Seat belts with
the materials. Grease spots, on carpet, should be re-
shoulder harness are standard Restraint System for
moved with jelly--type spot lifter. Do not saturate carpet
rear seat occupants.
with a solution which could damage backing materials.
The service life of the Restraint System is subject to pe-
A. Carpet Cleaning Instructions riodic inspection while in service and depends on the
Always pre--test cleaners, detergents and solvents in service environment in which it is used and the degree
an inconspicuous area for colorfastness. of use over the installation period. This subsequently
(1) Sponge stains with a solution of household places the responsibility for the continued airworthi-
detergent and lukewarm water. DO NOT SOAK. Follow ness of the restraint on the operator since the flight
this by rubbing with a damp cloth, rinsing the cloth be- times, usage, and operating environment will vary by
tween each treatment. operator.
Routinely check the belt, buckle, latch plate, retractor
CAUTION
and guide loops for proper operation. Also check for
Do not use soap, washing powder, ammonia,
loose or damaged parts that could keep the Restraint
soda or bleach. Prompt cleaning will remove
System from operating properly. Keep sharp edges
most stains. Improper treatment may increase
and sharp objects away from the belts and other com-
damage.
ponents of the Restraint System.
6. Clear Vinyl pockets are attached to the interior side
If the restraint is no longer usable based on the inspec-
panels of the aircraft.
tion for continued or renewed airworthiness, the Re-
A. Clear Vinyl Cleaning Instructions straint System must be discarded or returned to re-
(1) Gently wipe clean with mild soap and water straint manufacturer or restraint manufacturer
applied with a soft, clean, white lint--free cloth. DO NOT approved repair station for overhaul/repair.
rub forcefully. Scratches to the vinyl surface may result. B. Inflatable Airbag Restraint Systems (Optional
(2) Allow to air dry after cleaning. Equipment)
25--10--00 -- FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CAUTION
The Inflatable Airbag Restraint System is “live”
25--10--01 -- SEATS when all connections are made and the buckle is
Crew and passenger seats are of Mooney Airplane connected.
Company, Inc. manufacture. The front seats are indi- The Inflatable Airbag Restraint System Inflator is
vidually mounted and may be adjusted fore and aft to fit a stored gas/energetic device. Severe personal
individual comfort preferences. The front seat back injury may be caused by misuse or tampering
may be adjusted by turning left side hand crank (knob)
An optional Airbag Restraint System is available.
until seat back is in desired position.
These restraints are installed specific to an aircraft seat
Both optional front seat configurations allow for vertical and are not interchangeable between seats. Specific
seat height adjustment by turning right side hand crank system components have a predetermined service life
to raise or lower the entire seat assembly. and time sensitive refurbishment requirements.
Tri--Flow lubricant (or Teflon equivalent) is recom- Refer to the Restraint System manufacturer documen-
mended for lubricating the metal rotating components tation (supplied with system) for safe handling instruc-
of adjustable seats. tions, inspection intervals, maintenance, troubleshoot-
The rear seat backs have four (4) adjustment positions. ing, warnings and cautions.
Each seat can be adjusted independent of the other by 2. Inspection Intervals (Standard Restraint System)
25--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
A. Concurrently with the airworthiness inspection CAUTION

of the airframe. INFLATABLE AIRBAG RESTRAINT SYSTEMS:
NOTE Do not immerse the airbag belt assembly into
Refer to inspection intervals, Section 5, to deter- water. Moisture may damage internal compo-
mine when the Restraint System must be re- nents and cause component failure.
placed by Restraint System manufacturer or CAUTION
manufacturer approved repair station. Restraint Systems incorporating inflatable airbag
B. When the equipment has sustained damage or technology may NOT be dry cleaned under any
if malfunctions occur. circumstances.
C. When the equipment is transferred to another (1) Refer to the Restraint System manufacturer
owner or for any special reason. documentation (supplied with system) for cleaning in-
D. When the equipment has been over--stressed structions.
or if over--stress is suspected. Visual inspection of the CAUTION
Restraint System will not always reveal the extent of Do not use solvent type cleaners on webbing.
the damage caused by over--stress/crash impact/se- This may weaken the fibers. If fraying takes
vere loading conditions. In order to ensure that the orig- place, replace belts immediately.
inal design performance and structural integrity of the
restraint is maintained, the user should remove and re- 4. Restraint Storage (Standard Restraint System)
place all Restraint Systems within the aircraft after A. If it is necessary to keep the Restraint System in
over--stress/crash impact/severe loading conditions storage, keep it in conditions with a temperature range
have occurred. of --22o to +131° F (--30° to +55° C). The Restraint Sys-
3. Restraint Cleaning Guidelines tem must be protected from sunlight, dust, moisture,
and other contamination.
A. Standard Restraint System
CAUTION B. After removal from storage, new restraints shall
The Restraint System must not be machine be subject to inspection before installation into the air-
washed because the webbing will shrink and its craft.
performance characteristics will be changed sig- 25--10--03 -- SEAT BELTS/RESTRAINTS RE-
nificantly. MOVAL/INSTALLATION
CAUTION STANDARD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Standard Restraint Systems may be dry cleaned.
However, the webbing will lose its abrasion re- Removal of individual restraints is accomplished by:
sistance coating after each cleaning and its ser- 1. Remove plastic snap covers protecting mounting
vice life will therefore be decreased. Refer to Re- hardware at the seat and door frame/cabin post anchor
straint System manufacturer for dry cleaning locations.
instructions.
2. For access to restraint inertia--reel at cabin lower
Cleaning the Restraint System removes dirt and un- sidewall, remove screws securing Scuff Cover and re-
wanted oil and grease. This helps the Restraint System move cover.
to last longer and prevents corrosion of the metal parts.
3. Loosen and remove retaining bolts, washers and
CAUTION
bushings.
No soap or water is to be used on metal parts.
The webbing is to be cleaned with fresh water and a 4. Installation is the reverse procedure.
mild soap. The metal fittings are cleaned with a cloth INFLATABLE AIRBAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM
moistened with isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning the as-
CAUTION
semblies, protect them from moisture, dirt, or other
The Inflatable Airbag Restraint System is “live”
contamination. Keep them protected until a visual
when all connections are made and the buckle is
check is completed and return the Restraint System to
connected.
service.
WARNING The Inflatable Airbag Restraint System Inflator is
When using isopropyl alcohol, follow directions a stored gas/energetic device. Severe personal
and warnings given by the manufacturer & avoid injury may be caused by misuse or tampering
contact with the webbing material. Refer to AMSAFE AAIR Supplemental Maintenance
Do not dry the Restraint System in direct sunlight or use Manual E508923( ) for system handling and connectiv-
a direct heat source. ity.
B. Inflatable Airbag Restraint System Cleaning Refer to Standard Restraint System steps above for re-
(Optional Restraint System) moving restraints from cabin anchor points.
25--10--03
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
25--10--04 -- CABIN LIGHTING 25--50--00 -- BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Two pair of 24 volt overhead interior lights are located in The M20M baggage compartment, located aft of the
the cabin headliner for crew and passenger use. Power rear passenger seats, has a capacity of 20.9 cu. ft.
to these lamps is available with Master Switch in either (0.59 cu. M) and a maximum allowable load of 120 lbs.
the ON AND OFF position. (54 Kg). Floor tiedown straps are provided (Refer to
“Seat Belts/Restraints” cleaning instructions outlined
CAUTION
above for Tiedown web and metal hardware cleaning
The cabin light rocker switches are connected
guidelines).
directly to the battery.
Additional cargo space (38.6 cu. ft./1.09 cu. M.) is avail-
All passenger overhead lights are controlled by the able by removing rear seat, bottom cushion and seat
Master Light switch located on the pilot’s arm rest. With back cushion/cover and folding seat back down into
Master Light switch ON, individual overhead cabin seat bottom frame. This can be accomplished by pull-
lights are controlled by rocker switches located on each ing UP on the appropriate aft seat back reclining locking
passenger’s arm rest (excluding front seat passenger). handles located on the front of the spar.
The rockers switches control light ON, OFF and DIM.
Front seat passenger’s light switch is located forward of A small storage area located aft of the top of the aft bag-
the cabin door hinge on the interior side panel. gage compartment bulkhead (hat rack) is restricted to
10 lbs. (4.5 Kg) capacity. This area will not be available
A 24 volt baggage compartment light is located in the for storage if the optional air conditioning system is
baggage compartment left hand headliner and is con- installed in the aircraft.
trolled by a rocker switch mounted in the baggage
The engine Hour Meter is located in the baggage
compartment right hand headliner assembly. Depress-
compartment rear panel.
ing the rocker switch energizes a capacitor which in
turn energizes the fixture lamp. The duration that the 25--60--00 -- EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
switch is depressed and held in the ON position will de- A 2.6 lb. Dual--Halon (1211--1301) blend fire extin-
termine the length of time the lamp remains illuminated. guisher is mounted, by metal spring clamp, horizontally
This light will automatically turn OFF after approximate- behind the pilot/co--pilot seat on the main spar panel at
ly 10 minutes. floorboard level.
Refer to Chapter 33--20--00 for Interior Light mainte- The extinguisher has a twenty year shelf life and is not
nance procedures. rechargeable.
25--10--04
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
27--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--30--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--40--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--92--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--95--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--95--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--96--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--96--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27--96--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
27-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
27--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
27--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aileron System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
27--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rudder System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
27--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
27--30--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empennage Free Play Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
27--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable Downspring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
27--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
27--40--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer Trim System & Rigging . . . . . . . 10
27--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rudder Trim System & Rigging . . . . . . . . . 12
27--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer Trim System Troubleshooting . . . . . 14
27--42--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Trim System (Opt.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
27--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Flap System & Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
27--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aileron/Rudder Interconnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
27--90--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
27--91--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Surface Static Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
27--92--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment & Materials -- Static Balancing . . . . . . . 17
27--93--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Procedures -- Static Balancing . . . . . . . . . 17
27--93--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Procedures -- Static Balancing . . . . . . . . 17
27--94--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Surface Trailing Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
27--95--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Warning Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . 18
27--95--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting -- Stall Warning System . . . . . 19
27--96--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SpeedBrake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
27--96--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SpeedBrake Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
27--96--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SpeedBrake System Maintenance . . . . . . 20
27--96--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
27--96--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S--TEC Autopilot Adjustment (Opt.) . . . . . . . . . 21
27-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
27--00--00 -- GENERAL C. Remove aileron by pulling it straight aft until

hinges are clear; rotate inboard portion down and for-
The aircraft has dual flight controls and can be flown ward to allow aileron balance weights to clear wing tip.
from either the pilot or co--pilot seat. Dual pairs of foot
pedals control the rudder and nose wheel steering D. Reinstall aileron in reverse sequence of remov-
mechanisms. The co--pilot pedals are removable if dual al.
brakes are not installed. Push pull tubes actuate the E. Recheck bolts for security and safety.
all--metal flight control surfaces. Rod--end bearings are
2. Aileron Rigging.
used throughout the flight control systems. These bear-
ings are simple and require little maintenance other A. Level control wheels -- (A) (Fig. 27--1).
than occasional lubrication. Specially designed alumi- B. Install 3/16 dia. rig--pins at:
num--alloy extrusions, that permit flush skin attach-
ment, form the leading edges of the rudder and eleva- (1) Bellcrank (E) (Fig. 27--1)
tors. Electrically actuated wing flap systems are (2) Bellcranks (9) (Fig. 27--2) (L.H. and R.H.)
installed on all models. Longitudinal pitch trim is
C. To position ailerons at 0 degrees to 2 degrees
achieved through a trim control system which pivots the
down, Loosen jam nut (7) at control tubes (J) at (Fig.
entire empennage around tailcone attachment points.
27--2) (L.H. and R.H.). Disconnect (J) at aileron horn.
Flight control surfaces that have been stripped, re- Turn (J) one revolution in direction desired. Reconnect
painted, repaired or altered should be re--checked for (J) at aileron horn. Tighten jam nut (7).
balance per instructions provided in Section 27--93--00. D. Adjust remaining control tubes (F) at 6, (B) at 1
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA and (D) at 2, (Fig. 27--1) (L.H. and R.H., if applicable) in
(Garmin G1000 equipped) order to freely attach to bellcranks and jackshaft.
E. Remove rig--pins.
For Garmin G1000 equipped aircraft, adjustments
must be calibrated in the Garmin G1000 system pro- F. Adjust aileron stops (8) (Fig. 27--2) per the fol-
grams to these and other systems, as described in the lowing procedures:
Garmin service literature: (1) Position travel board, GSE030003, at W.S.
-- Flap Position 147.75 (Fig. 27--3).
-- Rudder Trim NOTE
-- Elevator Trim Wing station 147.75 is located at skin splice line
-- Stall Warning Switch between flap outboard end and aileron inboard
-- Autopilot Systems end.
Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for de- (2) Adjust static position from 0o to 2o DOWN.
tailed calibration instructions. The Garmin G1000 in- (Ref. point is 0o mark on travel board.
structions for Flight Control calibration may, as applica- (3) DOWN travel: 8o +/--1o from static position.
ble, utilize the procedures as provided in this chapter.
(4) UP travel: 12.5o to 14.5o from static position.
Auto Pilot Systems (Optional) NOTE
Mooney M20M aircraft come equipped with optional The above aileron rigging and adjustment in-
auto pilot systems. Refer to the autopilot manufacturer structions apply to both the left and right aile-
documentation for specific installation, rigging, mainte- rons.
nance, adjustments, troubleshooting procedures and 27--20--00 -- RUDDER AND STEERING SYSTEM
equipment specifications.
The rudder attaches to the aft vertical fin spar at four
27--10--00 -- AILERON SYSTEM hinge points. Push--pull tubes and bellcranks link the
rudder to the rudder pedals. A rudder trim system is in-
The ailerons are of all--metal construction with beveled
corporated into the M20M aircraft for pilot comfort for
trailing edges. Three hinges attach the ailerons to the
high--power settings during climb and, if needed, for
aft wing spar outboard of the wing flaps. The ailerons
cruise power settings
link to the control wheel through push--pull tubes and
bellcranks. Lead counter--weights static balance the ai- 1. Rudder Removal and Installation.
lerons. A. Detach rudder push--pull tube from rudder horn.
1. Aileron Removal and Installation. B. Disconnect Strobe Light per Section 33--41--03.
A. Remove control tube attaching bolt, nut and C. Remove attaching hardware at rudder hinges.
washer at aileron horn. D. Remove rudder by pulling it straight aft.
B. Remove bolts, nuts and washers from the three E. Install rudder in reverse sequence of removal.
attaching hinges. Recheck attaching bolts for security and safety.
27--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
H
B
YOKE
CONTROL
CONTROL C
TUBE
SHAFT JACKSHAFT
ASSY
H B
YOKE B 5 CONTROL
CONTROL CONTROL TUBE
1 SHAFT TUBE 5 G
BOB
WEIGHT CONTROL
B B
CONTROL C YOKE
TUBE JACKSHAFT CONTROL
G ASSY TUBE
CONTROL
YOKE
H
C YOKE 3
JACKSHAFT CONTROL
ASSY A ELEVATOR ROD
SHAFT
END BEARING
E
BELLCRANK
ASSY
2
D
CONTROL
TUBE
RIG PIN L
ELEVATOR CONTROL
E TUBE F
BELLCRANK AILERON CONTROL LINK
ASSY
3/16” RIG PIN

HOLE
(PIN INSERTED
FOR CLARITY)
BELLCRANK ASSY
(REF)
M27-1
AILERON/ELEVATOR CONTROL WHEEL RIGGING

FIGURE 27--1
27--20--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
FWD INBD
VIEW AT
L/H WING RIG
LOOKING UP PIN HOLE
9 REACH 7
THRU HERE
A
B
8 J
R27--4
7
6 RUDDER PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
F
FIGURE 27--4
2. Rudder Rigging and Adjustment.
A. Raise aircraft nose wheel off ground. See Sec-
tion 7--10--00.
B. Set stabilizer trim control in neutral position (sta-
bilizer parallel with aircraft center line).
C. Clamp pilot’s rudder pedals (A), (Fig. 27--4), in
neutral position.
D. Adjust AFT rod end bearing indicated at position
“B” Figure 27--4, approx. 11 turns out to start.
3/16” RIG PIN
HOLE
R27--2
1
L
AILERON STOP ADJUSTMENTS
FIGURE 27--2
STA. 25.50
TRAVEL BOARD C
LOCATION 1/2”
ABOVE C/L OF SKIN
RIVET ROW LAP
AFT
LEVELING
SCREWS
STA. 16.00 R27--5

SKIN TRAVEL BOARD
LAP LOCATION 1/4”
OB C/L OF RUDDER & ELEVATOR TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT
RIVET ROW FIGURE 27--5
STA. 147.75 E. Adjust control tube (C) at rear tailcone bulkhead
TRAVEL BOARD bellcrank (Fig.27--5) approx. 12 turns out as to start.
LOCATION BETWEEN
FLAP & AILERON R27--3 F. Adjust control tube (D) (Fig. 27--6), rod end bear-
ing (2), 11 turns out to start.
TRAVEL BOARD LOCATIONS G. Adjust rod end bearing (B) (Fig. 27--4) to posi-
FIGURE 27--3 tion rudder setting 1o to the right.
27--20--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
H. Unclamp rudder pedals. installed, as shown, from rear to front. Refer to Section
I. Adjust rudder stops (M) (Fig. 27--7), so that rud- 32--50--00 for Nose Gear Steering and Tracking adjust-
der travel is 23o (+1/--0 degrees) right and left. ments.
J. After rudder stops (M) are set, rotate rudder NOTE
through full range of travel to assure solid contact with Measure rudder travel with travel board on rivet
stops and that nuts and bolt heads clear stop limiter (R). line at station indicated on travel board GSE
Stop limiter (R) may be bent to obtain clearances and 030005, and with longitudinal trim (stabilizer) set
contact with rudder stops (M) (Fig. 27--7). in the 0o position. Sta. 26.50 is located 3/4 in.
above skin splice on vertical fin.
NOTE
Nose Landing Gear steering stops (3) (Fig. 27--8),
should be adjusted so .020 clearance exists be- 2
tween adjustment stop (3) and gear truss assem-
bly (4) (Fig. 27--8) when rudder is at extreme left
and right travel position.
1
5
2
R27--6 4
RUDDER HORN ADJUSTMENT

FIGURE 27--6 .020
3
USE .020 FEELER GAUGE

TO SET TURNING STOPS
R
R
RUDDER
M TUBE
R27--8
P ELEVATOR NOSE GEAR STEERING LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT

TUBE FIGURE 27--8
R27--7 3. Allowable Free--Play Limits.
RUDDER & ELEVATOR STOP ADJUSTMENT A. Vertical movement at rudder trailing edge -- .08
FIGURE 27--7 inches.
K. After setting stops, re--tighten all jam nuts, bolts (1) If excessive free--play exists, check the fol-
and secure; recheck all travel limits. lowing areas for wear:
L. Center nose wheel by removing nut, washer and (a) Trim screw jackshaft.
bolt (1), (Fig. 27--8), and adjusting steering idler linkage (b) Trim link connecting empennage to trim
at (2). Bolts, nuts and washers (5) and (6) must be screw.
27--20--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
(c) Bolts and brackets attaching empennage

to tailcone.
4. Rudder Torque Tube Removal. The rudder torque
tube should be inspected thoroughly and replaced if
any damage is found. Remove shield from front of cab-
in floorboard that covers torque tube. Remove attach-
ing hardware from hinges and rudder pedal control
rods. Carefully remove torque tube by sliding out to-
ward right side of cabin and through cabin door.
NOTE
Control tube wear allowables. If any portion of
the control tube exceeds .007 inch wear per wall
or .014 inch reduction in diameter, the tube must
be replaced.
B
R27--10
FWD
ELEVATOR TRIM ADJUSTMENT

FIGURE 27--10
NOTE
Measure elevator travel from 0 degrees stabilizer
thrust line with travel board positioned at stabi-
lizer station 16.00 as indicated on travel board,
P/N GSE 030004--503, and with stabilizer at 0 de-
grees. (See Fig. 27--3 and Fig. 27--10 for travel
board placement.
A. Adjust rod end bearing (3), (Fig. 27--1), at con-
trol yoke (G) for control shaft (H) clearance from firewall
and control yoke and bob--weight clearance from fuse-
lage structure.
9 R27--9 B. Level aircraft and set control column in neutral
with stabilizer parallel to center line of aircraft.
ELEVATOR HORN ADJUSTMENT C. Adjust rod end bearings of control tube (L) (Fig.
FIGURE 27--9 27--5), at rear tailcone bulkhead out approx. 5 turns to
27--30--00 -- ELEVATOR SYSTEM start.
Elevator construction is essentially the same as that of D. Adjust elevator horn rod end (9) (LH & RH), (Fig.
the ailerons. Both elevators attach to the stabilizer at 27--9) out 7 to 8 turns to start.
four hinge points. Push--pull tubes and bellcranks link E. Main spar, adjustable rod end bearing is turned
the elevators to the control yoke. Lead counterweights out approx. 6 turns to start. To obtain additional elevator
static balance the elevators (Refer to Section travel, adjust as required.
27--91--00 Control Surface Static Balancing). A lead F. Set stops (P), (Fig. 27--7), in empennage stinger
bob--weight under the instrument panel refines aircraft for elevator uptravel of 22o (+0/--2) and downtravel of
handling in flight. 22o (+0/--2).
1. Elevator Removal and Installation. G. After stops (P) & (M) are set, rotate elevators
A. Remove push--pull control tube by taking off all through full range of travel to assure positive contact
attaching bolts, nuts and washer. with stops (P) & (M), and that nuts and bolt heads clear
stop limiters (R). Stop limiters (R) may be bent to obtain
B. Remove bolts, nuts and washers from the four
attaching hinges. proper clearances and contact with elevator stops (P),
(Fig. 27--7).
C. Remove elevator to the rear.
H. Rotate stabilizer trim full down to check clear-
D. Install elevators in reverse sequence of remov- ance of bellcrank at wing rear spar. Adjust rod end bear-
al. Recheck attaching hardware for security and safety. ing at rear tailcone bulkhead (C) (Fig. 27--5), if needed,
Set elevators, RH/LH, to be level with horizontal stabi- for clearance. Recheck elevator UP and DOWN travel.
lizer. Adjust rod end bearings (9) (Fig 27--9) at elevator I. Rotate elevator trim FULL UP to check that UP
horns. stop (P) makes solid contact on stop limiter (R) (Fig.
2. Elevator Rigging and Adjustment. 27--7).
27--30--00
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
J. Re--tighten all jam nuts, attach bolts and secure C. Check for positive clearance between cable end
as necessary; recheck all control tube clearances and and pulley sheave. Tensiometer reading should be 20
travel limits. in. lb. maximum.
27--30--03 -- EMPENNAGE FREE PLAY LIMITS The hardware attaching the Down Spring Control
Grasp Stinger (Empennage Assembly – not at control Cable Assembly to the Bellcrank must be assembled in
surfaces) by hand and exert vertical and horizontal the proper orientation to the aircraft centerline (Fig.
movement to obtain desired dimensions. Measure 27--11).
movement of the empennage assembly with tailcone at CAUTION
tail skid. Allowable free play movement: An incorrect hardware installation may cause
Horizontal Stabilizer at Tip: scoring of the Stabilizer Trim Torque Tube as a
0.12 inch max. – Fore and Aft result of the bolt thread contacting the Stabilizer
0.10 inch max. – Up & Down Trim Torque Tube surface during Horizontal Sta-
bilizer trimming movement. Scoring of the Stabi-
Rudder at Lower Trailing Edge: lizer Trim Torque Tube could result if attaching
0.08 inch max. – Up & Down hardware is installed incorrectly.
The threaded end of the bolt (Fig. 27--11, Detail “A”)
should be inserted from aircraft left side to aircraft right
side; threaded end pointing in the outboard direction
away from the Stabilizer Trim Torque Tube (aircraft
centerline)
N
27--40--00 -- TRIM SYSTEMS
27--40--01 --STABILIZER TRIM SYSTEM/RIGGING
To provide pitch trim control, the entire empennage piv-
ots around its main hinge points. The system consists
A CL
of a manually operated actuator (electrical operation
optional) that operates a series of torque tubes and uni-
versal joints connected to a jack screw on the aft tail-
cone bulkhead.
NOTE
A “stepped stop nut”, with a “jam nut” configura-
tion has been incorporated. This can be retro-
DETAIL fitted to all M20M aircraft, if desired. This allows
”A” R27--11 trim screw nut (F) (Fig. 27--12) to contact stepped
portion of these two nuts and not bind.
1. Rigging -- Stabilizer Trim System
VARIABLE DOWNSPRING The basic rigging, for either configuration, is identical to

FIGURE 27--11 procedures below except that stepped nut and jam nut
require being torqued together with two wrenches prior
27--31--00 -- VARIABLE DOWNSPRING SYSTEM to jam nut set screw (secure screw with Blue Loctite
A spring hooked into the elevator control system, in the #83--31 Grade C) being tightened against threaded
tailcone, refines the feel of the elevator in flight. A bell- trim screw. Stepped nuts are required at the nose up
crank and cable tailors the spring tension appropriate and the nose down positions facing trim screw nut (F)
to the trimmed position of the stabilizer. (Fig. 27--12).
NOTE A. Nose Down Stabilizer Trim Control Rigging and
Negative stabilizer (-- degrees) settings mean that Adjustment.
stabilizer leading edge is moved down relative to
(1) Loosen setscrew in stop/jamnut (A) (Fig.
the thrust line.
27--12), break torque on jam nut/stepped nut (if
1. Rigging -- Variable Down Spring System installed) and turn stop (A) or jam/stepped nut (A & E)
clockwise or counterclockwise to align aft edge of stop
A. Set stabilizer at maximum positive (nose down)
or jam/stepped nut (A & E) with last thread of trimscrew
setting and elevators full down. (Fig. 27--11).
(C). Tighten setscrew and turn trim control wheel to full
B. Adjust turn buckle for a 14.0 to 16.0 in. lb. ten- NOSE DOWN position, (trim screw nut (F) against stop
siometer reading on cable. (A) or stepped nut (E).
27--30--03
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319, 27--0325,

27--0327
The indicator is connected to the trim control wheel as-
sembly to indicate stabilizer position relative to the air-
FWD craft thrust line.
C A. Adjust stabilizer trim to FULL DOWN position.
DOWN UP STOP
STOP B. Adjust potentiometer, on trim wheel assembly,
E
A
to illuminate bottom bar on indicator.
B
C. Run stabilizer trim to FULL UP position.
D. Top bar on display indicator should be illumi-
nated. If not illuminated, adjustment to R1 resistor in-
side indicator housing is necessary.
E. Remove indicator from instrument panel. Leave
harness connected. Pull indicator down as far as pos-
F sible to allow removal of housing cover and access to
R27--12 adjustment.
PIN
K
TRIM CONTROL ACTUATOR RIGGING C1 R8
FIGURE 27--12 PIN C3
A
D1
(2) Disconnect torque shaft (B) from trim screw Q1
Q3
(C) (Fig. 27--12).
Q2
R9
(3). Turn disconnected torque shaft (B) clock- IC1
R2
wise or counterclockwise until horizontal stabilizer as
measured, using the travel board, P/N 030004--503, F2
shown by Fig. 27--10, is within the following limits: +3.8o C2
to +4.2o. PIN
R1
PIN B
NOTE E
Positive (+ degrees) stabilizer degrees mean that
stabilizer leading edge is moved up relative to
thrust line. IC3
(4) Connect torque shaft (B) to trim screw (C) R27--13

(Fig. 27--12). NOSE DOWN stabilizer trim control rig-
ging is now complete.
RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR ADJUSTMENT
B. Nose Up Stabilizer Trim Control Rigging and Ad- FIGURE 27--13
justment.
F. Adjust R1 on A/D board (see Fig. 27--13) to illu-
(1). Loosen setscrew in stop or jamnut (A) (Fig. minate top bar on display.
27--12) and turn stop(s) on threaded shaft to move it to-
G. Repeat steps B through F until no further adjust-
ward the trim screw gear box. Turn trim control wheel
ments are required.
toward NOSE UP position until horizontal stabilizer is
within the following limits: --6.5o to --7.0o. H. Re--install and secure display indicator into in-
strument panel.
NOTE
Negative stabilizer (-- degrees) settings mean that S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
stabilizer leading edge is moved down relative to (Garmin G1000 equipped)
thrust line. Refer to the Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for
Rigging adjustments and instrument calibration.
(2) Rotate UP stop or stepped nut (E), (Fig.
27--12) clockwise or counterclockwise to make contact 3. Stabilizer Free Play Limits.
with trim screw nut (F). Tighten setscrew. NOSE UP A. Fore and aft movement at stabilizer tip -- .12
stabilizer trim control rigging is now complete. inches.
2. Stabilizer Trim Indicator -- Rigging. B. Vertical movement at stabilizer tip -- .10 inches.
27--40--01
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE D. Deflect and lock rudder at 10o left position. Use

When removing trim screw from empennage, use Rudder Travel Board GSE 030005.
block of wood cut to fit opening between tailcone
and empennage, to prop empennage up when E. Remove tailcone battery access cover (left side)
trim screw is removed. and aft fiberglass belly panel to gain access to rudder
trim actuator assembly.
4. Stabilizer Trim Chain Adjustment. (Ref. Fig.
27--14). NOTE
The following steps are easier to accomplish if
A. With four mounting bolts (1) slack, adjust two the actuator assembly is removed from the air-
NAS428--3--4 bolts (2) to obtain maximum tension on craft but they can be done while actuator is in its
chain without causing binding. normal operating location, if desired.
B. Tighten four mounting bolts (1) after chain ten-
F. Electrically run actuator for left rudder deflection
sion is adjusted.
(depress left sides of both RUDDER TRIM split
switches) until limit switch turns OFF actuator motor
(Aft limit switch is for LEFT rudder trim).
WHEEL G. Wrap cable around capstan five full turns with

ASSEMBLY forward eye of cable ending up 12 inches from forward
circumference edge of capstan (See Fig. 27--15). Aft
end of cable will be in proper location for rigging proce-
dure. Temporarily secure cable/capstan position using
several wraps of suitable adhesive tape around cable
and capstan.
FLOORBOARD H. Extend and secure both springs to 9.8 inches in-

2
side measurement between hooks. Insert spring ex-
STEPPED tender, P/N GSE 030035--501, end caps into spring
STOP NUT
coils so that the 9.8 inch dimension is maintained.
Place spacer, P/N GSE 030035--005, over spring coils
1 and secure to --503 assembly with MS3367--1--9
GEAR BOX straps. Two spring extenders, GSE 030035--503, are
JAM NUT 1 required for rigging procedures.
ASSEMBLY
R27--14
NOTE
Rudder trim actuator assembly will need to be
re--installed at this time, if it was removed to ac-
ELEVATOR TRIM CHAIN ADJUSTMENT
complish the preceding steps.
FIGURE 27--14
27--40--02 -- RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM/RIGGING I. Attach one end of both springs to brackets on
control tube bellcranks at Fuselage Stations 90.0 and
1. Rudder Trim -- Rigging 142.0.
Rudder Trim consists of an electric actuator driving a J. Separate barrels and eyes of both turnbuckles
capstan/balancing bellcrank and spring system to com- and attach one eye of turnbuckle to forward spring;
pensate for engine/propeller forces during long climbs screw proper end of turnbuckle barrel into eye from 2 to
or takeoff power. 5 turns.
A. Aircraft should be flight tested and rigged for lat-
K. Start turnbuckle eye attached to forward cable
eral directional trim prior to final rigging of rudder trim
end into barrel. Tighten turnbuckle barrel until tension
system.
JUST begins on spring.
B. Jack aircraft nose wheel off ground.
L. Repeat steps I. through K. on the aft spring and
C. Aileron--rudder interconnect system should be cable end.
rigged properly prior to rigging of rudder trim system.
(See Section 27--60--00) M. Verify that required number of threads are
screwed into both turnbuckle barrels.
NOTE
Aileron--rudder interconnect system shall be dis- N. Remove spring extenders from both springs.
connected from rudder system prior to rudder Remove tape from cable and capstan and rudder lock
trim rigging. from rudder.
27--40--02
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
CAPSTAN
LIMIT SWITCH
CABLE
ACTUATOR
TURNBUCKLE
R27--15
SPRING
RUDDER TRIM RIGGING

(Typical Hardware Layout Shown)
FIGURE 27--15
NOTE S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319, 27--0325,
After basic rigging is complete, install any re- 27--0327
moved components. Reconnect aileron--rudder
A. Use rudder trim switch in aircraft to run rudder
interconnect system. Verify electrical alignment.
trim full right.
Remove rudder lock.
O. The rudder should be “neutral” at 3 to 5o left rud- B. Adjust potentiometer on motor/cable assembly
der. to illuminate far right bar on display.
P. Electrically run actuator for right rudder deflec- C. Use rudder trim switch in aircraft to run rudder
tion. The actuator motor should stop when rudder is de- trim full left and adjust R1 on A/D rudder trim board (see
flected 23o right. If not, slightly bend forward limit Fig. 27--13) to illuminate left bar on display.
switch’s (RIGHT rudder stop) actuator arm to position D. Repeat steps A through C until no further adjust-
right rudder at 23o. Cycle system and recheck right rud- ment is required.
der deflection.
E. Remove rudder travel board; re--install access
Q. The TRIM LIMITS are: 3 to 5o LEFT; 23o cover and belly skin.
RIGHT.
F. Flight test aircraft. Rudder trim shall center turn
R. Secure aft turnbuckle and make sure there is no
coordinator ball with no pilot application of rudder dur-
interference between rudder trim mechanism and flight
ing full power climbs at 105 KIAS. If it does not, gain ac-
control tubes or bellcranks during cycle or full travel of
cess to forward turnbuckle and tighten an additional .25
flight control surfaces.
to .38 inch extension of forward spring. Secure forward
2. Rudder Trim Indicator – Rigging turnbuckle.
27--40--02
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA 4. Remove nuts, washers, bolts/screws from upper
(Garmin G1000 equipped) and lower pitch trim servo brackets holding brackets to
bulkhead.
Refer to the Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for
Rigging adjustments and instrument calibration. 5. Carefully lift torque tube/pitch trim servo assembly
up and pull aft end of torque tube from trim actuator
G. Replace access cover(s) and repeat flight
socket on aft tailcone bulkhead. Support aft end of
check in step 20.
torque tube if needed.
H. Complete log book entry and return aircraft to 6. Pull torque tube/trim servo assembly from tailcone
service or complete remaining maintenance action. through access cover on left side of tailcone.
27--41--00 -- Stabilizer Trim System Troubleshoot- 7. Place torque tube/pitch trim servo assembly on
ing work bench for removal and replacement of bearing
block.
BINDING Check control tubes at bulk-
head grommets for rub 8. Follow Pitch trim System vendor instructions for
marks. bearing block replacement.
Check Trim Actuator threads 9. Reinstall torque tube/pitch trim servo assembly
for galling or not lubricated. into tailcone.
Lubricate per Sect. 5. 10. After reinstallation and reconnection of all com-
ELECTRIC Check BINDING symptoms ponents, electrical and mechanical, it will be essential
CLUTCH SLIP- above. to check stabilizer pitch trim system rigging in accor-
PING Check for proper clutch set- dance with Section 27--40--01.
tings per vendor instruc- For Garmin G1000 equipped aircraft (S/N: 27--0318,
tions. 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA), recalibration of
Confirm full bus voltage is the Garmin system programs must be performed per
available at trim motor. Garmin System Maintenance Manual.
NOTE
Maximum wear on trim tube, where it passes 2
through bulkhead grommets, is .007 inch per wall 4
or .014 inch diameter.
27--42--00 -- ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM (OP-
TIONAL) 7
If installed, optional auto--pilot Electric Pitch Trim Sys-

tem components require periodic maintenance. Sys-
tem components must be inspected and lubricated per 1
6
the vendor service and maintenance procedures:
1
To gain access to the servo area, remove electrical bay
access cover from left hand side of tailcone. Locate
2 3
Electric Pitch Trim servo system, just aft of Fuselage
Sta. 142 bulkhead. Inspect system per vendor recom- 9
mendations. 5
If Pitch Trim System bearing block assembly replace-

ment is required, refer to following procedures: 9
4
Trim torque tube/pitch trim servo assembly should be
removed from aircraft to replace bearing block, there- R27--16
fore, manual trim wheel and electric trim switch should 8
be flagged so inadvertent movement will not occur.
FLAP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect universal joint located between tail- FIGURE 27--16
cone bulkhead, Sta. 142, and pitch trim servo assembly
27--50--00 -- WING FLAP SYSTEM
mounting brackets.
Push--pull tubes and bellcranks interconnect the flaps.
2. Disconnect electrical wiring, to servo motor, at
The flaps are operated by an electrical motor driven ac-
connector.
tuator (1) connected to a jack shaft (2). The jack shaft is
3. Disconnect ELT harness from connector and any connected to an actuator bracket (3) (Fig. 27--16) on
other wiring that may interfere with the removal of each flap just outboard of jack shaft hinges (4) by a
torque tube assembly from tailcone. push--pull rod end bearing (5) and hardware. Each
27--41--00
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
flap pivots about four hinges. Travel is controlled by lim- F. Cycle flaps UP, TAKEOFF & DOWN; verify prop-
it switches (6) and (7) and UP stops located at each outer settings at TAKEOFF when Flaps are traveling down
board flap hinge. from full up position.
Flap position is indicated in the cockpit through an elec-
trical potentiometer system (8) connected to the jack
shaft actuator horn (9). FWD
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0107
LEFT
The flap switch is self centering from the down position
and located on the console adjacent to the flap position
indicator. The flaps can be retracted completely by
placing the switch in the up position or to any setting be- 1
tween 0 and 33 degrees by holding in up position to set-
ting desired and then centering to stop the actuator.
S/N: 27--0108 THRU 27--TBA
The flap system incorporates a preselect feature which
allows flaps to be activated as desired, UP, TAKEOFF
or DOWN.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
(Garmin G1000 equipped) R27--17
Refer to the Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for

Rigging adjustments and instrument calibration. WING FLAP ADJUSTMENT
FIGURE 27--17
Lubricate the actuator gear box and ball screw at inter-
3. Wing Flap Indicator – Rigging
vals with lubricants prescribed in CHAPTER 5.
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319, 27--0325,
1. Wing Flap Removal and Installation. 27--0327
A. Remove wing flap hinge fairing to expose flap A. Position flaps in full DOWN position.
push--pull tube.
B. Adjust flap potentiometer (8) (Fig. 27--16) on air-
B. Remove bolt, nut, and washer from flap--actuat- craft to illuminate bottom bar.
ing attachment. C. Position flaps in UP position.
C. Remove bolts, nuts and washers at flap hinge D. Adjust R1 on A/D board (see Fig. 27--18) to illu-
points. minate top bar of flap display.
D. Remove flap by pulling down and aft. E. Repeat steps A through D until no further adjust-
ment is required.
E. Install wing flaps in reverse sequence of remov-
al. Recheck security and safety of attaching bolts. S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
(Garmin G1000 equipped)
2. Wing Flap Rigging and Adjustment.
Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for Wing
NOTE Flap Indicator adjustment/calibration procedure.
Flap deflections are to be measured with travel
board GSE030003 at station indicated on travel IC3
PIN 5
board. (See Section 27--20--00, Fig. 27--8)
D1
A. Adjust right and left inboard linkage at rod end PIN 1 C1 R8
Q1
bearing (1), (Fig. 27--17) to obtain a flap deflection of PIN 7

Q3
Q2
R2
33o (+0o/--2o). Retract flaps to 0o (+/--2o); set flap out- R11
F1
board travel “UP” stops (not illustrated) so that flaps R7 R5 PIN 3

align with ailerons in neutral position.
R1 C3
B. The limit switches 6 & 7, (Fig. 27--16) should be
R6
IC4
J
R4
adjusted so that under flight loads the actuator overrun J C2

will not allow the flaps to exceed either UP or DOWN R3
positions. J J
IC2 IC1
C. Extend flaps to TAKEOFF position (10o +/--1o).
D. Adjust switch stack until Bottom Micro--Switch R27--18
just opens. WING FLAP INDICATOR ADJUSTMENT
E. Top switch will be automatically adjusted. FIGURE 27--18
27--50--00
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
27--60--00 -- AILERON/RUDDER INTERCONNECT painting. The control surface balance limits shown in
SYSTEM chart below and Figure 27--20 apply to a completed,
painted control surface only. Complete control surfaces
The aileron/rudder interconnect system assists in coor-
include (as applicable) balance weight, control attach-
dinated maneuvers and reduction of adverse yaw dur-
ment horn and attaching hardware, static wicks (when
ing turns. The system is connected through springs to
installed as optional equipment), and rudder taillight
allow override of either control movement when input
and/or strobe light assembly installed.
separately.
Control surfaces must be rebalanced in accordance
1. Aileron/Rudder Interconnect System – Rigging
with the procedures in Section 27--93--00.
(Fig. 27--19)
CAUTION
A. With controls in neutral position, locate bracket,
All control surfaces should be stripped prior to
on center aileron control tube, so that the end of bell-
repainting.
crank assembly will be 7.25 inch AFT of fuselage bulk-
head.
CONTROL
B. Holding both rudder and aileron controls in neu- TUBE BRACKET
tral position, install springs on bellcrank and stops. ASSY.
Position stops on rudder control tube so that installed SCREW
length of each spring is 4.90 inch. 7.25”
C. Clamp stops and brackets in place. Drill through SPRING SCREW

STOP
stop, bracket and into control tube for AN530--4R6 PK STOP
screws. Make sure PK screws are in place to secure all
three brackets. RUDDER
SCREW CONTROL
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA TUBE
SPRING
(Garmin G1000 equipped) TRUSS
Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for Rud-
der Trim adjustment/calibration procedures. OUTBD
27--90--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS FWD

FUSELAGE BELLCRANK
27--91--00 -- CONTROL SURFACE STATIC BAL- BLKHD. ASSY VIEW LOOKING UP
ANCING R27--19
Control surface balance must be checked when control
surfaces is repaired, altered or repainted. It is recom- AILERON/RUDDER INTERCONNECT
mended that control surfaces be stripped prior to re- FIGURE 27--19
SURFACE DESCRIPTION AIRCRAFT EFFECTIVITY BALANCING MOMENT LIMITS *

430026--507 & --508 27--0001 THRU 27--TBA UNDERBALANCE
ELEVATOR 11.00 In. Lbs. TO 8.50 In. Lbs.
460043--507 27--0001 THRU 27--TBA UNDERBALANCE 1.50 In. Lbs.
RUDDER (Upper & lower weights TO
required) AN OVERBALANCE -- 5.0 In. Lbs.
230015--509 & --510 27--0002 THRU 27--0024, UNDERBALANCE 1.40 In. Lbs.
AILERON 27--0026 THRU 27--0069 TO
AN OVERBALANCE -- 5.0 In. Lbs.
27--0001, 27--0025, 27--0070 UNDERBALANCE 1.0 In. Lbs. TO
THRU 27--TBA AN OVERBALANCE -- 5.0 In. Lbs.
NOTE: Aircraft S/N: 27--0002 UNDERBALANCE 1.0 In. Lbs. TO
THRU 27--0024 and 27--0026 AN OVERBALANCE -- 5.0 In. Lbs.
THRU 27--0069 may be in com-
pliance with Service Instruction
M20--94. If so, use balance mo-
ment listed in column to the right.
* UNDERBALANCE is trailing edge heavy; OVERBALANCE is nose heavy.
CONTROL SURFACE BALANCE LIMITS
FIGURE 27--20
27--60--00
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
CENTERLINE
SPIRIT LEVEL
HINGE CONTROL AFT
SURFACE RIVET LINE
LEVEL TOOLING HOLES (2)

CHORDLINE WITH PINS INSERTED R27--20
CONTROL SURFACE BALANCE LIMITS

FIGURE 27--20 (Contd)
27--92--00 -- BALANCING EQUIPMENT -- STATIC NOTE
Ailerons are balanced up--side down on knife
edge supports.
KNIFE EDGE
SUPPORT 3. Elevators and rudders are balanced with the “Con-
trol Horn” pointing upward.
4. All control surfaces are balanced with the hinge
center line and the tip rib chord line level. Two tooling
holes are located in the tip ribs and are on the rib chord
line (rib center line). Chordwise level can be obtained
by using a spirit level and pins inserted into these tool-
ing holes (Fig. 27--20).
5. Install a 1/4 inch bolt or pin through the inboard and
TRAILING EDGE outboard AILERON hinge bracket. Install a No. 10 bolt
RESTING SUPPORT or pin through inboard and outboard ELEVATOR hinge
(OPTIONAL) USE LIGHT WEIGHT PUSH/PULL bearing, and top and bottom RUDDER hinge bearing.
FISH SCALE AT TRAILING EDGE
TO DETERMINE IF BALANCE OF 6. Position and level the control surface on the knife
CONTROL SURFACE IS CORRECT edge hinge supports.
R27--21 7. Accurately measure control surface load (weight),
using accurate push/pull scale, at a measured distance
(arm) from the hinge axis centerline to AFT control sur-
CONTROL SURFACE STATIC BALANCE
face rivet line. Measurements should be taken in a draft
DIAGRAM
free environment. Calculate the moment (arm times
FIGURE 27--21
weight) and compare the results with “Balance Moment
The design of the balancing fixture is not critical provid-
Limits” indicated in Fig. 27--20.
ing the requirements of this section are met.
8. Control surfaces MUST BE RECHECKED for bal-
1. Obtain or otherwise fabricate two (2) knife edge
ance after any painting, stripping, repair or alteration.
and supports approximately one (1) foot in height such
that they can be placed on a table and be stabilized to NOTE
prevent tipping (See Fig. 27--21). The knife edge hinge If specified moments cannot be met (reference
supports MUST be LEVEL and PERPENDICULAR to Fig. 27--20), heavier balance weights can be ob-
the hinge axis of the control surface. tained through a Mooney Service Center. This
approach should be examined before reworking
2. Weight Scales: Scales used to record weights
any repair or restripping and repainting the af-
must be accurate within 0.02 lbs or 1/2 oz.
fected control surface. A lighter weight can be
27--93--00 -- BALANCING PROCEDURE produced by shaving existing balance weight.
27--93--01 -- DETAIL PROCEDURES – STATIC 27--94--00 -- CONTROL SURFACE TRAILING
BALANCING EDGE
1. A line drawn through the hinge line support points NOTE
must be level and perpendicular to the supporting knife Verify flight control rigging is correct before
edges. bending trailing edge.
2. The supporting knife edges must be horizontal and 1. Trimming. A special pair of wide nose vice grip pli-
parallel to each other within the requirements of Step 1 ers are to be used to bend the trailing edges as neces-
above. sary (See Fig. 27--22).
27--92--00
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
.070 MAX. 2. Stall Warning Switch Installation.

ALLOWABLE
DOWNWARD A. Connect electrical wires to switch.
DEFLECTION B. Position switch in opening of lower wing leading
edge; install the two adjustment screws.
AILERONS C. Replace access cover securely.
.080 MAX. ALLOWABLE
DEFLECTION LEFT D. Adjust switch. See STALL WARNING
OR RIGHT INDICATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT below.
3. Stall Warning Indicating System Adjustment (Fig.
27--23).
RUDDER R27--22
The stall warning switch is adjusted when the airplane
is test flown at the factory. Should it require readjusting,
RAILING EDGE TRIMMING proceed as follows:
FIGURE 27--22 A. Locate switch installation on under surface of
A. Aileron. To correct for a left wing--heavy condi- left wing leading edge and loosen the two phillips head
tion, bend right aileron trailing edge down; to correct for screws, one on either side of the vane.
a right wing--heavy condition, bend left aileron trailing B. If stall warning has been activating too early, pull
edge down. vane BACK and DOWN.
NOTE
NOTE
The aileron trailing edge MUST NOT BE BENT UP
NEVER TRY TO ADJUST SWITCH BY BENDING
under any circumstance. Any deformed rivets
VANE. This part has been heat treated and can-
must be replaced after trimming aileron or rudder
not be bent without damaging or breaking vane
trailing edge.
or switch.
B. Rudder. The rudder trailing edge may be
C. If stall warning has been activating too late,
trimmed right or left as required.
push vane UP and FORWARD. Moving vane, with the
C. Elevator. A full span tab is built into each eleva- phillips head screws loosened, moves entire unit up or
tor trailing edge and is fixed 7 degrees (+/--) ½ degree down inside wing, causing switch to be closed earlier or
trailing edge down. No further tolerance is allowed. later. Re--tighten screws after making each adjustment.
27--95--00 -- STALL WARNING – MAINTENANCE As a rule of thumb, moving vane tip 1/4 inch will change
PRACTICES the time the stall warning actuates by about 5 KTS indi-
cated air speed.
ADJUST UP TO ACTUATE SOONER The only way to test the accuracy of the setting is to fly
airplane into a stall, noting speed at which the warning
horn comes on and speed at which full stall occurs.
DO NOT BEND VANE
For Garmin G1000 system equipped aircraft, the So-
IT MAY BREAK
nalert tone is heard and approximately one second lat-
er “STALL” is annunciated over the speaker.
The stall must be made in various configurations,
clean, gear and flaps down and power on and power
off. It may be necessary to make several alternate ad-
ADJUST DOWN TO ACTUATE LATER justments and test flights before the desired setting can
ADJUSTMENT be reached.
R27--23
SCREWS
The stall warning should actuate at no less than 5 KTS.
nor more than 10 KTS. preceding the stall and shall
STALL SWITCH ADJUSTMENT continue until stall occurs in power off configuration.
FIGURE 27--23 The rate of speed reduction shall not exceed one knot
1. Stall Warning Switch Removal. per second with airplane trimmed to 1.5 times stall
speed.
A. Remove screws or rivets attaching access cov-
er aft of stall warning switch on lower wing surface. The switch setting should be checked and adjusted as
necessary whenever a wing or wing leading edge is re-
B. Remove the two adjustment screws which hold placed or extensively repaired or if a new switch is
switch to wing leading edge. installed. The switch should require no adjustment in
C. Disconnect the two wires from switch. normal service.
27--95--00
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
27--95--01 -- TROUBLESHOOTING – STALL WARNING SYSTEM
Warning system inoperative. Warning circuit breaker tripped. If circuit breaker persists in trip-
ping, check for grounded circuit.
Check for continuity.
Open circuit. Replace switch.
Defective warning horn.* Replace horn.*
Horn continues to blow. Defective warning horn switch.* Replace switch.
* For Garmin G1000 System equipped aircraft, refer to the Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for trouble-
shooting Stall Warning System
27--96--00 -- SPEEDBRAKE SYSTEM Components for these are available through your
Mooney Service Center.
The relay for the Electric SpeedBrake System is lo-
cated under the rear seat area, on the LH bulkhead.
The schematic, located in the envelopes, and the elec-
trical parts list, SECTION 91 of this Service & Mainte-
nance manual cover the electrical system component
identification.
27--96--01 -- SPEEDBRAKE CARTRIDGE RE-
MOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
PRECISE FLIGHT 100 SERIES (Fig. 27--24)
1. REMOVAL
A. Remove access panel from under side of wing,
directly beneath the cartridge.
B. Disconnect either the vacuum line connection or
the electrical connector on the cartridge.
C. Remove screw from bottom of wing just aft of
cartridge holding mount strap to bottom of wing.
D. Remove screws from top of wing around top of
cartridge slot.
E. Slide cartridge forward to start mount strap
R27--24 through bottom hole, slide cartridge out from bottom of
wing.
2. INSTALLATION
SPEEDBRAKE (PRECISE FLIGHT SERIES 100)
FIGURE 27--24 A. Reverse removal procedures.
A Precise Flight, Inc. SpeedBrake System is currently (1) Leave attachment screws loose until proper
installed in M20M aircraft as standard equipment. The alignment of cartridge to slots in wing is verified.
manufacturer can provide detailed parts and mainte- (2) Tighten all screws.
nance information for the cartridge assembly. Some of
the electrical circuitry, wiring, relays, circuit breakers, (3) Test operation of SpeedBrakes on the ground
etc. are installed from Mooney drawings. to assure there is no binding either up of down.
27--95--01
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006
C. Visually inspect for chafing on all moving parts.

MOUNTING D. Lubricate worm and worm gear (Aeroshell No.
SCREWS
CARTRIDGE 7).
ASSEMBLY E. Clean and inspect unit for damage, corrosion
LOWER
SUPPORT and looseness.
BRACKET
F. Manually operate the SpeedBrake doors and
feel for smooth operation, both extending and retract-
ing.
R27--25 G. Inspect cable (on vacuum units) especially
around pulleys for fraying.
H. Inspect pulleys (on vacuum units) for any wear
SPEEDBRAKE (PRECISE FLIGHT SERIES 2000) or damage.
FIGURE 27--25
2. Report any deficiencies to Precise Flight, Inc.
PRECISE FLIGHT 2000 SERIES (Fig. 27--25)
3. Reinstall SpeedBrake into wing in accordance with
1. REMOVAL Section 27--96--01.
A. Remove fourteen screws from cartridge cover 4. Verify proper placards are in place.
plate on top of wing. SERIES 2000 SPEEDBRAKE SYSTEM
B. Lift cartridge assembly out of wing cavity. Every 50 Hours:
C. Disconnect electrical connector from cartridge. 1. Check cap strip cover screws and SpeedBrake top
D. Slide drain tube out of wing bottom surface. attachment screws for security. If loose, remove
screws and apply Loctite 242, re--torque to 8 in. lbs.
2. INSTALLATION
2. Check drain tubes for debris.
A. Reverse removal procedures.
At Annual Inspection:
(1) Verify drain tube in inserted into drain hole in
1. Remove SpeedBrake per SpeedBrake Removal
wing bottom surface.
instructions provided in earlier text this page.
(2) Seat cartridge assembly in lower support 2. Remove cover plate from SpeedBrake cartridge.
bracket.
3. Clean and inspect unit for damage, corrosion,
(3) Tighten all screws. looseness and proper operation.
CAUTION 4. Lubricate worm and worm gear (Aeroshell No. 7).
SpeedBrakes are electrically actuated. DO NOT
CAUTION
manually operate while electrical power is on.
Do not spray lubricants on SpeedBrakes. Dam-
Damage to cartridges and personal injury may
age to cartridges and SpeedBrake clutch may
result.
result.
(4) Test operation of SpeedBrakes on the 5. Connect electrical plugs and reinstall cartridges
ground, by activating cockpit switch, to assure there is into each wing. Install screws and apply Loctite 242;
no binding either up of down. re--torque to 8 in. lbs.
Air loads on SpeedBrakes can cause slightly different Every 1000 hours:
alignment during deployment; therefore it is recom-
1. Remove the SpeedBrake cartridges in accor-
mended that a test flight be done to test operation of
dance with SECTION 27--96--01.
SpeedBrake system to verify proper operation. Re-
adjust alignment of cartridge to wings slots until proper A. Return SpeedBrake cartridges to Precise Flight
operation in flight is obtained. Inc. for Clutch Spring and Drive Spring replacement.
27--96--02 -- MAINTENANCE -- SPEEDBRAKE SYS- B. Reinstall cartridges, when returned from Pre-
TEM cise Flight Inc., into wings in accordance with SEC-
TION 27--96--01.
SERIES 100 SPEEDBRAKE SYSTEM
Every 5000 hours:
Every 200 hours the following maintenance proce-
1. Remove the SpeedBrake cartridges in accor-
dures are recommended:
dance with SECTION 27--96--01.
1. Remove SpeedBrake cartridges in accordance to
A. Return SpeedBrake cartridges to Precise Flight
Section 27--96--01.
Inc. for Clutch Spring and Drive Spring replacement.
A. Visually inspect doubler and mounting hard- B. Reinstall cartridges, when returned from Pre-
ware for structural integrity. cise Flight Inc., into wings in accordance with SEC-
B. Check drain tubes for debris. TION 27--96--01.
27--96--02
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
27--96--03 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE

SpeedBrake 100
Cartridge Fails to Open Check Circuit Breaker.
Check Cannon Plugs for Security.
Check Cannon Plug, P/N: 01726, for correct wiring.
Ref.: Dwg. 000S018W, Precise Flight, Inc.
Cam Adjustment -- Electrical Units Check SpeedBrake for squareness (Turn aircraft pow-
er OFF).
With 5/64 inch Allen wrench, loosen desired cam set
screw so cam still has friction.
AFT cam is for retract position/FWD cam is for
deployed position.
Adjust AFT cam to actuate micro--switch to 1/8 to 1/4
inch so micro--switch clicks before door is fully re-
tracted.
Adjust FWD cam to actuate micro--switch so inside
door edges are parallel when fully deployed.
Actuate SpeedBrakes electrically to check adjust-
ments.
Tighten set screws.
SpeedBrake 2000
Cartridge Fails to Open Check circuit breaker.
Check cannon plugs for security.
If SpeedBrake doors open, check that doors stop
approximately 1/4inch before being fully vertical.
There should be no gap between SpeedBrake doors.
If doors open beyond this position, contact Precise
Flight, Inc.
27--96--04 -- S-TEC AUTOPILOT ADJUSTMENT is complete and any discrepancies corrected, a test
(OPTIONAL) flight should be flown and in--flight adjustments made.
For aircraft equipped with the optional S--TEC System Refer to S--TEC documentation for detailed ground
55X Autopilot system, certain flight characteristics check and flight adjustment procedures.
identified (as “porpoising” or “pitch pump”) may be en- S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
countered. Aircraft experiencing these motion charac- (Garmin G1000 equipped)
teristics, during S--TEC Autopilot use, may require
For aircraft equipped with the Garmin G1000 Avionics
Pitch Cable Tension adjustment.
system, the Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual
The cable adjustment turnbuckle is located in the tail- should also be referred to for additional calibration in-
cone beneath the avionics rack. The cable tension is structions related to the S--TEC Autopilot system.
factory set at 15 In. Lbs. +/-- 2. During normal aircraft
operation, the tension of the cable may diminish do to
temperature variations and cable stretch. Verify cable
tension and adjust to high side (17 In. Lbs.) if neces-
sary.
In addition, verify all S--TEC electrical connections are
secure. Partially connected harnesses may damage
connector pins and provide erroneous data.
Upon completion of adjustments, and prior to first flight,
a ground check to ensure proper and predictable sys-
tem operation must be performed. After ground check
27--96--03
Page 21
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
27--96--04
Page 22
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 28
FUEL
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 28
FUEL
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
28--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--14--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--42--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--43--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--43--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28--90--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
28-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 28
FUEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
28--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
28--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filler Cap Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
28--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
28--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank Field Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
28--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cell Cross Feed Hole Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
28--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank Leak Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
28--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soapless Bubble Fluid Formula
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for Leak Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
28--14--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Boost Pump Removal & Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--21--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Boost Pump Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gascolator Screen Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--22--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gascolator Seal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--23--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--24--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Priming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--25--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Selector Valve Removal & Install. . . . . . . . . . . 11
28--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
28--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
28--32--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
28--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
28--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Quantity Indicating Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
28--42--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Quantity Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
28--43--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Quantity Adjustment Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . 13
28--43--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Tank Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
28--43--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Quantity Gauge Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 13
28--90--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
28--91--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
28--92--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flared Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
28-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
28--00--00 -- GENERAL low--point drain, through the emergency boost pump to

the engine--driven fuel pump and to the fuel injector
Internally sealed, integral fuel tanks are in the L & R, for- system on the engine. Fuel quantity indicators are elec-
ward, inboard sections of the wing. Fuel feeds from ei- trically operated with 2 transmitters (inboard and out
ther tank to a selector valve through a gascolator, with a board) located in each tank.
FILLER CAP
2 PLACES
FUEL FLOW VENT

INDICATOR
VAPOR/FUEL RETURN R. FUEL

FUEL QUANITITY
METERING LINE INDICATOR
UNIT
GASCOLATOR
SELECTOR
VALVE
ENGINE ELEC.
DRIVEN FUEL L. FUEL
FUEL DISTRIBUTION FUEL FUEL PUMP QUANTITY
FLOW DRAIN
MANIFOLD PUMP VALVE INDICATOR
TRANSDUCER
FIREWALL
VENT
OUTLET SCREEN ASSY
2 PLACES INBOARD OUTBOARD
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
DRAIN VALVE (1 EACH TANK) 2 PLACES 2 PLACES
M28--1
FUEL SYSTEM
FIGURE 28--1
28--00--01 -- FUEL FILLER CAP ASSEMBLY MAIN- 3. The sealing capability of each cap assembly
TENANCE should be checked periodically and at each annual in-
spection. This can be accomplished per the following
Fuel filler port cap assemblies should be inspected pe- procedures:
riodically for proper sealing, condition of O--rings and
should be serviced occasionally to prevent hard to A. Remove cap assembly from wing filler port and
open or close conditions. inspect O--ring (1) for damage, cracks or brittleness.
Remove and replace if needed.
1. The O--ring seal (1) (Figure 28--2) around the cap
assembly should be kept clean and free of dirt or grit B. Adjust tension of shaft (2) and rotating lock plate
that might cause abrasive action on seal or mating (3) by removing cotter pin (5) from nut (6) so cap as-
flange. Occasional lubrication with petroleum jelly or sembly handle (7) can be opened, turned and shut with
Tri--Flow (Teflon Lubricant) will keep O--ring soft and hand pressure and still provide necessary seal of cap
pliable. assembly to keep water from entering fuel tank.
2. The shaft (2) running through center of cap hous- NOTE
ing, that actuates the rotating lock plate (3) should be Fuel selector should be in the OFF position be-
lubricated occasionally with Tri--Flow, or equivalent, to fore proceeding with paragraph C to pressurize
prevent binding while opening or closing cap assembly. the fuel tanks.
This should also lubricate the O--ring (4) that seals this C. Connect rubber hose to each tank’s vent line.
shaft. Apply ONLY one--half pound (1/2 psi) air pressure.
WARNING Check for fuel cap leaks by soaping circumference and
Water can enter the fuel tank through a loose fit- shaft area of filler cap assembly and observing
ting or damaged cap. This should be corrected bubbles. Replace O--ring if bubbles are observed and
as soon as possible. adjustment of lower nut (6) does not stop leak.
28--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
CAUTION (2) Filleting Compound -- PR1422 B--1/2, B--2 or

Use only one--half pound (0.5 psi) of air pressure CS3204 B--1/2, B--2 (MIL--S--8802D Class B).
in tank.
(3) Removable access panel sealant --
PR1428--B.
(4) Protective sealant -- PR1005--L
7 MIL--S--4383B).
B. Gloves -- Polyethylene
C. Metal cleaning solvent -- Turco 657 wipe sol-
4 vent.
D. Cheese cloth.
2 E. Turco leak detector or bubble fluid.
F. Methyl ethyl keytone (MEK) (thinner for PR
1005--L).
NOTE
Approved materials may be obtained from your
3 local Mooney Service Center. Sealants may also
1 be obtained from Products Research Co., 5454
San Fernando Road, Glendale, CA. 91209; or
Chem Seal Corp., 11120 Sherman Way, Sun
Valley, CA. 91352.
2. Handling and Mixing Sealants.
A. Sealant Material Characteristics.
5 6
(1) Application life is the time that the mixed com-
pound remains suitable for application. Application life
ratings are always based on standard atmospheric
conditions of 75o F. and 50% relative humidity. For ev-
ery 10o F. rise in temperature, application life and cure
R28--2
time is reduced by half; for every 10o F. drop in tempera-
ture, application life and cure time is doubled. High hu-
midity at the time of mixing slightly reduces the sealant
FUEL FILLER CAP ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE application life.
FIGURE 28--2
(2) Maximum unopened container life, with seal-
28--10--00 -- STORAGE ant at 80o F., is six months.
(3) For sealant application life, tack--free curing
28--11--00 -- FUEL TANK FIELD REPAIR time, and curing rates (see following Cure Rate table).
B. Sealant Mixing
This paragraph outlines procedures recommended for
repair of integral fuel tanks. Tank repairs should not be (1) For best results, use kits with proper propor-
attempted until these instructions are fully understood. tions of base compound and accelerator.
Refer to Service Bulletin SB M20--230 for a general (2) To avoid excessive air entrapment, slowly
concept on resealing tanks. stir accelerator into base compound. Continue mixing
1. Approved Materials. for seven to ten minutes. Scrape sides and bottom of
container to include all compounds in mixture and to in-
A. Sealants. sure uniform blending. Scrape mixing paddle on edge
of container to remove unmixed compound. Be sure to
WARNING
use all of the accelerator.
Sealants are safe only when handled with reason-
able care. Avoid ingestion and all contact with the (3) Place small amount of mixture on a clean
body, especially with open breaks in the skin. Wash strip of aluminum and spread sealant. Visually examine
hands before eating or smoking. If accelerator con- sealant film to determine whether accelerator is visible
tacts the skin, flush area with warm water. in particle form. If particles of accelerator are visible,
continue mixing operation. If course particles of accel-
(1) Brush sealant -- PR1422--A--1/2 or A--2 or erator persist after mixing thoroughly, reject entire
CS3204 A--1/2, A--2 (MIL--S--8802D Class A). mixed batch.
28--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CURE RATES
(a) Brushable Type Sealants
CLASS A Tack--Free Time Cure Rate Application Life

(HOURS) (HOURS) (HOURS)
PR1422 A--1/2 10 30 1/2
PR1422 A--2 36 72 2
CS3204 A--1/2 8 30 1/2
CS3204 A--2 24 72 2
(b) Filleting Compound (and on wing walk access panel)
CLASS B Tack--Free Time Cure Rate Application Life

PR1422 B--1/2 10 45 1/2
PR1422 B--2 36 72 2
CS3204 B--1/2 8 30 1/2
CS3204 B--2 24 72 2
CS3204 B--4 36 76 4
Follow procedures with sealant kits to properly seal tanks.
(c) Access Door Sealant (except on wing walk access panel)
CLASS B Tack--Free Time Cure Rate Application Life

CS--3330--B 8 16 2
PR1403--G--B2 10 48 2
PR1428--B 8 16 2
(d) Brushable Top Coat Protective Sealant
-- Tack--Free Time Cure Rate Application Life

PR1005L 1/3 4 --
CS3600 -- -- --
Allow a minimum of 24 hours cure time prior to refueling tanks (48 hours cure time is recommended). Air
must be allowed to circulate through access covers.
NOTE A. Clean metal surfaces to be sealed with Turco

Sealant in tube form, which has mixing instruc- 657 Wipe Solvent or Methyl Ethyl Keytone (MEK).
tions on each tube. Read and comply with these Wipe surface dry with clean cloth. Do not allow solvent
mixing instructions prior to sealant application. to evaporate.
3. Cleaning Surfaces to be sealed. B. Allow cleaned, wiped surface to dry five to ten
minutes before sealant application.
28--11--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE pendicular to seam so that extruded sealant will pack

Apply sealant as soon as possible after cleaning/ tightly.
drying. Store and handle parts in a manner that (2) Use a spatula to pack sealant firmly in place
will prevent finger prints, dust, dirt, or other for- while working out air pockets. Shape each fillet evenly.
eign substances from accumulating on surfaces
to be sealed. C. Brush Sealing.
(1) Brush sealant (PR 1422--A--1/2, A--2 or
NOTE
CS3204 A--1/2, A--2) over all seams, rivets, nuts, and
Refer to Mooney SB M20--230 for proper applica-
bolts. A one inch, stiff bristle brush is recommended for
tion of sealant and drain holes that are to be left
sealant application. Force sealant into all gaps with
open.
brush strokes parallel to seams. Use a circular brush
action to deposit an even coating of sealant around riv-
3/16 TO 1/4 IN. ets, nuts, and bolts. Coating should be approximately
1/32--inch thick. Use considerable brush action to force
sealant into all small crevices and to obtain good adhe-
FILLET sion. Air pockets under the sealant, that will open up in
3/16 TO APPLY FILLETING the form of holes or voids soon after application, will re-
SEAL GAPS & HOLES 1/4 IN. COMPOUND
WITH FILLETING
sult from improper application. To repair holes or voids,
COMPOUND FILLET press sealant in place using a spatula.
FIRST STEP SECOND STEP (2) When edge of a flange protrudes 0.040 inch
or less, or where the seam cannot be clearly defined,
3/8 TO 1/2 IN. 1 IN. apply two 1/32--inch brush coats. Allow first coat to cure
about four hours or until it becomes rubbery before ap-
plying second coat. The second coat should overlap
1/32 IN. 1/16 IN. edges of first coat by about 1/4 inch.
3/8 TO APPLY D. Protective Sealant.
1/2 IN. 1 IN.
PROTECTIVE
APPLY BRUSH SEALANT
(1) Using short, even strokes, brush on a smooth
SEALANT and continuous coat of PR 1005--L over sealant. The
THIRD STEP FOURTH STEP protective sealant coat should extend one inch beyond
edge of filleting compound.
(2) Allow first protective coat to cure 20 minutes
at 75o F., or until tack--free; then apply a second brush
FASTENER SEALING WITH BRUSH SEALANT coat of PR 1005--L. Make every effort to obtain a com-
(1/32 TO 1/16 IN. THICK) pletely bubble--free, continuous top coat. DO NOT RE-
R28--3
BRUSH over areas, as doing so will only cause drag-
FUEL TANK SEALING ging and will break coating continuity.
FIGURE 28--3 E. Upper Wing Tank Access Panel Sealing.
4. Sealant Application. (1) Apply a coat of access door sealant
All old sealant must be removed. Use a sharp, non--me- (PR1428--B) to either faying surface using a short stiff
tallic scraper (Formica or lexan). When sealant has bristle brush, spatula, or extrusion gun. If an extrusion
been removed, clean area thoroughly and reseal tank gun is used, smooth the sealant with a brush or spatula.
as follows: Cover the entire faying surface with a sealant coat of
sufficient thickness (1/32 to 1/16 inch) to assure extru-
A. Fillet Sealing. sion along edges of faying surface when mating parts
(1) Be certain that surfaces to be sealed are to- are assembled. Access panels in wing walk area
tally clean and free from oil, grime, finger prints, etc. should be sealed with PRC 1422, Class B filleting com-
(2) Refer to (Figure 28--3) for typical fillet size. pound.
(2) Assemble parts immediately after application
(3) Join fillets laid on intersection joints to pro-
of sealant and tighten screws to obtain as near as pos-
duce a continuous fillet.
sible a metal--to--metal contact.
(4) Seal all difficult and hard--to--reach areas first
(3) Remove extruded sealant from wing surface
to preclude the possibility of their being overlooked or
after installing fasteners.
improperly sealed.
B. Filleting Compound Application. 28--11--01 -- FUEL CELL CROSS FEED HOLE RE-
PAIR
(1) Use a spatula or an extrusion gun with a 1/8 --
to 1/4 -- inch nozzle opening for laying fillets at edges of Sealant, when applied to the interior of the fuel cell, may
all seams. When using an extrusion gun, hold gun per- sag and close (or restrict) fluid transfer holes and open-
28--11--01
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
ings beyond the 25% manufacturing allowance. When leaks which do not constitute a flight hazard and need
this restriction occurs, a repair must be done to restore not be repaired prior to flight, providing the condition
the opening to an acceptable size in accordance with causing leak cannot result in a leak of greater intensity
the following procedures: during flight. Seeps considered permissible for flight
1. Trim excess sealant from discrepant openings with must be frequently inspected to insure that no increase
a sharp razor knife. This procedure may cause fuel tank in intensity has occurred.
leaks to occur in the surrounding area. It is therefore
recommended that the additional steps shown below 1/2 TO
3/4 IN. 1--1/2 IN. 3--1/2 TO 4 IN.
be accomplished.
A. Fabricate tube, P/N: 020007--R11 as illustrated
in Figure 28--4.
B. Install tube, --R11, into trimmed hole opening.
C. Apply sealant (PR1422 B--2 or CS3204 B--2 or
equivalent) around the trimmed hole area and the --R11
tube liberally to prevent any fuel tank leaks.
1
2
3
O
30 (TYP)
2.00 in. 4 TO 5 IN.
6 IN. MAX
020007--R11
(MAT’L: .187 O.D. x .035 W.T.)
5052--0 ALUMINUM TUBE
M28--4
CROSS FEED HOLE REPAIR

FIGURE 28--4
4
28--12--00 -- FUEL TANK LEAK REPAIR RUNNING LEAK R28--4
1. Leak Description. FUEL LEAK CLASSIFICATION

It is necessary to periodically inspect the fuel tanks. In- FIGURE 28--5
spection is particularly important in confined areas of C. A running leak and any leak in a confined area
the aircraft that are not exposed to the air stream. Iden- that is not exposed to the air stream should be repaired
tification and classification of fuel leaks that occur in before the next flight.
both confined and open areas is necessary to differenti-
ate between those leaks that require repair before flight 3. Leak Detection.
and those which do not constitute a flight hazard. The A. External Leak Detection after Refueling. To be
size of the wetted area around a leak is an indication of able to trace a leak from where it appears on an outer
the leak intensity. All fuel leaks must be recorded by de- tank or wing skin to its true source inside the tank, the
scribing location and intensity of leak in the aircraft log exact point where fuel is escaping from tank, must be
book. determined.
2. Classification of leaks as to Intensity and Location. (1) Use compressed air to blow and evaporate
(Refer to Figure 28--5). fuel from seams and crevices of leak area. Attempt to
A. Intensity Classification. define exact point where fuel is escaping from tank.
(1) Stain -- A slow fuel leak that tends to evapo- (2) Small seep leaks can be traced with raw
rate as soon as it is exposed to air. edges of torn paper. The fuzzy edge absorbs fluid and
gives a good visual indication of fuel presence when
(2) Seep -- A fuel leak that reappears shortly after brought in contact with suspected leak points.
area is wiped clean.
(3) After tracing leak to its exterior source, mark
(3) Heavy Seep -- A fuel leak that reappears im- location and drain fuel tank.
mediately after area is wiped clean.
B. Internal Leak Detection. To make a permanent
(4) Running Leak -- A fuel leak that flows steadily. repair, it is mandatory that the true source of the interior
B. Slow--to--heavy seeps occurring in open areas, leak be located. The fuel tank is a network of seams and
such as wing surfaces exposed to the air stream, are fuel may flow through or along a seam or from one
28--12--00
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
seam to another. Fuel may channel a few inches or sev- ends of existing sealant so that new sealant can form a
eral feet to where it appears on external skin surface. continuous and smooth overlap.
(1) Gain access to tank interior through inspec- (3) Thoroughly clean repair area using Turco
tion access panels and inspect sealant in general area 657 Wipe Solvent or MEK. Wash one small area at a
of outside leak point. Look first for bare seams, rivets, time. To prevent redeposit of oil and dirt on surface, dry
and bolts in difficult--to--seal areas. Inspect sealant for with a clean cloth before solvent evaporates. Always
blisters, pin holes, cracks, splits, and loss of adhesion. pour solvent onto wash cloth to prevent contamination
Mark all suspected flaws with masking tape of solvent supply; do not dip cloth into solvent.
(2) Test each suspected flaw from inside tank us- (4) Thoroughly dry cleaned area by blowing fil-
ing compressed filtered air at 20 to 30 PSI. Hold air tered air over immediate area until there is no possibility
nozzle against flaw and closely check outside leak of solvent or fuel entrapment under adjacent sealant.
point for evidence of fuel.
(5) Apply sealant as required for repair (See Fig-
(3) After testing each suspected flaw from inside ure 28--3). Repaired fillets must be blended into exist-
tank as outlined above, and if no leak source can be dis- ing fillets with a spatula or an appropriate tool.
covered, apply soapless bubble fluid to exterior and
(6) Allow all repaired sealant to cure tack--free
again apply air pressure to suspected flaw areas from
and apply two brush coats of PR 1005--L to repair area
inside tank.
(Refer to paragraph 28--11--00, 4, D).
(4) If above tests fail to locate leak source, apply
air pressure (10 PSI MAX) to external leak point after 28--13--00 -- SOAPLESS BUBBLE FLUID FORMU-
removing all traces of fuel from tank and applying soap- LA PREPARATION FOR LEAK CHECK
less bubble fluid to tank interior seams per Section
28--13--00.
CAUTION
4. Leak Repair. When removing lower inboard access panels,
A. Temporary Repair of Fastener Leaks. General- caution should be exercised during removal so
ly, all leaks in enclosed areas and running leaks in open fuel outlet tubes will not be damaged or bent.
areas constitute a flight hazard. Fastener leaks of this
category may be temporarily repaired by applying a CAUTION
sealant fillet over fastener head on fuel tank exterior. Soapless bubble fluid is slightly corrosive and
For a temporary repair to be satisfactory, structural in- must be completely removed by washing freely
tegrity must be retained in leak area. To make a tempo- with water followed by scrubbing.
rary fastener--leak repair:
(1) Remove enough fuel from tank to drop fuel NOTE
level below leaking fasteners. Amount of each ingredient may be reduced for a
smaller quantity of solution. Solution life is about
(2) Clean fastener head and adjacent surface one week.
with Turco 657 Wipe Solvent or MEK and dry thorough-
ly. Fastener head and adjacent metal must be entirely 1. Materials.
free from paint, dirt, and oil. A. Three ounces of either sodium bichromate, po-
(3) Apply a 1/8 inch thick coat of PR 1422 (or tassium chromate or potassium dichromate.
CS3204) B--1/2 or B--2 over head and around fastener. B. Three and one--quarter ounces Thickening Wax
(4) Allow sealant to cure until firm and rubbery. (Carbo Wax 1500).
(5) Refill tank and examine repair periodically. If C. Thirteen ounces Alkaryl Sufonate wetting
leak reoccurs, sealant must be removed and area re- agent.
cleaned prior to making another temporary repair. D. Distilled water.
B. Permanent Leak repair. If leak source is found to 2. Solution Preparation.
be around a rivet or threaded fastener, the repair proce-
A. Mix one of the compounds listed in item (A)
dure shall be to restrike rivet or retorque fastener to
above with one cup distilled water.
maximum permitted torque value. Any one rivet may be
restruck only one time. If leak continues, replace the B. Mix item (B) above with one cup distilled water.
rivet. C. Mix item (C) above with four to four and one half
(1) Repair any sealant damage due to restriking gallons distilled water until wetting agent dissolves
or retorqueing a fastener. completely.
(2) Remove sealant in immediate area of leak D. Mix the three ingredients (A), (B) and (C) togeth-
source using a sharp non--metallic tool. A chisel-- er and add enough distilled water to make five gallons
shaped Formica tool is recommended. Scarf or taper of solution.
28--13--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
28--14--00 -- FUEL ADDITIVES 6. Reverse removal process to reinstall. Take care

not to damage O--rings. Have new replacement O--
CAUTION rings available, if needed.
Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (EGME) or 7. Lubricate O--rings with clean engine oil before
other additives are not recommended due to po- installing.
tential deteriorating effects within the fuel sys- 8. Torque nut 10 to 15 in. lbs.
tem.
9. Safety wire nut, to prevent loosening, exactly as
Under certain conditions of temperature and humidity, original installation.
water can be present in fuel in sufficient quantities to 28--22--01 -- GASCOLATOR SEAL KIT
create ice formations within the fuel system. To prevent Christopher and Airight gascolators may have internal
this, add Anhydrous ISO--PROPYL Alcohol to the fuel seals replaced as needed. reference Figure 28--6.
supply in quantities not to exceed 1% of total fuel vol-
ume per tank.
GASCOLATOR
28--20--00 -- DISTRIBUTION
The fuel system is comprised of two fuel pumps, an en-

gine driven, gear type pump and an electrically driven, MS9388-10
auxiliary, boost pump. The electrically driven boost MS9388-15
pump is connected to a switch on the instrument panel.
The boost pump is used to provide sufficient fuel pres-
sure to operate the engine in case of engine driven fuel
pump malfuncton.
28--21--00 -- FUEL BOOST PUMP REMOVAL AND

INSTALLATION
MS9388-137
1. Auxiliary, Electric, Boost Pump Removal.
A. Remove electrical leads.
B. Turn fuel selector valve -- OFF.
C. Disconnect inlet and outlet fuel lines.
D. Remove fuel pump.
2. Reverse the removal procedure for reinstallation.
Refer to SECTION 71--00--51, 4 for Electric Boost
Pump Set--Up.
MS29512-05
MS9388-006
(2 REQ’D.) M28--5
CAUTION
Do not run pump dry for more than 15 seconds. GASCOLATOR SEAL KIT (610015-900)
FIGURE 28--6
NOTE
28--23--00 -- FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
When the aircraft will not be flown for a period of
time, refer to Sections 10--10--01, 10--10--02 & 28--24--00 -- ENGINE PRIMING
10--10--03. There is no separate priming system on the M20M air-
28--21--01-- FUEL BOOST PUMP INSPECTION craft. Operating the boost pump switch in the cockpit
turns auxiliary fuel pump -- ON. The time for running
See Section 5--20--06 for 100 hour inspection informa- pump, for starting purposes, is dependent upon outside
tion. ambient temperature (See POH/AFM Section IV for
28--22--00 -- GASCOLATOR SCREEN CLEANING chart).
Gascolator screen removal and cleaning; 28--25--00 -- FUEL SELECTOR VALVE REMOVAL &
INSTALLATION
1. Remove belly skin just aft of nose wheel well.
2. Turn fuel selector valve – OFF. The fuel selector valve is located below floor board just
aft of console.
3. Remove safety wire on bottom nut; remove nut.
1. Drain both fuel tanks. Refer to Chapter 28--30--00
4. Remove sump and screen by pulling down. for procedures to de--fuel aircraft.
5. Clean screen. 2. Disconnect inlet lines at valve body.
28--14--00
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
3. Disconnect outlet lines at valve body. 28--40--00 -- INDICATING

4. Disconnect both fuel return lines at valve body. 28--41--00 -- FUEL QUANTITY INDICATING
5. Remove handle above floorboard in fuel selector TRANSMITTERS
pan.
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319, 27--0325,
6. Remove screws that mount valve to tubular struc- 27--0327
ture. The fuel quantity indicating system has two fuel quanti-
7. Remove valve. ty transmitters in each wing tank; one on inboard wing
8. Reverse removal procedure to install valve. tank rib and one on outboard wing tank rib. Each pair of
transmitters are electrically connected to its applicable
9. Refuel aircraft. fuel gauge (L or R) in cluster gauge and work in series
10. Leak check fuel system. with each other to indicate fuel quantity.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
28--30--00 -- FUEL DUMP
The fuel tanks can be emptied for maintenance pur- The fuel quantity indicating system has two fuel quanti-
poses by: (1) removing sump drains in lower panel of ty transmitters in each wing tank; one on inboard wing
each fuel tank and allowing fuel to drain into suitable tank rib and one on outboard wing tank rib. Each pair of
container or (2) disconnect fuel line at outlet of fuel transmitters interface with the Garmin G1000 to indi-
pump and use boost pump, with appropriate fittings cate fuel quantity. Refer to Garmin System Mainte-
and hoses, to transfer fuel from both tanks into a suit- nance Manual for system description, service and trou-
able storage container. bleshooting instructions.
Isolate aircraft to outdoor, secure area: CAUTION
-- Keep aircraft away from ignition source. When removing lower, inboard access panels,
caution should be exercised, during removal, so
-- Ground aircraft (and any external fuel pump system,
fuel outlet tubes will not be damaged or bent.
if used) properly.
-- Use suitable container(s) for fuel storage. NOTE
Lower, interior side panels will require removal to
-- Have operating fire extinguisher and authorized per- gain access to INBD tank rib, INBD fuel tank rib &
sonnel available. INBD quantity transmitter.
-- Use trained personnel for all fueling and/or defueling 1. REMOVAL -- Fuel Quantity Transmitter(s).
procedures.
Drain fuel from tank. Reference 28--30--00.
28--31--00 -- FUEL SYSTEM DRAINS A. INBOARD Transmitter removal
(1) Remove Pilot or Co--Pilot seat as needed.
Fuel drains are installed at aft, inboard corners of each
wing tank and on gascolator, the lowest point in the fuel (2) Remove interior panel, LH or RH as needed.
system. The engine manifold and engine--driven fuel (3) Locate & remove wires from transmitter.
pump drains join at a juncture on right side of engine. A (4) Remove six screws attaching transmitter to
single drain line dumps fuel overboard below cowling. rib doubler.
Tank drains are recessed and spring loaded closed. An
(5) Remove transmitter from rib.
O--ring at lower flange seals drain valve seat. Check
the tank drain valves after each use to verify the O--ring B. OUTBOARD transmitter removal:
is properly sealed when the spring loaded valve is (1) Gain access through lower, wing access cov-
closed. er outside of tank area.
28--32--00 -- FUEL VENTS (2) Locate and remove wires from transmitter.
(3) Remove six screws attaching transmitter to
Fuel tanks are vented from outboard upper edge. This rib doubler.
vent is routed outboard through wing structure and
vented overboard through a NACA vent on lower wing (4) Remove transmitter from rib.
surface. Expansion of fuel takes place inside tank as 2. REINSTALLATION -- Reverse the fuel quantity
temperature and environmental conditions change. transmitter removal procedure.
NOTE A. A calibrated, certified torque application device
It is important that fuel tank vent tubes protrude must be used to install the fuel quantity transmitters.
only enough to be flush with lower wing skins. B. Snug each screw, then torque each screw to
NOTE 20--25 IN. LBS. in a cross flange--random order.
Groove in Sump Drain mounting plate face to C. The torque and screw clamp load will naturally
remain open and free of sealant. relax as the gasket flows to a normal condition.
28--30--00
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
NEVER RETORQUE JUST TO RESTORE THE 28--43--01 -- FUEL TANK CALIBRATION PROCE-
20--25 IN. LBS. DURES
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319, 27--0325,
“DO NOT OVER TORQUE”
27--0327
DO NOT RETORQUE UNLESS LEAKING 1. Level A/C to 0o pitch and 0o roll.
D. Excessive torque or re--torquing may warp or 2. Fuel tanks -- EMPTY.
distort the transmitter mounting flange and cause a 3. Add 3.0 gallons unusable fuel to tank being cali-
transmitter malfunction. brated.
E. Make certain the wire from outboard transmitter 4. Adjust trim pot marked “EMPTY” on gauge being
goes under head of insulating sleeve against the in- calibrated to read “E” to 1/2 needle width below “E”.
board transmitter flange and not under the mounting “EMPTY” trim pot is lower hole on fuel gauge.
screw head. 5. Add 2.50 to 3 gallons (part of additional 11.125 gal-
lons required for 1/4 gauge reading). Adjust “LOW
F. System voltage should NOT BE APPLIED to the FUEL” warning trim pot in annunciator panel so Low
transmitter terminal. The excitation from the fuel quan- Fuel warning light JUST comes on (See Section
tity indicator must be current and voltage limited and in- 24--33--00, 4, A and B).
capable of causing ignition of fuel vapor if transmitter
6. Add 8.125 or 8.625 gals. for 1/4 gauge reading.
wire is inadvertently shorted to ground.
Continue adding fuel in 11.125 gallon increments for
G. Care must be taken to insure that the bottom nut 1/2 and 3/4 gauge readings. Gauge to read within +/--1
on the terminal stud is not disturbed when electrical needle width.
connection is made. This bottom terminal stud nut 7. Finish filling tank until 47.5 gallons total fuel vol-
torque is factory set to provide the correct terminal seal ume is in each wing tank. Gauge should read “F”.
preload. 8. Trim pot marked “FULL” (upper hole) should be ad-
H. Other nuts on the electrical terminals should be justed, if necessary, so each gauge reads “F” +/--1
tightened as follows: needle width.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for other tank.
#6 – 6 INCH LBS.
28--43--03 -- FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE ADJUST-
#8 – 12 INCH LBS. MENT
#10 – 14 INCH LBS. ANALOG GAUGES -- S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257
Cluster gauges installed on aircraft have this adjust-
28--42--00 -- FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR ment:
1. With “Unusable” fuel in tanks, adjust pot marked
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319, 27--0325, “EMPTY” so gauge reads “E”. If intermediate or “F” indi-
27--0327 cations are out of tolerance as tank is filled, adjust pot
marked “FULL” for correct calibration.
Two fuel quantity gauges (LH & RH) are located in in- DIGITAL GAUGES -- S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
strument cluster gauge. These gauges indicate per- 27--0319, 27--0325, 27--0327
centage of fuel remaining. Each gauge operates by
1. Level aircraft to 0o pitch and 0o roll. Verify annun-
changes in resistance of two transmitters located in
ciator “NORMAL--CAL” switch is in “CAL” mode.
each fuel tank.
2. Remove seats and interior lower side panels to ac-
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA cess fuel quantity processors LH and RH.
(Garmin G1000 equipped) 3. Obtain or construct IAI processor Test Box (Sche-
The Fuel Quantity indicator displays the quantity of fuel matic shown in Figure 28--8) and 9--Pin Test Harness
in the tanks in gallons. The indicator ranges from E (Schematic shown in Figure 28--9).
(Empty) to F (Full) with tick marks at 10, 20, 30, and 40 4. Connect Test Box to fuel processor (15--Pin con-
gallons. Two triangle pointers labeled L (Left) and R nector) and connect 9--Pin test harness to fuel proces-
(Right) indicate the number of gallons in each fuel tank. sor and other end to A/C wire fuel processor plug.
Each gauge operates by changes in resistance of two 5. Connect digital voltmeter to test harness labeled
transmitters located in each fuel tank. “D.V.M.” (2--Pin female plug).
28--43--00 -- FUEL QUANTITY ADJUSTMENT PRO- 6. Turn aircraft power ON (or use Auxiliary Power
CEDURE Source).
NOTE 7. Place “EMPTY--FULL” switch (SW1) to “EMPTY.”
See Section 24--33--00 for Low Fuel warning cal- 8. Place SW2 switch on setup box to M20M/R posi-
ibration. tion.
28--42--00
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
9. Adjust No. 1 Bias to read 170mv, if unable to read 20. Fuel A/C to 9 gallons. L/F light should extinguish
170mv, set at 110mv (see Figure 28--7 for location of No. between 6 and 9 gallons. If L/F light does not extin-
1 Bias). guish, repeat steps 15 ,16, 17.
10. Place “EMPTY--FULL” position in setup box to
NOTE
“FULL.”
A post setup test flight should be conducted to
11. Adjust Master Gain Bias to read 818 mv (see Fig- verify that the Low Fuel Warning Light illumi-
ure 28--7 for location of Master Gain Bias). nates when approximately 6 gallons fuel remains
12. Place Test Box to EMPTY and adjust to 170 mv. in the tank as fuel is burned off.
13. Place Test Box to FULL and readjust to 818 mv. 21. After verifying LOW FUEL TRANSITION, fuel to
14. Repeat steps 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13. The values will 44 gallons and readjust control to read 818 mv.
converge in 2 or 3 iterations. Low 170 mv and 818 mv
22.Turn aircraft power OFF and remove test har-
master gain.
ness.
15. After completion of Step 14, switch Test Box to
LOW FUEL. Wait 2--3 minutes. Set Low Fuel Warning 23. After completion follow steps 4 through 22 for op-
(L.F.W.) light on IAI annunciator; millivolts on DVM will posite side.
range between 365 and 370.
24. After fuel calibration is completed set “NORMAL--
NOTE
CAL” in annunciator to NORMAL.
See Section 24--33--00 detail procedures for ad-
justing Annunciator Low Fuel Warning for Ana- NOTE
log Fuel Gauge systems. When removal and replacement of individual
DIGITAL FUEL GAUGES are required due to mal-
16. Turn aircraft power OFF. functions, recalibrate each new fuel gauge to
17. Disconnect Test Box and connect A/C wiring to read the same as the replaced one in accordance
processor leaving test wire harness connected. with the adjustment procedures shown in
Figure 39--12.
18. Turn aircraft power ON and load unusable fuel of
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
3 gallons. Adjust No. 1 Bias to read 170 mv if required.
19. Reset fuel truck gauge to zero and fuel A/C to 6
gallons, verifying Low Fuel (L/F) light remains illumi- Refer to Garmin service literature for Fuel Quantity
nated. Transducer Calibration procedure.
HI FUEL EMPTY
ADJUST TO 818 mv 170 mv
Master Gain No.1

Bias 15 PIN
DURING SET--UP PLUG IN

IAI DATA PLATE TEST BOX
PLUG TEST CABLE IN HERE
No.2
Bias
USED ONLY IF NOT COVERED BY DECAL

PRELIMINARY SETUP (Set to 80mv)
(prior to adjustment on Bias #1 Steps)
LOCATED UNDER SIDE PANELS ADJACENT TO INBOARD TANK RIB #210026 -- LH & RH
M28--6
FUEL QUANTITY PROCESSOR

FIGURE 28--7
28--43--03
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
MATERIALS REQUIRED: (QTY 1 EA.)

1. SW1: ANY DPDT SWITCH WITH MINIMUM 2 AMP CONTACT RATING.
2. SW2: ANY SPDT SWITCH WITH MINIMUM 1 AMP CONTACT RATING.
3. R1: 22 W 1/8 WATT 1% TOLERANCE RESISTOR. *
4. R2: 5.5 W 1/8 WATT 1% TOLERANCE RESISTOR. *
7. J1: CONNECTOR, 15 PIN D--SUB, DA--15P OR EQUIVALENT.
8. AWG 22 WIRE, AS REQUIRED.
9. ENCLOSURE, BUD BOX OR EQUIVALENT. SHOP PREFERENCE.
*: MORE THAN ONE RESISTOR MAY BE PARALLELED TO ACHIEVE THE
THE ABOVE RESISTOR VALUES IF HIGH TOLERENCE RESISTORS ARE
NOT AVAILABLE. APPROX. 24 INCHES
ENCLOSURE -- AS DESIRED
3 F L OUT XDUC1
M20M/R M20S 6 +5VDC LF XDUC1
SW2 1 AIRFRAME GROUND
2 SIG GND XDUC1
9 SIG GND XDUC2
10 F L OUT XDUC2
SW1 13 +5VDC LF XDUC2
R1 (3 POS)
R2 4
EMPTY 5
FULL
7
R4 LF 8
EMPTY 11
R3 FULL 12
LF 14
15 J1
(WING SIDE
TO SENDERS)
R28--6
DIGITAL GAUGES – FUEL QUANTITY CALIBRATION TEST BOX

FIGURE 28 -- 8
2 PIN CONNECTOR
PRELIMINARY SET--UP ADJ. USED W/ #2 BIAS ADJ.
(80 mv)
2 PIN CONNECTOR
MILLIVOLTS OUT
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
DE--9P DE--9S
R28--7
DIGITAL GAUGES – FUEL TEST/EXTENSION HARNESS INTERFACE CABLE

FIGURE 28--9
28--43--03
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
28--90--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS
See Chapter 73--31--00 for Fuel Flow System
28--91--00 -- TROUBLESHOOTING -- FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel gauge not indicating. Broken wire. Check and repair.
Faulty transmitting unit. Replace and adjust.
Open circuit breaker. Check and reset.
Fuel gauge
g g indicates Incomplete ground. Check ground connection at transmitter.
FULL when
h ttanks
k are nott
full. Broken wire. Check and repair.
No fuel pressure indica-

indica Tank empty. Check and service tank.
tion.
Defective fuel pump(s). Check boost pump for proper pressure buildup. Check
(calibrated test gauges
for obstruction in boost pump screen. Inspect engine fuel
connected)
pump and check valve.
Open fuel line. Repair or replace line.
Fuel selector in OFF posi- Select proper position.
tion.
Fuel pressure low or Obstruction in inlet side of Check and clear fuel lines. Replace or rebuild pump.
surging. pump. Faulty engine pump. Inspect fuel lines and connections for leakage and dam-
((Calibrated test gauges
g g age.
connected).
d)
Fuel selector not in proper Select proper position.
position.
Air leak in system. Repair leak.
Also refer to Garmin G1000 service literature for Fuel System Troubleshooting.
28--92--00 -- FLARED FITTINGS
When installing flared fittings and hoses, make sure
threads are properly lubricated with VV--P--236 petrola-
tum per (Figure 28--10). When previously installed fit-
tings are removed, they should be wiped clean and re-
lubricated before they are reinstalled. Torque all fittings
in accordance with flare fitting torque chart, Chapter 5,
Figure 5--1.
TAPERED
PIPE LUBRICATE
THREADS
DO NOT
STRAIGHT LUBRICATE
THREADS FEMALE
THREADS
NEVER ALLOW LUBRICANT

TO CONTACT THESE
R28--8 SURFACES
LUBRICATION OF FLARED FITTINGS

FIGURE 28--10
28--90--00
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 30
ICE PROTECTION
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 30
ICE PROTECTION
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
30--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--60--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--61--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--61--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--61--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--62--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--64--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30--70--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
30-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 30
ICE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
30--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airframe Icing Protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (TKS System -- Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing, Airframe Ice Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--11--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--11--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance, Airframe Icing Protection . . . . . . . . . . 5
30--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
30--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
30--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
30--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitot Ice Removal, Description & Operation . . . . . . . . . 15
30--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Warning Vane -- Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
30--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Description & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
30--60--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller De--Ice (Electrical -- Opt.) . . . . . . . . . 16
30--61--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
30--61--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
30--61--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
30--63--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric De--Icer Timer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
30--64--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hour Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--65--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--66--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brush to Slip Ring Resistance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--67--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brush Assembly Resistance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--68--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brush Block Assembly Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--68--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brush Replacement/Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--69--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment of Slip Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30--70--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing/Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
30-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
30--00--00 -- GENERAL 30--11--01 -- WASHING

CAUTION
The M20M aircraft incorporates an alternate air system Do not use MEK (Methyl Ethyl Ketone) to clean
that is designed to open automatically any time the air titanium panels. Discoloration will result.
induction system becomes blocked. This system Porous panels contain plastic parts which may
should be inspected to assure that no heated air is en- be damaged by some solvents including MEK
tering the induction system during routine engine op- and some paint thinners.
eration. (See Section 71--62--00 for rigging instruc-
The following solvents ONLY are permitted for
tions).
cleaning porous panels:
This aircraft includes, as standard equipment, a heated -- Water (with soap or detergents)
pitot tube assembly. The aircraft may also include as -- De--Icing Fluids (TKS 80, TKS R238, DTD
optional equipment: an electrically operated propeller 406B)
de--ice system and an Airframe anti/de--ice system. -- Isopropyl or Ethyl Alcohol
Refer to the manufacturers service data for specific -- Aircraft Fuels (Gasoline or Kerosene)
maintenance information. It is recommended that the aircraft be rinsed with clear
water after each flight in which glycol based de--icing
30--10--00 -- AIRFRAME ICING PROTECTION (TKS fluid is used for icing protection. Special cleaning atten-
SYSTEM – OPTIONAL) tion should be given to skin lap areas and areas where
antennas are mounted if de--icing fluid tends to flow
The optional airframe icing protection system utilizes a there.
thin film of glycol based de--icing fluid to minimize the 30--11--02 -- LUBRICATION
adherence of ice. The system is comprised of porous, 1. Rod End bearings on Flight Controls and Landing
titanium, panels fitted to the leading edges of the wing, Gear systems should be inspected frequently for indi-
horizontal and vertical stabilizer. A slinger ring on the cation of lubrication being washed off by ice protection
propeller hub “slings” the same fluid over rubber boots fluid. Re--lubricate as needed.
on each propeller blade. The installation also provides
icing protection for the pilot’s side of the windshield. 2. Inspect hinge point of all flight control surfaces,
landing gear doors, linkages, bellcranks, etc. for indica-
The de--icing fluid is stored in two interconnected tanks tion of lubrication being washed off by ice protection
located under the rear seat. These tanks have a total fluid.
capacity of 6.0 U.S. gallons (plus line capacity) and are 30--11--03 -- ELECTRICAL
filled through a filler on the right side of the aft fuselage. 1. Clean electrical circuitry, I.E., contacts, terminals,
Fluid is pumped through nylon lines to proportioning pins switches, relays, potentiometers, etc. in areas
units located in each wing and in the aft fuselage. From where ice protection fluid flows.
these, the fluid is routed to the porous panels and 2. Inspect and check operation of electrical compo-
pumped through laser drilled holes in the panels to flow nents/systems which have circuitry in ice protection
over the Airframe surfaces. The pilot’s side of the wind- fluid flow areas prior to each flight.
shield is provided fluid through a spray bar fed by a sep- 30--12--00 -- MAINTENANCE -- AIRFRAME ICE
arate pump. PROTECTION
Approved de--icing fluids include: 1. Inspect ice protection system for proper fluid flow
at all panels.
-- TKS--80 2. Check for leaks at all panels with pump in the OFF
-- TKS R238 and ON position.
-- AL--5 (DTD 406B) 3. Check system metering pumps (2 each, located
under rear seats), for proper operating pressure. Use
30--11--00 -- SERVICING -- AIRFRAME ICING system Control Panel for valid pressure verification.
PROTECTION A. Select ”De--Ice”.
De--icing fluid absorbs and retains moisture. Residual (1) The ”De--Ice” LED should flash alternating
fluid that is not washed from the aircraft at recom- RED/GREEN and the ”Anti--Ice” LED should flash
mended intervals can get into skin laps and other fay- RED/OFF as system pressure rises.
ing surfaces and hold moisture. This may eventually NOTE
dissolve lubricants, and break down corrosion--protec- It may take a few minutes to build to proper oper-
tion coatings. Solid particles of various foreign materi- ating pressure.
als may attach themselves to the fluid and cause corro- (2) When system pressure is obtained, the
sive action of adjacent structural or rotating ”Anti--Ice” LED should extinguish and the ”De--Ice LED
components. should show steady GREEN.
30--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
(3) Repeat procedure with both metering 4. Operate Windshield Spray bar on each windshield
pumps. pump to ensure proper operation and absence of
leaks.
B. Switch OFF for sufficient time for system pres-
5. Filter is located at baggage floor stiffener. Inspect
sure to fall (approximately 2 minutes).
system filter and replace as needed.
C. Select ”Anti--Ice”. A. The ”high pressure” LED will illuminate YEL-
LOW if the filter element requires replacing. It should
(1) The ”Anti--Ice” LED should flash alternating NOT illuminate during testing but may be tripped ON
RED/GREEN and the ”De--Ice” LED should flash RED/ occasionally during aircraft electrical system switching
OFF as system pressure rises (approximately 20 sec- or during engine start. Cancel by depressing ”Reset”
onds). switch (use ball point pen tip or similar device).
B. Test ”High Pressure” LED by depressing ”Re-
(2) When system pressure is obtained, the ”De--
set” switch. YELLOW LED should illuminate while
Ice” LED should extinguish and the ”Anti--Ice” LED
switch is depressed, but go OFF when ”Reset” is re-
should show steady GREEN.
leased.
(3) Repeat procedure with both metering 5. See typical ice protection system schematic on
pumps. next pages.
Windshield
Airframe/Propeller De--Ice Pump 1
Earth Pump 2 Metering Pump Relay Blue
Red
OV HI Windshield
De--Ice Pump 2
LO
Red Blue
NC NC
Solenoid
NO NO Valve 1
Earth Solenoid
HI Valve 2
OV HI LO
LO
Airframe/Propeller High Pressure
Pump 1 Warning Switch
NO
Low Pressure C
Warning Switches NC
Stall Vane Pitot NO NO
Heat Heat C C <<
NC NC Tank Assy.
S0105
Heater
Plate
Knife
Connector 1
7
S0104
10
12
11
S0102
Pitot Heat 3
2
1
3
4
5
6
Dropping
7
8
9
Resistor
Current C3
To Relay Box
Flt. Tank
Timer Contents
&
Other Options Transmitter
S0101
1
Circuit Breaker
Red
9 +
FO103
Optional 28VDC
4 Black
Black
White
Green
Orange/Black 7
Red
Green/Black
Red/Black
White/Black
Orange
Black/White
Blue
Equipment
Blue/Black
Relay 8
S0103 FO101
12 Pitot Heat
20
13 AMP Breaker
14 Switch
10
11
NOTE: Later A/C

1
4
3
3
2
5
6
2
9
1
PL117 have a new relay

Connector
box & connector C1 C2
installed.TKS relay
Relay is activated NC Control Panel
is separate relay.
with no A/S applied; in new box.
power then goes thru
NO PIN 12 equates
the dropping resistor
-- Airspeed Switch -- to PIN 2, PIN 8
to keep stall warning Normally Closed
vane warm. equates to PIN 1,
when no A/S PIN 4 equates to
+
28VDC
applied. PIN 3. R30--1
AIRFRAME ICE PROTECTION ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC (TYP.)

FIGURE 30--1
30--12--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
OVERSHOE, RUBBER
ENGINE BAFFLE, BULKHD. FTG.

SPRAYBAR, WINDSHIELD HOSE, FIREPROOF
FIREWALL, BULKHD. FTG.
PANELS, POROUS, L/W STALL STRIPS STALL STRIPS
PANELS, POROUS, R/W
STALL WARN SWITCH, HEATED PUMPS, WINDSHIELD PROPORTIONING UNIT, R/W

PROPORTIONING UNIT, L/W
PUMPS, METERING
RESTRICTOR/TEE CHECK VALVE
VENT/TEE
SWITCH, HIGH PRESSURE
TANK, O/B TANK, I/B &
SENDER (TANKS & PUMPS LOCATED SOLENOID VALVES
UNDER REAR SEAT PANELS)
FILTER,SEAL, CLAMP FILLER ASSY.,CLAMP
STRAINER,CLAMP
PROPORTIONING UNIT, EMPENNAGE

SWITCH, LOW PRESSURE
CONVOLUTED TUBE (THESE UNITS LOCATED IN TAIL BRACKET ASSY.)
(CS3204B2 SEALANT REQD. AT CONNECTIONS OF THIS TYPE TUBE)
PANEL, POROUS, LH HORIZONTAL STAB. PANEL, POROUS, RH HORIZONTAL STAB.
PANEL, POROUS, VERTICAL STABILIZER
R30--2
AIRFRAME ICING PROTECTION FLUID SCHEMATIC

FIGURE 30--2
30--12--01 -- TROUBLESHOOTING – AIRFRAME ICING PROTECTION

Airframe/Propeller system does not Tank contents inadequate Replenish fluid contents
operate.
High Pressure Warning LED illumi- Renew Filter Element
nated
Pump(s) inoperative Check electrical power to pump(s)
Check pump or control panel
Low Pressure Warning ON Check tank contents -- Replenish
fluid
Supply lines blocked or leaking Check lines for leaks or blockage
Check Tank outlet strainer for block-
age
No flow from outlets of airframe wing Supply lines to Proportioning Units Check supply lines to Proportioning
panels/empennage panels. restricted Units for blockages or kinks
No flow from propeller outlets. Supply lines to Proportioning Units Check supply lines to Proportioning
restricted Unit for blockages or Kinks
Supply line blockage or nozzle mis- Check for blockage or misalignment
alignment of nozzle or slinger
Check Proportioning Unit for block-

age
30--12--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
Windshield system does not operate. Pump(s) inoperative Replenish Fluid in tanks
Inadequate Fluid content Check Pump(s) and Pump(s) wiring
Solenoid Valve(s) Inoperative Check power to Solenoid Valve(s)
Check Solenoid Valve(s)
High pressure warning – LED illumi- OAT -- COLD --
nates during operation.
Temperatures below --30o C. -- No immediate action necessary,
monitor operation at warmer temper-
atures with Anti--Ice selected
Temperatures above --30o C. -- Renew Filter Element and bleed filter
Check system for blockage
High pressure warning – LED illumi- -- Connect Pin 10 of connector C1 to
nates when aircraft Buss powered ground (C1, Pin 1).
up. Check wiring from C1 Pin 10 to High
Pressure Warn Switch for continuity
Check High Pressure Warn Switch.

With no pressure applied, continuity
should exist through connections in
use.
LOW PRESSURE WARNING – (LEDs FLASH RED)
When system selected ON. -- Check System for proper operation.

Connect Pin 2 of connector C1 to
ground (C1, Pin 1).
Check wiring from C1 Pin 2 to Low
Pressure Warn Switch (es) for conti-
nuity.
Check Low Pressure Warn
Switch(es).
With System operating, circuit
should exist through connections in
use.
When aircraft Buss powered ON. -- Check Control Panel for fault. Repair
or replace Control Panel.
CONTROL PANEL/CONTENTS INDICATING SYSTEM FAULT
Tank Contents Display Illuminated. -- Depress High Pressure Reset.

Amber LED illuminates:
Check Auto--dimmer Setting.
Check voltage at Control
Panel Output C2 (w/ plug dis-
connected):
Pin 1 = +5 volts
Pin 3 = -- 5 volts.
Reconnect C2 and check volt-
ages on this connector:
Pin 1 = + 5 volts
Pin 2 = Signal should vary
from 0 volts (tank empty) to + 1.8
volts (approx.) (tank full).
Pin 3 = -- 5 volts.
Repair/Replace Control Panel
Check wiring & tank contents Trans-

mitter. Correct wiring or reset poten-
tiometer.
30--12--01
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CONTROL PANEL FAULT
LED malfunction = AMBER (High -- Does not operate:

Pressure Warn). Check Power to Control Panel.
Depress High Pressure Reset:
Illuminates =Check Auto Dimmer
setting.
Does not illuminate =Repair or re-
place Control Panel.
Will not cancel
Replace High Pressure Switch.
LED malfunction = GREEN (System -- Does not operate:
Status Ind.). Check Auto--dimmer setting.
Repair or Replace Control Panel.
Operates Continuously:
Repair or Replace Control Panel.
LED Malfunction = FLASHING RED. -- Does not operate:
Check Auto--dimmer setting.
If OK, disconnect cable from
Pin 2 of Connector C1. LED’s should
flash when De--Ice or Anti--Ice se-
lected: If no flash: Check wiring &
Low Pressure Warn Switch (es)
If NOT OK: Repair or Replace
Control Panel.
Operates Continuously:
Check system for
restriction/blockage.
Replace Low Pressure
Warning Switch (es).
30--12--02 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

Level I
Daily and/or Preflight -- if icing is forecast or expected.
This level of checking is intended to determine the immediate serviceability of the equipment without recourse to the
use of tools or special procedures.
Maintenance Practice Notes

Check security and condition of visible components. --
Switch on electrical power. Check that contents display The time taken for the display to stabilize will depend on
illuminates and stabilizes at a sensible value within 1.5 the quantity of fluid present in the tank as the display
minutes. Replenish tank contents if necessary for in- reading will rise from 0 at about 0.1 gallon per second.
tended flight.
Operate Airframe/Propeller system at ”De--Ice.” Check --
that both indicator LED’s flash RED then change to a
single GREEN (opposite De--Ice) as pressure rises.
Check that High Pressure Warning LED does not illumi-
nate.
Press High Pressure Reset. Check that AMBER LED --
illuminates while switch is depressed.
Switch Airframe/Propeller system directly to ”Anti--Ice”, It may not be possible to observe fluid flow if moderate
check that pump speed reduces (audible check) and or heavy rain is falling.
that GREEN LED, which is illuminated, changes to
match switch selection. Check that de--icing fluid flow is
evident from visible panels if weather conditions permit.
Switch Airframe/Propeller system OFF.
30--12--02
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
Press windshield De--Ice Switch. Check that de--icing --

fluid is discharged from spraybars.
Check that wing ice inspection lamp functions. If night flight.
Switch off electrical power if no longer required. --
Check that fluid flows evenly from active zone of all po- --
rous panels.
Check that fluid is discharged into the propeller slinger --
ring from the nozzle fitted at the front of the engine
crankcase.
Check aircraft surfaces for ice or snow. NOTE
Remove all ice or snow from all flying surfaces. The TKS ice protection system is not intended to
remove frozen deposits while aircraft is on the
ground. It is essential that all critical areas are
de--iced before any attempt to T/O is made.
Level II
50 Hour Inspections
This level inspection extends the functions recommended for Level I inspections and includes more comprehen-
sive tests of a qualitative nature.

Remove engine cowling. --
Check security and condition of visible components
paying particular attention to those components at-
tached to the engine and spinner.
Switch electrical power ON. If in doubt regarding accuracy of indication make cal-
Check contents display illuminated and stabilizes at a ibration check.
sensible value within 1.5 minutes. Indicator is electronically damped and should rise from
Replenish tank contents, if necessary. 0.0, at switch ON, at an average rate of about one dis-
play count per second.
Operate Airframe/Propeller system at “De--Ice.” Check --
that both indicator LED’s flash RED then change to a
single GREEN (opposite De--Ice) as pressure rises.
Check that High Pressure Warning LED does not illumi-
nate.
Check operation of High Pressure Warning LED by de- Note
pressing High Pressure Reset. The AMBER LED should Fluid should be exuded evenly over active zone
illuminate while switch is depressed and cancel at of porous panels. At high temperatures a “water-
switch release. line” may be observed at the top of some panels
due to insufficient pressure being developed to
expel entrained air. This is acceptable unless
performance of panel in icing conditions indi-
cates that this is other than a temporary nature.
Switch Airframe/Propeller system directly to “Anti--Ice,” --
check pump speed reduces (audible) and that GREEN
LED which is illuminated changes to match switch selec-
tion.
Check that de--icing fluid flows from all porous panels
and that a jet is directed into the slinger ring from the
nozzle at the front of the engine.
Switch Airframe/Propeller system OFF. --
30--12--02
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
Press Windshield De--Ice switch. Check that de--icing --

fluid is discharged from spraybars. Check that no holes
are blocked.
Switch electrical power OFF. --
Level III
Annual Inspections.
At Level III, it is recommended that all Level II Inspections are complied with and that the following inspections are
added/included.

Remove tailcone panels and empennage panels. --
Check security and condition of component’s supply
lines and wiring. Pay particular attention to components
close to control rods, etc.
Drain tanks. Remove and clean strainer in tank outlets. --
Refill tanks. Check accuracy of tank contents indicator The contents indicator does not display actual contents
during refilling process. over the entire range. Refer to calibration chart (Figure
30--3).
Level IV
Component Checks.
The following checks are detailed for use in conjunction with SECTION 30--12--01, TROUBLESHOOTING. In cases
where components can be checked on the aircraft as an alternative to bench testing, both methods are described.
Maintenance Practice Procedures

Check fluid delivery rate from Airframe/Propeller Pump. 1. Fill tanks to top of filler tube. Operate pump(s) at De--
Ice or Anti--Ice, as required, for a time period. Refill
tanks; measure quantity necessary to replenish to origi-
nal level. Calculate flow rate. Permitted limits are:
De--Ice -- 280 to 300 ml/min.
Anti--Ice -- 140 to 150 ml/min. OR
2. Remove Airframe/Propeller Pump. Bench test.
Check High Pressure Warn Switch. 1. Disconnect Nylon Tube from inlet to Filter. Connect
pressure gauge (0 -- 180 lbf/in2) (0 to 13 bar) to tube.
Use TKS Nylon Tube fittings. Operate Airframe/Propel-
ler pump in a series of short bursts (in order to limit rate
of pressure rise) and observe pressure at which High
Pressure Warn LED illuminates. Permitted limits are:
75 to 90 lbf/in2 (5 -- 6 bar) OR
2. Remove High Pressure Switch. Bench test.
30--12--02
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
Check Low Pressure Warn Switch. 1. Remove empennage fairing for access. Disconnect
Note Nylon tube from outlet of suspect pressure switch. Con-
Two Low Pressure Switches are located on tail nect a pressure gauge (0 -- 5 lbf/in2) (0 to 3 bar) to the
bracket in empennage assembly. It may be neces- pressure switch outlet (use TKS nylon tube fittings as
sary to test both to determine which one is mal- needed). Disconnect plugs at end of pressure switch
functioning. pigtails from wiring harness and connect a suitable re-
sistance and continuity measuring device across Pins 1
& 2 of each switch plug. With no pressure present, there
should be no circuit through either switch and the resist-
ance should be greater than 10 megohms. Operate Air-
frame/Propeller pump in a series of short bursts to limit
the rate of pressure rise at each switch and observe the
pressure at which each operates. This pressure should
not be greater than 1.5 lbf/in2 (0,1 bar). With the switch
at a pressure above the operating pressure, there is to
be a circuit between Pins 1 & 2 with a resistance not
greater than 10 ohms. Switch pump OFF and observe
pressure when switch resets. This is to be not less than
0.5 lbf/in2 (0,03 bar). OR
2. Remove Low Pressure Switch (es) and bench test.
Check Proportioning Unit(s) (Wing, LH & RH & Empen- 1. Remove panels necessary to obtain access to sus-
nage) pect Proportioning Unit. Disconnect Nylon tube from
outlet of suspect Proportioning Unit. Operate Airframe/
Propeller pump(s) and observe fluid flow from outlet. If
flow rate is questionable, measure quantity over a
timed period.
Panel flow rates are shown in the following chart:
TKS FLOW RATE CHART
WING PANELS NORMAL (+/--20%) MAXIMUM (+/--20%)

(ml/min) (ml/min)
LH & RH Outboard 18.45 36.9
LH Middle, O/B 9.3 18.6
LH Middle, I/B 5.7 11.4
L/H & RH I/B 10.4 20.8
R/H Middle 15.0 30.0
EMPENNAGE PANELS NORMAL (+/--20%) MAXIMUM (+/--20%)
(ml/min) (ml/min)
LH & RH Horizontal Stabilizer 11.24 22.48
Vertical Stabilizer 7.0 14.0
PROPELLER NORMAL (+/--20%) MAXIMUM (+/--20%)
(ml/min) (ml/min)
Propeller 17.0 34.0
30--12--02
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
Level IV Maintenance Practice (con’t.) Procedures

Check Porous Panels 1. Remove Access panels for access to applicable Pro-
portioning Unit. Disconnect Nylon tube connecting sus-
pect panel from outlet of Proportioning Unit. Connect
suitable pressureable supply of filtered fluid to this tube.
Purge tube and panel at a pressure not exceeding 40
lbf/in2 (2,6 bar). If a blockage exists, it will probably be-
come apparent at this stage. Reduce pressure to 4 lbf/
in2 (0,26 bar) and examine porous region of panel for
even fluid coverage.
OR
2. Bench test. This is last resort due to having to remove
panel from Airframe.
Check fluid delivery from Windshield Pump. 1. Remove panels to gain access to pump(s). Discon-
nect Nylon tube connecting Pump to Solenoid Valve.
Operate pump by pressing ”WINDSHIELD” switch on
control panel. Collect fluid over a timed period of 5 sec-
onds. The fluid quantity dispensed should not be less
than 25 ml.
OR
2. Remove Windshield Pump and bench test.
Check Solenoid Valve. 1. Check Windshield Pump as detailed above. Recon-
NOTE nect Windshield Pump to Solenoid Valve. Operate
Solenoid Valves have a history of reliability. It is pump by pressing ”WINDSHIELD” switch on control
recommended that all other components be panel. Fluid should be discharged onto the windshield,
checked out prior to further troubleshooting of if not, disconnect Nylon tube from outlet of Solenoid
Solenoid Valves. Valve and repeat test. Fluid should be discharged from
outlet of Solenoid Valve. If not, check electrical power at
connections to Solenoid valve (ref. Figure 30--1) when
pump is operating. If Solenoid Valve is suspected of not
closing, disconnect electrical power to the valve and
operate Windshield Pump. No fluid should be dis-
charged from the spraybar (or Solenoid Valve outlet).
OR
2. Remove Solenoid Valve and bench test.
30--12--02
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
Check Control Panel. 1. Remove screws and pull Control Panel out as far
NOTE as wiring will allow. Use voltmeter probe to measure
Voltages specified in Procedures are based on a voltage at the various pins in connectors C1 & C2 on
voltmeter with a resistance of at least 10,000 rear panel (Figure 30--1 Schematic)
ohms per volt. Readings marked with * will differ (1) Aircraft Power ON -- all switches OFF
if a lower resistance voltmeter is used. All pins zero volts except:
C1 --3 to be aircraft voltage.
C1 --2 to be 7.5 volts *.
C2 --1 to be +5 volts.
C2 --2 to be between zero and +2 volts*
(depending on tank contents)
C2 --3 to be -- 5 volts.
(2) As (1) but with MAXIMUM selected.

All pins zero volts except:
C1 --3, & --5 to be aircraft voltage.
C1 --2 to be 7.5 volts* initially, changing to zero as
pressure rises.
All pins on connector C2 as (1).
(3) As (1) but with NORMAL selected.
C1 --3, & --4 to be aircraft voltage.
C1 --2 to be 7.5 volts* initially, changing to zero as
pressure rises.
(4) As (1) but with WINDSHIELD 1 selected.

C1 --3, --6, & --8 to be aircraft voltage.
C1 --2 to be 7.5 volts*.
(5) As (1) but with WINDSHIELD 2 selected.

C1 --3, --9, & --11 to be aircraft voltage.
C1 --2 to be 7.5 volts*.
All pins on connector C2 as (1). OR
2. Remove Control Panel and bench test.

(6) As in (1), but with PUMP 1 selected.
C1--3 and --7 to be aircraft voltage.
C1--2 to be 7.5 volts*.
(7) As in (1), but with PUMP 2 selected.
C1--3 to be aircraft voltage.
C1--2 to be 7.5 volts*.
30--12--02
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
Check Tank Contents Transmitter. Remove seat/wing panel(s) to obtain access.

1. Disconnect connector C3. Measure resistance
across contents transmitter leads at pins C3 as fol-
lows:
All pins to ground > 10 megohms
Pin 1 to Pin 3 = 10,000 ohms (nominal)
Pin 1 to Pin 7 should vary from 1/2 the resistance
between Pins 1 & 3 (5,000 ohms nominal) with tank
empty to approximately 3000 ohms with tank full. OR
2. Remove Contents Transmitter and bench test.
3. Locate TKS fluid filler tube accessible through ac-
cess panel on right side aft fuselage.
4. Fill fluid tank to just at overflow with approved de--
6
icing fluid. This level of fill tops off reservoirs to 6.2 gal-
lons of fluid.
Indicator Reading -- Gallons
6.2 GALLON MAXIMUM 5. Locate TKS adjusting POT on left center portion of
TKS control head (see Figure 30--4). Adjust POT with
screwdriver until “6.2” is indicated on Fluid Level Indi-
4
cator.
6. Remove any spilled de--icing fluid per instructions
in Section 30--11--01.
7. Turn aircraft power OFF.
2 8. Place aircraft on ground.
30--30--00 -- PITOT -- DESCRIPTION AND OPERA-
TION
A standard heated pitot tube is located on left wing at
Wing Station No. 145. The pitot heat switch/circuit
0 2 4 6 breaker, located on lower left instrument panel, sup-
True Tank Contents -- Gallons plies power to the pitot tube heating element. An AM-
R30--3 BER light will illuminate on annunciator panel when Pi-
tot Heat switch has been pushed ON and current is
FLUID INDICATOR CALIBRATION being drawn by heating element. On some export air-
FIGURE 30--3 craft, an AMBER light will illuminate with pitot heat
switch OFF and will not be illuminated with switch ON
and pitot heat properly operating. When the optional
TKS ICE PROTECTION TKS System for flight into known icing conditions is
HIGH MAIN PUMPS installed, the heated Pitot tube is a part of the TKS sys-
PRESSURE
1 ANTI--ICE FLUID MAXIMUM tem.
2
OFF
30--31--00 -- STALL WARNING VANE -- HEATED
RESET
1 2 The stall warning vane is heated when the optional TKS
U.S. GALLONS NORMAL
WINDSHIELD
flight into known icing system is installed on the M20M.
See Figure 30--1. The Stall Warning Vane heat is acti-
vated when the Pitot Heat switch is selected ON.
CALIBRATION POT 30--60--00 -- PROPELLER DESCRIPTION & OP-
FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR ERATION
R30--4 Propeller icing protection is accomplished by either of
two methods. If the optional TKS System is installed for
TKS CONTROL HEAD flight into known icing, the glycol fluid based system is
FIGURE 30--4 installed. Another optional configuration is electrically
30--12--03 -- FLUID LEVEL CALIBRATION heated de--ice boots bonded to each propeller blade.
This system uses airplane’s electrical power to heat
To adjust fluid level reading at A/C instrument panel
de--ice boots, in cycles controlled by a timer (supplied
TKS Control Head:
with the Electric Propeller De--Ice System).
1. Level aircraft to flight level attitude. The ON/OFF switch is located on the instrument panel.
2. Switch electrical power ON. The AMBER light,” PROP DE ICE”, on annunciator
30--12--03
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
panel will illuminate at each cycle (every 90 seconds) timer is located on the equipment rack in tailcone.
the boots are drawing current. The ammeter (supplied De--icer boot replacement should be done per de--ice
with the Electric Propeller De--Ice System) may show a kit manufacturer’s service information.
slight flicker each 90 second interval as timer turns de--
ice boots ON/OFF/ON. This is normal operation. The
30--60--01 -- PROPELLER DE--ICE (OPTIONAL)

POWER REQUIREMENTS FOR 28 VOLT SYSTEM
TERMINAL C ON / OFF 90 SECONDS 8 AMPS
TOTAL CYCLE TIME = 3 MINUTES
RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE CHART

LOCATION AWG SIZE MAX LENGTH
BUS BAR TO TIMER #14 15’
TIMER TO GROUND #18 5’
TIMER TO BRUSH MODULE #14 15’
BRUSH MODULE TO GROUND SHUNT #20 5’
LEADS
30--61--00 -- SERVICE GUIDE vided later in this Section and it is assumed that the
user understands normal operating modes of system.
INTRODUCTION
(See Section IX of P.O.H.). Read all “Trouble” entries to
Whether in flight or during ground testing, the ammeter locate matching conditions of system being checked.
(supplied with the Electric Propeller De--Ice System) The “Probable Cause” and “Remedy” entries pertinent
can be used to determine the general nature of most to each trouble are arranged in recommended check
electrical problems. A Troubleshooting Chart is pro- out sequence.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
ELECTRIC PROP DE--ICING SYSTEM
SLIP RINGS (SEE APPLICABLE AIRCRAFT WIRING
DIAGRAM FOR COMPLETE WIRING DETAILS)
DE--ICER
BRUSH BLOCK
TERMINAL
20A
A
#12 28 VDC
B
BUSS BAR
C
#12
D
E
#12
G INSTALL DE--ICE BOOT PER McCAULEY SPECIFICATION NO. MC2611
F
HOSE CLAMP HOUSINGS ARE TO BE PLACED 180 APART TO MAINTAIN
BALANCE AND SHOULD NOT BE IN LINE WITH THE JUMPER WIRES OR
ADAPTER MOUNTING SCREWS. LOCK WIRE HOSE CLAMP SCREWS. R30--5
PROPELLER DE--ICE SCHEMATIC

FIGURE 30--5
30--60--01
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
30--61--01 -- HELPFUL TIPS 4. A considerable number of timers have been re-

1. The Voltmeter reading will be slightly lower when turned for repair which proved, on test, to be fully oper-
system is operated on battery voltage than when enable. Before concluding that the timer is faulty, test it per
gine is running. “De--Icer Timer Check” (30--63--00).
2. Use “continuity test” (30--65--00) and “resistance 5. For insulation resistance tests, use a “megger”
test” (30--66--00 & 30--67--00) to determine which De-- (”Meg” type insulation tester, James G. Biddle Compa-
Icers are not operating. Use wiring schematic to trace ny, Plymouth Meeting, PA.) or other tester having a 500
circuits. VDC, 1000 megohm capacity.
3. Excess current reading on the ammeter may indi- 6. Defective wiring in propeller mounted components
cate a power lead shorted to ground. Thus, when may be indicated by normal current readings in ground
trouble of this nature is found, it is vital that the checkouts (propellers not rotating) but low current with
grounded power lead be located and corrected. propellers rotating at cruise RPM.
30--61--01
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
30--61--02 -- TROUBLESHOOTING CHART -- ELECTRIC PROPELLER DE--ICE
Buss load meter/ammeter shows No power from aircraft. If no voltage into circuit breaker,
“0”
0 current all phases of the timer locate and correct open.
cycle.
Tripped circuit breaker. Locate and correct short before re-
setting circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker or switch faulty. If no voltage at circuit breaker out-
put with voltage at input and circuit
breaker does not reset, replace cir-
cuit breaker. If voltage is OK at
output, check switch in same man-
ner.
Open Buss load meter/ammeter to Disconnect harness at timer and
timer. check for voltage at harness Ter-
minal B to ground. If none, locate
and correct open.
Open timer to brush assembly. Disconnect wire harness at brush
assembly and check voltage to
ground from leads. (See de--icing
system wiring schematic, Fig. 30--5,
for power and ground lead and pin
identification.) If low or no voltage,
locate and correct open or high re-
sistance in wire harness.
Check continuity from Terminal G,
or lead to ground; if high resist-
ance is indicated, check ground
wire for breakage and ground con-
nections for correctness and tight-
ness. Correct as required.
Open in De--Icer, De--Icer wire har- Disconnect De--Icer leads and
ness or slip ring assembly leads. check resistance per manufactur-
er’s service data. If not OK, re-
place faulty De--Icer boot. If OK,
check for (and repair) open in de--
ice boot wiring harness leads.
Ohmmeter needle must not flicker
when leads are stretched or
flexed. Replace as required.
Open on both ground brushes. Remove brush block assembly
and check both ground brushes for
continuity between the brush and
pigtail lead. If an open is found, re-
pair brush block assembly. If OK,
reinstall and check for proper face
alignment and brush projection per
manufacturer’s Service Data.
30--61--02
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
Buss load meter/ammeter shows Open in wiring between timer and See “Open Timer to Brush Assem-
normal current part of cycle, zero brush block assembly. bly” above.
current rest of cycle.
Open in De--Icer or de--ice boot See “Open in De--Icer” above.
wire harness.
Timer faulty. Test timer per Section 30--63--00.
Faulty brush block assembly. Check for broken brushes and test
for opens.
Buss load meter/ammeter shows Open circuit or high resistance in See “Open in De--Icer” above.
normal current part of cycle, low De--Icer or slip ring assembly leads.
current rest of cycle.
High resistance in circuit with low Check contact of brushes to slip
current. rings per Section 30--66--00; cor-
rect as indicated; check wiring
from timer to De--Icers for loose or
corroded connections or partially
broken wiring. Correct as required.
Ammeter shows low current over Aircraft voltage low under normal Check voltage into switch.
entire cycle. operating conditions.
Switch or circuit breaker faulty. Check voltage up to and out of
switch and circuit breaker. If low
output is found through any of
these items, replace defective
component.
High resistance up to timer. Check for partially broken wire, or
loose or corroded connection in
wiring between aircraft supply and
timer input. Correct as required.
High contact resistance in timer. Test timer per manufacturer’s ser-
vice data.
One De--Icer element (or wiring Perform a heat test on each De--
connections to De--Icer) in each Icer per McCauley manual No.
cycle out. 830415, Sect. 4.2.1. Replace de-
fective components.
Ammeter shows excess current Power lead shorted to ground. Check power leads from Buss load
over entire cycle. meter/ammeter to timer, then to
De--Icers for evidence of damage
or arcing. (See Section 30--65--00).
If ground is indicated, locate and
correct.
Ammeter indicates normal current Short to ground or short between Disconnect leads at brush block &
part of cycle, excess current re- timer and brush block. timer, check for short or ground.
mainder of cycle. Repair as required.
Short between slip rings. Clean slip ring assembly with
MEK.
30--61--02
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006
Ammeter does not “flicker” each Timer ground open; timer not cycl- Disconnect harness at timer and
90 seconds. ing. check ground connection with
ohmmeter from Terminal G.
Timer contacts welded together Test timer per Section 30--63--00. If
(caused by short in electrical sys- timer is faulty, repair or replace it,
tem). but insure that short causing origi-
nal failure has been located and
corrected.
Ammeter flickers between 90 sec- Loose connection between aircraft Trace wiring from power source to
ond phase periods. power supply and timer input. timer input. Insure that good electri-
cal contacts are made at each con-
nection in the circuit.
Loose or poor connection; timer to If trouble occurs only part of cycle,
De--Icers. determine which De--Icer is af-
fected, check for rough or dirty slip
rings causing brush to skip. Check
circuits for loose or poor connec-
tions.
Timer cycles erratically. Test timer per Section 30--63--00.
Radio noise or interference with Brushes arcing. Check brush alignment. Check for
De--Icers on. dirty or rough slip rings. If found,
clean, machine or replace slip ring
assembly. Check slip ring align-
ment.
Loose connection. See “Buss load meter/ammeter
flicks between 90 second periods”
above.
Switch or circuit breaker faulty. Place jumper wire across switch or
circuit breaker; if radio noise disap-
pears, replace switch or circuit
breaker.
Wiring too close to radio equip- Relocate De--Icer wiring at least 8”
ment or associated wiring. from radio equipment and wiring.
Cycling sequence not correct. Crossed connections between tim- Check system wiring against cir-
er and De--Icers. cuit diagram.
Rapid brush wear or frequent Brush block out of alignment. Check brush alignment. Correct as
breakage. required. See section 3.3.3 of
McCauley Manual No. 830415.
Slip ring wobbles. Check slip ring alignment with dial
indicator per Section 30--69--00.
Rough slip rings. Re--machine/re--finish.
Dirty slip ring surfaces. Clean slip rings with MEK.
Brushes arcing. Check brush alignment.
30--63--00 -- DE--ICER TIMER CHECK
Experience in the field has indicated that often the timer is considered defective when the source of the trouble lies
elsewhere. For this reason, the tests should be performed before the timer is removed as defective.
Refer to manufacturer’s service data, McCauley Manual No. 830415, Section 4, for test criteria.
TIMING SEQUENCE TIME ON AREAS OF PROP DE--ICERS HEATED

Terminal C 90 sec. All Blades -- ON then OFF
30--62--00
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
30--64--00 -- 100 HOUR INSPECTIONS tate it slowly, noting any deviation of slip ring from a
Refer to McCauley Manual No. 830415, Section 4 – “TRUE” plate as indicated on dial indicator. Check that
Required Inspections. total run--out does not exceed 0.008 inch total indicator
reading (TIR).
CAUTION
Stand clear of propeller, verify magnetos are OFF. CAUTION
Use extreme caution during this procedure. Due to loose fit of some propeller thrust bear-
ings, a considerable error may be induced in
30--65--00 -- CONTINUITY TEST
readings by pushing in or pulling out on propel-
After removing plug from timer, use ohmmeter to check ler while rotating it. Care must be taken to exert a
continuity from: uniform push or pull on propeller to hold this
1. Terminal C to outboard terminal of one prop error to a minimum.
boot.
2. Terminal G to airframe ground. If slip ring run--out is within limits specified, no correc-
tive action is required. If it is not within limits, check for
3. Ground terminal of one prop boot to ground. dirt on ring gear mounting surfaces; clean, and recheck
alignment. If run--out is still out of tolerance, refer to
30--66--00 -- BRUSH TO SLIP RING RESISTANCE
manufacturer’s service data for machining procedures
TEST
or return the slip ring assembly to manufacturer.
To check for incorrect resistance or presence of a short
or open circuit at brush--to--slip ring contact, disconnect CAUTION
harness at timer and check resistance from each De-- Do not, under any circumstances, attempt to cor-
Icer circuit lead, Terminal C, to ground with a low range rect run--out of slip rings by shimming assembly
ohmmeter. If resultant readings are not 1.55 to 1.78 or changing torque of mounting screws or bolts.
ohms, disconnect De--Icer lead straps to measure
heater resistance individually. Individual boot resist- 30--70--00 -- SERVICING/CLEANING
ance should measure between 4.58 and 5.26 ohms. If
readings in first check are not within accepted limits but Thoroughly cleaning the slip ring area with MEK or
those in second check are, the trouble is probably in standard engine degreaser on a routine basis is recom-
brush--to--slip ring area. If readings in second check are mended. Keeping the brushes free of dirt, oil, grease
also off, the De--Icer concerned is damaged and must and carbon build--up will prevent those contaminants
be replaced. from being transferred to the slip ring.
30--67--00 -- BRUSH ASSEMBLY RESISTANCE

CHECK
To check for an open circuit, a short, or high resistance SLIP RING
in brush assembly, measure resistance from face of ASSY.
brush to its terminal studs with a low range ohmmeter. If
this resistance measures over 0.013 ohms, locate and 00 1020
repair cause of excessive resistance. If resistance is in- 90

80
60 5
30
40
finite, locate and correct the open circuit or ground, or

else replace brush assembly. Check resistance be-
tween the three terminal studs. This resistance should
+ DIAL
not be less than 5 megohms. INDICATOR
30--68--00 -- BRUSH BLOCK ASSEMBLY REPAIR

Refer to manufacturer’s Service Data, McCauley
Manual No. 830415, Section 6.5.1, for this procedure. +
30--68--01 -- BRUSH REPLACEMENT/ALIGNMENT

Refer to manufacturer’s Service Data, McCauley
Manual No. 830415, Section 6.5.2, for brush replace- ENGINE CASE
ment and brush to slip ring alignment. R30--6
30--69--00 -- ALIGNMENT OF SLIP RING

To check alignment of slip ring assembly, securely at-
tach a dial indicator to engine and place pointer on a slip SLIP RING ALIGNMENT
ring (see Figure 30--6). Grasp propeller blade and ro- FIGURE 30--6
30--64--00
Page 21
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
30--70--00
Page 22
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
32--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--10--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--30--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--40--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--40--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--50--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--60--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--82--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32--82--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
32-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 32
LANDING GEAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
32--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
32--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Landing Gear and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
32--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Gear Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
32--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Gear Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
32--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Gear Door Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
32--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inboard Door Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
32--10--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assist Bungee Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . 9
32--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
32--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
32--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
32--20--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear Door Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
32--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension and Retraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
32--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear System Operational Inspection . . . . . . . . 10
32--30--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Ldg Gear System Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
32--30--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Ldg Gear System Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
32--30--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Gear Extension System Rigging . 14
32--30--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Actuator, Clutch Spring R & R . 15
32--30--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ldg Gear Act., Recoiler/Cable Drum R & R . . 17
32--30--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Emergency Gear Extension System . 17
32--30--08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
32--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
32--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
32--40--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
32--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Wheel Disassembly/Assembly . . . . . . . . . 19
32--40--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Wheel Disassembly/Assembly . . . . . . . . 20
32--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
32--40--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic Brakes (Bleeding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
32--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trouble Shooting -- Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
32--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
32--50--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
32--50--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear Steering & Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
32--50--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Gear Towing Limits Indicator Rigging . . 27
32--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
32--60--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Gear Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
32--60--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
32--60--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airspeed Safety Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . 28
32--80--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
32--81--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Shock Disc Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . 28
32--82--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Hard Landing Inspection . . . . . . . . 29
32-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
32--00--00 -- GENERAL LANDING GEAR EMERGENCY EXTENSION SYS-

The landing gear is operated by an electrical, motor TEM.
driven, actuator. Travel during the extend and retract Emergency gear extension is available through a
cycle is controlled by down and up limit switches lo- manual override system. This system is built into the
cated beneath the floorboard under the pilots seat. actuator unit. The disengage controls are located aft
Power is supplied to actuator through a set of relays ac- and between front seats.
tuated by the gear selection switch. The gear selection
switch is located on instrument panel in front of the pilot. LANDING GEAR WARNING SYSTEM
The actuator worm gear ball nut is connected to retract
bellcrank which is connected to push--pull retract tubes The landing gear warning system provides pilot with an
and bellcranks throughout entire retraction system. An audible warning that landing gear is not down and
airspeed safety switch is located on the fuselage left locked when throttle is retarded and landing gear is still
side adjacent to the pilot’s left knee and is connected to up. The warning system is activated when throttle is re-
the airspeed indicator and incorporated into landing tarded approximately 1/4 inch from idle position. When
gear electrical circuit to prevent landing gear retraction landing gear is down and locked, the electrical circuit is
while on the ground until a safe takeoff speed is opened and the intermittent horn is stopped. This warn-
reached. A by--pass switch is installed adjacent to the ing switch is mounted on engine throttle housing and
gear selection switch in order to override safety switch can be adjusted for the proper setting by loosening
circuitry if gear does not retract. screw and repositioning switch.
The gear legs are constructed of welded, chrome--mo- BRAKE SYSTEM
lybdenum, tubular steel, heat treated for greater
strength and wear resistance. Main gear attaching The brake system is hydraulically operated by depress-
points have bushings installed in gear mounting box ating brake pedals mounted on pilot’s rudder pedals.
tached to wing spars. The steerable nose gear mounts (Dual brake system is optional for co--pilot). Individual
to the cabin tubular steel frame. wheel brakes are available by depressing either left or
NOTE right pedal. Parking brakes are actuated by depressing
Heat treated components should NOT be re- both brake pedals and pulling parking brake control
paired; replace them. cable knob. This cable actuates lever on parking brake
valve and traps hydraulic fluid from valve to wheel cylin-
The main gear wheels have hydraulic disc brakes with ders, therefore, holding pucks to brake discs. Release
a parking brake valve incorporated into system. parking brake by pushing parking brake knob IN. This
Rubber discs in all gear leg assemblies absorb the releases hydraulic pressure at wheel cylinders and re-
shock of landing and taxiing. leases brake discs.
X Y
1.56 (MAX.)
1.68
NOM.
P 4
W
250 -- 280
Z INCH LBS.
H F
O
S V R
RETRACTING C
TUBE E
RETRACTION
LINK
T
RIGGING
TOOL
030007--100 R
TORQUE
RETRACTION LEFT MAIN GEAR WRENCH
TRUSS G (VIEW LOOKING FWD) R32--1
MAIN LANDING GEAR RIGGING TOOL APPLICATION

FIGURE 32--1
32--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
32--10--00 -- MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 11. Identify all components removed, and DO NOT
32--10--01 -- MAIN GEAR REMOVAL inter--mix right and left gear components.
1. Raise aircraft on jacks. 12. DO NOT attempt to repair any heat treated com-
ponent of main landing gear assembly.
2. Partially retract gear as described in Section
32--60--01, paragraph 1. 32--10--02 -- MAIN GEAR INSTALLATION
3. Disconnect gear door links and brake lines. Cap all 1. Lubricate wheel bearings, retraction linkage and
lines and fittings. fore and aft trunnion bearings prior to installation at lu-
brication fittings (8) (Fig. 32--2). Refer to Section
4. Remove gear door and mud guard (if desired). 5--20--07 for recommended lubricants.
5. Detach main gear retracting tube (V), from retract-
2. Installation of main gear is exact reversal of main
ing truss (G), and remove bolts (H) from retracting truss
gear removal procedure.
mounting block (Fig. 32--1).
NOTE
6. Remove three screws from small skin panel cover-
Torque 510078--001, --003 or --005 bolts (at Spar/
ing aft portion of landing gear leg trunnion and bearing
Truss Attach Bracket) to 270 to 300 in. lbs.
bracket from bottom of wing. Slide panel from position
to gain access to bracket bolts. 3. Check fore and aft movement of gear in bearing
blocks. Maximum allowable movement is .020. Shim
7. Remove mounting bolts (2) (Fig. 32--2) from rear
excess by inserting maximum of two shims (6) between
gear leg trunnion shaft mounting block assembly (4) at
two rear blocks.
stub spar (5). Shims (6) may fall out.
4. Temporarily attach gear door link rods to gear leg
brackets.
3 7
INBD
8
FWD
8 1
8
4
5
8 4, 6
DETAIL A R32--2
GEAR REMOVAL R32--3

FIGURE 32--2
8. Slide aft bearing block (4) down (Fig. 32--2). MID--GEAR DOOR ADJUSTMENT POINTS
9. Slide front bearing block on main spar (3) down/aft FIGURE 32--3
and remove. 5. Retract gear while checking for binding in door link-
10. Slide gear assembly (1) aft until clear of front age and proper contact of gear door edges with wing.
bearing (7) on main spar (3). Carefully remove gear as- DO NOT make final gear door adjustments until gear
sembly from wing. has been rigged (Ref. 32--30--02).
32--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
32--10--03 -- MAIN GEAR DOOR RIGGING D. Forward leading edge and aft trailing edge of
1. Raise aircraft on jacks. See Section 7--10--00. mid gear door should be tight against wing skin.
Spacers (A) (Fig. 32--3) should be added or removed
NOTE as required to obtain a good fit with no binding or distor-
Gear system must be properly rigged prior to tion with gear in UP position. AN960--10 or AN960--416
gear door rigging, see Section 32--30--01. washers may be used as spacers.
2. Normally, once doors are installed at factory, no
further adjustment should be required. However, 3. Reconnect outboard and mid--gear doors and
should mid--gear doors be removed for any reason, the check that doors are faired with wing skin/wheel well
following rigging procedures should be used when rein- opening and that there is no binding or distortion where
stalling them: links attach to door. Adjust linkage/spacers if required.
A. Disconnect outboard doors at forward and aft (Fig. 32--3) Extend gear to adjust, then retract to check
linkages (B) (Fig.32--3). adjustment.
B. Disconnect inboard doors at forward linkage 4. Check main gear overcenter preload torque for
and springs (A) (Fig.32--3). proper values. Re--rig entire landing gear system, if
C. Raise gear electrically to full UP position. necessary (See Section 32--30--02 & 32--30--03).
R32--4
MAIN GEAR RETRACTION TUBE ADJUSTMENT POINTS

FIGURE 32--4
32--10--04 -- INBOARD DOOR RIGGING adjustment will change rigging values. Re--check pre-
1. Adjust inboard door link to close doors with “0” gap load values.
leading edge full up position. Doors must be closed with EXAMPLE: If inboard gear door is open a small amount
gear extended and retracted. If door is not closed in when landing gear is down, but closed when gear is UP.
both positions, refer to landing gear rigging procedures -- Adjust by turning retract tube (V) rod end IN 1/2 turn,
in Section 32--30--02. Any adjustment to rod end on and retract tube (L) (Fig. 32--4) rod end OUT 1 turn.
main retract tube (L) (Fig. 32--4) and rod end on retract EXAMPLE: If inboard gear door is closed with landing
tube (V) (Fig. 32--1) is at a 2 to 1 ratio, respectively; this gear in DOWN position, but open a small amount with
landing gear in UP position. -- Adjust by turning retract
32--10--03
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
tube (V) (Fig.32--1) rod end OUT 1/2 turn, and retract load on the Rod is indicated, or no Bellcrank to Stop
tube (L) (Fig.32--4) rod end IN 1 turn. contact is made, proceed with Steps B and C.
2. Tighten jamb nuts and reconnect springs on in-
board gear door bellcrank (A) (Fig.32--5).
NOTE
Do not rig doors shut more than necessary as 1.35”
this may result in higher actuator loads than nec-
essary.
3. Adjust outboard door link to close all gap at leading
edge of door. If door is rigged too tight, skin will be under
stress (concave) at the point where the linkage is at-
tached to door. It could also cause mid and inboard
doors to gap open.
Verify Door Stop Rigging prior to continuing with Step 4
of this procedure:
DOOR STOP RIGGING/CHECK
A. Extend or retract landing gear until points “A,”
“B,” and “C” are in alignment as shown in Figure 32--6.
Verify that Stop Bolt of Stop just contacts Arm on Bell-
crank “A.” R32--5
If contact puts “no load” on Rod “A,” then proceed to
Step 4. No load on the Rod may be verified by being MAIN INBOARD GEAR DOOR RIGGING
able to move the Rod by finger pressure or rotation. If FIGURE 32--5
MAIN SPAR REF.

BELLCRANK
ALIGNMENT POINT A
REFERENCE LINE
POINT B
ROD SPRING
STOP/STOP BOLT
POINT C
ROD ”A”
BELLCRANK
ROD BELLCRANK ”A”
R32--6
INBOARD GEAR DOOR
DOOR STOP RIGGING

FIGURE 32--6
CAUTION B. Extend Stop Bolt of Stop until contact with Arm
Stop Bolt must be screwed all the way into the on Bellcrank “A” is made. Continue extending Bolt until
housing portion of the Stop prior to beginning of there is no load on Rod “A”. No load on the Rod may be
Door or Stop rigging if rigging adjustments are verified by being able to move the Rod by finger pres-
required. sure or rotation.
32--10--04
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
C. Tighten Jam Nut on Stop. INSTALLATION

D. Repeat steps B and C for other side’s landing 1. Raise aircraft on jacks. See Section 7--10--00.
gear. 2. Compress replacement bungee (250 lbs.) to align
E. Continue to Step 4 of Inboard Gear Door Rig- installation rig--pin holes. Insert 3/16” pin.
ging. 3. Retract gear.
4. Cycle gear manually and electrically while inspect- 4. Pull gear down with emergency extension until
ing for clearances and proper operation. Re--check main retract bellcrank and rod end bungee line up.
landing gear system rigging values. Install proper length AN3 bolt through rod end bearing
5. Remove aircraft from jacks. and proper length AN4 bolt through block. Torque nuts
and safety.
6. Return aircraft to service.
CAUTION
NOTE
Bump gear up, CAREFULLY, just to take load off
To remove INBOARD GEAR DOORS, use a sharp-
3/16 in. installation pin at (B). Remove pin from
ened punch less than .093 dia. or a short piece of
(B) (Fig. 32--7).
hinge pin to open crimped hinge assembly pin
hole. 5. With bungee installed, re--check preload per steps
30 thru 34 of Section 32--30--02.
R32--8
R32--7
NOSE GEAR RETRACTION TUBE ADJUSTMENT

ASSIST BUNGEE POINTS
FIGURE 32--7 FIGURE 32--8
32--10--06 -- ASSIST BUNGEE REMOVAL/INSTAL- 32--20--00 -- NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
LATION 32--20--01 -- NOSE GEAR REMOVAL.
REMOVAL 1. Raise aircraft on jacks per Section 7--10--00.
1. Raise aircraft on jacks and remove three fiberglass 2. Partially retract gear as described by Section
belly access panels. 32--60--01.
2. Retract landing gear until rigging pin holes (B) (Fig. 3. Disconnect link (A) on nose gear truss assembly
32--7) line up on bungee assembly and insert 3/16 in. (Fig. 32--8).
pin. CAUTION
3. CAREFULLY BUMP gear UP, with the gear safety Eccentric bushings at (J) (Fig. 32--9) may have a
bypass switch, until there is zero load on bungee as- flush head screw installed on either side. This
sembly rod end. Remove AN3 bolt at rod end and AN4 flushhead screw and counter sunk eccentric
bolt at block; remove bungee assembly. MUST BE re--installed at same locations.
32--10--06
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
560245 (REF) Nose Gear Bungee
Deflection of spring from static length

to rigged position to be .030 to .070 in.
R32--10
NOSE GEAR BUNGEE SPRING

FIGURE 32--10
32--30--00 -- EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
32--30--01 -- GEAR SYSTEM OPERATIONAL IN-
SPECTION
CAUTION
R32--9 After any abnormal, over gross or hard landing,
the Gear System Operational Inspection should
NOSE GEAR RETRACTION TUBE & DOOR AD- be done.
JUSTMENT POINTS
1. Raise aircraft on jacks. (See Section 7--10--00).
FIGURE 32--9
2. With Master Switch ON and gear switch in UP
4. Disconnect nose gear steering horn link (B) (Fig. position apply pressure to Pitot tube (see Section
32--8). 32--60--01). Verify gear retraction occurs at 60 +/--5
5. Remove left and right gear mounting bolts (D) and KIAS. Allow gear to raise completely. Check for any tire
(E) (Fig. 32--6) from tubular structure and nose gear interference as tire enters wheel well.
truss assembly. 3. Close throttle and confirm gear horn sounds.
6. Carefully remove nose gear assembly. 4. Inspect gear doors for proper closing; lower gear.
7. DO NOT attempt to repair heat treated compo- 5. With zero airspeed place gear switch in UP posi-
nents of nose landing gear assembly. tion, Gear horn should sound regardless of throttle
32--20--02 -- NOSE GEAR INSTALLATION position. Both gear position lights and light within safety
bypass switch will illuminate.
1. Lubricate wheel bearings, retraction linkage and
left and right mount bearings. 6. Push RED gear safety bypass switch and hold IN
to partially retract gear.
2. Install gear in reverse order of removal procedure.
7. Pull “GEAR ACT” circuit breaker.
3. Torque NLG, steering, pivot bolt (NAS1307--72D)
8. Check nose gear overcenter preload as follows:
and nut (Fig. 32--22, 2 & 3) to 270--375 inch lbs.
A. Measure nose gear bungees. (No load)
32--20--03 -- NOSE GEAR DOOR RIGGING
(Fig. 32--10).
1. Raise aircraft on jacks. See Section 7--10--00. B. Extend gear manually (See Section 32--30--07)
NOTE stopping extension the moment the GREEN Gear
Gear system must be properly rigged prior to Down Light comes ON. Gear switch in DOWN position.
gear door rigging, see Section 32--30--01. C. Measure nose gear bungee springs
2. Adjust gear door link rods (H) and (J) (Fig. 32--8) to (Fig.32--10). Deflection from zero load condition in (A)
obtain proper door fit when closed. above must be .030 to .070 inches for each bungee.
3. To increase or decrease nose gear--up travel in D. If spring deflection is not within prescribed limits,
wheel well, adjust eccentrics on trunnion bearings (J) adjust tube rod ends (F) (Fig. 32--9) in increments of 1/2
(Fig. 32--9) as required. turns as required.
CAUTION 9. Check main gear overcenter preload.
Nose gear overcenter preload must be re-- A. Place rigging tool (T) P/N GSE 030007 (Fig.
checked after any adjustment to nose wheel ec- 32--1) on retraction truss. Hold tool stationary by plac-
centrics. ing thumb on rear end of tool (S) and press forward.
4. Readjust nose gear door linkage as required after B. Hold 10” torque wrench (R) and place thumb on
eccentrics have been moved (K) (Fig. 32--9). wing bottom; apply force until joint (4) breaks open
32--20--02
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
slightly, insert shim stock (.005 .008 in. thickness) be- F. If main gear preload needs re--adjusting, the
tween link and truss at (P). Release force on wrench. nose gear bungees should be re--checked per 8, (C)
C. With fingers on torque wrench and thumb on above (Fig. 32--10) after re--adjustment is completed.
wing bottom apply force on wrench while maintaining a NOTE
pulling force on shim stock. Read torque value on When gear overcenter preload check is com-
wrench at the exact moment the shim stock pulls pleted, electrically extend the gear and check the
loose. Torque value should be 250 to 280 inch pounds. nose gear tube bungee springs to assure they
D. Repeat on other side’s main gear. have not compressed completely resulting in no
E. If preload is not within prescribed limits; proceed remaining deflection. This would indicate exces-
to Main Landing Gear Rigging procedures, Section sive preload or weak bungees.
32--30--02.
C
E
A
F D
B
N B
FWD
FUS. STA. 33.0 C

A
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
R32--11
1.56 IN. (APPROX.)
LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR ADJUSTMENTS

FIGURE 32--11
32--30--02 -- MAIN LANDING GEAR SYSTEM RIG- 3. Loosen jam nuts (E) on main retraction tubes (L),
GING Fig.32--4; disconnect tubes at inboard bellcranks (M).
Changing eccentric bearing position can change 4. In nose gear well, loosen jam nuts (G) (Fig.32--9)
deflection on bungee spring. Shortening tube assem- on nose gear retraction tubes (F).
bly creates compression on bungee (refer to Fig. 5. At main retraction bellcrank (A) (Fig.32--11) dis-
32--10). connect nose gear retraction tubes and actuator barrel
1. Raise aircraft on jacks and remove three fiberglass nut at (N) (Fig. 32--11).
belly access panels. 6. Check dimension from rod end center to the end of
the barrel nut housing on actuator (Avionics Products
If Assist Bungee removal is required, see procedure in
only, Plessey is non--adjustable) to be 1.25
32--10--06.
+.000/--.010. Adjust rod end bearing, if necessary, and
2. Pull landing gear actuator circuit breaker out. secure with set screw and jam nut.
32--30--02
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
7. Disconnect nose gear doors, outboard main gear “clean break” can be felt when pushing UP on retraction
doors, and inboard door links. On outboard main gear link (Fig. 32--1).
doors, disconnect springs. On inboard door bellcranks,
disconnect springs. Loosen jamb nut (X) on retraction
tube (V) (Fig.32--1) and back off pressure on spring (W)
by loosening nut (Y). Disconnect retraction tube (V)
from bellcrank C (Fig. 32--5).
8. Position main retraction bellcrank (A) so center of
forward hole in left outboard arm of bellcrank is 1.56 ***
inches from forward face of truss at F.S. 33 (Fig.32--11,
Detail A).
NOTE
This dimension *** may vary to permit connection
of retraction tubes with zero preload at bolt hole.
9. With main retract bellcrank held in position, turn
actuator barrel nut until rod end bearing aligns with hole
in bellcrank; install connection bolt at (N) (Fig. 32--11).
10. Position bellcrank (C) (Fig. 32--5), so center of at-
tach pin (D) on top leg is 1.35 inches from bottom side of
spar cap (E). This will be the starting position when R32--12
landing gear is in down and locked over center, with out
any preload set. MECHANICAL DOWN STOP
11. Adjust retraction tube (V) (Fig. 32--1), at rod end, FIGURE 32--12
until it will connect to bellcrank (C) (Fig. 32--5) with zero LEGEND FOR FIGURE 32--12
preload. Install connection bolt/hardware; leave loose
at this time. A. 560252--009 Adjustable Stop (use
560252--011 Shims)
12. Adjust rod end on retraction tube (L) (Fig. 32--4)
so attach hole is aligned with inboard bellcrank at (M). Use one DOWN STOP on each side as required
Install connection bolt/hardware. (Pick up existing hardware)
13. Disconnect retraction tube (V) at bellcrank (C) B. .050 -- .100 clearance (between Down--Stop
rod end; position disconnected gear full down and and end of Ball Nut)
locked over center. Both LH and RH landing gear C. Actuator Ball Nut
should be in this configuration at this time. D. 560252--011 Shims * (use 560252--009, maxi-
14. PUSH landing gear actuator C/B – IN. mum of 4)
15. Turn MASTER Switch – ON. E. AN515--6R Screw **
AN936A6 Lock Washer
16. Extend main gear actuator to fully extended posi- (Typ. 2 plc.) (use 560252--009)
tion. Make certain lugs on main retract bellcrank do not
F. Loosen Set Screw (C) (Fig. 32--13)
contact fuselage tubes, floorboard or actuator barrel
nut. If there is any contact, run actuator back up slightly. NOTE
* Use 1 to 4 560252--011 Shims with
MECHANICAL DOWN STOP ADJUSTMENT
560252--009 Stop to achieve proper clearance
17. There should be .050 to .100 inch clearance (B) ** Use .063 longer screws with each additional
obtained between actuator barrel (C) (Fig. 32--12) and shim. (Secure screw with Blue Loctite #83--31
mechanical down stop (A). Shims (D) (Fig. 32--12) may Grade C)
be added to the mechanical downstop (A) (4 max).
18. Run actuator down and recheck retraction bell- 21. NOSE GEAR RETRACTION TUBES ARE TO
crank clearance at F.S. 33. Check clearance of bell- REMAIN DISCONNECTED at main retraction bell-
cranks (M) (Fig.32--4) and center section. crank (A) (Fig. 32--11) during remainder of procedures.
19. Reconnect retraction tubes (V) (Fig. 32--1). With 22. Place landing gear switch in UP position.
main gear fully extended, if necessary, adjust main
23. PUSH RED gear safety by--pass switch IN inter-
gear retraction tubes (L) (Fig.32--4) so they are con-
mittently to “BUMP UP” (retract) landing gear until left
nected with zero preload.
main tire just contacts bumper bracket which covers
20. Adjust nut (Y) of retraction tube (V) (Fig. 32--1) bulb stringer in wheel well. Make certain actuator barrel
until main gear is preloaded. Preload is correct when a does not contact main retract bellcrank in UP position.
32--30--02
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
24. Set UP limit switch paddle (striker arm) (H) (Fig. tool stationary by pushing at point (S) toward main gear
32--4) so GEAR UP limit switch is just CLOSED and leg.
RED “GEAR UNSAFE” light is OFF. Secure striker arm 30. Place 10 inch torque wrench (R) on rigging tool
in position. (T) as shown in Figure 32--1 and apply an unlocking
force to retraction truss.
31. When joint at (4) breaks open slightly, insert shim
FWD stock (.005 to .008 in. thickness) between retraction
C
link and truss at (P), then release force on torque
OUTBD
wrench.
32. While applying a pulling force on the shim stock,
A exert an increasing unlocking force with torque wrench.
33. Read torque wrench value at the EXACT mo-
ment shim stock pulls loose.
B 34. Repeat steps 30 through 34 on other side’s main
landing gear leg.
35. Use adjusting nuts (Y) on retract tubes (V) to
equalize breakaway torque values within 10.0 inch lbs.
Adjust torque to 250 to 280 inch lbs (Ref. Fig. 32--1).
36. Turn Master Switch – ON.
37. RUN GEAR DOWN ELECTRICALLY AND
CHECK THAT TORQUE VALUES DO NOT EXCEED
325 INCH POUNDS USING TORQUE WRENCH/
SHIM STOCK METHOD.
GEAR WARNING ADJUSTMENT
1. Check that landing gear warning light circuit break-
R32--13 er is pushed – IN.
MECHANICAL UP STOP 2. Check that landing gear actuator circuit breaker is
FIGURE 32--13 pulled – OUT.
MECHANICAL UP STOP ADJUSTMENT 3. Turn Master Switch – ON.
4. Set DOWN limit switch paddle (striker arm) (J)
25. Loosen set screw (C) (Fig. 32--13). Adjust me-
(Fig. 32--4) so that gear down limit switch is just
chanical up--stop (A) (Fig. 32--13) for a clearance of
CLOSED and GREEN “GEAR DOWN” light is ON. Se-
.050 to .070 inches at main retraction truss (B); tighten
cure striker arm in position.
set screw (C).
5. Turn Master Switch – OFF.
26. Reinstall assist bungee per Section 32--10--06.
NOTE
27. Using emergency gear extension, move gear The main gear preload torque should not exceed
down until GREEN gear down light JUST illuminates. 325 inch lb. using the torque wrench/shim stock
28. Turn Master Switch –OFF. procedure after electrical extension.
NOTE The main landing gear system is now rigged for the
The left main gear truss will probably lock over gear down and locked condition.
center first. Continue to slowly lower gear manu- 32--30--03 -- NOSE LANDING GEAR RIGGING
ally while monitoring compression of bungee PROCEDURE
spring on retraction tubes (V) (Fig. 32--1). 1. Check the eccentric bushings, two on LH and two
If spring coils are fully compressed, retract tube on RH retract clevis, (J) (Fig. 32--9) on nose gear truss
(V) must be removed from aircraft for modifica- assembly to be installed with bolt hole at the upper for-
tion: ward position or, to position nose wheel at top of wheel
Dismantle bungee portion of tube (V); remove well.
one space washer (Z) and reassemble. Re--install CAUTION
modified retraction tube and complete above The eccentric bushing, on either or both sides,
overcenter requirement. The removal or addition may be countersunk and have a flush head screw
of spacer washers may be required prior to ob- installed to allow clearance of nose gear truss
taining final configuration for the retraction tube during retraction/extension cycle. This configura-
(V). tion MUST be maintained during any removal/
29. Place rigging tool (T) (Fig. 32--1) P/N installation action for the truss or eccentric bush-
030007--100 on retraction truss assembly (G). Hold ing.
32--30--03
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
2. Adjust nose gear retraction tubes (F) (Fig. 32--8) 4. Lift RED lever and pull “T” handle (2) (Fig. 32--14)
so they can be reconnected to the main retraction bell- aside; re--engage RED lever. Check manual extension
crank with zero preload. system to verify that it is fully disengaged by pulling “T”
NOTE handle; no resistance should be felt. If a resistance is
The eccentric bushings may require rotating to a felt check cable routing through pulleys (3 & 4) (Fig.
new position in order to meet zero preload condi- 32--14)
tion. to verify whether it is cable routing or actuator resist-
3. Measure nose gear bungees dimension (P) (Fig. ance.
32--10) and record for future reference. 5. Move RED lever to full UP position; pull “T” handle
4. Push landing gear actuator C/B – IN. slowly to verify manual extension system is engaged.
Resistance should be felt at once.
5. Place landing gear switch in the UP position.
6. Replace “T” handle under RED lever and return
6. Turn Master Switch – ON RED lever to disengage position, (down and latched).
7. Push RED GEAR SAFETY BY--PASS SWITCH – Manual extension system is now rigged.
IN and hold IN to partially retract landing gear; release
switch.
COVER
8. Turn Master Switch – OFF.
9. Pull landing gear actuator C/B – OUT.
10. Screw each nose gear retraction tube (F) 1
5
(Fig.32--8) IN (clockwise looking toward the front of the FLOORBOARD
aircraft) one (1) full turn, then re--attach to main retrac-
tion bellcrank. 2
11. Place landing gear switch in DOWN position.
3
12. Push latch (5) (Fig. 32--14) FORWARD on manu-
al emergency extension controls (on floorboard).
13. Pull RED lever (1) (Fig. 32--14) back and upward
to engage manual emergency gear extension system. RETRACTION CABLE
4
14. Pull “T” handle (2) UP (slowly until engaged) and
return it to its original position. Continue this procedure, ACTUATOR
stopping when the gear down light JUST illuminates.
15. Measure nose gear bungee assemblies dimen-
sion “P” as shown in Figure 32--10. If the springs have
deflected less than .030 inches or more than .070 inch-
es from the static dimension (as recorded in Step 2), DISENGAGE CABLE R32--14
ROUTING
adjust the length of the bungee assembly’s to bring the
deflection within tolerance. EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM
32--30--04 -- EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION FIGURE 32--14
SYSTEM RIGGING NOTE
DISENGAGE RIGGING: Plessey or Vickers actuators should be lubri-
1. Insert cable through hole in actuator disengage cated every 2000 cycles with MIL--G-- 81322
arm, (B) (Fig. 32--11). grease. Run actuator to mechanical extended
position. Fill tube cavity with grease via
2. With RED lever (1) (Fig. 32--14) in full disengaged MS15001--1 grease fitting until old grease is
position (down and latched), push actuator disengage purged from screw assembly; remove old grease
arm (B) (Fig.32--11) to full forward position and apply from and relubricate exposed screw. Run actua-
approximately 5 lbs. pull to cable to remove slack. tor to approximately 0.5 in. or mechanical retract
3. Install D222 wire stop, (C) (Fig. 32--11, Detail B) and remove the major excess grease extruded
tighten nut and connect spring (E) to clevis pin, (D). from barrel nut assembly.
32--30--04
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
PLESSEY ACTUATOR
6
15
16
1
4 2
10
5B
5C 9
8 MOD. IDENT. PLATE
5
5A 7
12
13
AVIONICS PRODUCTS or
11
3 EATON ACTUATOR
14 (P/N 102000-- (X)
R32--15
LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR (EXPLODED VIEW)

FIGURE 32--15
32--30--05 -- LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR, 2. To avoid stripping screw heads, use impact screw-
CLUTCH SPRING REPLACEMENT driver to break Loctite thread seals and remove two
Landing gear actuator clutch spring replacement is long screws (3) & two short screws (4).
mandatory at each 1000 hours of aircraft operation for 3. With a razor or similar tool, slice through identifica-
either Eaton or Plessey actuators. tion plate and remove recoiler assembly (5).
ACTUATOR REMOVAL FROM AIRCRAFT 4. Remove input gear assembly, (6), from clutch
1. Jack aircraft in accordance with Section 7--10--00. housing, (8), by rotating gear and pulling with slight to
Belly panels should be OFF. moderate pressure.
2. Partially retract landing gear from the overcenter NOTE
position. Care should betaken not to allow bearings or
3. Loosen set screw on emergency “T” handle/cable shims to drop out of clutch housing mount as-
on cabin floor. Pull cable from handle. sembly.
4. Remove two nuts, (1) (Fig. 32--15); note position of 5. Remove two screws, (7), and remove housing, (8),
cable support bracket (2) and remove. spring, (9), and gear assembly, (10) from actuator body.
5. Remove manual extension system disengage 6. Remove clutch (no--back) spring, (9), from hous-
cable from actuator disengage arm (ref. Fig. 32--11). ing using gear assembly, (6), as removal tool. Insert,
6. Remove bolt from Heim bearing at retract bell- (6), into spring from flanged end of housing; rotate gear
crank. CCW and pull slightly. DO NOT rotate CW. Spring can
be damaged.
7. Disconnect electrical connection from actuator.
CAUTION
8. Remove bolt from lug at Hat Section.
Use extreme care to prevent ball bearing from
9. Remove actuator from aircraft. dropping out of recoiler assembly; avoid damage
DISASSEMBLY – EATON or VICKERS ACTUATOR to gear and do not allow dirt to enter clutch
housing bore.
1. Remove two nuts, (1) (Fig. 32--15) that retain the
cable support bracket (2) and remove bracket and dis- 7. After disassembly, clean clutch gear thoroughly.
engage cable intact from actuator body and disengage Discard removed screws (3 & 4). Discard old clutch
arm. (no--back) spring (9).
32--30--05
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
8. See 32--30--06 procedure prior to reassembly for NOTE

additional maintenance, if necessary. Clutch assembly can now be verified for proper
installation by rotating input gear (6) both CW &
RE--ASSEMBLY
CCW. Gears should turn with moderate friction to
1. Lubricate gear and new clutch spring thoroughly hand torque. Observe that actuator output screw
with lube (MIL--G--81322) poly--lube. jack rotates in BOTH directions.
2. Using gear assembly (6) as insertion tool, place In some instances, the new clutch (no--back)
new clutch spring on cam end of assembly and turning spring “CHATTERS” during electrical extension
CCW, install spring into clutch housing to about mid-- or retraction cycle. Proper shimming of the “no--
point. DO NOT FORCE SPRING. While rotating CCW, back” clutch housing assembly, items 6, 7, 8, 9, &
insert clutch spring into bore until fully seated. 10 and bearing 15 (Fig. 32--15) with shims 16 is
necessary to eliminate the chatter.
3. Withdraw gear assembly (6).
11. The rotational torque used by EATON for new ac-
NOTE tuators is no more than 4.0 inch pounds of consistent,
Be sure spring is all the way in and seated running, rotational torque in both the CCW and CW di-
around cam. rections. If this recommended rotational torque is not
4. Insert clutch gear assembly (10) into clutch spring obtained on the first assembly attempt, the clutch hous-
and housing from cylindrical end of housing, insuring ing mount assembly will require removal and shims
that spring tangs fit into recesses in cam. must be added or removed until the proper rotational
torque is obtained. A special “socket” can be made to
NOTE properly fit the flats on the input gear shaft to use the 1/4
When clutch spring is properly seated, large in- inch drive, 0 to 15 inch lbs., Torque Driver.
put gear (6) can be rotated in either direction and
small output gear (10) will follow rotation direc- 12. When correct rotational torque has been ob-
tion. tained, re--install clutch housing mount assembly (5A),
if removed, to recoiler assembly (5). Re--install this as-
5. Lubricate output gear teeth (10) with sembly to transmission portion of the actuator.
MIL--G--81322, and install clutch housing, gear and
NOTE
spring assembly in actuator body by mating gear (10) to
Flats on gear (6) shaft must line up with the brass
output gear train assembly. To engage gear teeth and
manual drive clutch (13) for proper assembly.
fully seat hub into bearing, rotation of gear assembly
Pull manual drive cable slightly to position brass
may be required.
clutch to align with flats on gear shaft (6).
6. Re--install screws (7) to secure clutch housing into 13. Install new bolts (3) ADS 145--10--43 (2 each)
actuator body. Use Loctite, Grade A, on threads. and (4) ADS 145--10--38 (2 each) and torque to 20--25
7. Re--insert input gear assembly (6) into clutch inch pounds. Bolts are EATON P/N’s. Use Loctite grade
housing and clutch spring assembly until fully seated. A (catalog number 88--31) on bolt threads.
Lubricate gear teeth (6) with MIL--G--81322 poly--lube. 14. Reinstall cable support bracket and lock nuts (1)
8. Disassemble Clutch Housing Mount Assembly on bolts (3 & 4). Torque lock nuts to 20--25 inch pounds.
(5A) from recoiler assembly (5). DO NOT ALLOW 15. Install modification plate adjacent to I.D. plate (@
BEARING OR SHIMS TO DROP OUT OF CLUTCH first 1000 hour replacement only). Mark first block on
HOUSING MOUNT ASSEMBLY. modification plate with the figure “1” using metal stamp
or etching tool. Mark plate at each succeeding clutch
9. Normally the existing shims (16) already installed
spring replacement with the next consecutive number.
behind bearing (15) will be correct for the new clutch
spring. However, due to manufacturing tolerances, it 16. Reinstall actuator into aircraft into aircraft per pro-
may be necessary to change shim thickness for proper cedures below:
spring adjustment. A. Install actuator into hat section lug.
10. Three different shim thicknesses are available B. Install Heim to retract bellcrank.
from EATON: C. Route emergency cable through support brack-
P/N: 110117--1 (.003 in. thk.) et, pulleys to “T” handle position on floorboard. Insert
cable into “T” handle and tighten set screw.
P/N: 110117--2 (.005 in. thk.) D. Reconnect electrical connection. Check for
P/N: 110117--3 (.010 in. thk.) proper electrical and mechanical operation.
Any combination of these shim thicknesses are al- 17. Verify rigging per Section 32--30--00.
lowed to obtain the correct rotational torque (inch CAUTION
pounds of torque) of input gear shaft after clutch hous- Should be observed during installation for prop-
ing mount assembly is installed (minus recoiler assy er placement of washers and bushings on the
portion) and torqued into place. retraction system.
32--30--05
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
18. Re--install aircraft belly panels. mum. In retracted position, cable length should be 5” to
8” long.
32--30--06 -- LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR, RE-
COILER SPRINGS/ CABLE AND DRUM ASSY RE- 10. Bronze clutch (13) should be inspected for dam-
PLACEMENT age or wear at slot where gear assembly engages dur-
ing manual extension of the landing gear.
Plessey (GEC) P/N: 880037--505/--507, see GEC SI for
11. If damaged or worn, remove pin (11) from disen-
procedures.
gage arm (12) and slide disengage arm out so bronze
Eaton/Vickers/Avionics products P/N: 102000--(X); (X) clutch (13) can be pulled from its driveshaft.
dash numbers are applicable for P/N: 102000--( ) ac- 12. Replace bronze clutch and reassemble disen-
tuators. gage arm into recoiler assembly.
1. Carefully separate pulley housing from recoiler as- 13. Attach clutch recoiler assembly to actuator gear
sembly (5) (Fig. 32--15) by removing screws (14). Re- housing with the four (4) screws (3 & 4, Fig. 32--15) re-
tain pulley on shaft. moved in 32--30--05.
2. Slide pulley drum and cable off shaft. 32--30--07 -- MANUAL EMERGENCY GEAR EX-
TENSION SYSTEM
3. Remove two (2) recoiler springs (5B), and two (2)
The manual emergency gear extension system is used
of three (3) spring spacers (5C) leaving third spacer in
to extend gear only. The controls are in the floorboard
housing. Be certain that spacer is in place before instal-
aft and between the front seats. To manually extend
lation of two (2) new recoiler springs and previously re-
gear:
moved spacers.
1. Landing gear actuator C/B – PULL.
4. Install new recoiler springs placing a spacer be-
tween each spring and over top spring. 2. Move landing gear control switch to DOWN posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT – Recheck proper installation of springs. 3. Push latch on manual extension control forward
NOTE with right thumb.
When looking at recoiler assembly with shaft end 4. Pull RED lever back and upward (engaging manu-
toward you, the spring tabs in the housing slot al extension system).
should curve to the right as shown (Fig. 32--15).
5. Pull “T” handle UP and return to original position;
5. Inspect cable for sheathing damage. Replace continue until GREEN, gear--down indicator light on
cable if sheathing is cut or stripped. Measure overall annunciator is illuminated and/or lines on visual gear
cable length prior to reassembly. Cable length should position indicator, on floor, aft of console are aligned
be 31 1/2” +/-- 1/2” long. when viewed from directly above indicator (this will nor-
mally take 12 to 20 pulls).
6. Slide drum onto shaft and be certain that spring de-
tente on drum engages both recoiler springs by slightly CAUTION
rocking drum end. DO NOT operate landing gear electrically with
manual extension system engaged. Landing gear
7. When full engagement is obtained, wrap cable actuator C/B will pop out.
around drum in a clockwise direction--leaving 2” to 5” of CAUTION
cable free of drum. DO NOT continue to pull T--Handle after GEAR
8. Align slot in pulley housing with cable and slide DOWN light is ON. Actuator may bind on Down
pulley housing over cable and drum assembly. Stops.
32--30--08 -- FINAL CHECKS
NOTE
Cable length in retract position may be adjusted 1. Raise and lower landing gear through five com-
shorter or longer by holding clutch with the fin- plete cycles, pausing after each cycle to check required
ger of one hand (to prevent shaft rotation), and tolerances and dimensions, and annunciator light indi-
then with the other hand, rotating pulley housing cations. Make certain no bungee springs are com-
one (1) full turn CW (to shorten) or CCW (to pressed to solid height and nose gear tire clears top of
lengthen). Retention of clutch with finger will not wheel well a minimum of .25 in. when landing gear is
allow pretensioning of springs. Slight spring ten- retracted. Make adjustments per above procedures, as
sion should be noted starting at 8” to 10”. required, to correct any deficiencies.
9. Holding housings together, pull properly aligned 2. Retorque all jam nuts.
cable several times to ensure the absence of binding 3. Re--attach main and nose landing gear door links.
conditions. Measure cable length from side of housing. Check to see that main and nose landing gear doors
At full extend, the length of cable should be 29” mini- are still rigged per paragraph 32--10--03 and 32--20--03.
32--30--06
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
32--31--00 -- TROUBLE SHOOTING – LANDING GEAR SYSTEM

Incomplete Retraction. Gear re- Bind in gear retraction system be- Refer to landing gear rigging pro-
tracts to an intermediate position cause gear is out of rig. cedure. Examine all movable parts
and stops short. for proper lubrication and freedom
from binding. Check for actuator
worm gear binding and lubricate
as needed.
Malfunction in gear electrical circuit, Any malfunction can cause the
inoperative actuating motor landing gear circuit breaker to trip:
therefore check electric circuit for
loose connection, broken wires or
defective relay switches.
Weak battery. Recharge battery.
Oversized/Stretched tire will not go Replace tire with smaller diameter
into wheel well properly. tire.
Gear will not retract at 61 to 70 KIAS. Insufficient airspeed. Check Pitot tube and line for ob-
structions.
Pressure switch inoperative. Examine pressure switch for prop-
er adjustment and operation.
Does gear retract using override? Check system operation.
Circuit breaker tripped. Reset circuit breaker.
Actuator ball nut binding on me- Gear may have been extended
chanical DOWN STOPS. manually & ball nut is jammed tight
against STOPS on motor; use
wrench on ball nut flat to move
from STOPS.
Gear will not retract and gear ac- Manual engage handle in engaged Disengage manual system.
tuator C/B trips. position.
Aircraft does not track or steer Nose wheel location improper. See Section 32--50--02.
properly during taxi operations.
Gear will extend; green indicator-- Lamp burned out in annunciator Push press--to--test on annunciator
light will not illuminate. --GREEN -- light circuit. and replace burned out lamp if
needed.
Down--limit switch malfunction. Check circuit and/or down--limit
switch.
Actuating motor extends gear to Same causes as listed with “In- Same remedies as listed with “In-
an intermediate position. complete Retraction”. complete Retraction” above.
Gear will extend manually, but Gear switch is not in DOWN Place gear switch in DOWN posi-
GREEN indicator light will not illu-
illu position. tion.
minate.
Lamp burned out in GREEN indi- Replace burned out lamp.
cator light.
32--31--00
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
Manual system will not lower gear. Actuator internal clutch spring bro- Replace spring.
ken (Eaton Actuator only).
Manual engage arm improperly Rig manual engage arm.
rigged.
Sheared female spline in drive Replace drive connector if female
connector. spline is stripped.
Drive connector is out of rig. Adjust control cable tension of
drive connector.
Landing Gear Actuator will not re- Any of the above or brushes in Applicable remedy listed above or
tract nor extend gear. motor are worn beyond limits. replace motor or brushes.
MID GEAR DOOR SCREW (TYP. 3 PLCS.)

DUST SHIELD
NUT
SPACER
SCREW
COTTER PIN
SCREW
SPACER MAIN
TIRE
MAIN WHEEL
MAIN GEAR LEG ASSY.
NOSE TIRE
R32--16 NOSE GEAR

LEG ASSY.
NOSE WHEEL COTTER PIN
MIDDLE GEAR DOOR REMOVAL WASHERS
FIGURE 32--16 NUT
R32--17
32--40--00 -- WHEELS AND BRAKES
LANDING GEAR WHEEL REMOVAL
32--40--01 -- MAIN WHEELS
FIGURE 32--17
The main wheels have standard brand, 6:00 x 6, Type
WARNING
III, six--ply rated tires with standard tubes. To remove
Do not loosen wheel half retaining nuts before
main wheels:
tire is completely deflated. Failure to observe this
1. Remove MID gear door (See Fig. 32--16). warning may result in bodily injury.
2. Detach dust shield (See Fig. 32--17). Remove 4. Remove nuts, washers, and wheel half retaining
three screws and washers. bolts, (5); remove brake disc (2), separate halves, (3 &
4) and remove tire and tube.
3. Remove 2 bolts from single puck brake caliper; (4
bolts on dual puck caliper) (See Fig. 32--18). NOTE
Bearing cups are shrink fitted; do not remove
4. Remove wheel by removing cotter key, nut and them unless necessary for replacement.
spacer from axle. (See Fig. 32--17)
5. Clean all wheel parts thoroughly in cleaning fluid.
5. Slide wheel off axle. Exercise special care in cleaning bearing cones and
32--40--02 -- MAIN WHEEL DISASSEMBLY/AS- felt rings to insure thorough cleaning.
SEMBLY 6. Inspect all parts for cracks, corrosion, or evidence
1. Remove snap ring, (10) grease seal rings, (8) and of wear.
felt seals (9), (See Fig. 32--20). 7. Inspect bearing cups and replace if cups are dam-
aged or worn. If necessary to remove bearing cups,
2. Remove bearings (7).
heat wheel in boiling water for at least 30 minutes. Then
3. Completely deflate tire. remove cup by tapping evenly.
32--40--00
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006
To install cup, heat wheel half again as above; cool cup 32--40--03 -- NOSE WHEEL DISASSEMBLY/AS-
with dry ice. Position cup and tap lightly to insure proper SEMBLY
seating.
The standard brand, tube--type, 5:00 x 5, Type III, nose
8. Polish small burrs or nicks out of wheel halves with wheel tire is six--ply rated. To remove nose wheel:
No. 400 grit sandpaper, clean thoroughly, and refinish
protective coating as required. 1. Remove cotter key, nut, and washer from axle (Fig.
32--17).
9. Replace bearing cones that show signs of wear or
bearing fretting. 2. Remove nose wheel.
10. Repack wheel bearings and lubricate seals with 3. Installation is in reverse sequence of removal.
grease. Install bearings, grease seal rings, and felt
Nose wheel disassembly:
seals in wheel halves. Secure with snap rings.
11. Position tire & tube on wheel half with valve stem 1. Completely deflate tire by removing valve core.
hole; then position other wheel half in tire to match 2. Remove nuts, washers, and wheel half retaining
mounting holes. bolts (15) (Fig. 32--20).
3. Separate wheel halves, (13 and 14) and remove
8 2 7 tire and tube. Refer to Section 32--40--02 steps 5 thru
9
10 10 for wheel inspection.
4
4. Reassemble nose wheel in reverse sequence of
11 removal. Tighten wheel half retaining bolt nuts evenly
and torque to 90 inch--pounds. Inflate tire to 49 PSI.
1
CAUTION
6 When ANY tire and/or wheel assembly is re-
moved or replaced and re--installed, conduct at
5
least 5 complete retraction/extension cycles to
10 verify tires enter and exit wheelwells without in-
11 terference. [Ref. AC 43.13( ), Chap.8, para. 332, a,
3
(9)]
BLEED VALVE
R32--18
COVER
AXLE
MOUNTING
TYPICAL BRAKE ASSEMBLY FLANGE
CLEVELAND
FIGURE 32--18 75--16
TORQUE
CAUTION PLATE ASSY.
Use correct axle spacer to position disc .12 inch- PRESSURE
.125 PLATE
es from MLG assembly (ref. Fig. 32--17) ASSY.
WHEEL &
12. Install brake disc (2) (Fig.32--20) and wheel half TIRE
ASSY.
retaining bolts, washers and nuts.
CAUTION
Uneven or improper torque may cause bolt or
wheel failure.
13. Tighten nuts evenly and torque to 150 inch
pounds.
14. Inflate tire to 42 PSI.
15. Install wheel assembly, bearing spacer, washer,
and axle nut. Tighten axle nut until bearing binds slight-
ly, back nut off to nearest castellation, and install cotter
pin.
BRAKE
NOTE CYLINDER
When properly installed, the wheel will turn with M32--19
slight resistance.
16. Install dust shield and IB/MID gear door. TORQUE PLATE ASSEMBLY
17. Reinstall brake caliper & safety. FIGURE 32--19
32--40--03
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
32--40--04 -- BRAKE SYSTEM C. Visually inspect linings for wear and brake disc
NOTE for warpage. Brake linings should be replaced when
S/N: 27--0108 THRU 27--TBA aircraft have dual they are worn to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. If lin-
puck wheel brake cylinders installed. ing replacement is necessary proceed with steps D thru
O. Otherwise reassemble in reverse sequence of dis-
1. BRAKES -- REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION assembly.
(TYPICAL)
Lining inspection and/or replacement or cylinder repair. CAUTION
Brake disc should be replaced if width is .345 in.
A. Place aircraft on jacks. or less.
B. Remove middle gear doors. Remove safety wire
and two bolts (1) attaching back lining plate assembly D. Disconnect and cap hydraulic line (4) at brake
(2) to brake cylinder assembly (Fig. 32--18). cylinder assembly. Remove nuts from anchor bolts.
15
NOSE WHEEL ASSY.
13
8 14
9 15
10
4
2
5
8 9
MAIN WHEEL ASSY.
8
3 10
7
7
R32--19
WHEEL ASSEMBLIES
FIGURE 32--20
E. Remove pressure plate assembly (Fig. 32--18) F. Drill out rivets (9) attaching linings (7) to back lin-
(5) sliding it off the anchor bolts (6). Note the condition ing plate (2) and the pressure plate (5). Remove piston
of the anchor bolts. If they are nicked or gouged they assembly (10) and “O” ring (11). It is permissible to use
should be sanded smooth to prevent binding with the compressed air applied to the brake line fitting to re-
pressure plate (5) or torque plate (8). When the anchor move the piston (10) from the brake cylinder.
bolts are replaced they should be pressed out. New CAUTION
ones can be installed by pressing them in place with an Do not spin bearing cones with compressed air.
arbor press.
32--40--04
Page 21
Rev Date Date 2006
G. Clean parts in cleaning solvent and dry with oil-- 2. BRAKES -- BREAK IN PROCEDURES.
free compressed air. Proper conditioning may be accomplished as follows:
CAUTION
A. Taxi aircraft for 1500 feet with engine at 1700
Assemble brake on a clean flat surface, being
RPM applying brake pedal force as needed to develop
careful not to nick, scratch or damage protective
a 4--9 knots (5--10 MPH) taxi speed.
finish of brake parts.
H. Replace linings and rivets. Rivet shanks must B. Allow the brakes to cool for 10--15 minutes.
be rolled with special tool (Cleveland Rivet Set Kit C. Apply brakes and check for restraint at high stat-
#199--1) for proper installation. ic throttle. If brakes hold, conditioning is complete.
I. Inspect brake cylinder bore for scoring. A scored D. If brakes cannot hold aircraft during static run
cylinder may cause the “O” ring to leak or cause rapid up, allow brakes to cool completely and repeat steps A
wear of the “O” ring. A scored brake cylinder should be though C.
replaced. NOTE
J. Replace “O” ring (11) with a new one. Do not re- Brake pad conditioning is required to properly
use the old “O” ring. cure the resins binding the lining composition
K. Lubricate cylinder and piston with MIL--H--5606 together. Excessive heat created prior to condi-
red hydraulic fluid and assemble components with care tioning will carburize the lining material and pre-
to prevent damage to the “O” ring. vent the attainment of maximum braking coeffi-
L. Service and inspect main wheels as described in cient.
Section 32--40--02. Inspect single puck torque plate as- This conditioning procedure will wear off high spots and
sembly. Make sure the .125” thickness is toward brake generate sufficient heat to create a thin layer of glazed
cylinder assembly. If thicker .250 protrusion is out- material at the lining friction surface. Normal brake
board, remove torque plate from axle mounting flange usage should generate enough heat to maintain the
and install as shown (Fig. 32--19). glaze throughout the life of the lining.
M. Reassemble brake cylinder assembly and back
lining plate assembly onto the airplane in the reverse
sequence of disassembly.
N. Bleed hydraulic system as described in Section
12--20--05.
O. Remove aircraft from jacks.
1
2
10
3
12
8 5
14
11 9 6
15 13 7 4
SN: 27--0001 THRU 27--0106
1
14 2
10
3
16
12
8 5
13 6
15 9 4
17 11 7 7
SN: 27--0107 THRU 27--TBA M32--21
MASTER BRAKE CYLINDERS (PARKER--HANNIFIN)

FIGURE 32--21
32--40--04
Page 22
Date 2006 Rev Date
3. MASTER CYLINDER -- B. Disconnect hydraulic cylinder from pedal link-

REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY S/N: 27--0001 THRU age.
27--0106 (Fig. 32--21) C. Disconnect and cap hydraulic lines.
A. Remove left hand, lower fuselage skin aft of fire- D. Disconnect hydraulic cylinder from bracket and
wall and exhaust cavity. remove cylinder.
B. Disconnect hydraulic cylinder from pedal link- E. To disassemble master cylinder (Parker--Hanni-
age. fin, See Fig. 32--21):
C. Disconnect and cap hydraulic lines. (1) Unscrew and remove rod end clevis (17), nut
(16) and washers (14 & 15) from piston rod (13).
D. Disconnect hydraulic cylinder from bracket and
remove cylinder. (2) Remove snap ring (11) from cylinder housing
assembly; lift out complete piston rod assembly, (items
E. To disassemble master cylinder (Fig. 32--21): 2 thru 13). Spring (12) can be removed at this time.
(1) Unscrew and remove rod end clevis (15) and (3) Remove snap ring (2) from end of piston rod
nut (14) from piston rod (9). assembly.
(2) Remove snap ring (13) and lift out complete (4) Remove bushing (3) and spring (4) from end
piston rod assembly (items 3 thru 12). of piston rod.
(3) Remove spacer (11) and O--ring packings (5) Remove piston assembly (5) and o--ring (7)
(10 and 12) from piston assembly. from piston assembly and o--ring (6) from piston rod
(4) Disassemble piston rod assembly by remov- shaft.
ing roll pin (4), spring guide (3) will be pushed out by (6) Remove end cap (8) and o--rings (9 [ID] and 7
spring (5) when roll pin is removed, spring (5) and pis- [OD]) from end cap assembly.
ton (7). (7) Clean all parts with cleaning solvent.
(5) Remove o--ring packing (6) from piston. (8) Inspect cylinder for cracks, scoring, or
(6) Remove sta--o--seal (8) from piston rod. grooves in bore.
(7) Clean all parts with cleaning solvent (Federal (9) Inspect piston (5) for damage; check for nicks
Specification No. PS--661). and scratches.
(8) Inspect cylinder fro cracks, scoring or (10) Inspect end cap (8) for damage.
grooves in the bore. (11) Inspect push rod for scoring, grooves, nicks
(9) Inspect piston (7) for damage, nicks and and scratches.
scratches. (12) Inspect spring (4) for free height -- .500 in.
(10) Inspect spacer (11) for damage. +/--.030.
(11) Inspect push rod for scoring, grooves, nicks (13) Replace all faulty parts and all “O” rings.
and scratches. (14) Reassemble in reverse sequence of disas-
sembly. Immerse all parts in hydraulic brake fluid
(12) Inspect piston return springs (2) for perma-
(MIL--H--5606) prior to reassembly.
nent set and proper length (3.670 in. min., 4.05 in.
max.). (15) Check piston rod and return spring (12) for
proper compression during stroke (9 lbs., (initial) to 32
(13) Replace all faulty parts and all O--rings.
lbs. (@ 3/4 stroke)).
(14) Reassemble in reverse sequence of disas- F. Reinstall master cylinder in reverse sequence of
sembly. Immerse all parts in hydraulic brake fluid prior removal.
to reassembly.
G. Bleed brake system (refer to Section
F. Reinstall master cylinder in reverse sequence of 12--20--05).
removal.
4. PARKING BRAKE VALVE
G. Bleed brake system (refer to Section
Removal and disassembly (Fig. 32--22)
12--20--05).
A. Remove forward fiberglass belly skin.
NOTE
Aircraft S/N: 27--0107 THRU 27--TBA have large B. Disconnect parking brake control at parking
capacity Master Cylinders installed. brake valve arm.
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY S/N: 27--0107 THRU C. Disconnect and cap hydraulic lines.
27--TBA (Fig. 32--21) D. Remove parking brake valve.
A. Remove left hand, lower fuselage skin aft of fire- E. Disassemble parking brake valve: (Refer Fig.
wall and exhaust cavity. 32--22).
32--40--04
Page 23
Rev Date Date 2006
(1) Remove both fittings (1) from valve housing SINGLE BRAKE SYSTEM (Ref. Figure 32--23)
(7), springs (8) will come out with the fittings. 1. Remove hydraulic fluid reservoir filler plug, and
(2) Remove poppet valves (2) and pins (3), from install a suitable fitting for attaching a flexible drain line.
housing by bumping on table top. 2. Immerse open end of drain line into a hydraulic
(3) Remove both fittings (4) from end of housing. fluid container or catch container containing
(4) Remove snap ring (5) from end of camshaft MIL--H--5606 fluid.
assembly (6). 3. Attach pressurized hydraulic fluid service unit to
(5) Carefully remove camshaft assembly (6) wheel cylinder bleeder valve and open valve. Hydraulic
from housing. service unit should be free of air prior to servicing air-
craft system.
(6) Inspect all components for damage, nicks,
grooves, etc. 4. Feed fluid from service unit into brake system.
Check for air bubbles at end of drain line immersed in
(7) Clean all parts with cleaning solvent. fluid.
(8) Replace all “O” rings (9). 5. When fluid is flowing, slowly depress pilot’s brake
(9) Reassemble brake valve in reverse se- pedal by hand and slowly release. Repeat three (3) to
quence of disassembly. four (4) times.
(10) Connect valve assembly to the hydraulic 6. Allow fluid to flow until clear of air bubbles.
lines. 7. Close wheel cylinder bleeder valve; remove ser-
(11) Bleed system; service hydraulic reservoir vice line.
with hydraulic fluid as described in Section 32--40--05. NOTE
Brake pedal may need to be pulled back in order
5 for fluid to bleed back into reservoir.
9
7 8. To bleed opposite brake, repeat steps 3 through 7.
9 4 DUAL BRAKE SYSTEM (Ref. Figure 32--23)
6
1. Remove hydraulic fluid reservoir filler plug, and
install a suitable fitting for attaching a flexible drain line.
2. Immerse open end of drain line into a hydraulic
3 fluid container or catch container containing
MIL--H--5606 fluid.
4 2
8 1 3. Attach pressurized hydraulic fluid service unit to
wheel cylinder bleeder valve and open valve. Hydraulic
R32--21 service unit should be free of air prior to servicing air-
craft system.
PARKING BRAKE VALVE
FIGURE 32--22 4. Feed fluid from service unit into brake system.
Check for air bubbles at end of drain line immersed in
5. Shuttle Valve -- Maintenance fluid.
A. No maintenance authorized. Remove and re- 5. When fluid is flowing, slowly depress co-pilot’s
place shuttle valve assembly. brake pedal by hand and slowly release. Repeat three
32--40--05 -- HYDRAULIC BRAKES (Bleeding) (3) to four (4) times.
CAUTION 6. Allow fluid to flow until clear of air bubbles.
Fluid in the wheel cylinders may be under high 7. Close wheel cylinder bleeder valve; remove ser-
pressure due to heat or expansion. Therefore, be vice line.
sure parking brake is released prior to beginning
hydraulic system servicing. For best results, use NOTE
a hydraulic pressure service unit (pressure pot) Brake pedal may need to be pulled back in order
to back bleed the system through wheel cylinder for fluid to bleed back into reservoir.
bleeder valves. 8. To bleed opposite brake, repeat steps 3 through 7.
32--40--05
Page 24
Date 2006 Rev Date
PILOT
PARKING RESERVOIR
BRAKE
WHEEL WHEEL
BRAKE INSTALLATION
A C
PILOT CO-PILOT
A C B D
PARKING
BRAKE
RESERVOIR
WHEEL WHEEL
DUAL BRAKE INSTALLATION
R12--1
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM SCHEMATICS

FIGURE 32--23
32--41--00 -- TROUBLE SHOOTING -- BRAKE SYSTEM

Solid pedal and no brakes. Brake lining worn beyond Replace lining.
allowable limit.
Spongy brake. Air in system. Bleed brake system.
Pressure will not hold. Leak in brake system. Visually check entire system for
evidence of leaks.
32--41--00
Page 25
Rev Date Date 2006
Parking brake will not hold. Air in system or leak in system See remedies above.
(downstream of parking brake
valve).
Defective parking brake valve. Repair or replace the valve.
Brake g
grabs. Warped or bent disc. Replace disc.
Foreign matter locking disc. Clean disc and lining.
Brake pedal will not return to Master cylinder shaft or other link- Check that shaft travels in straight
neutral position. age misaligned. line and not binding in linkage.
Twin limiter pads and adjustable stops (7) (Fig. 32--24)
RUDDER/STEERING are installed on the nose gear leg assembly (A) to pre-
4 TORQUE TUBE
6 vent towing/turning damage to the leg assembly.
TUBULAR STRUCTURE 1. Every 100 hours remove cotter pin (1) (Fig. 32--24)
10
3 and retorque nut (2) to 270--300 inch lbs. Check holes
8 in leg assembly where pivot bolt (3) is located for any
wear. If holes are worn, replace leg assembly.
CAUTION
5 Bolt (10), washers and nut (9) (Fig. 32--24) must
be installed as shown, from rear to front.
9 REF.
7 FIG. 32--20A 2. Rod end bearing (4) (Fig. 32--24) should be in-
FOR spected at least every 100 hours for any damage or
A ADJUSTMENT
bending.
2
1
MAX. ALLOWABLE
0.020” GAP
NOSE GEAR TYP. BOTH SIDES
LEG ASSY.
R32--22 R32--23
NOSE WHEEL STOP GAP ADJUSTMENT

FIGURE 32--25
3. Check the steering horn assembly (5) collars and
NOSE WHEEL STEERING
spacers for looseness. Replace any bushings or
FIGURE 23--24
spacers that are worn.
32--50--00 -- STEERING 4. Adjust turn limiter stop bolts (7) to contact cross
32--50--01 -- NOSE GEAR STEERING SYSTEM member (8) (Fig. 32--24) of truss assembly (.020 gap
permissible) (Fig. 32--25) when rudder is at its extreme
The nose gear steering system consists of a steering left and right travel position.
horn on the gear leg linked to the rudder pedals by
32--50--02 -- NOSE GEAR STEERING AND TRACK-
push--pull tubes and bellcranks. Gear retraction auto-
ING
matically disengages the steering mechanism from the
nose wheel. (Section 27--20--00 outlines the nose gear 1. Level aircraft as described in Chapter 8.
steering rigging.) A centering cam aligns the nose 2. Center nose wheel.
wheel for entry into the wheel well. 3. Place plumb line over and forward of nose gear
NOTE trunnion (see Fig. 32--26).
Check nose gear leg assembly for towing dam- 4. Measure forward from aft edge of plumb line to
age. Replace if any dent exceeds 1/32 inch. axle center line. Modification relocating nose wheel
32--50--00
Page 26
Date 2006 Rev Date
should be accomplished if axle position, forward of

plumb line, exceeds .06.
5. Add spacer under collar to reposition the axle if re-
quired.
NOTE TURN INDICATOR
Some collars have holes drilled off center and DECAL
may be turned over to change axle position.
TOWING LIMITS
6. Run gear through retraction/extension cycle.
Check nose gear door and wheel well tire clearances.
R32--25
Re--rig if required.
32--50--03 -- NOSE GEAR TOWING LIMITS INDICA-
TOR RIGGING NOSE GEAR TOWING LIMITS INDICATOR
FIGURE 32--27
An indicator assembly, comprised of an indicator and
decal, is attached to the Nose Gear Leg Assembly (Fig. 32--60--00 -- POSITION AND WARNING
32--27) to indicate turning limits of nose gear. The decal 32--60--01 -- ELECTRIC GEAR SAFETY DEVICES
provides a visual indicator of Nose Gear position in The gear switch operates the landing gear actuator
relation to turn limitations. relay. Pulling the wheel--shaped knob out and moving it
To rig the indicator assembly: to the upper detente raises the gear. However, an air-
speed safety switch is incorporated into the electrical
With landing gear fully connected and rigged, roll air-
system to prevent landing gear retraction while on the
craft forward along a straight line for at least ten feet un-
ground. To allow gear retraction with the aircraft on
til castering nose wheel is centered. Loosen the Indica-
jacks; attach a 12--inch length of 3/8 inch pliable rubber
tor assembly at the Gear Leg and align Indicator to
hose (surgical tubing) over the pitot head, and pinch the
center of decal (not contacting tube).
open end with a large cotter pin; roll the tubing with the
CAUTION cotter pin until the compressed air within the twisted
Exercise care not to turn nose wheel past its nor- tube actuates the airspeed pressure switch. Maintain
mal swivel angle of 11º left or 13º right of center. pressure on the switch until retraction is complete. To
Exceeding the turn limits shown on turn indica- adjust the airspeed switch refer to paragraph
tor may cause structural damage. Refer to sec- 32--60--03.
tion 9--10--00 for Towing instructions.
The up--limit switch will stop the gear in its retracted
position. Moving the control knob to its lower detente
lowers the gear. The down limit switch will stop the gear
actuating motor when the proper force is exerted to
hold the gears in the down--and--locked position. Refer
to Section 32--30--02 for proper limit switch rigging. The
COLLAR gear down--and--locked position is indicated by:
NOSE GEAR 1. Illumination of the green gear down annunciator
TRUNNION light. The GEAR DOWN annunciator light is dimmed
SPACER when ever the Navigation Light Switch is ON.
PLUMB LINE
2. The warning horn will not sound with the throttle re-
tarded within 1/4 inch of idle position.
3. The indicator marks will be aligned on the visual
gear--position indicator.
CAUTION
When running gear up or down electrically DO
SEE NOT use circuit breaker as a switch. Partial re-
32--50--02 traction or extension may be accomplished elec-
PARAGRAPH 4 trically as follows:
AXLE 1. Place Master Switch in OFF position.
CENTER 2. Move gear switch to GEAR UP or GEAR DOWN as
LINE desired.
R32--24
3. Momentarily actuate Master Switch until gear is in
desired position.
NOSE WHEEL LOCATION 32--60--02 -- LANDING GEAR WARNING SYSTEM
FIGURE 32--26 The landing gear warning system consists of:
32--50--03
Page 27
Rev Date Date 2006
1. Landing gear position lights: The airspeed safety switch is incorporated into electri-
cal system to prevent landing gear retraction while on
“GEAR DOWN” -- GREEN light on annunciator and the ground and at airspeeds below 60 +/--5 KTS. Addi-
Gear Down Position indicator light on floor tionally the RED gear unsafe light comes on and warn-
“GEAR UNSAFE” -- RED light on annunciator ing horn sounds when gear control handle is placed in
UP position below 60 +/--5 KTS.
“GEAR IN TRANSIT” – RED light on annunciator
The V.E.P. manufactured switches are field adjustable.
“GEAR UP” -- No lights They should close at 2.8 +/--.4 inches water.
2. A warning horn in cabin is actuated when gear con- Adjust slotted screw head on center of switch to obtain
trol switch handle is UP and the throttle is less than 1/4 correct settings.
inch from idle position. Check warning horn for volume CAUTION
in flight periodically. Horn will sound if gear is not The airspeed safety switch is designed to oper-
DOWN and LOCKED even if switch is in DOWN posi- ate within a specified range during increasing
tion or if airspeed is below 60 +/--5 KIAS and gear airspeed only. Due to hysteresis of the switch/di-
switch is in UP position. aphragm assembly switch MAY NOT deactivate
landing gear circuitry until approximately 49.5
NOTE
KTS. This could allow landing gear to retract if
To prevent inadvertent Gear Horn operation un-
gear switch is inadvertently placed in UP position
der high humidity conditions, cover leads on the
during landing roll.
Throttle Switch--Gear Warning with Dow Corning
738 Electrical Sealant. Switch unit is Micro CAUTION
Switch 1SE1--T. During static system checks, pressure com-
pensation on the Pitot side of the switch dia-
32--60--03 -- AIRSPEED SAFETY SWITCH AD- phragm must be considered or switch diaphragm
JUSTMENT may rupture.
Airspeed safety switch, located inside cabin, is NOTE
mounted on left side of cockpit, forward of pilots left Refer to proper electrical schematic when replac-
knee. ing with switches from another manufacturer.
030011--14 PAD
PLACE IN END OF SHOCK LINK
FOR GUIDING SHOCK LINK
INTO HOLE IN LEG WARNING
DO NOT BE IN POSITION BETWEEN
A COMPRESSOR TOOL AND FLOOR
WHEN COMPRESSOR TOOL IS IN
B OPERATION.
COMPRESS UNTIL HOLES ALIGN
IN SHOCK LINK & HOLE IN LEG
C
AN9--25A BOLT
MS21044N9 NUT
FINGER TIGHT NUT
WHILE CHANGER IS
IN OPERATION
AXIS OF SHOCK LINK & JACK SCREW MUST ALIGN
MAIN TIRE NOTE: TORQUE SHOULD NOT EXCEED 60 FT--LB WHEN SHOCK DISKS
ARE COMPRESSED AT ALIGNMENT OF HOLES IN SHOCK LINK &
GEAR LEG. IF TORQUE IS BEYOND 60 FT--LB, CHECK FOR AXIS
APPLICATION & ATTACHMENT OF --501 MIS--ALIGNMENT.
MLG DISC COMPRESSOR
R32--26
MAIN GEAR SHOCK DISC REPLACEMENT

FIGURE 32--28
32--80--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS A. Main gear shock discs. (Fig. 32--28).
(1) Remove dust shield. Check gap between re-
32--81--00 -- LANDING GEAR SHOCK DISC IN-
taining collar (A) and top retaining plate (B). Allowable
SPECTION
gap is 0.00 to 0.85 inches.
1. Aircraft with full fuel load and weight on landing (2) Replace discs when gap exceeds the toler-
gear. ance. Use a shock disc replacement tool (C), P/N GSE
32--60--03
Page 28
Date 2006 Rev Date
030038--501 (Green color), to remove and install main

gear shock discs. Use removable pad from tool as a
guide on top of shock link to align discs as they are be-
ing compressed. D
(3) Careful application of the shock disc replace- E

ment tool is recommended during replacement of main
gear shock disc to keep from damaging grease fittings.
NOTE
Shock disc retention collar should be installed
with the chamfer facing down and forward.
(4) Main landing gear leg assembly axle is to be T
located to provide a minimum of .23 inches clearance
between tire and any component inside wheel well. Al- F
ternate collars, P/N 510049--001, --003, --005, --007,
--009 or --011 can be substituted for basic dash number PAD
to obtain this clearance. If any interference occurs be-
tween tire and other components during retract cycle,
next higher dash number collar moves axle approxi-
mately .50 inches aft.
B. Nose Gear Shock Discs. (See Fig. 32--29) R32--27
(1) Check for gap between retaining collar (D),
and top retaining plate (E). Top retaining plate must be
in contact with retaining collar. NOSE GEAR SHOCK DISC REPLACEMENT
FIGURE 32--29
(2) Replace shock discs if gap is found. Use
shock disc replacement tool (F), P/N GSE 030010, to 32--82--00 -- RECOMMENDED HARD LANDING
remove and install nose gear shock discs. INSPECTIONS
Use removable pad from tool as a guide on top of shock The following are areas recommended to be inspected
link to align discs as they are being compressed. when a “hard landing” or overweight landing has oc-
curred. Since a “hard landing” is a relative term and an
NOTE overweight landing may have occurred, it is up to the
Dimension (T), (Fig. 32--29), is critical to properly owner/operator to advise maintenance personnel
locate nose wheel position. Leg assemblies can when the inspections are to be accomplished. Howev-
vary, due to manufacturer’s tolerances. Dimen- er, since this may be overlooked during preliminary dis-
sion (T) in a no load fully extended position cussions, the mechanic/technician should inspect the
should be approximately 3.0 inches. Add spacer aircraft for the following:
under collar (D) as needed. See Figure 32--26,
paragraph 32--50--02, for proper steering/tracking 1. Mud shield missing or damaged on either or both
rigging. main landing gear.
2. Raise aircraft on jacks -- shocks fully extended. 2. Main landing gear shock biscuits condition, com-
pressed or extruded rubber.
A. Inspect nose and main gear shocks for evidence
of gap between retaining collar and retaining plate. The 3. Tail skid damage or damage to bulkhead that at-
disc preload must be great enough to maintain com- taches tail skid.
plete wheel extension during retraction.
4. Propeller strike marks or other visual damage.
B. Replace shock discs that have lost resilience.
5. Engine or engine mount damage.
C. Inspect retaining collar and bolt for deformation,
6. Nose landing gear leg assembly damage near
wear, and cracks.
steering lugs.
D. Replace defective bolt and collar.
7. Pilot/Co--Pilot’s seat adjustments supports/tubes
CAUTION bent from excessive G--loads.
Both collar and bolt must be replaced when one
If any evidence of damage or abnormal observations
or the other is defective.
are found, it is recommended that a thorough inspec-
NOTE tion of all the above areas be done and repairs be made
For Nose Gear Steering/Tracking see Section as necessary. Contact FAA personnel for incident re-
32--50--02, (Fig. 32--26). port requirements.
32--82--00
Page 29
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
32--82--00
Page 30
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 33
LIGHTS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 33
LIGHTS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
33--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--41--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--42--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--43--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33--43--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
33-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 33
LIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
33--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General -- Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
33--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Lights -- Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
33--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Lights -- Overhead Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
33--21--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Light Switch Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
33--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument/Flight Panel and Glareshield Lights . . . . 7
33--22--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
33--23--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Down Indicator Light (Floorboard) . . . . . . . . . . 7
33--23--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
33--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior Lights -- Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
33--40--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
33--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Intensity, Strobe Lights--Maintenance . . . . . . . 8
33--41--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Unit -- Removal/Replacem’t. . . . . 8
33--41--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
33--41--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strobe Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
33--42--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation/Position Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
33--42--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position Light -- Replacement Service . . . . . . . 10
33--43--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing/Taxi Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
33--43--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing/Taxi Light Adjustment Procedures . . . 10
33--43--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing/Taxi Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . 11
33-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
33--00--00 -- GENERAL -- DESCRIPTION AND OP- amp, split switches located on forward O/H instrument
ERATION panel between pilot & co--pilot. The switches are used
to illuminate both landing and taxi lights, or either one,
High intensity strobe lights are standard equipment on
as needed.
M20M aircraft. The lights are located adjacent to the
wing tip navigation lights and incorporated in the rudder Two pair of 24 volt overhead interior lights are located in
assembly. A common power supply is located inside the cabin headliner for crew and passenger use. Power
the tailcone. The system is actuated by a 10 amp circuit to these lamps is available with aircraft Master Switch
breaker/switch located on forward O/H instrument pan- in either the ON AND OFF position.
el between pilot & co--pilot.
Navigation lights are located on each wing tip; the aft CAUTION
facing navigation light (clear) is located on each wing tip The cabin light rocker switches are connected
trailing edge. The lights are activated by a 10 amp cir- directly to the battery.
cuit breaker/switch located on forward O/H instrument
NOTE
panel between pilot & co--pilot.
These cabin lights are connected directly to bat-
Two 110,000 candle power Landing/Taxi lights, with tery and will illuminate, when pushed ON, with
sealed beam bulbs, are located in LH & RH leading aircraft Master Switch OFF and cabin interior
edge section of wing. The lights are activated by two 25 Master Light Switch -- ON.
LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT CHART
APPLICATIONS BULB PART NUMBER

Glareshield Lights GE 327
Post Lights GE 327
“Check Gear” Dash Light (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, MARL 520--001--22
27--0328 Thru 27--TBA)
Map Light GE 327 or LED SSL--LX3054UWC/A
Compass Light GE 327
Cabin Interior Lights GE 400
Trim & Flap Indicator GE 327
Gear Down Light (Floorboard Indicator) GE 327
Tail Position Light W1290/A508--208
Wing Tip Position Light W1290/A508--208
Landing/Taxi Light GE 4596/Q5596
Recognition Light (Molded Assy.) 01--0770303--00 (Whelen)
Ice Light (Optional) 01--0790093--00 (Whelen)
S/N: 27--0053 thru 27--0107 Lights will go OFF in approximately 90--120 seconds
after door(s) are closed when MASTER is OFF and
Aircraft MAY incorporate optional switches on cabin rocker switch(es) are left ON.
and baggage door frames that will turn applicable inte-
rior lights ON when either door is opened. Forward cab- The lights will go OFF when door(s) are closed (timer
in interior lights are connected to the cabin door switch delay) if MASTER is ON or OFF and light rocker
and aft cabin/baggage interior lights are connected to switch(es) are OFF.
the baggage door switch. S/N: 27--0108 thru 27--TBA
Rocker switches located overhead, between pilot and Passenger overhead lights are controlled by the Mas-
co--pilot, for cabin interior lights will turn selected set of ter Light switch located on the pilot’s arm rest. With
lights ON as desired. The rocker switch light circuits are Master Light switch ON, individual overhead cabin
routed through a timer and the MASTER switch and will lights are controlled by rocker switches located on each
go OFF when MASTER switch is turned OFF, with the passenger’s arm rest (excluding front seat passenger).
rocker switches left ON (doors closed). The rockers switches control light ON, OFF and DIM.
33--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
Front seat passenger’s light switch is located forward of 2. Remove and replace the bulbs and check for prop-
the cabin door hinge on the interior side panel. er operation.
A 24 volt baggage compartment light is located in the S/N: 27--0181, 27--0184 thru 27--TBA
baggage compartment left hand headliner and is con- 1. Carefully slide smooth, flat sharp blade under lip of
trolled by a rocker switch mounted in the baggage light assembly flange and pop light assembly out of
compartment right hand headliner assembly. Depress- mounting hole (Figure 33--2).
ing the rocker switch energizes a capacitor which in
2. Disconnect blade terminals from light assembly.
turn energizes the fixture lamp. The duration that the
switch is depressed and held in the ON position will de- 3. Hold light assembly body and rotate bulb holder
termine the length of time the lamp remains illuminated. counter--clock--wise to remove.
This light will automatically turn OFF after approximate- 4. Pull bulb from bulb holder and replace with new
ly 10 minutes. bulb. Reinstall bulb holder.
5. Re--assemble light assembly into mounting hole.
5 5 3 6. Check for proper operation.
AFT LIGHT FWD LIGHT SCREWS
SWITCH SWITCH NOTE
CABIN
DOOR The front and rear light bulbs are replaced in the
(REF) same manner.
2
CABIN 33--21--01 -- CABIN LIGHT SWITCH REPLACE-
FWD MENTS
LIGHT
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0180, 27--0182, 27--0183
1
HEAD 1. Drop forward end of head liner assembly (1) by re-
LINER moving four screws holding head liner in place (Fig.
ASSY 33--1)
2. Switches (5) are a press and snap in fit and may
SPEAKERS require bending of spring tabs to release for removal.
3. Disconnect wire connections and replace with new
switch. Check for proper operation.
4. Position head liner to proper location and secure.
S/N: 27--0181, 27--0184 thru 27--TBA
SPEAKERS PILOT’S & REAR SEAT PASSENGER’S
3
SCREWS SWITCHES.
1. Remove cover from arm rest assembly by remov-
2 ing 2 screws holding cover to arm rest (Figure 33--2).
CABIN 2. Switches are a snap fit and may be removed by
AFT
LIGHT pressing snap tabs and pushing switch through cover.
FWD M33--1 3. Disconnect wire terminals and replace with new
switch. Check for proper operation.
INTERIOR LIGHTS 4. Reassemble switch assembly into cover by snap-
(S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0180, 27--0182 & ping in from top side. Re--install cover into arm rest; se-
27--0183) cure with two screws.
FIGURE 33--1 CO--PILOT’s SWITCH
33--20--00 -- INTERIOR LIGHTS -- MAINTENANCE 1. Co--pilot’s cabin light switch is located in front of
PRACTICES cabin door hinge above co--pilot’s right knee.
33--21--00 -- CABIN LIGHTS -- OVERHEAD 2. Remove cover from side panel by removing 2
LIGHTS/BULB REPLACEMENT screws holding cover to side panel.
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0180, 27--0182, 27--0183 3. Press snap tab & push switch from panel to re-
move.
1. Remove light cover panel (2) (Fig. 33--1) from the
head liner assembly (1) by removing four screws (3) 4. Re--assemble in reverse order when complete
from either panel. with maintenance action.
NOTE BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT SWITCH
The front and rear light bulbs are replaced in the 1. Switch is located at rear of baggage door at front,
same manner. top of hat rack opening. (Figure 33--2)
33--20--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
2. Remove one screw inboard of switch on door 4. Disconnect terminals; replace switch.
frame trim. Pull door frame down slightly from Velcro 5. Re--assemble in reverse order.
fasteners to access baggage compartment light switch.
3. Press snap tabs and PUSH switch through panel.
SPEAKERS FRONT SEAT

(UNDER COVER) PASSENGER LIGHTS EXTEROR LIGHTS
SWITCH PANEL
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
SWITCH REAR SEAT FRONT SEAT
PASSENGER LIGHTS SONALERTS
PASSENGER LIGHTS
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT (UNDER COVER)
LIGHT
LEFT REAR SEAT INTERIOR LIGHTS

PASSENGER LIGHT MASTER SWITCH
SWITCH *
PILOT’S OVERHEAD
LIGHT SWITCH
CO--PILOT’S LIGHT
SWITCH
* RIGHT, REAR SEAT PASSENGER’S

LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE
PANEL, TYPICAL TO LEFT SIDE
PANEL LOCATION. R33--1
INTERIOR LIGHTS
(S/N: 27--0181, 27--0184 THRU 27--TBA)
FIGURE 33--2
33--22--00 -- INSTRUMENT/FLIGHT PANEL AND B. Remove bulb; insert new bulb.
GLARESHIELD LIGHTS C. Screw outer housing back onto base.
33--22--01 -- LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT D. Check for proper operation.
1. Instrument panel lights. 3. Map Light
A. Internally lighted instruments are not being con- A. Place wrench on flat of exposed metal housing
sidered in this information. on bulb assembly from receptacle. Unscrew and re-
move bulb.
B. Post light bulbs are replaced by pulling hood B. Replace bulb; screw on bulb retainer and tight-
straight out from post light base and then pulling bulb en.
from this hooded portion.
33--23--00 -- GEAR DOWN INDICATOR LIGHT
C. Insert new bulb into hood and push hood back (FLOORBOARD)
onto post light base. 33--23--01 -- LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
D. Check for proper operation and hood orienta- 1. Remove lower belly panel to gain access to light
tion. assembly.
2. Glareshield lights. 2. Remove and replace bulb.
A. Remove outer housing by unscrewing from light 3. Check for proper operation.
assembly base. 4. Reinstall belly panel.
33--22--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
33--40--00 -- EXTERIOR LIGHTS--MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

33--40--01 -- TROUBLESHOOTING EXTERIOR LIGHTS

STROBE LIGHTS
Lights inoperative. Circuit breaker/switch Check for short circuit. Reset circuit
tripped. breaker.
Loose connection. Check and tighten electrical con-
nections.
Battery defective. Replace battery or use external
power.
Circuit breaker switch Check continuity through switch;
defective. replace if necessary.
Faulty power supply. Disconnect synch wires to identify
faulty power supply.
One bulb does not light. Bulb burned out. Replace bulb.
Power supply inoperative. Replace.
Fixture not grounded. Check for good bonding between
fixture and structure. Tighten
mounting screws.
Loose connection. Check all connections in circuit.
Defective fixture Replace fixture.
LANDING LIGHTS, NAVIGATION LIGHTS AND TAILLIGHT
Lamp fails to light. Circuit breaker/switch Check for short circuit. Reset cir-
tripped. cuit breaker.
Lamp burned out. Replace lamp.
Loose connection or Tighten connections and check wire
defective wire. circuit continuity. Replace or repair
wire if necessary.
Circuit breaker/switch Check continuity through switch.
defective. Replace if necessary.
33--41--00 -- HIGH INTENSITY STROBE LIGHTS-- VDC. If no voltage is present, check for shorted power
MAINTENANCE leads or tripped circuit breaker.
The strobe light power supply requires a 28 VDC input When one light is not flashing:
across red and black wires. Red is positive and black is
negative or common. Voltage for strobe light is supplied 1. To determine if power supply or flashtube problem:
through Pin 1 and 3 of power supply connector with Pin first check input voltage to power supply. The red and
2 as trigger pulse. The strobe light assembly is a potted black line should have 28 VDC. If no voltage is present
assembly and cannot be repaired. then check for shorted power leads, blown inline fuses
The power supplies may be synchronized by connect- or circuit breaker. If input voltage is present, disconnect
ing each yellow wire together between all power sup- connector to flashtube. 400--500VDC should be pres-
plies (Hoskins only). ent across Pin 1 and 3 of power supply. If not, power
supply has no output and is defective. Turn Master
TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS Switch --OFF, replace power supply.
When no lights are flashing:
2. If voltage is present across Pin 1 and 3 of power
1. Check circuit breaker/switch. supply, connect a known good flashtube to power sup-
2. To determine if power supply(ies) or flashtube(s) ply. If good flashtube fails to operate, power supply is
problem, first check input voltage to power supply(ies). defective. If good flashtube operates, the old flashtube
Each power supply’s red and black line should have 28 is defective. Replace flashtube.
33--40--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
33--41--01 -- POWER SUPPLY UNIT--REMOVAL OR CAUTION

REPLACEMENT STROBE LIGHT WIRING -- An incorrect hook--up
of wires, at either the power input or between
1. Strobe light power supply. strobe light assemblies and power supply unit
will cause a reversal of polarity that results in
A. Gain access to this unit through inspection cov- serious component damage and failure. Care
er on aft, left hand side of tailcone. The power supply is must be taken to ensure that the red wire is con-
physically mounted to this inspection cover. Alternative nected to positive power and the black wire to
installations are located in the left and right wings (Fig- ground.
ure 33--3).
2
5
6
3
TAIL 8
MOUNTED
4 9
7
POWER 4
SUPPLY 8
1
10
R33--2
FWD WING TIP LIGHTS

INSPECTION
FIGURE 33--4
COVER
WING MOUNTED -- LEFT WING SHOWN 33--41--03 -- STROBE LIGHT REPLACEMENT
TYPICAL LOCATION -- RIGHT WING 1. WING TIP STROBE LIGHT.
M33--3
A. Remove wing tip lens (1) (Figure 33--4) to gain
access to malfunctioning strobe light.
STROBE LIGHT POWER SUPPLY
B. Remove screw (2) holding retainer (3) against
FIGURE 33--3
navigation/position light lens and gasket (4) and strobe
WARNING light lens/gasket (5). Remove both lens & gaskets. This
High voltage is involved in circuit between power will allow strobe light assembly (6) and navigation light
supply and strobe light assemblies. Although a bulb (7) to be pulled from mounting plate/socket (9).
bleed--off resistor is incorporated in power sup- C. Remove three screws (8) from mounting plate/
ply circuit, turn control switch, for strobe lights socket assembly and pull away from tip rib.
OFF. Allow at least 20 minutes to elapse prior to WARNING
disconnecting cables at power supply or strobe High voltage is involved in circuit between power
light assemblies or before handling either of supply and strobe light assemblies. Although a
these units in any way. Failure to observe these bleed--off resistor is incorporated in power sup-
precautions may result in physical injury from ply circuit, turn control switch for Strobe Lights --
electrical shock. OFF; allow at least 20 minutes to elapse prior to
disconnecting cables at power supply or strobe
B. Disconnect wiring connections between switch light assemblies or before handling either of
and power supply. these units in any way. Failure to observe these
precautions may result in physical injury from
C. Disconnect wire harness between power supply
electrical shock.
and strobe light.
D. Flashtube assembly, as a unit, must be replaced
D. Remove screws securing power supply to in- if determined to be bad.
spection panel and remove unit. E. Wiring harness plug (10) is connected to wing
rib inside wing tip.
33--41--02 -- POWER SUPPLY UNIT INSTALLA-
TION F. Electrical plug may be reached through front of
wing tip opening when all light assemblies are loos-
The installation of power supply is reverse sequence of ened. Reach between wing tip rib and wing rib to dis-
removal procedures. connect plug.
33--41--01
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
G. Install new strobe light assembly in reverse se- will allow strobe light assembly (6) and navigation light
quence of removal. bulb (7) to be pulled from mounting plate/socket (9).
C. Install new lamp into base.
D. Reassemble light assembly in reverse se-
4 quence.
2. Aft Position Light (Figure 33--6)
A. Remove two screws (1) that secure aluminum
3 2 cover (2) to wing tip (3).
B. Remove clear lens (4) and gasket to gain ac-
cess to light bulb (5). Loosen safety wire on bulb retain-
1 er, if needed.
C. Pull light bulb (with special puller, if needed).
6 D. Replace with new lamp & reassemble light as-
sembly in reverse sequence of removal.
5
1
R33--3 4
5
TAIL STROBE LIGHT ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 33--5
2
2. TAIL STROBE REMOVAL.
A. To gain access to wire harness and connections
from power supply, rotate round access cover (1) on 3
lower left side of empennage stinger (Figure 33--5)
around one screw.
B. Cut Ty--raps at harness coil (1) to allow slack for
strobe light assembly and harness to be extended be-
yond rudder.
C. Remove two screws (3) that secure retainer and
strobe light assembly to rudder (4) and pull light assem-
R33--4
bly out so it clears mounting hole.
D. There is sufficient wire available to pull strobe
light assembly out from rudder light mounting hole. See AFT POSITION LIGHT
(Figure 33--5). Disconnect light assembly pigtail (5) FIGURE 33--6
from connector at (6) and replace assembly if needed. 33--43--00 -- LANDING/TAXI LIGHTS
E. Connect plug from strobe light assembly to har- 33--43--01 -- LANDING/TAXI LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
ness socket at (6). PROCEDURES
F. Secure light assembly with retainer and screws. CAUTION
Do not attempt this procedure with aircraft en-
G. Check for proper operation.
gine operating.
H. Coil harness at (1) to take up slack. 1. Position aircraft to face a vertical wall with front of
I. Secure access cover on empennage. nose wheel 7 ft. 6 in. from wall. Position L/H & R/H main
landing gear at exact distance from vertical wall, i.e.
33--42--00 -- NAVIGATION/POSITION LIGHTS
parallel to wall.
33--42--01 -- POSITION LIGHT -- REPLACEMENT/ 2. Place four target crosses (+) on vertical wall at the
SERVICE following positions:
1. Wing tip position lights (Figure 33--4). A. Measure 36.5 inches UP on vertical wall from
A. Remove wing tip lens (1) (Figure 33--4) to gain same ground plane aircraft is resting on.
access to malfunctioning light. B. At 9.85 feet, left and right, of nose wheel center
B. Remove screw (2) holding retainer (3) against line.
navigation/position light lens and gasket (4) and strobe C. At 12.375 inches further outboard on both left &
light lens/gasket (5). Remove both lens & gaskets. This right side of Step B. target position.
33--42--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
3. Remove access cover behind each landing/taxi NOTE

light location on wing lower surface. Do not loosen or turn screws that adjust light
4. Turn taxi lights ON, exit aircraft, turn adjusting bulb positioning focus in mounting brackets.
screws until light beams are centered on outboard tar- 4. Rotate retainer to large slotted holes and pull re-
get crosses (+), left and right. tainer from bulb.
5. Repeat Step 4 for landing lights, except, center
light beams on inboard target crosses, left & right. 5. Pull retainer from access hole.
6. Turn lights OFF, reinstall access covers. 6. Pull bulb from plate assembly and through access
33--43--02 -- LANDING/TAXI LIGHT BULB RE- hole.
PLACEMENT
7. Replace new bulb in reverse order of removal.
1. Remove access cover (see 33--43--01, 3 above).
2. Carefully remove electrical plug connection from 8. Verify beam adjustment has not changed (see
bulb. SECTION 33--43--01).
3. Loosen socket head mounting screws to remove 9. Replace access cover and recheck landing/taxi
retainer. light operation and focus adjustment.
33--43--02
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
33--43--02
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 34
NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 34
NAVIGATION
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
34--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--13--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--22--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34--23--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
34-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 34
NAVIGATION AND PITOT STATIC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
34--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
34--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitot & Static Air Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
34--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heated Pitot--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
34--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airspeed Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
34--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airspeed Indicator--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 7
34--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Speed Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
34--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rate--Of--Climb Indicator Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Vertical Speed Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
34--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Altimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
34--13--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Altimeter--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
34--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directional Gyro Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
34--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directional Gyro--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
34--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Coordinator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
34--21--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Coordinator--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 9
34--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
34--22--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demagnetizing and Compass Swinging . . . . . 10
34--22--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
34--23--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Artificial Horizon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
34--23--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gyro--Horizon--Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
34--90--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
34--90--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
34--90--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
34-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
34--00--00 -- GENERAL are mounted in a vertical configuration to the right of the

MFD.
The following text is organized into “Traditional” ANA-
LOG and MORITZ gauge instrument panel configura- Service, maintenance and troubleshooting instructions
tions and, GARMIN G1000 “Glass Cockpit” instrumen- specific to the Garmin G1000 integrated system are
tation. provided in the Garmin G1000 System Maintenance
Of special note, GARMIN G1000 instrument panels Manual.
also utilize “Traditional” attitude, altitude and airspeed The glareshield must be removed and plumbing dis-
indicators as back--up instruments. connected on traditional flight instruments before they
Each of these configurations include a “Traditional” can be removed. Remove glareshield attaching
magnetic compass mounted on the glareshield or screws, center post cover screws. Carefully lift center
windshield center post. post cover and glareshield from panel. Disconnect gla-
reshield and compass lights.
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU
27--0325, 27--0327 Reinstall glareshield in reverse sequence.
Flight instruments are grouped on the shock mounted 34--10--00 -- PITOT & STATIC AIR PRESSURE
panel directly in front of the pilot. Flight instruments are SYSTEM
operated by: (1) filtered air drawn into an evacuated in- Static pressure instruments are extremely sensitive to
strument case, (2) barometric pressure or barometric pressure changes; therefore, the Pitot and static sys-
impact air pressure differences, (3) variations in elec- tem must be kept free from moisture and obstructions.
tric current due to mechanically varied resistance, (4) Drain Pitot and static systems after humid or wet
reference to the earth’s magnetic field or (5) aircraft weather. If instrument operation is erratic or inoperative
electrical power. after draining, perform the following:
The glareshield must be removed and plumbing dis- S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU
connected on many flight instruments before they can 27--0325, 27--0327
be removed. Remove glareshield attaching screws, S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
center post cover screws. Carefully lift center post cov- (GARMIN G1000 equipped)
er and glareshield from panel. Disconnect glareshield
and compass lights. 1. Pitot system leak test -- (Make sure Master Switch
is OFF and Gear Control is in DOWN position.)
Reinstall glareshield in reverse sequence.
A. Slip end of a short rubber hose over Pitot tube.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) B. Close open end of hose; slowly roll up hose until
traditional airspeed indicator reads 150 MPH.
GARMIN G1000 equipped aircraft utilize two Garmin
GDU 1040 Control Display Units (CDUs) installed in C. Clamp hose and hold for one minute.
the M20 instrument panel. One is configured as a Pri- D. If airspeed indicator falls more than 9 KIAS,
mary Flight Display (PFD) and the other as a Multi-- within one minute, check system for leaks and tighten
Functional Display (MFD). The displays are located line fittings.
side--by--side, with the GMA 1347 Audio Panel located
in the middle. E. Repeat steps B, C, and D until obtaining less
than a 9 KIAS indicator reading drop.
The PFD displays graphical flight instrumentation in
place of traditional gyro instruments. Attitude, heading, CAUTION
airspeed, altitude, and vertical speed are all shown on Release air pressure slowly by unrolling rubber
one display. The MFD shows a full--color moving map tubing. A sudden release of the air pressure may
with navigation information. Both displays offer control damage airspeed indicator.
over COM and NAV frequency selectors, as well as 2. Pitot system hose inspections -- After Pitot system
heading, course/baro and altitude reference functions. is checked for leaks, inspect hose sections for signs of
On the left of the MFD display, an Engine Indication deterioration. Check all tubing for brittleness, checks or
System (EIS) cluster shows graphical depictions of en- cracks particularly at bends or connecting points.
gine and airframe instrumentation. When new hose is installed, recheck system for leaks
Both displays are installed in the instrument panel us- using PITOT SYSTEM LEAK TEST procedure.
ing built--in ¼--turn fasteners. Each display uses a
3. Static system cleaning -- Blow low air pressure
single Garmin 62--pin connector. Electrical power to
(10--25 PSI) through lines from disconnected line at air-
both the PFD and MFD is supplied from the ‘Essential’
speed indicator to static ports. Cover each static port
buss.
separately when blowing to insure that each line is
On the panel, traditional attitude, altitude, and airspeed clear. Instrument error or possible damage may result if
indicators are retained as backup instruments. These even one port is clogged with dirt or foreign matter.
34--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
CAUTION valve is provided to change the static air source from

NEVER BLOW AIR through the line TOWARD the outside the aircraft to inside the cabin. The valve is lo-
INSTRUMENT panel; to do so will seriously dam- cated on the lower panel under the pilots control col-
age instruments. When blowing back through umn. Airspeed indicator and altimeter readings will be
line from instrument panel, make sure that no air slightly affected when using the alternate static source.
is blown into instruments.
NOTE
4. Static system leak test -- The static system should be PC, STATIC, VACUUM, DRAIN or any low pres-
checked for leaks in accordance with instructions in sure line may be spliced to replace a section of
Federal Aviation Regulation 91.411, paragraph (c), ap- damaged line. Short sections of hose may be
pendix E, part 43. spliced together to produce planned lengths
(max. 2 splices for any given length). Hose cou-
CAUTION
plers may be purchased or manufactured, barbed
To avoid damaging either the airspeed indicator
or beaded, high density polyethylene, nylon,
or the landing gear airspeed safety switch an
plated steel or aluminum. Couplers manufactured
equal pressure should be applied to the Pitot
in--house to be manufactured from from alumi-
side of the indicator while leak testing the static
num tubing. O.D. of tubing to match I.D. of hose,
system.
W.T. .028/.035, bead both ends, length 2.5”. Use
5. Alternate static source -- An alternate static source any type hose clamp to attach hose to coupler.
34--10--01 -- HEATED PITOT TROUBLESHOOTING

Tube does not heat or clear itself of Switch circuit breaker tripped. Reset circuit breaker.
ice with switch on.
Open circuit. Repair.
Excessive voltage drop between Check for bad connections in con-
battery and Pitot head. nectors and cables leading to the Pi-
tot head.
Heating element burned out. Replace Pitot head.
34--11--00 -- AIRSPEED INDICATOR (TRADITION- • Airspeed trend vector

AL) • Vspeed references
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
27--0325, 27--0327 tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60
knots of airspeed viewable at any given time. The actu-
This indicator registers airspeed in knots. Air pressure al airspeed is displayed inside a black pointer. The
difference between impact air (from the Pitot tube) and pointer remains black until reaching never exceed
static air (from static ports on each side of aircraft tail- speed (Vne), at which point it turns red.
cone) operates airspeed indicator. An electrically
heated Pitot head prevents ice obstruction in flight. Speed Ranges
A color coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed
The airspeed indicator dial markings are as follows: range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
Radial Red Line -- 195 KIAS denote:
Yellow Arc -- 174--195 KIAS Flaps Operating Range – 59--110 KIAS
Normal Operating Range -- 66--174 KIAS
Green Arc -- 66--174 KIAS
Caution Range – 174--195 KIAS
White Arc -- 59--110 KIAS
Never Exceed Speed (Vne) -- 195 KIAS
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA A red range is also present for low speed awareness.
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS)
The Garmin G1000 PFD displays airspeed on a rolling for speed criteria.
number gauge using an LCD screen “moving tape” dis- Refer to Garmin G1000 System Maintenance Manual
play. The following information is also displayed: for service and troubleshooting information.
• Speed indication NOTE
• Speed ranges See Section 27--95--00 for stall warning systems.
34--10--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
34--11--01 -- AIRSPEED INDICATOR TROUBLESHOOTING (TRADITIONAL)

Instrument pointer does not indicate Leak in instrument. Check for leak and seal case or stat-
properly. ic lines.
Obstruction in Pitot tube. Clean out obstruction.
Instrument pointer oscillates. Leak in instrument case or in Pitot Check for leak; seal lines.
lines.
34--12--00 -- VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU The Garmin GDC 74A provides digital air data com-
27--0325, 27--0327 putations (including Vertical Speed) to the G1000 sys-
tem. The unit is mounted behind the PFD. Power is re-
Converts barometric pressure changes within the static ceived from the “Essential” buss. The GDC 74A
port lines to aircraft ascent or descent rate; readings connects to existing Pitot/static ports
are in feet per minute.
The PFD Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft
This instrument has a single needle and two adjoining vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at
scales that read from 0 to 2000 feet per minute, top side 1,000 ft. and 2,000 ft. in each direction. Minor tick
for ascent rate and bottom side for descent rate. The re- marks are at intervals of 500 ft.
cessed, slotted screw at lower left of instrument case is Refer to Garmin G1000 System Maintenance Manual
used to “zero” indicator when aircraft is on the ground for service and troubleshooting information.
34--12--01 -- RATE--OF--CLIMB INDICATOR TROUBLESHOOTING (VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR) (TRADI-

TIONAL)

Pointer does not set on zero. Aging of diaphragm. Turn setting screw to reset pointer at
zero. Tap instrument while resetting.
Pointer fails to respond. Obstruction in static line. (Includes Disconnect static line from instru-
water) ments. Apply low pressure air
(10--25 PSI max.) to instrument end
of static line. Check both static ports
for air flow. Depress static drain
valve and check for water. Keep de-
pressed until air is free of moisture.
Reconnect static line to instruments
and leak check.
Pointer oscillates. Leak(s) in static line. Disconnect all instruments con-
nected to static line. Check individu-
al instruments and test installation
for leaks.
Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
34--13--00 -- ALTIMETER (TRADITIONAL) pressure is sensed through static vents. A knob adjusts
a movable dial behind a small window (Kollsman) in
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU face of main dial to indicate local barometric pressure.
27--0325, 27--0327 This corrects altimeter reading for prevailing condi-
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA tions.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
The traditional altimeter operates by absolute pressure (GARMIN G1000 equipped)
and converts barometric pressure to altitude; reading is The Altimeter provided in the Garmin G1000 PDF dis-
in feet above mean sea level (MSL). The altimeter has a plays barometric altitude values in feet on a rolling num-
fixed dial with three pointers to indicate hundreds, thou- ber gauge. The Altimeter displays the following infor-
sands, and tens of thousands of feet. Barometric mation:
34--11--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
• Altitude values The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is

• Altitude reference bug geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could
• Altitude trend vector vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pres-
• Altitude reference box sure altimeters.
• Barometric setting box Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance Manual for ser-
• Altitude alerter vice and troubleshooting information.
• Metric display
34--13--01 -- ALTIMETER TROUBLESHOOTING (TRADITIONAL)

Excess scale error. Improper calibration adjustment. Replace instrument.
Excessive pointer oscillation. Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
High reading. Static pressure system leak. Eliminate leak in static pressure
system.
Setting knob is hard to turn. Wrong lubricant or lack of lubrica- Replace instrument.
tion.
Inner reference marker fails to move Marker out of engagement. Replace instrument.
when setting knob is rotated.
Setting knob set--screw is loose or Excessive vibration. Tighten instrument screw, if loose.
missing. Replace instrument, if screw is
missing.
Cracked or loose cover glass. Excessive vibration. Replace instrument.
Dull or discolored luminous mark- Age. Replace instrument.
ings.
Barometric scale and reference Shift in mechanism. Reset pointers.
markers are out of synchronization
with pointers.
Barometric scale and reference Slippage of mating parts. Replace instrument.
markers are out of synchronization.
34--20--00 -- DIRECTIONAL GYRO COMPASS The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a ro-
tating compass card with letters at the cardinal points
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU and numeric labels every 30º. Major tick marks are at
27--0325, 27--0327 10º intervals and minor tick marks for every
This vacuum--operated instrument indicates heading 5º. The HSI is displayed in a heading up orientation.
reference. The directional gyro rotor is air driven and The HSI compass can be displayed as a 360° rose or
rotates with its spin axis horizontal. The knob is used to 140° arc. The HSI displays the following information:
reset basic directional heading. Vacuum pressure (suc- • Heading indication
tion) for satisfactory operation is 4.25 +/--0.2 to 5.5 • Turn Rate indicator
+0.0/--0.2. Vacuum system filters should be changed • Course Deviation Indicator
each 500 hours or at one year intervals, whichever oc- • Bearing pointers
curs first. (See Troubleshooting Chart, for maintenance • Bearing information windows
instructions.) • Navigation source
Refer to Garmin G1000 System Maintenance Manual
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
for Horizontal Situation Indicator (HIS) service and
troubleshooting information.
34--13--01
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
34--20--01 -- DIRECTIONAL GYRO TROUBLESHOOTING (VACUUM ONLY)

Excessive drift in either direction. Dirty air filter (high vacuum indica- Inspect filter. Replace if necessary.
tion).
Excessive vibration. Test with vibrometer. If vibration am- --
plitude is more than .004 inch, ex-
amine shock mountings to see if
connections are pulling on instru-
ment.
Insufficient vacuum. If vacuum indication is below 4.25 Correct for insufficient vacuum as
IN. Hg., check as follows: follows:
1. Vacuum regulating valve im- 1. Adjust vacuum regulating valve.
properly adjusted.
2. Pump failure. 2. Repair or replace pump.
3. Vacuum line kinked, leaking, or 3. Locate and replace or repair vac-
too long for its diameter. uum line, if defective. Check for col-
lapsed inner wall of flexible hose.
Defective mechanism (worn or dirty Replace instrument.
pivots and bearings.)
Dial spins continuously in one di- Operating limits have been ex- Reset instrument with aircraft in
rection. ceeded. level flight.
Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
34--21--00 -- TURN COORDINATOR The indicator moves with the roll pointer and moves lat-
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU erally away from the pointer to indicate lateral accelera-
27--0325, 27--0327 tion. A slip/skid is indicated by the location of the Slip/
Skid indicator relative to the roll pointer. One Slip/Skid
A gyro instrument that indicates control coordination
indicator displacement is equal to one ball displace-
and rate of turn. This instrument is electrically driven.
ment when compared to a traditional Slip/Skid indica-
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA tor.
The Slip/Skid indicator (a component of the Attitude In- Refer to Garmin G1000 System Maintenance Manual
dicator screen display) resides beneath the roll pointer. for service and troubleshooting information
34--21--01 -- TURN COORDINATOR TROUBLESHOOTING (TRADITIONAL)

Pointer fails to respond. Foreign matter lodged in instru- Replace instrument.
ment.
No electric current. Check voltage at instrument.
Bar does not set level. Gimbal and rotor assembly out of Replace instrument.
balance.
Pitted or worn pivots or bearings. Replace instrument.
In low temperature, bar fails to re- Oil has become too thick. Replace instrument.
spond d or responds
d sluggishly
l i hl and
d
with insufficient deflection. Insufficient bearing clearance. Replace instrument.
Bar sluggish in returning to level Oil or dirt between damping pis- Replace instrument.
and does not set on level when tons and cylinders.
stationary. Excessive clearance between rotor Replace instrument.
and rotor pivots.
34--20--01
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
34--22--00 -- MAGNETIC COMPASS (TRADITION- 3. Demagnetize Cockpit

AL) CAUTION
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU Improper use of a growler can induce more mag-
27--0325, 27--0327 netism in cabin structure, making extensive de-
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA magnetizing necessary.
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) A. Remove compass from cockpit.
The traditional magnetic compass dial, graduated in 5º B. Position aircraft at a heading of either 90º or
increments, is encased in a liquid filled glass and metal 270º.
case. The unit mounts on top of glareshield or on wind-
C. Make sure growler is turned OFF. Place growler
shield center post. The compass should be swung and
in cockpit, position seats aft and support power cord so
compensated at each annual inspection and whenever
that it does not touch or pass within six inches of any
new electrical equipment is installed.
structural member.
To compensate for N--S deviation, adjust left screw; to D. While sitting, straddling pilot and co--pilot seats,
compensate for E--W deviation, adjust right screw. hold growler inside cockpit center in a low position.
Degaussing of tubular structure may be required if Turn growler ON and slowly move it forward, close to
compass cannot be compensated within limits. Care- instrument panel centerline, up toward and along wind-
fully go over entire steel structure with degausser, from shield center post and along overhead structure over
center to outboard of structure (Left & Right), to remove and to behind your head. Move growler down in a circu-
residual magnetism. It is recommended that an Arma- lar motion from behind shoulders to waist or mid--chest
ture Growler be used to degauss steel structure (Ref. height before turning it OFF.
33--22--00A). An Associated Growler/Armature Tester NOTE
No. AOE--6054, or similar device, may be used. Windshield center post is fabricated of non--mag-
NOTE netic stainless steel. This post requires no de--
Check for outside magnetic influences if exces- magnetizing.
sive compensation is required. E. Hold compass in place to see if headings now
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA match aircraft heading. If too much heading error (more
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) than +/-- 15º) still exists, remove compass from aircraft.
F. Turn growler ON and move it along center side
A Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) is integral to the
and overhead cross structure from one side of cockpit
Garmin G1000 system. This display indicates magnet-
to the other. Turn OFF growler.
ic heading, among other data. A traditional magnetic
compass is mounted on the windshield center post to G. Again, hold compass in place and compare
be referenced as a backup instrument. headings. If heading error has not reduced sufficiently
(to less than +/-- 15º), then:
Refer to Garmin G1000 System Maintenance Manual
for adjustments and troubleshooting information for the 1) Repeat steps D, E, F and G.
Horizontal Situation Indicator. H. When heading error is reduced to less than +/--
34--22--01 -- DEMAGNETIZING AND COMPASS 15º, install compass and proceed to Step 4 – Compass
SWINGING PROCEDURES (TRADITIONAL COM- Swinging.
PASS) 4. Compass Swinging
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU A. Run engine at 1200 to 1500 RPM and proceed
27--0325, 27--0327 to swing compass with radio “ON” after reinstalling and
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA centering compensator magnets (if removed).
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) B. Position aircraft on compass rose and adjust
Check aircraft (with all radio and electric equipment N--S compass compensating screw (left screw) for a 0º
OFF) for magnetized structure as follows: indication at north heading. (Use non--ferrous tools.)
1. Center or remove compensating magnets from C. Turn aircraft to east heading and adjust com-
compass. pass E--W compensator screw (right screw) for a 90º
indication.
2. Position aircraft on compass rose, run engine at
1200 to 1500 RPM, and check the four cardinal head- D. With aircraft on south heading adjust N--S com-
ings starting at north heading. If an error greater than pensator to reduce indicated error by 50 percent (ex-
+/-- 30º is found at any cardinal heading, proceed to ample: If compass reads 184º, adjust compensators so
demagnetize cockpit as outlined in Step 3. If error is less than it reads 182º).
+/-- 30º at any cardinal heading, proceed to swing compass (Step E. With aircraft on west heading adjust E--W com-
4). pensator to reduce indicated error by 50 percent.
34--22--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
F. Return aircraft to north heading, reset directional ing, proceed to de--magnetize cockpit as outlined in
gyro and, using DG, check and record compass error at Step 3.
every 30º heading through 360º. 5. Fill out compass correction card giving “Radio ON”
G. Adjust compensator making sure compass corrections through 360º. Install card on or in close
reads within +/-- 10º at any heading and proceed to step proximity to compass in full view of pilot.
5. If compass does not read within +/-- 10 at any head-
34--22--02 -- COMPASS TROUBLESHOOTING (TRADITIONAL COMPASS)

Excessive card error. Compass not properly compen- Compensate instrument.
sated.
External magnetic interference. Locate magnetic interference and
eliminate, if possible.
Excessive card oscillation. Improper instrument mounting. Align instrument.
Insufficient liquid. Replace instrument.
Sluggish card. Weak card magnets. Replace instrument.
Excessive pivot friction or broken Replace instrument.
jewel.
Instrument too heavily compen- Correct excess compensation.
sated.
Liquid leakage. Loose bezel screws. Tighten screws.
Broken cover glass. Replace instrument.
Defective sealing gaskets. Replace instrument.
Discolored luminous markings or Age Replace instrument.
discolored damping liquid.
Defective light. Burnt out lamp or broken circuit. Check lamp or wiring continuity.
34--23--00 -- ARTIFICIAL (GYRO) HORIZON craft. The Attitude indicator displays the following infor-
mation:
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU
27--0325, 27--0327 • Pitch indication
• Roll indication
The vacuum--powered artificial horizon gyro indicates • Slip/Skid indication
aircraft attitude relative to straight and level flight. Main-
Pitch Indication
tenance is similar to that required for the directional
gyro compass. Major pitch marks and numeric labels at 10º, 20º, 30º,
40º, 50º, 60º, 70º and 80º are shown above and below
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA the horizon line. Minor pitch marks at 5º, 15º and 25º
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) above the horizon line and 5º, 15º, 25º, 35º and 45º be-
Attitude Indicator low the horizon line are shown. The horizon line is part
of the pitch scale. Red extreme pitch warning chevrons
The attitude information displays over a virtual blue sky pointing toward the horizon are displayed starting at
and brown ground with a white horizon line. The aircraft 50º above and 30º below the horizon line.
wing tips are represented by two yellow bars on the ho-
Refer to Garmin G1000 Maintenance manual for trou-
rizon line. The yellow inverted “V” represents the air-
bleshooting and service information.
34--22--01
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
34--23--01 -- GYRO--HORIZON TROUBLESHOOTING (TRADITIONAL))

Horizon bar does not respond. Dirty air filter (high vacuum indica- Examine filter and clean or re-
tion). place, if necessary.
Insufficient vacuum resulting from Correct insufficient vacuum as fol-
the following: lows:
1. Vacuum regulating valve im- 1. Adjust valve.
properly adjusted.
2. Pump failure. 2. Repair or replace pump.
3. Vacuum line kinked, leaking, or 3. Locate and repair. Check for
too long for its diameter. collapsed inner wall of flexible
hose.
Horizon bar does not settle. Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
Insufficient vacuum. Correct for insufficient vacuum as
outlined above.
Excessive vibration. Test with vibrometer. If amplitude Examine shock mountings and re-
is more than .004 inch, examine place, if necessary.
installation to determine whether
flexible hose connections are re-
stricting movement of instrument.
Horizon bar oscillates or vibrates Excessive vacuum resulting from Correct for excessive vacuum as
excessively. the following: follows:
1. Dirty air filter. 1. Examine filter and clean or re-
place, if necessary.
2. Vacuum regulating valve im- 2. Adjust valve.
properly adjusted.
3. Defective mechanism. 3. Replace instrument.
4. Excessive vibration. 4. Test with vibrometer. If ampli-
tude is more than .004 inch, ex-
amine installation to determine
whether flexible hose connections
are restricting movement of instru-
ment.
5. Shock mounted panel is con- 5. Examine shock mountings and
tacting structure (inadequate clear- replace if necessary.
ance)
34--90--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS 34--90--02 -- OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
34--90--01 -- CLOCK S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU

27--0325, 27--0327
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU Provides pilot with free stream outside air temperature
27--0325, 27--0327 in degrees Centigrade.
The digital clock is mounted in upper left side of instru- S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
ment panel. (GARMIN G1000 equipped)
The Garmin GTP 59 OAT Probe provides the GDC 74A
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA with air temperature data. The OAT probe is mounted
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) to the bottom side of the right wing.
A real--time clock is integral to the Garmin G1000 Refer to Garmin G1000 System Maintenance Manual
Avionics System. for service and troubleshooting information.
34--23--01
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 35
OXYGEN
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 35
OXYGEN
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
35--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
35--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
35--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
35--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
35--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
35--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
35-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 35
OXYGEN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
35--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
35--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recharging Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
35--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
35-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
35--00--00 -- GENERAL 35--00--01 -- RECHARGING PROCEDURES

The oxygen system is a standard installation for M20M,
S/N 27--0001 and ON. The system consists of a 115.7 WARNING
or 77.1 cubic ft. cylinder located in the tailcone immedi- Oil, grease or other lubricants in contact with
ately aft of the baggage compartment bulkhead. A re- oxygen create a serious fire hazard, and such
ducing valve and altitude compensating valve are con- contact must be avoided when handling oxygen
nected to cylinder to regulate oxygen flow for a given equipment.
altitude. Lines connected to altitude compensating
WARNING
valve distribute aviators oxygen to pilot and passen-
NO SMOKING when refilling oxygen cylinder.
gers. The system is activated by the control knob lo-
cated on the pilot’s side panel and is rotated to open re-
1. The oxygen cylinder should not be used to less
ducing valve. A gauge, located on pilot’s arm rest
than 100 P.S.I.; contamination may occur to cylinder
adjacent to control knob, indicates pressure of cylinder.
and valve. The valve must be removed and cylinder
When cylinder is full, pressure will indicate 1850 P.S.I.
cleaned and inspected if this happens.
at 21o C. (70o F.). The system is serviced through an
access opening located aft of baggage compartment 2. Refill cylinder with aviators oxygen Specification
door. Standard refill fittings are required to fill cylinder No. MIL--O--27210, through Oxygen Servicing Access
with aviators oxygen. (Spec. No. MIL--O--27210). Door (1) (Figure 35--1). Special fittings are required for
WARNING this servicing. A compatible fitting for the AVOX Sys-
Proper safety measures must be employed while tems/Scott Aviation Recharging Valve (2) must be
oxygen system maintenance is being performed used. Mooney P/N 870025--501 oxygen recharge hose
or a serious fire hazard will be created. Avoid assembly is recommended.
making sparks and keep all burning cigarettes or
fire away from vicinity of oxygen. Make sure that 3. The cylinder contains 1850 P.S.I. at 21o C. (70o F.)
your hands, tools, and clothing are clean, partic- when fully charged. Temperature has an affect on
ularly with respect to oil or grease, for these will the correct charging pressure; See Section
IGNITE upon contact with pure oxygen under 12--10--04 and (Figure 12--1) for pressure vs. tem-
pressure. perature charging pressure.
8, 9
OUTLET
ASSEMBLY
10
OXYGEN MASK
11 CONNECTOR 3
CYLINDER CONTROL
RETAINING 7 CABLE
CLAMPS
SUPPLY
GAUGE
5
REDUCING 3
VALVE 4 CONTROL
ACTUATING CABLE 6
ARM CONTROL
KNOB
2
1 RECHARGE
SERVICE VALVE
ACCESS DOOR R35--1
OXYGEN SYSTEM
FIGURE 35--1
35--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
35--00--02 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (Ref: AC A. Connect recharge cart to filler valve. Set cart
43.13--1B CHG 1, chap. 9--10, para. 9--47 thru pressure regulator to deliver 50 PSI to system.
9--51) B. Plug in oxygen mask at each outlet in cabin.
1. The control cable (3) (Fig. 35--1) is attached to ac- C. Open cabin door and place control knob in ”half
tuating arm (4) on reducing valve (5). This cable is open” position.
routed through various bulkheads along the left side
panel to control knob (6) at pilot’s position. The control D. Allow system to purge for one hour. If an offen-
sive odor still lingers, continue purging system for an
is a push--pull cable assembly that is activated by a ro-
additional hour. If such odors still remain, replace sup-
tating knob assembly. The supply gauge (7), located
ply cylinder. After system has been adequately purged,
adjacent to this control, indicates pressure of oxygen
remove masks from outlets, place control knob in
available in system.
”OFF” position. Service system as described in
2. The pilot’s and co--pilot’s outlets and passenger 35--00--01.
outlets should be inspected for damage and cleanli-
6. Oxygen cylinder removal.
ness during servicing (8 & 9).
The oxygen cylinder is located in tailcone, aft of bag-
3. Inspect individual oxygen masks, and fittings for gage compartment bulkhead. Access to cylinder is ob-
damage. tained through access door on left side of aircraft aft of
4. Oxygen system test procedures. wing.
A. Remove oxygen line from regulator and plug WARNING
line. Cap open regulator port with clean plastic cap to Keep fire, cigarettes and sparks away from vicin-
prevent contamination of regulator. ity of the oxygen cylinder. Oil and grease will IG-
NITE upon contact with oxygen under pressure.
B. Conduct low pressure system leak test using a
70 +/-- 10 PSI oxygen supply plugged into one cabin A. Place pilot’s control knob in ”OFF” position.
outlet and a test gauge plugged into another outlet. Ap- B. Gain access to cylinder through access door.
ply 70 +/-- 10 PSI to system, allow 2 minutes for system C. Slowly loosen supply line fittings at cylinder
to stabilize; remove oxygen supply. Drop in pressure valves, (reference Figure 35--1), to relieve any pres-
after 15 minutes shall not exceed 5 PSIG. sure that may exist in supply lines. After pressure is re-
C. Remove temporary plug, located at end of line lieved, remove lines.
at regulator, and ensure that cylinder is charged to ca- D. Disconnect control cable (3) from arm (4) on re-
pacity. ducing valve (5).
D. Conduct high pressure test using cylinder pres- E. Cap all open lines and regulator openings with
sure. Refer to supply gauge on pilot’s side wall; note clean metal caps.
cylinder pressure. There shall be no pressure loss after
F. NOTE orientation of regulator valves and control
30 minutes. If leakage exists, apply MIL--L--25567 leak
arm relative to attachment lines and bulkheads, prior to
test solution to suspected areas. After test, wipe clean
removal.
and dry. Make necessary repairs and retest.
G. Loosen cylinder retaining clamps (11), while
5. Oxygen system purging. supporting cylinder. Carefully remove cylinder/regula-
Offensive odors may be removed from oxygen system tor assembly from secured position.
by purging. The system should also be purged any time 7. Oxygen cylinder installation.
lines are left open and subject to contamination. Purg-
ing is accomplished by connecting a recharging cart to NOTE
system and permitting oxygen to flow through lines and On AVOX System/Scott Oxygen Bottle Regulator
outlets until any offensive odors have been carried control lever arm, the clevis pin and clinch nut
away. MUST be removed and the 3/16 inch hole reamed
to .250/.254 and deburred. Then install Cable
WARNING Stop in regulator lever. Attach cable wire to cable
Avoid making sparks and keep all burning ciga- stop. Check for proper ON – OFF position of
rettes or fire away from vicinity of airplane when cockpit control to make sure full travel is ob-
the outlets are in use. Inspect filler connection tained in order for oxygen to be completely ON or
for cleanliness before attaching it to filler valve. OFF. Complete cable stop attachment. Cut ex-
Make sure that your hands, tools, and clothing cess cable wire off and bend wire end over 90o.
are clean, particularly from grease and oil stains,
A. Place new cylinder/regulator assembly into
for these contaminants will IGNITE upon contact
position in clamps, secure and safety. New cylinder/
with oxygen under pressure.
regulator assembly should be positioned with regulator
The following procedures are recommended to purge valves and control arm in same position as old, re-
system: moved cylinder assembly components.
35--00--02
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
B. Remove caps from lines. Carefully inspect all NOTE

connections for damage or any foreign substance be- Oxygen cylinders must be hydrostatic tested in
fore connection to new cylinder and valves. accordance with DOT Code of Federal Regula-
tions, Title 49, Volume 2, Part 173.34.
C. Connect all lines to proper fittings. Connect con-
(REFER TO SECTION 5--10--01 ALSO)
trol cable (3) to arm (4) on reducer valve (5).
NOTE
D. Charge cylinder, if required, to correct pressure, Light weight and composite oxygen cylinders
see recharging table on (Figure 35--2). must be replaced every 10,000 recharge cycles.
E. Place pilot’s control knob to ”ON” position and NOTE
plug an oxygen mask into pilot’s outlet to check for Maximum life for composite oxygen cylinders is
proper system operation. 15 years.
F. Repeat this checkout procedure for all outlets. NOTE
G. Test system for leaks per leak test check, para- Maximum life for light weight steel oxygen cylin-
graph 35--00--02. ders is 24 years.
Filling pressures will vary due to ambient temperature
H. Reinstall access door.
in the filling area and the rise of temperature resulting
AVOX Systems/Scott Aviation recommends an oxygen from compression of the oxygen. Because of this,
system component overhaul at minimum six year inter- merely filling to 1850 PSIG will not result in a properly
vals for the 895 Series CRA. Refer to AVOX Compo- filled cylinder. Fill to pressures indicated on chart, Fig-
nent Maintenance Manual for overhaul procedures. ure 35--2, for ambient temperatures.
AMBIENT FILLING PRESSURE AMBIENT FILLING PRESSURE

TEMPERATURE oF PSIG TEMPERATURE oF PSIG
0 1650 50 1875
10 1700 60 1925
20 1725 70 1975
30 1775 80 2000
40 1825 90 2050
OXYGEN FILLING PRESSURES VS. TEMPERATURES CHART
FIGURE 35--2
35--00--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
35--00--02
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 37
VACUUM
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 37
VACUUM
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
37--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37--42--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
37-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
Page 2
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 37
VACUUM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
37--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
37--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
37--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Air Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
37--11--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
37--11--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
37--11--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
37--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
37--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
37--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--12--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--12--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--13--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--13--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--13--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--14--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--14--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--14--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--14--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
37--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--21--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--21--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--21--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--21--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--21--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum Gauge Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
37--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Air Pump Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
37--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupling Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
37--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand--by Vacuum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
37--41--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
37--42--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
37--42--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
37--42--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
37--43--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailcone Mounted Stand--by Vacuum System . . . . 10
37--43--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
37-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
37--00--00 -- GENERAL A vacuum system malfunction is indicated by a (RED),

HI/LO VAC annunciator light. A FLASHING annuncia-
S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU tor light indicates LOW VACUUM and a STEADY light
27--0325, 27--0327 indicates HIGH VACUUM. The STBY VAC legend on
the annunciator is illuminated when the STBY VAC
An engine driven, dry air, vacuum pump supplies suc- switch is ON.
tion for vacuum operated gyroscopic flight instruments,
the Directional Gyro and Artificial Horizon. Air is passed S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
through a filter before entering instruments. A vacuum (GARMIN G1000 equipped)
regulator valve is incorporated to maintain required op- Garmin G1000 equipped aircraft are all electric with no
erating vacuum throughout engine power range. Idle vacuum system requirements on the standard aircraft.
RPM settings will normally not provide adequate vacu- 37--10--00 -- DISTRIBUTION
um to satisfactorily operate instruments.
37--11--00 -- DRY AIR PUMP
A standby vacuum system is standard for the M20M A dry air pump (Figure 37--1) requires no maintenance
aircraft. This is either installed on engine accessory between replacement. Replacement is recommended
pad through an electrically activated clutch assembly at 500 hours and at engine overhaul.
or, inside the tailcone (optional when No. 2 alternator is
NOTE
installed) as a separate electric motor driven/vacuum
Always replace inoperative pump with new air
pump assembly.
pump.
Either standby vacuum system should be activated CAUTION
manually when the “HI/LO VAC” light flashes while op- Always clean pump to filter line and replace filter
erating on engine driven system. This is done by push- between pump and firewall when replacing a
ing STBY VAC switch, located on instrument panel, failed pump to prevent particles from failed pump
ON. being ingested by new pump.
ARTIFICIAL
HORIZON
STAND--BY VACUUM
PUMP OPERATIONAL
CHECK SYSTEM
VACUUM
SWITCH
DIRECTIONAL
GYRO
VACUUM
REGULATING
VALVE
FILTERS
GYRO FILTER
STAND--BY
VACUUM OVERBOARD TUBES
PUMP (PRESSURE)
MAIN VACUUM R37--1
PUMP
TYPICAL VACUUM SYSTEM

FIGURE 37--1
37--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
37--11--01 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 37--11--04 -- INSTALLATION OF NEW PUMP (Main

or Stand--by)
Protection of pneumatic, dry air, pump when cleaning
engine compartment, is very important. CAUTION
Never install a pump that has been dropped.
WARNING 1. Consult current parts manual, Airborne’s Applica-
Failure to protect dry air pump from contamination List, or the PMA label on pump box to verify that
tion by engine cleaning solvents may result in pump is correct model for engine and/or system.
failure of dry air pump within a short period of
operation. 2. Place pump mounting flange in a jaw--protected
vise, with drive coupling downward. Protect pump
Prior to washing down engine compartment, the follow- mounting flange with soft metal or wood.
ing precautions must be taken for better service life of CAUTION
pneumatic, dry air pump. Pump housing should never be placed directly in
1. Dry air pump coupling. a vise, since clamping across the center housing
will cause an internal failure of carbon rotor.
CAUTION
3. Spray fitting threads with silicone and LET DRY.
Do not blast air pump coupling area or other
DO NOT use Teflon tape, pipe dope or thread lube.
pneumatic system components with cleaning
solvent under high pressure. 4. Install fittings in pump. Hand tighten.
5. Use only a box wrench to tighten fittings to desired
Protect coupling area between pump mounting flange
position. DO NOT make more than one and one half (1
and pump housing by wrapping a protective covering
1/2) turns beyond hand--tight position.
around that area during engine cleaning.
6. Install new pump mounting gasket (supplied with
CAUTION new pump). (NOTE: No gasket is required between
Do not allow protective covering around cou- stand--by pump/clutch assembly and its adapter plate
pling or filters to become saturated with solvent. mounting pad.)
Seals in front frame of housing behind coupling are de- 7. Always replace ALL locking washers when instal-
signed to keep out foreign material such as dirt, dust ling a new pump. Tighten all four (4) mounting nuts -- 90
and light fluid. However, fluid under high pressure can to 110 in. lbs.
be forced past seals and enter pump. 8. Prior to reconnecting hoses, inspect inside of hose
2. Dry air pump fittings. Before washing engine, carefully to make sure it is clean and free of all debris,
check pump fittings for looseness of threaded fittings. oils or solvents. Use vacuum or air pressure to clean
Fluid can seep through loose threads and enter pump. lines. Remove hoses from aircraft, if necessary.
When hose clearance is tight, making it difficult to rein-
3. Dry air pump discharge hose (vacuum instrument stall onto pump fitting, spray fitting at hose end with sili-
system). Plug end of hose or fitting and flag it with a cone. LET DRY, then install hose by pushing it straight
RED “Remove Before Running Engine” tag, then clean on.
engine.
CAUTION
CAUTION Do not wiggle hose from side to side. Wiggling
Remove plug prior to running engine. could cause particles to be cut from hose ID.
These particles will damage pump.
37--11--02 -- SERVICING
CAUTION
The dry air pump requires no servicing. The internal Change all filters in system. This must be done
parts are self--lubricating and require NO ADDITIONAL or pump warranty may be voided.
lubricating.
37--12--00 -- VACUUM REGULATOR
37--11--03 -- REMOVAL Vacuum regulator (Figure 37--1) is a spring--controlled
1. Disconnect hoses from dry air pump. diaphragm valve for regulating vacuum for aircraft’s
pneumatic instrument system. Vacuum regulator is lo-
2. Remove main air pump from engine; discard old cated on left firewall, inside cabin, just under glare-
mounting gasket and locking hardware. shield. Adjust vacuum regulator valve according to
3. Remove fittings from pump. Retain fittings if they Section 37--12--05.
are serviceable; clean thoroughly before reusing. Dis- 37--12--01 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
card twisted fittings and nuts with rounded corners. Check general condition of regulator to insure it is se-
cure and in airworthy condition.
4. Pad inspection. Check condition of engine AND
pad seal. If seal shows any signs of oil leakage, replace 37--12--02 -- SERVICING
seal. Replace seal if there is any doubt as to its service- No servicing is required for regulator other than filter re-
ability. placement. See Section 37--13--00 for details.
37--11--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
37--12--03 -- REMOVAL 37--13--03 -- REMOVAL

1. Inside aircraft -- underneath instrument panel, re- 1. Vacuum regulator garter filter is removed by
move both instrument lines from vacuum regulator; cap stretching it over and off regulator frame.
lines to prevent foreign objects from entering system. 2. The Gyro instrument’s filter is mounted on a brack-
2. Engine compartment -- remove hoses from vacu- et under instrument panel.
um regulator; cap hoses to prevent foreign objects from 3. Disconnect two hoses coming into filter and re-
entering system. move filter from bracket.
3. Loosen and remove large nuts at firewall on vacu- 37--13--04 -- INSTALLATION
um regulator. 1. Prior to installing a new vacuum regulator filter,
4. Pull regulator aft to remove from aircraft. check regulator to insure that it is clean from any foreign
material.
37--12--04 -- REINSTALL
2. Reinstall new filter in fitting and secure.
1. Inside aircraft, insert vacuum regulator through
CAUTION
mounting hole in firewall.
Don’t over tighten; over tightening will crack rear
2. Install large nut on regulator and tighten. housing.
3. Engine compartment, install hoses from pump to 37--14--00 -- HOSES
regulator and secure. The hoses are of aircraft, MIL--H--XXX, type.
4. Inside aircraft, install both instrument lines to regu- 37--14--01 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
lator and secure. During engine cleaning, protect discharge hose:
37--12--05 -- ADJUSTMENT 1. Plug end of hose and flag it with a red “Remove Be-
1. Tee calibrated vacuum gauge into system up- fore Running Engine” tag, then clean engine.
stream of regulator (see Figure 37--1). CAUTION
2. Operate engine at a minimum of 1700 RPM. If vac- Remove plug prior to running engine.
uum regulator is not set at 4.75 +/--0.25 In. Hg., bend Periodic check of all clamps for security is recom-
locking tab away from thumb adjustment screw. Turn- mended.
ing screw IN, will increase vacuum; turning screw OUT, 37--14--02 -- SERVICING
will decrease vacuum. Set vacuum to read 4.75
+/--0.25 In. Hg. Inspect inside of hose carefully to make sure it is clean
and free of all debris, oils or solvents. Use vacuum or air
NOTE pressure to clean lines. Remove hoses from aircraft, if
After setting regulator, rebend tab back to lock necessary.
adjusting screw.
37--14--03 -- REMOVAL
37--13--00 -- FILTERS Replace old, hard, cracked or brittle hose, particularly
All filters, except vacuum regulator filter are of paper-- on pump inlet. Sections of inner layers may separate,
pleated material design. The vacuum regulator filter is causing pump failure.
a foam--garter design. 37--14--04 -- REINSTALL
37--13--01 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES Where hose clearance is tight, making it difficult to rein-
1. Air filter replacement intervals: (See Section stall it onto pump fitting, spray fitting at hose end with
5--10--01) silicone. LET DRY, then install hose by pushing it
straight on.
A. Vacuum regulator, garter filter -- every 100
NOTE
hours.
Do not wiggle hose from side to side. Wiggling
B. Gyro instrument filters -- every 500 hours or at could cause particles to be cut from hose ID.
least once a year. These particles would damage pump.
2. All filters require routine inspection of condition of Make certain hoses are connected to correct fittings.
element and security of filter in system. Incorrect installation will cause damage to gyro system.
3. All filters must be changed when a new pump is Install clamps and secure.
installed. 37--20--00 -- INDICATING
37--13--02 -- SERVICING The indicating system contains a low vacuum warning
light, HI/LO VAC in annunciator, which flashes (RED)
Filters require no service except, routine inspections. when vacuum is below 4.25 +/--.2 In. Hg. and a high
Replace with new current configuration filters. vacuum warning light, HI/LO VAC in annunciator, which
Optional instrument filters (if installed) should follow illuminates steady (RED) when vacuum goes above
same cleaning and replacement schedule. 5.5 (+.2 --.0) In. Hg.
37--12--03
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
37--21--00 -- VACUUM SWITCH

CONNECTOR WIRING
The vacuum switch, Fig. 37--1, is located on either the PIN 1 +28VDC
Artificial Horizon or Directional Gyro. 6 5 PIN 2 GROUND
4 3 PIN 3 +10VDC TO XMITTER
The illuminating low and high ”light ADJUSTMENTS” PIN 4 +28VDC (LIGHTING)
2 1 PIN 5 SIGNAL FROM XMITTER
are done on the switch, NOT on the annunciator panel. OPEN
PIN 6
37--21--01 -- DESCRIPTION
--
+
The switch is a low and high vacuum sensing, adjust- 1 1
able unit. 2 2
3 3
37--21--02 -- MAINTENANCE 4 4
5 5
6 6
Inspect for switch security on instrument and that all
CINCH S--306--AB CINCH P--308--AB
wires are secure at switch. R37--2
37--21--03 -- REMOVAL
SIGMA--TEK VACUUM ADDITION ADAPTER HAR-
Disconnect wires and unscrew from aft instrument NESS
housing. FIGURE 37--2
37--21--04 -- REINSTALL 37--22--00 -- VACUUM GAUGE ADJUSTMENT
SIGMA--TEK/DIGITAL S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
Install switch in housing and tighten. Reconnect wires. 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327
CAUTION It is necessary to calibrate the vacuum gauge to the
Do not over tighten. Over tightening will cause transducer whenever either is replaced; use the follow-
cracking of aft instrument housing. ing procedures:
1. Remove gauge from cluster.
37--21--05 -- ADJUSTMENT
2. Remove two (2) screws from rear of gauge case
ANALOG GAUGES and slide case from gauge.
1. Remove switch from instrument. Reinstall wires if 3. Obtain or construct adaptor cable (See Figure
removed. Attach polyvinyl hose, “T” fitting and cali- 37--2 for schematic).
brated gauge to vacuum switch. Connect other end of 4. Connect plug end into connector in rear of case.
hose to a vacuum source. 5. Connect socket end adaptor cable into gauge con-
2. Turn aircraft power ON. The “HI/LOW VAC” light nector. The 2 Pin connector is for the Digital Voltmeter
should flash. (DVM).
6. Tee in a calibrated Vacuum Gauge down stream of
3. Apply vacuum and adjust source to 4.25 (+/--0.2) vacuum regulator.
In. Hg. Adjust Low setting screw (connector end of
switch) to illuminate low vacuum circuit on the annun- 7. Apply vacuum to aircraft system. Use separate
ciator panel. vacuum supply or stand--by vacuum pump.
8. With Digital Voltmeter (DVM) connected to 2 Pin
4. Increase vacuum source to 5.5 (+.2--.0) In. Hg. connector on adaptor harness, check excitation volt-
Punch a small jewelers screw driver through the polyvi- age for 10 VDC. Adjust R2 (vertical adjust screw on top
nyl tube and into fitting where the high setting screw is right of C/B on gauge) if necessary.
located and adjust until the “HI/LO VAC” light on annun-
ciator is illuminated. 9. Adjust R4 (upper potentiometer in center of C/B,
right screw) so gauge reads 3 in. Hg.
5. After switch adjustment is completed turn aircraft 10. Set regulator for 5 in. Hg.; adjust R3 (lower poten-
power OFF. tiometer in center of C/B, left screw) so that gauge
reads 5 in. Hg.
6. Remove switch from hose and gauge.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 as needed to obtain val-
7. Reinstall switch on Gyro. Reconnect wires. ues.
CAUTION 12. Remove adaptor cable; reassemble gauge to

Crossing electrical wires on vacuum switch will case.
cause annunciator lights to act in reverse. 13. Re--install assemble gauge unit into cluster case.
37--21--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
14. Adjust regulator for 4.8 in. Hg. If annunciator is flashing (RED), push STBY VAC
15 Verify aircraft instrument reads same as cali- switch ON and annunciator light should extinguish as
brated gauge. stand--by vacuum system takes over for all instrument
operations. If annunciator is steady (RED), monitor
16. Remove Calibrated gauge after verification. flight instruments with non--vacuum gauges and con-
tinue with flight, if feasible or land and have Vacuum
System repaired.
WARNING
Malfunction of main air pump could be caused by
some contamination within vacuum system and
stand--by vacuum pump/clutch assembly could
2 3
be affected by the same cause.
DRIVE 1 COUPLING
GEAR COUPLING DRIVE Operation of the stand--by vacuum pump can be
GEAR
checked when engine is running by the following proce-
VACUUM PUMPS MAY VARY, BUT SHEAR
COUPLING WILL BE SIMILAR FOR MOST VACUUM dures:
PUMPS R37--3
1. Verify indicator RED button on C/B panel is visible.
DRY AIR PUMP COUPLING INSPECTION/RE- 2. Turn Stand--by Vacuum pump switch -- ON.
PLACEMENT
FIGURE 37--3 3. RED indicator button will not be visible if stand--by
37--30--00 -- DRY AIR PUMP REPAIR vacuum pump is operating properly.
Dry air pumps are not designed to be overhauled or re- 4. Turn Stand--by Vacuum pump switch -- OFF.
paired.
37--30--01 -- COUPLING INSPECTION AND RE- A complete check out and maintenance of entire vacu-
PLACEMENT um system is necessary if either pump experiences a
1. Remove vacuum pump from engine in accordance malfunction.
with Section 37--11--03. If installed, it is recommended that the tailcone
2. If coupling (1) (Figure 37--3) has sheared, remove mounted stand--by vacuum pump system be turned
engine coupling drive gear (2) from engine gear hous- ON prior to engine start to verify that the vacuum gauge
ing. (if equipped) indicates normal operating vacuum and
3. Use screwdriver or similar tool, remove pump drive that the gyros spin up and erect. When engine is
coupling (1) from coupling drive gear (2) and coupling started, the check valves close and the stand--by vacu-
drive gear (3) being careful not to damage drive pins. um pump system will not produce sufficient additional
vacuum for any indication on the gauge (if equipped) to
4. Push new drive coupling (1) into place on coupling
be noticeable.
drive gear (3).
5. Push coupling drive gear (2) into place on pump 37--42--00 -- MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
drive coupling (1).
ENGINE MOUNTED STAND--BY VACUUM SYSTEM
6. Turn by hand -- check for correct rotation of pump.
7. Reinstall pump on engine and test run (refer to The engine mounted stand--by vacuum pump/clutch
Section 37--11--04) assembly is mounted below the main vacuum pump
8. Make log book entry. approximately centered on engine accessory case.
37--40--00 -- STAND--BY VACUUM SYSTEM 37--42--01 -- REMOVAL (CLUTCH DRIVEN)
37--41--00 -- OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
1. Disconnect hoses from stand--by vacuum pump/
The Stand--by Vacuum Pump/clutch assembly, incor- clutch assembly.
porated on the M20M, is either an engine mounted
standard vacuum pump coupled to an electric clutch 2. Remove four (4) nuts and washers attaching
assembly or a tailcone mounted, electrically driven, stand--by pump/clutch assembly and remove from
standard vacuum pump to allow operator selected ON/ adapter plate pad. Adapter plate does not require re-
OFF operations as necessary. The Stand--by Vacuum moval.
system is to be used, only as needed, when the main
vacuum pump malfunctions. The VAC annunciator light 3. Proceed with inspection of stand--by vacuum
will illuminate (RED), either flashing (low vacuum) or pump/clutch assembly per steps in Section 37--11--03,
steady (high vacuum) when this situation occurs. steps 3 and 4.
37--30--00
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE 5. It is recommended that if Stand--by Vacuum Sys-

If during inspection, the engine AND 20000 pad tem is not used regularly, that every 90 days (approxi-
seal shows signs of leaking, the adapter plate mately) the Stand--by System should be turned on, in
and drive extension must be removed to allow flight, for 20--30 minutes to get the pump and drive mo-
replacement of pad seal between drive extension tor warm enough to dry out any condensation that may
and AND 20000 pad. A gasket is also required have accumulated. The exhaust port of dry air pump is
between drive extension and stand--by pump/ routed into the housing of electric motor to assist in
clutch adapter plate. No gasket is required be- purging moisture and debris from motor assembly.
tween stand--by pump/clutch assembly and 37--43--01 -- OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
adapter plate pad.
The tailcone mounted Stand--by pump is to be used
37--42--02 -- INSTALLATION OF NEW STANDBY only as needed when the main Vacuum pump malfunc-
VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY tions. The VAC annunciator light will illuminate (RED)
NOTE either flashing (low vacuum) or steady (high vacuum)
Refer to Airborne Service Letter, No. 54D, for when this situation occurs. If annunciator light is flash-
inspection information on stand--by vacuum ing (RED), push STBY VAC switch ON and annunciator
pump/clutch assembly drive coupling. light should extinguish as stand--by vacuum system
If Airborne Service Letter No. 54D has been takes over for all instrument operations. If annunciator
complied with, no further inspections are re- is steady (RED), monitor flight instruments with non--
quired. vacuum gauges and continue with flight if feasible, or
WARNING land and have vacuum system inspected and repaired.
If adapter plate, to mount stand--by pump/clutch It is recommended that prior to aircraft engine start, the
assembly, has been removed for any reason, it is stand--by vacuum pump be turned ON to verify that the
necessary to apply Loctite, # 271 on threads of vacuum gauge (if equipped) indicates normal operat-
flush head attaching screws (4 each) and torque ing vacuum and that the gyros spin up and erect. When
each screw to 70 inch lbs. the engine starts, the check valve closes and the
1. Refer to Section 37--11--04 for installation of new stand--by vacuum pump system will not produce
stand--by vacuum pump/clutch assembly. No gasket is enough additional vacuum for any indication on the
required between stand--by pump/clutch assembly and gauge (if equipped) to be noticeable.
adapter plate pad. NOTE
2. Replace stand--by vacuum pump/clutch assembly PC, STATIC, VACUUM, DRAIN or any low pres-
as a complete unit. sure line may be spliced to replace a section of
3. Replace all lockwashers. Torque mounting nuts 90 damaged line. Short sections of hose may be
-- 110 in. lbs. spliced together to produce planned lengths
37--43--00 -- TAILCONE MOUNTED STAND--BY (max. 2 splices for any given length). Hose cou-
VACUUM SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED) plers may be purchased or manufactured, barbed
The tailcone mounted stand--by vacuum pump assem- or beaded, high density polyethylene, nylon,
bly is to be repaired/serviced in accordance with the plated steel or aluminum. Couplers manufactured
particular vendor’s procedures. in--house to be manufactured from from alumi-
num tubing. O.D. of tubing to match I.D. of hose,
If no specific maintenance information is available from
W.T. .028/.035, bead both ends, length 2.5”. Use
the manufacturer the following is recommended:
any type hose clamp to attach hose to coupler.
1. Inspect to verify hoses and wires are clear of any
obstruction or interference with other components that
may chafe hoses or wires.
2. Inspect hose clamps on all fittings to verify tight
and secure.
3. Every 100 hours/annual inspection – inspect set
screws in motor/air pump coupling to verify tight and
secure.
4. A dry air pump requires no maintenance between
replacement. Replacement is recommended at 500
hours operating time. It is recommended that stand--by
vacuum system operating time be documented.
37--42--02
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 39
ELECTRICAL PANELS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 39
ELECTRICAL PANELS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
39--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--11--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--11--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--11--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
39-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 39
ELECTRICAL PANELS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
39--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
39--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument and Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
39--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
39--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avionics Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
39--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
39--10--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
39--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
39--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cluster Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
39--11--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
39--11--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear Safety Override Switch . . . . . . . 14
39--11--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
39--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avionics/Radio Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
39--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annunciator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
39--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Locator Trans. (ELT) Switch . . . . . 15
39--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument/Radio Light & Glareshield
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
39--12--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessory Socket (14 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
39--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical/Electronic Equipment Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
39--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
39--21--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
39-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
3 N 33 3
AVIONICS/RADIO PANEL (TYP.)
FUEL FLOW DME A/P SEL X X

MEMORY
ON AUDIO NAV 1 ARNAV
ON ELT--100
ON
GEAR GEAR LEFT RIGHTSPEEDALT PROPPITOT
DOWNUNSAFEFUEL FUEL BRAKEAIR DE--ICEHEAT OFF N 2 ARM
TO TEST/RESET
PRESS
WAIT ON
1 SEC
-- 30 PRESS ARM LEFT
30 + X X
11 22 33 11 22 33 0 HI/LO L. ALT R. ALT STARTSTBY REMOTE BOOST ALT
100 FEET E F E F --70 +150 VAC VOLTSVOLTSPOWER VAC RNAV PUMP SENSE
200 40 18 32V
0
9 1 + +
ICS VOX FREECW BAT--1
20 20 L.FUEL QTY. R. FUEL QTY. AMPS VOL PILOT ISO
SQUELCH + +
180 60 10 10 -- SL VEC W PUSH
AIRS EED 8 2 PUSH + +
300
301 VOLTS LEFT
302 MIN. LIVE ALT
160 10 10
KN TS 20 20 FIELD BAT--2
7 3 INTER VOX nat PUSH
80
140 40 6080 300 400
6 4 0 20 100 100
150 200
250 200 500 COMCOM
1 2
120 100 5 A TEL INT
OFF EXT
23:59 O TEL 1 COMM 2 1 NAV 2 DME MKR ADF AUTO
PSI F F M
OIL PRESS OIL TEMP CHT MIC
LEFT LEFT RIGHT
ALT BAT AUX AUX
STARTCLEARMODE E COMM 1
STOP D.C.
ELEC.
X X
L
E 118.30 121.90
V USE STBY
Alcor
NAV HDG KY 186 TSO PULL
N 10 T OFF
33 3 EGT TEST
GS GS Fx100 R GEAR GEAR GEAR VAC STALL ANN AMP AMP
5 I ACTR RELAY WARN WARN WARN (+) (--)
UP VERTICAL
30
6
100 FEET M
20 59.8 150 23 108.00
W
TURN COORDINATOR E
DOWN
24
NM KT MIN FRQ
12
5 LDG TAXI GLARSHLDPANEL RADIODEFROST

STARTER
BOOST
L R X X LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT BLOWER
BLOWERRELAY PUMP
1 1
15
ENR
21
10
S
F RNV USE DSP
2 MIN.
NO PITCH L
0 NAV 1 KNS 80 NAV SYSTEM
--40 +40 INFORMATION A
P OAT ENG FUEL TURN TRIM/ RUDDERCOWL
MODE DME WAYPOINT FREQ RAD DST INSTR INSTR FLOW COORD FLAP TRIM FLAP
C P IND TACH IND IND IND
OAT N 3 0 O VOR RNAV HOLD USE DSP DATA
33 888888 S
PULL
OFF 10 RUDDERCOWL
30
FLAP TRIM FLAP CIGAR SPEED

ACTR ACTR ACTR LIGHTER GEM BRAKE A/H HSI
MASTER L R AVIONICS
FIELD MASTER
119.80 119.80 109.10 108.40
W
27 9 25
40 45 20 28
35 USE STANDBY USE STANDBY/RAD
RPM
50
24
30
12
0 KX 165 TSD COMM 2 NAV 2 COM 1 NAV 1 COM 2 NAV 2 AUDIO PHONEXPNDRENCODER
MAN 15
15 OFF
ON 100200 25
PRESS
HUNDREDS
21 FWD 50 20 IN.HG. 5
25
S 15 10
TST CLR
18 PULL PULL STORM
TEST TEST ADF 1 ADF 2 DME R/NAV SCOPE RMI INV INTERCOM
OFF
RUDDER TRIM
OPTION BOOST STD--BY PITOT PROP ELEC. ON AP
L R ON
PUMP VAC HEAT DE--ICE TRIM RUDDER HDG FD ALT NAV BC APPR ARGUS YAW
AUTO A/P MARKERRADAR
PILOT ALERT LORAN BCN ALTM MAP DAMP
DISP
L 0 R OFF
UP TEST
CIRCUIT
FLIGHT/ENGINE BREAKER
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(TYPICAL)
PANEL
(TYPICAL) R39--1
TYPICAL ANALOG INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROL PANEL

FIGURE 39--1
39--00--00 -- GENERAL See Chapter 91 for Electrical System Hardware Identi-
fication Charts and Schematics.
ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257)
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) THRU 27--TBA)
The G1000 Integrated Avionics System (Fig. 39--3 &
The instrument panel is divided into three basic group-
39--4) is a fully integrated flight, engine, communica-
ings; (1) Flight/Engine Instruments, (2) Avionics/Radio
tion, navigation and surveillance instrumentation sys-
Panel and (3) Circuit Breaker Panel. The flight/engine
tem. The system consists of a Primary Flight Display
instrument panel is shock mounted. The Radio/Avion-
(PFD), Multi--Function Display (MFD), audio panel
ics Panel generally, has individual racks for compo-
(GMA), Air Data Computer (ADC), Attitude and Head-
nents and are quick removal type. The Circuit Breaker
ing Reference System (AHRS), engine/airframe proc-
Panel is located in a pullout/removable panel, located
essing unit (GEA), and integrated avionics (GIA) con-
at the far right of cockpit.
taining VHF communications, VHS navigation, and
Circuit breaker/switches for standard and/or optional GPS navigation.
accessories and equipment are located on upper/mid For Operation, Maintenance and Troubleshooting, re-
left and bottom of flight instrument panel. fer to Garmin publications (available in aircraft docu-
Cluster gauges, containing fuel quantity and engine op- mentation):
erating gauges are located above flight and navigation G1000 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
instruments on pilot’s instrument panel. G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
G1000 Configuration Manual
The annunciator is located at the top of Avionics/Radio
G1000 System Maintenance Manual
Panel.
G1000 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
The panel illustrations depicted in Figures 39--1 & 39--2 G1000 Avionics Wiring Diagram
shows typical installations. Model year improvements, G1000 Master Data List
technical improvements or various avionics installa- G1000 Required Equipment List
tions dictate which instrument will be installed in a given G1000 Post Installation Checkout Procedure
location. EQUIPMENT LOCATION
A radio blower is incorporated to cool the avionics pack- The G1000 ADC and GEA modules are located behind
age. It is turned on when Radio Master Switch is turned the instrument panel. The PFD, MFD, and Audio Panel
ON. are mounted to the panel and may be removed using a
39--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
hexagonal tool. The magnetometer is located in the gine information, mapping terrain information and for
right wing outboard of the landing light. The AHRS, and flight planning. The audio panel is used for selection of
remaining modules are located in the tailcone on the radios for transmitting and listening, intercom func-
Avionics Rack (Fig. 39--4). tions, and marker beacon functions.
Circuit breakers/switches for standard and/or optional The primary function of the VHF Communication por-
accessories and equipment are located on upper/mid tion of the G1000 is to enable external radio commu-
left and bottom of flight instrument panel. nication. The primary function of the VOR/ILS Receiver
portion of the equipment is to receive and demodulate
The Circuit Breaker Panel is located in a removable
VOR, localizer, and Glide Slope signals. The primary
panel at the far right of instrument panel.
function of the GPS portion of the system is to acquire
The annunciator is located at top right center of instru- signals from the GPS satellites, recover orbital data,
ment panel. make range and Doppler measurements, and process
The primary function of the PFD is to provide attitude, this information in real time to obtain the user’s position,
heading, air data, navigation, and alerting information velocity, and time.
to the pilot. The PFD may also be used for flight plan- See Chapter 91 for Electrical System Hardware Identi-
ning. The primary function of the MFD is to provide en- fication Charts and Schematics.
AVIONICS/RADIO PANEL (TYP.)

3 N 33 3
A/P SEL
NAV 1
X
+ FREE CW ELT
+ +
TST
BRT GEAR GEAR LEFT RIGHTSPEED ALT PROP PITOT -- SLAVECCW ON ONRESET
DOWNUNSAFEFUEL FUEL BRAKE AIR DE--ICEHEAT
X
F FLOW L FUEL R FUEL NAV 2
DIM HI/LO ALT START STBYREMOTE BOOST
14.8
GPH
22.4
--GAL.--
28.2 RPM MAP CHT EGT OP OT
VAC VOLTS POWERVAC RNAV Mooney
PUMP ALT
2400 450 1600 100 SENSE
OAT VACUUM VDC--AMP 240
PUSH 1000 10 30 200 1200 10 100
IN-- VOLTS
+20 OC 4.75 +54 O O O BAT--1
HG 222 0 23.3 IN./HG 353 F 1568 F 68 PSI 180 F PUSH
TRANSMIT RECEIVE ICS
HI LO 1 2 3 PA VOL---
-----VOX/TX ALT
A SENS PLT COM 1COM 2COM 3 MKR CREWSPKR FIELD BAT--2
O OFFON 1 2 3 PA PUSH
MSTR OFF
M SPLIT COPLT NAV 1 NAV 2 ADF DME PLT ISOTEST (EMG)
100 FEET WARN
200 40
30 + -- 30 0
23:59 20 20
9 1
NAV FPL MSG
180 60 10 10 ALT FLT PNL O/H
AIRS EED 8 2 NRST D AUX
300 OUT BAT AUX AUX
301
160 10 10 302 E ON/OFF
STARTCLEARMODE KN TS 20 20
STOP 7 3 L
180
80 E
140 V
6 4
170
120 T 5
160 A 100 T
S R Trimble TN500 GEAR GEAR GEAR VAC STALL ANN AMP AMP
150
140 I ACTR RELAY WARN WARN WARN (+) (--)
Trimble COMM Trimble NAV
M
SQ TUNE VOL TUNE

ON/OFF
D.C. MEM MEM
ELEC. N 3
LDG TAXI GLARSHLD
LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT BLOWER
STARTER
PANEL RADIODEFROST
BLOWERRELAY
NAV HDG 33 F
N 10 VOL PUSH PUSH PUSH
3 L ON/OFF CSR ID CSR
30
GS 33 GS 5
6
A Trimble COMM Trimble XPOND

UP VERTICAL
30
P
6
100 FEET TRIM/

INSTR INSTR TURN FLAP
W
20
W
P MOD#1 MOD#2 COORD TACH IND

E
TURN COORDINATOR SQ TUNE ONALT

OFF CODE
O
DOWN MEM VFR
24
S
12
5
24
12
L R
TO
21 15
10
S
15 VOL PUSH PUSH PUSH
2 MIN. 21 ON/OFF CSR ID TEST FLAP
NO PITCH OBS S HSI
MASTER ALT AVIONICS NAV 1 Trimble NAV A/H ACTR
INFORMATION
FIELD MASTER
VOL TUNE
ON/OFF
MEM COM 1 NAV 1 COM 2 NAV 2 AUDIO PHONE XPNDRENCODER
N
33 30
PUSH PUSH
ID CSR
30
STORM
60
ADF 1 ADF 2 DME R/NAV SCOPE RMI INV INTERCOM
BFO
ANT
ADF 1 2 3 0 PANEL LIGHTS
W
PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH GLARE

ON ON ON ON SHIELD PANEL
TEST AUTO A/P YAW MARKER
24
PILOT ALERT DAMP BCN

12
HIGH PITOT BOOST ELEC. OFF ADF--650--TSO

BOOST HEAT PUMP TRIM
21 15
S
FLIGHT/ENGINE CIRCUIT BREAKER

INSTRUMENT PANEL (TYP.)
PANEL (TYP.) R39--2
TYPICAL MORITZ INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROL PANEL

FIGURE 39--2
39--10--00 -- INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PAN- A. Remove screws attaching glareshield and cover
ELS plate and carefully lift glareshield to expose wire dis-
connects for glareshield lights. Disconnect wires and
39--10--01 -- FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS lift glareshield off.
B. Disconnect plumbing and/or electrical connec-
ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257) tions from flight instruments to be removed.
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) C. Disconnect and remove any post lights.
D. Remove mounting screws securing instrument
1. Removal. to panel.
39--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
GEA 71 ENGINE &

GDU 1040 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY AIRFRAME UNIT*
(PFD) GMA 1347 GDU 1040
TURN
AUDIO PANEL INDICATOR* MULTI--FUNCTION FLIGHT DISPLAY
MASTER WARN SWITCH
(MFD)
ALT. FIELD SWITCH
MASTER POWER
200
20
40
AIRSPEED
180
INDICATOR
AIRSPEED
60
160
MSTR
WARN KNOTS 80
BATTERY SELECT 1/2 140

120 100
MASTER RT/LT
EMERGENCY BUS POWER ALT
ATTITUDE
SWITCH
EMER BATT
INDICATOR
BUS 1/2
TKS CONTROL PANEL

9
100 FEET
0 1 ALTIMETER
8 2
GEAR NOT 300
301
S--TEC FIFTY FIVE X 302
EXTENDED
FRODO LIVES 7 3
MAGNETO/STARTER ICE PITOT HIGH BOOST A/P ELEV

GEAR UP BOOST PUMP POWER TRIM ELT 6 4
LITE HEAT L 5
A 106 KIAS
N HDG NAV APR REV ALT VS
D
SWITCH
I PUSH
N
G GEAR SAFETY
G BYPASS LIGHTS
E 14 VOLTS
A GLARE PANEL
R GEAR DOWN SHIELD
140 KIAS
GEAR EXTD RUDDER
165 KIAS TRIM
3 AMPS MAX
5 A INTERMITTENT
ICE LIGHT SWITCH ELEVATOR

OVERRIDE TRIM ELT
PITOT HEAT SWITCH SWITCH STEC
SWITCH SWITCH ACCESSORY
AUTOPILOT
CHECK GEAR LIGHT AUTO PILOT SOCKET
SWITCH LIGHT DIMMER 14V
GEAR HIGH BOOST SWITCH CONTROL
SWITCH RUDDER TRIM
(M20R ONLY) * LOCATED BEHIND GDU 1040
BOOST PUMP (MFD) M39--3
SWITCH
GARMIN 1000 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROL PANEL

FIGURE 39--3
E. Remove instrument by sliding it forward from connects for glareshield lights. Disconnect wires and
panel. lift glareshield off.
2. Installation. B. Refer to Garmin Maintenance Service Instruc-
A. Place instrument into proper location on panel. tions for detailed component removal instructions.
C. For Airspeed Indicator, Attitude Indicator and Al-
B. Insert and secure mounting screws to hold in-
timeter removal:
strument to panel.
1. Disconnect plumbing and/or electrical con-
C. Connect post lights.
nections from flight instruments to be removed.
D. Connect all plumbing and/or electrical connec-
2. Disconnect and remove any post lights.
tions to instrument; perform pitot--static leak check and
operational check of performed maintenance as re- 3. Remove mounting screws securing instru-
quired. ment to panel.
E. Position glareshield so electrical connections 4. Remove instrument by sliding it forward from
can be made and secured. panel.
F. Secure glareshield and cover plate with screws. D. For Airspeed Indicator, Attitude Indicator and Al-
timeter installation:
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
THRU 27--TBA) 1. Place instrument into proper location on pan-
el.
NOTE:
Exercise care not to bend connecting pins when 2. Insert and secure mounting screws to hold in-
installing electronic components or connecting strument to panel.
data cables. Connecting pins are fragile and easi- 3. Connect post lights.
ly bent or broken if forced.
4. Connect all plumbing and/or electrical con-
1. Removal (Instrument Panel mounted components) nections to instrument; perform pitot--static leak check
When removing and/or replacing any G1000 compo- and operational check of performed maintenance as
nent, always ensure that aircraft power is OFF. Unplug required.
any auxiliary power supplies. E. Position glareshield so electrical connections
A. Remove screws attaching glareshield and cover can be made and secured.
plate and carefully lift glareshield to expose wire dis- F. Secure glareshield and cover plate with screws
39--10--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
GDC 74A TIT/EGT/CHT INSTALLATION

CONFIGURATION MODULE
GDC 71 GDU 1040
CONFIGURATION MODULE PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
GDU 1040
MULTI--FUNCTION FLIGHT DISPLAY
GMA 1347
AUDIO SYSTEM WITH MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
ELECTRICAL HARNESS GTP 59

OAT
GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER
GIA 63
GRS 77
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT #1
ATTITUDE & HEADING
GIA 63
REFERENCE SYSTEM
INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT #2
DIPLEXER GTX 33
MODE S TRANSPONDER
GDL 69A
DATA LINK UNIT
M39--4
GARMIN 1000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM COMPONENTS

FIGURE 39--4
39--10--02 -- AVIONICS EQUIPMENT 1. Removal.
Most individual avionics components are mounted in
ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257) slide out chassis racks. Loosen screw on face of com-
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, ponent and slide unit straight aft to remove.
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
Some components are not mounted in slide out chas-
Each avionics package installed is basically a custom- sis. Removal of these units will require the same, or
ized package to meet optional requirements of the cus- similar, sequence as removal of flight instruments in
tomer. Wiring harness, any associated plumbing or me- Section 39--10--01.
chanical mechanisms required for a particular avionics NOTE:
installation, are well secured to prevent physical inter- Exercise care not to bend connecting pins when
ference with other components. Removal of these installing electronic components or connecting
avionics components will require evaluation of each data cables. Connecting pins are fragile and easi-
installation to determine the proper removal procedure ly bent or broken if forced.
or sequence to follow. CAUTION
Radio panel must be stacked from bottom to top
NOTE: as units are installed.
Removal or replacement of avionics equipment
may require AHRS alignment/calibration. Refer to 2. Installation.
avionics documentation for specific require- Install repaired or new unit in reverse sequence of re-
ments. moval.
39--10--02
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
NOTE: G. Remove plumbing or electrical connections

If re--installing or replacing Magnetometer, use from component that will be removed.
non--ferrous hardware at installation bracket and NOTE
on wing access panel. In some instances, components, other than the
one to be removed, must be removed or at least
some wiring or plumbing disconnected to gain
access to the desired component.
H. Remove thin lexan glass insulation strip(s), if re-
quired, when removing components.
C I. Remove circuit breakers by unscrewing nut from
stem on each circuit breaker and push circuit breaker
forward through panel.
B
2. Installation.
A. Installation of new instrument or circuit breaker
into panel is accomplished in reverse sequence of re-
moval.
CIRCUIT B. Insert lexan insulator strip(s) in proper location
BREAKER to prevent any short circuits.
PANEL
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
THRU 27--TBA)
The Circuit Breaker Panel is an assembly that can ei-
ther be tilted out for limited access to components lo-
D E cated behind the panel or removed for increased ac-
cess to components.
REMOVAL R39--5 1. To Tilt
A. Remove glareshield – refer to Section
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL REMOVAL 39--10--01.
FIGURE 39--5 B. Remove two screws from face of panel at upper
39--10--03 -- CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL right and left edges.
ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257) C. Panel is hinged on bottom edge and will tilt out
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, from top.
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) 2. To Remove
The Circuit Breaker Panel is an assembly that can be A. Remove glareshield – refer to Section
pulled out as a unit for removal of any switch or circuit 39--10--01.
breaker. B. Remove two screws from face of panel at upper
1. Removal. right and left edges.
A. Remove glareshield -- refer to Section C. Remove two screws from underneath, near
39--10--01. edge of panel face.
D. Panel should now be free to slide aft approxi-
B. Drill out 3 rivets on, or remove screws from, out-
mately 4--5 inches. This will allow access to plumbing
side of airplane (B) (Fig. 39--5). These are located for-
and electrical connections.
ward of the cabin door hinge and above cabin air inlet
scoop, approximately 4 inches below windshield. E. Remove plumbing and electrical connections
from component that will be removed.
C. Remove two screws from face of panel at upper
left corner (C) (Fig. 39--5). NOTE
In some instances, components, other than the
D. Remove two screws (D) from underneath, near one to be removed, must be removed or at least
edge of panel face. some wiring or plumbing disconnected to gain
E. Remove MS21919DG clamp (E) from steel access to the desired component.
structure cross brace, underneath panel, forward sec- F. Remove thin lexan glass insulation strip(s), if re-
tion, see (Figure 39--5). quired, when removing components.
F. The panel should now be free to slide aft approxi- G. Remove circuit breakers by unscrewing nut
mately 4--5 inches. This will allow access to plumbing from stem on each circuit breaker and push circuit
and electrical connections. breaker forward through panel.
39--10--03
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
3. Installation. tion Transponder, AutoPilot Disconnect/Control Wheel

Switches, Speed Brake, Microphone Switch, Map Light
A. Installation of new instrument or circuit breaker
and Stormscope Refresh, depending on Sales Order
into panel is accomplished in reverse sequence of re-
configuration. See Figures 39--6 through 39--9 for typi-
moval.
cal configurations.
B. Insert lexan insulator strip(s) in proper location
With aircraft Master Power Off and batteries discon-
to prevent any short circuits.
nected, switches and controls may be removed for re-
placement or service by removing retaining screws
from nameplate and then detaching electrical connec-
tions. Remove pushbutton switches by carefully pulling
plastic pushbutton off switch actuator, unscrewing nut
from stem and pushing switch through nameplate. Re-
install switches and controls in reverse order.
Switch/control wire connections may be at switch/con-
trol position or routed from end of Control Yoke Shaft up
and through left or right grip of Control Wheel. Solder
connections at switch terminals, where applicable,
should be covered with heat shrink tubing.
R39--6
ANALOG &MORITZ CONTROL WHEEL LH GRIP

(TYP)
FIGURE 39--6
R39--8
GARMIN CONTROL WHEEL LH GRIP (TYP)

FIGURE 39--8
R39--7
ANALOG, MORITZ & GARMIN PILOT’S CONTROL

WHEEL RH GRIP
FIGURE 39--7
39--10--04 -- CONTROL WHEELS
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 R39--9
THRU 27--TBA)
The aircraft has dual flight controls and can be flown ANALOG, MORITZ & GARMIN CO--PILOT’S CON-
from either the pilot or co--pilot seat. Each Control TROL WHEEL RH GRIP (TYP)
Wheel may contain controls for Trim Adjust, Identifica- FIGURE 39--9
39--10--04
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
EXT. LIGHT SWITCHES LOCATED IN HEADLINER SWITCH PANEL

STROBES NAV BEACON RECOG TAXI LITE LND LITE
LITE L R L R
LEFT
ALT
SENSE
BAT--1
RECOG
TAXI
LND
PUSH
NAV
BEACON
STROBES LITE LLITE
L R RLITE
LEFT
ALT
EXTERIOR LIGHTS FIELD BAT--2
PUSH
3 N 33 3 LEFT LEFT RIGHT

ALT BAT AUX AUX
FUEL
ON FLOW AUDIO
DME X X
MEMORY ONA/P
NAVSEL
1ARNAV
ELT-
ON -100
GEAR
GEAR
DOWN LEFT
UNSAFERIGHT
FUEL SPEED
FUELALT
PROP
PITOT
BRAKEHEAT
AIR
DE--ICE OFF N 2 TOARMTEST/RESET
PRESS ON
30 -+- 30 22 22 HI/LOR. START
L. ALTALT
STBY
REMOTE
BOOST XWAIT 1 SEC
ALTARM
LEFT
X SENSE
200 40 100FEET E11 F E11
33 33 018 +150
F --70 32
V VAC VOLTS
VOLTS POWER
VAC
RNAVPUMP
20 20 9 0 1 L.FUELR.QTY.
FUEL QTY.AMPS ICS+ VOX
PILOT
VOL ISO ++ FREE
CW
+W BAT-
-1
180AIRS
EED60 10 10 8 2301
300
302
PUSH
VOLTS + +SQUELCH
MIN. LIVE
-- SLCVE LEFT
ALT
PUSH
160KN TS 10 10
20 20 7 3 FIELD BAT-
-2
80 INTERnatVOX PUSH
23:59
140
120100 6 5 4 40
02060
80
100 150
100
PSIPRESS
200
250200
F TEMP
300
400
F
500 A
M TEL
O 1 NAV
1 COMM DME
2MKR
2ADF
COM
COM
TEL
OFF
AUTO
12
INT
EXT GEAR GEAR GEAR VAC STALL ANN AMP AMP
START
STOP MODE
CLEAR D.C.
OIL OIL CHT
E
L 118.30
MIC
121.90
COMM 1
LEFT
ALT BATLEFT
AUXRIGHT
AUX ACTRRELAYWARNWARN WARN (+) (--)
ELEC. X X E
V USE STBY
0 +40 NHDG
NAV 10 Alcor T KY 186 TSO PULL
--40 GS 33 3 GS EGT R OFFTEST GEAR
GEAR
GEAR
VAC
STALL
ANNAMP
5
UPVERTICAL Fx100 I ACTR WARN
RELAY
WARNWARN (+) AMP
(--)
24W30
C 100 FEET
20 M
59.8 150 23 FRQ
108.00
6 E 12
OATTURN COORDINATOR DOWN

5 NM KT MIN LDGTAXI
GLARSHLD
PANEL
RADIOSTARTER
DEFROSTBOOST
L
2 MIN.
R 15S 21
10 X X F ENR
L KNSRNV
1 USE 1 DSP
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHTBLOWER
BLOWER PUMP
RELAY
PROP NO PITCH
INFORMATION NAV 1 A 80 NAV SYSTEM
DE--ICE P OATENG
FUEL COORD
TURN
TRIM/
RUDDER
MODE DME WAYPOINT FREQ RAD DST INSTR
INSTR
FLOW
TACH FLAP
TRIM
33N 3
P IND INDIND
0
888888 O
S VOR
RNAV USE
HOLDDSP
DATA
LDG TAXI GLARSHLD
PANELRADIODEFROST
STARTER
BOOST
24W30
PULL
OFF10 COWL
RUDDER
FLAP
TRIM CIGAR
FLAP SPEED
BRAKE
A/HHSI
119.80 109.10
119.80 108.40 ACTR
ACTR LIGHTER
ACTR GEM
6 E 12
MASTER
ALTAVIONICS
FIELD
MASTER 27 9 354045
30 50
202528
RPM USE STANDBY
USE STANDBY/RAD LIGHT LIGHTLIGHTLIGHT BLOWER RELAY PUMP
BLOWER
OFF 200 0
MAN 15HUNDREDS
25 PRESS COMM 2
KX 165 TSD NAV 2 COM 1COM
NAV 1NAV 2PHONE
2AUDIO ENCODER
XPNDR
15S 21 ON
FWD 25 100
50 2015IN.HG. 10 5
TST18 CLR PULL
TEST PULL
TEST STORM
OFF ADF
ADF 2R/NAVRMI
1 DME SCOPE
INV
INTERCOM
RUDDER R TRIM ON AP
SPARE VACPITOT
STD-
HIGH
BOOST HEATLOWELEC.
-BYBOOSTTRIM RUDDER L HDG FD ALT NAVONBC APPR AUTO
A/PLORAN
MARKERARGUS
RADAR YAW
PILOT
ALERT BCN MAPDAMP
ALTM DISP
L 0 R OFF
UP TEST
PROP OAT ENG FUEL TURN TRIM/RUDDER
INSTRINSTR FLOW COORDFLAP TRIM
DE--ICE IND TACH IND IND
RUDDERCOWL
RUDDER TRIM FLAPTRIM FLAP CIGAR SPEED
LIGHTERGEM BRAKE A/H
ACTRACTR ACTR HSI
L R
MASTER ALT AVIONICS COM 1NAV 1 COM 2NAV 2AUDIOPHONEXPNDR

ENCODER
FIELD MASTER
STORM
ADF 1 ADF 2 DME R/NAVSCOPE RMI INVINTERCOM
HIGH STD--BY PITOT LOW ELEC.
OPTION HEAT BOOST TRIM
BOOST VAC
AUTOA/P RADAR
MARKER ARGUS YAW
PILOT
ALERTLORAN BCN ALTM MAP
DISP DAMP
SMR39--6
ROCKER/CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHES

FIGURE 39--10
11 22 33 11 22 33 0
E F E F --70 +150
18 32 V
L.FUEL QTY. R. FUEL QTY. AMPS

3 N 33 3
PUSH
VOLTS
FUEL X X
ON FLOW
MEMORY DME
A/P SEL
AUDIO
ONNAV 1 ARNAV
ELT--100
GEAR
GEARLEFTRIGHT
SPEED
ALTPROP
PITOT ON
DOWN
UNSAFE
FUELFUEL
BRAKE
AIRDE--ICE
HEAT OFF N 2 ARM
PRESS ON
WAIT 1 SEC
30 +-- 30 HI/LO
L. ALT
R. ALT
START
STBY
REMOTE
BOOST X PRESS
X ARM
40 100 FEET E112233F E112233F --70
0 +150
18 32
V VACVOLTS
VOLTS
POWER RNAV PUMP
VAC SENSE
200
9 0 1 + VOX
20 20 R. FUEL QTY. AMPS ICSPILOT ISO ++ CW
FREE+W BAT-
-1
180 AIRS
EED 60 10 10 8 2300 L.FUEL QTY. PUSH
VOLTS
VOL SQUELCH
+ +LIVE -- SLC
VE
LEFT
PUSH
160 KN TS 10 10 301
302 MIN. ALT
20 20 7 3 INTER nat
VOX FIELD BAT-
-2
PUSH
140 80
20 40 300 400
4060 400
300
23:59 120 100
6 5 4 020
PSI
80 150
100100
F
200
250200
F
500 A
O
M
TEL1 COMM
1 NAV
2DME
2MKR
COM
COM
TEL
OFF
AUTO
ADF
MIC
1 2
INT
EXT 60 80 150 200
OIL PRESS OIL TEMP CHT LEFT
ALT AUXRIGHT
BAT LEFTAUX 0 100 100 250 200 500
START
CLEAR
STOP MODE
D.C.
ELEC. X X
E
L
E
V
118.30
USE
121.90
STBY
COMM 1
NAV
N HDG Alcor KY 186 TSO
--400 +40 GS 33 3 GS 10 EGT T
R OFFPULL
TEST GEAR
GEAR
GEAR ANNAMP
VACSTALL
5
UP VERTICAL Fx100 I RELAY
ACTR WARN
WARN
WARN (+) AMP
(--)
24 W 30
C 100 FEET M
59.8 150 23 108.00
6 E 12
OAT
TURN COORDINATOR 20
DOWN
5 NM KT MIN FRQ GLARSHLD
LDGTAXI PANEL
RADIO
DEFROST
STARTER
BOOST
L R 1USE 1 DSP
F
LIGHT
LIGHT LIGHT BLOWER
LIGHT RELAY
BLOWERPUMP
PSI
15 S 21
10 X X ENR
2 MIN. F RNV
F
NO PITCH NAV 1 L KNS 80 NAV SYSTEM
PROP INFORMATION A
DE--ICE P FUEL COORD
OATINSTR
ENG TURN
TRIM/
RUDDER
INSTR FLOW
P MODE DME WAYPOINT FREQ RAD DST INDTACH FLAP
INDTRIM
IND
33 N 3 888888
OIL PRESS OIL TEMP
0 O VORRNAVHOLD
USEDSPDATA
S
CHT
OFFPULL
24 W 30
10 COWL
RUDDER
FLAP FLAP
TRIM CIGAR SPEED
BRAKE
A/H HSI
6 E 12
ACTR
ACTR LIGHTER
ACTR GEM
MASTER
ALT AVIONICS
FIELD
MASTER
27 9
354045 202528 119.80 119.80
109.10 108.40
USE STANDBY USE STANDBY/RAD
30 50 RPM
OFF
ON 200
100
0
MAN 15HUNDREDS
25 PRESS KX 165 TSD COMM 2 NAV 2 NAV
COM 1 NAV
1 COM 2 AUDIO
2 PHONE
XPNDR
ENCODER
15 S 21 FWD 50
25 2015IN.HG. 10 5
TST
18 CLR PULL
TEST
OFF
PULL
TEST ADFADF STORM
2 R/NAV
1 DME RMIINVINTERCOM
SCOPE
STD- PITOTLOW ELEC. RUDDER TRIM ON AP
SPARE HIGHVAC-BY
BOOST HEATBOOSTTRIM RUDDER
L R
HDG FD ALT NAV BC ON
APPR A/PLORAN
AUTO ARGUS
YAW
ALERT
PILOT MARKER
RADAR MAPDAMP
ALTM DISP
BCN
L 0 R OFF
UP TEST
X X
Alcor
EGT
Fx100
0
--40 +40
C
OAT
X X
M39--11
CLUSTER GAUGE
FIGURE 39--11
39--10--04
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
39--11--00 -- FLIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL 39--11--01 -- CLUSTER GAUGE

ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257) ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257)
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, The cluster gauges are located at the top/right of flight
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) panel (Fig. 39--11). Access is obtained by removing gla-
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 reshield per Section 39--10--01. Cluster gauges have
THRU 27--TBA) the capability of individual module replacement. Re-
move and replace defective module as follows:
The flight instrument panel is a shock mounted panel
containing various flight instruments for a particular Loosen single screw to the point where it no longer is
installation group. These instruments vary slightly de- threaded into chassis. Use screw as the “handle” to pull
pending upon avionics package installed. The panel module from cluster chassis. In some cases the adja-
contains circuit breaker/switches, along with Master cent, more centered, module may need to be removed
Switch, which control most systems of aircraft. Refer to before one of the edge modules will easily come out.
Figures 39--3 & 39--10. To remove entire cluster gauge, the wiring harness can
CAUTION be disconnected at connector adjacent to cluster
Care should be exercised when replacing wiring gauge unit. The nuts on terminal studs need to be re-
or switches to ensure proper alignment of termi- moved so wire terminals can be pulled from studs to re-
nal connections to prevent shorting between move modules from cluster gauge chassis.
switches. MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
Access for maintenance of switches or related wiring is
obtained by removing two attachment screws and The Moritz cluster gauge assemblies may be removed
pushing switch forward through panel or by sliding it aft from the Instrument Panel by removing the four attach-
from panel. There is a common bus bar on some ing screws located on the gauge faceplate. The gauge
switches that will require loosening or removal for may be slid aft and out of the panel. Disconnect the har-
switch replacement. ness connector from the gauge. If the harness lacks
sufficient slack to allow the gauge to be pulled from the
panel, then the Glareshield will require removal, per
Section 39--10--01, to access the gauge harness con-
nectors. Moritz cluster gauge adjustment instructions
are shown in Figure 39--12.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR CLUSTER GAUGES
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS GAUGE CONDITION CHECK FOR THESE POSSIBIL-

ITIES
Gauge reads full scale with engine Wire between sender and gauge Faulty sender, wiring or gauge.
shut down. disconnected or open.
Gauge reads zero when engine is Wire between sender and gauge Faulty sender, wiring or gauge.
running. grounded.
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS GAUGE CONDITION CHECK FOR THESE POSSIBIL-

ITIES
Gauge reads full scale with engine Wire between sender and gauge Defective gauge, wiring or sender.
cool or cold. grounded.
Gauge reads zero when engine is Wire between sender and gauge is Defective gauge, wiring or sender.
hot. open or disconnected.
FUEL SYSTEM GAUGE CONDITION CHECK FOR THESE POSSIBIL-

ITIES
Gauge indicates empty. Grounded wire between sender Defective sender or wiring. Inopera-
and gauge. tive gauge. Floats stuck on bottom.
39--11--00
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
Gauge indicates past full when tank Open sender lead. Open sender (open resistance ele-
is less than full. ment).
Sender not properly grounded to
airframe.
Gauge off calibration. Note: Some
clusters are equipped with fuel
gauges that have trim pots and
may need re--calibration.
Gauge indicates 1/2--3/4 when tank On dual sender systems, the iso- Lead between isolated sender and
is full. lated sender may be grounded. grounded sender is grounded.
Either sender defective.
Gauge -- off calibration.
O/B float stuck on bottom of tank.
GLARESHIELD MUST BE MOVED UP TO REACH ADJUSTMENT POINTS IF MODULE IS NOT TO

BE SLID OUT
3 N 33 3
VACUUM 44.5 GAL

44.5 GAL GREEN ARCRPM GREEN YELLOW YELLOW
ARC ARC LAMPDIM GEAR
GEAR LEFT
RIGHT
SPEED
ALTPITOT
PROP
OPERATING
4.2 -- 5.2 IN.RANGE
USEABLE
HG. USEABLE 2200 -- 2500 250 YELLOW
ARC
--BLUE
-- 420250
420 ARC
1400 ARC
GREEN
30
460420 10
-- 14501400 ARC
GREEN
60----PSI
--60 170
100 100
30 PSI
PSI
220 ARC
---- 170100
-- 220170 240220 DOWN
UNSAFE
ALT
TEST HI/LO
VAC
FUEL
FUEL
E/BUS
VOLTS
BRAKE
START
LOW
AIR
STBY
HEAT
EMERG
VAC
POWER BUS
DEICE
BOOST
REMOTE
RNAV
PUMP
E W N S
FREE E LT
VACUUM L FUELR FUEL NAV
LEG
APPR CCW CW
SLAVE ORNE S E T LEFT
ON ALT
OP.-55
RNG. 14.8 202530 2022 1600 3540 17 55 A O NAVMSGGPSAPRGPSCRS SENSE
4.5 15-
PSI14.8--GAL-
MSTR
WARN OAT F. PRESS.
-
VDC--AMP 15 35 15X100 24 25 45 13 21 25 85 GPS ARM M GPSWPT
OBS ARM
ACTV
OBSLEG
BAT-
-1
EMERG
10 38 1750 20 50 10245 0 115
2575 1300 PUSH BUS
+400C 45 IN-
HG-+34 32.3 2220 1568 F 403 X10 F 208X10 F 68 LEFT
ALT
FIELD BAT-
-2
PUSHPUSH
A
30 +-- 30 N 3 O TEL1 COMM
1 NAV
2DME
2
M800 40 100FEET 33 M
CHRONOMETER200 9 0 1 LEFT
ALT BAT LEFT
AUXRIGHT
AUX
W 30
20 20 E
6
180 AIRS
EED60 10 10 8 2300 L
GMT LT ET 160 KN TS 10 10 301
302 E
V USE
E 12
SELECT CONTROL 20 20 7 3 KY 186 TSO

140 80 T GEAR
GEAR
R
ADJUSTMENT FOR MANIFOLD PRESSURE

24
120100 6 5 4 I ACTR
DAVTRON 15 M
S 21
D.C. 0
& OIL PRESSURE FROM HERE

ELEC.
N HDG
3 GS 10
5 VERTICAL
UP 100 FEET
6
20 27
DOWN
ADJUSTMENTS CAN BE MADE WITH

5
MASTER
ALTAVIONICS
FIELD
MASTER 10
MAP
OP
2025
15 30
10 38
32.3
35
2022
X100 24
1600 3540
152575 1300
17 55
25 45 13 21 25 85
1750 20 50 10245 0 115
F 208X10
2220 1568 F 403 X10 F 68
MODULE IN PANEL
IF DESIRED
MAP
ADJUSTMENT FOR VACUUM

OP
VAC
Z S LZ FUEL
S
& LH FUEL FROM HERE VAC L FUEL

Z S Z S
VACUUM L FUELR FUEL
IN--14.8--GAL-
4.8 HG
FUEL PRESS
OAT
+400C 45.815-
14.8
-
VDC--AMP
OP.-55
RNG.
PSI+34
VACUUM
4.8 IN-
L FUELR FUELR
HG-14.8--GAL-
14.8
-
FF/FP>
S FUEL>
Z * SUFFICIENT HARNESS LENGTH IS
OAT
FUEL PRESS VDC--AMP
+40 0C 45.8OP.
15- RNG.
PSI-55
AVAILABLE TO SLIDE MODULE

+34
FF/FP>
R FUEL>
ADJUSTMENTS CAN BE MADE WITH

S Z
FROM PANEL TO ADJUST.

MODULE IN PANEL IF DESIRED
ADJUSTMENT FOR FUEL FLOW/FUEL PRESS.
Z = ADJ. TO LOW END OR ZERO & RH FUEL FROM HERE
S = ADJ. OVER SPAN RANGE
* ADJUSTMENTS CAN BE MADE ONLY

PROCEDURES FOR ADJUSTMENT: WITH MODULE OUT OF PANEL
FUEL -- SEE SECTION 28--43--03, DIGITAL FOR INITIAL SET--UP.
VACUUM -- SEE SECTION 37--22--00, DIGITAL.
MANIFOLD PRESSURE -- SEE SECTION 77--10--02, DIGITAL.
OIL PRESSURE -- SEE SECTION 79--30--01, DIGITAL. R39--12
MORITZ CLUSTER GAUGE ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

FIGURE 39--12
39--11--02 -- LANDING GEAR SWITCH 4. Remove nut and washer from face of switch and
ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257) push switch through panel.
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) THRU 27--TBA)
The landing gear switch (Fig. 39--13) is a two position The landing gear switch (Fig. 39--14) is a two position
switch located at the top right side of flight instrument switch located at the bottom, left of center, of flight in-
panel. The wheel shaped knob must be pulled aft prior strument panel. The wheel shaped knob must be pulled
to raising or lowering switch to activate landing gear ac- aft prior to raising or lowering switch to activate landing
tuator. gear actuator.
1. Glareshield will require removal to gain access to
switch for maintenance action (refer to Section 1. Access to the switch for maintenance is from be-
39--10--01). low the bottom edge of the instrument panel.
2. Remove wire connections from back of landing 2. Disconnect wire connector attaching switch as-
gear switch or, disconnect at harness connection. sembly to harness.
3. Turn wheel shaped knob counterclockwise to re- 3. Unscrew wheel shaped knob counterclockwise to
move from stem. remove from stem.
39--11--02
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
4. Remove nut and washer from face of switch and CAUTION

push switch through panel. Activation of gear safety override switch while
aircraft is on ground may cause landing gear to
retract.
1. Disconnect wire connectors.
2. Loosen nut on stem and hold nut located inside
mounting bracket. The RED lens may need to be re-
moved to fully remove switch from panel and bracket.
3. The light bulb can be replaced after glareshield is
removed by bending a nail or similar rod (approximate-
ly 3/32” diameter) and pushing RED lens OFF to front of
panel (to work around mounting bracket). Use a small
vacuum tube puller or soft nosed instrument to pull bulb
from socket.
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
THRU 27--TBA)
The landing gear safety override switch (with integral
indicator light) is located to the right of landing gear
switch (Fig. 39--14). Proper operation of landing gear
SMR39--9 safety system will not allow gear to retract below 60
+/--5 KIAS.
LANDING GEAR SWITCH & LANDING GEAR CAUTION
SAFETY OVERRIDE SWITCH Activation of gear safety override switch while
FIGURE 39--13 aircraft is on ground may cause landing gear to
retract.
1. Disconnect wire connector (Fig. 39--15), approxi-
mately 10 inches from switch.
2. Loosen nut on stem and hold nut located inside
mounting bracket.
3. The light bulb, 28VAC AT604 (Fig. 39--16) can be
replaced by pulling RED lens off switch assembly. Light
bulb can be removed from socket by gently pulling with
fingertips.
R39--14
LANDING GEAR SWITCH & LANDING GEAR

SAFETY OVERRIDE SWITCH
FIGURE 39--14
39--11--03 -- LANDING GEAR SAFETY OVERRIDE
SWITCH
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, R39--15
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
The landing gear safety override switch (Fig. 39--13) is LANDING GEAR SWITCH & LANDING GEAR
located above landing gear switch. Proper operation of SAFETY OVERRIDE SWITCH (REMOVED FROM
landing gear safety system will not allow gear to retract PANEL)
below 60 +/--5 KIAS. FIGURE 39--15
39--11--03
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
The avionics/radio panel contains equipment installed

per sales order by Mooney Airplane Company, Inc.
and/or other equipment installed by other sources, as
the owner desires. The maintenance information con-
tained in this Service and Maintenance Manual de-
scribes Mooney factory interface installations only.
Avionics/radio components are removed and installed
according to Section 39--10--02, 1 and 2.
39--12--01 -- ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
R39--16 THRU 27--TBA)
The annunciator panel is located at the top center--In-
LANDING GEAR SAFETY OVERRIDE SWITCH strument Panel and is not mounted with a slide in type
(EXPLODED) chassis. Remove this component by removing two
FIGURE 39--16 screws holding cover plate in position. Remove glare-
shield and disconnect electrical harness from back side
4. The Check Gear Light, located in the upper left cor-
of unit. Remove screws holding unit in place on panel
ner of the Landing Gear Nameplate, is not serviceable
and remove from firewall side of panel.
and must be replaced as a unit, if defective (Fig.
39--17). LOW FUEL WARNING CIRCUIT CALIBRATION.
Refer to Section 24--33--00 paragraph 4.
39--12--02 -- EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMIT-
TER (ELT) SWITCH
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
THRU 27--TBA)
R39--17
CHECK GEAR LIGHT

FIGURE 39--17
39--11--04 -- CLOCK
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) R39--18
The digital clock can be set by using procedures in-
cluded in POH/AFM, SECTION VII. EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 REMOTE SWITCH
THRU 27--TBA) FIGURE 39--18
A Real--Time Clock is integral to the Garmin 1000 The remote ELT switch (Fig. 39--18) is located on the
Avionics System. Instrument Panel. The location is determined by op-
tional equipment per sales order. The ELT is located in
39--12--00 -- AVIONICS/RADIO PANEL the tailcone (Fig. 39--19) and is accessible by removing
ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257) radio access panel on right or left side of aircraft tail-
MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, cone. The ELT antenna is located on top of tailcone un-
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327) derneath the fiberglass dorsal fin. The ELT unit has a
39--11--04
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
three position switch “ON”, “OFF” and “ARM”. The cor- switch, repair or replacement of switch or wiring will be
rect position of this switch is “ARM”. The remote switch required.
is connected in parallel to the ELT circuit and will oper-
A. Remove 4 mounting screws from face of Re-
ate correctly either in “ARM” mode or “ON” mode. Nor-
mote Unit housing. Pull switch aft to remove from the
mal operation is in “ARM” position.
Instrument Panel. Disconnect wires, remove and re-
place defective switch.
C. Reconnect wires and test switch for proper op-
eration.
D. Reinstall Remote Switch in reverse order of re-
moval.
39--12--03 -- INSTRUMENT/RADIO LIGHT & GLA-
RESHIELD DIMMER CONTROL
27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
THRU 27--TBA)
R39--19
Dimmer controls for instrument, radio and glareshield
lights consists of two rheostat switches located on low-
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) er right portion of instrument panel. Rotate either switch
SWITCH to obtain desired light intensity. Test malfunction of ei-
FIGURE 39--19 ther switch with a multi--meter; replace as needed.
Transmitter Functional Test -- (Refer to manufacturer’s
39--12--04 -- ACCESSORY SOCKET (14 VOLTS)
Installation & Operation Manual for detailed test proce-
dures). The test consists of turning the unit ON and ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257)
then “Resetting” it after verification that the Transmitter, MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
Latch Circuit, Batteries and associated equipment are 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
operating properly.
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
NOTE THRU 27--TBA)
The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) should
be tested every 3 months. The 14V Accessory Socket is located at bottom of Ra-
dio Panel immediately to right of co--pilots control col-
1. Monitor 121.5 MHz using the Aircraft Com Receiv- umn shaft.
er or Portable Hand Held Receiver. Turn the Squelch all
the way up. 39--20--00 -- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC EQUIP-
MENT RACK
2. Select the Main Switch on the ELT Main Unit to the
ARM position, push the ON button on the Cockpit Re- ANALOG GAUGES (S/N: 27--0001 THRU 27--0257)
mote Unit. Verify that both the LED ON lights, located MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
on the Main Unit, and the Cockpit Remote Unit, are illu- 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327)
minated. Verify that the Audio Sweep Tone can be
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
heard on the Com Receiver.
THRU 27--TBA)
3. Push the RESET button on the Remote unit. Verify
that the two LED ON lights are extinguished and the Au- The electrical equipment rack for the M20M aircraft is
dio Sweep Tone should stop. located in tailcone just aft of baggage compartment
bulkhead. Access is gained through large access door
CAUTION in tailcone aft of left wing trailing edge. The batteries,
Testing of ELT should be conducted only during auxiliary power plug receptacle (if installed), and vari-
the first five (5) minutes after any hour and no ous avionics black boxes are mounted on electrical
longer than three (3) audible sweeps. equipment rack. The ELT is mounted on an accessory
4. If warbling tone is not heard, replacement of ELT rack further aft in tailcone.
battery, Remote Unit battery or entire unit may be nec- 39--21--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS MAINTENANCE
essary. Follow ELT manufactures instructions for bat-
tery replacement. 39--21--01 -- EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
5. If ELT unit is found to be operating properly and Refer to SECTION 27--42--00 for Electric Trim System
system still will not work correctly through remote ELT Maintenance
39--12--03
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 51
STRUCTURES
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 51
STRUCTURES
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
51--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--13--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--13--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--13--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--13--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--13--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--14--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--14--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--15--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--15--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--15--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51--15--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
51-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 51
STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
51--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
51--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Repair -- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
51--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastener Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
51--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
51--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuselage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
51--12--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tubular Structure Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
51--12--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailcone Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
51--12--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing Gear & Retraction System Repair . . . 11
51--12--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Control System Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
51--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
51--13--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stringer Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
51--13--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Spar Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
51--13--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stub Spar Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
51--13--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Spar Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
51--13--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rib Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
51--13--06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Tip Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
51--13--07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Skin Panel Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
51--14--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Stabilizer & Vertical Fin Repair . . . . . . . 17
51--14--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leading Edge Skin Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
51--14--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Spar Repair Outboard of STA. 9.00 . . . . 17
51--14--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rib Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
51--14--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remating Horizontal Stabilizer to Stinger . . . . 18
51--15--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiberglass Laminates, Repair Procedures . . . . . . . 19
51--15--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cracks, In Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
51--15--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non--Structural Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
51--15--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Structural Laminate Repair
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Metal Insert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
51--15--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Structural Laminate Repair . . . . . . . . 21
51--15--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiberglass Delamination Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
51--16--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
51-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
51--00--00 -- GENERAL The vertical stabilizer is constructed around a fabri-

cated main spar assembly with ribs connecting main
The Mooney M20M is an all metal, low wing airplane.
and rear spar. A stretch formed, aluminum skin wraps
The fuselage cabin area is constructed of welded 4130
around leading edge ribs and is riveted to rear spar on
chrome--molybdenum steel tube. The steel tubular
both sides.
structure is covered with non--structural, aluminum
skins fastened to tubular structure by brackets, rivets, The rudder is constructed of formed aluminum skins
bolts and screws. fastened to a spar extrusion at the leading edge and riv-
The tailcone is of semi--monocoque type construction eted together at the trailing edge.
and is fastened to the tubular structure with structural A three piece, composite belly skin covers underside of
bolts. aircraft from exhaust cavity aft to tailcone.
The wing is a tapered, laminar flow, one piece wing. It is The front seats are installed on rails, which are at-
constructed with a one piece, full length main spar. The tached to floorboard and structure beneath floorboard.
spar is constructed from tapered cap strips (7075 alu-
minum) bolted (huckbolts) to webs (2024 aluminum). The M20M features two rear passenger seat configura-
Aluminum ribs connect main spar to aft stub spar and tions; a split type rear seat, using seat cushions in
rear spar. Extruded stringers run full length of wing, molded wells over wing spars and individually reclining
spaced chordwise for strength and skin reinforcement. rear seat backs or, a three--place bench seat.
The skins are stretch formed, wrap around, 2024--T3 51--10--00 -- STRUCTURAL REPAIR -- GENERAL
aluminum ranging in thickness from .032 at the tip to
.050 at inboard fuel tanks. This section outlines structural repair procedures for
the M20M airplane. It is intended to supplement FAA
The completed wing assembly is mated to the fuselage Advisory AC 43.13--( ) by showing repair methods spe-
tubular structure during final assembly at the Mooney cific to Mooney airplanes.
facility. Removal of wing from fuselage structure is es-
sential for most over land type transportation. All structural repairs must be: in compliance with AC
43.13--( ) unless specific Mooney factory repairs are
The empennage is of similar construction to the wing. A
recommended, or with the specific approval of a Feder-
main spar spans entire length of the stabilizer. Ribs
al Aviation Administration representative, which is final
connect main spar to stub and rear spar. A stretch
authority in all repairs. This manual is for general guid-
formed skin wraps around leading edge ribs and at-
ance and has no authorized approval status. The Prod-
taches to rear spar on top and bottom.
uct Support Department, Mooney Airplane Company,
The elevators are constructed of formed, aluminum Inc., Kerrville, Texas, should be consulted for special
skins fastened to a spar extrusion at the leading edge repair procedures when repair of damaged structure is
and riveted together at the trailing edge. not covered by published instructions.
Huck Fastener Pre--Drill Size Drill Size Hole Limits

2LPH--T5 No. 26 (.147 IN.) No. 20 (.161 IN.) .161 to .1635 IN.
ALPPH--T6 No. 18 (.1695 IN.) No. 13 (.185 IN.) .185 to .187 IN.
R3001--T6 No. 18 (.1695 IN.) No. 13 (.185 IN.) .185 to .187 IN.
2L426H--T5 No. 26 (.147 IN.) No. 20 (.161 IN.) .161 to .1635 IN.
R3007--T6 3/16 (.187 IN.) No. 7 (.201 IN.) .2005 to .2025 IN.
HUCKBOLT HOLE LIMITS
Figure 51--1
51--10--01 -- FASTENER REPLACEMENT Oversize Huckbolt holes may be repaired by replacing
1. HUCKBOLT INSTALLATION. The Huck Lockbolt 2LPH--T5 Huckbolts with ALPPH--T6 Huckbolts or with
is an interference fit fastener used in a rigid joint struc- NAS 623--2 screws and NAS 1021 No. 8 Hex--lock nuts
ture. A loose or slip fit Huckbolt is unacceptable (Figure (or equivalent), provided pitch distance is greater than
51--1). .56 inches and edge distance is greater than .33 inch-
When Huckbolt hole is enlarged beyond above limits es. Huckbolts ALPPH--T6 and R3001--T6 may be re-
but is straight and round, the hole may be considered placed with R3007--T6 Huckbolts as necessary. Con-
acceptable, provided that Huckbolt cannot be pressed sult Product Support Department, Mooney Airplane
into hole, with normal hand pressure, to a depth more Company, Inc., Kerrville, Texas, for factory recommen-
than 50 percent of heaviest material being secured. dations when the preceding instructions are inade-
Check enlarged hole size at both ends. Select proper quate to accomplish repair.
Huckbolts to fit the oversize holes.
51--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
To compensate for material thickness tolerances, washers shall not exceed .098 inch. Huckbolts or coni-
Huckbolt lengths may be increased by one dash num- cal Keystone Lock blind rivet heads may be cocked no
ber from the prescribed length. When a Huckbolt pin of more than .004 inch. Not more than 20 percent of fas-
proper length is not available, use pin of next longer teners in any pattern, nor more than three fasteners in
length. succession, may be cocked.
To adjust grip length, install a cadmium--plated steel NOTE
washer .065 inch thick (or a combination of not more Where access is limited or for replacement/re-
than two washers .065 inch and .032 inch thick) under pair, refer to Figure 51--2 for permissible substitu-
Huckbolt collar. The combined thickness of any two tions.
HUCKBOLT SUBSTITUTE P/N DESCRIPTION

P/N (VENDOR)
NAS 1465 or HL20--5 Pin (Hi--Shear) Pin--Protruding
R3001--T5 HL86--5 Collar Tension 160 KSI Ftu
NAS 1466 or HL20--6 Pin (Hi--Shear) Pin--Protruding
R3001--T6 HL86--6 Collar Tension 160 KSI Ftu
NAS 1475 or HL19--5 Pin (Hi--Shear) Pin--100 D. Flush
R3014--T5 HL94--5 Collar Shear -- 95 KSI Fsu
NAS 1476 or HL19--6 Pin (Hi--Shear) Pin--100 D. Flush
R3014--T6 HL94--6 Collar Shear -- 95 KSI Fsu
NOTE -- HL2086--x--x and HL1994--x--x are P/N’s which include Pins and Collars.
Customer MUST suuply diameter and grip data.
PART NUMBER CODE

HL--5--8
Grip in 1/16ths” (8/16 = 0.500) MAX
Nominal Dia. in 1/32nds” (5/32 = 0.156)
Pin Part number
HUCKBOLT SUBSTITUTION TABLE

FIGURE 51--2
2. RIVET REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT. next standard size larger diameter rivet and sheet
A. REPLACEMENT--STANDARD SIZE RIVETS, thicknesses involved are within limits specified for ma-
HOLE OVERSIZE. This repair applies only to original chine countersinking for the next standard size larger
aluminum alloy, steel, or monel rivets of 1/16, 3/32, 1/8, diameter rivet, it will be permissible to drill and counter-
and 5/32 inch diameters. Such rivets may be replaced sink for and install the next size rivet of the same type
as noted and limited below and in General Limitations, and material as original rivet (Figure 51--3).
when hole only is oversize. (3) Machine Countersink Joint, Method II. If edge
(1) Protruding Head Joint. If edge distance is a distance is a minimum of two times the diameter of the
minimum of two times diameter of original rivet, it will be original rivet, it will be permissible to drill for and install
permissible to drill for and install the next standard size the next standard size larger diameter rivet of the same
larger diameter rivet of the same type and material as type and material as original rivet. Do not remachine
original rivet. the countersink. After installation, mill excess head
height flush with surface.
RIVET SIZE MIN. GAUGE (4) Dimpled Joint. If edge distance is a minimum
of two times the diameter of the original rivet, it will be
3/32 0.025
permissible to drill for and install the next standard size
1/8 0.032 larger diameter rivet of the same type and material as
original rivet. Do not redimple. After installation, mill ex-
5/32 0.040 cess head height flush with surface. This method is
subject to same limitations as paragraph 2, A (3).
MACHINE COUNTERSINKING LIMITS B. REPLACEMENT--STANDARD SIZE RIVETS,
FIGURE 51--3 HOLE AND COUNTERSINK OR DIMPLE OVERSIZE.
(2) Machine Countersink Joint, Method I. If edge This repair applies only to original countersunk head
distance is a minimum of two times the diameter of the aluminum alloy rivets of 1/16, 3/32, 1/8, and 5/32 inch
51--10--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
diameters. Such rivets may be replaced (as noted and to a size to match the oversize dimple or countersink
limited below) when the hole and countersink or dimple and install the next standard size larger rivet according
is oversize. to paragraph 2, A (4). Dimples in 75S--T6 must be hot
formed when reworked.
(1) Machine Countersink Joint. If edge distance
is a minimum of two times the diameter of the next stan- C. RIVET HEAD TOLERANCE.
dard size larger diameter rivet and countersink depth is (1) A rivet head will be considered open if .001
not beyond thickness of countersunk sheet, it will be feeler gauge can be inserted between head of flush or
permissible to rework according to paragraph 2, A (3). protruding head rivet and top skin.
(2) Dimpled Joint. If edge distance is a minimum The top of a flush head rivet must not be below skin sur-
of two times the diameter of the next standard size di- face in which it is installed by a dimension of more than
ameter rivet and all parts are dimpled, it will be permis- .004.
sible to rework the smaller dimples to a size to match D. RIVET HOLE TOLERANCE.
the oversize dimple and install the next standard size (1) An enlarged hole is defined as having an in-
larger diameter rivet of the same type and material as ternal diametric dimension, in any direction, which ex-
original rivet. Dimples in 75S--T6 (7075--T6) must be ceeds the sum of the drill diameter normally used, plus
hot formed when reworked. ten percent of the diameter of the rivet shank.
(3) Combined Countersink and Dimpled Joint. If (2) Figure 51--4 specifies the maximum accept-
edge distance is a minimum of two times the diameter able diametric dimensions for various rivet sizes that
of the next standard size larger diameter rivet, it will be occur in multiple layer assemblies which are “drilled on
permissible to rework the smaller countersink or dimple assembly”.
NOMINAL MAX. ACCEPTABLE DIAMETRIC DIMENSION

RIVET SIZE DRILL SIZE
AN470AD3 or AN426AD3 #40 (0.098 dia.) 0.108 in.
AN470AD4 or AN426AD4 #30 (0.1285 dia.) 0.141 in.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIAMETRIC DIMENSIONS
FIGURE 51--4
(3) When a hole becomes enlarged beyond ac- assure firm attachment.
ceptable diametric limit and the prescribed rivet cannot 4. “AN”-- BOLT, NUT AND WASHER INSTALLA-
be used, the next larger diameter rivet may be used if: TION. To compensate for material thickness toler-
(a) four--diameter (4D) rivet spacing is maintained and ances, the length of AN bolts may be increased or de-
(b) two--diameter (2D) edge distance is maintained. creased by one dash number from prescribed length.
3. BLIND RIVET INSTALLATION. Ordinarily, where AN960 regular washers and AN960L thin washers may
rivet bucking is impossible, cherrylock (CR--2248 and be used interchangeably for proper bolt and nut instal-
CR--2249) rivets may be substituted for AD rivets to relation.
pair skins and structural members. However, consult
One regular washer or one thin washer may be added
Mooney Airplane Company, Inc., Product Support De-
to any bolt installation. Washers may be used under the
partment or a representative of the Federal Aviation
bolt head and/or under the nut. AN365 and AN363 nuts
Administration before using blind--type or hollow rivets
may be used interchangeably. The AN363 nut is ac-
in primary structure.
ceptable for higher operating temperature installations.
CAUTION
The use of blind rivets normally require more fre- 5. HI--SHEAR RIVET INSTALLATION. When a hi--
quent inspection of the area where used. Inspect shear rivet pin of the prescribed length is not available,
for evidence of loosening of the rivet(s) or crack the next longer length pin may be used with cadmium--
development that may cause deterioration of plated steel washers to adjust pin grip length. The com-
structural integrity. Solid rivet replacement of bined washer thickness shall not exceed .096 inch.
blind rivets is recommended at earliest possible 6. MS20470--AD4 or MS20426--AD4 rivets may re-
maintenance. place spot welds in aluminum structures, (1) per spot.
Check existing rivet hole size before installing blind riv- Head side and/or double flush requirements deter-
ets. When hole is marginal, use next larger size rivet to mined by form, fit & function of assembly.
51--10--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
51--11--00 -- RESERVED ing rod, meeting requirement of specification

51--12--00 -- FUSELAGE REPAIR MIL--R--5632, class 2, is recommended for oxy--acety-
lene welding. Electrodes meeting requirement of speci-
51--12--01 -- TUBULAR STRUCTURE REPAIR fication MIL--F--5632--A, class 2, or AWS A5.18--69,
Check tubular structure annually for corrosion and class E705--2 are recommended for inert--gas,
damage. Refer to Service Bulletin M20--208( ). Interior shielded--arc welding (Heliarc). Use AISI 4130 condi-
panels may require removal to gain access to areas tion N steel for replacement and repair of tubes and for
which are difficult to inspect. making repair sleeves. Replacing a member or subas-
sembly is often advantageous and more feasible than
Refer to AC 43.13--( ) for general, tubular frame repair repair. All detail tubes or assemblies needed for re-
procedures. Warped or bent tube members can often placement can be purchased from Service Parts De-
be straightened; however, all surrounding welds should partment, Mooney Airplane Company, Inc., Louis
be dye checked for cracks after tube straightening. Schreiner Field, Kerrville, Texas 78028, telephone
Use proper material when making weld repairs. Weld- (800) 331--3880.
IF NOT GREATER THAN ”A” (DIAM. OF TUBE)

1/4 OF TUBE
CIRCUM. (MAX.) 2A 2A
DAMAGE R51--5
WELDED PATCH -- LOCAL DAMAGE REPAIR

FIGURE 51--5
1. WELDED PATCH REPAIR OF LOCAL DAMAGE. C. Select a tube with an outer diameter equal to in-
Use a welded patch to repair dents, small holes, and ner diameter of tube to be repaired and with same wall
cracks no longer than outside diameter of tube and cov- thickness.
ering a maximum of 1/4 of tube circumference.
D. Cut tube to length, five times outer diameter of
Drill out crack, smooth hole edges, weld hole or dent tube to be spliced.
and file repaired surface smooth. Form a patch that will
cover twice the diameter of tube from both edges of E. Install inner sleeve in tube to be repaired so that
damaged area and twice the circumferential area of its outer end is one and one--half of original tube diame-
damage as shown in (Figure 51--5). Weld patch in ter from nearest end of the diagonal cut; secure in posi-
place. tion with a rosette weld on each side at one--half original
tube diameter from inner--sleeve end.
2. INNER SLEEVE SPLICING. Use an inner sleeve
splice to partially replace a tube without increasing out- F. Install replacement tube over inner sleeve allow-
side diameter (Figure 51--6). ing a 1/8 inch gap for welding between original and re-
placement tubes.
A. Make a 30--degree cut to remove damaged por-
tion of tube; then, remove burr from remaining end. G. Weld inner sleeve to tube stubs through the 1/8
inch gap, forming an overlaid bead across gap.
B. Cut replacement tube of same material (AISI
4130 steel, condition N), same diameter and same wall H. Rosette weld replacement tube to inner sleeve
thickness as original tube. in two or more places.
51--11--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
A
30
1/2A
SLEEVE A A
ORIGINAL REPAIR 1/2A
TUBE TUBE ROSETTE WELD REPLACEMENT
INSIDE TUBE
LEAVE 1/8 IN. GAP FOR WELDING

ROSETTE WELD
30
SLEEVE 2A A A
REPAIR
TUBE 1/2A 1/2A
INSIDE 5A R51--6
INNER SLEEVE SPLICING

FIGURE 51--6
WELD HERE FIRST

1/4 IN.
4 ROSETTE WELDS
1/8 IN. GAP

1/2A 30
FOR WELDING
1/2A
1--1/2A 1--1/2A R51--7
SPLIT--SLEEVE SPLICE
FIGURE 51--7
3. SPLIT--SLEEVE SPLICING. Use split--sleeve C. Form split sleeve from same material (AISI 4130
splice to repair a damaged tube when parts on each steel, condition N) with at least the same gauge as origi-
side of the damage cannot be separated to insert an in- nal tube.
ner sleeve (Figure 51--7). D. Allow a 1/8 inch gap between sleeve halves for
welding.
A. Form split sleeve from steel tube or sheet steel
when outside diameter of original tube is less than one E. Weld parallel edges of sleeve to original tube
inch. through 1/8 inch gaps.
F. Weld center of each sleeve half to original tube
B. Form split sleeve from sheet steel when outside with two rosette welds spaced one original tube diame-
diameter of the original tube is one inch or more. ter apart.
51--12--01
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
4. TENSION FITTING REPLACEMENT (Figure A. Small holes up to a #20 drill may be closed by
51--8). welding with the inert gas, shielded arc method.
A. Cut tubes (A) and (B) loose from tension fitting B. Nicks and drill marks that are no longer than 1/8”
340034--7, --8 at welds. and do not exceed four percent of wall thickness, in
B. Cut existing tube (C) at a 30 degree angle seven depth, after cleanup may be smoothed out and re-
inches from bottom of tension fitting. primed. Nicks, holes, and cracks that will clean up with
C. Cut a replacement tube (C) at a 30 degree angle a #20 drill may be drilled and repaired per item A.
and at an appropriate length to position tension fitting. C. The repair of weld beads on heat--treated as-
Weld tension fitting in proper position. semblies may be accomplished without reheat treat-
D. Drill four 1/4 inch holes for rosette welds, 1.9 ment within the following limits.
inches from center of 30 degree cut. (1) The repair bead will not exceed .375 in length
E. Make an inner sleeve 5.0 inches long from 4130 or 1/3 of total length of weld, whichever is the lesser.
steel tube, condition N, with outside diameter to match
(2) Only one repair per weld bead is allowed.
inside diameter of tube (C) and with a .085 inch wall
thickness. 6. REPAIR OF SPOT WELDS. Failed spot welds on
F. Insert inner sleeve in tube (C) and weld in place aluminum may be repaired by installing an AD470--4
as shown (Figure 51--8). rivet through weld if damaged area will clean up with a
#30 drill.
5. REPAIRS FOR WELDED ASSEMBLIES -- Gener-
al. This section does not apply to any control system 7. DENTS. Small dents which do not exceed five per-
tubing or assemblies, engine mounts or heat treated cent of the diameter of the tube, in depth, and are no
steel components (except as stated below). longer than one--half tube diameter are acceptable.
TUBE TUBE
.125 IN. WELD GAP
A B
TUBE
30
1.9 IN.
SLEEVE 2.0 IN.
TUBE 340034--7
INSIDE 5.0 IN. TENSION FITTING
R51--8
TENSION FITTING REPLACEMENT

FIGURE 51--8
51--12--02 -- TAILCONE REPAIRS 2. TAILCONE STRUCTURAL SKIN REPAIR. Repair
1. LONGERON SPLICING. Use procedure outlined minor tailcone skin damage as shown in AC 43.13--( ),
in AC 43.13--( ) for repairing and splicing tailcone lon- Figure 2.24. The rivet pattern for stressed skin repairs
gerons. (Figure 51--9) shows acceptable methods for shall be the same as rivet pattern in skin joint immedi-
splicing longerons. Consult AC 43.13--( ), Figures 2.28, ately forward of damaged area. Replace severely dam-
2.29 and 2.30 for fastener requirements. aged structural skin panels. Install new skin panels to
exactly match original skin installation.
51--12--02
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
.072
.75
.062
.072
R51--9
LONGERON SPLICING
FIGURE 51--9
3. NONSTRUCTURAL SKIN REPAIR. The skin cov- parts, check control system travel and rigging as out-
ering the M20M aircraft tubular fuselage structure is lined in Chapter 27. Before returning aircraft to service,
considered nonstructural. Patches in nonstructural flight test aircraft for proper control system rigging.
skin are not restricted as to size or shape; however, ap-
51--13--00 -- WING REPAIR
pearance and possible vibration damage should be
considered. Either a flush patch, a plate patch, or a plug 51--13--01 -- STRINGER REPAIR
patch may be used. Stringer splicing may require drilling new holes and
51--12--03 -- LANDING GEAR & RETRACTION adding rivets between existing rivets to obtain required
SYSTEM REPAIR total number of rivets. Add extra rivets where distance
between existing rivets is greatest. The pitch and edge
Replace any damaged landing gear or retraction sys- distance must conform to AC 43.13--( ) requirements
tem component with a new part. Repairing landing gear (Figure 51--10).
or retraction system components is not recommended.
After installing new components, check gear and re- 51--13--02 -- MAIN SPAR REPAIR
traction system rigging as outlined in Section The spar caps inboard of STA 103 are made of
32--20--02. Before returning aircraft to service, perform 7075--T6 high--strength aluminum. Replacement of
a retraction test and operational check of landing gear spar cap is preferable to repair. However, if a spar cap
and retraction system per Section 32--30--01. repair is thought necessary, an exact description of
51--12--04 -- FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM REPAIR damage (digital photographs recommended), showing
location and extent should be sent to Product Support
Replace any damaged primary control system compo- Department, Mooney Airplane Company, Inc., Louis
nent with a new part. Repairing primary control system Schreiner Field, Kerrville, TX, 78028, (email to: support
components is not recommended. Use only new hard- @mooney.com) to obtain factory recommendations
ware when installing new parts. After installation of new prior to beginning the repair.
51--12--03
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
.750 .750
.062 .062
.750 SPLICE MATERIAL

.750
.040 .050 M20 SERIES: 2024--T4
DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING STRINGERS
4 2.0
4
.31 (5 PER SIDE)
MIN.
.750
.062
.750 5
.082 (5 PER SIDE)
CF
SPLICE MATERIAL:
.750 2.0 2014--T6
.082 4
4
CF (6 PER SIDE)
.66
.162
5
(6 PER SIDE)
CF
R51--10
STRINGER REPAIR
FIGURE 51--10
1. SPAR CAP REPLACEMENT. To replace spar cap, place or repair damaged extrusions. Do not allow
remove skin covering area to be repaired. Before re- splices in a repaired extrusion to coincide with a spar--
moving a large area of wing skin, attach temporary jigs web splice when avoidable. Splice sheet--metal angles
or holding fixtures to wing to prevent wing warpage. with an extrusion of equal area, picking up existing fas-
When attaching a new spar cap, assure proper interfer- teners. Add extra fasteners to bring minimum number
ence fit of any replaced huckbolts. During installation of of fasteners to six AD--5 rivets per side in the vertical
new spar cap, all holes damaged by improper drilling or flange and nine AD--4 (or six AD--5) rivets per side in the
reaming should be reamed to hole size recommended horizontal flange (Figure 51--11).
for oversize huckbolt installation. When installing over- 3. SPAR WEB REPAIR. Repair all damage to spar
size huckbolts, consult the Huck Fastener Standards webs in accordance with AC 43.13--( ). If there is exten-
Manual for proper tolerances. Use proper length huck- sive damage to a web that cannot be repaired as out-
bolts. If huckbolt is too long, the huck collar will not lined in AC 43.13--( ), consult Mooney Airplane Compa-
swage properly; if the huckbolt is too short, the shank ny, Inc., Product Support Department personnel (email
will not completely fill hole. to: support @mooney.com), giving exact location and
Repair scratches on spar caps that are not deeper than extent of damage.
.003 inch by sanding with No. 400 abrasive paper. Re-
move no more than .005 inch of material. Inspect
sanded area; use dye penetrant to be sure that scratch
is completely removed. Clean and prime area where
protective coating has been removed.
2. SPAR CAP REPAIR. Spar caps outboard of STA
103 consist of sheet metal angles backed up with alu-
minum extrusions from STA 103 to near STA 150. Re-
51--13--02
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
SPLICE ANGLE MATERIAL: 7075--T6 .875

5
(4 MIN. EACH SIDE) .160
CF
.130
.688
.813
ALPPH--TP (4 MIN. EACH SIDE)
VIEW LOOKING UP
VIEW LOOKING DOWN

R51--11
SPAR CAP REPAIR

FIGURE 51--11
51--13--03 -- STUB SPAR REPAIR (Stub spar splice
at wing STA 34.5 +/--3.0)
4 MS20470AD4--xx 1. Cut stub spar halfway between existing rivets as
required by damage incurred (Figure 51--13).
5 MS20470AD5--xx 2. Smooth all rough or sharp edges and prime area to
be spliced.
4 MS20426AD4--xx 3. Locate new outboard section and trim splice to fit
5 MS20426AD5--xx with a maximum gap of .020 inch.

4. Fabricate --501 angles to pick up 30 existing fas-
BP CR516--xx R51--12 tener holes (30 recommended, but 22 minimum), --503
angles to pick up 15 existing fastener holes (12 mini-
mum), and --505 plate and --507 spacer (Figure 51--13).
RIVET CODE FOR STRUCTURAL REPAIRS Prime angles, plate, and spacer. Rivet parts together
FIGURE 51--12 using wet primer on all rivets.
51--13--03
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
--505 PLATE (REF)

210054--7
1.66 WEB (REF)
1.07 --501 (REF) --507
82
20.0 98
--501 FLAT PATTERN (.091 AISI C 130, A
COND. ”N” STEEL)
210055 CAP (REF) SECT B--B

.74
--503 (REF)
SECT A--A
1.56 DETAIL A
W.S. 43.5 W.S. 21.75 AIRPLANE

C
L
(10) AN 470--AD4 RIVETS
28.0
--503 FLAT PATTERN (.040 AISI 4130, THRU SKIN AND --503 STUB SPAR (REF)
COND. ”N” STEEL)
STEP UP AN426--AD4
TO ADS THRU SPAR
CAPS AND --501 ANGLES
THIS AREA.
REAR SPAR (REF)
A
B (18) AN 470--AD5 RIVETS
EACH SIDE OF SPLICE
B --503 PLATE
AN 470--AD6 2024--T3 CLAD (.050)
A
RIVETS (REF)
PICK UP (15) B/P FASTENERS EACH SIDE OF SPLICE & --503 ANGLE
PICK UP (30) B/P FASTENERS EACH SIDE OF SPLICE CENTERLINE R51--13
STUB SPAR REPAIR

FIGURE 51--13
51--13--03
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
51--13--04 -- REAR SPAR REPAIR 51--13--07 -- WING SKIN PANEL REPAIR

The rear spar may be spliced between ribs in accor- Repair wing skin panels as prescribed in AC 43.13--( ),
dance with AC 43.13--( ) (Figure 51--14). unless an entire skin panel is to be replaced. Install new
skin panels to exactly match original skin installation.
5.9 Preformed skin panels may be obtained from any
Mooney Service Center.
1. Damaged Dimple Repair Around Inspection
Holes. (Figure 51--16) Repair damaged dimples
around inspection holes when: (a) there are three or
REPLACE WITH SAME 4 .040 2024--T3 more cracked adjacent dimples, (b) the crack in one or
RIVETS ( 4 ) IN CLAD more of the dimples extends beyond radius of dimple
EXISTING HOLES CHANNEL
(5 EACH SIDE) into skin and (c) when there are four or more cracked
dimples around an inspection hole.
ORIGINAL
RIVETS
7.40 R51--14
4
REAR SPAR REPAIR
FIGURE 51--14
51--13--05 -- RIB REPAIR REPAIR FLANGE
Replace ribs that are severely damaged. Minor dam- EDGE OF REAR PIECE
age may be repaired as shown (Figure 51--15).
51--13--06 -- WING TIP REPAIR
To repair severe damage to wing tip outboard of STA
193.5, it is advisable to replace entire tip skin and rib.
1. Locate new tip rib in exact original tip rib position to
prevent wing tip twisting. Use temporary support or lo-
cator pins to maintain correct wing tip position. 4
EDGE OF REPLACED
2. Rivet new tip rib to main and rear spars. FORWARD PIECE R51--15
3. Locate new skin, and drill rivet holes through skin
to match existing holes in ribs and stringers. RIB REPAIR
FIGURE 51--15
4. Rivet skin to rib at STA 193.5.
5. Roll skin back on lower wing surface to gain access To repair damaged dimples (a) cut a doubler from same
to stringers for rivet bucking. Rivet skin to upper string- material and gauge as skin to be repaired, (b) drill and
ers. countersink 100--degree fastener holes in doubler to
match dimpled fastener holes in skin, and (c) install
6. Rivet skin to tip rib starting at leading edge. Buck doubler around inspection hole. Use AN426--AD4 riv-
rivets as far back as possible. ets when material is .040 inch thick or greater. Drill
7. Install cherrylock (CR--2248) blind rivets in places holes using a No. 30 (.128 IN.) drill as shown in the
inaccessible for rivet bucking. Add one extra counter- above illustration. Use AN426--AD3 rivets when mate-
sunk blind rivet between every other pair of cherrylock rial is .032 inch thick or less. Drill holes using a No. 40
rivets. (.098 IN.) drill.
51--13--04
Page 15
Rev Date Date 2006
9.5 8.8
7.5 5.40
32 EQUALLY SPACED 26 EQUALLY SPACED

RIVETS .25 TYPICAL RIVETS .25 TYPICAL
R51--16
ACCESS COVER REPAIR
FIGURE 51--16
ings with two--diameter edge distances in a circular pat-
tern around cracked dimple.
BP
C. Round corners of doubler, and scarf sand-
EXISTING CRACKED wiched edges to about .010 inch by .250 inch.
DIMPLE
D. Drill holes for six rivets (same size as those in
BP original rivet pattern) through doubler and area to be re-
ADD paired. Dimple 100 degree dimples in doubler.
E. Prime area to be repaired and install doubler
with wet primer.
6 FASTENERS (SAME SIZE AS ORIGINAL

BP FASTENER WITH CRACKED DIMPLE)
ADD
RIB
STRINGER BP
EXISTING
R51--17
DIMPLE CRACKS REPAIR

FIGURE 51--17
2. Repair of Cracks Wholly Within Dimple Radius
CRACKED DOUBLER (SAME GAUGE
(Figure 51--17). Surface cracks on inside (bearing) face DIMPLE AS SKIN) -- SCARF EDGES TO
of dimple that do not extend through material can be re- APPROX. .010 IN. DEEP AND
paired by sanding out crack. Cracks in dimples which .25 IN. WIDE; ROUND CORNERS
do not extend beyond dimple radius can be repaired by
(a) stop drilling crack with a No. 60 drill and (b) by add- R51--18
ing rivets, same size as those in original pattern, to
each side of cracked dimple. Maintain four--diameter DIMPLE CRACKS
(4D) spacing and two--diameter (2D) edge distances. FIGURE 51--18
When original rivet pattern has rivets on only one or two 4. Repair of Circumferentially Cracked Dimples. Cir-
sides of a dimple, only one or two rivets need be added. cumferentially cracked dimples (dimples with cracks
that appear as an annular mark around the dimple) can
3. Repair of Cracks Extending Beyond Dimple Ra- be repaired by installing a conical washer.
dius (Figure 51--18). Cracks that extend through face of
dimple into surrounding skin can be repaired as fol- A. Drill through dimple using a drill large enough to
lows: remove damaged area.
B. Install doubler as shown in Figure 51--18. Wet
A. Stop drill crack with No. 60 bit. prime prior to assembly.
B. Cut doubler from same material as skin to be re- C. Countersink dimple hole in skin allowing coun-
paired. Allow for six rivets at four--diameter rivet spac- tersink to extend into substructure.
51--13--07
Page 16
Date 2006 Rev Date
D. Install conical washer, use next oversize rivet 9.00 and STA 40.0 on spar lower flange with a splice
size. Wet prime washer and adjacent skin and doubler angle formed from .070 AISI 4130 steel, condition N.
surfaces prior to assembly (Figure 51--19). The splice angle flanges must be as wide as original
E. Drill remainder of hole to allow installation of spar flanges. The splice angle must be long enough to
next larger diameter rivet than rivets in original pattern. install 11 AD4 rivets through skin and 11 rivets through
spar web on each side of damaged area.
WET PRIMER 100o CONICAL WASHER
Prime splice angle before riveting it to spar. Pick up five
existing rivet holes and drill six new holes between ex-
isting rivet holes in the skin at each side of the damaged
area. Install 22 AD4 rivets through splice angle and
skin, and 22 AD4 rivets through splice angle and spar
web.
SKIN
2. Repair main spar cap damage between STA 34
DOUBLER and STA 48.5 by forming a splice angle from 3/4 inch by
SUBSTRUCTURE 3/4 inch .050 2024--T3 sheet aluminum (Figure 51--20).
Pick up five existing holes and drill six new rivet holes
SCARF EDGES NEXT OVERSIZE RIVET between existing holes in the skin on each side of dam-
SM51--19 aged area. Install 11 AD4 rivets through angle and skin
OVERSIZE HOLE and 10 AD4 rivets through angle and web on each side
FIGURE 51--19 of the damaged area.
51--14--00 -- HORIZONTAL STABILIZER & VER- 3. Repair main spar damage from STA 48.5 outboard
TICAL FIN REPAIR by installing splice angles made from .040 2024--T3
51--14--01 -- LEADING EDGE SKIN REPAIR material on both side of web using 12 AD4 rivets (6
through skin and 6 through web on each side of dam-
The horizontal stabilizer and vertical fin leading edge
aged area) (Figure 51--21).
interiors are inaccessible near the tailcone. To repair
damage in these areas, cut a standard (3.0 inches by Pick up three existing holes and drill three new holes
6.5 inches) access hole in lower side of stabilizer lead- between existing holes on each side of damaged area.
ing edge and close access hole by installing inspection 4. Repair main spar web damage outboard of STA
cover P/N 913000--501. 34.0, top flange, and STA 48.5, lower flange by forming
a splice angle from .050 2024--T3 aluminum (Figure
.070 .050 51--22). The splice angle web flange should be cut to
allow sufficient coverage of the damaged area of exist-
.75 ing web and long enough to install 6 AD4 rivets on the
flange on each side of the damaged area. Pick up 3 ex-
SAME LENGTH AS isting rivet holes on flange of spar and drill 3 new rivet
ANGLE BEING SPLICED holes between existing holes. Drill 10 rivet holes
.75
through splice angle and web on each side of the dam-
aged web area. The damaged web should be stop
.70 drilled or cracked area removed prior to splice angle
installation. Prime splice angle and deburr spar web
R51--20 and flange before installing splice.
SPAR REPAIR (SAT. 9.0 & OUTBD.) 5. Spar webs outboard of STA 48.5 cracked more
FIGURE 51--20 than 50% of the web height may be repaired (see Fig-
51--14--02 -- MAIN SPAR REPAIR OUTBOARD OF ure 51--23). Form a splice plate from .050 2024--T3 alu-
STA. 9.00 minum to fit the inside dimensions of the web and
flange at the damaged area. Pick up 3 existing rivet
Repair damage to horizontal stabilizer main spar by holes on top and bottom flange on each side of dam-
straightening damaged area and inspecting it carefully aged area and drill 2 new AD4 rivet holes between
for cracks. If cracks are formed, stop drill or remove these existing holes. Pick up all rivet holes on web un-
cracked area. der splice plate and drill new rivet holes on equal spac-
1. Repair damage between STA 9.00 and STA 34.0 ing around the damaged area similar to that on Figure
(Figure 51--20) on spar upper flange, and between STA 51--18 rivets on each side of damaged area.
51--14--00
Page 17
Rev Date Date 2006
4 .75
(4 MIN. PER SIDE)
.75
4 .040
(3 MIN. PER SIDE) .040
.75
CR 2248 CHERRY LOCK

.040 2024T--3 CLAD (4 MIN. PER SIDE)
R51--21
SPAR REPAIR (STA. 48.5 APPROX.)

FIGURE 51--21
4
(10 EACH SIDE OF CRACK) RIVET GUN
(6 EACH SIDE OF CRACK) HUCK STUMP COLLAR
4
SWAGE SET
STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3

DRIVE HUCK INSTALL SWAGE
STUMP HUCK COLLAR COLLAR
BUCKING BAR
RIVET GUN
STOP--DRILL (OR REMOVE .050

CRACKED SPAR WEB AREA) 2024--T3
R51--22 STRAIGHT BENT #5
#5 & #6 SWAGE SET
SWAGE SET
SPAR REPAIR (OUTBD. of STA. 34.0)
FIGURE 51--22 R51--24
4
(5 EACH SIDE) .050 2024T--3 CLAD REMATING HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TO
STRINGER
FIGURE 51--24
51--14--03 -- RIB REPAIR
The repair of damaged stabilizer and fin ribs is not fea-
sible in most cases. Damaged ribs should be replaced
with new parts.
51--14--04 -- REJOINING HORIZONTAL STABILIZ-
ER TO STINGER
4 4 (5 EACH SIDE) When stabilizer repair necessitates removal from the
R51--23 stinger, rejoining can be facilitated by using huckbolt
substitution information contained in Section
SPAR REPAIR 51--10--01. When mating stabilizer to stinger use bent
FIGURE 51--23 rivet swage set #5 (Figure 51--24).
51--14--03
Page 18
Date 2006 Rev Date
51--15--00 -- FIBERGLASS LAMINATES, REPAIR 2. Remove any loose particles and frayed fiberglass
PROCEDURES strands from the cracked portion.
Despite the fact that fiberglass laminates are designed 3. Prepare surface for repair as shown in Figure
to withstand considerable abuse, occasional repairs 51--26, Figure 51--27, and Figure 51--28.
will be necessary. It is difficult to cover all the various 4. Prior to continuing the repair, all surfaces in the
repair techniques due to such limiting factors as acces- area of the repair must be cleaned of all contaminates
sibility and the extent of damage. The following outlines by wiping the area with a clean cloth saturated with
those steps which are used to make repairs of the more Methyl--Ethyl--Ketone.
common type damage to a fiberglass laminate. CAUTION
1. Materials used for repairs shall be as specified and Methyl Ethyl Ketone (M.E.K.) is a flammable liq-
compatible with the basic resin used in the fiberglass uid and should be used with proper ventilation
laminate (Figure 51--25). and the prescribed safety equipment.
CAUTION
Fiberglass components are attacked and deterio-
Resin Aerospace Adhesive EA934
rated by the following products: Ketone, aliphatic
Part A
esters, chlorinated hydrocarbons, and slightly
Catalyst Aerospace Adhesive EA934 softened by aromatic hydrocarbons.
Part B 51--15--02 -- NON--STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hysol Division 1. Apply masking tape over crack on finished surface
The Dexter Corporation side (Figure 51--26).
Alternates
2. Apply wet coat of catalyzed epoxy resin to cham-
Resin Epoxical #606 Patching Adhesive fered surface.
Resin 3. Apply one layer of #181 fiberglass cloth saturated
with catalyzed epoxy resin (A).
Catalyst Epoxical #606 Patching Adhesive
Hardener 4. Add additional plies of #181 fiberglass cloth, satu-
United States Gypsum rated with epoxy resin (B) through (C) or as required to
OR attain original laminate thickness.
5. Apply one additional ply of #181 cloth (D) bridging
Resin Ren Epoxy CG 1304 the total repaired area and bond in place.
Catalyst Ren Hardener CG 1304 51--15--03 -- COMMON STRUCTURAL LAMINATE
Ren Plastics Co. REPAIR (METAL INSERT)
Lansing, Michigan 1. Cut away laminate per Figure 51--27, roughen re-
pair area with 240 sandpaper, clean repair area with
REPAIR MATERIALS M.E.K. -- apply a wet coat of catalyzed epoxy resin to
FIGURE 51--25 surfaces. Then IMMEDIATELY proceed with steps 2
Fire retardation -- Antimony Trioxide for fire retardation thru 5.
(5% minimum; 10% maximum by Weight of Resin Con- 2. Install chemically cleaned .025 T--3 aluminum
tent) must be added to the base resin (cowling and air straps, perforated with #40 holes approximately .35 on
intake duct assemblies). center all directions.
The manufacturer’s bulletins shall be followed for all 3. Apply wet coat of epoxy resin to aluminum straps
mixing ratios and preparation prior to application. and apply one or more layers of resin saturated #181
fiberglass cloth to equal the thickness of the original
2. General. laminate.
A. The configuration of repairs is shown for flat sur- 4. Lay wax paper over both sides of the repaired area
face areas; for simplicity; however, the same tech- while still wet. This prevents adhesion to the pressure
niques can be used for contoured surfaces. Contoured clamp application (paragraph 5).
repairs will require additional considerations and the
5. Place rigid aluminum plates on both sides of repair
proper shaping of the backup plates used for clamping
area and clamp into place with “C” clamps. Permit lami-
the laminates together during the curing cycle.
nated repair to cure.
B. The degree of laminate chamfer and size will
6. After fiberglass repair has cured, remove clamps
vary based on accessibility, shape of part and the ex-
and install #3 AN426A rivets. Flush heads to be on fin-
tent of damage.
ished surface side. Number of rivets and spacing will be
51--15--01 -- CRACKS, IN SURFACE AREAS determined by size of repair.
1. Stop drills all cracks per standard aircraft proce- 7. Apply one additional overlapping layer of #181 fi-
dure. berglass cloth on non--finished surface and bond in
51--15--00
Page 19
Rev Date Date 2006
place. Should opposite side be a non--finished surface, Care should be taken to assure as smooth as possible
an additional layer of fiberglass should be applied to surface in this particular operation.
this side. Permit this surfacing coat to cure prior to any additional
8. Upon completion of steps 1 thru 7, permit repair to applications or further rework.
cure before attempting further treatment of appearance CAUTION
surfaces, if required. When sanding and working with fiberglass, wear
full eye--protection, ear--protection and a respira-
9. Appearance surfaces will normally require ap- tor or mask to protect you from airborne fiber-
plication of a filler--sealer coating. Appearance area is glass particles.
to be wiped clean, using a clean cloth saturated with
M.E.K. prior to applying filler--sealer coating. 11. Using #240 sandpaper, sand and blend repaired
area to match surrounding surface. Steps 10 and 11
10. Mix epoxy resin and catalyst per manufacturers may be repeated to acquire a satisfactory surface fin-
specifications and apply to appearance surface area. ish.
A
0.5” STOP DRILL
CRACK
OUTLINE OF
CHAMFER AREA
1.5” 1.5”
CRACK 1.5” CHAMFER 1.5” EACH

SIDE OF CRACK
B
FINISHED SURFACE THICKNESS .02 TO .04
A B C D
C
LAMINATE
FINISHED SURFACE MASKING TAPE THICKNESS
R51--26
NON--STRUCTURAL REPAIR
FIGURE 51--26
51--15--03
Page 20
Date 2006 Rev Date
#181 FIBERGLASS
CLOTH
.025 T--3 ALUM.
(SEE SECTION
.375” 2.0”
51--15--03, 2)
LAMINATE
CRACK .03”
.025 T--3 ALUM.
2.75”
(SEE SECTION
51--15--03, 2)
#181
FIBERGLASS
CLOTH
OVERLAP (1) LAYER FIBERGLASS
ALUM. PLATES
LAMINATE FLUSH RIVET (TYP.)

FINISHED FIBERGLASS -- BOND IN PLACE
SURFACE
OVERLAP (1) LAYER FIBERGLASS ONLY IF THIS
SIDE IS A NON--FINISHED SURFACE. R51--27
COMMON STRUCTURAL LAMINATE REPAIR -- METAL INSERT

FIGURE 51--27
51--15--04 -- COMMON STRUCTURAL LAMINATE ished surface side. The number of rivets and spacing
REPAIR (FIBERGLASS--RESIN COMBINATION) will be determined by the size of the repair.
1. Apply wet coat of catalyzed epoxy resin to cham- 8. Upon completion of steps 1 thru 7, allow repair to
fered surface (Figure 51--28). cure before attempting further treatment of appearance
2. Apply one layer of #181 fiberglass cloth saturated surface.
with catalyzed epoxy resin.
9. Appearance surfaces will normally require ap-
3. Add additional plies of #181 fiberglass cloth satu- plication of a filler--sealer coating. The appearance
rated with epoxy resin to attain original laminate thick- area is to be wiped clean, using a clean cloth saturated
ness. with M.E.K. prior to applying a filler--sealer coating.
4. Apply one layer of #181 fiberglass cloth to the non--
finished side of laminate, extending 1/2” each side of 10. Mix epoxy resin and catalyst per manufacturer’s
the chamfer and bond in place. specifications and apply to appearance surface area.
Care should be taken to assure as smooth as possible
5. Lay wax paper over both sides of the repaired area surface in this particular operation.
while still wet. This prevents adhesion to the pressure
clamp application (paragraph 6). Permit this surfacing coat to cure prior to any additional
6. Place rigid aluminum plates on both sides of repair application or further rework.
area and clamp into place with “C” clamps. Permit lami- 11. Using #240 sandpaper, sand and blend repaired
nate repair to cure. area to match surrounding surface. Steps 10 and 11
7. After fiberglass repair has cured, remove clamps may be repeated to acquire a satisfactory surface fin-
and install #3 AN426 rivets. Flush head to be on finish.
51--15--04
Page 21
Rev Date Date 2006
A
0.5” STOP DRILL
CRACK
CHAMFERED
SURFACE
& GLASS PATCH
OUTLINE
1.5” 1.5”
NON--FINISHED
SURFACE
CRACK
B
LAMINATE
THICKNESS
FINISHED SURFACE CHAMFER
EACH SIDE (TYP.)
THICKNESS .02 TO .04
0.50 0.50
C
(FIBERGLASS--RESIN COMBINATION) R51--28
COMMON STRUCTURAL LAMINATE REPAIR -- FIBERGLASS/RESIN

FIGURE 51--28
51--15--05 -- FIBERGLASS DELAMINATION RE- EXAMPLE: Part is Conversion Coated as detail part.
PAIR During replacement the part is spot faced to receive
1. Delamination or ply separation of a fiberglass bolt and washer. This part must be primed after spot
product is usually a result of poor bonding of fiberglass facing.
layers. Generally, this condition is localized and can be
readily repaired by carefully spreading apart plies of 2. Low Pressure, Plastic, or Rubber Line Splices.
delamination, and removing loose particles by blowing Static system lines may be lengthened, shortened, or
clean compressed air into damaged area. spliced to allow the replacement of sections of dam-
aged lines. The fittings are called out in the Parts Cata-
2. Proceed by inserting catalyzed epoxy resin into log text pages following the illustration depicting the as-
delamination and then immediately clamp delamina- sembly or component in question.
tion together. Permit repair to cure a minimum of 8
hours before removing clamps. If splices are made, the system must be checked for
3. Extensive delamination of a part will be reason for leaks.
total rejection of part and shall be scrapped per stan-
dard practices. 3. Shortening and Lengthening of Tubing, Hoses,
51--16--00 -- MISCELLANEOUS and Flexible Ducting. Mooney manufactured assem-
blies of plumbing, tubing, hoses, and flexible ducting
1. Protective Coatings. may be modified to allow the use of longer parts of the
A. Parts with protective coatings (such as Conver- same size and material to be cut and used as replace-
sion Coated or epoxy primer) on which coating is ments. When the manufactured ends of flexible ducting
scratched, spot faced, drilled, or in any way removed are removed, the raw edge must be taped with 3M alu-
must be recoated with epoxy primer. minum foil tape.
51--15--05
Page 22
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 52
DOORS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 52
DOORS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
52--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
52--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
52--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
52--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
52--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
52--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
52-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 52
DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
52--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
52--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Door -- Maintenance Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
52--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Door Rigging/Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . 7
52--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Door Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
52--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baggage Compt. Door -- Maintenance Practices . . . . . . 7
52--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baggage Compt. Door -- Latching Mechanism . . . . 8
52-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
52--00--00 -- GENERAL number of locator rivets may vary). These rivets will be
The cabin door is constructed of an inner and outer alu- underneath outer skin. After removal of outer rivets and
minum shell fastened together by rivets. It is provided screws, work a putty knife or a thin piece of aluminum
with single operation dual latching mechanisms, 1) a between outer skin and hinge and between hinge and
lock pin extends into a mating receptacle in lower door mounting plate from inside in order to break sealant
frame, and 2) a jaw type latch clamps a special de- bond. During this procedure determination can be
signed nut in upper door frame to hold door securely in made where locator rivets are positioned. Locate these
place. The door is hinged at the forward edge by an ex- rivets from inside and drill bucked head(s) carefully. DO
truded, aluminum hinge. A guide pin is in door assem- NOT DRILL THROUGH OUTER SKIN. Attempt to
bly to assist in holding door tightly shut at forward, up- move door and hinge aft and away from attach point af-
per door area. The inner and outer handle are ter each rivet stem is drilled out. The door and hinge
interconnected by adjustable push--pull tubes. This should come free when all sealant bond and rivets are
mechanism is spring loaded to an over center position removed.
in the latched position for positive security. Adjustment NOTE
for each push--pull tube is provided to accurately rig Some aircraft may have “AN” bolts instead of
latching pin and jaw type latch. Adjustment to the spe- rivets.
cial nut at the top of door frame can be made for proper
closure. DOOR
The baggage compartment door is constructed of an
inner and outer aluminum shell fastened together by RIVET
rivets. It has dual pin latches that extend into receptacle
fittings on both sides of the door frame when exterior
handle is closed properly. SCREWS (8)
The auxiliary exit handle is located inside baggage
door. This handle can be operated from inside even if
outer handle is locked. A cam mechanism allows a cle-
vis pin to bypass outer handle latch groove and open
the two latching pins which hold baggage door closed.
HINGE
(Refer to POH/AFM Section III for specific procedures
to operate auxiliary exit handle.) This door is hinged at
the top with an extruded piano type hinge.
Hold open arms are attached on doors to assist in hold-
ing doors open.
A door lock is provided for both doors. A single key will
operate either door lock. Interior panels require remov-
al if door locks are to be removed and replaced. RIVET
52--10--00 -- CABIN DOOR – MAINTENANCE
PRACTICES
1. Removal. The cabin door may be removed to re-
place or repair door or to replace a damaged hinge.
R52--1
A. Remove interior panel around forward door
frame.
B. Remove hold open arm at door frame. Remove CABIN DOOR ATTACHING HARDWARE
cotter pin and washers from hold open arm shaft. Pull FIGURE 52--1
shaft up from doubler plate and clear of door frame.
2. Door Repair.
C. Remove eight (8) screws from outside airplane
A. The door should be repaired, if applicable, ac-
that hold front portion of hinge in place. There are also
cording to standard procedures in AC 43.13--1B CHG
three (3) flush rivets that will require removal at this
1.
location (Figure 52--1).
D. Carefully drill center of rivet head with a 1/8th B. Remove interior door panel, if necessary, to re-
inch drill bit until head pops off and rivet stem can be pair door assembly.
punched out. 3. Installation.
The original door assembly, with hinge attached, is as- OLD DOOR ---- Old door can be relocated by using ex-
sembled to door frame prior to installation of outer skin. isting holes. Mounting plate should be thoroughly
The door is placed into position and hinge held in place cleaned of all sealant and foreign material before rein-
on its mounting plate by sealant and locator rivets. (The stallation of door.
52--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
7. SLIDE CAM 6. LATCH JAWS
9. ADJUSTMENT
POINT
COVER PLATE
3. SPRING
FWD
8. ADJUSTMENT
5. UPPER LINK
POINT 4. HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
1. LOWER
2. BELLCRANK
LINK
ARM
VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD AT CABIN DOOR R52--2
CABIN DOOR -- RIGGING/ADJUSTMENT

FIGURE 52--2
NEW DOOR -- A new door or hinge will require proper D. Remove door, deburr holes and clean shavings
positioning of door to obtain proper sealing. from area.
A. Place door, with new hinge, positioned between NOTE
outer skin and mounting plate. The rivets and rivet holes originally used as loca-
B. When door is properly positioned in door frame, tors do not have to be utilized when installing a
mark new hinge for mounting, using existing holes, ei- new door or hinge if proper alignment can be ob-
ther from outer skin locations or from hinge mounting tained using another method.
plate inside cabin. E. Apply sealant, PR1321--B2, or equivalent, be-
C. Drill new holes in hinge carefully while door is tween outer skin and hinge support plate on tubular
securely in place. structure.
52--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
vide adequate sealing around periphery of cabin door

F. Reinstall door hinge to mounting plate using during flight conditions.
eight (8) flat head screws removed earlier and three (3) 1. Cabin door seal replacement.
flat head, AD4 standard (AD5 oversize) rivets. A. The seal is held to inner door frame with adhe-
G. Adjust door latching mechanism so door closes sive.
and seals during flight. (See door rigging procedures B. Remove door inner trim panel to gain access to
paragraph 52--11--00). door seal.
H. Reinstall hold open arm with new cotter pin. C. Pull seal from door frame.
I. Reinstall interior panel to door frame and cabin. D. Clean area with lacquer thinner to help soften
J. Paint door/hinge to match airplane. remaining adhesive. Remove excess adhesive.
CAUTION
52--11--00 -- CABIN DOOR RIGGING/ADJUST-
Care should be exercised to keep lacquer thinner
MENT PROCEDURES
from dripping on wing or any other portion of
The cabin door latching mechanism has several adjust- airplane.
ment points that may be utilized to obtain proper rigging E. Apply seal adhesive (St. Clair #4587, 3M #4799
(Figure 52--2). Removal of interior door panel will be re- or 3M #8001) per adhesive manufacturer’s instruc-
quired to gain access to adjustment points. tions.
1. Adjust cabin door linkage to satisfy requirements F. Carefully place end of seal into position at bot-
listed below. tom of door and continue around door until seal is firmly
A. Latching pin must contact striker plate hole on attached. Do not pull tight around corners. Cut off any
door frame, the full circumference of pin, when mecha- excess seal.
nism is in full latched position. G. When seal is properly attached, door should
B. Latching pin must clear striker plate when open- close with little effort.
ing or closing door with latching mechanism in full open NOTE
position. Door contour can be altered slightly to conform
C. As lower link (1) and bellcrank arm (2), (Fig. to cabin contour, if needed, for proper fit and
52--2) travel over center, the spring (3), is to be com- sealing.
pressed to 1.000 +/--.030. 52--30--00 -- BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR --
NOTE MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
Washers may be added between spring and link 1. Removal.
or 310294--501 housing assembly (4) to comply The baggage compartment door may be removed to
with items B and C, (Figure 52--2). replace or repair door or to replace a damaged hinge.
D. The lower link (1) and bellcrank arm (2), in full A. Remove coat hanger and headliner panel lo-
locked position, should be overcenter a minimum of .3 cated inside and directly under baggage door hinge
inches, (Figure 52--2). area.
NOTE B. Pull insulation back to clear rivet shanks.
It is not necessary that lower link (1) contact up-
C. Center punch rivet heads holding hinge half to
per link (5), (Figure 52--2).
fuselage.
E. The outside handle is to be flush with outside D. Carefully drill rivet heads and punch rivets from
skin when mechanism is in full latched position. holes.
F. In full latched position, upper latch jaws (6) must E. Work putty knife or thin piece of aluminum be-
be closed and latch slide cam (7) at the end of its full tween outer skin and hinge and inner skin frame and
travel. See adjustment points (8) and (9), (Figure hinge to break sealant bond.
52--2).
F. Remove hinge and baggage door assembly
G. In full open position, upper latch jaws must be carefully.
open and slide cam at end of its full travel.
G. Clean hinge and hinge mounting area thorough-
NOTE ly of all sealant or foreign material.
Slide cam (7) moves 1.13 in. from full latched to
2. Repair.
full open position.
The baggage door may be repaired per standard repair
52--12--00 -- CABIN DOOR SEAL procedures in accordance with AC 43.13--1B CHG 1.
The cabin door seal is an extruded rubber seal filled Repairs may be made to baggage door on airplane if
with soft foam. Unless deformed or torn, seal will pro- feasible.
52--11--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE E. Remove door assembly. Deburr and clean area

If repairs are to be made, interior trim panel may completely prior to reinstallation of door assembly.
require removal.
F. Apply sealant (PR1321--B2 or equivalent) to
3. Installation. hinge mounting flange and between outer skin and
OLD HINGE door frame.
A. Place repaired baggage door with old hinge into G. Reinstall door assembly and cleco securely in
position and cleco securely to assure fit of door; check place.
latching operations.
B. Remove door -- assure attachment area is clean H. Install rivets, (AD4 standard, AD5 oversize) in
of old sealant. all holes. Remove clecoes as rivets are being installed
to keep door aligned.
C. Apply sealant, PR1321--B2 or equivalent, to
hinge attachment area between outer skin and inner 52--31--00 -- BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOOR --
frame. LATCHING MECHANISM
D. Reinstall door assembly with old hinge and cle- The baggage compartment door has a direct, non--ad-
co hinge for proper placement. justable latching linkage that inserts two pins into hard
E. Install rivets (AD4 standard, AD5 oversize) in all points in door frame. This latching mechanism can only
holes. be locked from outside aircraft. An auxiliary exit mecha-
nism is incorporated into this latching mechanism
NEW HINGE
which allows door to be opened, in an emergency, from
A. Place old door assembly with new hinge or new inside, even if outside handle is locked.
door assembly and new hinge into position and latch
door in place. NOTE
There is no way to shut and latch baggage
NOTE compartment door from inside.
Hinge mounting area should be clean of old seal-
ant and debris. Outside handle has to be unlatched and fully opened to
B. Push in on door assembly at top, while door is in correctly re--engage latching mechanism after use of
latched position to properly locate door and seal in door inside, auxiliary, exit handle (Figure 52--3).
frame. There is a spring attached to clevis pin of latch linkage.
C. While door is held in place mark holes in new This ensures positive re--engagement of clevis pin into
hinge using holes in outer skin as locators. cam slot of outside handle for proper actuation of out-
NOTE side latching mechanism.
Verify correct position of door prior to drilling NOTE
holes in hinge. Follow procedures in Pilots Operating Handbook/
D. Center punch all holes and carefully drill two end Airplane Flight Manual (POH/AFM, SECTION III)
holes. Fasten clecoes in these and recheck door as- for re--engagement of mechanism for proper out-
sembly fit, if satisfactory continue drilling all holes. side handle operation.
HITCH PIN HANDLE

CLIP/PIN ASSY
CR3213--4--2
RIVET
(2 PLC)
LANYARD CR3213--4--3 RIVET
(ORIENTATION NOT AN960--4 WASHER (2)
CRITICAL) (1 UNDER RIVET HEAD &
1 ON BACK SIDE OF HANDLE)
MS20470--4 RIVET (OPT)
R52--3
BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH MECHANISM

FIGURE 52--3
52--31--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 53
FUSELAGE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 53
FUSELAGE
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
53--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--40--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
53-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 53
FUSELAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
53--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tubular Structure Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailcone Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates/Skins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--40--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Attach Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empennage Attach Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
53--40--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nose Landing Gear Attach Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
53--40--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Mount Attach Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
53-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
53--00--00 -- GENERAL The empennage attach points (6) are attached to rear
bulkhead (7) with tabs extended forward and attached
The Mooney M20M forward fuselage is constructed
to tailcone structure.
from 4130 chrome molybdenum, tubular steel covered
with aluminum skins. The tubular steel sub--assem- 53--20--00 -- FIREWALL
blies are Heliarc welded in fixtures, inspected and then
assembled into main cabin fixture and Heliarc welded The firewall is .016 stainless steel, attached to forward,
to produce cabin frame enclosure. The assembled, in- 4130 tubular steel structure. Fiberglass insulation and
spected, steel structure is sand blasted and epoxy vinyl are placed between firewall and cabin interior to
primed for corrosion protection. restrict engine compartment heat and noise. All engine
compartment/cabin access holes are sealed tight to
The tailcone bulkheads, formers, skins, etc., are prevent fire and smoke in cabin. Reference Section
formed from sheet aluminum on either a hydro press or 71--30--00 for sealing procedures.
drop hammer. These components, along with string-
ers, clips, brackets, etc., are positioned together on a 53--30--00 -- PLATES/SKINS
fixture and assembled into the aft fuselage assembly. The fuselage tubular structure is covered with alumi-
All air ducts, control brackets, tubes and bellcranks, num skins after mating to tailcone. The skins are riv-
electrical harnesses and antennas are installed into eted and bolted to support angles, formers and brack-
tailcone during this assembly process. ets. These skins are non--structural coverings to form
The forward cabin enclosure and tailcone assembly outside contour of forward fuselage section.
are joined together and then mated to the wing assem-
The skins, covering tailcone, are an integral part of tail-
bly.
cone structure. Repair or replacement of these skins
53--10--00 -- MAIN FRAME should be according to AC 43.13--1( ) Chap. 2, Sect. 3.
53--10--01 -- TUBULAR STRUCTURE FRAME The fuselage assembly and tailcone have panels, cov-
The basic cabin tubular steel enclosure is shown (Fig- ers or doors at various locations to provide access to
ure 53--1). interior for inspection or maintenance purposes. (See
Figure 53--3).
Belly skins are removable to provide access to all com-
ponents and control systems located below floorboard.
See (Figure 53--3) and following Table for component
location and identification.
NOTE
PR 1766--B2 sealant should be used on all fuse-
lage lap joints, where bonded, to provide positive
electrical ground plane for electrical systems.
53--40--00 -- ATTACH FITTINGS
53--40--01 -- WING ATTACH FITTINGS
The wing assembly (1) is attached to fuselage assem-
bly (2) using structural hardware (4); (Figure 53--4).
R53--1 Various types of fittings (3) are used to properly distrib-
ute load between wing and fuselage.
53--40--02 -- EMPENNAGE ATTACH FITTINGS
TUBULAR STRUCTURE FRAME
FIGURE 53--1 The empennage assembly is manufactured as a unit
(1), (Figure 53--5) with vertical fin and horizontal stabi-
53--10--02 -- TAILCONE STRUCTURE
lizer using common components. This unit attaches to
The tailcone is of semi--monocoque construction. The tailcone empennage attach points (1) (Figure 53--6),
internal structure is shown on (Figure 53--2). The for- using two structural bolts, bushings and nuts (2) (Fig.
ward cabin structure (1) is bolted to tailcone with eight 53--5) passing through two top hinges (3) (Fig. 53--5).
structural bolts (8). The tailcone skin (2) is an integral The bottom attach point (4) (Fig. 53--5) on empennage
load bearing portion of tailcone assembly. The avionics assembly secures stabilizer trim jack screw (5) (Fig.
equipment shelf (3) spans tailcone width to provide ri- 53--5) and (4) (Fig. 53--6). Lateral stability of empen-
gidity and space for avionics components. The batter- nage assembly is controlled with an articulated hinge
ies are located in this area also at (5) on both sides of assembly (2) (Fig. 53--6) attached to rear bulkhead (3)
tailcone. The hat rack shelf (4) provides rigidity as well (Fig. 53--6) of tailcone. The hinge attach pin (6) (Fig.
as storage space. 53--5) is held in place with a cotter pin at each end.
53--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
1
8
8
4
1
2
6
5
R53--2
TAILCONE CONSTRUCTION
FIGURE 53--2
53--40--03 -- NOSE LANDING GEAR ATTACH NOTE
POINTS Heat treated components should NOT be re-
The steerable nose gear assembly is a welded, heat-- paired; replace them.
treated, 4130 chrome molybdenum steel assembly. Refer to Chapter 57--40--03 for Main Landing Gear as-
The gear mounts to the cabin tubular frame and engine sembly.
mount with AN6 bolts (Figure 53--7, Item 3). Rubber
discs absorb shock of taxiing and landing. The gear as- 53--40--04 -- ENGINE MOUNT ATTACH POINTS
sembly should be inspected at any scheduled mainte- The engine mount is attached to hard points built into
nance action for wear (refer to Chapter 5 -- Time Limits/ forward portion of tubular structure.
Maintenance Checks).
The upper and outboard, lower hard points (1) & (2)
Grease fittings are installed at pivot points of nose (Figure 53--7) are for NAS1304 bolts installed for ten-
landing gear assembly for lubrication per Chapter 5. sion loads. Lower hard points (3) are for shear loads
CAUTION and are used in conjunction w/ attachment of nose
No welding repairs are approved for the landing landing gear lower truss assembly (Figure 53--7). AN6
gear assembly. bolts are installed at this location.
53--40--03
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
9
10
24
22
8
7
6, 6A
1. CABIN DOOR
2. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3. BAGGAGE DOOR 20
4. ELEVATOR/RUDDER CONTROL STOPS 19 11
5. EMPENNAGE ATTACHMENT 12
16, 17, 18
6. AVIONICS BLACK BOXES, BATTERY, ELT ACCESS
6A. BATTERY ACCESS 21
13
7. STABILIZER TRIM JACK SCREW
8. EMPENNAGE ATTACHMENT
9. ELEVATOR/RUDDER CONTROLS, ROD END BEARINGS & TRAVEL STOPS
10. RUDDER CONTROLS, ELEVATORS & RUDDER BELLCRANKS
11. BRAKE MASTER CYLINDERS, ELECTRIC FUEL PUMPS 15
14
12. LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR, GASCOLATOR, FUEL SELECTOR VALVE 23
13. LANDING GEAR RERACT TUBES
14. ELECTRIC FLAP ACTUATOR
15. STABILIZER TRIM SCREW AND STOPS
16. ELEVATOR/RUDDER/AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM
17. ELEVATOR/RUDDER/AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM BELLCRANKS
18. CONTROL SYSTEM/LANDING GEAR ROD END BEARINGS
19. NOSE WHEEL STEERING SYSTEM, COWL FLAP CONTROLS
20. RUDDER TORQUE TUBE
21. LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR AND RETRACTION TUBES
22. TAIL--LIGHT HARNESS CONNECTIONS
23. EMPENNAGE ATTACHMENT, TRIM JACK SCREWS
24. OIL FILLER ACCESS
1
3
2
4
6A
5 R53--3
INSPECTION PANELS AND COVERS

FIGURE 53--3
53--40--04
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
3 (TYPICAL LH & RH)

3 (TYPICAL LH & RH)
4 (TYPICAL LH & RH)
4
FWD
4 (TYPICAL LH & RH)
2
1
4 (TYPICAL LH & RH)
3
2 (TYPICAL LH & RH)
4
R53--4
WING/FUSELAGE ATTACH FITTINGS

FIGURE 53--4
1
3
2 3
1
4
1
3
4
2
5
R53--6
6 R53--5
TAILCONE/EMPENNAGE ATTACH POINTS
EMPENNAGE ASSEMBLY ATTACH POINTS FIGURE 53--6
FIGURE 53--5
53--40--04
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
M53--8
3
ENGINE MOUNT ATTACH POINTS

FIGURE 53--7
53--40--04
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
53--40--04
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
55--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
55--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
55--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
55--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
55--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
55--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
55-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 55
STABILIZERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
55--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
55--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Stabilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
55--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Stabilizer -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Stabilizer -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevator -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevator -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Stabilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Stabilizer -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55--30--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Stabilizer -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rudder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55--40--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rudder -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55--40--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rudder -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
55--00--00 -- GENERAL horizontal stabilizer has a stub spar that spans a por-
The M20M empennage assembly is a variable inci- tion of stabilizer.
dence tail--plane consisting of a horizontal and vertical The elevator and rudder are constructed from an ex-
stabilizer built as a unit. (Refer to Chapter 53 for attach- truded leading edge spar assembly covered with
ment of empennage to fuselage.) stamped--formed skins. The elevators have a fixed tab
The horizontal and vertical stabilizer are constructed of between skins that run full length of trailing edge.
formed sheet metal ribs attached to a forward and aft The elevators and rudder have balance weights per-
spar assembly covered with stretch--formed skins. The manently installed for stabilization during flight.
11 7
12
7
8
8
9
9
8
7 8
9 8
9
9
10
6
9 4
3
2
R55--1
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
FIGURE 55--1
55--10--00 -- HORIZONTAL STABILIZER The ribs (9) are assembled in sections to the front and
The main spar assembly (1) (Figure 55--1) is formed rear face of each spar assembly to form the air foil.
from aluminum sheet into a channel. Angle doublers (2, Stretch--formed skins (10) are fastened to ribs, spars
3 and 4) are formed and riveted to main spar (1) through and doublers to form complete horizontal stabilizer
spar web section. Stub spar (5) is a channel formed structure.
from aluminum sheet reinforced with a joggled channel The aft vertical fin spar (11) is attached to horizontal
(6) at center section. Rear spar (7) is an extrusion, at- stabilizer structure through bracket (12) which is fas-
taching to aft end of ribs, and contains hinge fittings (8) tened securely to stabilizer rear spar assembly (7) (Fig-
for the elevators. ure 55--1).
55--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
55--10--01 -- HORIZONTAL STABILIZER -- RE- pennage assembly. Refer to this section for the remov-
MOVAL al of empennage assembly from airplane.
The fairing located on tailcone, covering gap between 55--10--02 -- HORIZONTAL STABILIZER -- INSTAL-
tailcone and empennage assembly, will require remov- LATION
al to gain access to empennage attaching hardware.
Section 53--40--02 describes attaching points for em- Refer to Section 53--40--02 for installation.
6
6
8
7 4
6
3
1
6
5 4
1 5
2 1
1
DETAIL ”A”
A
R55--2
ELEVATOR
FIGURE 55--2
55--20--00 -- ELEVATOR 55--20--01 -- ELEVATOR -- REMOVAL
Elevators on the M20M consist of left and right hand as- Remove AN3 bolts from each control horn and push--
semblies attached, through ball bearing fittings (1), to pull tube bearing, then remove AN3 bolts and hardware
rear spar of horizontal stabilizer (Figure 55--2). from each hinge fitting on both elevators.
The elevator control horn (2) is connected to inboard 55--20--02 -- ELEVATOR -- INSTALLATION
leading edge of each elevator (R.H. and L.H.). Both CAUTION
control horns are then connected to elevator flight con- Each new, repaired or repainted elevator should
trol bellcrank. The full length trim tab (3) may not be re-- be checked for balance per Section 27--91--00.
adjusted from factory installed setting. This is factory The elevators are installed in reverse order of
set at 7o down. removal. Nominal torque values for AN3 bolts are
to be used (see Section 5--20--01 for torque table.)
The elevator skins (4) are stamped--formed for upper
and lower surface of elevator. There are no ribs in ele- 55- -30--00 -- VERTICAL STABILIZER
vator between inboard and outboard ribs. The skins are The main spar assembly (1) (Figure 55--3) is formed
attached to leading edge extrusion (5) and ribs (6) with from aluminum sheet. Formed angle doublers (2) are
blind rivets. Each formed corrugation is matched on top nested inside main spar channel and riveted to spar
and bottom skins and rivets are installed for strength web. Rear spar (3) is an extrusion used to attach aft end
and rigidity through each corrugation. of sectioned ribs (4). Stub spar (5) is also formed from
sheet aluminum. A doubler channel (6) is attached to
A lead balance weight (7) is installed in each elevator
vertical stabilizer stub and stub spar of horizontal stabi-
tip with screws (8) (Figure 55--2). See Section
lizer. This attach channel is securely bolted to stinger
27--91--00 for balancing procedures on elevators.
bulkhead brackets. The main spar doublers and angles
(7, 8 and 9) provide attach points for stinger and hori-
zontal stabilizer spar (Figure 55--3).
55--10--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
Skins (10) are stretch--formed in 2 sections and riveted 55--30--02 -- VERTICAL STABILIZER -- INSTALLA-
to ribs and spar. TION
The rudder attach fittings (11) are mounted to rear spar Refer to Section 53--40--02 for installation.
extrusion to attach rudder (12). 55--40--00 -- RUDDER
The rudder on the M20M is of similar construction as
11
12
the elevator with stamped--formed skins (1) (Figure
55--4) riveted to an extruded leading edge (2) and riv-
eted together at trailing edge. The rudder lower skins
1 (3) are drop hammer formed left and right halves, riv-
4 eted to upper skins, rib assembly (4) and at leading and
3
13
trailing edge. A stiffener (5) is to support lower rudder
11 ball bearing hinge fitting (6). A weather seal (7) is in-
12 cluded in the assembly.
The rudder control horn (8) is attached with center
5 hinge fitting (9) to rear flange of front spar at junction of
10 6 lower rib assembly (10). A brace arm on horn assembly
11 is attached to fitting (11) on lower rib (10).
The upper hinge fitting (12) is attached to rear flange of
front spar just under top rib assembly (13) and balance
weight (14), (Figure 55--4).
2 4 Balance weight (14) is installed with eight screws (15).
7
See section 27--91--00 for balancing procedures on
4 rudder. Balance weight (16) is installed with two bolts.
8
55--40--01 -- RUDDER -- REMOVAL
Remove AN3 bolt from control horn and push--pull tube
9 R55--3
bearing, then remove three AN3 bolts and hardware
VERTICAL STABILIZER ASSEMBLY from each hinge fitting. Disconnect electrical connec-
FIGURE 55--3 tions per paragraph 33--41--03, 2, A thru D.
55--30--01 -- VERTICAL STABILIZER -- REMOVAL 55--40--02 -- RUDDER INSTALLATION
The vertical and horizontal stabilizers are removed as a CAUTION
unit with stinger assembly. Remove fairing located on Each new, repaired or repainted rudder should
tailcone which covers gap between tailcone and em- be checked for balance per section 27--91--00,
pennage. Section 53--40--02 describes attaching prior to installation.
points for complete empennage assembly. Refer to this The rudder is installed in reverse order of removal.
section for removal of empennage assembly from air- Nominal torque valves for AN3 bolts are to be used.
plane. (See Section 5--20--01 for torque table).
55--30--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
13
15
14
2
1
10
8
11
12
9
7
2
16
4 5
3
5 7
R55--4
6
RUDDER ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 55--4
55--40--02
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 56
WINDOWS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 56
WINDOWS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
56--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
56--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
56--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
56--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
56--23--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
56--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
56-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 56
WINDOWS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
56--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
56--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Acrylic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
56--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield and Cabin Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
56--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
56--21--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
56--21--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
56--22--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
56--22--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Windows -- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
56--22--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabin Windows -- Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
56--23--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storm Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
56--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acrylic Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
56-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
56--00--00 -- GENERAL CAUTION

The windshield for the M20M is .187 inch thick acrylic, Never wipe windows when dry.
heat formed to contour. The pilot’s side window is also 2. Flush with water after cleaning with kerosene.
.187 inch thick acrylic with a hole cut out to accommo- CAUTION
date the .312 inch thick storm window. The storm win- Never use gasoline, benzene, carbon tetrachlo-
dow is milled to fit the hole and to be flush with outside ride, acetone, lacquer thinner, deicer fluid, house
of pilot’s window surface when closed. The cabin door hold cleaning fluid or any other questionable
and two rear side windows are .187 inch thick acrylic. fluid to clean acrylic windows. These solvents
All windows are single pane windows. will soften or craze the surface.
All windows are heated to approximately 300o F and NOTE
placed on a mold to cool while maintaining correct Remove fine scratches with fine automotive
shape. acrylic rubbing and polishing compounds. Fol-
The windows are tinted for visual comfort, ultra--violet low instructions provided with product.
filtration and cooling effect for cabin (material tint op- 56--20--00 -- WINDSHIELD AND CABIN WINDOWS
tions by customer request). The removal and installation of windshield and win-
The windows are all sealed to outside skin with PR1428 dows are accomplished in the following paragraphs.
(B), or equivalent sealant (reference Mooney Spec. 20, 56--21--00 -- WINDSHIELD
Section XII). Retainers and clips are used around win- 56--21--01 -- WINDSHIELD -- REMOVAL
dow frame to hold windows in place.
The aluminum retainer (1) at bottom of windshield (2)
must be removed by drilling out rivets attaching it to
4 cowl deck (3) (Figure 56--1).
7
A putty knife or thin aluminum strip will be necessary to
4 work underneath top skin (4) and side post skin (5) to
break sealant bond between acrylic and skins.
CAUTION
2 Exercise care during this operation to avoid
scratching acrylic. Considerable effort may be
8 required to break the bond.
Carefully pull windshield away from its location starting
at lower portion and work it loose as sealant bond is
broken around edge of acrylic.
After windshield is removed, all residual sealant must
be removed prior to installation of replacement wind-
shield. Careful scraping with putty knife and careful ap-
5 plication of methyl ethyl ketone (M.E.K.) will assist in re-
2 moving excess sealant.
6
56--21--02 -- WINDSHIELD--INSTALLATION
1 When old sealant is removed, brush M.E.K. or equiva-
3
lent cleaning solvent, in cavity (8) where new wind-
shield will be located (Figure 56--1).
R56--1 NOTE
Exercise care with application of these solvents.
Damage may result if drops of solvents come in
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION contact with either exterior paint, interior trim or
FIGURE 56--1 acrylic surfaces.
56--00--01 -- CLEANING ACRYLIC Trial fit new windshield to insure proper nesting in wind-
shield retaining cavity.
A commercial cleaning solution, manufactured for
Apply sealant, PR1428 (B) or equivalent (reference
acrylic, may be used to clean routine grit and grime
Mooney Spec. 20, Section XII), into cavity (8) until
from windows. Follow instructions on commercial
approximately half filled. Apply a bead of sealant along
cleaner used.
recessed joggle (6) of cowl deck (3) (Figure 56--1).
If no commercial cleaner is available, these procedures The new windshield being forced into cavity between
should be followed: outer skin (4) and interior retainer (7) will extrude ex-
1. Flush windows with water prior to wiping with a cess sealant. After windshield is in place wipe excess
clean, soft, cloth, soaked in kerosene. sealant off with a damp clean cloth.
56--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
Prior to riveting aluminum retainer (1) into position coat After sealant cures, excess may be removed with a
retainer with a uniform thickness of sealant. A positive sharp razor knife.
bond will be made as retainer is riveted into place. Use
Check for water leaks.
CR1312--5--2 cherry rivets to reattach retainer (1) to
cowl deck (3) (Figure 56--1). Repaint retainer and rivets to match aircraft.
2 2
4 2
2 1
2 1
8
5
7
SMX56--2
6
2 9
WINDOW INSTALLATION
FIGURE 56--2
56--22--00 -- CABIN WINDOWS 56--22--02 -- CABIN WINDOWS -- INSTALLATION
Remove all old sealant and clean skin area with M.E.K.
56--22--01 -- CABIN WINDOWS -- REMOVAL Place window (1) into position to assure proper fit. Trim
if necessary (Figure 56--2).
Remove interior trim from window (1) to be replaced.
Remove retainers (2) or clips (3) which hold window in Apply a thick, uniform thickness of PR1428 (B), or
position from inside (Figure 56--2). equivalent sealant (reference Mooney Spec. 20, Sec-
tion XII), to both window and skin areas where window
NOTE (1) will be located. Sufficient sealant should be used so
Some retainers are held in place with screws (4) excess sealant is extruded from all edges of windows,
and some with rivets. Drill out rivets carefully. both inside and outside, (approximately 5, 3.5 oz. tubes
for 4 windows).
The window will be bonded to outside skin with sealant. Force window (1) into place with retainers (2) or clips
Considerable effort may be required to break bond be- (3) and secure retainers and clips with Avex 1691--410
tween acrylic and outer skin. Care should be exercised blind rivets or existing screws and hardware (4). The
to keep window from twisting and possibly cracking. sealant will be forced out and seal window to outside
skin. Carefully wipe excess sealant off acrylic before it
Remove window and clean all remaining sealant from sets up. After sealant cures excess can be cut off with a
skin. Use M.E.K. and a scraper to remove sealant. sharp razor knife (Figure 56--2).
56--22--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
Check replaced window for leaks. 56--50--00 -- ACRYLIC DRILLING

Reinstall interior trim panels. Drill bits for acrylic should be ground per Figure 56--3. A
56--23--00 -- STORM WINDOW fast turning drill bit with light pressure is desirable. It is
The storm window (5) is mounted with two aluminum suggested that trial holes be drilled in a scrap piece of
hinges (6), attaching hardware (7) and held closed by a acrylic to determine best combination of drill speed and
latch (8). A gasket (9) is bonded to the storm window for pressure to drill a clean hole.
sealing purposes when closed (Figure 56--2).
CUTTING DIRECTION
“DUBBED OFF”
O
0 RAKE ANGLE
CLEARANCE
O O
12 -- 15
60 O
R56--3
ACRYLIC DRILL BIT

FIGURE 56--3
56--23--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
56--50--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 57
WINGS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 57
WINGS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
57--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--50--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--50--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--50--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57--50--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
57-EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 57
WINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
57--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
57--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
57--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stall Strip Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
57--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
57--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
57--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jack Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
57--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
57--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates--Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
57--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
57--40--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Landing Gear Attach Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
57--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flight Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
57--50--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
57--50--11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flap Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
57--50--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ailerons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
57--50--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aileron Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
57-CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
57--00--00 -- GENERAL A. Remove wing--root fairings and bottom fuselage

The all metal wing is a one piece assembly attached to access panels.
the fuselage at structural hard points with structural B. Drain all fuel from tanks (See Section
hardware. (See Section 53--40--01). The full span, 28--30--00).
main spar assembly is connected to stub spar and rear
spar assembly by ribs, doublers and skins. The main C. Drain brake lines and reservoir (See Section
landing gear forward attach assembly is an integral part 32--40--04). Disconnect hydraulic lines at wing main
of main spar and rear fitting is bolted to wing stub spar spar.
assembly. The spar caps are 7075--T6 aluminum and D. Remove front and rear seats. Remove the two
the webs, ribs and doublers are 2024--T3, T4 or T42 inspection plates under rear seat area.
aluminum. Repair of these components is covered in
Section 51--13--00. E. Jack aircraft per Section 7--10--00.
The wing tips are fabricated from fiberglass and house F. Disconnect or remove the following:
the navigation and strobe lights. (1) Two landing gear assist springs.
Fuel is contained in wet wing type fuel cells between (2) Aileron control tubes at inboard bellcranks.
main spar and baffles forward of spar. The tanks are (3) Trim control tube.
sealed during manufacturing with current technology (4) Main gear retraction tubes.
sealant. (See Chapter 28 for fuel system details). (5) Rudder control tubes.
(6) Elevator control tube.
57--00--01 -- WING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(7) Elevator and rudder push--pull tubes.
The major subassemblies of wing may be removed in- (8) Floorboards at rear attach points.
dividually, or wing may be removed as a unit. To remove (9) Belly skin stringer splice angles.
wing, a fuselage supporting cradle is needed. (10) Airspeed indicator line, Pitot lines and Pitot
CAUTION heater wires (if installed).
Have suitable cradle ready to carry fuselage be- (11) Hardware shown in (Figure 57--1).
fore removing all mating hardware. 2. Wing installation: Installation of the wing assembly
1. Wing removal: is direct reversal of removal.
SEE TABLE FOR LENGTHS. IF NECESSARY, AN4--4A BOLT (4)

INSTALL SHIMS BETWEEN SHEAR FITTINGS AN960--416 WASHER (4)
AND NOT UNDER BOLT HEAD OR NUT. AN363--428 NUT (4)
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES --
AN6--16A BOLT/(ALT) AN6--17A ACCESSIBLE INSIDE CABIN)
AN960--616 WASHER SHEAR
AN363--624 NUT FITTING
AN4--10A BOLT (3)
110001--3 OR --5 SPACER (AR) (ACCESSIBLE THROUGH
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES -- WHEELWELL)
ACCESSIBLE INSIDE CABIN) AN960--416 WASHER (3)
AN4--15A BOLT (5) AN363--428 NUT (2)
(ACCESSIBLE INSIDE CABIN) (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES --
AN960--416L WASHER (5) ACCESSIBLE INSIDE CABIN)
AN960--416 WASHER (5)
AN363--428 NUT (5)
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES --
ACCESSIBLE BY REMOVING
TOP WING FAIRING)
AN4--17A (TOP)
AN4--16A (BTM)
(ACCESSIBLE UNDER SEATS)
AN960--416 WASHER (2)
AN363--428 NUT (2)
AN3--4A BOLT (ACCESSIBLE THROUGH WING
(ACCESSIBLE BY REMOVING BOTTOM ACCESS PANEL)
TOP WING FAIRING) SHIM AS NECESSARY
AN960--10 WASHER (8) AN7H--17A BOLT
AN363--1032 NUT (8) (ACCESSIBLE THROUGH ACCESS COVER
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES -- UNDER REAR SEAT. SAFETY WIRE BOLT HEAD
ACCESSIBLE THROUGH TO ADJACENT SPAR--WEB STIFFENER)
WHEELWELL) AN960--716L WASHER
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES)
R57--1
WING ATTACHING HARDWARE

FIGURE 57--1
57--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
SHIM/HARDWARE TABLE
SHIM DASH NO. BOLT NO. WASHER NO. WASH- WASHER NO. NUTS
BOLTS ERS REQD. (ADDITIONAL) REQD. PER
PER SHIM PER SHIM SHIM
310136--7 AN4--5A 4 AN960--416 8 AN960--416L AN363--428
L
310134--9 AN4--5A 4 AN960--416 8 AN363--428
L
310134--11 AN4--5A 4 AN960--416 8 AN363--428
L
310134--13 AN4--6A 4 AN960--416 8 AN363--428
310134--15 AN4--6A 4 AN960--416 8 AN363--428
-- AN4--6A 4 AN960--416 4 AN363--428
TORQUE VALUES
NUT & BOLT SIZE TORQUE VALUE
(INCH--POUNDS)
AN 3 20--25
AN 4 50--70
AN 6 100--140
AN 7 450--500
WING ATTACHING HARDWARE CHART
FIGURE 57--1A
LEFT WING -- SHOWN

RIGHT WING -- OPP.
STA. 43.5 -- RIB RIVET LINE
STA. 60.12
FWD
WING SKIN
SKIN 2.0 A C’BORE STALL
STRIP .406”
.06/.10” DEEP
AN520--6--7 SCREW
STALL STRIP AN345--6 NUT AN515--6R10 DRILL .189/.193” DIA.
AN960--6 WASHER SCREW -- USE USE A6--75 RIVNUT
LOCKTITE TYPE CV
FWD FWD
NOTE:
FILL ALL SCREW HEAD ALTERNATE INSTL.
HOLES WITH FEATHERFILL;
A SAND SMOOTH & PAINT STALL STRIP
TO MATCH WING. R57--2
TYPICAL INSTL. A
STALL STRIP INSTALLATION

FIGURE 57--2
57--00--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
57--00--02 -- STALL STRIP INSTALLATION wing. Sealer is applied to all joints on ribs, spar and
1. Adjust stall strips so that, during stall recovery, nor- baffle plates. (See Section 28--11--00 for resealing pro-
mal use of flight controls should prevent: cedures).
A. More than 15o roll. The wing is manufactured in three sections; center sec-
tion (2), left outboard section (3) and an opposite right
B. More than 15o yaw. outboard section (not shown) (Figure 57--3). These
C. More than 30o pitch below flight level. three sections are then assembled into one full span
wing assembly as final two, LH/RH, skins are installed.
2. Place stall strips on leading edge at stations shown
on Figure 57--2, attach securely with duct tape for test LH & RH spares configuration, wing tip assembly, are
flights. Adjust stall strips until aircraft flies to criteria in available. Each includes completed section, from Wing
paragraph 57--00--02, 1, A, B and C. Secure stall strip Station 103.50 and outboard. The assembly includes
per installation instructions in Figure 57--2. stringers (4) required to complete splice to old center
section. A spar splice plate is required to reinforce spar
57--10--00 -- MAIN FRAME (5) at it’s attachment location. These components, with
The integral fuel cells (1, Figure 57--3) start at wing sta- instructions, are available through any Mooney Service
tion 24.5 and continue to rib, station 118.25 (LH/RH) on Center.
R57--3
WING STRUCTURE
FIGURE 57--3
57--20--00 -- AUXILIARY STRUCTURES 57--20--02 -- WING TIPS
57--20--01 -- JACK POINTS The M20M wing tips are non--structural, fiberglass
Wing jack points are located on LH & RH lower wing. components. They are riveted to upper and lower wing
The threaded wing tie down eyebolt fittings are de- skins during final assembly of wing structure.
signed to accept non--threaded jack points. These are 1. Wing tip removal.
located outboard of each main gear. The nose jack
point is located aft of left hand cowl flap at Fus. Sta. A. Remove navigation/strobe light lens (1) by re-
--5.51. See Section 7--10--00 for complete jacking pro- moving 4 screws and washers (2) that retain lens to
cedures. wing tip (3) (Figure 57--4).
57--00--02
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
3
4
7
8
6
5
R57--4
1
WING TIP ASSEMBLY

FIGURE 57--4
B. Drill out rivets (4) holding tip to upper and lower NOTE
wing skin (5). Remove all rivet shanks with a punch. Access covers on bottom of wing that require
removal for inspection intervals are secured with
C. Carefully pull wing tip away from wing rib (6) and screws. Any access covers that are riveted in
skins (5). Disconnect strobe and navigation light har- place are required for manufacturing only and
nesses at disconnect plug (8) prior to completely re- NOT for routine inspections.
moving tip.
57--40--00 -- ATTACH FITTINGS
NOTE Refer to Section 57--00--01 for wing fuselage attach-
The strobe or navigation lights can be removed ment.
from wing tip either before or after its removal 57--40--03 -- MAIN LANDING GEAR ATTACH
from wing. POINTS
2. Wing tip installation. The main landing gear assembly is a welded, heat--
treated, 4130 chrome molybdenum steel assembly.
A. Place new or repaired wing tip in place. The leg assembly assembly (1) (Figure 57--6), is sup-
ported at forward end by tension strap fitting (2) at-
CAUTION tached to wing main spar assembly (3) and provides
Be sure aileron and aileron balance weights are one of the hard points for main landing gear assembly.
not restricted in movement, either direction. The leg assembly (1) is supported at the rear by a
bracket (4) attached to stub spar assembly (5). The
B. Secure wing tip and drill holes to match existing main landing gear truss assembly (6) also attaches to
wing skins. Use clecoes as holes are drilled into new tension strap fitting (2) on main spar. The brass bearing
tip. When all holes are drilled, remove wing tip assem- (7) (insert) should be inspected at any scheduled main-
bly and deburr. tenance action for wear (refer to Chapter 5 -- Time Lim-
its/Maintenance Checks).
NOTE
Connect strobe and navigation light connectors Grease fittings (8) are installed at pivot points of main
prior to final attachment of tip. landing gear assembly for lubrication per Chapter 5.
CAUTION
C. Use Avex 1604--0412 blind rivets to attach wing No welding repairs are approved for the main
tip to top and bottom skins. landing gear assembly.
D. Repaint to match aircraft. NOTE
Heat treated components should NOT be re-
57--30--00 -- PLATES -- SKIN paired; replace them.
Refer to Chapter 53--40--03 for Nose Landing Gear as-
The wing access and inspection covers shown in (Fig-
sembly.
ure 57--5) provide maintenance access to components,
plumbing and control bellcranks enclosed within wing. 57--50--00 -- FLIGHT SURFACES
They are flush mounted covers and when installed con- Refer to Section 27--90--00 for flight control surface bal-
tinue aerodynamic contour of wing. ancing procedures.
57--30--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
57--50--10 -- FLAPS 57--50--11 -- FLAP REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Refer to Section 27--50--00 for maintenance and rig- Refer to Section 27--50--00 for removal and installation
ging procedures. procedures.
The flap actuator jack shaft is connected by a push-- 57--50--20 -- AILERONS
pull, rod end, bearing to flap actuator bracket (1) (Fig- Refer to Section 27--10--00 for maintenance and rig-
ure 57--7) located just inboard of inboard hinge (2). All ging procedures.
three hinges (2) and (3) are faired (4) to reduce drag. The ailerons are of all metal construction. The main
Internal structure of flaps consists of: leading edge ex- spar (1), (Figure 57--8), is attached to rear spar (2)
trusion (5), trailing edge stiffener (6), ribs (7) and top through ribs (3). These components are riveted togeth-
and bottom skins (8). These components are riveted to- er and top and bottom skin (4) and (5) are riveted to this
gether into a left hand and right hand assembly. sub--assembly. To complete control surface, hinges (6)
and balance weights (7) are installed. The weights (7)
are bolted (10) through an outboard rib (8) and bracket
(9) on each aileron assembly.
3
7 9
10
3 7
1 1
7
7
7 7
12
2
7
7
2 20
7 8 17 7
7 7
11
19 4
4
18 13
19 15
16
5 5
19
14
6 6
1. WING SKIN -- .050 THICKNESS (FUEL TANK) 11. OAT PROBE -- RIGHT WING ONLY
2. WING SKIN -- .040 THICKNESS (FUEL TANK) 12. CONTROL TUBE GUIDE BLOCKS
3. WING SKIN -- .040 THICKNESS 13. PITOT POST -- LEFT WING ONLY
4. WING SKIN -- .040 THICKNESS 14. STROBE LIGHT POWER SUPPLY
5. WING SKIN -- .025 THICKNESS 15. AILERON BELLCRANK AND CONTROL RODS
6. WING SKIN -- .025 THICKNESS 16. AUTO PILOT SERVOS
7. FUEL TANK ACCESS 17. GYRO COMPASS FLUX VALVE -- LEFT WING ONLY
8. FUEL TANK FILLER 18. MAIN LANDING GEAR ASSIST BUNGEE
9.CONTROL TUBE GUIDE BLOCKS 19.ELEVATOR AND RUDDER CONTROLS -- ROD END
10. WING -- FUSELAGE ATTACH POINTS BEARINGS, BELLCRANKS
20. DESCENT RATE CONTROL (IF INSTALLED)
R57--5
WING SKINS AND INSPECTION COVER

FIGURE 57--5
57--50--10
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
57--50--21 -- AILERON REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Refer to Section 27--10--00 for removal, installation & balancing procedures.
NOTE
The following rivets are to be used when replac-
ing existing flush rivets for the installation of
trailing edge ribs per wing stations as follows:
WING STATION RIVET USED

20.25
103.50 MS20426AD4 (4 PLCS)
147.75
43.50
74.00
88.75 CR--3213-
CR 3213 -4-
4 -1
1 (4 PLCS)
118.25
133.00
59.25 MS20426AD4 (7 PCS)
2
7
3 8
6
1
4
5
R53--7
MAIN LANDING GEAR ASSEMBLY ATTACH

POINTS
FIGURE 57--6
57--50--21
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
7
8
1 7
4 3
5
3
3 4
3
4
R57--6
FLAP ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 57--7
57--50--21
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
3 5
3
3
6
2
A 3
4
3
1 B 3
1
6
DETAIL A 6
6
C
10 9
7
1
10
7 8
6
DETAIL B DETAIL C 7
R57--7
AILERON ASSEMBLY
FIGURE57--8
57--50--21
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 61
PROPELLERS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 61
PROPELLERS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
61--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--00--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--20--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--20--90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
61-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 61
PROPELLERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
61--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
61--00--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinner Dome and Propeller Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
61--00--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
61--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
61--10--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Propeller Blade Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
61--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
61--20--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Governor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
61--20--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Governor Control Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
61--20--90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propeller Governor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
61--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Propeller Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
61-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
2
AFT
SPINNER
BULKHEAD
ASSY
8
BOLT &
NUT
6
9 PROPELLER
BLADES & HUB 7
ENGINE SPINNER DOME
CRANKSHAFT SUPPORT
1
SCREWS &
FIBER WASHERS
11
O-RING
5
SPINNER
DOME
12
SHIM 13
4 TAPE
DOUBLER
3 PLATE
SCREW
10
SCREW &
WASHER R61--1
McCAULEY PROPELLER AND SPINNER DOME

FIGURE 61--1
61--00--00 -- GENERAL 61--00--10 -- SPINNER DOME AND PROPELLER
McCAULEY PROPELLER REMOVAL
McCAULEY PROPELLER
The McCauley propeller is a constant speed type which
operates by hydraulic pressure opposing natural cen- 1. Spinner dome removal (if necessary).
trifugal twisting moment of rotating blades and spring NOTE
force to obtain the correct pitch for the engine load. En- It is not necessary to remove spinner when re-
gine lubricating oil is supplied to power piston in propel- moving propeller assembly.
ler hub through propeller shaft. The amount and pres- A. Remove screws and fiber washers (1) from aft
sure of oil supplied (0--300 PSI) is controlled by an spinner bulkhead assembly (2) and screws (3) from
engine driven governor. Decreasing propeller speed each doubler plate (4), (Figure 61--1).
will cause oil to be admitted to piston, thereby increas- B. Leave doubler plates attached to aft bulkhead.
ing propeller pitch. Conversely increasing propeller C. Carefully pull spinner dome (5) forward to clear
speed will result in oil leaving the piston, therefore de- propeller blades and hub (6).
creasing propeller pitch.
D. Spinner support is shimmed for snug fit inside
Propeller overhaul shall coincide with engine overhaul, spinner dome, (as required); note quantity of shims
but interval between overhauls shall not exceed 1500 installed for reference when re--installing spinner
hours. Refer to propeller manufacturers’ overhaul dome. Spinner dome must fit support (7) snug at each
manual for complete maintenance action. re--install action.
NOTE CAUTION
Approved propeller shops ONLY are authorized The propeller/spinner installation is dynamically
for overhaul or major repairs to these propellers. balanced during final manufacturing process. It
Refer to Federal Aviation regulations, Part 43, is mandatory that spinner be re--installed in exact
(FAR 43) and Federal Aviation Advisory Circular position as removed, unless all weights are re-
No. 43.13 ( ) [AC 43.13 ( )} for the definition of moved and a complete rebalancing procedure is
major or minor repairs or alterations and who accomplished.
may accomplish them. 2. Propeller removal.
A. Cut safety wire and discard. Loosen nuts (8) at-
taching propeller to engine, crankshaft, propeller
flange (9) about 1/4 inch and pull propeller forward.
61--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE NOTE
Propeller stud/nut assemblies will have to be The spinner support (7) should be shimmed (12)
backed off evenly so propeller may be pulled for- to ensure that it fits snug on propeller dome as
ward (approximately 1/4 inch at a time until all spinner dome is being installed (Figure 61--1).
nuts are removed from propeller studs. As pro- Teflon Tape (13) (as needed) may be installed on
peller is separated from engine crankshaft, oil spinner dome support to assist with achieving
will drain from propeller and engine crankshaft snug fit.
cavities. 10. Conduct operational and leak check on propeller
B. Pull propeller from engine crankshaft (9). Use installation prior to flight.
clean rags to cover cavity in crankshaft and hub. 61--10--00 -- PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
C. If necessary to remove aft spinner bulkhead (2) Preflight inspection should be accomplished prior to
(Figure 61--1), spinner dome (5) must be removed, re- each flight to determine: if blades have been damaged,
fer to 61--00--10. Remove cap screws and washers (10) if any abnormal looseness is evident between hub and
which attach bulkhead to propeller hub flange. Remove blades or if there is any evidence of oil leakage. Propel-
aft bulkhead from propeller flange. ler must be repaired if any of above is evident.
CAUTION No external lubrication is required on standard M20M
Remove propeller de--ice boot connections (if installed McCauley propellers.
installed) prior to removing aft bulkhead from
propeller assembly.
61--00--20 -- PROPELLER INSTALLATION
McCAULEY PROPELLER A
1. If aft spinner bulkhead was removed, re--install,
using cap screws and washers (refer to Figure 61--1,
item 10) in reverse order of removal.
2. Clean propeller hub cavity and mating surfaces of
DRESSED ”A--A” A
propeller hub. R61--7
3. Lightly lubricate new O--Ring (11), (Figure 61--1),

PROPELLER BLADE MINOR REPAIRS
and install O--Ring in propeller hub.
FIGURE61--7
CAUTION 61--10--10 -- MINOR PROPELLER BLADE REPAIR
Remove all rags or plugs placed in crankshaft or
hub during propeller removal. 1. Minor nicks, dents and gouges may be dressed out
by approved personnel. Blend any nicks or gouges into
4. Rotate engine to No. 1 cylinder TDC. leading edge with smooth curves or generous radii as
5. Position propeller hub/spinner assembly with shown in (Figure 61--7). Repaint area per propeller
Number 1 blade DOWN. Blade numbers are marked on manufacturer’s recommendations to reduce corrosive
the propeller hub. An “0” is etched on mating surface of action.
both propeller hub flange and engine starter ring gear 61--20--00 -- PROPELLER CONTROLLING
flywheel. These “0”’s should align for installation.
61--20--10 -- GOVERNOR INSTALLATION
6. Align propeller hub holes with proper bushings in
1. Clean mounting pad and bottom of governor.
engine crankshaft flange; slide propeller carefully over
bushings until stud/nut assemblies (8) can be started. 2. Coat new gasket with Dow Corning #7 compound
If bushings should need to be removed for mainte- release agent or equivalent before installation.
nance, refer to Lycoming S.I. No. 1098D or subsequent 3. Install new gasket on mounting studs. Insure gas-
revisions for correct re--installation. ket has raised surface of gasket screen toward gover-
CAUTION nor.
Three blade propeller hub must be aligned with 4. Position governor on mounting studs, aligning
proper bushings and holes on crankshaft flange. governor splines and splines of accessory drive.
7. Tighten stud/nut assemblies (8) evenly; work pro- 5. Install all mounting hardware. Torque nuts.
peller aft on crankshaft flange. Torque nuts to 55--65 ft.
6. Connect governor control to governor and rig.
pounds.
NOTE
8. Safety with .032 wire.
All rigging to match governor arm location. Do
9. Install spinner dome, making sure fiber washers not adjust governor high RPM stop to match rig-
are installed under all screw heads (1). ging.
61--00--20
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
61--20--20 -- PROPELLER GOVERNOR CONTROL CAUTION

RIGGING Recheck safety wire, security and thread engage-
ment on all engine controls after adjustment, rig-
McCAULEY PROPELLER ging or assembly.
1. Disconnect propeller governor control rod. NOTE
Vernier control’s friction can be adjusted by loos-
A. Remove cotter pin, nut, bolt and washers from ening lock nut on back side of panel and either
rod end at propeller governor control arm. tighten nut on front of panel to increase friction
or loosen nut to decrease friction. Retighten lock
B. Disconnect control rod from governor control nut on back side to secure cable to panel.
arm. 61--20--30 -- GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT
2. Adjust control arm spring to minimum tension 1. Fly aircraft and record maximum RPM at takeoff or
which will return control arm to maximum RPM. cruise flight at full power.
NOTE
3. Push propeller control in cockpit, full forward. Pull No adjustment can be done before a test flight is
control back approximately 1/8 inch and lock in this done to obtain maximum governor RPM.
position. 2. Remove upper engine cowl for access to governor.
4. Place governor control arm against high RPM stop 3. Loosen high RPM jamnut.
screw. 4. Turn screw in (CW) or out (CCW) to match RPM
recorded during governor test flight. One full turn of
5. Adjust propeller control rod end to coincide with screw equals approximately 25 RPM.
governor arm position.
5. Tighten jam nut and make propeller control linkage
6. Attach control rod end to governor arm and replace adjustments as necessary to maintain full travel.
cotter pin. 6. Re--rig disconnected controls and re--install cowl-
ing.
7. Operate propeller control from cockpit to verify full
7. Perform propeller and governor operational tests.
travel of control arm in both directions, high RPM to
Fly aircraft and repeat governor test flight and record
minimum RPM stop.
maximum RPM in flight at maximum power. Repeat this
NOTE process until proper maximum RPM setting is
When propeller control rigging is complete, achieved.
check controls in cockpit to be sure there is 1/8 NOTE
inch cushion between control knob and adjust- When installing a governor, insure that oil sys-
ment nut on instrument panel. The control tem is purged of all air by cycling propeller sev-
should not bottom out when pushed full forward. eral times before flight.
61--20--90 -- PROPELLER GOVERNOR TROUBLESHOOTING McCAULEY PROPELLER

Leakage between control shaft and Damaged O--Ring. Replace with new O--Ring.
head.
Leakage between head and body. Damaged head and body gasket. Replace gasket.
Leakage between relief valve plug Damaged relief valve plug gasket. Replace gasket.
and body.
Leakage between body and base. Damaged body and base gasket. Replace gasket.
Leakage between governor base and Damaged governor mounting gas- Replace gasket.
engine mounting pad. ket.
Loose governor attaching nuts. Retighten nuts.
Warped engine mounting pad. Consult engine manual.
61--20--20
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
Inability to attain proper RPM during Wrong high--RPM governor setting. Reset governor external, high RPM
static ground run: adjustment screw.
NOTE Incorrect system rigging. Adjust control system.
T/O RPM should NOT be attain-
able during static ground run.
run Low engine power. Consult engine manual.
Proper RPM should be less than Erroneous reading tachometer or Calibrate or replace instruments.
2500 RPM. manifold pressure gauge.
Sticky pilot valve. Remove head and clean pilot valve
with crocus cloth. Maintain sharp pi-
lot valve land corners. Check for
straightness of pilot valve; if bent,
replace valve.
RPM will not stabilize: Sludge in governor pilot valve or re- Disassemble and clean.
lief valve.
Burrs on pilot valve lands. Disassemble and clean with crocus
cloth.
Backlash in governor control system. Re--rig or adjust control system.
Short control lever making fine Re--rig control system.
speed adjustment impossible.
Sticky relief valve. Inspect for burrs, and clean.
Erroneous reading tachometer. Calibrate or replace instrument.
Excessive oil leakage in engine Refer to engine manual.
transfer bearing.
High propeller friction. Refer to propeller overhaul manual.
Governor function upset by malfunc- Repair engine for smooth operation.
tioning engine.
Air trapped in propeller. Cycle propeller from MIN to MAX
pitch several times to purge air.
Sticky pilot valve. Remove head and pilot valve. Clean
away sludge and varnish. Check
speeder spring ends for proper set-
tings.
Bent pilot valve. Remove head and replace pilot
valve.
Excessive internal leakage in gover- Check rigging and make necessary
nor. part replacements.
61--20--90
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
Excessive over--speeding: Wrong governor setting. Reset governor. Use test rig if avail-
able.
Too rapid throttle opening. Advance throttle evenly and slowly.
Damaged or wrong gasket between Install correct new gasket.
governor base and engine mounting
pad.
Sticky governor pilot or relief valve. Disassemble, clean and check for
burrs. Replace bent pilot valves.
Erroneous reading tachometer or Calibrate or replace instrument.
manifold pressure gauge.
Inability to attain positive high pitch: High--RPM screw adjusted too far Remove control arm and rotate one
IN, causing restricted arm travel. serration clockwise. Back out high--
RPM screw to required maximum
RPM (One turn equals 27 RPM.).
Surging: Excessive propeller/bladeseat fric- Examine propeller hub for cause of
tion. friction.
61--40--00 -- PROPELLER BALANCING sideration. There are many different models of Dynam-
The propeller/spinner combination assembly is dynamic Propeller Balancing Equipment, therefore details of
ically balanced at Mooney Aircraft Company, Inc. Any proper operation and procedures should be taken from
maintenance action to be accomplished on any compo- manuals of the specific manufacturer for equipment be-
nent of these two assemblies should take this into con- ing used.
61--40--00
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
61--40--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 71
POWERPLANT
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 71
POWERPLANT
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
71--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--00--40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--00--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--00--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--00--60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--63--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71--63--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
71-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 71
POWERPLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
71--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
71--00--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
71--00--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Inspection & Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
71--00--30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
71--00--40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Ground Operation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
71--00--50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
71--00--51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
71--00--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Set Up -- Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
71--00--60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injection System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--00--70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--00--80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Mixture Control Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--00--90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cowling Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cowling Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--11--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--11--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Cowling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Cowl Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
71--13--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cowl Flap Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
71--13--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cowl Fap Indicator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
71--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
71--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
71--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fireseals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
71--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Intakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
71--61--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Intake Duct Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
71--62--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Air Door Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
71--63--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter--Cooler Intake Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
71-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
71--00--00 -- GENERAL 71--00--20 -- ENGINE INSPECTION & REPAIR

The M20M (S/N 27--0001 thru 27--TBA) have either a For specific engine inspection and overhaul instruc-
TEXTRON--Lycoming TIO--540--AF1A or --AF1B se- tions, consult engine manufacturer’s overhaul manual
ries engine installed. This six cylinder, 270 H.P., fuel in- and service instructions.
jected engine has a Garrett--Airesearch variable was- 71--00--30 -- ENGINE INSTALLATION
tegate turbocharger installed to give sea level power
Reverse the engine removal procedure for installation.
capability up to 20,000 feet density altitude and high al-
titude performance up to 25,000 feet. 1. Engine installation torque values are as follows:
71--00--10 -- ENGINE REMOVAL A. Spark plugs -- 300 to 420 inch lbs.
To assist in installation, identify and tag each part as it is B. Hose clamps -- 15 to 25 inch lbs.
removed. Plug or cap all lines, hoses, and fittings as C. Engine shock mount bolts -- 450 to 500 inch lbs.
they are disconnected. D. 1/4 inch upper engine mount to fuselage
1. Make sure that all cockpit switches are OFF. bolts--50 to 70 inch lbs.
2. Turn fuel selector valve OFF. E. #10--32 lower engine mount attach block to fu-
3. Remove engine cowling and baffles (See SEC- selage--20 to 25 inch lbs; 1/4 inch lower mount bolt
TION 71--10--00). torque is 50--70 inch lbs.
F. Dual Alternator belt Tension:
4. Disconnect battery ground cable.
(1) Tensiometer -- 140# (new belt); 80--100#
5. Remove propeller (refer to SECTION 61--00--10).
(used belt)
6. Drain engine oil sump. (2) Actual deflection -- 9.0# = .128 inch (new
7. Disconnect the following: belt); 5.125--6.4# = .128 inch (used belt)
A. Vacuum lines. (3) Alternator Pulley Slip/Torque (Approx. 24 ft.
B. Cabin heat ducts (at engine). Lbs. (new); 12--17 ft. Lbs. (used)
C. Fuel vent lines (at firewall). G. Engine Driven Compressor (Optional)
D. Oil temperature bulb. (1) Refer to Chapter 21--54--04 for tensioning in-
structions.
E. Oil pressure line.
NOTE
F. Manifold pressure line. Reinstall engine shock mounts in same position
G. Cylinder head temperature bulb. as they were originally installed. Refer to para-
graph 71--20--00 for sequence of assembly.
H. Breather hose.
2. Re--inspect to see that:
8. Disconnect the following control linkage:
A. Propeller and spinner are properly torqued.
A. Throttle control.
B. Engine mounting bolts are properly torqued.
B. Propeller governor control.
C. Engine controls are properly rigged and safetied
C. Mixture control. (Recheck rod--ends for proper threadgrip length).
9. Disconnect ignition switch wires from magnetos. D. Oil drain plugs are tightened and safetied.
WARNING E. Oil sump is filled to ten quarts.
Ground magneto breaker points.
F. Spark plugs are tight and ignition harness is
10. Disconnect fuel flow wires from fuel flow trans- properly installed.
ducer. G. Magneto ground wires are properly installed
11. Disconnect engine ground strap. and safetied.
12. Disconnect alternator and starter wires. H. Oil temperature bulb is tight and safetied.
13. Disconnect heater muff and exhaust tail pipe. I. Oil pressure relief valve plug is safetied.
14. Disconnect fuel line at engine fuel pump. J. Cylinder head temperature connection is se-
cure.
15. Shore up fuselage at tail skid using shoring stand
to prevent tail from dropping after engine is removed. K. Starter cable connection is secure.
16. Attach hoist to lifting eye at top of crankcase. L. Alternator wiring is secure.
Slightly lift engine to relieve weight from engine M. Exhaust system is secure.
mounts. Remove engine mounting bolts. N. Vacuum lines and connections are secure.
17. Slowly raise engine. Be sure that all lines, hoses, O. Fuel connections are tight and pressure
and wires are free. checked.
71--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
P. Manifold pressure lines are tight. the mixture control at FULL RICH, and maintain RPM in
Q. Oil pressure lines are tight and pressure the 1000 RPM range during warm--up and ground run.
checked. A. Warm--up engine until temperature indications
R. Fuel injection lines are tight and pressure are normal. Monitor cylinder head and oil temperature
checked. instruments for over temperature.
S. Oil filter is installed and secure. B. Check magnetos at 2000 RPM with propeller at
T. Induction manifolds are secure. high RPM blade angle. Switch ignition--starter switch
from BOTH to LEFT to check mag drop. Switch back to
U. All lines, hoses, and wires are properly an-
BOTH until RPM returns to normal. Switch from BOTH
chored.
to RIGHT and check mag drop. Return switch to BOTH.
V. Induction air filter is installed and secure. Mag drop should not exceed 150 RPM on either mag-
W. Engine area is free of loose objects, tools, etc. neto (drop should be within 50 RPM of each other). A
smooth drop off past normal is usually a sign of too lean
X. Cowling is installed and secure (See SECTION
or too rich mixture. If no drop in RPM, check for open or
71--11).
broken P--leads.
Y. Cowl flap control rods are connected.
71--00--50 -- ENGINE SET UP PROCEDURE
71--00--40 -- ENGINE GROUND OPERATION
CHECKOUT It is recommended that the TI0--540--AF1A or --AF1B
engine installed on the Mooney M20M aircraft be set up
1. Prestarting procedure (with aircraft headed into according to the following instructions and in conjunc-
wind): tion with TEXTRON--Lycoming’s TIO--540--AF1A or --
A. Turn ignition switch OFF. AF1B Operator’s Manual and appropriate TEXTRON--
B. Check magneto ground connections. Lycoming Service Bulletins.
C. Check engine oil level. CAUTION

Watch for rotating propeller during engine ad-
D. Check fuel quantity. justment.
E. Operate all controls through full range to check
for binding.
F. Check baffles and cowling for security.
G. Open cowl flaps; check operation. H
G
H G
H. Drain fuel sumps and gascolator; check for sedi-
ment and water. FUEL
INJECTOR
I. Place wheel chocks and set parking brake.
2. Starting procedure: IDLE
A. Set propeller governor control: FULL SPEED
ADJUSTMENT
FWD.(HIGH RPM).
B. Turn fuel valve ON.
C. Set mixture control: FULL RICH.
D. Open throttle FULL. Push boost pump switch for
10--25 seconds until positive indication of fuel flow is
obtained. Retard to 1/4 open.
E. Clear propeller area.
F. Start engine. Check oil pressure. If no oil pres- IDLE
sure is indicated within 30 seconds, shutdown engine MIXTURE IDLE VALVE
ADJUSTMENT SM71--1
and trouble shoot oil system. Refer to TEXTRON--Ly-
coming maintenance publications for procedures.
FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENTS
G. Set throttle for idle at 900 to 1000 RPM for one
FIGURE 71--1
minute; then, advance throttle slowly to 1200 RPM for
engine warm--up. 71--00--51 -- FUEL INJECTOR IDLE SPEED & MIX-
3. Ground run and warm--up. Always head the air- TURE ADJUSTMENT
craft into the wind during warm--up. Always select the 1. For operation in normal or low ambient tempera-
high RPM blade--angle setting when ground running ture conditions, adjust idle and mixture as follows:
the engine. Never idle for extended periods at low RPM Check magnetos; if magneto drop is normal, proceed
(low RPM will foul spark plugs). Always operate with with idle adjustment.
71--00--40
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
NOTE spring from the most accessible linkage pin and re-
Use calibrated thermometer, i.e., Omega P/N move the pin. Turn the block and adjustment screw until
HH--26J, or equivalent, to verify temperature. the adjusting wheel is centered and the distance be-
A. IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT tween block is exactly as previously measured. There
is now additional adjustment range and the reference
(1) Start engine and warm up at 1500 to 1800 point is retained.
RPM until oil pressure, oil temperature and cylinder
head temperature indications are in the normal operat- (5) Each time an adjustment is changed, clear
ing ranges (GREEN). the engine by running it up to approximately 2000 RPM
before making a mixture or idle RPM check.
(2) Reduce engine RPM and stabilize between
(6) Recheck as required to insure the idle mix-
700 to 750 RPM using aircraft tachometer.
ture is adjusted within limits specified above. Allow-
(3) Adjust the idle speed adjusting screw until ance should be made for weather and field altitude
contact is made with the throttle arm stop. See Figure when adjusting idle mixture.
71--1.
NOTE
NOTE If above procedures do not result in stabilized
Fuel flow will vary with temperature changes. idle speed, check idle linkage for looseness.
Temperature variations from NACA STANDARD
71--00--52 -- ENGINE SET--UP REQUIREMENTS
DAY temperature causes approximately .7 lbs./hr.
fuel flow change with each 1 degree C. variation 1. Check all fuel lines, reference lines, gauge lines
(minus if hotter, plus if colder). and electrical connections for proper routing and secu-
rity of fittings.
If RPM changes appreciably after making idle mixture
adjustment during the succeeding steps, readjust as Remove the 7/16--20 plug located at the left hand port
necessary. of induction air duct downstream of the injector (Ref.
Figure 71--2). Install Mooney P/N GSE050012--501,
B. IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENTS Temperature Probe Assembly into this port (Lycoming
(1) Stabilize idle speed; slowly, but positively, SI 1187(G) alternate method). Route wiring back along
move mixture control from full rich toward IDLE CUT-- aircraft, through pilot’s storm window; place readout in-
OFF. Engine speed should increase 25 to 50 RPM be- dicator inside cockpit where it will be secure and easily
fore beginning to drop toward zero. read. Secure wiring to prevent damage by propeller
(2) Observe tachometer for any change during wash.
the leaning process. If engine RPM increase is less A. CHECK ENGINE CONTROLS RIGGING
than 25 RPM, adjust idle mixture adjustment (Figure (1) Operate each engine control through full
71--1) to enrich the mixture. If engine RPM increase is range of travel. Check that each one operates smoothly
more than 50 RPM, adjust idle mixture to lean the mix- and contacts the stops at each end of travel.
ture.
(2) Check each control at the instrument panel
An immediate decrease in RPM (not preceded by a mo- for .03 to .06 inch cushion with the control pushed full
mentary increase) indicates the idle mixture is on the forward.
LEAN side of best power.
CAUTION
CAUTION Do not force vernier controls by turning knobs.
Return the mixture control to FULL RICH position
NOTE
before RPM drops to a point where the engine
Any vernier control which tends to creep can be
quits.
tightened by loosening the housing nut on the
(3) Adjust idle mixture to obtain a rise of 25 to 50 back of the panel and tightening the face nut on
RPM during the above leaning exercise. This adjust- the pilot side of the panel.
ment is made by lengthening (richening) or shortening
(3) Adjust controls by adjusting rod end on the
(leaning) of the linkage between the throttle lever and
forward end of the control. If additional adjustment is re-
idle valve lever (one or two turns at a time is recom-
quired, the control arm may be repositioned to adjust
mended). For easy reference, consider only the coarse
the throttle or mixture.
thread end. When it is turned OUT of its block, the link-
age becomes LONGER and a RICHER mixture is pro- (4) Tighten all screws and resafety, if required.
vided. When it is turned INTO its block, the linkage is Refer to SECTION 76 for additional Rigging inspec-
SHORTENED and a LEANER mixture is provided (Ref. tions.
Figure 71--1). B. FUEL LINE PURGE
(4) Additional adjustment is available for use Disconnect fuel line at firewall. Pump out approximate-
when the center screw bottoms out on either side of the ly one quart of fuel using the auxiliary fuel boost pump.
blocks and the idle adjustment is not satisfactory. Mea- Select the opposite tank and repeat. Reconnect fuel
sure the distance between the two blocks; disconnect line.
71--00--52
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
C. FUEL BOOST PUMP THROTTLE SWITCH (4) Verify that fuel pressure on aircraft gauge
RIGGING does not exceed 55 PSI and does not drop below 45
PSI. Adjust or replace fuel pump as required.
(1) Turn ignition switch OFF, manual fuel boost
pump switch OFF, mixture at idle cutoff and aircraft D. IDLE ADJUSTMENT
electrical power ON. Push throttle full FWD (FULL Refer to paragraph 71--00--51, A. and B. above.
POWER POSITION); verify that throttle activated fuel
E. FULL POWER ADJUSTMENTS
boost pump switch is engaged and boost pump stays
ON while the throttle is pulled, toward idle, until 0.38 to (1) Engine running, temperatures and pressures
0.5 inches from the full FWD position. in normal range (GREEN) slowly apply full throttle (pro-
peller and mixture controls FULL FORWARD).
(2) Reposition switch and actuator arm to obtain
the above criteria. CAUTION
Do not exceed 38.0 In. Hg. and 2600 RPM under
(3) Verify that BOOST PUMP annunciator any circumstances during the full power adjust-
(BLUE light) is illuminated. ment process.
PROPELLER GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT

(HIGH RPM STOP)
TEXTRON TEXTRON TEXTRON

LYCOMING LYCOMING LYCOMING
DENSITY CONTROLLER
7/16--20 PLUG
(PORT FOR TEMP. MEASUREMENT OF
INTERCOOLER OUT INDUCTION AIR)
SM71--2
ENGINE ADJUSTMENTS
FIGURE 71--2
(2) Verify that propeller governor will allow the pressure gauge and compare with chart (Figure 71--3).
engine to operate at proper static RPM to obtain 2575 If manifold pressure at the observed intercooler out in-
RPM during T/O roll. Refer to SECTION 61--20--30 for duction air temperature falls within the limits indicated
propeller governor adjustment. Recheck control cable in the chart no adjustment of the density controller is re-
assembly cushion as specified in Step 71--00--52, A, quired. However, if the manifold pressure is not within
(2) above and SECTION 61--20--00. the limits shown in Figure 71--3, the density controller
o
(3) Run engine until 170 to 180 oil temperature must be adjusted as described in Step (5) below until it
is obtained. Slowly apply full throttle (propeller and mix- falls within the required band.
ture full forward). Observe the GSE050012--501* read- (5) The density controller is mounted on the left
out indicator and allow the intercooler out induction air aft side of the intercooler (ref. Figure 71--2). Remove
temperature to stabilize. (* Lycoming SI 1187(G) Alter- lockwire from the adjusting fitting and by means of a
nate Method) small wrench, turn the square head of the fitting clock-
(4) Note the stabilized intercooler out induction wise or counterclockwise to accomplish the adjust-
air temperature on GSE050012--501 indicator and the ment. Turning the screw inward, or clockwise will in-
stabilized manifold pressure on a calibrated manifold crease manifold pressure; turning it counterclockwise
71--00--52
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
will decrease manifold pressure. Be careful when rein- 71--00--90 -- STARTER TROUBLE SHOOTING
stalling safety wire to avoid turning the adjustment fit- See SECTION 24--39--04 for procedure. TEXTRON--
ting. Lycoming’s MAINTENANCE AND OPERATOR’S
CAUTION MANUAL should be consulted.
Turning the adjusting fitting 1/16 turn will change 71--10--00 -- COWLING REMOVAL
the manifold pressure approximately 2 inches; 71--10--01 -- TOP COWLING
therefore, CARE MUST BE EXERCISED to turn
the screw in VERY SMALL increments until cor- 1. Remove two (2) screws from top cowling on each
rect adjustment is obtained. inboard side of engine cooling air intakes.
2. Remove (1) screw from each side of top cowling,
(6) If discrepancies in the controller settings be-
forward and outboard. Then unlatch seven cam locks
tween ground set up and actual flight become evident,
along each side.
then the following procedure shall be accomplished.
Shut the engine down after the initial warm--up for 4 to 5 3. Unlatch seven cam locks on the aft edge of the top
minutes to allow proper heat soak of engine compo- cowling just ahead of windshield.
nents. To insure that temperatures have stabilized, 4. Carefully lift top cowling off.
readings and adjustments MUST BE made with the air- 71--10--02 -- BOTTOM COWLING
craft cowling installed. Restart engine and run (mini-
1. Unlatch seven cam locks located on bottom of
mum 2 minutes) until induction air temperature has sta-
cowling, forward and between the cowl flaps.
bilized.
2. Unlatch twelve cam locks around NACA duct on
(7) Recheck all idle and full power adjustments lower, right, forward end of lower cowl.
to insure that they meet this specification and readjust if
necessary. Verify that all screws are tightened and re- 3. Unlatch eight cam locks around induction air inlet
safety if required. duct at forward center of lower cowl.
4. Unlatch six cam locks on aft sides of bottom cowl-
F. CLEAN UP
ing while supporting the cowl.
After any flight checks and adjustments are complete,
5. Carefully lower cowling clear of spinner and re-
conduct a leak check of all connections.
move from aircraft.
71--00--60 -- FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM MAINTE- 71--11--00 -- COWLING INSTALLATION
NANCE
NOTE
For specific injection system inspection and overhaul Check condition of tape on firewall flange where
instructions, consult engine manufacturer’s overhaul cowling will rest. A polyethylene tape, P/N 5421
manual and service instructions. (UHMW) (3M) 1 in. wide is recommended. This
71--00--70 -- STARTER SYSTEM MAINTENANCE will decrease streaking during wet weather op-
erations.
Inspect and service starter per TEXTRON--Lycoming’s
Service Instructions. 71--11--01 -- BOTTOM COWLING
CAUTION 1. The bottom cowling is installed “first“ in reverse se-
Do not operate starter in excess of 30 seconds; quence of removal.
allow cooling time before re--engaging. 71--11--02 -- TOP COWLING
71--00--80 -- ENGINE MIXTURE CONTROL RIG- 1. The top cowling is installed in reverse sequence of
GING removal.
1. Disconnect mixture control. 71--12--00 -- ENGINE COWL FLAPS
A. Remove cotter key. The cowl flaps are activated OPEN and CLOSED by an
idler arm which is connected by a push--pull rod to the
B. Remove nut, bolt, and two washers from clevis actuator arm on the geared motor. A cowl flap switch,
and mixture control arm. located on the cockpit console directly under the mix-
2. Reconnect mixture control. ture control, activates the geared motor. The switch has
three positions: a center (OFF), an up (CLOSED) and a
A. Reverse disconnect procedure to reconnect
down (OPEN) position. The cowl flaps may be posi-
mixture control.
tioned at any angle by selecting the switch either up or
3. Adjustment of mixture control arm. down until the desired position, as shown on the posi-
A. Loosen locknut on control rod end and adjust tion indicator, has been reached. Then return the
control arm rod as required. switch to the center (OFF) position. Limit switches,
which are not adjustable, prevent the cowl flap from ex-
B. Check for full travel.
ceeding the full open or full closed position.
C. Check for proper thread grip. A cowl flap position indicator is located on the lower
D. Secure locknut. console adjacent to the cowl flap switch. This indicator
71--00--60
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
is operated electrically thru a potentiometer which is 71--13--01 for Cowl Flap Indicator rigging procedures.
connected to cowl flap actuator shaft. See SECTION
POWER CONTROL CHART 270 H.P.--2575 RPM

ENGINE MODEL TIO--540--AF1A or B
DENSITY CONTROLLER LW--10682
TURBOCHARGER TA0413
CONDITIONS
2575 RPM, Full Throttle
Normal Operating Oil Temp.
and Pressure.
180
170
160
150
INJECTOR OUTLET TEMPERATURE oF
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
33 34 35 36 37 38
MANIFOLD PRESSURE -- IN. HG.
INTERCOOLER OUT INDUCTION AIR TEMP vs MANIFOLD PRESSURE

FIGURE 71--3
71--12--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
71--13--00 -- COWL FLAP RIGGING 71--20--01 -- MOONEY M20M ENGINE MOUNT

The cowl flaps are rigged for a flush contour between INSTALLATION
the cowl flap’s trailing edges and lower cowl and fuse- The rubber shock mounts are installed in a specific se-
lage when in the closed position (See Figure 71--4). quence for proper dampening of engine and propeller
1. With the cowl flaps open, adjust linkage rods from power pulses.
idler shaft arm of each cowl flap to their maximum NOTE
length. All shock mounts should be replaced at engine
change.
Two manufacturers make the engine isolators, there-
fore it is necessary to know which (Lord or Barry) are
installed or being replaced. Lord Mfg. part numbers are
shown in normal print;
NOTE
Barry Mfg. part numbers were never used. The
following sequence of assembly must be ob-
served. It is not permissible to mix manufactur-
ers components.
All assembly sequences are listed from aft to forward.
1. UPPER MOUNT SEQUENCE (LEFT AND
RIGHT) (LORD MFG.) ISOLATOR KIT--J--9613--82
contains the components below except mounting hard-
ware.
A. NAS1307--50 -- BOLT
SM71--4 B. ENGINE MOUNT, WELDED ASSEMBLY
C. J--9612--46 -- BONDED MOUNT]
D. J--10931--5] -- SPACER
COWL FLAP RIGGING
E. TIO--540--AF1A or --AF1B -- ENGINE
FIGURE 71--4
F. J--7763--53 -- BONDED MOUNT]
2. Close cowl flaps and measure the distance be- G. J--2218--61 -- WASHER, LARGE O/D
tween the cowl flap’s trailing edges and fuselage lower H. AN960--716 -- WASHER
forward skin line. I. AN363--720 -- NUT
3. Open cowl flaps and readjust the linkage rod, de-
creasing the length by the measured amount.
4. Close cowl flaps and ensure that cowl flaps are not
outside the fuselage contour nor that the cowl flaps are
preloaded. Readjust as required.
71--13--01 -- COWL FLAP INDICATOR ADJUST-
MENT
1. Position cowl flaps in closed position.
2. Adjust cowl flap potentiometer on aircraft, to illumi-
nate top bar in display.
3. Position cowl flaps to OPEN position.
4. Adjust R1 on A/D board (see Figure 71--6) if neces-
sary, to illuminate bottom bar on display.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4, until no further adjust-
ment is required.
6. Cycle cowl flap system to insure proper movement POTENTIOMETER
SET
of the indicator. SCREWS
71--20--00 -- ENGINE MOUNTS
SM71--5
The M20M engine mount is a welded dyna--focal type
mount assembly of chrome--moly, 4130 steel. Refinish
by sandblasting and paint with 2 coats of Krylon High COWL FLAP INDICATOR RIGGING
Heat Black Enamel, # 1614 (Sherwin--Williams Co.) FIGURE 71--5
71--13--00
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
71--60--00 -- AIR INTAKES

PIN K R8 The engine cooling air intakes and exits are calculated
for optimum cooling requirements and minimum drag.
Normal engine operating temperatures are at the opti-
PIN A PIN F
C1
mum to facilitate engine efficiency. The engine induc-
D1
tion air intake is a fiberglass duct that picks up impact
C3
Q2
R9
air and routes it through the air filter to the turbocharger
IC1
IC4
R2 housing and eventually to the engine.

PIN B The air intake system includes an alternate air intake
C2
R1
system that is automatically operated. A manual opera-
F3
tion control is provided on the aircraft also. The ALT AIR

PIN E
amber light will illuminate on the annunciator panel
when the alternate air door is open.
R1 71--61--00 -- INDUCTION AIR DUCT REPLACE-
MENT
1200-07FG-58 When the induction air duct must be replaced it is es-
SM71--6
sential that the duct be securely fastened to the air filter
can flanges to prevent interference with the cowling.
COWL FLAP IND. ADJUST.
FIGURE 71--6 NOTE
Apply continuous bead of sealant approximately
2. LOWER MOUNT SEQUENCE (LEFT AND .06 in. high to all sealing flanges of induction air
RIGHT) (LORD MFG.) ISOLATOR KIT--J--9613--82 assembly when air filter can has been removed
contains the components below except mounting hard- and is to be re--installed on induction air assem-
ware, special washer (item C.) and heat shield. bly.
A. NAS1307--50 -- BOLT 71--62--00 -- ALTERNATE AIR DOOR RIGGING
B. AN960--716 -- WASHER 1. Clamp housing of alternate air intake control as-
C. ENGINE MOUNT, WELDED ASSEMBLY sembly at the bracket on alternate air box so housing
extends only .13 inches beyond clamp. This will allow
D. 600364--* -- SPACER *Optional thickness
maximum travel of alternate air door lever assembly.
E. J--7763--53 -- BONDED MOUNT Ref. Figure 71--7.
F. J--10931--5 -- SPACER 2. The alternate air lever assembly should be rigged
G. TIO--540--AF1A or --AF1B -- ENGINE so .06 to .13 gap remains when the alternate air box
door is held closed with the magnetic catch assembly.
H. J--9612--46* -- BONDED MOUNT
3. The annunciator light switch is mounted on the al-
I. 600394--003 -- HEAT SHIELD ternate air box and should be rigged to extinguish the
*NOTE: INSTALL H. ON LOWER LEFT MOUNT ONLY light with bottom of door .25 in. (max.) from full closed.
J. J--2218--61 -- WASHER, LARGE O/D 4. Check opening force of door. It should take be-
tween 4.5 and 7.5 pounds to open the door. Take read-
K. AN363--720 -- NUT
ings at approximate location of the magnetic catch as-
TORQUE NUTS TO 520--530 INCH LBS sembly.
71--30--00 -- FIRESEALS 71--63--00 -- INTER--COOLER INTAKE AIR DUCT
Firewall fireseals and grommets, if removed and re- REPLACEMENT/REMOVAL
placed for any reason, should be re--sealed after rout- When the inter--cooler duct is removed/replaced for
ing the cable or wire assembly from the engine any reason it is essential that it be securely fastened to
compartment into the cockpit area. After installation the inter--cooler flanges and positioned so the cam lock
cover cable or wire and grommet underneath the fire- fasteners will easily attach when lower cowling is
seal with Coast Pro--Seal 700 on engine side of firewall. installed.
71--30--00
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
RTV-102 SEALANT
MAY BE USED ON SOME HOUSINGS FWD
TO SEAL FRONT COVER
OUTBOARD
REQ’D. TO ALLOW
FOR MAX. TRAVEL
OF LEVER ASSY.
.06 in.
.13 in.
GAP REQ’D. BETWEEN
ACTUATOR ROD & .13 in.
DOOR ASSY. WITH
CONTROL KNOB IN
CLOSED POSITION
SM71--7
ALTERNATE AIR DOOR RIGGING

FIGURE 71--7
71--63--00
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
71--63--00
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 72
ENGINE
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 72
ENGINE
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
72--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
72--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
72--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
72--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
72-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 72
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
72--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
72-- CONTENT
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
72--00--00 -- GENERAL
Refer to TEXTRON--Lycoming Operator’s Manual and,
Overhaul and Maintenance Manual for detailed infor-
mation.
72--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
72--00--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 73
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEMS

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 73
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEMS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
73--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--31--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--31--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--31--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--31--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
73-EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 73
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
73--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
73--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
73--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
73--21--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Fuel Pressure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
73--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Flow Indicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
73--31--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Flow System -- General System Description . . 5
73--31--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Mounted Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
73--31--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Flow Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
73--31--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
73--31--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
73--31--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Fuel Mgmt Systems . . . . . . . . . 9
73--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Injector--General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
73--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Test Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
73--60--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump -- Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
73-CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
73-- 00-- 00 - GENERAL M20M aircraft equipped with the Garmin G1000 sys-
The engine and its accessories are certificated under tem utilize transducer signals from the TCM power-
plant and airframe components to provide cockpit dis-
TEXTRON--Lycoming Type Certificate. Refer to TEX-
TRON--Lycoming Operator’s or Overhaul Manual for play data. The Fuel Flow indicator displays current fuel
specific instructions. flow values, expressed in gallons per hour (GPH). Re-
fer to the Garmin publications for Operation, Mainte-
73--20--00 -- FUEL PRESSURE nance and Troubleshooting procedures.
73--20--01 -- FUEL PRESSURE SYSTEM DE- FT-- 101 SYSTEM
SCRIPTION 1. DISPLAY -- The display uses one mini--lamp and
A fuel pressure transducer, installed between fuel in- four seven segment incandescent digits that are fully
jector and fuel pressure indicator on instrument panel, sunlight readable. Display dims automatically during
provides electrical signal to indicate operating fuel night and low light flight conditions.
pressure. A fuel boost pump is installed, in series with 2. MICROPROCESSOR -- The microprocessor, in
engine driven fuel pump, to provide starting pressure the FT--101, contains a crystal controlled oscillator
and backup fuel pressure during take--off. which controls all timing and computing functions for
73--21--00 -- LOW FUEL PRESSURE WARNING precise fuel flow and totalizing computations.
3. POWER SUPPLY -- The FT--101 power supply is a
Aircraft, S/N 27--0001 thru 27--0052 (excluding
high speed switching regulator type for optimum effi-
27--0020) have a low fuel pressure warning light lo-
ciency and lowest possible power drain on aircraft elec-
cated in the annunciator panel. THis annunciator light
trical system.
will come ON when fuel pressure goes below 24 PSI
(top of yellow arc on fuel pressure gauge). The fuel 4. MEMORY -- The FT--101 microprocessor continu-
pressure gauge has a ground contact (Pin 8) that sends ously stores and updates totalized fuel quantity in a
signal to annunciator panel. The gauge is adjusted by random access memory chip. The Total Fuel Used
the manufacturer and can only be readjusted by n ap- quantity is retained during aircraft shut down by con-
proved instrument shop. necting FT--101 memory wire to aircraft battery through
a memory switch. Drain on aircraft batteries is small
73--30--00 -- FUEL FLOW INDICATING due to low power CMOS memory chip which uses only
A turbine type fuel flow transducer and signal compat- 3.5 milliamps at 24 VDC.
ible, interpretive indicators are installed on the M20M 5. INTERNAL SWITCH ARRANGEMENT -- The pro-
aircraft. gramming switch block (Figure 73--2) located inside
73--31--00 -- FUEL FLOW TOTALIZER SYSTEM - the FT--101 panel mounted unit has several arrange-
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ments to change data readout, if desired. Switches S1
and S2 (Figure 73--2) should not be changed unless
The Fuel Flow Totalizer system is designed to maxi- transducer “K“ factor of a replacement transducer dif-
mize the efficiency of fuel system management by dis- fers from original unit’s “K“ factor (See Section
playing fuel consumption rate (fuel flow) of engine and 73--31--02, 3, for “K“ factor description).
precise amount of fuel engine has consumed. This in-
formation may be displayed in one of the following for- Switches S3 thru S7 can be positioned in various ar-
mats, US Gallons, Pounds, or Liters depending on pro- rangements to change fuel flow readout to gallons,
gramming (Garmin G1000), switch or contact pounds or liters as the situation may require (Figure
arrangement (Figure 73--1). 73--2).
SHADIN SYSTEM
One of three systems may be installed. Either system
consists of a panel mounted instrument and a fuel flow The --L option is a fuel management system designed
transducer located between fuel control unit and flow to provide information relative to actual flight conditions
divider. without any manual data entry, except for initial fuel on
board. It is connected to engine fuel flow transducer for
The system is designed for use in single engine, fuel in- fuel flow data and the Loran (or GPS) receiver for navi-
jected aircraft having no more than 60 GAL/HR contin- gation data.
uous consumption or 78 GAL/HR Intermittent con-
The system provides:
sumption. (Take Off power).
Specific Range: NM/gal. or NM/10 lb. of fuel burned.
73--31--01 -- PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENT Optimum cruise speed can be obtained by selecting
power setting which yields highest NM/gal.
The panel mounted instrument contains all system
electronics and can be divided into following groups: Fuel to Destination: System calculates fuel necessary
to reach destination as selected on Loran (GPS) re-
GARMIN G1000 ceiver by multiplying Fuel Flow by ETE to destination.
S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA Fuel Reserve: System calculates amount of fuel which
(GARMIN G1000 equipped) will be available onboard when aircraft reaches des-
73-- 00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
tination, as indicated on Loran--C (GPS) receiver way- Not Enough Fuel: System will flash display digits when
point. This feature provides pilot with necessary data to rotary switch is in Fuel to Destination position and fuel
evaluate reserve fuel situation based on accurate data to destination is more than fuel remaining. Fuel remain-
early enough to take necessary action. ing display digits will show a negative sign (--) followed
by amount of fuel short to reach destination.
Endurance: System calculates time left to fly in hours
and minutes based on fuel on board and fuel consump- Fuel Reserve will be Used: System will flash display
tion. digits when rotary switch is in either Fuel to Destination
or Reserve Fuel. This warning is intended to alert pilot
Fuel Remaining: System keeps track of fuel remaining that prevailing conditions will require use of the 45 min-
on board. ute Fuel Reserve or part of it.
Fuel Used: System keeps track of fuel used since last Fuel Flow: System provides digital readout of fuel flow
fuel entry. per hour to one/tenth of a gallon.
FT-- 101
INSULATOR
UNIT
SCREW
INSULATOR
7
6
SCREW 5
4
3
2
SCREW 1
SECURITY PROGRAMMING
SEAL SWITCH
SCREW HOUSING BLOCK
TRUTH TABLE
K-FACTOR S1 S2 FUNCTION S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
L ON ON GALLONS ON OFF OFF NA NA

M ON OFF POUNDS OFF ON OFF NA NA
H OFF ON LITERS OFF OFF ON NA NA
HH OFF OFF NA NA
TRANSDUCERS ARE CATEGORIZED BY NUMBER OF PULSES

PER SECOND OUTPUT FOR A GIVEN FLOW RATE (“K FACTOR”).
THIS WILL BE NOTED AS : L, M, H OR HH SCRIBED ON THE END
OF THE SERIAL NUMBER.
FOR ACCURATE READINGS, THE FT-- 101 INTERNAL SWITCHES
MUST BE MATCHED TO THE TRANSDUCER.
SEE TRUTH TABLE ABOVE. R73-- 2
FT--101 SWITCH ARRANGEMENT

FIGURE 73-- 1
73--31--01
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
SHADIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS “bad” is displayed and system is to be considered un-

System consists of three basic units: serviceable until corrective action is taken. When “test
routine” is completed, system will display the following:
1. Fuel Flow Transducer
1. Software basic # and revision level.
2. Loran (GPS) receiver (not part of Shadin system)
2. “K” factor setting in flow window (pulse count per
3. Indicator: (which includes) -- Microprocessor -- In-
gallon). This number MUST match pulse count
terface -- Display -- Display Controls
stamped on fuel flow transducer, otherwise errors will
SHADIN SYSTEM MEMORY occur.
System includes a non--volatile memory for retaining 3. Display units (Gal., LB 5.8), part of checking inter-
basic settings and Fuel Remaining and Fuel Used dur- nal settings.
ing power shut down.
4. Loran--C (GPS) distances as shown on Loran--C
TEST FUNCTIONS AND ERROR MESSAGES (GPS) receiver to check Data Interface Integrity. If sys-
Press “TEST” button. Program checks hardware and tem is not capable of reading Loran--C (GPS) data, the
display. If test is successful, “good” is displayed; if not word ”LbAd” will be displayed.
74HC244 SW3 SW2

74HC373
C4
28C17
U8
U5 RN2
HD3
U9
C6
C3
74HC138
U4
80C318H 61XX
SWITCH 0
R6
D1
DS1210
R6
U7 Y1 U10
U3
R3
C5
C10 U11
C11
C7
74HC244 SW1 SW0

HD6
74HC74 U6
HD1
R4
27CXXX
C2
U2 RN1
R1
C1
R1 C9 HD2
555
J1
C8
U1 R73-- 3
SHADIN FUEL FLOW CIRCUIT

Figure 73-- 2
REPLACEMENT OF SHADIN SYSTEM COM- 2. Locate switch ”0”. (Ref. Figure 73--2)
PONENTS 3. Set switch to one of the following positions:
Replacement of either flow flow transducer or display Display Will
K-Factor Switch No.
unit must have new units set to same K-- factor as old Read
unit. Transducers are pre--set by manufacturer and dis-
K-0 B 88.0
play unit must be set to agree with transducer setting.
Refer to table below: K-1 A 87.0
Transducer Indicator K-2 9 86.0
K-Factor
Configuration Setting K-3 8 85.0
Aerosonic 3 (85000 3 or 85000 K-4 7 84.0
Pulses/Gal.)
K-5 6 83.0
Floscan L 82000
K-6 5 82.0
M 85000
K-7 4 81.0
H 87000
K-8 3 80.0
To change K--Factor in Shadin Miniflo display unit:
1. Remove can from indicator K-9 2 79.0
73-- 31--01
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
73--31--02 -- FUEL FLOW TRANSDUCER B. Connect nuts of lines to fittings, leave them
1. The turbine fuel flow transducer, mounted in en- snug, not tight.
gine fuel line, measures flow of fuel. Transducer is C. Connect new transducer to bracket using bolts,
rated for continuous operation to 60 gallons per hour. In washers and nuts.
addition, the transducer is accurate down to 0.6 gallons CAUTION
per hour. Make sure lines are not being put into a bind or
2. Transducer supplies Fuel Flow Totalizer with a twist when securing transducer to bracket.
pulse signal from a self contained opto--electronic pick- D. Tighten all fuel lines and bolts to secure trans-
up. A neutrally buoyant rotor spins with liquid (fuel) flow ducer.
between V--jeweled bearings. Rotor movement is E. Connect connector/knife disconnects and slide
sensed when notches in rotor interrupt an infra--red insulating sleeving over connections. Secure sleeving
light beam between a light emitting diode and a photo-- with ty--raps.
transistor.
F. Leak check all fuel connections by pressurizing
3. Transducer design is fail safe; complete rotor fuel lines with boost pump. Correct any leaks or dis-
blockage cannot interrupt fuel flow. Transducer life ex- crepancies.
pectancy is 1500 hours.
G. Wrap firesleeving over transducer and secure
NOTE into position with safety wire.
Transducers are categorized by number of pulses NOTE
per second output for a given GPH flow rate (“K- Installation of new transducer may affect engine
Factor”). This will be noted as: L, M, H, or HH fuel flow adjustment. It is recommended that pro-
scribed on end of Serial Number. For accurate cedures of Section 71--00--50 be followed to as-
readings, replacement transducers should have sure engine is set up for proper operation.
same “K” factor as units being replaced. Specify
“K“ factor code when ordering new transducers. H. When all adjustments have been made and all
connections checked for security, install cowling per
4. Fuel flow transducer removal. Section 71--10--00.
A. Remove top and bottom cowling from aircraft. 73-- 31-- 03 - GENERAL OPERATING PROCE-
See Section 71--10--00 for procedures. DURES
B. Remove safety wire from firesleeve around tur- FT--101/101A
bine transducer and unwrap firesleeve to expose trans- 1. Turn aircraft Master Switch -- ON. When aircraft
ducer. electrical system is activated, the FT--101/101A dis-
C. Cut and remove ty--raps from insulator sleeves play will flash zeros (000.0). Flashing is reminder for pi-
on connector/knife disconnects of electrical wires. lot to reset or check Fuel Used by pressing either RE-
SET or USED/TEST button. Once RESET or
D. Slide insulation sleeving up on electrical wire USED/TEST button is depressed, display will stop
harness. flashing and read current fuel flow.
E. Disconnect connector/knife disconnects. After starting aircraft engine, the FT--101/(A) will con-
F. Loosen nuts on tubes at fittings prior to loosen- tinuously display fuel flow. Total Fuel Used may be dis-
ing nuts on attaching bolts. played by pressing and holding USED/TEST button on
right of instrument. Total Fuel Used will be displayed as
G. Loosen and remove nuts, washers and bolts long as USED/TEST button is depressed (or for 2 sec-
from transducer and bracket. onds), whichever comes first. This number may be re-
H. Disconnect flare nuts from transducer fittings. set to zero (0.0) by depressing and holding RESET but-
Transducer should now be free for removal. Note posi- ton for at least 1 second.
tion (orientation) of fittings on old transducer. 2. The totalizer function may be used as a single flight
I. Cap all lines to prevent contamination. totalizer or as a long term totalizer. Both methods are
explained below.
5. Fuel flow transducer (replacement) installation.
A. SINGLE FLIGHT TOTALIZER. Aircraft should
NOTE be topped with fuel before each flight so total usable
“K“ factor of replacement transducer should fuel will be known. Turn aircraft Master Switch -- ON.
match “K“ factor of replaced unit. Refer to Push and hold reset button, located on left of instru-
“NOTE“ following Section 73--31--02, for detailed ment, for at least 1 second. RESET button has a one/
explanation. half second delay to prevent accidental reset.
A. Note position (orientation) of fittings on old On starting engine, FT--101/(A) will begin displaying
transducer and place them in similar position on new fuel flow. Total fuel used may be checked by depress-
transducer. ing USED/TEST button.
73--31--02
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
B. LONG TERM TOTALIZER. Turn aircraft Master (2) If no increase in voltage is seen on WHITE
Switch -- ON. On activating aircraft electrical system, wire as flow increases or if too high a voltage indication
FT--101/(A) will flash zero (000.0) fuel flow. Depress is seen with no flow, change transducer.
and hold USED/TEST button. FT--101/(A) will display (3) If RED wire does not have bus voltage, check
total fuel used from previous flights. DO NOT push RE- wiring from transducer to Pin 3 of indicator.
SET button! On starting engine, FT--101/(A) will display
fuel flow and continue counting fuel used, up to 999.9 (4) If BLACK wire is not grounded, check wiring
gallons, 9999 pounds, or 9999 liters, depending on in- from transducer to Pin 6 of indicator.
ternal setting. 3. ERRATIC INDICATIONS
73--31--04 -- TEST FUNCTION A. Check wiring for loose connections.
A test function is provided in the FT--101/(A), so pilot B. Check wiring for intermittent shorts.
may verify that all digits are functioning prior to each C. Check transducer for foreign particles.
flight. To use test function, depress and hold USED/
D. If all checks OK, replace transducer.
TEST button two times within one second and
FT--101/(A) will display all eights (888.8). 4. INACCURATE READINGS
73-- 31-- 05 - TROUBLESHOOTING FT--101/101A A. Check transducer K--factor. The letter
FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS “L“,”M”,”H”, or “HH“ inscribed after the serial number.
Troubleshooting any FT--101/(A) type fuel manage- B. Remove indicator from instrument panel and
ment systems should be approached in a systematic case. Check switch settings and correct to match trans-
manner. All problems can be put in one to five catego- ducer.
ries: NOTE
Each switch setting changes reading by approxi-
-- Improper operation due to lack of knowledge
mately 2%. If settings are OK, replace transducer.
about system.-- Inoperative computer or main instru-
ment. CAUTION
Whenever transducer or indicator is replaced,
-- Inoperative transducer. care must be taken to set indicator switches to
-- Improper wiring. match transducer. If after making these checks
you still do not isolate problem or do not find a
-- Improper transducer installation.
problem, contact Product Support Department,
1. MEMORY LOSS -- Mooney Aircraft Company for further assistance.
A. Loses memory when Master Switch is turned -- 73-- 40-- 00 - FUEL INJECTOR - GENERAL
OFF. The Precision Airmotive Corporation (Bendix) RSA--5
(1) Check “Fuel Flow Memory“ Switch -- ON. fuel injector is supplied with the engine from TEX-
TRON--Lycoming. Precision Airmotive Corporation
(2) If switch is ON, check clock for operation. (Bendix) Operation and Service Manual No. FORM
(3) If clock inoperative, replace fuse at battery. 15--338--D, ECD--JAN 85--700 or subsequent revision
should be used for operation, installation or adjustment
(4) If no problem found, remove connector from of the fuel injector.
unit, check Pin 9 for bus voltage.
73-- 50-- 00 - TRANSDUCER TEST BOX (DRUCK,
(5) If voltage present, replace FT--101/(A). KULITE, PATRIOT)
B. Memory scrambles when engine starts. Ex- CAUTION
change FT--101/(A) for modified unit. This unit is for troubleshooting only. DO NOT AT-
2. DOES NOT INDICATE TEMPT TO CALIBRATE WITH THIS UNIT.
A. No display. The Transducer Test Box, P/N GSE 030036, can be
used to simulate fuel and oil pressure in the Mooney
(1) Remove connector from indicator. Check Pin Model M20M.
1 of harness connector for bus voltage. Check Pin 8 for
To use the unit for troubleshooting, the box is con-
airframe ground. If OK, change indicator.
nected to the aircraft harness in the engine compart-
B. Displays zeros (with engine running) ment by disconnecting the appropriate Druck transduc-
(1) Remove cowling for access to transducer. er electrical connector and connecting the test box in its
Remove insulating sleeving from connections on all place.
wires. Check BLACK wire for A/F ground. Check RED NOTE
wire for bus voltage. Check WHITE wire for 2--3 volts For Kulite, Patriot transducers an adapter har-
with no fuel flow and increasing to near bus voltage at ness will be required. Contact MAC Service Parts
full flow. for harness information.
73-- 31--04
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
Push aircraft Master Switch -- ON (insure engine gauge 2. Moritz gauge -- S/N 27--0258 thru 27--0317,
circuit breakers are in) and adjust box to approximate 27--319 thru 27--0325, 27--0327
pressure desired. The engine gauge should read this
A. Check wiring for continuity between engine
approximate pressure.
compartment connector and cluster.
If pressure reading is correct:
B. If wiring is correct -- probable failure is in gauge
1. Verify Fuel pressure to transducer with mechani- module or cluster.
cal pressure gauge.
73-- 60-- 00 - ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP - IN-
A. If correct -- probable failure is transducer.
FORMATION
B. If incorrect -- troubleshoot fuel system.
Refer to TEXTRON--Lycoming Service Instruction No.
If pressure reads incorrectly, zero or pegged condition: 1446 ( ) for inspection of engine driven fuel pump for
1. Sigma--Tek gauge -- S/N 27--0001 thru 27--0257. ruptured diaphragm.
73--60--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 74
IGNITION
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 74
IGNITON
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
74--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
74--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
74--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
74--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
74-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 74
IGNITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
74--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
74--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
74--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
74--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
74--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
74-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
74-- 00-- 00 - GENERAL 74--10--00 -- ELECTRICAL POWER

The TIO 540--AF1A/--AF1B series engines are 74-- 10-- 01 - IGNITION SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOT-
equipped with Slick 6200 Series Magnetos. The left ING
magneto incorporates an impulse coupling that retards 1‘. Hard Starting
the spark 35 degrees for starting. When the engine A. Assure that the impulse coupling is operating
starts, counter weights hold the latch pawls away from properly.
stop pins. The magneto then will fire at its advanced fir- B. Check magneto timing to engine.
ing position.
2. Engine Roughness
The magneto/starter switch combines both ignition and A. Install new spark plugs.
starting functions. Turn the key clockwise through R, L
B. Check plug leads for deterioration.
and BOTH to START position; push forward on key
while in START and the starer relay is energized. Re- C. Check magneto points for wear or improper set-
lease the key, after the engine starts, will return the ting.
switch to the BOTH position where both magnetos are 3. Magneto drop out of limits
operative. A. Check magneto to engine timing.
In the OFF position both magnetos are grounded. At B. Inspect and service magnetos per TEXTRON--
the R position the left magneto is grounded and at the L Lycoming maintenance information.
position the right magneto is grounded. C. Check spark plugs and leads.
4. Check magneto pressurization hoses and connec-
tions.
1
2
UPPER SPARK PLUGS
3
IGNITION SWITCHES
4 LEFT RIGHT
LEFT RIGHT 5
MAG. MAG.
6
25 41 54
2 1
36 36
3
LOWER SPARK PLUGS
4
6
ENGINE FIRING ORDER 1--4--5--2--3--6 SMM74--1
IGNITION WIRING DIAGRAM
FIGURE 74-- 1
NOTE 74-- 20-- 00 - ENGINE FIRING ORDER
Aircraft which are flown at higher altitudes during Engine firing order is 1--4--5--2--3--6 (Figure 74--1). Ob-
normal flight operations require more frequent serve position of the No. 1 cable terminal in the magne-
maintenance on ignition components than air- to outlet plate in relation to the magneto case. As
craft flown at lower altitudes.
74-- 00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
viewed from the distributor end, magneto rotor turns 74-- 30-- 00 - SWITCHING
counterclockwise, passing in succession the terminals The Magneto/Starter Switch is connected to magneto
of spark plug cables in engine firing order. Cables are grounding wires (“P” leads) of both magnetos. Turning
connected to magnetos so that the right magneto fires this switch from “BOTH” to “OFF” or from “R” to “L” to
the upper plugs on the right side and the lower plugs on “OFF” will ground out both or either magneto. (See
the left side. The left magneto fires the upper plugs on Section 74--00--00 for grounding sequence.)
the left and the lower plugs on the right. The magneto
cases, spark plugs, cables and connections are Reliability: With proper installation and compliance
shielded to prevent radio interference. with prescribed maintenance procedures, Slick Mag-
netos should last the life of the engine before overhaul
NOTE
or replacement is required.
It is recommended that all spark plugs be re-
moved, inspected, cleaned, re--gapped and rein-
stalled in the same cylinder but in a different
spark plug hole every 100 hrs. Replace spark
plugs after 400 Hrs. of operation.
74--30--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 76
ENGINE CONTROLS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 76
ENGINE CONTROLS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
76--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
76--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
76--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
76--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
76-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 76
ENGINE CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
76--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
76--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
76--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspections -- Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
76--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspections -- Repetitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
76--11--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
76--12--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
76-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
76--00--00 -- ENGINE CONTROLS and attaching hardware should be installed in accor-

76-- 00-- 01 - GENERAL dance with AC 43--13(x) standard practices.
See Section 71--00--52 for Specific Engine Controls 6. Attachment of components that have relative motion
Operational Check, Rigging & Adjustments. should be accomplished by using bolts (screws) drilled
The correct installation of the engine control cables, at- for cotter pins, using castellated nuts, cotter pins, and
taching hardware, fuel system and propeller control large secondary washer retention devices.
components cannot be overemphasized. The use of
approved attachment procedures and techniques is re- WARNING
quired to assure proper operation and to prevent accel- Connections requiring torque fasteners should
erated wear. not exhibit any relative movement or motion be-
tween components.
76-- 10-- 00 - POWER CONTROLS
76--10--01 -- INSPECTIONS - RIGGING 76-- 11-- 00 - LUBRICATION
Typical rigging inspection procedures are outlined in
Damage and wear to the actuation components of en-
the following steps:
gine control systems can be attributed to improper (or
1. Inspect the alignment of the accessory end (engine lack of) lubrication. During scheduled and unscheduled
end) of the controls. Ensure that the accessory unit op- maintenance actions, engines are routinely cleaned
erating arm does not cause binding or bending of the using a solvent or soap solution pressure wash. This
control cable, push rod or swivel fitting. tends to remove lubrication from fuel system cables,
2. Check for freedom of movement of rod--end fittings linkages, and bushings. Therefore, it is necessary that
and clevis fittings throughout the entire range of travel these areas be lubricated after engine cleaning and
on all power controls. during scheduled maintenance as indicated in the fol-
lowing:
3. Inspect all threaded shanks for required, minimum
thread engagement. 1. Refer to control cable manufacturers data for pub-
4. Rig engine controls in to provide 1/16 -- 1/8 inch of lished instructions covering service life limits and at-
unused travel at the full throttle, full rich, or maximum tach point inspections, repair, installation and lubrica-
RPM position. This can be achieved by having the action.
cessory unit control arm against its travel stop, while
the engine control knob in the cockpit has 1/16 -- 1/8 2. Inspect pivot points of arms, levers, and linkages for
inch margin before contacting the stop. dirt, wear and rust; replace as necessary.
76--10--02 -- INSPECTIONS - REPETITIVE 3. Direct cleaning of these areas may be necessary to
In the absence of specific inspection intervals, repeti- remove contamination and/or a buildup of old grease or
tive inspections of the engine controls in the engine and oil. After cleaning with clean solvent or soap solution,
cockpit area should be conducted as part of the annual dry each area using compressed air.
and 100--hour inspections.
1. Inspect all engine controls for proper routing, securi- 4. Lubrication of control cables (including pressure lu-
ty, and signs of damage caused by chafing and heat brication) should not be attempted without a specific
distress. Improper installation of cables will significant- approved procedure. Engine controls without a specific
ly reduce their service life. approved procedure (from the component manufactur-
er) should be permanently tagged. Pressure washing
2. In addition to the Throttle, Propeller and Mixture con- or lubrication should not be performed on any control
trols, inspect the operation of each engine related con- without an approved procedure.
trol such as the, alternate air, and cowl flap controls.
Ensure that each control has full range of travel, posi- 5. Use proper tools and holding devices when instal-
tive stops (when applicable) and that no binding or ex- ling, adjusting or removing controls and fittings. Avoid
cessive play caused by worn parts or improper installa- using tongue and groove pliers or locking grip pliers.
tion is evident. Failure to use the proper tools may result in crushed or
3. Apply simulated air loads by manually pressing on bent engine control components.
cowl flaps and alternate air controls to ensure cables
are not slipping in support clamps. 6. In the absence of specific lubrication information
from the manufacturer, it is acceptable to apply LPS 2,
4. Check for looseness of throttle, mixture, and propel- Permatex “Maintain” Lubricant, or equivalent, to each
ler controls to ensure proper security of these compo- pivot point, including throttle shaft bushings. Initial lu-
nents. brication on control cable housings or moving friction
5. Replace all controls cables, link rods, and attaching areas, may be accomplished by using AeroShell Num-
hardware found damaged or worn beyond acceptable ber 5 grease, “LUBRIPLATE”, Number 630AA, or
service limits. Engine related levers, arms, link rods, equivalent.
76-- 00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
NOTE 2. Each control should permit full limit of travel and have
These lubricants function well in cold weather. the required safety or locking device in place. There
However, aircraft operating in extremely cold should be no binding of arms, linkages, control rods, or
conditions may be better off with very little or no cables. There should be freedom of movement unre-
lubricant on clean control cables, linkages and stricted by contact with other parts or components that
bushings. are located in close proximity.
3. Verify that separation between engine controls and
76-- 12-- 00 - OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION
exhaust system components is consistent with the
1. Each control should be able to maintain any neces- manufacturer’s guidelines, or are secured as far away
sary position without constant attention by the pilot or from each other as possible.
without tendency to creep due to control loads, or vibra- 4. Check fuel system flow (downstream of mixture con-
tion. trol) and adjust/re--rig as required to shut off fuel flow.
PROPELLER MIXTURE
CONTROL CONTROL PROPELLER
BRACKET CONTROL
HOUSING NUT
HEIM ROD (TYP.)
END BEARING THROTTLE
CONTROL
ALTERNATE
AIR
CONTROL
BULKHEAD FITTING,
LOCKWASHER & NUT
(TYP.)
CONNECTING
ROD
PROPELLER ALTERNATE AIR

GOVERNOR DUCT
THROTTLE MIXTURE CONTROL

CONTROL BRACKET
HEIM ROD BRACKET
END
BEARING
ENGINE
(LYCOMING)
THROTTLE BOOST
PUMP SWITCH HEIM ROD
END BEARING SM76-- 1
ENGINE CONTROL CABLE INSTALLATION

FIGURE 76-- 1
76--12--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 77
ENGINE INDICATING
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 77
ENGINE INDICATING
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
77--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
77--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
77--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
77--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
77--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
77--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
77-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 77
ENGINE INDICATING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
77--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
77--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
77--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Indicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
77--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
77--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manifold Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
77--10--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Flow Indicating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Indicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIT Instrument/Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder Head Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77--20--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
77-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
77--00--00 -- GENERAL 2. OIL PRESSURE

Displays pressure in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI).
Engine indicating instruments and their sending units, A. RED -- Lower Prohibited Range 0 to 25 PSI
transducers, probes, etc., must be operating properly B. YELLOW -- Caution 25 to 55 PSI
to prevent engine damage. C. GREEN -- Normal 55 to 95 PSI
It is recommended that all engine indicating compo- D. YELLOW -- Caution 95 to 115
nents be checked at each 100 hour or annual inspec- D. RED -- Upper Prohibited Range >115 PSI
tion to verify proper operation. Calibrated instruments 3. TACHOMETER
may be ”Tee’d” into particular systems for comparison Displays propeller speed in Revolutions per Minute
checks between them and aircraft instruments. (RPM).
A. GREEN -- Normal Flight Operating Range 2200
77--00--01 -- RANGES
to 2500 RPM
Power plant instruments operate electrically through B. RED Line -- 2500 RPM to 2650* RPM
variations in resistance caused by pressure or temper- * -- To prevent nuisance alerts during takeoffs, the
ature changes, by variations in current output caused “RPM” will not turn red or flash until the RPM exceeds
by varying engine RPM or alternator output, or by pres- 2620
sure from engine induction system. 4. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT)
S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0257, 27--0258 THRU Displays temperature of hottest cylinder in degrees
27--0317, 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327 Fahrenheit.
A. GREEN -- Normal Operating Range 250o F to
1. BUSS LOAD 500 Fo
A. RANGE -- 0 to --150% C. RED -- Upper Prohibited Range >500o F
2. OIL TEMPERATURE 5. MANIFOLD PRESSURE
A. GREEN Arc - 100o F to 245o F Displays engine power in inches of mercury (IN Hg).
B. RED Line - >245o F. A. GREEN -- Normal operating range 10” to 38” Hg
B. RED -- Upper Prohibited Range >38” Hg
3. OIL PRESSURE
6. TURBINE INLET TEMPERATURE
A. GREEN Arc - 55 to 95 PSI
A. GREEN -- 0 --1750o F
B. YELLOW Arc (COLD START)
B. RED -- Upper Prohibited Range >1750o F
- 95 PSI to 115 PSI
C. YELLOW Arc (IDLE RANGE) 7. FUEL PRESSURE
-- 25 to 55 PSI A. RED -- Lower Prohibited Range 0 to 15 PSI
D. RED Line - 25 PSI MIN. (IDLE ONLY), 115 PSI B. YELLOW -- Caution 15 to 24 PSI
MAX. C. GREEN -- Normal Operating Range 25 to 55
PSI
NOTE D. RED -- Upper Prohibited Range >55PSI
The oil pressure relief valve seat may be honed 77--10--00 -- POWER INDICATING
to improve low idle oil pressure.
77--10--01 -- TACHOMETER
4. TACHOMETER S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0257, 27--0258 THRU
A. GREEN Arc - 2200 to 2575 RPM 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327
B. RED Line - >2575 RPM
The tachometer indicating system is a fully solid state
5. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) electronic system that senses engine RPM by magneto
A. GREEN Arc - 250o F to 500o F. rotation speed. A Hall--effect sensor is installed on
B. RED Line - >500o F. magneto bleed source. This sensor is excited by 12
volts DC provided by tachometer indicator. The “Hall--
6. TURBINE INLET TEMPERATURE (TIT)
effect“ sensor incorporates a switching transistor that is
A. GREEN Arc -- 1300 to 1750o F.
actuated by north to south pole switching of main rotor
B. RED Line -- >1750o F.
magnet within magneto. The switch HIGH (+5 VDC) to
7. MANIFOLD PRESSURE switch LOW (GRD) creates a square wave frequency
A. Normal Range - 10.0 to 38.0 Inches Hg. output from 0 to 75 HERTZ which is monitored by the
B. RED Line - >38.0 Inches Hg. electronic tachometer. Because the sensor does not
rely on magneto output pulses for generating signals,
GARMIN G1000 (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 the magneto may be disabled and still maintain signal
THRU TBA) output from the hall effect sensor.
1. OIL TEMPERATURE The electronic tachometer is a micro--processor con-
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. trolled, stepper motor. The micro--processor receives
A. GREEN -- Normal 100o F to 245o F square wave frequency signal from Hall--effect sensor
C. RED -- Warning >245o F and computes relative position of pointer. The micro--
77--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
processor then generates pulsed signals to drive step- GARMIN G1000 (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
per to its precomputed position. A DC activated sole- THRU TBA)
noid engages gear train drive to locate pointer in its The tachometer indicating system senses engine RPM
respective position. Upon loss of +28 VDC input, sole- by magneto rotation speed. A Hall--effect sensor, ins-
noid deactivates and disengages drive train, thus re- talled on magneto bleed source, sends electrical sig-
turning pointer to below 500 RPM. nals to GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit. Garmin Engine
Power for tachometer indicating system is provided to Indication System (EIS) displays propeller speed in
Pin A of tachometer. Power requirement is 28 VDC with Revolutions per Minute (RPM).
a typical current drain requirement of 250 milliamps.
TACHOMETER TROUBLESHOOTING
S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0257, 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327
No permanent or intermittent indi- C/B out (IGN/CIG LTR) Reset C/B.
cator reading.
Broken wire. Check & repair wiring.
Faulty Instrument. Replace Instrument.
Pointer oscillates excessively. Connector pins/receptacles not Clean connector pins/receptacles
making good contact. w/non--conductive cleaner.
Mag. timing too wide between Retime magnetos.
mags.
Isolation resistors at mag. switch Replace resistors.
increased in resistance value.
GARMIN G1000 (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU TBA)
For Tachometer Troubleshooting refer to Garmin publications.
77--10--02 -- MANIFOLD PRESSURE
MANIFOLD PRESSURE TROUBLESHOOTING

S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0257, 27--0258 THRU 27--0317, 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327
Excessive error at existing baro- Pointer shifted. Replace instrument.
metric pressure.
Excessive error when engine is Line leaking. Tighten line connection.
running.
Sluggish or jerky pointer move- Improper damping adjustment. Adjust damping screw.
ment.
Broken or loose cover glass. Vibration or excessive pressure. Replace glass and reseal case.
Dull or discolored luminous mark- Age. Replace instrument.
ings.
Incorrect reading. Moisture or oil in line. Disconnect lines and purge with
air.
GARMIN G1000 (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328 THRU TBA)
For Manifold Pressure Troubleshooting refer to Garmin publications.
S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0257, 27--0258 THRU small oscillations may occur in flight, particularly in tur-
27--0317, 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327 bulent air.
Manifold pressure is an indication of engine power af- On Moritz Digital Engine Gauges (S/N 27--0258 thru
fected primarily by throttle setting. The instrument is 27--0317, 27--0319 thru 27--0325, 27--0327), the MP
calibrated in inches of mercury (Hg) and indicates pres- gauge may be adjusted statically by setting Kollsman
sure in induction air manifold. Manifold pressure varies Window on Altimeter to field elevation and adjusting
somewhat with pitch attitude in flight and therefore
77--10--02
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
MP to match. Refer to Figure 39--12 for location of MP Textron--Lycoming SI No. 1422A (or subsequent in-
adjustment potentiometer. struction).
CAUTION 77--20--02 -- CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE
Do not over boost the engine during any normal
S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0257, 27--0258 THRU
operation. Do not exceed 38 inches manifold
27--0317, 27--0319 THRU 27--0325, 27--0327
pressure.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) instrument pro-
GARMIN G1000 (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
vides operator with an indication of how hot or cool cyl-
THRU TBA)
inders are operating during flight. A resistance type
For Operation, Maintenance and Troubleshooting, re- temperature probe is installed in the #5 cylinder. An op-
fer to Garmin publications. tional system provides a probe in each cylinder to pro-
77--10--03 -- FUEL FLOW INDICATING SYSTEM vide monitoring of each cylinder’s temperature.
Refer to Section 73--30--00 for this data. GARMIN G1000 (S/N 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
77--20--00 -- TEMPERATURE INDICATING THRU TBA)
77--20--01 -- TIT INSTRUMENT/PROBE The cylinder head temperature (CHT) instrument pro-
vides operator with an indication of how hot or cool cyl-
The turbine inlet temperature (TIT) instrument depicts inders are operating during flight. Resistance type tem-
the temperature of the exhaust gasses as they enter perature probes send electrical signals to GEA 71
the turbocharger. This temperature is controlled by Engine/Airframe Unit. Garmin Engine Indication Sys-
power setting, RPM and the fuel air ration entering the tem (EIS) CHT displays temperature of hottest cylinder.
combustion chamber of the engine cylinders. The TIT For Operation, Maintenance and Troubleshooting, re-
should never exceed 1750o F continuous operation. fer to Garmin publications.
The TIT probe is installed at the inlet to the turbochar-
ger. 77--20--03 -- OIL TEMPERATURE
NOTE Refer to SECTION 79--30--02.
The TIT gauge and sensing probe should be re- 77--30--00 -- FUEL PRESSURE
moved and inspected for proper calibration at the
Refer to SECTION 73--20--00.
recommended 50 Hour Inspections.
The TIT probe should be re--installed to the proper 77--30--01 -- OIL PRESSURE
depth in accordance with the instructions provided in Refer to SECTION 79--30--01.
77--10--03
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
77--30--01
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 78
EXHAUST
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 78
EXHAUST
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
78--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
78--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
78--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
78--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
78-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 78
EXHAUST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
78--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
78--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
78--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust System Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
78--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Replacement Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
78-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
78--00--00 -- GENERAL 1. CLEANING

The exhaust system’s headers, exhaust pipes and To properly inspect exhaust system, components must
turbocharger interface components are manufactured be clean and free of oil, grease, etc. Clean as follows:
by Textron--Lycoming. The turbocharger is manufac- A. Spray engine exhaust system components with
tured by AiResearch (See Chapter 81). a suitable solvent (Stoddard Solvent), allow to drain
Inspections for cracks, burns, etc. are required during and wipe dry with clean cloth.
each maintenance activity and recommended before WARNING
each flight. When using Stoddard Solvent, follow directions
and warnings given by the manufacturer.
78--10--00 -- EXHAUST SYSTEM INSTALLATION
WARNING
Reference Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1422A (or Never use highly flammable solvents on engine
later revision) for inspection and installation. exhaust systems.
1. EXHAUST PIPE HEADERS TO ENGINE. WARNING
A. Place new exhaust gaskets in position on the LH Never use a wire brush or abrasives to clean ex-
& RH engine exhaust flange studs. haust systems or mark on system with lead pen-
cils. A mark with pencil lead (zinc or galvanized
B. Place RH header pipe into position on engine
tool) can be absorbed by the metal of the exhaust
cylinder exhaust flanges. Be careful during this proce-
system when heated. This causes a change in its
dure to ensure that the exhaust gaskets remain in prop-
molecular structure. This softens the metal in the
er position on each cylinder exhaust flange.
area of the mark, and can cause cracks and even-
C. Position crossover pipe into position. tual failure.
D. Place LH header pipe, fwd 2 cylinders, into posi- 2. VISUAL INSPECTION OF COMPLETE SYSTEM
tion on engine exhaust flanges. Ensure that the ex- A thorough inspection of engine exhaust system will
haust gaskets remain in proper position on each cylin- detect any breaks or cracks causing leaks which might
der exhaust flange. result in loss of efficiency, loss of engine power or en-
E. Position exhaust/turbocharger transition pipe gine compartment fire. Inspect per following proce-
assembly onto engine exhaust flange loosely. dures:
F. Position 2.0 inch V--band gasket and 2.0 inch V-- NOTE
band coupling onto LH exhaust header and transition This inspection should be conducted when en-
pipe. gine is cool.
Remove all muffler shrouds/shields to permit full visual
G. Secure all nuts on all exhaust flanges.
inspection.
H. Place exhaust manifold retaining cable in posi- A. LOOK FOR LEAKS -- Examine surfaces adja-
tion and attach to clamp adjacent to center ring of cent to exhaust system components for signs of ex-
crossover pipe. Adjust slack out of retaining cable so haust soot. Look for gray, red or black gas stains at
crossover pipe is held securely. Cabin heat shroud will welds, clamps, flanges, etc. Inspect exhaust system for
be placed into position and secured. chaffing by cowling, engine mount, cables or any air-
I. Position turbocharger onto mounting pad of ex- frame components.
haust transition pipe. Secure bolts and nuts of turbo- Inspect exhaust stacks for burned areas, cracks and
charger/transition pipe mount. looseness.
J. Position bypass valve on to transition pipe with B. LOOSE CONNECTIONS -- Inspect exhaust
2.25 inch V--band gasket and 2.25 inch V--band clamp. clamps for cracks, looseness and proper security.
K. Position bypass pipe onto bypass valve at same NOTE
time tailpipe is attached to turbocharger. During inspection, particular attention should be
L. Secure tailpipe V--band clamp and bypass pipe. given to condition and security of flanges, spot
welds, slip joints, and welded areas.
M. Attach oil lines to bypass valve from turbochar-
C. INTERNAL EROSION -- Examine bends and
ger controller, wastegate, etc. and oil and drain lines to
low spots for thinning or pitting.
turbocharger. Secure all connections.
D. STANDOFFS (PINS) AND HEAT TRANSFER
N. Position and secure TIT probe (and any other FINS -- Look for missing or damaged heat transfer pins
temperature probe connections, if installed). or fins. Look for holes at these locations.
78--30--00 -- EXHAUST SYSTEM SERVICING E. METAL FATIGUE -- Inspect all surfaces for bulg-
CAUTION ing and distortion, and for groups of small cracks.
A repetitive 50 hour inspection is recommended CAUTION
for exhaust system and TIT probe and gauge. DO NOT mark any surface with lead pencils or
Ref. Lycoming SI 1422A (or later revision). any carbon--containing markers.
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
F. BAFFLE BREAKDOWN -- Look inside muffler 78--40--00 -- PERIODIC REPLACEMENT COM-

for broken baffles or tubes. These can restrict the out- PONENTS
let, causing power loss.
It is recommended that all exhaust system pipes,
G. HIDDEN DAMAGE -- Carefully inspect all inter- clamps and miscellaneous mounting hardware be re-
nal surfaces that lie hidden under external gussets, placed at engine overhaul time (2000 Hours).
stiffeners, etc. (A borescope is recommended)
Tailpipe V--band clamps should be replaced after two
H. INSTALLATION TIPS -- Install only correct (2) removals or at above time frames (ref. Chapter
parts. 81--30--01).
DO NOT FORCE FIT any component. Properly align
connecting components. However, thorough inspection of all components
should be made any time exhaust system is removed
Do not reuse gaskets. from engine for component replacement. The inspec-
Insure that attach bolts are properly torqued. Exhaust tion should be made in the interest of preventive main-
flange stud nuts are to be torqued to 100--110 inch lbs. tenance.
78--40--00 78--00--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 79
OIL
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 79
OIL
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
79--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
79-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 79
OIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
79--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--30--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
79--50--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
79-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
79--00--00 -- GENERAL 79--2). Pressure variations change the resistance with-

The oil system is a wet sump, pressure type system. in the transducer and this signal drives the oil pressure
The engine sump has an 10 quart (U.S.) capacity. Ser- gauge located within the cluster gauge (S/N: 27--0001
vicing of the oil quantity is provided through an access THRU 27--0257).
door located on top of engine cowling. MORITZ GAUGES (S/N: 27--0258 THRU 27--0317,
Aircraft are delivered with proper ashless dispersant oil 27--0319, 27--0325, & 27--0327)
(MIL--L--22851 or SAE J1899). This oil should be Refer to Figure 39--12 for Oil Pressure adjustment loca-
changed at 25 hours or when oil consumption has station.
bilized. The replacement oil should conform to TEX- 1. Tee in calibrated oil pressure gauge upstream of
TRON--Lycoming Specifications SI 1014(*). Routine oil transducer.
change interval is 100 hours, however if operating in a
2. Adjust Z (zero) and S (span) of Moritz gauge face
dusty environment the interval should be more often.
to concur with value on calibrated gauge.
(* current or subsequent revision)
3. Disconnect calibrated oil pressure gauge and
NOTE check for leaks.
A new, remanufactured or newly overhauled en-
GARMIN G1000 (S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326, 27--0328
gine should have oil and filter changed at 25 and
THRU 27--TBA)
50 hours of operation, then begin 100 hour oil
change interval. Pressure variations change resistance within transduc-
NOTE er and this signal interfaces with the Garmin G1000 to
Refer to Section 5--20--07 for approved oil prod- indicate oil pressure. Refer to Garmin System Mainte-
ucts. nance Manual for system description, service and trou-
bleshooting instructions.
79--00--01 -- OIL FILTER REMOVAL
79--30--02 -- OIL TEMPERATURE
The engine oil filter should be replaced each 50 hours
and at every oil change (Figure 79--1). The oil temperature gauge is an electric unit receiving
its signal from a temperature bulb in the engine case.
1. Remove top and bottom cowling (see Section The probe resistance changes as oil temperature
71--10--00). changes and this varies readout on analog and digital
2. Cut and remove safety wire on filter. oil temperature gauges or Garmin G1000 display.
3. Loosen the spin off oil filter and remove. 79--40--00 -- TRANSDUCER TEST PROCEDURES
79--00--02 -- OIL FILTER INSTALLATION CAUTION
1. Position new filter on adapter. This unit is for troubleshooting only. DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO CALIBRATE WITH THIS UNIT.
2. Tighten per instructions on filter.
The Transducer Test Box, P/N GSE 030036, can be
3. Safety wire filter. used to simulate oil pressure in the Mooney Model
4. Perform leak check prior to flight. M20M.
5. Reinstall lower and upper cowling (see Section NOTE
71--11--00). An appropriate wiring adapter must be used on
GSE 030036 Transducer Test Box when Kulite or
6. Connect and secure electrical and mechanical
Patriot transducers are installed. Contact MAC
connections for cowling installation.
Service Parts for status of these adapters.
79--20--00 -- DISTRIBUTION
To use unit for troubleshooting, the box is connected to
The oil system on the TI0 540--AF1A engine is internal aircraft harness in engine compartment, by disconnect-
within engine (See Fig. 79--2) except for externally ing appropriate transducer electrical connector and
routed exhaust valve guide oil lines, turbocharger lu- connecting test box in its place.
brication, oil cooler routing, and oil pressure transducer
Push aircraft Master Switch -- ON (insure engine gauge
plumbing. The turbocharger portion of the system con-
circuit breakers are in) and adjust box to approximate
tains pressure hoses, fittings and check valves to route
pressure desired. The engine gauge should read this
oil through the turbocharger back to the engine case for
approximate pressure.
cooling (refer to Figures 79--1, 79--3 and 79--4). The
--AF1B engine has a Tee fitting to route a pressure hose If pressure reading is correct:
to each cylinder head to oil cool the valve guides. 1. Verify Oil pressure to transducer with mechanical
79--30--00 -- INDICATING pressure gauge.
79--30--01 -- OIL PRESSURE A. If correct, probable failure is transducer.
Oil pressure indicating is provided through a pressure B. If incorrect, troubleshoot oil system.
transducer plumbed into the oil system (refer to Figure If pressure reads incorrectly, zero or pegged condition:
79--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
1. Sigma--Tek gauge -- S/N: 27--0001 THRU 3. GARMIN G1000 -- S/N: 27--0318, 27--0326,
27--0257. 27--0328 THRU 27--TBA
2. Moritz gauge -- S/N: 27--258 THRU 27--0317, Analog data is supplied from the engine/airframe trans-
27--0319, 27--0325, & 27--0327 ducers to the GEA71 Engine/Airframe Unit where it is
converted to a digital signal. The digital information is
A. Check wiring for continuity between engine then sent through primary and back--up data paths to
compartment connector and cluster. the cockpit display.
B. If wiring is correct, probable failure is in gauge Refer to the Garmin G1000 service literature for trou-
module or cluster. bleshooting.
OIL TEMP.
TRANSDUCER
OIL
FILTER
VACUUM
PUMP *
OIL PRESS.
LINE TO
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE
OIL PRESS.
TRANSDUCER
DETAIL A * PRE-GARMIN G1000 AIRCRAFT
FWD
DETAIL
“A”
TOP VIEW
SMM79--4
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

FIGURE 79--1
79--40--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
SPLASH OIL TO ROCKER

ARMS, VALVE STEMS, ETC. GRAVITY OIL THRU
ROCKER ARM SHROUD TUBES
BUSHINGS
PROP DRAIN OIL TO SUMP
GOV. THRU OIL DRAIN TUBES
PROP. GOV. OIL

USE OIL TRANSFER
COVER WHEN NOT GOVERNOR
USING GOVERNOR IDLER SHAFT PUSH RODS
TAPPETS
LEFT BANK
PUSH ROD SOCKETS CRANKCASE OIL HEADER--LEFT
SPLASH OIL TO GOV. DRAIN OIL TO SUMP
PISTONS, PISTON RETURN OIL
PINS, CAMS, ETC. TO SUMP CRANKPIN
SPLASH OIL TO PISTONS, PISTON PINS, CAMS, ETC.
PRESSURE
OIL
CRANKPIN
CAMSHAFT BRG.
NOS. 2, 3, & 4
CRANKPINS
TO PROP
HUB CAMSHAFT
BRG. NO. 1 SPLASH PISTON
NO. 2 MAIN NO. 3 MAIN NO. 4 MAINOIL TO
BEARING BEARING BEARING SQUIRTS
TACH.
DRIVE
CRANKCASE OIL HEADER--RIGHT
NO. 1 MAIN
BEARING ASSY. PUSH ROD SOCKETS TAPPETS
RIGHT BANK
HYD. PUMP VACUUM PUMP
AND DRIVE AND DRIVE
PUSH RODS
ROCKER ARM
BUSHINGS
”AN” FUEL PUMP
AND DRIVE
SPLASH OIL TO ROCKER OIL RELIEF

GRAVITY OIL THRU
ARMS, VALVE STEMS, ETC. VALVE
SHROUD TUBES
OIL
DRAIN OIL TO SUMP FILTER
THRU OIL DRAIN TUBES
OIL PRESSURE LINE

TO EACH CYLINDER DRAIN OIL
HEAD TO COOL VALVE
SPRING LOADED
OIL OIL COOLER
PUMP BY--PASS VALVE THERMOSTATIC
BY--PASS VALVE TURBO
BEARING
OIL
TURBO DRAIN TANK

WITH VENT
TO
SUCTION TURBOCHARGER
SCREEN CONTROLS
DRAIN OIL
OIL
OIL SUMP COOLER
ENGINE CASE SCAVENGE PUMP
M79--1
LUBRICATION DIAGRAM
FIGURE 79--2
79--40--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
TURBOCHARGER
HIGH PRESSURE OIL

PUMP
(ACCESSORY HSG.)
WASTE
GATE
OUT
IN
MAG.ADPT.
OIL
TANK
INJ.
INLET
HSG.
DENSITY
CONTROLLER
OUT
SCAVENGE DIFFERENTIAL
CONTROLLER IN
PUMP
(ACCESS. HSG.)
PRESS
IN
DUMPS DIRECTLY
INTO ENGINE OUT
LEGEND
PRESSURE
SCAVENGE (LOW PRESSURE)
VENT SMM79--2
TURBOCHARGER OIL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

FIGURE 79--3
79--40--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
HIGH PRESSURE
(FROM ENGINE OIL PUMP)
“CONTROL LINE”
LEADS TO DENSITY
CONTROLLER, DIFFERENTIAL
CONTROLLER
ACTUATOR DRAIN/VENT
LINE
(LEADS TO ENGINE
CRANKCASE & AIR/OIL
SEPARATOR)
WASTEGATE
CONTROLLER/ACTUATOR
OR
“EXHAUST BYPASS
VALVE ASSEMBLY”
SMM79--3
WASTEGATE CONTROLLER/ACTUATOR
FIGURE 79--4
79--50--00 -- OIL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

Troubleshooting chart is provided as a guide. Review probable causes, compare other troubleshooting charts for
inter--related symptoms. Items are not necessarily presented in order of probability.

Low Oil Pressure Insufficient oil Fill oil sump to proper level.
Pressure relief is out of adjustment Externally adjustable type--In-
crease oil pressure by turning ad-
justing screw clockwise, and de-
crease by turning counter--clock-
wise.
Solid tower type--Add 1/4 inch
standard flat washers to increase
oil pressure; remove washers to
decrease oil pressure. On short
towers, a maximum of three wash-
ers may be used. On tall towers, a
maximum of nine washers may be
used.
Dirt or metal chips under oil pres- Remove, disassemble, and clean.
sure relief valve
79--50--00
Page 9
Rev Date Date 2006
Damaged oil pressure relief seat Replace or repair.

High oil temperature Inspect the following areas for a
cause:
1) proper oil level,
2) proper grade and weight of oil,
3) thermostatic by--pass valve
working properly and seating
squarely,
4) plugged or partially plugged oil
cooler lines or oil cooler,
5) excessive blowby,
6) air duct to cooler blocked or
cooler partially covered, and
7) defective temperature gauge
Restriction at inlet side of oil pump Remove and clean oil suction
screen and oil passage to inlet side
of oil pump.
Excessive internal spill--off of oil Check the following areas for ex-
cessive oil flow, and repair or re-
place
1) loose or missing plugs in oil gal-
ley,
2) piston cooling squirts blocked
open (Usually accompanied by low
oil pressure at low or idle RPM),
3) excessive bearing clearance,
and
4) cracked crankcase in area of oil
galley.
Relocated oil pressure takeoff Use only the approved oil pressure
point on the engine takeoff point. Note: If the oil pres-
sure takeoff point on the engine is
moved closer to the oil pump dis-
charge, a rise in oil pressure will be
noted.
Oil pressure relief seat in crank- Remove and replace seat.
case cocked. (Could be cage type
or flat type)
79--50--00
Page 10
Date 2006 Rev Date
High Oil Temperature Insufficient oil supply Check oil level at regular intervals
and maintain proper level.
Insufficient cooling air Verify the integrity of the air inlet
and outlet ducting to the oil cooler.
Repair or replace parts in accor-
dance with the airframe manufac-
turer’s manual as necessary.
Improper grade of oil Use only grade and weight of oil
specified for the engine. Consult
TEXTRON--Lycoming Service In-
struction 1014( ) and the engine
operator’s manual for seasonal vis-
cosity recommendations.
Oil cooler or oil cooler lines are Remove oil cooler and oil cooler
plugged or partially plugged lines and flush out in accordance
with airframe manufacturer’s
manual.
Thermostatic bypass valve is not Replace thermostatic bypass
operating properly or seating valve. Note: Also replace filter
squarely base if valve is not seating proper-
ly.
Excessive blow--by Perform a differential compression
check. Do boroscope inspection to
identify the source of the blow--by.
Perform top overhaul to correct
problems associated with broken,
worn, or stuck rings.
Defective oil temperature gauge Install master oil temperature
gauge and run engine to compare
gauges. Replace faulty gauge.
79--50--00
Page 11
Rev Date Date 2006
High Oil Consumption Improper grade of oil Refer to Service Instruction 1014
and the engine operator’s hand-
book for approved lubricating oils
and for seasonal viscosity recom-
mendations.
Failure of new rings to properly Climb to cruise altitude at full pow-
seat er and operate at 75% power for
break--in. Also use a high cruise
power setting for break--in.
Failed or failing bearings Excessive bearing wear may be
determined by the presence of
metal in the oil suction screen or oil
filter. Disassemble engine for in-
spection and replacement of bear-
ings.
Incorrectly installed piston rings, Perform a differential compression
worn piston rings, glazed or exces- check. Do boroscope inspection
sively worn cylinder barrels (air leaking past rings can be de-
tected by listening for a hissing
sound in the crankcase at the
breather entrance). Remove cylin-
ders and replace piston rings with
new ones and deglaze cylinder
barrels.
Worn valve guides Remove cylinders from engine and
take out valves. Measure guides
for wear. Replace guides worn out
of limits. Comply with latest revi-
sion of TEXTRON--Lycoming Ser-
vice Bulletin 388B.
Excessive oil leaks Inspect external area of engine for
leaks and repair same.
Oil being siphoned from engine in Verify the oil filter cap is secure
flight and that the oil access door closes
properly. Verify that the breather
hose is cut properly and located to
prevent siphoning.
Oil level too high Do not fill above the maximum oil
sump capacity
Expander in oil control ring improp- If using ring with corrugated type
erly installed or lost its tension expander, ensure ends of expand-
er are butted together, not over-
lapped. If using ring with spiral
wound type expander, improper
assembly is not likely.
Turbocharged engines--Oil passing Service, overhaul, or replace turbo-
through turbocharger seals charger as necessary. Note: In-
spect the crankcase breather line
to be sure that it is not plugged.
Resulting high crankcase pressure
would not allow oil to return and
would eventually push the oil past
the turbocharger seals into the
turbocharger compressor and tur-
bine section.
79--50--00
Page 12
Date 2006 Rev Date
High Oil Pressure Oil pressure improperly adjusted Adjust oil pressure to within mini-
mum and maximum range speci-
fied in the appropriate operator’s
manual.
Externally adjustable type--In-
crease oil pressure by turning ad-
justing screw clockwise, and de-
crease by turning counter--clock-
wise.
Solid tower type--Add 1/4 inch
standard flat washers to increase
oil pressure; remove washers to
decrease oil pressure. On short
towers, a maximum of three wash-
ers may be used. On tall towers, a
maximum of nine washers may be
used.
Improper weight of oil used Use the recommended viscosity of
oil for the ambient temperature.
Refer to the engine operator’s
manual.
Oil passage plugged from pressure Remove pressure relief valve from
relief valve to sump the engine and run a soft copper
wire down through the oil passage
to the sump to clear blockage.
Note: If blockage persists remove
sump and clear passage.
Relocated oil pressure takeoff Use only the approved oil pressure
point on the engine takeoff point. Note: If the oil pres-
sure takeoff point on the engine is
moved closer to the oil pump dis-
charge, a rise in oil pressure will be
noted.
Oil temperature is too cold Allow oil temperature to increase
before increasing throttle.
79--50--00
Page 13
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
79--50--00
Page 14
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 80
STARTING
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 80
STARTING
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
80--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
80--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
80--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
80--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
80-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 80
STARTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
80--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80--00--04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80--00--05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cranking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
80-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
80--00--00 -- GENERAL 80--00--04 -- INSTALLATION

The airplane is equipped with a 24 volt starter supplied 1. Before installation, clean any rust corrosion or dirt
with engine package. The starter is located on engine from mounting surface of starter motor.
case at front of engine. 2. Check all ground straps connections for tightness.
When ignition switch is placed in “START” position, cur- 3. Position starter on mounting pad.
rent is supplied through main bus to energize starter 4. Install attaching nuts and washers.
solenoid which in turn connects battery to starter.
5. Torque nuts 220.0 to 260.0 inch lbs.
80--00--01 -- TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Connect electrical wiring to starter terminals.
1. Refer to Section 24--39--04. 7. Install cowling.
80--00--02 -- MAINTENANCE 80--00--05 -- BRUSHES
1. Inspect and service starter per TEXTRON--Lyco- Starter brushes should slide freely in holder and make
ming Service and Information and Overhaul Manual. full contact on commutator. Brushes should be re-
placed when they have worn to 1/4 inch in length. Brush
2. Lubrication -- No lubrication is required on starter tension should be 32 to 40 ounces as measured with
motor except at overhaul. spring scale hooked under brush spring and pulled in
CAUTION straight line opposite force exerted by spring. Read ten-
Do not clean starter in any degreasing tank or sion just as spring leaves brush.
grease dissolving solvents. Avoid excessive lu- 80--10--00 -- CRANKING
brication. Use only kerosene or Varsol.
The starter relay is located on the cabin side of firewall.
80--00--03 -- REMOVAL The solenoid is energized by placing ignition/magneto
switch in “START” position. Battery current is then di-
1. Remove upper and lower cowling (See Section
rected to starter. The aircraft are equipped with a
71--10).
“START POWER” annunciator light. This light illumi-
2. Disconnect electrical wiring from starter terminals. nates “RED” when starter switch is in start position or
when starter switch or starter solenoid has malfunc-
3. Remove nut and washer from studs on adapter
tioned and starter is engaged while engine is running.
mounting pad.
This malfunction should be corrected before engine is
4. Remove starter from adapter. started again.
80--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
80--10--00
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 81
TURBINES
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 81
TURBINES
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
81--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
81--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
81--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
81--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
81--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
81--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--06
81-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 81
TURBINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
81--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
81--10--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbocharger Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
81--10--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbocharger Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
81--10--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate Air System -- Turbocharger Operation . . . 6
81--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbocharger Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
81--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust System Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
81--30--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Multi--Segment “V” Band Clamp . . . . . . . 7
81--40--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Replacement Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
81-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
81--00--00 -- GENERAL 81--10--00 -- TURBOCHARGER CONTROL

TURBOCHARGER OPERATION 81--10--01 -- TURBOCHARGER CONTROL SYS-
TEM (AIRESEARCH)
The turbocharger increases the power output and effi-
The turbocharger output is controlled through coordi-
ciency of the engine by supplying compressed air to the
nated action of the Density/Differential Pressure Con-
intake manifold. The engine exhaust is routed to the
troller system when set up properly.
turbine wheel of the turbocharger assembly. The
amount of exhaust gas passing over the turbine wheel CAUTION
is controlled by a waste gate assembly. Exhaust gas It is mandatory that the turbocharger system be
passing over the turbine wheel causes the compressor, properly adjusted prior to operation. See Chapter
mounted on the same shaft, to rotate. Ambient ram air, 71--00--52 for engine set up procedures.
supplied through an air intake on the lower cowling, is TURBOCHARGER OVERBOOST PROTECTION
filtered and routed to the compressor where it is com-
pressed and delivered to the engine. As engine power The engine incorporates overboost protection within
is increased, the flow of exhaust over the turbine wheel the pressure controller. See Chapter 71--00--52.
also increases, resulting in a proportionate increase in Refer to Airesearch and TEXTRON--Lycoming Service
the speed of the rotating assemblies and turbocharger and Maintenance Manuals for detailed maintenance
output. data.
OIL RETURN COMPRESSOR

TO CRANKCASE DISCHARGE AIR
EXHAUST MANIFOLD DECK PRESSURE
&
THROTTLE TEMPERATURE
EXHAUST BYPASS
VALVE ASSEMBLY
FUEL
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
DENSITY CONTROL
CONTROLLER
ENGINE
INLET MANIFOLD OIL
PRESSURE PRESSURE OIL
INLET IN
ENGINE FILTERED
AIR OIL RETURN TO
CRANKCASE
EXHAUST GAS
EXHAUST GAS
EXHAUST GAS USED DISCHARGE
TO DRIVE TURBINE
EXHAUST GAS TURBOCHARGER
FROM TURBINE FILTER
AIR INTAKE AIR INLET
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
INLET MANIFOLD EXHAUST BYPASS VALVE
PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE
OIL INLET AT EXHAUST BYPASS
VALVE ASSEMBLY
OIL OUTLET AT TURBOCHARGER AND DENSITY/DIFFERENTIAL
EXHAUST BYPASS CONTROL SYSTEM
VALVE ASSEMBLY SMM81--1
TURBOCHARGER SCHEMATIC
FIGURE 81--1
81--00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2006
81--10--02 -- ALTERNATE AIR SYSTEM -- TURBO- less power will be available at normal throttle settings.
CHARGER OPERATION NOTE
The turbocharger system will continue to operate when Inspection of the induction system and turbo-
the primary air source is obstructed. An engine auto- charger assembly should be conducted after any
matic alternate air system is provided to allow air from obstruction of the primary air source prior to the
inside the cowling to pass through the compressor and next engine operation.
into the engine. This air is warmer than primary air so
81--20--00 -- TURBOCHARGER TROUBLESHOOTING

Excessive noise or vibration. Improper bearing lubrication. Supply required oil pressure. Clean
or replace oil line. If trouble contin-
ues, remove turbocharger and re-
turn to approved overhaul station
for overhaul or repair.
Leak in engine intake or exhaust Tighten loose connections, or re-
manifold. place manifold gaskets as neces-
sary.
Engine will not deliver rated power. Clogged manifold system. Clean all ducting.
Foreign material lodged in com- Remove turbocharger and return to
pressor impeller or turbine. approved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Excessive dirt buildup in compres- Service engine induction air filter
sor. and check for leakage. Remove
turbocharger and return to ap-
proved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Leak in engine intake of exhaust Tighten loose connections, or re-
manifold. place manifold gaskets as neces-
sary.
Rotating assembly bearing seizure. Remove turbocharger and return to
approved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Compressor blades chipped, bent Remove turbocharger and return to
or missing. approved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Impeller binding or frozen. Remove turbocharger and return to
approved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Induction or exhaust system leaks. Perform leak checks.
Compressor blades chipped, bent Remove turbocharger and return to
or missing. approved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Engine surges or smokes. Oil leaking into turbine wheel Remove turbocharger and return to
chamber. approved overhaul station for over-
haul or repair.
Clogged breather. Check breather for restriction to air
flow.
81--10--02
Page 6
Date 2006 Rev Date
81--30--00 -- EXHAUST SYSTEM SERVICING 81--40--00 -- PERIODIC REPLACEMENT COM-

PONENTS
1. Refer to Chapter 78--30--00
It is recommended that all exhaust system pipes, by--
2. VISUAL INSPECTION OF COMPLETE SYSTEM pass pipe, clamps and miscellaneous mounting hard-
A thorough inspection of the engine exhaust sys- ware be replaced at engine overhaul time (2000
tem will detect any breaks or cracks causing leaks Hours).
which might result in the loss of optimum turbocharger However, the V--band clamp holding the tailpipe should
efficiency and engine power. Inspect exhaust system be replaced after it has been loosened and re--torqued
per Chapter 78--30--00. two (2) times. Each third (3rd) time it should have a new
clamp installed.
81--30--01 -- INSPECTION “V” BAND CLAMP
A thorough inspection of all components should be
1. Using crocus cloth, clean outer band of the multi- made any time the exhaust system is removed from the
segment “V” band clamp (Textron-Lycoming P/N: engine for component replacement. The inspection
40D23255--340M or Aeroquip P/N: NH1009399--10). should be made in the interest of preventive mainte-
Pay particular attention to the “Hi-Lok” pin areas on the nance.
clamp.
2. With clamp in place and properly torqued:
A. Inspect outer band in the area of the “Hi-Lok” pin
areas for cracks (See Figure 81--2). If cracks or loose
pins are found, replace clamp with new multi--segment
“V” band clamp.
NOTE “HI-LOK”
PINS
When replacement is required, install new “V”
band clamp over the exhaust flanges and torque
as shown below.
TORQUE PROCEDURES
M81--2
Torque V--Band coupling to 40 Lb.--In. Tap coupling
lightly around circumference with a non--metallic ham-
mer to equalize band tension. Re--torque coupling to 60 “V” BAND CLAMP SPOT WELD AREA CHECK
Lb.--In. and tap band again. Re--torque to a final value FIGURE 81--2
of 55 to 65 Lb.--In. Safety wire all “V” band clamps.
81--30--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
81--40--00
Page 8
Date 2006 Rev Date
CHAPTER 91
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

AND SCHEMATICS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 91
AND SCHEMATICS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
91--Effectivity/Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 BLANK ................................. 2--06

91--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 thru 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 thru 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--20--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 thru 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
91-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 91
AND SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
91--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
91--00--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Systems Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
91--00--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
91--00--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations - Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
91--20--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical System Hardware Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
91--20--01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27--0001 thru 27--0052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27--0053 thru 27--0107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
91--20--02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27--0001, 27--0108 thru 27--0239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
91--20--03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27--0240 thru 27--TBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
91--30--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical System Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
91-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2006
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
M20M ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS MANUAL
91--00--00 -- GENERAL 5. All terminals must be preinsulated or must be insu-

lated with ”Ampsulation” (or equivalent).
The electrical system hardware lists and related sche-
matics are sequenced in this section by serial number 6. Wires without dash numbers are furnished by the
effectivity. The chapter is divided into the following sec- manufacturer and are included with the equipment.
tions: 7. The symbol ”-- --” indicates a knife disconnect.
-- Electrical Systems Schematic Notes 8. Optional equipment may be installed as required.
9. Wires denoted by === === === symbols to be
-- Wiring Identification System
twisted counter clockwise with a minimum of three (3)
-- Electrical System Hardware Charts (By Effectivity) wraps per foot.
-- Electrical Schematics (By Effectivity) 10. ”F” denotes ground through frame (no wires).
91--00--01 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SCHEMAT- 11. All knife disconnect splices to be insulated with
ICS NOTES PVC105 and securely string tied with airtex no. 417
cord.
1. All electrical wiring, assemblies, and installations
must be in accord with FAR 43 and AC 43.13--1( ). 12. All wire sizes are minimum sizes acceptable.
2. All splices must be ”AMP” disconnect or equivalent. 13. Use 913127 bus bars as necessary for various con-
figuration changes and manufacture interconnecting
3. All circuit breakers are trip--free. bus using no. 2170 tubular braid covered with
4. All terminals are Spec. MS25036 (or equivalent or PVC105/5/16” (both Alpha Wire Co.) and terminated
they must be soldered.) with AMP terminals of appropriate sizes.
PVC 105/ 5/16”

35108 Terminal
327218 Ampsulation 2170 Tubular
Braid
321298 Terminal
R91--1
INTERCONNECTING BUSS EXAMPLE

FIGURE 91--1
91--00--02 -- WIRING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
The Mooney Aircraft Corporation wiring/equipment system originally depicted a typical Wire Identification Number
as M--PA03A18. This 9--character number, applicable to 800310 drawing only, is composed of five functional
groups, each of which communicates certain specific information. These functional groups are as follows:
M-- -- first letter and (--) depict -- Aircraft Type (M20M)

PA -- first two letters -- Circuit Function
03 -- second set of numerals -- Wire Sequence
A -- single letter in the series -- Configuration
18 -- last two numerals in the series -- Wire Size
CODE/COMPONENT or SYSTEM (CIRCUIT FUNCTION) -- 800310 DRAWING
CB/Defroster Blower DA/Instruments -- Ammeter
CC/Cowl Flaps DB/Instruments -- Turn Coordinator
CF/Wing Flaps -- Electric DC/Instruments -- Cylinder Head Temperature
CR/Trim -- Rudder DD/Instruments -- Outside Air Temperature
CT/Trim -- Stabilizer DE/Instruments -- Carburetor Air Temperature
CV/Stand--by Vacuum DF/Instruments -- Fuel Quantity
DG/Instruments -- Cluster Gauge
91--00--00
Page 3
Rev Date Date FEB 2006
DH/Instruments -- Oil Temperature MC/Miscellaneous -- Cigar Lighter

DJ/Instruments -- Oil Pressure MD/Miscellaneous -- Clock Light
DK/Instruments -- Fuel Pressure ME/Miscellaneous -- Electric Clock
DL/Instruments -- Tachometer MIC/Miscellaneous -- Microphone
DM/Instruments -- Hour Meter MM/Miscellaneous -- Marker Beacon
DN/Instruments -- Pressurization MP/Miscellaneous -- Propeller De--Ice
DP/Instruments -- Pitot Heat
DR/Instruments -- Turbine Inlet Temperature NF/Fuel -- Fuel Pump
DS/Instruments -- Compressor Discharge Tempera- NP/Fuel -- Primer
ture
DT/Instruments -- Exhaust Gas Temperature PA/Power -- Alternator (output & Control)
DU/Instruments -- Manifold Pressure PB/Power -- Battery (Output & Control)
DV/Instruments -- Fuel Flow PG/Power -- Generator (Output & Control)
DW/instruments -- VSI PS/Power -- Starter (Input & Control)
EG/Electric Gear -- Gear Controls RB/Radio Blower

EL/Lighting -- Electroluminescence
ELT/Emergency Locator Transmitter SB/Speed Brake
FON/Phones SPK/Speaker
JM/Ignition -- Magneto VB/Vent Air Blower
LB/Lighting -- Rotating Beacon (Anticollision Light) WA/Warning System -- Alternator -- Voltage Warning
LC/Lighting -- Cabin Lights WB/Warning -- Engine Boost
LL/Lighting -- Landing Lights WE/Warning System -- Gear Position Warning
LN/Lighting -- Navigation Lights WF/Warning System -- Fuel Pressure
LP/Lighting -- Instrument & Placard Lights WL/Warning System -- Landing Light
LR/Lighting -- Recognition Lights WN/Warning System -- Pressurization
LS/Lighting -- Instrument & Strobe Lights WS/Warning System -- Stall Warning
LT/Lighting -- Taxi Lights WT/Warning System -- Press--to--Test
WV/Warning System -- Vacuum Warning
MA/Miscellaneous -- Auxiliary Power Plug WW/Warning System -- Alternate Air
MB/Miscellaneous -- Radio Circuits WD/Warning System -- Starter Power
The Mooney Aircraft Corporation wiring/equipments identification system used in current production aircraft de-
letes the Model Number annotation. The purpose of this is to standardize the identification of a system function/
component for all model of aircraft. The functional groups are basically the same as earlier identification num-
bers.
These new functional groups apply to master schematic drawing 800304. The new functional groups are as follows:
CR -- First two/three letters -- Circuit Function
04 -- First set of numerals -- Wire Sequence
A -- Single letter in series -- Configuration
20 -- Last two numerals in series -- Wire Size
CODE/COMPONENT or SYSTEM (CIRCUIT FUNCTION) -- 800304 SCHEMATIC DRAWING
ACT/SWITCH ACTUATOR DB/TURN COORDINATOR
BS/RELAY BASE DC/CHT
BUS/BUSS BARS DD/OAT
C/CAPACITORS DF/FUEL QUANTITY
CB/DEFROSTER BLOWER DG/ENGINE INSTRUMENTS
CC/COWL FLAPS, ELECTRIC DH/OIL TEMPERATURE
CF/WING FLAPS DJ/OIL PRESSURE
CL/CLAMPS DK/FUEL PRESSURE
CM/CURRENT MONITOR DL/ELECTRIC TACHOMETER
CR/RUDDER TRIM DM/HOUR METER
CT/STABILIZER TRIM DP/PITOT HEAT
CV/STANDBY VACUUM DR/TIT
D/DIODES DT/EGT
DA/AMMETER
91--00--02
Page 4
Date FEB 2006 Rev Date
DV/FUEL FLOW MC/CIGAR LIGHTER

DG/LANDING. GEAR, ELEC. ME/CLOCK
ELT/ELT MI/MICROPHONE
F/FUSES MP/PROPELLER DE--ICE
FH/FUSEHOLDER NF/BOOST PUMP
FON/PHONE PA/ALTERNATOR POWER
JM/IGNITION, MAGNETO PB/BATTERY POWER
L/LIGHT BULBS PL/PLUGS, ELECTRICAL
LB/BEACON PS/START POWER
LENS/ANNUNCIATOR LENS R/RESISTORS
LH/LAMP HOLDER RB/RADIO BLOWER
LL/LANDING LIGHTS RC/RECEPTACLES, ELECTRICAL
LN/NAVIGATION LIGHTS RL/RELAYS
LP/PANEL LIGHTS SB/SPEEDBRAKE
LR/RECOGNITION LIGHTS SPKR/SPEAKER
LS/STROBE LIGHTS SW/SWITCHES
LT/TAXI LIGHTS VR/VARISTOR
MA/AUXILIARY POWER WS/STALL WARNING
MB/AVIONICS MASTER WT/ANNUNCIATOR WARNING
CODE/COMPONENT OR SYSTEM CIRCUIT FUNCTION LEGEND -- 800383/800413 SCHEMATIC DRAWING
AC -- AIR CONDITIONER DV -- INSTRUMENTS -- FUEL FLOW
AH -- ARTIFICIAL HORIZON DW -- INSTRUMENTS -- ENGINE VACUUM
AT -- ACTUATOR, SWITCH
AV -- AVIONICS EG -- GEAR, ELECTRIC
EL -- ELECTROLUMINESCENCE
BR -- CIRCUIT BREAKERS ET -- EMERGENCY LOCATOR BEACON
BS -- RELAY BASE
BU -- BUS BARS FA -- ALT--EMER (FRENCH)
FH -- FUSE HOLDERS
CA -- CAPACITORS FN -- PHONES
CB -- DEFROSTER BLOWER FU -- FUSES
CC -- COWL FLAPS FW -- ALT--EMER FIELD (FRENCH)
CD -- PC DUMP
CF -- WING FLAPS GD -- GROUND
CL -- CLAMPS
CR -- RUDDER TRIM HS -- HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR
CT -- ELEVATOR TRIM
CV -- STAND--BY VACUUM JE -- IGNITION, ELECTRONIC
JM -- IGNITION, MAGNETO
DA -- INSTRUMENTS -- AMMETER JV -- IGNITION, VIBRATOR
DB -- INSTRUMENTS -- TURN COORDINATOR
DC -- INSTRUMENTS -- CYLINDER HEAD TEMP. LA -- LIGHT BULBS
DD -- INSTRUMENTS -- OUTSIDE AIR TEMP. LB -- BEACON, ROTATING
DE -- INSTRUMENTS -- CARBURETOR AIR TEMP. LC -- LIGHT, CABIN
DF -- INSTRUMENTS -- FUEL QUANTITY LE -- LENS, ANNUNCIATOR
DG -- INSTRUMENTS -- ENGINE LG -- LIGHTS, LOGO
DH -- INSTRUMENTS -- OIL TEMPERATURE LH -- LAMP HOLDER
DI -- DIODES LI -- LIGHT, ICE
DJ -- INSTRUMENTS -- OIL PRESSURE LL -- LIGHT, LANDING
DK -- INSTRUMENTS -- FUEL PRESSURE LN -- LIGHTS, NAVIGATION
DL -- INSTRUMENTS -- TACHOMETER, ELECTRIC LP -- LIGHTS, PANEL
DM -- INSTRUMENTS -- HOUR METER LR -- LIGHTS, RECOGNITION
DN -- INSTRUMENTS -- PRESSURIZATION LS -- LIGHTS, STROBE
DP -- INSTRUMENTS -- PITOT HEAT LT -- LIGHTS, TAXI
DR -- INSTRUMENTS -- T I T
DS -- INSTRUMENTS -- COMPRESSOR DIS- MA -- AUXILIARY POWER
CHARGE TEMP. MB -- RADIO, MASTER
DT -- INSTRUMENTS -- E G T MC -- CIGAR LIGHTER
DU -- INSTRUMENTS -- MANIFOLD PRESSURE ME -- CLOCK, ELECTRIC
91--00--02
Page 5
MH -- MISCELLANEOUS, ANTI--ICE SB -- SPEEDBRAKE

MJ -- MISCELLANEOUS, JUNCTION BOX SP -- SPEAKER
MK -- MICROPHONE SW -- SWITCHES
MM -- MISCELLANEOUS, MARKER BEACON
MO -- PROP OVERSPEED VB -- VENT, AIR BLOWER
MP -- PROP DE--ICE VC -- VOLTAGE CONVERTER
MS -- MISCELLANEOUS, RADIO--SPEAKER VR -- VARISTOR
MW -- MISCELLANEOUS, RADIO--WARNING
NE -- FURL ENRICHMENT WA -- WARNING, ALTERNATOR
NF -- FUEL PUMP WB -- WARNING, BOOST PUMP
NP -- FUEL PRIMER WC -- WARNING, PROP DE--ICE
NS -- FUEL COLD START WD -- WARNING, POWER START
WE -- WARNING, ELECTRIC GEAR
PA -- POWER, ALTERNATOR WF -- WARNING, FUEL QUANTITY
PB -- POWER, BATTERY WG -- WARNING, TACHOMETER
PG -- POWER, GEN. (OUTPUT & CONTROL) WH -- WARNING, CHIP DETECTOR
PL -- PLUGS WK -- WARNING, FUEL PRESSURE
PS -- POWER, START WL -- WARNING, CANOPY LOCK
WM -- WARNING, MASTER
RB -- BLOWER, RADIO WN -- WARNING, PRESSURIZATION
RC -- RECEPTACLES WP -- WARNING, PITOT HEAT
RL -- RELAYS WS -- WARNING, STALL
RS -- RESISTORS WT -- WARNING, ANNUNCIATOR
WV -- WARNING, VACUUM
SA -- STAND--BY ALTERNATOR WW -- WARNING, ALTERNATE AIR
91--00--03 -- ABBREVIATIONS -- EQUIPMENT LIST
The abbreviations to the electrical system hardware charts are necessary due to space limitations in the fields of the
computer.
Airspeed -- A/S Pilot -- Plt
Glareshield -- Glrshld Selector -- Sel
Remote -- Rem Cylinder -- Cyl
Alternate -- Altn Placard -- Plcd
Landing -- Ldg Switch -- Sw
Resistor -- Res Down -- Dn
Circuit Breaker -- Ckt. Bkr. or C/B Radio -- Rad
Left -- L Transducer -- XDCR
Rheostat -- Rheo Electric -- Elec
Console -- Cnsl Receptacle -- Recpt
Lights -- Lts Transmitter -- XMTR
Right -- R Flight -- Flt
Control -- Cntrl Regulator -- Regltr
Panel -- Pnl Transistor -- XSTR
Safety -- Sfty Warning -- Wrn
Coordinator -- Coordtr
91--00--03
Page 6
91--20--00 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HARDWARE CHARTS

Refer to the Electrical Schematic (located in the envelopes at the back of this manual) that depicts the Serial Number
configuration of the aircraft being serviced. The S/N’s vs. applicable master schematics are shown below:
A/C SERIAL NUMBER DRAWING NUMBER SCHEMATIC NUMBER

27--0002 thru 27--0052 800310 (M1) (G)
27--0053 thru 27--0107 800310 (M2) (H)
27--0001, 27--0108 THRU 27--0137 800304 (M1) ( Revision E) *
(2 Sheets)
27--0138 THRU 27--0141
(Sheet 1 of 2) 800304 (M2) (Revision G) *
(Sheet 2 of 2) 800304 (M2) (Revision F) *
27--0142 THRU 27--0180, 27--0182, 27--0183
(Sheet 1 of 2) (Page 3.1.1.3) 800304 (M3) (Revision G) *
(Sheet 2 of 2) (Page 3.1.2.3) 800304 (M3) (Revision H) *
27--0181, 27--0184 THRU 27--0192
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1.4) 800304 (M4) (Revision W) *
27--0193 THRU 27--0208
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1.5) 800304 (M5) (Revision W) *
27--0209 THRU 27--0215
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1.6) 800304 (M6) (Revision X) *
27--0216 THRU 27--0220
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1.7) 800304 (M7) (Revision Z) *
27--0221 THRU 27--TBD
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1.8) 800304 (M8) (Revision Z) *
27--0232 THRU 27--0239
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1.9) 800304 (M9) (Revision AA) *
27--0240 THRU 27--0246
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1) 800383 (M1) (Revision G) *
27--0247 THRU 27--0257
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.2) 800383 (M2) (Revision H) *
27--0258 THRU 27--0279
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.3) 800383 (M3) (Revision R) *
27--0280 THRU 27--0317, 27--0320 THRU 27--0323
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.4/3.1.5) 800383 (M5) (Revision V) *
27--0324, 27--0325
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.6) 800383 (M6) (Revision V) *
27--0319 ONLY
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.7) 800383 (M7) (Revision V) *
27--0318 (OPT), 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA (GX)
(WITHOUT A/C)
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1) 800413 (M1) (Revision B) *
27--0318 (OPT), 27--326 THRU 27--TBA (GX)
(WITH OPTIONAL ENGINE DRIVEN A/C)
(Sheet 1 of 1) (Page 3.1.1) 800413 (M2) (Revision B) *
* These schematics address different serial numbered aircraft. Make sure the applicable schematic is being used for
the aircraft being serviced.
91--20--00
Page 7
The correct Vendor and/or Part Number will be depicted where the applicable electrical equipment identifier is
shown on the following hardware charts. Order replacement or repair Part Numbers for electrical components from
the following Electrical System hardware charts that are applicable to the aircraft model & S/N being worked on.
91--20--01 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HARDWARE CHART -- 800310 SCHEMATICS -- Pages 8 thru 26.
91--20--02 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HARDWARE CHARTS -- 800304 SCHEMATICS -- Pages 27 thru 40.
91--20--03 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HARDWARE CHARTS -- 800383/800413 SCHEMATICS -- Pages 41 thru
54.
NOTE
System Schematics are depicted on 800305 drawing. They are ”A” size drawings and are not
included in the S & M manual due to the quantity of pages required.
91--20--00
Page 8
91--20--01 -- ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HARDWARE CHART

S/N 27--0001 THRU 27--0052, -- SCHEMATIC DRAWING NO. 800310 -- (M1) (G)
S/N 27--0053 THRU 27--0107 -- SCHEMATIC DRAWING NO. 800310 -- (M2) (H)
CODE DESCRIPTION VENDOR PART NO. NOTES

M--CB101A C/B, DEFROST BLOWER KLIXON 7277--2--5
M--CB102A SWITCH, BLOWER MOTOR CHERRY E51--50B
M--CB103A MOTOR, BLOWER MOONEY 640317--501
M--CB104A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
/SOCKETS AMP 60619--1
M--CB105A RECPT, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--CC101A C/B, COWL FLAP KLIXON 7277--2--5
M--CC102A SWITCH, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880052--517
M--CC103A ACTUATOR, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880050--501
M--CC104A SWITCH, OPEN LIMIT MICRO SWITCH 1SE1--T
/ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JE--5
M--CC105A SWITCH, CLOSE LIMIT MICRO SWITCH 1SE1T
M--CC106A PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
/CLAMP AMP 206966--1
M--CC107A RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMP 206705--2
M--CC108A C/B, COWL FLAP IND KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--CC109A INDICATOR, COWL FLAP MOONEY 800242--505
M--CC110A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--CC111A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--CC112A POT., COWL FLAP POSITION ALLEN--BRADLEY WA2--G056S502UA
M--CC113A RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMPHENOL 126--219
M--CC114A PLUG, 9 PIN AMPHENOL 126--222
M--CC115A VARISTOR GE V47ZA05
M--CF101A C/B, TRIM/FLAP IND KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--CF102A INDICATOR, TRIM/FLAP MOONEY 800242--501
M--CF103A PLUG, INDICATOR DA15S
/CLAMP DA51210--1
/LOCK RETAINER DA51220--1
M--CF104A POTENTIOMETER, FLAP POS. ALLEN--BRADLEY WA2--G056S502UA
M--CF105A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--CF106A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--CF107A C/B, FLAP ACTUATOR KLIXON 7277--2--5
M--CF108A FLAP SWITCH CUTLER HAMMER 8906K3149
M--CF109A FLAP ACTUATOR MOONEY 750105--501
M--CF110A SWITCH, UP LIMIT MICRO SWITCH V3--1
/ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JV--5
M--CF111A SWITCH, DOWN LIMIT MICRO SWITCH V3--1
/ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JV--5
M--CR101A C/B, RUDDER TRIM KLIXON 7277--2--5
91--20--01
Page 9

M--CR102A SWITCH, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 880052--519
M--CR103A PLUG, 3 PIN AMP 1--408303--0
M--CR104A RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN AMP 1--480305--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--CR105A SWITCH, LIMIT MICRO V3--1
/ACTUATOR MICRO JV--26
M--CR106A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--CR107A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--CR108A MOTOR, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 880050--503
M--CR109A SWITCH, LIMIT MICRO V3--1
/ACTUATOR MICRO JV--26
M--CR110A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--CR111A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--CR112A POT. RUDDER TRIM ALLEN BRADLEY WA2--G056S502UA
M--CR113A C/B, RUDDER TRIM IND. KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--CR114A INDICATOR, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 800242--503
M--CR115A RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMPHENOL 126--219
M--CR116A PLUG, 9 PIN AMPHENOL 126--222
M--CT101A POT. TRIM POSITION ALLEN--BRADLEY WA2--G056S502UA
M--CT102A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--CT103A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--CV101A C/B, STANDBY VACUUM MOONEY 930023--247
M--CV102A CLUTCH, STANDBY VACUUM AIRBORNE 28C214CW
M--CV103A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
ALT G.E. 37--20--GE
M--DA101A SHUNT, RIGHT ALTERNATOR EMPRO MLA--70A--100MV
M--DA102A RIGHT ALT SHUNT (+), C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA103A RIGHT ALT SHUNT (--), C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA104A LOAD SHUNT EMPRO MLA--105A--100MV
M--DA104B LOAD SHUNT (OPT) EMPRO MLB--210A--100MV
M--DA105A LOAD SHUNT (+), C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA106A LOAD SHUNT (--), C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA107A SHUNT LEFT ALT’NTR (OPT) EMPRO MLA--70A--100MV
M--DA108A LEFT ALTERNATOR (+), C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA109A LEFT ALTERNATOR (--), C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA110A C/B, AMMETER (+) KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DA111A C/B, AMMETER (--) KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DB101A C/B, TURN COORDINATOR KLIXON 7277--2--2
M--DB102A TURN COORDINATOR UNITED INST. 9013 CODE N.5
TURN COORD. (ALT) ASTRONAUTICS 303990--028MSC
TURN COORD. (ALT) ELECTRO GYRO CORP1394T100--3Z
M--DB103A PLUG MS3106A--10SL--3S
/CABLE CLAMP MS3507--4A OR (--4B)
91--20--01
Page 10

M--DC101A SWITCH (OPT), CYL HEAD TEMP.
GRAYHILL 71AD30--02--2--AJN
/KNOB RAYTHEON 50--3--1G
M--DC102A PLUG, 28 PIN AMP 205839--3
M--DC103A RECEPTACLE, 28 PIN AMP 205152--1
M--DC104A PROBE, CYLINDER #1 MS24482--1 OR AN5546--1*
M--DC105A PROBE, CYLINDER #2 (OPT) MS24482--1 OR AN5546--1*
*USE AN4076--1 ADAPTER.
M--DD101A O.A.T. PROBE MOONEY 880004--501
M--DD102A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--DD103A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--DF101A FUEL TRANSMITTER, LT I/B MOONEY 610242--3
M--DF102A FUEL TRANSMITTER, LT O/B MOONEY 610242--5
M--DF103A FUEL TRANSMITTER, RT I/B MOONEY 610242--3
M--DF104A FUEL TRANSMITTER, RT O/B MOONEY 610242--5
M--DG101A C/B, INSTR. MODULE #1 KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DG102A IND, INSTR. MODULE #1 MOONEY 880059--501
IND, INSTR. MODULE#1(ALT) MOONEY 880059--503
M--DG102B IND. INSTR, MODULE #1 MOONEY 880059--513
M--DG103A PLUG, 28 PIN AMP 205839--3
M--DG103B PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--DG104A C/B, INSTR. MODULE #2 KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DG105A IND, INSTR. MODULE #2 MOONEY 880059--505
M--DG106A PLUG, 28 PIN AMP 205839--3
M--DH101A PROBE, OIL TEMP MS28034--1 (w/ plug)
PROBE, OIL TEMP * MOONEY 880061--501 (knife discon-
nects)
* (27--0053 thru 27--0107 & all Spares thru 27--0107)
M--DH102A PLUG, 2 PIN MS3057--4A
W/CLAMP (27--0002 thru 27--0052) (probe w/ plug only)
M--DJ101A TRANSDUCER, O/P DRUCK PDCR 821--0662--100
/ALTERNATE KULITE APT--201--1000--100G
M--DJ102A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--DJ103A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--DK101A TRANSDUCER, F/P DRUCK PDCR 920--U143 50 PSID
M--DK102A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
91--20--01
Page 11

M--DK103A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--DL101A C/B, TACHOMETER KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DL102A INDICATOR, TACHOMETER MOONEY 880039--519
M--DL103A PLUG, 25 PIN MS3106A--14S--5S
/CLAMP MS3057--6A/B
M--DL104A TACH SENSOR B & D INSTRUMENTS 0402--102
TACH SENSOR (ALT) B & D INSTRUMENTS 0402--104
M--DL105A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--DL106A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--DL107A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--4803199--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--DL108A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--DL109A LIGHT TRAY B & D INSTRUMENTS 0221--128
M--DM101A HOUR METER MOONEY 880035--505
M--DM102A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--DM103A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--DP101A C/B, PITOT HEAT MOONEY 930023--205
M--DP102A HEATED PITOT AERO INSTRUMENT PH502--24
HEATED PITOT (ALT) AN5812--1
M--DP103A PLUG AN3115--1
/SOCKETS AN3116--1
M--DP104A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--DP105A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--DR101A PROBE, TIT MOONEY 880055--503
PROBE, TIT (ALT) MOONEY 880055--501
M--DU101A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--DU102A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--DV101A FUEL FLOW, C/B KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--DV102A INDICATOR, FUEL FLOW MOONEY 880034--501
IND., FUEL FLOW (OPT) MOONEY 880034--503
IND., FUEL FLOW (OPT) MOONEY 880034--505
IND., F/F (GALS) (OPT) SHADIN 912021
IND., F/F (LBS) (OPT) SHADIN 912023
M--DV102B IND., F/F (GALS)(OPT) SHADIN 912041 1
IND., F/F (LBS)(OPT) SHADIN 912043 1
IND., F/F (LITERS)(OPT) SHADIN 912047 1
IND., F/F (GALS)(OPT) SHADIN 912081 2
IND., F/F (LBS)(OPT) SHADIN 912083 2
IND., F/F (LITERS)(OPT) SHADIN 912087 2
91--20--01
Page 12

M--DV103A PLUG, 9 PIN DE--9S
/CLAMP DE--24657
/LATCH ASSY (2 EA) D--51224--1
M--DV103B PLUG, 9 PIN DE--9S
/CLAMP DE--24657
/LATCH ASSY (2 EA) D110278
M--DV104A TRANSDUCER, F/F MOONEY 880030--501
TRANSDUCER, F/F (OPT) MOONEY 880030--503
TRANSDUCER, F/F (OPT) MOONEY 880030--505
M--DV104B TRANSDUCER, F/F SHADIN 680501B
M--DV105A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--DV106A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--DV107A SWITCH, FUEL FLOW C AND K 7101K
M--DV108A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--DV109A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--DW101A INDICATOR, VERT. SPEED UNITED INSTRUMENTS 7000 CODE C.83
M--DW102A PLUG, 3 PIN BENDIX PT06E--8--3
/CLAMP MS3057--3A OR B
M--DW102A PLUG, 3 PIN (ALT) CANNON KPT06E--8--3S
M--DW102A PLUG, 3 PIN (ALT) MS3116--8--3S
M--EG101A C/B, GEAR ACTUATOR KLIXON 7277--2--7.5
M--EG102A SWITCH, GEAR UP/DOWN CUTLER HAMMER 8906K2875
M--EG103A SWITCH, GEAR OVERRIDE CUTLER HAMMER SB1DDX492--2
/LOCKING RING CUTLER HAMMER 29--761
/LOCK WASHER CUTLER HAMMER 16--886
/HEX NUT (2 EA) CUTLER HAMMER 15--966--6
/LAMP (28V) GENERAL ELECTRIC 388
M--EG104A SW, AIRSPEED, GEAR SAFE. MOONEY 880013--507
M--EG105A C/B, GEAR RELAYS KLIXON 7277--2--2
M--EG106A SWITCH, GEAR UP LIMIT MICRO SWITCH DT--2R--A7
/ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH MCD--2711
M--EG107A SWITCH, GEAR DOWN LIMIT MICRO SWITCH 1CH116--6
M--EG107B SW., GEAR DOWN LIMIT (ALT) SAINT SWITCH ML1116
M--EG108A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--EG109A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--EG110A RELAY, GEAR UP CUTLER HAMMER 6041H--105A
M--EG111A DIODE 1N2483
M--EG112A RELAY, GEAR DOWN CUTLER HAMMER 6041H--105A
M--EG113A DIODE 1N2483
M--EG114A ACTUATOR, GEAR MOONEY 560254--503
ACTUATOR, GEAR (ALT) MOONEY 880037--507
91--20--01
Page 13

MELT101A SWITCH, REMOTE DORNE & MARGOLIN DM--U65--1
SWITCH, REMOTE (ALT) C AND K 7101K
MELT101B SWITCH, REMOTE ARTEX 110--416
MELT102A TRANSMITTER, ELT DORNE & MARGOLIN DM--ELT--8
MELT102B TRANSMITTER, ELT ARTEX ELT110--4
MELT103A PLUG, 12 PIN MOLEX 03--06--2122
/SOCKET MOLEX 02--06--1103
MELT104A PLUG, 9 PIN MOLEX 03--06--2092
MELT105A PLUG, 8 PIN AMP 205838--1
MELT106A RECPT.,8 PIN AMP 205841--2
MELT107A PLUG, 8 PIN AMP 205838--1
MELT108A RECPT, 8 PIN AMP 205841--2
MFON101A PHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--11
/WASHERS SWITCHCRAFT S--1028 AND S--1029
M--JM101A SWITCH, MAGNETO BENDIX SCINTILLA 10--357210--9
/PLACARD BENDIX SCINTILLA 10--187--468
M--JM102A MAGNETO, LEFT SLICK 6261
M--JM102A MAGNETO, RIGHT SLICK 6260
M--LB101A C/B, ROTATING BEACON MOONEY 930023--243
M--LB102A LIGHT, ROTATING BEACON WHELEN WRML--24
/ADAPTER WHELEN WRM--65
M--LB102B LIGHT, ANTI--COLL. (Red)(Alt) WHELEN 90033--19
LIGHT, ANTI--COLL. (White)(Alt)WHELEN 90033--20
M--LB103A PLUG, 3 PIN AMP 1--380303--0
M--LB104A RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN AMP 1--480305--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--LC101A FUSE HOLDER LITTLE FUSE 155020 OR 155120
/FUSE (5A--3AG--SLO--BLO) LITTLE FUSE 313005
M--LC102A SW. (FRONT), CABIN LIGHT CARLING TILC64--1S--WH--FN
M--LC103A RESISTOR (20 OHM 10W), DIMDALE RH--10--20 OHM
M--LC104A LAMP HOLDER H.H. SMITH 1930
/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
M--LC108A SW. (REAR), CABIN LIGHT CARLING TILC64--1S--WH--FN
M--LC109A RESIST. (20 OHM 10W), DIMDALE RH--10--20 OHM
/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
91--20--01
Page 14

/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
/LAMP G.E. 1818
M--LC116A
M--LC117A MODULE, LT., AUTO--OFF MOONEY 800268--501
M--LC118A PLUG, 9 PIN DE--1S
/CLAMP DE2457
/LATCH DE51224--1
M--LC118B RECEPT, SHORTING DE9P
/CLAMP DE24657
/LOCKING POST 206514--1
M--LC119A DIODE 1N2483/IN5060
DIODE, (ALT) GE 3720--GE
M--LC120A DIODE 1N2483/IN5060
DIODE, (ALT) GE 3720--GE
M--LC123A RECPT, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
M--LC124A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
/SOCKET AMP 60619--1
M--LC125A SWITCH, CABIN DOOR NEWARK 89F5544
M--LC126A SWITCH, BAGGAGE DOOR NEWARK 89F5544
M--LC127A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--LC128A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--LL101A C/B, LANDING LIGHT KLIXON 7277--2--25
M--LL102A SWITCH, LANDING LIGHT MOONEY 880052--521
M--LL103A LANDING LIGHT, RIGHT G.E. 4596
M--LL104A LANDING LIGHT, LEFT G.E. 4596
M--LN101A C/B, NAVIGATION LIGHTS MOONEY 930023--201
M--LN101B C/B, NAV LTS MOONEY 930023--251
M--LN102A LIGHT ASSY (LEFT WING), NAV TAIL 800051--501
M--LN103A LIGHT ASSY (RIGHT WING) MOONEY 800051--501
M--LN104A PLUG, 2 PIN (RIGHT WING) AMP 1--480318--0
M--LN104B RECPT, 9 PIN AMP 206705--1
M--LN105A RECEPT., 2 PIN (RT WING) AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--LN105B PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
M--LN106A PLUG, 2 PIN (LT WING) AMP 1--480318--0
M--LN106B RECPT, 9 PIN AMP 206705--1
91--20--01
Page 15

M--LN107A RECEPT., 2 PIN (LT WING) AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--LN107B PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
M--LP101A C/B, GLARESHIELD LIGHTS KLIXON 7277--2--7.5
M--LP102A C/B, PANEL LIGHTS KLIXON 7277--2--7.5
M--LP103A CONTROL BOX, DIMMER IAI 950D0307--000
M--LP103B CONTROL BOX, DIMMER IAI 9500307--001
M--LP104A PLUG, DIMMER CONTROL DBM17W2S
/CLAMP DB51212
/LOCK RETAINER DB51221--1
/RECEPTACLES (2 EA) DM53744--7
M--LP105A DIMMER SW., G/SHIELD LTS C AND K 7105--J1--Z--Q
M--LP106A DIMMER SW., PANEL LIGHTS C AND K 7105--J1--Z--Q
M--LP107A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--LP108A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--LP109A RECEP. COMPASS LIGHT DEANS DEA90020/MALE
M--LP110A PLUG, COMPASS LIGHT DEANS DEA90020/FEMALE
M--LP111A COMPASS LIGHT G.E. 327 OR 327 AVIATION RED
M--LP112A GLARESHIELD LIGHTS (14 EA)G.E. 327
M--LP113A FLAP SWITCH LIGHT MOONEY 130285--3
/LAMP G.E. 327
M--LP114A COWL FLAP SWITCH, LIGHT SLOAN 855S--O--U**
/LAMP G.E. 327
M--LP115A CONSOLE SWITCH LIGHT
M--LP116A PLUG, 16 PIN AMP 206037--1
M--LP118A PLUG, 8 PIN AMP 205838--1
CLAMP AMP 206062--1
M--LP120A PLUG, 20 PIN MOONEY 930021--501
M--LP121A RECEPTACLE, 20 PIN MOONEY 930021--502
M--LP122A OXYGEN LIGHT SLOAN 855S--O--U**
/LAMP G.E. 327
M--LP123A OXYGEN LIGHT SLOAN 855S--O--U**
/LAMP G.E. 327
M--LP124A LIGHTING TRAY (O.A.T.) B &D 0221--128
M--LP125A LIGHTING TRAY (VOLT/AMP) B &D 0221--128
M--LP135A POT. MAP LT,, PILOT NEWARK 09F981
/KNOB NEWARK 57F2368
M--LP136A POT. MAP LT,, CO--PILOT NEWARK 09F981
/KNOB NEWARK 57F2368
M--LP137A LT, MAP, PILOT SLOAN 855S--0--U**
/LAMP G.E. 327
91--20--01
Page 16

M--LP138A LT, MAP, CO--PILOT SLOAN 855S--0--U**
/LAMP G.E. 327
**USE 1 EA. MS35334--21 OR M2898 (ALLEN--BRADLEY) INTERNAL TOOTH LOCKWASHER WITH EACH
LIGHT IF NOT SUPPLIED BY SLOAN.
M--LR101A C/B, RECOGNITION LIGHT MOONEY 930023--231
M--LR102A RECOGN. LIGHT (LT WING) MOONEY 880049--501
M--LR103A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--LR104A RESISTOR DALE RH--50--7.5 OHM
M--LR105A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--LR106A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--LR107A RECOGN. LIGHT (RT WG) MOONEY 880049--501
M--LR108A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
SOCKETS AMP 60619--1
M--LR109A RESISTOR DALE RH--50--7.5 OHM
M--LR110A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
--LR111A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--LS101A C/B, STROBE LIGHT MOONEY 930023--237
M--LS102A POWER SUPPLY (LT WING) WHELEN 01--0770329--00
M--LS103A RECEPTACLE, PWR SUPPLY AMP 1--480305--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--LS105A PLUG, STROBE LIGHT ASSY AMP 1--480303--0
M--LS106A STROBE/NAV LT ASSY (L WG) WHELEN A650--PR--D--M
M--LS107A POWER SUPPLY (RT WING) WHELEN 01--0770329--00
/PINS AMP 60620--1
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--LS111A STR’B/NAV LITE ASSY (RT WG)WHELEN A650--PG--D--M
M--LS112A POWER SUPPLY (TAIL) WHELEN 01--0770329--00
M--LS113A RECEP. PWR SUPPLY AMP 1--480305--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--LS114A RECEP. POWER SUPPLY AMP 1--480305--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--LS115A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--LS116A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--LS118A STROBE LIGHT ASSY, TAIL MOONEY 470013--501
91--20--01
Page 17

M--LS119A RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN AMP 1--480305--0
/PINS AMP 60620--1
/PINS AMP 60620--1
/PINS AMP 60620--1
M--LT101A C/B, TAXI LIGHT KLIXON 7277--2--25
M--LT102A SWITCH, TAXI LIGHT MOONEY 880052--523
M--LT103A TAXI LIGHT (RIGHT) G.E. 4596
M--LT104A TAXI LIGHT (LEFT) G.E. 4596
M--MA101A RECEPTACLE, AUX PWR AN2552--3A
M--MA102A RELAY, AUX POWER CUTLER HAMMER 6041H--105A
M--MA103A DIODE SARKES TARZIAN 10H3P
M--MA104A DIODE 1N2483
M--MB101A C/B SW, AVIONICS MASTER MOONEY 930023--213/WHITE
M--MB102A
M--MB103A
M--MB104A DIODE 1N2483
M--MB105A RELAY, AVIONICS MASTER KISSLING 26.64.01
M--MB106A
M--MB107A
M--MB108A AVIONICS BUS BAR #1 MOONEY 913127--67
M--MB115A C/B, COM 1 KLIXON 7277--2--10***
M--MB116A CIRCUIT BREAKER, NAV 1 KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB117A C/B, AUDIO KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB118A C/B, COM 2 KLIXON 7277--2--10***
M--MB119A C/B, NAV 2 KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB120A C/B, PHONE KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB121A C/B, TRANSPONDER KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB122A C/B, ENCODER KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB123A C/B, RAD BLOWER KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB124A C/B, ADF KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB125A C/B, DME KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB126A C/B, R/NAV KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB127A C/B, STORMSCOPE KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB127B C/B, RMI KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB129A C/B, LORAN KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB130A C/B, STEREO KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB131A C/B, TELEPHONE KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB132A C/B, VME KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB133A C/B, AUTOPILOT/TRIM KLIXON 7277--2--10***
M--MB134A C/B, YAW DAMP KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB135A C/B, INVERTER KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
M--MB136A C/B, HSI KLIXON 7277--2--2***
91--20--01
Page 18

M--MB137A C/B, ART HORIZON KLIXON 7277--2--2***
M--MB138A C/B, A/P ALERT KLIXON 7277--2--7.5***
***MAXIMUM CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING IS SHOWN. AMPERAGE OF INSTALLED CIRCUIT BREAKER IS
DETERMINED BY PARTICULAR UNIT INSTALLED.
M--MC101A CIRCUIT BREAKER KLIXON 7277--2--10
M--MC102A CIGAR LIGHTER MOONEY 800336--503
/ALTERNATE CASCO 208292
M--ME101A CLOCK PORSCHE 944.641.213.00
M--ME101B CLOCK (ALT) MID--CONT MD--89
M--ME102A R1 150 OHM 3 WATT CLAROSTAT VC3D
R1 150 OHM 3 WATT (ALT) OHMITE 23J
M--ME103A R2 3.9K OHM 1/2 WATT
M--ME104A R3 3.0K OHM 1/2 WATT
M--ME105A CONN, 4 PIN PORSCHE 944.612.217.00
/PIN PORSCHE 999.652.351.12
M--ME105B CONN, 4 PIN (ALT) MID--CONT 6016177
/PIN MID--CONT 6016125
MMIC101A MICROPHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--12B
/WASHERS SWITCHCRAFT S--1028, S--1029
MMIC102A SWITCH,MIKE KEY, PILOT ALCO MPE--106F--C--22--9
(ALT) CUTLER--HAMMER SAIRV 20
MMIC103A SWITCH,MIKE,KEY,CO--PILOT ALCO MPE--106F--C--22--9
(ALT) CUTLER--HAMMER SAIRV 20
M--MP101A C/B, PROP DE--ICE MOONEY 930023--245
M--MP102A TIMER, PROP DE--ICE B.F. GOODRICH 3E1899--1
M--MP103A CURR. MONITR., PROP DE--ICE MOONEY 800221--505
M--MP104A PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
M--MP105A TERMINAL BLOCK McCAULEY C--40521
M--NF101A C/B, BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--211
M--NF102A BOOST PUMP WELDON A10051--D
M--NF103A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--NF104A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--NF105A C/B, BOOST PUMP KLIXON 7277--2--10
M--NF106A THROT. SW., BOOST PUMP MICRO SWITCH 1SE1--T
M--NF107A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--NF108A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--PA101A C/B, ALTERNATOR, RIGHT ETA 41--3--S34--LN2--041800
M--PA102A C/B, FIELD, RIGHT ALT. KLIXON 7277--2--5
M--PA103A SWITCH, ALT. FLD. (OPT) MOONEY 880052--525
M--PA103B SWITCH, ALT. FLD. (STD) MOONEY 880052--503
M--PA104A VOLTAGE REG. (RIGHT) ELECTRODELTA VR--802
M--PA105A RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
91--20--01
Page 19

M--PA106A PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206705--2
M--PA107A ALT. (RIGHT) ELECTRO SYSTEMS CS 4009
/INSTALL KIT (REF 600180) LYCOMING 05K--21065
M--PA108A FILTER MOONEY 880014--501
M--PA109A CAPACITOR MALLORY CGS302U--050R2C
M--PA110A CIRCUIT BREAKER ETA 41--3--S34--LN2--041800
M--PA111A CIRCUIT BREAKER KLIXON 7277--2--5
M--PA112A VOLTAGE REGULATOR ELECTRODELTA VR--802
M--PA113A RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
M--PA114A PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206705--2
M--PA115A ALTERNATOR (OPT) ELECTRO SYSTEMS ES 4009
M--PA116A FILTER MOONEY 880014--501
M--PA117A CAPACITOR MALLORY CGS302U--050R2C
M--PA118A MONITOR, CURRENT MICRO SW CSLA1GE
M--PA119A MONITOR, CURRENT MICRO SW CSLA1GE
M--PA120A DIODE SARKES TARZIAN 10H3P
/MICA WASHER (2 EACH) MOTOROLA B52600F001
/TEFLON BUSHING MOTOROLA B51547F012
/FLAT WASHER MOTOROLA B51567F009
/STEEL LOCK WASHER MOTOROLA B51566F020
/HEX NUT MOTOROLA B51568F015
M--PA124A FUSEHOLDER LITTEL FUSE 155020 OR 155120
/5A FUSE LITTEL FUSE 313005
M--PA125A SWITCH, EMERGENCY FIELD CUTLER HAMMER SB1DDX492--2
/LOCKING RING CUTLER HAMMER 29--761
/LOCK WASHER CUTLER HAMMER 16--886
/HEX NUT (2 EACH) CUTLER HAMMER 15--966--6
/LAMP (28V) GENERAL ELECTRIC 388
91--20--01
Page 20

M--PA126A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
(ALT) G.E. 3720--GE
M--PA127A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
(ALT) G.E. 3720--GE
M--PA128A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
(ALT) G.E. 3720--GE
M--PB101A BATTERY GILL G--243
M--PB102A RELAY, BATTERY CUTLER HAMMER 6041H--105A
M--PB103A DIODE 1N2483
M--PB104A SWITCH, MASTER MOONEY 880052--501
M--PB105A C/B, BATTERY ETA 41--3--S34--LN2--041800
M--PB106A C/B, LOAD ETA 41--3--S34--LN2--041800
M--PB107A C/B, LEFT AUX ETA 41--3--S34--LN2--40A
M--PB108A C/B, RIGHT AUX ETA 41--3--S34--LN2--40A
M--PB109A BUS BAR #1 MOONEY 913127--69
M--PB116A
M--PB120A GROUND/DIMMER BOX MOONEY 800220--501
M--PB121A BATTERY #2 GILL G--243
M--PB122A MASTER RELAY #2 CUTLER HAMMER 6041H--202 OR 202A
M--PB123A DIODE 1N2483
M--PB124A RESISTOR, 1 OHM 25 WATT DALE RH--25--1--25W
M--PB125A DIODE SARKES TARZIAN 10H3P
/NYLON BUSHING MOTOROLA B5147F012
/MICA WASHER MOTOROLA B52600F001
M--PB126A DIODE SARKES TARZIAN 10H3P
/NYLON BUSHING MOTOROLA B5147F012
/MICA WASHER MOTOROLA B52600F001
M--PB127A BATTERY SELECT SWITCH MOONEY 880052--527
M--PL201A PLUG 37 PIN AMP 206150--1
M--PL202A PLUG AMP 206150--1
/FLANGE AMP 207299--4
M--PL203A PLUG AMP 206037--2
M--PL204A PLUG 20 PIN MOONEY 930021--501
M--PL204B PLUG, 26 PIN MOONEY 930021--505
M--PL205A PLUG 28 PIN AMP 205839--3
M--PL206A PLUG, 34 PIN MOONEY 930021--507
M--PL208A PLUG 14 PIN MOONEY 930021--1
91--20--01
Page 21

M--PL209A PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
M--PL216A PLUG, 16 PIN AMP 206037--1
M--PL217A PLUG, 16 PIN AMP 206037--1
M--PL218A PLUG, 16 PIN AMP 206037--1
M--PL219A PLUG, 28 PIN AMP 205839--3
M--PL223A PLUG, 32 PIN**** MATRIX SCIENCE M83723/86R2232N
/CLAMP MATRIX SCIENCE M85049/52--1--22N
/SOCKET MATRIX SCIENCE 5100--001--0012
/CLAMP MATRIX SCIENCE M85049--52--1--22N
****USE MS3420--14 OR --16 BOOT WITH CONNECTOR.
M--PL227A PLUG, 6 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE MS3106A--28--22S
/CLAMP MATRIX SCIENCE MS3057--16B OR A
M--PL229A PLUG, 16 PIN AMP 206037--1
M--PL231A PLUG, 16 PIN AMP 206037--1
M--PL232A PLUG, 14 PIN MOONEY 930021
91--20--01
Page 22

M--PS101A C/B, STARTER SOLENOID KLIXON 7277--2--5
M--PS102A SOLENOID, STARTER CUTLER HAMMER 6041H--202 OR 202A
M--PS103A DIODE 1N2483
M--PS104A STARTER B & C SPEC. BSC206--149
M--RB102A BLOWER, RADIO TRW 19A2790
M--RB102B BLOWER, RADIO KING 071--4037--01
M--RB103A FILTER ARCHER 273--103
FILTER (ALTERNATE) SPRAGUE 5JX5104A
M--RB104A PLUG, 2 PIN MOLEX 03--06--1023
M--RC201A RECEPTACLE, 37 PIN AMP 206151--2
M--RC204A RECEPTACLE, 20 PIN MOONEY 930021--502
M--RC204B RECPT, 26 PIN MOONEY 930021--506
CLAMP AMP 206070--1
M--RC222A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153
M--RC223A RECEPTACLE, 32 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE MS3100K--22--14P
or M83723/83K2232N
/PINS MATRIX SCIENCE 5000--054--0020
/BOOT MS3420--14 OR 16
M--RC224A RECEPTACLE, 32 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE M83723/83K2232N
/BOOT MS3420--14 OR 16
91--20--01
Page 23

/BOOT MS3420--14 OR 16
/BOOT MS3420--14 OR 16
M--RC227A RECEPTACLE, 6 PIN MS3100K--28--2P
or MS3100KE--28--2P
/CLAMP MS3057--12B OR A
M--SB101A C/B, SPEED BRAKE KLIXON 7277--2--2
M--SB102A SWITCH, SPEED BRAKE PRECISE FLT 01265
M--SB103A PLUG, 3 PIN AMP 1--380303--0
M--SB104A RECPT, 3 PIN AMP 1--380305--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--SB105A RELAY, SPD BRK PRECISE FLT 01384
M--SB106A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
(ALT) G.E. 3720--GE
M--SB107A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--SB108A RECPT, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--SB111A MOTOR, LEFT PRECISE FLT 01532
M--SB112A SWITCH, DEPLOY LIMIT PRECISE FLT 01505
M--SB113A SWITCH, RETRACT LIMIT PRECISE FLT 01505
M--SB114A SOLENOID, CLUTCH PRECISE FLT 01678
M--SB119A MOTOR, RIGHT PRECISE FLT 01532
M--SB120A SWITCH, DEPLOY LIMIT PRECISE FLT 01505
M--SB121A SWITCH, RETRACT LIMIT PRECISE FLT 01505
M--SB122A SOLENOID, CLUTCH PRECISE FLT 01678
91--20--01
Page 24

MSPK101A SPEAKER, CABIN ARCHER 12--1703
MSPK102A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
MSPK103A RECPT, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--WC101A FUSE HOLDER LITTEL FUSE 155020 or 155120
M--WD101A FUSE HOLDER LITTEL FUSE 155020 or 155120
M--WE101A C/B, GEAR WARNING KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--WE102A LIGHT, GEAR DOWN SLOAN 855S--0--U
G.E. 327
M--WE103A THROTTLE, SWITCH MICRO 1SE1--T
/ACTUATOR MICRO JE--17
M--WE104A DIODE 1N2483
M--WE105A DIODE 1N2483
M--WE106A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--WE107A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--WP101A CURR. MONITOR, PITOT HT. MOONEY 800221--505
M--WP102A PLUG 9 PIN AMP 206705--2
M--WP103A FUSEHOLDER LITTEL FUSE 155020 OR 155120
/FUSE (5A--3AG--SLO--BLO) LITTEL FUSE 31300S
M--WS101A C/B, STALL WARNING KLIXON 7277--2--1
M--WS102A ALERT, STALL WN/GEAR WN IAI 950D0309--000
M--WS103A PLUG, 25 PIN DB25S
/CLAMP DB51212
M--WS104A SWITCH, STALL WARNING SAFE FLIGHT C46001
(ALT) MOONEY 800366--501
M--WS105A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--WS106A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--WS106B RECPT, 9 PIN AMP 206705--2
M--WS107A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--WS107B PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206708--1
M--WS108A SPEAKER, ALERT ARCHER 40--1333C
M--WS109A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
M--WS110A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
/PIN AMP 60620--1
M--WT101A CIRCUIT BREAKER KLIXON 7277--2--2
91--20--01
Page 25

M--WT102A ANNUNCIATOR IAI 950D0316--000
/LEGEND, ANNUNC. --US IAI 400D0059--000
/LEGEND, ANNUNC. --FR IAI 400D0059--001
M--WT102B ANNUNCIATOR IAI 9500326000
/LEGEND,ANNUN,--US IAI 9500330000
/LEGEND, ANNUN.--FR IAI 9500330001
M--WT103A PLUG, 25 PIN DB25S
/CLAMP DB51212
M--WV101A C/B, VACUUM WARNING KLIXON 7277--2--2
M--WV102A SWITCH, VACUUM WARNING MOONEY 880012--501
M--WV103A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
M--WV104A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
M--WW101A SWITCH, ALTERNATE AIR CHERRY SWITCH E51--50B
NOTES:
1. SHADIN MODEL NO. INTERFACE WITH II MORROW APOLLO, ARNAV AND NORTHSTAR LORAN
SYSTEMS.
2. SHADIN MODEL NO. INTERFACE WITH BENDIX/KING KLN--88.
91--20--01
Page 26
91--20--02 -- ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HARDWARE CHART

S/N 27--0001, 27--0108 THRU 27--0239 -- SCHEMATIC DRAWING NO’s. 800304--(#)*
*(#) = REVISION LEVEL WILL VARY WITH EFFECTIVITY; REFER TO ENVELOPES

ACT1 ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JE--5
ACT2 ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JV--5
ACT4 ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH MCD--2711
ACT5 ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JE--17
AIR101A SWITCH, A/C MOONEY 880067--501
AIR102A COMPRESSOR, A/C MOONEY 770028--1
AIR103A EVAP. BLWR (FRT) MOONEY 770002--501
AIR103B EVAP. BLWR, (REAR) MOONEY 770002--503
AIR104A CONDENSER BLWR MOONEY 770016--501
AIR105A SWITCH, A/C PRESS. MOONEY 770029--501
BL1 BULB GE 1818
HOLDER FOR BL1 HH SMITH 1930
BL2 BULB GE 1816
HOLDER FOR BL2 HH SMITH 1930
BL3 BULB (NAV--T/L) WHELEN 34--022--8030--85
BL5 BULB (CONSOLE) GE 327
(ALT) GE 385
BL6 BULB (COMPASS) GE 327(AV RED)
BL7 BULB (POST LIGHT) GE 330
BL8 BULB (ANNUNCIATOR) CHI. MIN. CM7--7730
BR1 CIRCUIT BREAKER (1A) KLIXON 7277--2--1
BR7.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER (7.5A) KLIXON 7277--2--7.5
BR20 CIRCUIT BREAKER (20A) MECH PROD 4200--002--20
BR30 CIRCUIT BREAKER (30) MECH PROD 700--001--30
BR35 CIRCUIT BREAKER (35A) ETA 41--2--S14--LN2--35A
BRSW3 C/B--SWITCH KLIXON 7270--5--3
BRSW7.5 C/B--SWITCH KLIXON 7270--5--7.5
BS1 RELAY, BASE MAGNACRAFT 70--303
91--20--02
Page 27

BUS2A BUSS BAR (2 PLC) MOONEY 913127--033
BUS2B BUSS BAR (2 PLC) MOONEY 913127--097
BUS2C BUSS BAR ( ) MOONEY 913127--099
BUS3C BUSS BAR (3 PLC) MOONEY 913127--073
BUS5D BUSS BAR (5 PLC) MOONEY 913127--019
C1 CAPACITOR MALLORY CGS302V--050R2C
CAP1 CAP, WHITE MICRO SW 15PA90--8W
CAP2 CAP, BLACK ALCO SW C--22
CAP3 CAP, DUST MATRIX SCIENCE. M83723/60--122RC
CB101A BLOWER, DEFROST MOONEY 640317--503
CC101A MOTOR, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880050--505
CC102A INDICATOR, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880242--505
CC103A SWITCH, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880052--517
CC103B SWITCH, COWL FLAP (M20J) MICRO--SWITCH 12TW1--10
CC103C SWITCH, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880052--117
CF101A ACTUATOR, FLAP MOONEY 750105--501
CF102A INDICATOR, TRIM/FLAP MOONEY 800242--501
CF103A INDICATOR, FLAP MOONEY 800242--505
CF108A SWITCH, FLAP C--H 8906K3149
CL03A CLAMP, 3/14/16/28 PIN AMP 206070--1
CL03B CLAMP, 3 PIN AMP M85049--41--4A
CL03C CLAMP, 3 PIN MS3057--4A
(ALT) MS3057--4B
CL04A CLAMP, 4/8 PIN AMP 206062--1
CL05A CLAMP, 5 PIN MS3057--6A/B
CL06A CLAMP, 6 PIN MS3057--16A/B
CL09A CLAMP, 9 PIN, LT. CTRL BOX AMP 206966--1
CL09B CLAMP, 9 PIN AMP P/O 126--222
CL09C CLAMP, 9 PIN DE--24657
/LOCK RETAINER DE--51224--1
/LOCK RETAINER (ALT) D110278
CL09D CLAMP, 9 PIN DE--19977--5
/LOCK, RETAINER DE51224--1
CL15A CLAMP, 15 PIN DA51210--1
/LOCK, RETAINER DA51220--1
91--20--02
Page 28

CL17A CLAMP, 17 PIN DB51212
/LOCK, RETAINER DB51221--1
CL25B CLAMP, 25 PIN DB19977--2
CL25C CLAMP, 25 PIN DB--24659
/LOCK, RETAINER D--20418--2
CL32A CLAMP, 32 PIN M85049/52--1--22N
CL32B CLAMP, BOOT MS3420--14
(ALT) MS3420--16
CL37A CLAMP, 37 PIN 206138--1
CL37B CLAMP, 37 PIN DC19977--3
/LOCK, RETAINER DC51222--1
CM1 CURRENT MONITOR MOONEY 800221--505
CR101A SWITCH, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 880052--519
CR101B SWITCH, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 880052--119
CR102A MOTOR, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 880050--503
CR103A INDICATOR, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 800242--503
CT101A SWITCH, ELEV TRIM MOONEY 930023--233 WHT
CT102A INDICATOR, ELEV TRIM MOONEY 800242--519
CT103A MOTOR, ELEV TRIM S--TEC 01165--0--T14
CT104A INTERFACE, TRIM MOONEY 800313--501
CV101A C/B--SW, STAND--BY VACUUM MOONEY 930023--233 WHT
CV101B C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC MOONEY 930023--343 BLK
CV102A PUMP, STAND--BY VACUUM AEROSAFE 820904--2
CV104A C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC MOONEY 930023--247 WHT
CV104B C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC MOONEY 930023--344 BLK
CV105A PUMP/CLUTCH, STD--BY VAC AIRBORNE 28C214CW--2
D1 DIODE 1N2483
(ALT) 1N5060
(ALT) GE 3720GE
D2 DIODE SARKES--TARZIAN 10H3P
(ALT) ECG 5854
(ALT) NTE 5854
D4 DIODE BRIDGE FAGOR FB5001
DA101A AMMETER SHUNT EMPRO MLA--70A--100MV
(ALT) JANCO 8406--70
DA101B AMMETER SHUNT EMPRO MLA--150A--100MV
(ALT) JANCO 8406--150
DB101A TURN COORDINATOR U/I 9013 CODE N.5
TURN COORDINATOR (ALT) ASTRONAUTICS 303990--028MSC
TURN COORDINATOR (ALT) ELECTRO GYRO 1394T100--3Z
TURN COORDINATOR (ALT) U/I 9114 CODE N.21
DC101A PROBE, CYLINDER #1 MS24482--1
(ALT) AN5546--1*
* USE AN4076--1 ADAPTER.
91--20--02
Page 29

DD101A INDICATOR, O.A.T. MOONEY 880059--159
DD102A O.A.T. PROBE MOONEY 880004--501
DD103A SOCKET, 4 PIN CINCH--JONES S--304--CCT
DF101A FUEL XMTR, LH/RH I/B MOONEY 610242--003
DF102A FUEL XMTR, LH O/B MOONEY 610243--003
DF103A FUEL XMTR, RH O/B MOONEY 610243--001
DF104A FUEL XMTR, LH/RH O/B MOONEY 610242--005
DG101A IND., INSTRUMENT MODULE MOONEY 880059--507
DG102A IND., INSTRUMENT, MODULE MOONEY 880059--511
DG103A IND., INSTRUMENT MODULE #1 MOONEY 880059--513
DH101A PROBE, OIL TEMP MOONEY 880061--501
DH102A PROBE, OIL TEMP MS28034--1
DJ101A TRANSDUCER, OIL PRESSURE DRUCK PDCR 821--0662--100
(ALT) (M20M) KULITE APT--201--1000--100G
(ALT) (M20J) KULITE APT--154--1000--100PSIG
DK101A TRANSDUCER, FUEL PRESS. DRUCK PDCR--821--0662--30
(ALT) KULITE APT--153--1000--30PSIG
DK102A TRANSDUCER, FUEL PRESS. DRUCK PDCR 920--U143 50 PSID
(ALT) KULITE APT--155--1000--50D
DL101A IND., TACH MOONEY 880039--515
(OPTIONAL) B&D 0520--003
DL102A SENSOR, TACH B&D 0400--004
DL104A TACH SENSOR B&D (SLICK MAGS) 0402--102
TACH SENSOR B&D 0406--003 *
3
DL104B TACH SENSOR B&D (BENDIX MAGS) 0402--104
TACH SENSOR B&D 0406--004 *
3
DL105A INDICATOR, TACHOMETER MOONEY 880039--519
* INSTALLED ON IO--550 ENGINE BY TELEDYNE CONTINENTAL MOTORS.
DM101A HOUR METER MOONEY 880035--507
DM103A HOUR METER HOBBS 15006
(ALT) DATCON SG--70
(ALT) HOBBS 15000
DP101A C/B, PITOT HEAT MOONEY 930023--205 WHT
DP101B C/B, PITOT HEAT MOONEY 930023--305 BLK
DP102A HEATED PITOT AERO INSTR PH502--24
(ALT) AN5812--1
DP103A PITOT, HEATED AERO INSTR PH502--12
(ALT) AN5812
DP104A PLUG, 2 PIN AN3115--1
DP105A SOCKET AN3116--1
91--20--02
Page 30

DR101A PROBE, TIT MOONEY 880055--503
DT101A IND., EGT ALCOR 46361
DT101B IND., EGT ALCOR OEM--46161
DT102A SWITCH, EGT, 4 POSITION ALCOR OEM--80825
DT103A PROBE, EGT MOONEY 660110--000
/ALTERNATE ALCOR 86255
DT104A TRAY, LIGHT (28VDC) ALCOR 41338
DT105A TRAY, LIGHT (14V) ALCOR 41337
DV101A INDICATOR, FUEL FLOW MOONEY 880034--501
INDICATOR, FUEL FLOW (OPT) MOONEY 880034--503
DV101B INDICATOR, F/F (GALS) SHADIN 912021
INDICATOR, F/F (LBS) (OPT) SHADIN 912023
INDICATOR, F/F (GALS)(OPT) SHADIN 912041 1
INDICATOR, F/F (LBS)(OPT) SHADIN 912043 1
INDICATOR, F/F (LITERS)(OPT) SHADIN 912047 1
INDICATOR, F/F (GALS)(OPT) SHADIN 912081 2
DV102A TRANSDUCER, FUEL FLOW MOONEY 880030--501
(OPTIONAL) MOONEY 880030--503
DV102B TRANSDUCER, F/F SHADIN 680501B
EG101A ACTUATOR, LDG GR MOONEY 880037--507
(ALT) MOONEY 560254--503
(ALT) MOONEY 560254--501
EG104A SWITCH, LDG GR. A/S SAFETY MOONEY 880013--507
ELT101A SWITCH, ELT PANEL ARTEX 110--416
ELT102A TRANSMITTER, ELT ARTEX 453--0150
F1 FUSE, 1 AMP LITTEL 313001
F2 FUSE, 5 AMP--3AG--SLO--BLO LITTEL 313005
F3 FUSE, 10 AMP SLO--BLO LITTEL 313010
F4 FUSE, 5 AMP McGRAW--EDISON FM01--5A
FH1 HOLDER, FUSE LITTEL 155020
(ALT) LITTEL 155120
FH2 HOLDER, FUSE McGRAW--EDISON FHN42W
FON1 PHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--11
/WASHER SWITCHCRAFT S--1028
FON2 PHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--112B
JE101A IGNITION CONTROL LASAR (SLICK) CD--1001--02
CABLE LASAR CH1001--XX
JM101A SWITCH, MAGNETO BENDIX SCINTILLA 10--357210--9
/PLACARD BENDIX SCINTILLA 10--187--468
/TERMINAL LUG BENDIX SCINTILLA 10--126656
JM101B SWITCH, MAG. (W/CONN.) JANCO 97--2273--1
91--20--02
Page 31

JM102A MAGNETO BENDIX SCINTILLA D--4LN2021
(ALT) BENDIX SCINTILLA D4LN--3000
(ALT) LYCOMING LW--682555--11
JM103A PLUG, MAGNETO BENDIX SCINTILLA 10--382698
JM104A MAGNETO SLICK 6244
JM105A MAGNETO, LEFT SLICK 6261
JM106A MAGNETO, RIGHT SLICK 6260
JM107A SWITCH, IGNITION TCM 10--357240--1
JM108A MAGNETO, LH SLICK 6393
JM109A MAGNETO, RH SLICK 6350
JM110A IGNITION, PULSAR MOONEY 800315--501
JM111A MAGNETO, L/R BENDIX S6RN--25--10
JM112A MAGNETO, LH SLICK (LASAR) CD--4771
JM112A MAGNETO, RH SLICK (LASAR) CD--4770
JM MAGNETO, LH SLICK (W/O LASAR) 4372 (Rev.C)
JM MAGNETO, RH SLICK (W/O LASAR) 4370 (Rev.C)
L1 BULB, 28V GE 464--T--3 1/4
L2 BULB, 14V GE 168--T--3 1/4
L3 BULB GE 385
L4 BULB, 14V GE 330
L5 BULB CHI. MINI. CM7--7330
L6 BULB CHI. MINI. CM7--7327
L7 BULB GE 370
L8 BULB GE 1816
L9 BULB GE 327 (AV RED)
L10 BULB (28V) GE 327
L11 BULB GE 1818
L12 BULB GE 1495
LB101A C/B, BEACON, ROTATING MOONEY 930023--243 WHT
LB101B C/B, BEACON, ROTATING MOONEY 930023--343 BLK
LB102A LIGHT, ROTATING BEACON WHELEN WRML--24
/ADAPTER WHELEN WRML--65
LB102B LIGHT, ANTI--COLLISION (RED) WHELEN 90033--19
LB102C LIGHT, ANTI--COLLISION (WH) WHELEN 90033--20
LENS1 ANNUNC. LENS (US) MOONEY 880048--613
LENS2 ANNUNCIATOR LENS (FR) MOONEY 880048--615
LENS3 ANNUNCIATOR LENS (US) MOONEY 880048--617
LENS4 ANNUNCIATOR LENS (FR) MOONEY 880048--619
LENS5 ANNUNCIATOR LENS MOONEY 880048--621
LENS6 ANNUNCIATOR LENS MOONEY 880048--623
LG101A C/B, LOGO LIGHT MOONEY 930023--357 BLK
LG102A LIGHT, LOGO WHELEN A730--1--28
LH1 LAMP HOLDER MOONEY 914083--1
LH2 LAMP, HOLDER DIALIGHT 270--1930--0171--702
LH3 LAMP HOLDER WHELEN A--350--CN--CL--BK--SH--28
LH4 LAMP HOLDER SLOAN 855S--O--U
/WASHER, LOCK, INT. TOOTH MS35334--21
/WASHER, LOCK, INT. TOOTH ALLEN BRADLEY M2898
LH5 LAMP HOLDER INSTRUMENTS 0211--128
LH6 LAMP HOLDER INSTRUMENTS BA28--24--BW3
91--20--02
Page 32

LH7 LAMP HOLDER SIGMA TEC 1V--192--971
LH8 LAMP HOLDER HH SMITH 1930
(ALT) LEECRAFT 7--05
(ALT) ALLIED 931--3103)
(ALT) SPC LSL--11--128U
(ALT) NEWARK 81N2561)
LH9 LAMP HOLDER HH SMITH 1925
LH10 LAMP HOLDER WHELEN 01--0770437--00
LH11 LAMP HOLDER TEK--LITE LC--28--5
(ALT) MS1745--51A
LH12 LAMP HOLDER, BAGGAGE LT WHELEN 01--077--0142--04
LL101A SWITCH, LANDING LT MOONEY 880052--521
LL101B SWITCH, LANDING LT MOONEY 880052--121
LL102A LIGHT, TAXI/LDG, LH/RH (28V) GE 4596
LN101A C/B, NAV LIGHTS MOONEY 930023--251 WHT
LN101B C/B,NAV LIGHTS MOONEY 930023--351 BLK
LN102A LIGHT ASSY, WING, NAV--TAIL MOONEY 800051--501
LP101A DIMMER CTRL BOX (28V/14v) MOONEY 800299--501
LP102A DIMMER CONTROL BOX (28V) MOONEY 800299--503
LP103A DIMMER CONTROL BOX (14V) MOONEY 800299--505
LP104A SWITCH, LIGHT ASSY MOONEY 150085--501
LP105A INVERTER, PLACARD (O/H) ERG LPS28--3--3P
LR101A C/B, RECOGNITION LIGHT MOONEY 930023--231 WHT
LR101B C/B, RECOGNITION LIGHT MOONEY 930023--331 BLK
LR102A RECOGNITION LIGHT MOONEY 880049--501
LS101A C/B, STROBE LIGHT MOONEY 930023--237 WHT
LS101B C/B, LIGHTS, STROBE MOONEY 930023--337 BLK
LS102A POWER SUPPLY, STROBE WHELEN 01--0770329--00
LS102B POWER SUPPLY, STROBE WHELEN 01--0770329--01
LS103A STROBE/NAV LT ASSY (LH/WG) WHELEN 01--0770054--12
LS104A STROBE/NAV LT ASSY (RH/WG) WHELEN 01--0770054--13
LS105A STROBE/TAIL LT ASSY MOONEY 470013--501
LS106A POWER SUPPLY (TAIL) WHELEN A413A,HDA,DF--28
LT101A SWITCH, TAXI LT MOONEY 880052--523
LT101B SWITCH, TAXI LT MOONEY 880052--123
LT102A TAXI LIGHT LT/RT G.E. 4596
MA101A RECEPTACLE, AUX POWER AN2552--3A
MB101A C/B--SWITCH, AVIONICS MSTR MOONEY 930023--213 WHT
MB101B C/B--SWITCH, RADIO MSTR MOONEY 930023--313 BLK
MC101A CIGAR LIGHTER MOONEY 800336--503
ME101A CLOCK MID--CONT MD--89
(ALT) PORSCHE 944.641.213.00
ME102A CONN, 4 PIN (ALT) MID--CONT 6016177
PIN MID--CONT 6016125
CONN, 4 PIN PORSCHE 944.612.217.00
PIN PORSCHE 999.652.351.12
MIC1 MICROPHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--12B
91--20--02
Page 33

MP101A C/B--SW, PROP DE--ICE MOONEY 930023--245 WHT
MP101B C/B--SW., PROP. DE--ICE MOONEY 930023--345 BLK
MP102A TIMER, PROP DE--ICE B.F. GOODRICH 3E1899--1
MP102B TIMER, PROP DE--ICE McCAULEY B--45018
MP103A TERMINAL BLOCK McCAULEY C--40521
NF101A C/B--SW, LOW--BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--211 WHT
NF101B C/B--SW., BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--311 BLK
NF102A PUMP, BOOST WELDON A8163B
(ALT) WELDON 8163B
NF103A PUMP, BOOST WELDON 8163A
(ALT) WELDON A8163A
NF104A PUMP, BOOST WELDON 10054B
NF105A PUMP, BOOST WELDON A10051D
NF106A PUMP, BOOST WELDON A8152--B
NF108A REGLTR, FUEL BOOST PUMP MASSEY VR536
NF109A C/B--SW, HI--BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--219 WHT
PA101A REGULATOR, VOLTAGE MOONEY 800270--501
(ALT) AMERICAN PROD DGR--2
(ALT) ELECTRODELTA VR--802
PA102A SWITCH, ALT FLD (DUAL) MOONEY 880052--525
PA103A SWITCH, ALT FLD (SINGLE) MOONEY 880052--503
PA104A ALTERNATOR LYCOMING LW--14367
(ALT) PRESTOLITE ALU--6421--LS
PA105A ALTERNATOR LYCOMING LW15404
(ALT) PRESTOLITE ALY--8420
PA106A ALTERNATOR TCM 649280
(ALT) TCM 649172
\GEAR ASSEMBLY TCM 649123
PA107A ALTERNATOR ELECTRO SYSTEMS ES 4009--LS
PA108A FILTER MOONEY 880014--501
(ALT) MOONEY 800307--501
PA109A SENSOR, CURRENT MICRO SW CSLA1GE
PA111A SENSOR, CURRENT (110 A) KLIXON 7235--1--110
PA111B SENSOR, CURRENT (175 A) KLIXON 7236--1--175
PA112A ALTERNATOR (100A) TCM 649304
PB101A BATTERY GILL G--243
PB102A SWITCH, MASTER MOONEY 880052--501
PB102B SWITCH, MASTER MOONEY 880052--101
PB103A SWITCH, BATTERY SELECT MOONEY 880052--527
PB103B SWITCH, BATTERY SELECT MOONEY 880052--127
PB105A BATTERY CONCORDE RG24--11M
PL02A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
PL02B PLUG, 2 PIN MOLEX 03--06--1023
PL02C PLUG, 2 PIN(FEMALE) DEAN DEA900020
PL02D PLUG, 2 PIN MS3106A--24--9S
PL03A PLUG, 3 PIN AMP 1--380303--0
PL03B PLUG, 3 PIN AMP 206037--2
91--20--02
Page 34

PL03C PLUG, 3 PIN MS3106A--10SL--3S
PL03D PLUG, 3 PIN MS3106A--28--6P
PL04A PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 206060--1
PL04B PLUG, 4 PIN MS3106A--32--17S
PL05A PLUG, 5 PIN MS3106A--14S--5S
PL06A PLUG, 6 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE MS3106A--28--22S
PL09B PLUG, 9 PIN AMPHENOL 126--222
PL09C PLUG, 9 PIN DE--9S
PL09D PLUG, 9 PIN MOLEX 03--06--2092
PL09E PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206485--1
PL14A PLUG, 14 PIN MOONEY 930021--1
PL14B PLUG, 14 PIN MOONEY 930021--513
PL14C PLUG, 14 PIN AMP 206043--3
PL15A PLUG, 15 PIN DA15S
PL17A PLUG, 17 PIN DBM17W2S
PL25A PLUG, 25 PIN DB25S
PL25B PLUT, 15 PIN AMP 205208--1
PL32A PLUG, 32 PIN**** MATRIX SCIENCE M83723/86R2232N
PL37B PLUG, 37 PIN DC37S
PS101A C/B, STARTER SOL. KLIXON 7277--2--10
PS102A C/B, STARTER SOL. KLIXON 7277--2--5
PS103A STARTER PRESTOLITE MHJ--4016
(ALT) LYCOMING LW--15572
PS104A STARTER TCM 646275
(ALT) TCM 637847
PS105A STARTER B & C SPECIALITY BSC206--149
R1 RESISTOR (20 OHM/10W) DALE RH--10--20 OHM
R3 RESISTOR,MAPLT (500 OHM) NEWARK 919029--501
R4 RESISTOR (100 OHM) NEWARK 09F976
R5 RESISTOR (7.5 OHM) DALE RH--50--7.5 OHM
R6 RESISTOR (1K OHM/2W) ALLEN--BRADLEY RC42--GF102J
R7 RESISTOR (5K OHM) ALLEN BRADLEY WA2--G056S502UA
(ALT) SELECTROL 149--11--502
(ALT) BOURNS 3862C--282--502A
(ALT) NEWARK 12F9905R 5.0K
R8 RESISTOR (150 OHM/3W) CLAROSTAT VC3D
(ALT) OHMITE 23J
R9 RESISTOR (3.9K OHM/ 1/2W) OHMITE N/A
91--20--02
Page 35

R10 RESISTOR (3.0K OHM/ 1/2W) OHMITE N/A
R13 RESISTOR (10.0K OHM/1W) OHMITE N/A
RB101A BLOWER, RADIO KING 071--4037--01
RC02A RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN AMP 1--480319--0
RC02C RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN (MALE) DEAN DEA900020
RC02D RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN MS3100--24--9P
RC03B RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN AMP 206036--2
RC03C RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN AMP 206207--1
RC03D RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN MS3100--28--6S
RC04A RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 206153--1
RC04B RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN MS3100--32--17P
RC06A RECEPTACLE, 6 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE MS3100C--28--22P
RC09C RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN DE9P
RC09E RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMP 205486--1
RC12A RECEPTACLE, 12 PIN MOLEX 03--06--2122
RC14A RECEPTACLE, 14 PIN MOONEY 930021--2
RC26B RECEPTACLE, 26 PIN MOONEY 930021--506
RC32A RECEPTACLE, 32 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE M83723/83K2232N
RL1 RELAY, BATT. (28V/200A) C--H 6041H--202
(ALT) C--H 6041H--202A
(ALT) KISSLING 26.57.01
RL2 RELAY, BATT. (14V/200A) C--H 6041H--105A
RL3 RELAY KISSLING 26.64.01
RL5 RELAY, LDG. (28V/50A) C--H 6041H--220
/BRACKET (2 EA) MOONEY 800375--001
RL6 RELAY (28V/100A) C--H 6041H--53
RL7 RELAY, (14V/200A) C--H 6041H--105R
RL8 RELAY MAGNACRAFT W67RCSX--3
91--20--02
Page 36

R10 RELAY P&B VF4--15--H11
SOCKET P&B VCF4--1002
TERMINAL P&B 26A1348C
SA101A ALTERNATOR, STAND--BY B&C BC410--1
HOUSING, CONNECTOR B&C 12--003
TERMINAL (1/4”) B&C 14--026
SA102A CONTROLLER, STBY. ALT. B&C BC203--2
SB101A C/B, SPEEDBRAKE KLIXON 7277--2--3
SB102A SWITCH, CONTROL WHL PRECISE FLT 01265
SB103A RELAY, SPEEDBRAKE PRECISE FLT 01384
SB104A DIODE 1N2483
(ALT) 1N5060
(ALT) GE 3720--GE
SB105A MOTOR, SPEEDBRAKE PRECISE FLT 01532
SB106A SWITCH, SPEEDBRAKE PRECISE FLT 01505
SB107A SOLENOID, CLUTCH PRECISE FLT 01678
SB108A INTERFACE, SPEEDBRAKE MOONEY 800314--501
SPK1 SPEAKER, ALERT ARCHER 40--1333C
SPK2 SPEAKER, CABIN ARCHER 40--1325
SPK3 SONALERT MALLORY SC628
SW1 SWITCH MICRO 1SE1--T
SW2 SWITCH, DEF. BLWR. CHERRY E51--50B
SW3 SWITCH, LIMIT, RUD.TRIM MICRO V3--1
SW4 SWITCH,UP LIMIT, LDG MICRO DT--2R--47
SW5 SWITCH, DN LIMIT, LDG OTTO P6--24014
(ALT) MICRO 1CH116--6
SW6 SWITCH, CABIN LTS CARLING RC911--VBBOW
SW7 SWITCH MOONEY 880013--507
SW8 SWITCH, LDG C--H 8906K2875
SW9 SWITCH, MIC--KEY ALCO MPE--106F--C--22--9
(ALT) C--H SA1RV20
SW10 SWITCH, CHT GRAYHILL 71AD30--02--2--AJN
SW11 SWITCH, FLAP C--H 8906K4731
SW12 SWITCH, CABIN LTS(MASTER)CARLING RA911--VBBOW
SW13 SWITCH (ALT) MICRO 12TW1--10
/CAP, WHITE MICRO 15PA90--8W
(ALT) MS27753--38
SW14 SWITCH, F/F MEM. C&K 7101K
SW15 SWITCH, LDG, OVERRIDE NKK DLB241--W01--L3C/
AT506M/AT503MB
/BUTTON/LOCK RING/LOCK WASHER/HEX NUT (2 EA) (NKK)
/SWITCH (ALT) C--H SB1DDX492--2
/LOCK RING C--H 29--761
/LOCK WASHER C--H 16--886
/HEX NUT (2 EA) C--H 15--966--6
SW16 SWITCH, VAC. HI/LO MOONEY 880012--501
SW17 SWITCH CARLING TILC64--1S--WHFN
SW (ALT) TSCHUDIN 504202
LENS TSCHUDIN 464415
BULB TSCHUDIN 590002
91--20--02
Page 37

SW18 SWITCH MOONEY 880062--501
SW19 SWITCH CARLING TIGM64--1S--WHFN
SW20 SWITCH MS35058--22
SW21 SWITCH, MIKE KEY CROUZET 83--450--001
SW22 SWITCH, SPDBRK CROUZET 83--452--504
SW23 SWITCH ALCO MPE106F
SW25 SWITCH NKK MB2085SB1W01--EA
SW35 SWITCH NKK MB2085SB1W01--EA
VR1 VARISTOR GE V47ZA05
WM101A MASTER WARNING MICRO SWITCH DSK--104--GYR
WM102A MASTER WARNING MICRO SWITCH DSB--11--RRRR--LR2
WS101A ALERT, STALL WARN/GEAR IAI 950D0309--000
WS103A SWITCH, STALL WARNING MOONEY 800364--507
WT101A ANNUNCIATOR MOONEY 880048--501
NOTES:
SYSTEMS.
2. SHADIN MODEL NO. INTERFACE WITH BENDIX/KING KLN--88 OR KLN90 SERIES.
3. B & D TACH SENSOR’S P/N 0406--004 IS 9/16 “ DIAMETER FOR BENDIX MAGNETOS. 0406--003
IS 11/16 ”
DIAMETER FOR SLICK MAGNETOS
91--20--02
Page 38
RESERVED FOR FUTURE ENTRIES
91--20--02
Page 39
91--20--02
Page 40
91--20--03 -- ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HARDWARE CHART -- 28 VOLT
S/N 27--0240 THRU 27--0246 -- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800383 (M1) (REV G)
S/N 27--0247 THRU 27--0257 -- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800383 (M2) (REV H)
S/N 27--0258 THRU 27--0279 -- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800383 (M3) (REV R)
S/N 27--0280 THRU 27--0317; 27--0320 THRU 27--0323 -- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800383 (M5) (REV V)
S/N 27--0324, 27--0325 -- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800383 (M6) (REV V)
S/N 27--0319, -- SCHEMATIC DWG. NO. 800383 (M7) (REV V)
S/N 27--0318 (OPT), 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA (GX WITHOUT A/C) -- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800413 (M1) (REV B)
S/N 27--0318 (OPT), 27--0326 THRU 27--TBA (GX WITH OPTIONAL ENGINE DRIVEN A/C)
-- SCHEMATIC DWG NO. 800413 (M2) (REV B)
AC101A SWITCH, AIR COND. MOONEY 880067--501
AC102A COMPRESSOR, AIR COND MOONEY 770028--501
AC103A BLOWER, EVAP., FRONT MOONEY 770002--501
AC103B BLOWER, EVAP., REAR MOONEY 770002--503
AC104A BLOWER, CONDENSER MOONEY 770016--501
AC105A SWITCH, AIR COND. PRESSURE MOONEY 770029--501
AC106A CONNECTOR, AIR COND CORY COMP. CSLT--21PA
/CONTACTS CORY COMP. CB017--5S
ACT1/AT101A ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JE--5
ACT2/AT102A ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JV--5
ACT4/AT104A ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH MCD--2711
ACT5/AT105A ACTUATOR MICRO SWITCH JE--17
AIR101A SWITCH, A/C MOONEY 880067--501
AIR102A COMPRESSOR, A/C MOONEY 770028--1
AIR103A EVAP. BLOWER (FRT) MOONEY 770002--501
AIR103B EVAP. BLOWER, (REAR) MOONEY 770002--503
AIR104A CONDENSER BLOWER MOONEY 770016--501
AIR105A SWITCH, A/C PRESS. MOONEY 770029--501
BL1 BULB GE 1818
/HOLDER FOR BL1 HH SMITH 1930
BL2 BULB GE 1816
/HOLDER FOR BL2 HH SMITH 1930
BL5 BULB (CONSOLE) GE 327
(ALT) GE 385
BL6 BULB (COMPASS) GE 327(AV RED)
BL7 BULB (POST LIGHT) GE 330
BR7.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER (7.5A) KLIXON 7277--2--7.5
(ALT) ETA 483--G533--J1M1--C4S0Z--25A
BR30 CIRCUIT BREAKER (30) MECH PROD 700--001--30
BR40B (ALT) MECH PROD 700--001--40
91--20--03
Page 41

BRSW7 5 C/B--SWITCH KLIXON 7270--5--7.5
BS1/BS101A RELAY, BASE MAGNACRAFT 70--303
BU2A/BUS2A BUSS BAR (2 PLC) MOONEY 913127--033
BU2B/BUS2B BUSS BAR (2 PLC) MOONEY 913127--097
BU2C/BUS2C BUSS BAR ( ) MOONEY 913127--099
BU2D BUSS BAR (2 PLC) MOONEY 913127--075
BU2E BUSS BAR (2 PLC) MOONEY 913127--065
BU3C/BUS3C BUSS BAR (3 PLC) MOONEY 913127--073
BU4D BUSS BAR (4 PLC) MOONEY 913127--053
BU5D/BUS5D BUSS BAR (5 PLC) MOONEY 913127--019
BW3 SWITCH--C/B (3A) KLIXON 7270--5--3
BW7.5 SWITCH--C/B (7.5A) KLIXON 7270--5--7.5
C1/CA101A CAPACITOR MALLORY CGS302V--050R2C
CA102A CAPACITOR (1000 PF) NEWARK 18F2711 TYPE 5GAD10
CAP1 CAP, WHITE MICRO SW 15PA90--8W
CAP2 CAP, BLACK ALCO SW C--22
CAP3 CAP, DUST MATRIX SCIENCE. M83723/60--122RC
CB101A BLOWER, DEFROST MOONEY 640317--503
(ALT) MOONEY 640317--505
CC101A MOTOR, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880050--505
CC102A INDICATOR, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880242--505
(ALT) MOONEY 800391--505
CC103A SWITCH, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880052--517
CC103B SWITCH, COWLFLAP (M20J) MICRO--SWITCH 12TW1--10
CC103C SWITCH, COWL FLAP MOONEY 880052--129
CF101A ACTUATOR, FLAP MOONEY 750105--501
(ALT) MOONEY 800391--505
CF103A TRIM/FLAP ASSY MOONEY 800376--501
CF108A SWITCH, FLAP C--H 8906K3149
CL03A CLAMP, 3/14/16/28 PIN AMP 206070--1
CL03B CLAMP, 3 PIN AMP M85049--41--4A
CL03C CLAMP, 3 PIN MS3057--4A
(ALT) MS3057--4B
CL04A CLAMP, 4/8 PIN AMP 206062--1
91--20--03
Page 42

CL04D CLAMP, 4 PIN BENDIX 10--101971--8--3
CL05A CLAMP, 5 PIN MS3057--6A or --6B
CL05B CLAMP, 5 PIN DEUTSCH BVDSREC02SR
CL06A CLAMP, 6 PIN MS3057--16A or --16B
CL06B CLAMP, 6 PIN MS3417--28C
CL06B CLAMP, 6 PIN MS3417--28C
CL07A CLAMP, 7 PIN MS3057--12B
/SLEEVE MS3420
CL07B CONNECTOR CPPSR02A
CL09A CLAMP, 9 PIN, LT. CONT. BOX AMP 206966--1
CL09B CLAMP, 9 PIN AMP P/O 126--222
CL09C CLAMP, 9 PIN DE--24657
/LOCK RETAINER DE--51224--1
/LOCK RETAINER (ALT) D110278
/LOCK RETAINER (ALT) D--20419--16
CL09D CLAMP, 9 PIN DE19977--5
/LOCK, RETAINER DE51224--1
CL09E CLAMP, 9 PIN DE--51218--1
CL15A CLAMP, 15 PIN DA51210--1
CL15B CLAMP, 15 PIN DA19977--1
(ALT) DA24658
CL25B CLAMP, 25 PIN DB19977--2
CL25C CLAMP, 25 PIN DB24659
/LOCK, RETAINER D20418--2
CL32A CLAMP, 32 PIN M85049/52--1--22N
CL32B CLAMP, BOOT MS3420--14
(ALT) MS3420--16
CL37A CLAMP, 37 PIN 206138--1
CL37B CLAMP, 37 IN DC19977--3
/LOCK, RETAINER DC51222--1
CM1/CM101A CURRENT MONITOR MOONEY 800221--505
CR101A SWITCH, RUDDER TRIM, WHT MOONEY 880052--519
CR101B SWITCH, RUDDER TRIM, BLK MOONEY 880052--119
CR102A MOTOR, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 880050--503
CR103A INDICATOR, RUDDER TRIM MOONEY 800242--503
(ALT) MOONEY 800391--503
CT101A SWITCH, ELEV TRIM, BLK MOONEY 930023--329
CT102A INDICATOR, ELEV TRIM MOONEY 800242--519
CT103A MOTOR, ELEV TRIM S--TEC 01165--0--T14
CT104A INTERFACE, TRIM MOONEY 800313--501
CT105A INDICATOR, ELEV. TRIM MOONEY 800391--501
CV101A C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC, WHT MOONEY 930023--233(15A) WHT
CV101B C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC, BLK MOONEY 930023--333 BLK
CV104A C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC, WHT MOONEY 930023--247 (3A) WHT
CV104B C/B--SW, STAND--BY VAC, BLK MOONEY 930023--347 BLK
CV105A CLUTCH/PUMP, STD--BY VAC AIRBORNE 28C214--CW--2
91--20--03
Page 43

D1 DIODE 1N2483
(ALT) 1N5060
(ALT) GE 3720GE
D2 DIODE SARKES--TARZ. 10H3P
(ALT) ECG 5854
(ALT) NTE 5854
DA101A AMMETER SHUNT EMPRO MLA--70A--100MV
(ALT) JANCO 8406--70
DA101B AMMETER SHUNT EMPRO MLA--150A--100MV
(ALT) JANCO 8406--150
DB101A TURN COORDINATOR UNITED INST. 9013 CODE N.5
(ALT) ASTRONAUTICS 303990--028MSC
(ALT) ELECT. GYRO 1394T100--3Z
(ALT) UNITED INST. 9114 CODE N.21
DB102A TURN COORDINATOR UNITED INST. 9112 CODE N.9
DC101A PROBE, CYLINDER #1 MS24482--1
(ALT) AN5546--1*
* USE AN4076--1 ADAPTER.
------ (ALT) NORWICH 102--00007
DD101A INDICATOR, O.A.T. MOONEY 880059--159
DD102A O.A.T. PROBE MOONEY 880004--501
DD103A SOCKET, 4 PIN CINCH--JONES S----304--CCT
DF101A FUEL XMTR, LH/RH I/B MOONEY 610242--003
DF102A FUEL XMTR, LH O/B MOONEY 610243--003
DF103A FUEL XMTR, RH O/B MOONEY 610243--001
DF104A FUEL XMTR, LH/RH O/B MOONEY 610242--005
DF105A TRANSMITTER, FUEL AVAQ SYST. 9450563001
DF106A ARM, FLOAT, RH, I/B AVAQ SYST 9400563102
DF107A ARM, FLOAT, RH, O/B AVAQ SYST 9400563104
DF108A ARM, FLOAT, LH, I/B AVAQ SYST 9400563101
DF109A ARM, FLOAT, LH, O/B AVAQ SYST 9400563103
DF110A TRANSDUCER AVAQ SYST 9450563002
DF111A PROCESSOR AVAQ SYST 9450563003
DG110A D/A CLUSTER MOONEY 880093--501
DG112A DIGITAL CLUSTER MOONEY 880093--505
DG113A DIGITAL CLUSTER MOONEY 880093--507
DH101A PROBE, OIL TEMP MOONEY 880061--501
DH102A PROBE, OIL TEMP MS28034--1
DI101A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
(ALT) GE 3720--GE
DI102A DIODE SARKES TARZ 10H3P
(ALT) ECG 5854
(ALT) NTE 5854
DI104A DIODE BRIDGE FAGOR FB5001
DI105A DIODE BRIDGE FAGOR FB5006
91--20--03
Page 44

DJ101A TRANSDUCER, O/P (M20J) DRUCK PDCR 821--0662--100
(ALT) (M20J) KULITE APT--154--1000--100PSIG
(ALT) PATRIOT KA21--014--100G
DJ101B TRANSDUCER, O/P (M20M) KULITE APT--201--1000--100G
DK101A TRANSDUCER, F/P DRUCK PDCR--821--0662--30
(ALT) KULITE APT--153--1000--30PSIG
DK102A TRANSDUCER, F/P DRUCK PDCR--920--U143--50 PSID
(ALT) KULITE APT--155--1000--50D
(ALT) PATRIOT KA21--016--50G
DL102A SENSOR, TACH B&D 0400--004
DL104A TACH SENSOR (SLICK MAGS) B&D 0402--102
DL104B TACH SENSOR (BENDIX MAGS) B&D 0402--104
DL104C TACH SENSOR (ALT. DL104B) B&D 0406--004 * 3
DL104D TACH SENSOR (ALT. DL104A) B&D 0406--003 * 3
* INSTALLED ON O--550 ENGINE BY TELEDYNE CONTINENTAL MOTORS.
DL107A SENSOR, TACH (SLICK MAGS) J--P INSTR . 420809
DL108A SENSOR, TACH (BENDIX MAGS) J--P INSTR. 420807
(ALT) DATCON SG--70
(ALT) HOBBS 15000
DP101A C/B, PITOT HEAT, WHT MOONEY 930023--205 WHT
DP101B C/B, PITOT HEAT, BLK MOONEY 930023--305 BLK
DP101C C/B, PITOT HEAT, BLK MOONEY 930023--353 BLK
DP102A HEATED PITOT AERO INSTR PH502--24
(ALT) AN5812--1
DP103A PITOT, HEATED AERO INSTR PH502--12
(ALT) AN5812
DP104A PLUG, 2 PIN AN3115--1
DP105A SOCKET AN3116--1
DR101A PROBE, TIT MOONEY 880055--503
DR101B PROBE, TIT MOONEY 880055--505
DT101A IND., EGT ALCOR 46361
DT101B IND., EGT ALCOR OEM--46161
DT102A SWITCH, EGT, (4 POSITION) ALCOR OEM--80825
DT103A PROBE, EGT MOONEY 660110--000
(ALT) ALCOR 86255
DT104A TRAY, LIGHT (28VDC) ALCOR 41338
DT105A TRAY, LIGHT (14V) ALCOR 41337
DU105A TRANSDUCER, MAP KULITE APTE--251--1000--25A
(ALT) PATRIOT KA21--015--25A
DV101A INDICATOR, FUEL FLOW MOONEY 880034--501
91--20--03
Page 45

DV101B INDICATOR, F/F (GALS) SHADIN 912021
INDICATOR, F/F (LBS) (OPT) SHADIN 912023
INDICATOR, F/F (GALS) (OPT) SHADIN 912041 1
INDICATOR, F/F (LBS) (OPT) SHADIN 912043 1
INDICATOR, F/F (LITERS) (OPT) SHADIN 912047 1
INDICATOR, F/F (GALS) (OPT) SHADIN 912081 1
DV102A TRANSDUCER, FUEL FLOW MOONEY 880030--501
(OPTIONAL) MOONEY 880030--503
DV102B TRANSDUCER, F/F SHADIN 680501B
DW101A TRANSDUCER, VAC. GAUGE MICRO SW 141PC15G (800383--501)
(FOR SIGMA--TEC & MORITZ UNITS)
(ALT) MOONEY 560254--503
(ALT) MOONEY 560254--507
(ALT) MOONEY 560254--501
EG104A SWITCH, LDG GR. A/S SAFETY MOONEY 880013--507
ET101A/ELT101A SWITCH, ELT PANEL ARTEX 110--416
ET102A/ELT102A TRANSMITTER, ELT ARTEX 453--0150
ET103A CABLE ASSY, REMOTE AMERI--KING 4500041
ET104A REMOTE UNIT ASSY AMERI--KING 450004
REMOTE UNIT ASSY AMERI--KING 450004--1V/1H
ET105A ELT ASSY, MAIN AMERI--KING AK--450
F1/FU101A FUSE, 1 AMP LITTEL 313001
F2/FU102A FUSE, 5 AMP--3AG--SLO--BLO LITTEL 313005
F3/FU103A FUSE, 10 AMP SLO--BLO LITTEL 313010
F4/FU104A FUSE, 5 AMP McGRAW--EDISON FM01--5A
FU105A FUSE, .50 AMP McGRAW--EDISON FM01--.50A
FU106A FUSE, 2 AMP LITTEL 313002
FH1/FH101A HOLDER, FUSE LITTEL 155020
(ALT) LITTEL 155120
FH2/FH102A HOLDER, FUSE McGRAW--EDISON FHN42W
FN101A/FON1 PHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--11
FN102A/FON2 PHONE JACK SWITCHCRAFT C--112B
FU101A SEE F1/FU101A SERIES LISTING ABOVE
JE101A IGNITION CONTROL LASAR (SLICK) CD--1001--02
JE102A CABLE LASAR (SLICK) CH1001--XX
JE103A MAGNETO, LEFT SLICK (LAZAR) CD--4771
JE104A MAGNETO, RIGHT SLICK (LAZAR) CD--4770
JM101A SWITCH, MAGNETO BENDIX 10--357210--9
/PLACARD BENDIX 10--187--468
/TERMINAL LUG BENDIX 10--126656
JM101B SWITCH, MAG. (W/CONN.) JANCO 97--2273--1
JM102A MAGNETO BENDIX D4LN--2021
(ALT) BENDIX D4LN--3000
(ALT) LYCOMING LW--682555--11
JM103A PLUG, MAGNETO BENDIX 10--382698
JM104A MAGNETO SLICK 6244
JM105A MAGNETO, LEFT SLICK 6261
JM106A MAGNETO, RIGHT SLICK 6260
JM107A SWITCH, IGNITION TCM 10--357240--1
JM108A MAGNETO, LH SLICK 6393
91--20--03
Page 46

JM109A MAGNETO, RH SLICK 6350
JM110A IGNITION, PULSAR MOONEY 800315--501
JM111A MAGNETO, L & R BENDIX S6RN--25--10
(ALT) TCM/BENDIX 10--79020--10
JM112A MAGNETO, LH SLICK (LASAR) CD--4771
JM112A MAGNETO, RH SLICK (LASAR) CD--4770
JM MAGNETO, LH SLICK 4372 (Rev.C)
JM MAGNETO, RH SLICK 4370 (Rev.C)
JM113A MAGNETO, L & R TCM 640896--1
(ALT) BENDIX 10--79020--120
L1 BULB, 28V GE 464--T--3
LA101A BULB, 28V GE 400
L2/LA102A BULB, 14V GE 168--T--3 1/4
L3/LA103A BULB GE 385
L4/LA104A BULB, 14V GE 330
L5/LA105A BULB CHI. MINI. CM7--7330
L6/LA106A BULB CHI. MINI. CM7--7327
L9/LA109A BULB GE 327 (AV RED)
L10/LA110A BULB, 28V GE 327
LA113A BULB GE 4596
LA114A BULB PAC. PREC. P28028
LA115A BULB, LED MOUSER ELEC. 351--5003
LB101A C/B, BEACON, ROTATING MOONEY 930023--243 (WHT)
LB101B C/B, BEACON, ROTATING MOONEY 930023--343 (BLK)
LB102A LIGHT, ROTATING BEACON WHELEN WRML--24
/ADAPTER WHELEN WRML--65
LB102B LIGHT, ANTI--COLLISION (RED) WHELEN 90033--19
LB102C LIGHT, ANTI--COLLISION (WHITE) WHELEN 90033--20
LC101A LIGHT CONTROL BOX MOONEY 800268--509
LE107A ANNUNC. LENS (USA) MOONEY 880048--633 (M20J)
LE108A ANNUNC., LENS (FRANCE) MOONEY 880048--635 (M20J)
LE109A ANNUNC. LENS (USA) MOONEY 880048--625 (M20R)
LE110A ANNUNC. LENS (FRANCE) MOONEY 880048--627 (M20R)
LE111A ANNUNC. LENS (USA) MOONEY 880048--629 (M20R)
LE112A ANNUNC. LENS (FRANCE) MOONEY 880048--631 (M20R)
LE113A ANNUNC. LENS (USA) MOONEY 880048--605 (M20K)
LE114A ANNUNC. LENS (FRANCE) MOONEY 880048--607 (M20K)
LE115A LENS MOONEY 880089--001 (M20K)
LE116A LENS SLOAN 855--SE--C
LE117A LENS MOONEY 880089--003 (M20J)
LE119A LENS, MASTER WARN MOONEY 150080--6097
LENS1/LE101A ANNUNC. LENS (USA) MOONEY 880048--613 (M20J)
LENS2/LE102A ANNUNCIATOR LENS (FRANCE) MOONEY 880048--615 (M20J)
LENS3/LE103A ANNUNCIATOR LENS (USA) MOONEY 880048--617 (M20K, M20M)
LENS4/LE104A ANNUNCIATOR LENS (FRANCE) MOONEY 880048--619 (M20K, M20M)
LENS5/LE105A ANNUNCIATOR LENS MOONEY 880048--621 (M20T)
LENS6/LE106A ANNUNCIATOR LENS MOONEY 880048--623 (M20T)
LG101A C/B, LOGO LIGHT MOONEY 930023--357 (BLK)
LG102A LIGHT, LOGO WHELEN A730--1--28
LH1/LH101A LAMP HOLDER MOONEY 914083--1
LH2/LH102A LAMP, HOLDER DIALIGHT 270--1930--0171--702
LH3/LH103A LAMP HOLDER WHELEN A--350--CN--CL--BK--SH--28
91--20--03
Page 47

LH4/LH104A LAMP HOLDER SLOAN 855S--O--U 9
/WASHER, LOCK, INT. TOOTH MS35334--21
/WASHER, LOCK, INT. TOOTH ALLEN BRADLEY M2898
LH5/LH105A LAMP HOLDER INSTRUMENTS 0211--128
LH6/LH106A LAMP HOLDER INSTRUMENTS BA28--24--BW3
LH7/LH107A LAMP HOLDER SIGMA TEC 1V--192--971
LH8/LH108A LAMP HOLDER HH SMITH 1930
(ALT) LEECRAFT 7--05
(ALT) ALLIED 931--3103)
(ALT) SPC LSL--11--128U
(ALT) NEWARK 81N2561)
LH9/LH109A LAMP HOLDER HH SMITH 1925
LH10/LH110A LAMP HOLDER WHELEN 01--0770437--00
LH11/LH111A LAMP HOLDER, CABIN UTILITY TEK--LITE LC--28--5
(ALT) MS1745--51A
LH12/LH112A LAMP HOLDER, BAGGAGE LT WHELEN 01--077--0142--04 CLEAR
(ALT) WHELEN 01--077--0142--05 FROSTED
LH113A LAMP HOLDER MOUSER ELECT 351--0003
LL101A SWITCH, LANDING LT MOONEY 880052--521
LL101B SWITCH, LANDING LT MOONEY 880052--121
LN101A C/B, NAV LIGHTS MOONEY 930023--251 (WHT)
LN101B C/B, NAV LIGHTS MOONEY 930023--351 (BLK)
LN102A LIGHT ASSY,,NAV--TAIL (WING) MOONEY 800051--501
LN102B LIGHT ASSY, NAV--TAIL (WING) MOONEY 800051--509
LP101A DIMMER CTRL BOX(28V/14V) MOONEY (ELEC) 800299--501
LP102A DIMMER CTRL BOX(28V) MOONEY 800299--503
LP103A DIMMER CTRL BOX(14V) MOONEY 800299--505
LP104A PANEL,SW.,O/H LITE ASSY MOONEY 150085--005
LP105A INVERTER, PLACARD (O/H) ERG LPS28--3--3P
LR101A C/B--SW, RECOG. LIGHT MOONEY 930023--231 (WHT)
LR101B C/B--SW, RECOG. LIGHT MOONEY 930023--331 (BLK)
LR102A RECOGNITION LIGHT MOONEY 880049--501
LS101A C/B--SW, STROBE LIGHT MOONEY 930023--237 (WHT)
LS101B C/B--SW, STROBE LIGHT MOONEY 930023--337 (BLK)
LS102A POWER SUPPLY, STROBE WHELEN 01--0770329--00
LS102B POWER SUPPLY, STROBE WHELEN 01--0770329--01
LS103A STROBE/NAV LITE ASSY(LH/WG) WHELEN 01--0770054--12
LS104A STROBE/NAV LITE ASSY(RH/WG) WHELEN 01--0770054--13
LS105A STROBE/TAIL LIGHT ASSY MOONEY 470013--501
LS106A POWER SUPPLY (TAIL) WHELEN A413A--HDA--DF28
LIGHT, STROBE (DUAL) WHELEN A413A--HDA--CF
LT101A SWITCH, TAXI LIGHT MOONEY 880052--523
LT101B SWITCH, TAXI LIGHT MOONEY 880052--123
LT102A BULB, TAXI LIGHT, LH/RH G.E. 4596
MA101A RECEPTACLE, AUX POWER AN2552--3A
(ALT) MS3506--1
MB101A C/B--SWITCH, AVIONICS MASTER MOONEY 930023--213 (WHT)
MB101B C/B--SWITCH, RADIO MASTER MOONEY 930023--313 (BLK)
MC101A CIGAR LIGHTER MOONEY 800336--503
MC102A CAP & TETHER CASCO 216550
MC103A LIGHTER, SOCKET CASCO 216510
/WITH WIRE CASCO 200402
ME101A CLOCK MID--CONT MD--89
(ALT) PORSCHE 944.641.213.00
91--20--03
Page 48

ME102A CONN, 4 PIN MID--CONT 6016177
/WITH PINS MID--CONT 6016125
CONN, 4 PIN (OPT) PORSCHE 944.612.217.00
/WITH PINS PORSCHE 999.652.351.12
ME103A CLOCK DATRON MODEL 800
MIC1/MK101A JACK, MICROPHONE SWITCHCRAFT C--12B
/WASHERS SWITCHCRAFT S--1028
/WASHERS SWITCHCRAFT S--1029
MP101A C/B--SW, PROP DE--ICE MOONEY 930023--245 (WHT)
MP101B C/B--SW., PROP. DE--ICE MOONEY 930023--345 (BLK)
MP102A TIMER, PROP DE--ICE B.F. GOODRICH 3E1899--1
MP102B TIMER, PROP DE--ICE McCAULEY B--45018
MP103A TERMINAL BLOCK McCAULEY C--40521
NF101A C/B--SW, LOW--BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--211 (WHT)
NF101B C/B--SW., BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--311 (BLK)
NF102A PUMP, BOOST WELDON A8163B
(ALT) WELDON 8163B
NF103A PUMP, BOOST WELDON 8163A
(ALT) WELDON A8163A
NF104A PUMP, BOOST WELDON 10054B
NF105A PUMP, BOOST WELDON A10051D
NF106A PUMP, BOOST WELDON A8152--B
NF108A REGULATOR, FUEL BOOST PUMP MASSEY VR536
NF108B REGULATOR, FUEL BOOST PUMP MOONEY 800270--523A
NF109A C/B--SW, HI--BOOST PUMP MOONEY 930023--219 (WHT)
NF110A GUARD ASSEMBLY MOONEY 930028--501
(ALT) MOONEY 820316--503
PA101A REGULATOR, VOLTAGE MOONEY 800270--501/A
(IAI P/N 950050--3001)
(ALT) AMERICAN PROD DGR--2
(ALT) ELECTRODELTA VR--802
PA102A SWITCH, ALT FLD (DUAL) MOONEY 880052--525
PA103A SWITCH, ALT FLD (SINGLE) MOONEY 880052--503
(ALT) PRESTOLITE ALU--6421--LS
(ALT) PRESTOLITE ALY--8420
PA106A ALTERNATOR, RH TCM 649280
(ALT) TCM 649719
/GEAR ASSEMBLY TCM 649123
PA107A ALTERNATOR ELECT. SYST. ES 4009--LS
PA108A FILTER MOONEY 880014--501
(ALT) MOONEY 800307--501
PA109A SENSOR, CURRENT MICRO SW CSLA1GE
(ALT) 800397--501
PA111A SENSOR, CURRENT (110A) KLIXON 7235--1--110
PA111B SENSOR, CURRENT (175A) KLIXON 7236--1--175
PA112A ALTERNATOR (100A) TCM 649304
PA113A MONITOR, CURRENT MOONEY 800287--501
PA114A ALTERNATOR, LH TCM 649172
(ALT) TCM 649283
PB101A BATTERY GILL G--243
PB102A SWITCH, MASTER MOONEY 880052--501
PB102B SWITCH, MASTER MOONEY 880052--101
PB103A SWITCH, BATTERY -- 1/2 MOONEY 880052--527
91--20--03
Page 49

PB103B SWITCH, BATTERY -- 1/2 MOONEY 880052--127
PB105A BATTERY, MAINT. FREE CONCORDE RG24--11M
PB105B BATTERY, MAINT. FREE CONCORDE RG24--15
PL01A PLUG, 1 PIN AMP 1--480349--0
PL02A PLUG, 2 PIN AMP 1--480318--0
PL02B PLUG, 2 PIN MOLEX 03--06--1023
PL02C PLUG, 2 PIN (FEMALE) DEAN 7022 4
PL02D PLUG, 2 PIN MS3106A24--9S
PL03A PLUG, 3 PIN AMP 1--380303--0
PL03C PLUG, 3 PIN MS3106A10SL--3S
PL03D PLUG, 3 PIN MS3106A28--6P
PL03E PLUG, 3 PIN ARRAY CONN. PWF06F08--33A
(ALT) MS8126F8--33S
(ALT) SOURIA 851--06RC8--33S--50
SOCKET (ALUMEL) CDI 01--2020--245
SOCKET (CHROMEL)CDI 01--2020--244
PL04B PLUG, 4 PIN MS3106A32--17S
PL04C PLUG, 4 PIN AMP 1--480424--0
PL04D PLUG, 4 PIN ARRAY CONN. PW06F8--4S
PL05A PLUG, 5 PIN MS3106A14S--5S
PL05B PLUG, 5 PIN DEUTSCH BVD06EO205SN
PL06A PLUG, 6 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE MS3106A28--22S
(ALT) CA3106E2B--22S (F80)
PL07A PLUG, 7 PIN MS3106A20--15S
(ALT) MS3106R20--15S
(ALT) DEUTSCH BVD06E0207SN
PL07B SOCKET, CRIMP DEUTSCH BVD--20S
CLAMP [USE W/ PLO7B] DEUTSCH CPPSR02A
PL07C PLUG, 7 PIN DEUTSCH CPP0602B07S [TACH]
PL09B PLUG, 9 PIN AMPHENOL 126--222
PL09C PLUG, 9 PIN DE--9S
PL09D PLUG, 9 PIN MOLEX 03--06--2092
PL09E PLUG, 9 PIN AMP 206485--1
PL14C PLUG, 14 PIN AMP 206043--3
PL15A PLUG, 15 PIN 205163--1
PL17A PLUG, 17 PIN DBM17W2S
PL20B PLUG, 20 PIN POSITRONICS CC148--003--0.00
PL20C PLUG, 20 PIN POSITRONICS CC149--003--0.00
PL25A PLUG, 25 PIN 205165--1
PL25C PLUG, 25 PIN POSITRONICS MD25F20JVL0
PL32A PLUG, 32 PIN**** MATRIX SCIENCE M83723/86R2232N
PL37B PLUG, 37 PIN DC37S
91--20--03
Page 50

PL104A PLUG, 104 PIN POSITRONICS GMCT104F0TH000
PS101A C/B, STARTER SOLENOID KLIXON 7277--2--10
PS102A C/B, STARTER SOLENOID KLIXON 7277--2--5
PS103A STARTER PRESTOLITE MHB--4016
(ALT) LYCOMING LW--15572
PS104A STARTER TCM 646275
(ALT) TCM 637847
PS105A STARTER B & C SPEC. BSC206--149
R1/RS101A RESISTOR (20 OHM/10W) DALE RH--10--20 OHM
R3/RS103A RESISTOR,MAPLIGHT (500 OHM) MOONEY 919029--501
R4/RS104A RESISTOR (100 OHM) NEWARK 09F976
R5RS105A RESISTOR (7.5 OHM) DALE RH--50--7.5 OHM
R6/RS106A RESISTOR (1K OHM/2W) ALLEN--BRAD. RC42--GF102J
R7/RS107A RESISTOR (5K OHM) ALLEN--BRAD. WA2--G056S502UA
(ALT) SPECTROL 149--11--502 5
(ALT) BOURNS 3862C--282--502A
(ALT) NEWARK 12F9905R 5.0K
R8/RS108A RESISTOR (150 OHM/3W) CLAROSTAT VC3D
(ALT) OHMITE 23J
R9/RS109A RESISTOR (3.9K OHM/ 1/2W) OHMITE N/A
R10/RS110A RESISTOR (3.0K OHM/ 1/2W) OHMITE N/A
(ALT) OHMITE 810F75R
R13 RESISTOR (10.0K OHM/1W) OHMITE N/A
RS113A RESISTOR (15.0K OHM/1/4W) OHMITE N/A
RS114A RESISTOR, DUAL (5.0K OHM) ALLIED 753--8059
RC02C RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN (MALE) DEAN 7021 4
RC02D RECEPTACLE, 2 PIN MS3100--24--9P
RC03D RECEPTACLE, 3 PIN MS3100--28--6S
RC04B RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN MS3100--32--17P
RC04C RECEPTACLE, 4 PIN AMP 1--480426--0
RC05B RECEPTACLE, 5 PIN DEUTSCH BVD04E0205PN
RC06A RECEPTACLE, 6 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE MS3100K--28--22P
(ALT) MATRIX SCIENCE MS33450KT28--22P
CLAMP [USE W/ RC06A] MS3417--28C
RC07B RECEPTACLE, 7 PIN DEUTSCH BVD04E0207PN
CRIMP PINS DEUTSCH BVD--20P (AR)
RC07C RECEPTACLE, 7 PIN DEUTSCH CPP0023B07S
CLAMP [USE W/ RC07C] DEUTSCH CPP0002B07P
RC09C RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN DE9P
RC09E RECEPTACLE, 9 PIN AMP 205486--1
RC12A RECEPTACLE, 12 PIN MOLEX 03--06--2122
91--20--03
Page 51

(ALT) POSITRONIC G14000H000--1265.0
RC15A RECEPTACLE, 15 PIN 205164--1
RC20B RECEPTACLE, 20 PIN POSITRONICS GMCT20M0T0000
RC25A RECEPTACLE, 25 PIN AMP/TYCO 205166--1
RC26B RECEPTACLE, 26 PIN MOONEY 930021--506
RC32A RECEPTACLE, 32 PIN MATRIX SCIENCE M83723/83K2232N
(ALT) POSITRONICS SK2114
RC104A RECEPTACLE, 104 PIN POSITRONICS GMCT104M0000Z0
RL1/RL101A RELAY, BATT. (28V/200A)(OBS) C--H 6041H--202
(ALT) (OBS) C--H 6041H--202A
(ALT (PREFERRED)) KISSLING 26.57.02
RL2/RL102A RELAY, BATT. (14V/200A) C--H 6041H--105A
RL3/RL103A RELAY, AVIONICS MASTER KISSLING 26.64.01
RL4/RL104A RELAY KISSLING 26.64.21
RL5/RL105A RELAY, LDG. (28V/50A) C--H 6041H--220
/BRACKET (2 EA) MOONEY 800375--001
RL6/RL106A RELAY (28V/100A) C--H 6041H--53
RL7/RL107A RELAY, (14V/200A) C--H 6041H--105R
RL8RL108A RELAY MAGNACRAFT W67RCSX--3
RL9/RL109A RELAY KISSLING 28.08.01
RL10/RL110A RELAY P&B VF4--15--H11
SOCKET P&B VCF4--1002
TERMINAL P&B 26A1348C
RS10XX SEE R1/RS101A & ff LISTINGS ON PREVIOUS PAGE SERIES
SA101A ALTERNATOR, STAND--BY B&C BC410--1
HOUSING, CONNECTOR B&C 12--003
TERMINAL (1/4”) B&C 14--026
SA102A CONTROLLER, STBY. ALT. B&C BC203--2
SA103A SW., STD--BY ALT./EMER.BUS MOONEY 880052--531
SB101A C/B, SPEEDBRAKE KLIXON 7277--2--3
SB102A SWITCH, S/B,CNTRL WHL PRECISE FLT 01265
SB103A RELAY, SPEEDBRAKE PRECISE FLT 01384
SB104A DIODE 1N2483/1N5060
(ALT) GE 3720--GE
SB105A MOTOR, SPEEDBRAKE PRECISE FLT 01532
SB106A SWITCH, SPEEDBRAKE PRECISE FLT 01505
SB107A SOLENOID, CLUTCH, SPDBRK PRECISE FLT 01678
SB108A INTERFACE, SPEEDBRAKE MOONEY 800314--501
SPK1/SP101A SPEAKER, ALERT ARCHER 40--1333C
SPK2/SP102A SPEAKER, CABIN ARCHER 40--1325
(ALT) BLAUPUNKT ODX352
SPK3 SONALERT MALLORY SC628
SW1/SW101A SWITCH MICRO 1SE1--T 7
(ALT) SAINT ZS--1009
SW2/SW102A SWITCH, DEF. BLWR. CHERRY E51--50B
SW3/SW103A SWITCH, LIMIT, RUD.TRIM MICRO V3--1
91--20--03
Page 52

SW4/SW104A SWITCH, UP LIMIT, LDG MICRO DT--2R--47
(ALT) SAINT ML--1409
SW5/SW105A SWITCH, DN LIMIT, LDG OTTO P6--24014
(ALT) MICRO 1CH116--6
SW6/SW106A SWITCH, CABIN LTS CARLING RC911--VBBOW
SW7/SW107A SWITCH MOONEY 880013--507
SW8/SW108A SWITCH, LDG C--H 8906K2875
SW9/SW109A SWITCH, MIC--KEY ALCO MPE--106F--C--22--9
(ALT) C--H SA1RV20
SW10/SW110A SWITCH, CHT GRAYHILL 71AD30--02--2--AJN
SW11/SW111A SWITCH, FLAP C--H 8906K4731
SW12/SW112A SWITCH, CABIN LTS(MASTER) CARLING RA911--VBBOW
SW13/SE113A SWITCH (ALT) MICRO 12TW1--10
/CAP, WHITE MICRO 15PA90--8W
(ALT) MS27753--38
SW14/SW114A SWITCH, F/F MEM. C&K 7101K
SW15/SW115A SWITCH, LDG, OVERRIDE NKK DLB2141--W01--L3C/
AT506M/AT503MB
/BUTTON/LOCK RING/LOCK WASHER/HEX NUT (2 EA) (NKK)
(ALT) SWITCH C--H SB1DDX492--2
/LOCK RING C--H 29--761
/LOCK WASHER C--H 16--886
/HEX NUT (2 EA) C--H 15--966--6
(ALT) SWITCH TSCHUDIN 504102
/LENS TSCHUDIN 464115
/BULB TSCHUDIN 590002
SW16/SW116A SWITCH, VAC. HI/LO MOONEY 880012--501
SW17/SW117A SWITCH CARLING TILC64--1S--WHFN
SW18/SW118A SWITCH CARLING RC911--MBBOW
[ALT] EATON 1501--11E
SW19/SW119A SWITCH CARLING TIGM64--1S--WHFN
SW20/SW120A SWITCH MS35058--22
SW21/SW121A SWITCH, MIKE KEY CROUZET 83--450--001
SW22/SW122A SWITCH, SPDBRK CROUZET 83--452--504
SW23/SW123A SWITCH ALCO MPE106F
SW124A SWITCH XXX XXX
SW25/SW125A SWITCH NKK MB2085SB1W01--EA
SW126/SW126ASWITCH EATON 1501--11E
SW127A SWITCH, MASTER WARN OMRON A3BA--7011--1
SW., WITH LENS OMRON A3BA--520R
SW., WITH LEGEND OMRON A3BA--5202
SW., WITH BULB OMRON A3B--028
VC101A CONVERTER, VOLTAGE, 28/14V TRANSELECTRIC SM2412--5
(ALT) TERRA C28--5
VC102A CONVERTER, VOLTAGE, 28/14V TRANSELECTRIC SM2412--5
VR1/VR101A VARISTOR GE V47ZA05
WM101A MASTER WARNING MICRO SWITCH DSK--104--GYR
WM102A MASTER WARNING MICRO SWITCH DSB--11--RRRR--LR2
WS101A ALERT, STALL WARN/LDG WARN IAI 9500309--000
(ALT) IAI 9500519--000
WS103A SWITCH, STALL WARNING MOONEY 800364--509
WT101B ANNUNCIATOR MOONEY 880090--XXX 8
91--20--03
Page 53
NOTES:
SYSTEMS.
2. SHADIN MODEL NO. INTERFACE WITH BENDIX/KING KLN--88 OR KLN90 SERIES.
3. B & D TACH SENSORS P/N 0406--004 IS 9/16” DIAMETER FOR BENDIX MAGNETOS. 0406--003 IS
11/16” DIAMETER FOR SLICK MAGNETOS.
4. PL02C & RC02C MAY BE PURCHASED FROM DEAN AS P/N 7020.
5. SEAL BACK OF POTENTIOMETER WITH DOW CORNING #738 ELECTRICAL SEALANT AFTER WIRES
ARE SOLDERED TO TERMINAL. (MOONEY CODE #225905)
6. USE TO REPLACE ARCHER 40--1325 FOR SPARES.
7. SEAL BACK OF SWITCH WITH DOW CORNING #738 ELECTRICAL SEALANT AFTER WIRES ARE
SOLDERED TO TERMINALS (MOONEY CODE #225905) WHEN USED AS “THROTTLE SWITCH--GEAR
WARNING.”
8. ANNUNCIATOR P/N WILL BE DETERMINED BY OPTIONS INSTALLED, SEE 880090 FOR DETAILS.
9. EACH MS35334--21 OR M2898 (ALLEN BRADLEY) INTERNAL TOOTH LOCKWASHER, REQUIRED
WITH EACH LIGHT, IF NOT SUPPLIED BY SLOAN.
91--20--03
Page 54
91--20--03
Page 55
91--20--03
Page 56
91--30--00 -- ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC LISTING

CAUTION
USE SCHEMATIC APPLICABLE TO SERIAL NUMBER OF THE AIRCRAFT BEING SERVICED.
SCHEMATIC (N0) (REV) A/C SERIAL NUMBER

800310 (M1) (G) 27--0002 Thru 27--0052
800310 (M2) (H) 27--0053 Thru 27--0107
800304 (M1) (E) 2 Sheets 27--0001, 27--0108 Thru 27--0137
800304 (M2) (G) Sheet 1 of 2 27--0138 Thru 27--0141
800304 (M2) (F) Sheet 2 of 2 27--0138 Thru 27--0141
800304 (M3) (G) Sheet 1 of 2 27--0142 Thru 27--0180, 27--0182, 27--0183
800304 (M3) (H) Sheet 2 of 2 27--0142 Thru 27--0180, 27--0182, 27--0183
800304 (M4) (W) 27--0181, 27--0184 Thru 27--0192
800304 (M5) (W) 27--0193 Thru 27--0208
800304 (M6) (X) 27--0209 Thru 27--0215
800304 (M7) (Z) 27--0216 Thru 27--0220
800304 (M8) (Z) 27--0221 Thru 27--TBD
800304 (M9) (AA) 27--0232 Thru 27--0239
800383 (M1) (G) 27--0240 Thru 27--0246
800383 (M2) (H) 27--0247 Thru 27--0257
800383 (M3) (R) 27--0258 Thru 27--0279
800383 (M5) (V) 27--0280 Thru 27--0317, 27--0320 Thru 27--0323
800383 (M6) (V) 27--0324, 27--0325
800383 (M7) (V) 27--0319 ONLY
800413 ((M1) (B) (GX WITHOUT A/C) 27--0318 (OPT), 27--0326 Thru 27--TBA
800413 (M2) (B) (GX WITH OPTIONAL ENGINE DRIVEN A/C) 27--0318 (OPT), 27--326 Thru 27--TBA
91--30--00
Page 57
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
91--30--00
Page 58
ENVELOPE A
ENCLOSED IN THIS ENVELOPE
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS
FOR
M20M
RELATED S&M MANUAL (P/N

SCHEMATIC (NO) (REV) M20M S/N EFFECTIVITY
MAN152) PAGES
800310 (M1) (G) 27--0002 thru 27--0052 91--20--01, pages 8 thru 26
800310 (M2) (H) 27--0053 thru 27--0107 91--20--01, pages 8 thru 26
800304 (M1) (E) 27--0001, 27--0108 thru 27--0137 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
(1 of 2)
800304 (M1) (E) 27--0001, 27--0108 thru 27--0137 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
(2 of 2)
CAUTION
Be certain that the Serial Number of the aircraft being serviced agrees with the Serial Number effectivity
of the schematic being used.
NOTE:
All Optional Equipment Schematics are to be depicted on the System Installation Drawings and will not
be on these Basic Aircraft Schematics.
Page 1
ENVELOPE B
FOR
M20M

MAN152) PAGES
(1 of 2)
800304 (M2) (F) 27--0138 thru 27--0141 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
(2 of 2)
(1 of 2) 27--0182, 27--0183
(2 of 2) 27--0182, 27--0183
800304 (M4) (W) 27--0181, 27--0184 thru 27--0192 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
800304 (M5) (W) 27--0193 thru 27--0208 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
CAUTION
NOTE:
Page 1
ENVELOPE C
FOR
M20M

MAN152) PAGES
800304 (M6) (X) 27--0209 thru 27--0215 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
800304 (M7) (Z) 27--0216 thru 27--0220 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
800304 (M8) (Z) 27--0221 thru 27--0231 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
800304 (M9) (AA) 27--0232 thru 27--0239 91--20--02, pages 27 thru 40
CAUTION
NOTE:
Page 1
ENVELOPE D
FOR
M20M

MAN152) PAGES
800383 (M3) (R) 27--0258 thru 27--0279 91--20--03, pages 41 thru 56
800383 (M5) (V) 27--0280 thru 27--0317, 91--20--03, pages 41 thru 56
27--0320 thru 27--0323
CAUTION
NOTE:
Page 1
ENVELOPE E
FOR
M20M

MAN152) PAGES
800383 (M6) (V) 27--0324, 27--0325 91--20--03, pages 41 thru 56
800383 (M7) (V) 27--0319 Only 91--20--03, pages 41 thru 56
27--0318 (Opt.), 27--0326 thru
800413 (M1) (B) 27--TBA (GX) 91--20--03, pages 41 thru 56
(Without A/C)
27--0318 (Opt.), 27--0326 thru
27--TBA (GX)
800413 (M2) (B) 91--20--03, pages 41 thru 56
(With Optional Engine Driven
A/C)
CAUTION
NOTE:
Page 1
CHAPTER 95
SPECIAL TOOLS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
CHAPTER 95
SPECIAL TOOLS
CHAPTER
SECTION
SUBJECT PAGE DATE
95--Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
95--Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
95--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
95--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
95--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
95--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--06
95-- EFFECTIVITY
Rev Date Date 2005
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
Date 2005 Rev Date

CHAPTER 95
SPECIAL TOOLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
95--00--00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
95-- CONTENTS
Rev Date Date 2005
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
Date 2005 Rev Date

95--00--00 -- SPECIAL TOOLS
CHAPTER/SECTION PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 -- INTRODUCTION -- --
5 -- TIME LIMITS -- --
6 -- DIMENSIONS -- --
7 - LIFTING MAC 010000--000 MAIN JACK POINT1
7--10--00
MAC 010038--001 NOSEGEAR JACKPOINT EX-
TENSION1
8 -- LEVELING -- --
9 -- TOWING MAC 010034--509 TOW BAR, FOLDING1
9--10--00
10 -- PARKING -- --
11 -- PLACARDS -- --
12 -- SERVICING -- --
20 -- STANDARD PRACTICES -- --
21 -- ENVIRONMENT -- GASEOUS DRY NITROGEN
21--51--01
21--52--01 -- R--134A REFRIGERANT, 30 LB.
21--53--01 CYLINDER
21--54--00 -- R--134A CHARGING MANIFOLD
21--55--01 W/GAUGES
-- ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
ESTER RL--500S R--134A REFRIGERANT OIL
EMKARTE RL100S ESTER REFRIGERANT OIL
21 -- ENVIRONMENT LOCTITE 55431 THREAD SEALANT
21--51--01
21--52--01 -- HOSE ADAPTER 1/2” MALE
21--53--01 ACME TO 1/4” FEMALE FLARE
21--54--00 -- VACUUM PUMP (0--30 IN. HG.)
21--55--01
-- THERMOMETER, 0--150oF
-- SCALE, 0--50 LBS.
-- R--134A RECLAIM/RECYCLE
CART
24 -- ELECTRICAL I.A.I 9500324000 CALIBRATION TRANSFER STD.
24--33--00
25 -- EQUIPMENT -- --
27 -- CONTROLS GSE 030003 AILERON/FLAP TRAVEL BOARD
27--10--00
27--30--00 GSE 030004--503 ELEVATOR TRAVEL BOARD
27--40--02 GSE 030035--501 SPRING EXTENDER
GSE 030035--005 SPACER
GSE 030035--503 SPRING EXTENDER
GSE 030005 RUDDER TRAVEL BOARD
27--50--00 GSE 030003 AILERON/FLAP TRAVEL BOARD
95-- 00--00
Page 5
Rev Date Date 2005
28 -- FUEL -- --
30 -- ICE/RAIN -- --
32 -- LANDING GEAR GSE 030007 RIGGING TOOL
32--30--01
32--30--02 GSE 030007--100 RIGGING TOOL
32--40--04 KIT #199--1 CLEVELAND RIVET SET
32--81--00 GSE 030038--501 SHOCK DISC REPLACEMENT
TOOL
GSE 030010 SHOCK DISC REPLACEMENT
TOOL
33 -- LIGHTS -- --
34 -- NAVIGATION AOE--6054 ASSOCIATED GROWLER/ARMA-
34--22--00 TURE TESTER
35 -- OXYGEN MAC 870025--501 OXYGEN RECHARGE HOSE AS-
35--00--01 SEMBLY
37 -- VACUUM -- --
39 -- ELECTRICAL PANELS -- --
51 -- STRUCTURE -- --
52 -- DOORS -- --
53 -- FUSELAGE -- --
55 -- STABILIZERS -- --
56 - WINDOWS -- --
57 -- WINGS -- --
61 -- PROPELLERS -- TEFLON TAPE
61--00--10
71 - POWERPLANT TIO--540--AF1A, AF1B5 TEXTRON-LYCOMING OPERA-
71--00--50 TORS MANUAL
71--00--51 HH--26J OMEGA CALIBRATED THER-
MOMETER
71--00--52 MAC GSE050012--501 TEMPERATURE PROBE AS-
SEMBLY
71--11--00 3M 5421 POLYETHYLENE TAPE
71--20--00 1614 KRYLON HIGH HEAT BLACK
ENAMEL
71--20--01 J--9613--82 ISOLATOR KIT, LORD MFG.
72 -- ENGINE -- --
73 -- ENGINE FUEL FORM 15--338, ECD JAN85--700 PRECISION AIRMOTIVE CORP.
73--40--00 OPERATION & SERVICE MANU-
AL
73--50--00 GSE 030036 TRANSDUCER TEST BOX
74 -- IGNITION -- --
76 - ENGINE CONTROLS -- --
77 -- ENGINE INDICATING 1422(A) TEXTRON--LYCOMING SERVICE
77--20--01 INFORMATION
95--00--00
Page 6
Date 2005 Rev Date
78 -- EXHAUST 1422(A) TEXTRON--LYCOMING SERVICE

79 -- OIL 1014( ) TEXTRON--LYCOMING SERVICE

80 -- STARTING -- --
81 -- TURBINES -- --
91 -- SCHEMATICS -- --
95 -- SPECIAL EQUIPMENT -- --
1 Part of Aircraft Flyaway Kit
95-- 00--00
Page 7
Rev Date Date 2005
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
95--00--00
Page 8
Date 2005 Rev Date

M20M Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M20M Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M20M Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MOONEY

MOONEY AIRPLANE COMPANY, INC.

Copyright 2006 - All Rights Reserved

FILL IN FOR YOUR

REVISION CARD MAILED TO

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

ATTN: Service Parts

INTRODUCTION CHAPTER (System)

DE--ICING/ANTI--ICING (TKS) AVIONICS

CHAPTER -- SECTION -- TITLE

73 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

4--00--00 -- AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS -- MODEL M20M (Normal Category)

4--10--01 -- REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

5--00--00 -- GENERAL 5--00--04 -- ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM

FLARE NUT TORQUE

METRIC BOLTS, SCREWS & NUTS

M20 184/135 420/309 590/435 710/523

TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Untreated Hardware (Black Finish) Friction Coefficient 0.14

TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Electrically Zinc Plated Hardware -- Friction Coefficient 0.125

M22 230/169 530/390 745/549 890/656

TIGHTENING TORQUES -- Electrically Zinc Plated Hardware -- Friction Coefficient 0.125

METRIC CONVERSION FACTOR: One Nm (Newton Meter) = .7375 Foot Pound;

AN/MS STANDARD BOLT, NUTS TORQUE TABLES

7/8--14 2500--3000 1500--1800 3550--4350 2100--2600

Reference: Federal Aviation Agency Advisory Circular No. 43.13--1( )

The 50--hour inspection includes all requirements of 3. Cabin.

5. Wings. B. Inspect engine for evidence of fuel and oil leak-

REFERENCE FIGURE 5--1 FOR LOCATION OF THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS

4 Main Gear Grease Fittings Ω 100

16 Elevator & Rudder Controls:

32 Remote Compass Flux Valve û 100

Ψ MIL--L--3545 Grease (High Temperature)

β MIL--H--5606 Hydraulic Fluid (Red

# -- Graphite & MIL--G--3278 Grease or MIL--G--23827

ψ -- Teflon Spray (Tri--Flow) or Equivalent

Ç -- Stick Lubricant (Door Ease or Equivalent)

ACCESS COVER IDENTIFICATION, LUBRICATION & SERVICE GUIDE

DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

6--00--00 -- DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

SUBJECT STANDARD METRIC/OPT/MISC.

Pitch Angle @ 30 in. Sta. LOW 15.1o (+/--) 0.2o

6--00--02 -- AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

6--00--03 -- AIRCRAFT STATIONS

PRINCIPAL AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

STA STA STA STA STA

210.97 147.75 103.50 59.25 24.50

WING STATION RIBS

STA STA STA STA STA STA STA

FUSELAGE STATIONS R6--2

WING STATION RIBS AND FUSELAGE STATIONS

STA STA STA STA STA

70.0 42.25 4.43 42.25 70.0

EMPENNAGE STATIONS R6--3

LIFTING AND SHORING

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

7--10--00 -- JACKING 7--20--00 -- SLING LIFTING

LEVELING AND WEIGHING